4 
A 

A 

y 

A 

A 

, 

y 

h 

h 

| 

} 
Yj 
Vp 
Yip 
7 4 
A 
UY 
‘, 

i 

Y 

Bd 

/ i, 
/ 4 
Vf 
Yi 
Vf 
Yi 
UY 
4 
Uy 
Wipf 
Uiiis, 
Uy 
UY 
, 
Uy, 
A 
Yi 
Y, 
Vif 
UY, 
Yy 
Yy 
Ys 
t 
UY 
4 

; 4, 
Yyy 
Yj, 
Ys 
Yj 
Ys 
y) 

Y | 

4 

4 

Yy 
y 

/ 

U4y 

y 


= SSSR; SSHSSSAMGMHHSSS'HHHHAOi6iA5HqHHHAHH HA SSS 7 


Uy ; y 
V) i) Wis. iy 
WO A MAL BEL LAL 
Way, h 


JOHN BROOKS HENDERSON 


Division of Molen 
Sectional library 


i, 
fy 1 


ley hE Ota st 
ON THE 
SO Ere EES ULES 


OF THE 


POG OK SY. ~SCOLLA.” 


SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


J/REPORT 


SCORN RESULTS 


VOYAGE OF SY. “SCOTIA” 


DURING THE YEARS 1902, 1908, AND 1904,/ 


UNDER THE LEADERSHIP OF 


Wirt AM Ss: BRUCH;, 


LL.D., F.R.S.E. 


Volume VI.—ZOOLOGY. 


Parts I.-XI.—INVERTEBRATES, by Dr Crimenr Vaney ; James RITCHIE, 
M.A., B.Sc.; Dr E. L. Trovessart; Wiiuiam Evans Hoyts, M.A., D.Sc. ; 


James Cosmo Metvi1t1, M.A., D.Sc., F.L.S.; Ropert Stanpen; J. WILFRID 
Jackson, F.G.S.; Cas. Curiron, M.A., D.Sc., M.B.,C.M., LL.D., F.L.S.; 


Joun Renniz, D.Sce.; ALExaNpDER Rerp, M.A.; James Murray; Dr 
Eucine Penarp; Txomas Scott, LL.D., F.L.S. 


EDINBURGH: 5 
The Scottish OceanograpHtcal BWaboratory, 


SOLD AT 
THE SCOTTISH OCEANOGRAPHICAL LABORATORY ; 
OLIVER & BOYD, EDINBURGH AND LONDON ; 
JAMES MACLEHOSE & SONS, 61 ST VINCENT STREET, GLASGOW. 


WS) 


Price Thirty Shillings in Cloth. 


gull i 
es ce alt ‘Mb a 


7 
@o 


B- 


os ae 
: ar sire an Le 
—  . 
fo Oe see 
738 : 
Aes. 


4 


BEDVEORIAL NOTE. 


Votume VI. is the second of “Scotia” Reports, the publication of which has been 
aided by a Government grant, the first instalment of which was paid on September 15th, 
1911. It is a further contribution to Antarctic and Atlantic Invertebrate Zoology. 
Special thanks are again due to those who ‘have voluntarily given their time and who 
have put their best work into its pages. 

The same principle has been followed as in the case of Volume V., there being no 
distinction of nationality made where a zoologist is recognised as being facile princeps 
in his group. France, Switzerland, New Zealand, Wales, England, and Scotland have 
all taken part in the compilation of Volume VI. The cost of publication has again been 
considerably reduced by the co-operation of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, that has, 
in most cases, passed the communications through its Transactions, and has thus 
helped in bearing the primary cost of setting up type and illustrations. ** Microscopic 
Life” and “Rhizopoda” of Gough Island have been passed through the Proceedings of 
the Royal Physical Society, and the expensive Entomostraca monograph of Dr Scorr has 
been aided by a grant of £56 from the Carnegie Trust of the Universities of Scotland. 
At the head of each monograph the actual dates of publication, communication, and 
issue appear, also the original source of publication. Original pagination is recorded 
at the foot of each page independently of the pagination of the Volume. 

Most of the communications deal with Antarctic and sub-Antarctic species, but 
some deal with tropical and sub-tropical forms collected on the outward and homeward 
passages of the “Scotia.” Some of the communications are supplementary to those 
in Volume V. 


WILLIAM S. BRUCE, 
Editor. 


rere? * Py eiee! " PaaS 


Seer i fs eo ie, 
: BA yt ny 


hs ¥ Tiare eg par peers : 


1 ong iy Sree 
uP td - ol se 
ap ve fae fonts 


fh ry) jew We Fy 


> Unvthenso) nmi 
LL ass 
— 


peu 
7 ms a © a 


o S@easeiestayr }! 
“Ses Bais - 
_ ‘ae oye eae 
on ns oe i 
Le 
eae OM = 


-* 


CONTENTS. 


PART I.— Les Honoruuris&s DE LW) EXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE Ecossaiss. Par CubmEnt 
Vaney, Maitre de conférences de Zoologie & la Faculté des Sciences de Lyon. Présentées 
par M. W.S. Bruce, LL.D. (Avec cing planches) 

(MS. received May 20. 1908. Read June 15, 1908, Issued separately October 15, 1908.) 


PART II.—Suppuemenrary Repeorr on tHe Hyprois or tHE Scorrish Navionan ANTARCTIC 
Expspition. By James Rivcuis, M.A., B.Sc., Natural History Department, The Royal 
Scottish Museum. Communicated by W.S. Bruce, LL.D. 

(MS. received December 8, 1908, Read January 4, 1909. Issued separately May 27, 1909.) 


PART II].—Acariens DE L’Expmepition ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE Ecossatsg. Par le Dr. E.-L. 
TrouEssart, Professeur au Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle de Paris 


(Scottish Oceanographical Laboratory Publications. MS. received April 10, 1912. Issued 
separately July 1, 1912.) 


PART (V.—Tue Cepuanoropa or tHE Scorrish Narionan Anvarctic Expepirion. By 
Winiiam Evans Hovis, M.A., D.Sc., Director of the National Museum of Wales, Cardiff. 
(With Text Illustrations) . 

(MS, received January 8, 1912. Read February 19, 1912. Issued separately May 28, 1912.) 


PART V.—Tue Marine Mouuusca or tHe Scorrish Narionan Anrarcric Exprpirion. by 
James Cosmo Menvint, M.A., D.Sc., F.L.S., and Rospert Sranven, Assistant Keeper, 
Manchester Museum. Communicated by Dr W.S. Brucs, (With One Plate) 


(MS. received April 24, 1912. Read June 3, 1912. Issued separately August 26, 1912.) 


PART VI.—Tue Bracuioropa or THE ScorrisH Nationan Antarctic Exprpition. By 
J. Witrrm Jackson, F.G.S., Assistant Keeper, Manchester Museum. Communicated by 
Dr W.S. Bruce. (With Two Plates) 
(MS. received May 6, 1912. Read June 17,1912. Issued separately August 28, 1912.) 


PART VII.—Tue Ampuiropa or THE ScorrisH Navionan Anvarctic Expepition. by CHARLES 
Curon, M.A., D.Sc. (N.Z.), M.B., C.M. (Edin.), Hon. LL.D, (Aberd.), F.L.8., Professor 
of Biology, Canterbury College, New Zealand. Communicated by Dr W.S. Bruce, (With 
Two Plates) 

(MS. received March 30, 1912. Read June 17, 1912. Issued separately September 21, 1912.) 


PART VIII.—Tue Crsropa or tHE ScorrisH Nationan Antarctic Exprpition. By Joun 
Reynig, D.Sc., and Augexanpur Ruip, M.A., University of Aberdeen, (With Two Plates) 


(MS. received May 6, 1912. Read June 17, 1912. Issued separately September 6, 1912.) 


PAGES 


39-80 


81-86 


87-102 


103-140 


141-168 


169-238 


239-256 


vill CONTENTS. 


PART IX.—“Scorra” Coxiections.—Nore on Microscopic Lire on Goucu IsLanp, SouTH 
Atuantic OckAN. by James Murray. Communicated by Wituiam Evans, F.R.S.E. 


(Read at the Royal Physical Society November 25, 1907. Issued separately March 23, 1912.) 


PART X.— “Scoria” Connections.—FurTHEer Note on Microscoric Lire on Govcu ISLAND, 
SourH Ariantic OckaN—Ruizoropa. By Dr Euaine Penarp, Geneva. Communicated 
by Wiuuram Evans, F.R.S.E. 


(Read at the Royal Physical Society December 18, 1911. MS. received January 24, 1912. Issued 
Separately March 23, 1912.) 


PART XI—Tue Enromosrraca or THE ScortisH Nationan Anvarcric ExpEpirion. By 
Tuomas Scort, LL.D., F.L.S. Communicated by Dr J. H. Asaworto. (With 


Fourteen Plates) 


(MS. received January 24, 1912. Read February 19, 1912. Issued separately November 15, 1912.) 


PAGES 


271-354 


INVERTEBRATES: [.—XI. 


Piel: 
FROME Oe Eh Waly, ANS: 


I.—THE HOLOTHURIANS OF THE SCOTTISH 
NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


By CLEMENT VANEY, 


Professor of Zoology at the Faculty of Sciences, Lyon. 


(WITH FIVE PLATES.) 


hey GU a ae ee) 
uneil Ae i MY, NE oy > 


aA sf sane re 
i ei ee Ae 


ny 


“AR, y ik ave ert) i 


I.—Les Holothuries de 1’Expédition Antarctique Nationale Ecossaise. Par Clément 
Vaney, Maitre de conférences de Zoologie 4 la Faculté des Sciences de Lyon. 
Présentées par M. W. 8. Brucr, LL.D. (Avec cing planches.) 


(MS. received May 20,1908. Read June 15,1908. Issued separately October 15, 1908.) 


La Scotia a rapporté de son expédition au pdle sud une trés importante collection 
d’Holothuries ; nous remercions bien vivement M. W. 8. Bruce de lhonneur qu’il nous 
a fait en nous en confiant l'étude. 

Cette collection ne renferme pas moins de trente-quatre espéces, dont vinet et une, 
cest a dire pres des deux tiers, sont nouvelles. Cette proportion aurait été probable- 
ment plus grande, mais par suite de l’action de quelques agents conservateurs employés 
(formaldéhyde et acide acétique glacial) certains échantillons sont indéterminables : 
leurs corpuscules calcaires ayant été complétement dissous par les liquides acides. Pour 
la méme raison nous avons décrit quelques nouvelles especes sans pouvoir fournir dans 
la diagnose les caracteres de leurs spicules. Mais la majeure partie des exemplaires et 
surtout ceux de grandes profondeurs sont en bon état et tres bien préparés. 

Cette collection de l’expédition écossaise est actuellement une des plus importantes 
au point de vue des Holothuries de grandes profondeurs des mers antarctiques. Elle 
renferme deux espéeces de Synallactidés et onze especes d’Elasipodes, comprenant quatre 
Klpiidés et sept Psychropotidés, parmi lesquelles dix sont nouvelles. 

La Scotca a recueilli un grand nombre de Cucumaridés, dont dix especes nouvelles 
proviennent en majeure partie des Oreades du Sud. Nous avons déja eu l'occasion * de 
signaler deux nouvelles Thyone de ces mémes iles. Ces faits prouvent la grande variété 
de faune de cette région. 

Certaines de ces nouvelles especes de Cucumariidés: le Psolidiwm Coatsi et les 
Cucumaria psolidiformis et C conspicua, constituent de curieux termes de transition 
entre les genres Cucwmaria et Psolidium. Les deux Cucumaria, qui appartiennent a 
l’'ancien genre Semperia, possedent de gros pédicelles disposés suivant des rangées 
radiales et de nombreux petits pédicelles disséminés sur tout le corps; leur trivium 
présente une ébauche de sole ventrale souvent mal délimitée. Ce dernier caractére les 
rapproche des Psolidium convergens (Hérouard), Ps. panamense Ludwig et Ps. 
ornatum (K. Perrier), dont la sole n’est pas limitée latéralement. Une autre forme de 
Cucumaria, la CL armata, présente de grandes affinités avee le genre Colochirus. 

L’expédition antarctique nationale écossaise a retrouvé les Cucumaria antarctica, 
C. grandis et C. lateralis, rapportées pour la premiére fois par l’expédition du 

* “Deux nouvelles Thyone des Orcades du Sud (Thyone Scotia et Thyone turricatus),” Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris, 
1906, p. 400. 


(REPRINTED FROM THE TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF EDINBURGH, VOL. XLVI., PP. 405-441.) 


2 M. 


CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


Dr CHarcor; ces nouveaux exemplaires nous ont permis de compléter nos descriptions 


antérieures. 


A son retour, la Scotva a recueilli au cap de Bonne Espérance une nouvelle espece de 


Thyone, la T. articulata, et les Cucumaria discolor et C. imsolens de THEEL. 


Nous indiquons dans le tableau suivant la répartition des différentes espéces 
d’Holothuries rapportées par la Scotia.* 


SYNALLACTIDES — 
Pseudostichopus villosus, Théel 


Synallactes Robertsoni, nov. sp. 


ELeuprs— 


Scotoplanes globosa, Théel 
Peniagone Mossmani, nov. sp. 
aA Piriei, nov. sp. 

x Wiltoni, nov. sp. 


PsycHROPOTIDES— 
Benthodytes spuma, nov. sp. 
a Brownt, nov. sp. 
5 recta, NOV. sp. 
Euphronides Scotix, nov. sp. . 
Psychropotes longicauda, 
antarctica, nov. var. 


Psychropotes laticauda, nov. sj. 


y Brucet, nov. sp. . 


| CucuMARIIDES— 


Psolus antareticus (Philippi) . 
Psolidium convergens (Hérouard) 


Psolidium (Cucumaria) Coatst, nov. 


Thyone articulata, nov. sp. 
Cucumaria antaretica, Vaney . 


crocea (Lesson) 


| ” 


A discolor, Théel 
- erandis, Vaney 

a lateralis, Vaney 
5 levigata, Verrill 
é leonina, Semper 
: insolens, Théel 

Cucumaria analis, nov. sp. 

5 urmatda, WOV. sp. 
a aspera, Nov. sp. 
* conspicud, NOV. sp. 
5 croceoida, Nov. sp. 
i perfida, nov. sp. 
3 periprocta, Nov. sp. 
psolidiformis, nov. sp. 
- secunda, nov. sp. . 


Théel, 


var. 


+ | 
| 


sp. | 


Lat. 8. Long. W. Profondeur. 
er : Brasses. 
69 33 1) is) 2620 
| 67 33 36 35 2500 
66 40 40 35 2425 
39 48 2) 33 iB. 2645 
69 33 159 2620 
66 40 40 35 2425 
69 33 15 19 2620 
69 33 15-19 2620 
48 06 10 05 1742 
67 39 36 10 2500 
62 10 41 20 1775 
71 22 16 34 1410 
67 39 36 10 2500 
\{ 39 48 2 33 i 2645 
67 33 36 35 2500 
Port Stanley, Iles Falkland . 5a 10 
Baie de la Scotia . ; : : 9410 
Baie de Saldanha, Afrique du Sud 9 4 10 
Baie de la Scotia, Oreades du Sud . 9a 10 
{ Port Stanley, Iles Falkland . : 3a 4 
Ollaiase Seale We 2103 
Baie de Saldanha, Afrique du Sud rivage 
Baie de la Scotia, Oreades du Sud. 9410 
% 5 9a 10 
Bane de Burdwood : j 56 
Port Stanley, Iles Falkland . ih 
Baie de Saldanha, Afrique du Sud 
Baie Jessie, Orcades du Sud. don 
Port William, Iles Falkland . 6 
Baie de la Scotia, Oreades du Sud . 10 
si 5 9a 10 
Bane de Burdwood ; ; 56 
Baie de la Scotia, Oreades du Sud . 9110 
» 5 10 
+9 3 9410 


* Les espéces nouvelles sont en italiques. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS, VOL, XLVL, 406.) 


DE L’'EXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAISE, 3 


ASPIDOCHIROTES. 


SYNALLACTIDES. 


PsguposricHopus, Théel. 


Pseudostichopus villosus, Vhéel. 


Station 420, 21 Mars 1904; lat. S. 69° 33’, long. W. 15° 19’; profondeur 2620 
brasses. Un exemplaire. 

Station 291, 7 Mars 1903; lat. S. 67° 33’, long. W. 36° 35’; profondeur 2500 
brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Cette espéce parait avoir une répartition géographique assez grande: le Challenger 
l’a recueillie en une dizaine de stations comprises entre 62° 26’ et 38° 6’ de latitude sud 
et 2° 56’ et 35° 22’ de latitude nord, 4 des profondeurs variant de 1375 a 2900 
brasses. THEEL signale simplement que les exemplaires de |’hémisphére nord different 
peut-étre un peu de ceux de |’hémisphére sud par les corpuscules calcaires et la forme des 
pédicelles. Nos exemplaires sont franchement antarctiques, puisqu’ils ont été recueillis 
entre 67 et 69° 33’ de latitude sud; par suite, il est intéressant d’en donner une 
description assez complete pour permettre ultérieurement les comparaisons avec les 
échantillons septentrionaux. 

Leur corps est ovale, un peu aplati dorso-ventralement ; leur longueur est de 100 
millimetres et leur plus grande largeur, située vers le milieu du corps, atteint 50 milli- 
métres. La bouche est ventrale et est & 10 millimétres du bord antérieur. L’anus est 
ventral mais presque terminal ; il est encadré par les deux lobes latéraux, caractéristiques 
du genre Pseudostichopus, de forme hémisphérique et ayant 5 4 6 millimetres de 
diametre. 

Les téguments sont souples et minces ; leur coloration est marron, les cotés et les 
extrémités du corps sont de teinte plus foneée que les faces dorsale et ventrale. Les 
pédicelles ont leur extrémité brunatre, ils sont tres abondants et disséminés irréguliére- 
ment sur les parties latérales ducorps. Sur la face ventrale, ces appendices forment une 
double série de pointillés ; ils s’étendent, de part et d’autre de la ligne médiane, sur les 
deux quarts moyens du corps et laissent complétement nu le radius médian ventral. Les 
appendices de la face dorsale sont difficiles 4 observer, leur répartition parait irréguliere. 

Les corpuscules caleaires ont été complétement dissous par le liquide conservateur. 

Lintérieur des téguments est blanchatre ; les bandes musculaires longitudinales sont 
marron clair, elles ont toutes la méme importance, et atteignent 5 4 6 millimétres de 
largeur. L’anneau caleaire est composé de dix pitces: les radiales sont massives, elles 
ont 5 millimétres de longueur et les interradiales, en forme de chevron, ont 3 4 4 milli- 
métres. La vésicule de Poli unique est transparente et mesure 10 a 12 millimétres de 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS,, VOL, XLVI, 407.) 


4 M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


longueur. Le tube digestif a 10-12 millimétres de diamétre et présente un estomac 
différencié de 30 millimétres de longueur. 

Vers le milieu du corps sont disposées deux grappes de follicules ovariens jaunitres, 
embrassant plus ou moins le tube digestif; l’oviducte est long et mince. 

Les organes arborescents sont brunatres avee des ramifications brun foncé; ils 
affectent la forme d'un Y dont la branche commune a 15 millimétres de longueur et les 
branches latérales 35 et 45 millimetres. 


SYNALLACTES, Ludwig. 
Synallactes Robertsoni, nov. sp. (Pl. III. fig. 34, 35 et 36.) 
Station 295, 10 Mars 1908; lat. 8S. 66° 40’, long. W. 40° 35’. Un exemplaire. 


L’état de conservation de cet exemplaire laisse beaucoup 4 désirer: il est en partie 
pelé et éviscéré; cependant malgré ces défectuosités nous pouvons en fournir une 
diagnose assez compléte. 

L’échantillon est de couleur blane jaundtre avec des pédicelles de teinte plus foncée. 
Son corps est aplati dorso-ventralement ; sa longueur est de 75 millimétres et sa largeur 
atteint 15 218 millimetres. L’extrémité postérieure est légerement atténuée et arrondie. 
La bouche et l’anus sont franchement terminaux. 

La face ventrale est légerement convexe; elle présente suivant ses radius des 
pédicelles brunatres. Sur les radius latéro-ventraux, nous trouvons une seule rangée 
composée de trente 4 quarante pédicelles, tres rapprochés les uns des autres vers le 
région anale mais assez écartés dans la région antérieure. On constate en quelques 
points l’indication d’une double rangée. Suivant le radius médian, on trouve sur le 
quart postérieur une dizaine de pédicelles, irrégulierement disposés sur deux rangées ; 
les deux quarts médians paraissent dépourvus de pédicelles, mais sur le quart antérieur 
une dizaine de ces appendices sont disposés en une double rangée. 

La face dorsale est en majeure partie pelée, mais dans les régions intactes on 
distingue des papilles peu élevées, & base élargie, réparties uniformément sur toute la 
face dorsale et au nombre d'une huitaine dans le sens de la largeur. 

La couronne tentaculaire est plus ou moins recouverte par un repli péribuccal; elle 
comprend seize tentacules se terminant chacun par un disque muni sur son pourtour de 
six 4 huit digitations repliées sur elles-mémes. 

Les corpuscules caleaires des téguments sont constitués par des tourelles a base 
tétraradiée (fig. 34 et 35), dont chacune des branches a son extrémité distale aplatie, 
élargie et pereée d'une grande ouverture centrale accompagnée d'une ou deux perforations 
plus petites. Au centre de la base s’éléve une tige simple termin¢e en pointe et offrant 
quelques piquants disséminés sur toute sa longueur. 

La paroi des pédieelles renferme des batonnets (fig. 36) 2 extrémités bifides portant 
latéralement quelques piquants. 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 408.) 


DE LVEXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAISE. 5 


Les muscles longitudinaux sont jaundtres; ils ont deux millimetres de largeur. 
L’organisation interne semble indiquer l’existence d’une bordure latérale. 

La vésicule de Poli unique a 6 millimetres de longueur et possede des parois 
transparentes. Les organes génitaux sont composés d’un faisceau d'une vingtaine de 
tubes simples, jaunatres, qui atteignent 10 4 15 millimetres de longueur. 

Dans le méme flacon nous trouvons un tube digestif muni 4 l’une de ses extrémités de 
deux organes arborescents, presque égaux, mesurant 20 millimetres de longueur et 
offrant chacun deux séries longitudinales de coecums latéraux. I] est tres probable que 
ces visceres sont ceux de cette Synallactidé. 

Rapports et Différences.—L’ensemble de lorganisation et la forme des corpuscules 
calcaires nous améenent 4 considérer cet échantillon comme appartenant au genre 
Synallactes. 

Les Synallactidés recueillies dans la région antarctique comprennent actuellement les 
Pseudostichopus mollis Théel et Ps. villosus Théel, les Mesothuria bifurcata Hérouard, 
M. magellani (Ludwig) et WM. Thomsoni (Théel), les Synallactes Challengert (Théel) et 
S. Carthage: Vaney, le Bathyplotes Moseleyi (Théel). 

Le Synallactes Robertsont et le Synallactes Challengeri (Théel) offrent entre eux 
quelques points communs par suite de la répartition des pédicelles et de la forme des 
corpuscules ; mais dans notre espece les rangées de pédicelles médians ventraux ne sont 
pas continues et la tige centrale des corpuscules est ¢lancée et présente une série de 
piquants sur toute sa longueur. 


ELPIDIIDES, 
ScoropLangs, Théel. 


Scotoplanes globosa, Théel. (PI. LIL. fig. 25, 26, 27 et 28.) 


(2? Synonyme: Se. Murray, Théel. 


Station 468, 29 Avril 1904; lat. S. 39 48’, long. E. 2° 33’; profondeur 2645 brasses. 
Quatre exemplaires. 


Ces exemplaires sont trés bien étalés et conservés, quoiquune grande partie des 
corpuscules calcaires aient été dissous par le liquide conservateur (formol 4 25%). Les 
t¢guments sont minces et transparents, les tentacules et les appendices sont légerement 
rosés. a longueur du corps est comprise entre 70 et 120 millimétres et la largeur 
oscille entre 30 et 55 millimétres; ces échantillons sont done de plus petite taille que 
ceux rapportés par le Challenger. Comme dans le type déerit par THEEL on trouve, sur 
la face dorsale, trois paires de papilles dont les deux premiéres sont trés développées 
et dissymétriques et la troisiéme, trés postérieure, est rudimentaire. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVI, 409.) 


6 M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


Ces échantillons ne présentent que six pédicelles sur chaque radius latéro-ventral : 
le deuxieme, le troisiéme et quelquefois le quatriéme sont les plus grands, les cinquieme 
et sixiéme sont les plus petits. Ce nombre invariable de six paires de pédicelles latéro- 
ventraux sépare la plupart de nos exemplaires de l’espéce type, qui présente toujours 
sept paires de ces appendices. Hn nous basant sur cette différence nous pensions tout 
dabord que les exemplaires de la Scotia représentaient les types d’une nouvelle variété 
de la Scotoplanes globosa Théel, a laquelle nous aurions donné le nom de sexpedata. 
La création de cette nouvelle variété pouvait aussi étre basée sur ce que les corpuscules 
caleaires sont de plus petite taille que ceux déerits par THieL. Les téguments renferment 
des corpuscules en C (fig. 27) de 0°08 millimétres, des corpuseules mamelonnés (fig. 28) 
et des batonnets tres épineux dont les plus grands (fig. 25) atteignent 0°40 millimétres 
de longueur, tandis que les petits (fig. 26), généralement moins épineux, n’ont que 0°15 
millimetres. THEEL avait observé dans sa Sc. globosa des corpuseules en C de 0°16 
millimetres et des bitonnets épineux de 0°92 millimétres, c'est 4 dire des corpuscules qui 
sont deux fois plus grands que ceux que nous trouvons dans nos échantillons. Les 
tentacules de nos exemplaires offrent aussi quelques particularités: leur disque terminal 
a une dizaine de prolongements périphériques et comme dans |’espece type deux sont 
plus importants, mais leur surface externe présente une série de papilles. 

Tout cet ensemble de caractéres différentiels nous autorisaient 4 créer la variété sea- 
pedata de la Sc. globosa, mais un exemplaire, qui nous a été communiqué récemment, a 
modifié notre opinion. Cet échantillon est dissymétrique; il présente sur la face 
ventrale sept pédicelles 4 droite et six seulement a gauche ; il sert d’intermédiaire entre 
les types du Challenger et la plupart des exemplaires de la Scotia. II est done inutile 
d'établir une variété spéciale pour les exemplaires 4 six paires de pédicelles. Nous en 
déduisons simplement que la Sc. globosa peut subir des réductions dans le nombre de 
ses pédicelles : tous les échantillons du Challenger ont sept paires de ces appendices, 
presque tous ceux de la Scotia n’en ont que six paires. Il est trés probable que la Se. 
Murray, établie par ‘THEEL sur un unique exemplaire, correspond a une variété de la 
Se. globosa qui n’aurait que cinq paires de pédicelles, car ses corpuscules calcaires sont 
presque semblables 4 ceux de la Sc. globosa. 

Les nombreux exemplaires de la Sc. globosa rapportés par le Challenger avaient été 
recueillis: les uns 4 1950 brasses de profondeur par 53° 55’ de lat. S. et 108° 35’ 
de long. E., les autres 4 2160 brasses par 33° 31’ de lat. S. et 74° 43’ de long. W. 
Les échantillons de la Scotia ont été recueillis 4 une profondeur plus considérable et a 
une latitude intermédiaire. Le type de la Sc. Murrayi provenait de 60° 52’ lat. S. et 
de 1260 brasses de profondeur. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI, 410.) 


DE L’EXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE BCOSSAISE. 7 


Pentacone, Théel. 


Peniagone Mossmani, nov. sp. (Pl. I. fienlOrehihie BUT. fewt'9); 
Pl. ILI. fig. 32 et 33.) 


Station 420, 21 Mars 1904; lat. 8. 697733. lomo, We | hae soe profondeur 2620 
brasses. Un exemplaire. 


L’exemplaire est en mauvais état de conservation : il est pelé et recouvert de vase. 
Son corps, ovale et allongé, mesure 70 millimétres de longueur et 25 millimétres de 
plus grande largeur vers le tiers antérieur. La face dorsale est légtrement convexe ; la 
face ventrale (fig. 10) est aplatie et présente, en avant, un disque buccal saillant de 8 a 
9 millimetres de diamétre. Au centre de ce disque se trouve l’ouverture buccale, qui est 
probablement entourée d'une dizaine de tentacules. Une rangée de pédicelles, bien visible 
sur le cdté gauche, est disposée de chaque coté de la sole ventrale. La premiere paire 
de ces appendices est 4 20 millimétres du bord antérieur, la deuxiéme a 15 millimétres 
de la premiére ; quant aux autres, au nombre de cing 4 six, ils sont plus petits et tres 
rapprochés les uns des autres; ils semblent former par leur ensemble une bordure 
périanale. Sur la face dorsale (fig. 11) le disque buccal est surmonté d'un capuchon ou 
voile étalé en éventail et s'insérant 4 10 millimétres du disque suivant toute la largeur 
du corps. Ce capuchon présente (fig. 19) trois paires de pointes latérales; sa plus 
grande hauteur est de 8 millimetres. Les téguments dorsaux ¢tant en partie enlevés, 
nous n’avons pu distinguer s'il y avait d'autres appendices. 

Les corpuscules caleaires ont été altérés par la formaldéhyde, leurs contours sont 
devenus crénelés. Ces corpuscules sont des croix 4 quatre branches (fig. 32 et 33) plus 
ou moins incurvées; vers le centre de la croix et A la base de deux branches opposées, 
se trouvent deux courts mamelons coniques. La plupart de ces corpuscules cruciformes 
paraissent lisses, pourtant quelques-uns offrent quelques denticulations 4 l’extrémité des 
bras. Il existe deux vésicules de Poli inégales ayant l'une 7 et l'autre 4 millimétres de 
longueur. Les organes génitaux sont formés de deux glandes en grappe de couleur 
brunatre. 

Rapports et Différences.—La Peniagone Mossmani se rapproche de la Kolga fureata 
Hérouard (Periamma furcatum Capres R. Perrier) provenant des Acores. Ces deux 
especes ont un voile formé de trois paires de papilles, mais chez l'espéce d’Herovarp elles 
sont plus nettement s¢parées les unes des autres que dans notre espéce et le voile ne 
s’étend pas sur toute la largeur du corps. Les corpuscules caleaires sont différents dans 
les deux espéces. 

La seule forme d’HIpiidé antarctique qui puisse étre comparée avec notre Peniagone 
Mossmani est la Peniagone Challengeri Théel recueillie 4 50° 1’ de latitude sud et a 
1800 brasses de profondeur ; mais cette espéce est plus allongée que notre Peniagone et 
son voile est formé par la coalescence d’une paire de papilles dorsales; d’ailleurs ses 
corpuscules caleaires sont épineux et bien différents de ceux de notre espece. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 411.) 


M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


v2) 


Peniagone Piet, noy. sp. (Pl. I. fig. 4 et 5.) 


Station 295, 10 Mars 1908; lat. S. 66° 40’, long. W. 40° 35’; profondeur 2425 


brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Cet exemplaire est bien épanoui, mais malheureusement, par suite de l'action de la 
formaldéhyde, tous les corpuscules caleaires ont été dissous. 

Le corps est ovale et mesure 100 millimétres de longueur; sa plus grande largeur 
se trouve au niveau du tiers postérieur et atteint 40 4 45 millimetres. La face ventrale 
(fig. 4) est aplatie et présente en avant la bouche entourée de dix tentacules placés sur 
un cercle de 15 millimétres de diamétre. L’anus est nettement terminal. A 40 milli- 
metres en arriére de l’ouverture buecale commencent les rangées latéro-ventrales de 
pédicelles ; celles-ci sont disposées en un fer a cheval dont chaque branche se compose 
dune seule série de huit pédicelles. La taille de ces appendices va en décroissant d’avant 
en arriere : les antérieurs ont 5 millimetres de longueur, les pédicelles de la derniére paire 
sont de petite taille et réunis l'un a l'autre par une sorte de créte transversale. La 
distance entre les appendices latéro-ventraux d'une méme rangée va aussi en diminuant 
darriére en avant: les antérieurs sont a 10 millimetres les uns des autres, les postérieurs 
4 5 millimétres seulement. 

La face dorsale (fig. 5) est fortement convexe et la plus grande hauteur du corps 
atteint 40 millimétres. Sur le cdté dorsal et 4 15 millimetres du bord antérieur 
émerge un gros appendice conique dirigé darriére en avant et ayant 20 millimétres 
de longueur; il est légerement aplati dans le sens frontal; sa base a 15 millimetres 
de largeur et 10 millimetres d’épaisseur. Ce gros appendice dorsal se termine en 
une pointe bifide et A une petite distance de son sommet se trouve de chaque cdté 
une petite papille latérale: il semble é¢tre formé par la fusion de quatre papilles 
dorsales. A 20 millimétres en arri¢re de ce gros appendice se trouve, sur la face 
dorsale, une paire de petites papilles de 3 4 4 millimétres de longueur et distantes 
l'une de l'autre de 10 millimetres. 

Les tentacules, au nombre de dix, sont composés chacun d’un pédoncule de 3 milli- 
métres de longueur et de 4 millimetres de diamétre terminé par un disque plus ou moins 
convexe de 5 millimétres de diamétre et dont la surface externe est recouverte de nom- 
breuses petites papilles. 

La vésicule de Poli, unique, est brunatre et a 20 millimetres de longueur. La 
glande génitale est située 4 droite; elle est en grappe compacte et a une longueur de 
25 millimetres. 

Rapports et Différences.—La Peniagone Pirie peut étre rapprochée de la Penragone 
vitrea Théel, recueillie par le Challenger par 42° 48’ de latitude sud et 4 1450 brasses de 
profondeur, et de la P. intermedia Ludwig provenant de locéan Pacifique. Toutes ces 
especes ont un voile dorsal avec deux lobes médians saillants, mais notre Peniagone a la 
bouche moins infléchie vers la face ventrale que chez les deux autres formes. D ailleurs 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 412.) 


DE L’'EXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAISE. 9 


la forme subantarctique, P. vitrea, sen distingue par la présence de deux paires de 
papilles dorsales et d’une collerette périanale. 

Comme autre Peniagone subantarctique pouvant étre comparée a la P. Pirie’, nous 
avons la P. purpurea Théel, recueillie par le Challenger par 46° 16’ et 53° 55’ de latitude 
sud, 4 une profondeur de 1950 brasses. Cette forme de THhex est de petite taille et 
présente un voile dorsal composé par deux appendices tres gréles et séparés l'un de J’autre 
sur une grande partie de leur longueur. 

Nous devons aussi comparer la P. Piriei avec la Scotoplanes robusta THEEL, recueillie 
par le Challenger par 53° 55’ de latitude sud et 4 1950 brasses de profondeur. Cette 
Scotoplanes est une Hlpiidé de grande taille, mesurant 133 millimétres de longueur et 
dont les pédicelles latéro-ventraux, au nombre de onze paires, ont une disposition assez 
semblable 4 celle observée dans notre espéce ; mais son voile dorsal est bien différent de 
celui de la Peniagone Piriei: il est composé par deux paires de papilles de taille presque 
identiques et ayant 10 millimétres de loneueur. 


Pemagone Wilton, nov. sp. (PI. L. fig. 6 et 7; Pl. III. fig. 29, 30 et 31.) 


Station 420,21 Mars 1904; lat. 8. 69° 33’, long. W. 15° 19’; profondeur 2620 
brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Cet échantillon est en partie pelé; les téguments blane grisitre se détachent en 
certains points et sont recouverts de vase sur presque toute leur surface. 

Le corps (fig. 6) est obovale, il mesure 85 millimetres de long et sa plus grande 
largeur, qui se trouve vers le quart antérieur, atteint 40 millimétres. La face ventrale 
est aplatie et la face dorsale légerement bombée. L’extrémité postérieure du corps est 
arrondie; l’extrémité antérieure présente une région buccale de 10 millimetres de diamétre, 
assez bien séparée du reste du corps et portant sur sa face ventrale l’ouverture buccale. 

Les pédicelles ne semblent pas avoir été conservés dans leur intégrité: sur la face 
ventrale, nous en trouvons un plus grand nombre a droite qu’a gauche. A droite, ces 
appendices, au nombre de quatre, sont disposés en une rangée le long du radius latéro- 
ventral ; le premier est 4 20 millimetres de la région buceale, le deuxieme a 12 
millimétres du premier, le troisieme et le quatri¢éme 4 20 millimetres des appendices les 
précédant immédiatement. Chacun de ces appendices a 8 4 10 millimétres de longueur 
et 4 4 5 millimetres de diametre. Sur le c6té gauche, nous ne trouvons plus que deux 
pédicelles correspondant aux appendices moyens du cété droit. L’anus, qui est terminal 
mais légerement dorsal, parait bordé par une petite collerette. 

Nous observons une semblable dissymétrie sur la face dorsale (fig. 7). On trouve 
tout d’abord en avant et sur la région buccale une sorte de petit capuchon triangulaire 
de 5 millimetres de hauteur en mauvais état de conservation. A 10 millimetres en 
arriere Se présente une paire de gros appendices coniques, trés rapprochés l'un de l'autre 
et mesurant 20 millimetres de longueur et 7 4 8 millimétres de diamétre a la base. 


(RGY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 413.) 


LO M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


A 10 millimétres en arriére de cette paire d’appendices dorsaux et un peu sur le cété 
gauche, on distingue une unique papille de 10 millimétres de longueur et de 3 milli- 
metres de diamétre. 

La couronne tentaculaire parait se composer d’une dizaine de tentacules qui ont tous 
disparus. 

Les téguments renferment des bitonnets épineux sur toute leur surface (fig. 31) et 
des corpuscules étoilés 4 quatre branches. Tantét ceux-ci ont des bras simples recouverts 
de nombreux piquants (fig. 30), tant6t les branches sont surmontées vers leur base d’un 
petit mamelon épineux (fig. 29). 

Les organes génitaux constituent deux glandes en grappe a parois transparentes. 

Rapports et Différences.—Il est dithcile de préciser la place générique de cette 
nouvelle Elpiidé ; mais par suite de la présence d'un voile trés réduit et de corpuscules 
tétraradiés nous pouvons la considérer comme appartenant au genre Peniagone. 

Nous devons comparer cette P. Wailtont a la Kolga nana Théel. Le Challenger 
avait recueilli cette derniére espéce, soit dans les régions arctiques soit dans les régions 
antarctiques, mais il est trés probable que la forme antarctique est simplement analogue 
a celle des régions arctiques ; d’ailleurs Tuer indique qu'elle n’était représentée que par 
un seul individu incomplet recueilli 4 60° 52’ de latitude sud et 4 1260 brasses de 
profondeur. Sa longueur est de 28 millimetres et ses pédicelles latéro-ventraux sont au 
nombre de neuf paires: ils sont done plus nombreux que dans notre espece. La face 
dorsale de la A. nana présente quatre papilles disposées en une rangée transversale, 
les médianes étant les plus larges. Les corpuscules caleaires sont aussi différents dans 
les deux especes. 


PSYCHROPOTIDES. 
Brentuopytes, Théel. 
Benthodytes spuma, nov. sp. (PI. I. fig. 1; PL Il. fig. 20.) 


Station 420, 21 Mars 1904; lat. S. 69° 33’, long. W. 15° 19’; profondeur 2620 
brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Cet unique échantillon a un aspect gélatineux ; il nous a rappelé a ce point de vue 
le Pelopatides gelatinosus (Walsh). La coloration est grisatre sur la face dorsale et d’un 
noir violacé sur la face ventrale. Le corps est légérement aplati sur la face ventrale, 
mais le radius médian est assez saillant, surtout dans sa région moyenne; l’aplatisse- 
ment est bien marqué dans les régions antérieure et postérieure du corps. La face dorsale 
est un peu convexe ; les téguments ont un aspect plus gélatineux dans cette région que 
dans les autres parties de animal. Cet exemplaire mesure 155 millimetres de longueur 
et 45 millimétres de plus grande largeur. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVI. 414.) 


DE L'EXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSATSE. iil 


L’anus est terminal; la bouche est nettement ventrale, et est située 4 20 millimetres 
du bord antérieur. Elle est entourée de seize tentacules noir violacé munis de courts 
pédoncules ; le disque terminal de ces tentacules a 4 millimetres de diamétre, il est 
convexe et présente de nombreuses petites papilles périphériques. 

La région antérieure du corps (fig. 1) offre une collerette péribuccale de 30 milli- 
métres de largeur, composée d’une quarantaine de petites papilles en forme de festons a 
bords arrondis. Entre la collerette péribuccale et le cercle tentaculaire, les téguments 
de la face ventrale sont recouverts de nombreuses petites verrucosités ou plissements. 
A la collerette buccale, fait suite, de chaque c6té du corps, une rangée longitudinale de 
petits appendices noir violacé, nettement séparés les uns des autres et ne constituant 
pas par leur ensemble de bordure latérale. On retrouve de semblables petites papilles 
noir violacé disséminées sans ordre sur toute la face dorsale (fig. 20). Dans la région 
postérieure, on distingue une collerette périanale, s’arrétant au niveau de l’anus et formée 
dun certain nombre de festons plus ou moins turgescents. 

A 15 millimétres en arriére de la bouche commencent les rangées de pédicelles du 
radius médian ventral quis’arrétent 4 10 millimétres en avant de l’anus. Ces appendices 
sont au nombre de quatre-vingt-cing disposés en deux rangées plus ou moins alternantes 
et ils sont trés rapprochés les uns des autres. 

Malgré toutes nos recherches nous n’avons pu trouver de corpuscules caleaires soit 
dans les parois du corps soit dans les tentacules et les organes génitaux. I] est tres 
probable quils ont été dissous par les liquides conservateurs. 

La vésicule de Poli unique a 20 millimétres de longueur. 

Les organes eénitaux sont constitués par deux glandes de 40 millimétres de longueur 
présentant chacune un canal central grisitre portant de distance en distance des 
faisceaux de czecums plus ou moins arborescents. 

L'intestin est de coloration grisAtre, le rectum est noir violacé et il présente un petit 
crecum sur la moitié de sa longueur. 

Rapports et Différences.—Nous ne pouvons guére rapprocher la Benthodytes spuma 
que de la B. abyssicoia Théel; mais celle-ci s'en distingue facilement parce qu'elle a 
quinze tentacules, des processus dorsaux de petite dimension mais répartis au nombre 
d'une dizaine par radius dorsal; elle posséde aussi une bordure latérale composée de 
pédicelles plus développés que ceux du radius médian ventral. 

On a déja signalé dans les régions antarctiques deux espices de Benthodytes : la B 
sanguinolenta Théel et la B. sordida Théel. La B. sanguinolenta a dix-huit tentacules, 
une bordure latérale formée de nombreux appendices et elle est pourvue de minuscules 
papilles dorsales. Le B. sordida a quinze tentacules, une bordure latérale formée 
de nombreux appendices et des appendices dorsaux de différentes tailles. Les deux 
especes antarctiques de Benthodytes déji décrites sont done bien distinctes de 
notre B. spuma. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 415.) 


12 M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


Benthodytes Browni, nov. sp. (PI. I. fig. 2 et 3.) 


Station 451, 13 Avril 1904; lat. S. 48° 06’, long. W. 10° 05’; profondeur 1742 
brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Le corps de cet exemplaire est plus ou moins cylindrique, avec les régions antérieure 
et postérieure arrondies. La face ventrale est lég¢rement aplatie, surtout dans sa région 
médiane, tandis que la face dorsale est fortement bombée. La longueur de cet individu 
est de 200 millimetres, sa largeur est de 50 millimetres et sa hauteur 35 millimétres. 
Les téguments sont plissés et fortement pigmentés, leur coloration est d'un noir 
uniforme. 

La bouche (fig. 3) est ventrale et située 4 10 millimétres du bord antérieur, l’anus 
est terminal. La bouche est entourée de quatorze tentacules, tous de méme grandeur. 
Chaque tentacule se compose d’un pédoncule d'une dizaine de millimétres de long, 
surmonté d'un disque convexe de 10 millimétres de diamétre, 4 surface terminale 
papilleuse et présentant sur son pourtour quelques digitations assez fortement 
rétractées. 

Les radius dorsaux (fig. 2) sont tres saillants et ils sont nettement séparés lun de 
l'autre par une région déprimée, surtout dans la moitié postérieure du corps. Sur 
presque toute la longueur de chaque radius sont disposés, en une seule rangée, une 
vingtaine d’appendices coniques, & peu pres tous identiques et ayant une base d'une 
dizaine de millimetres de diamétre. Dans la région antérieure ces papilles sont de taille 
plus petite et, sur le radius droit, nous en trouvons deux au méme niveau. Une rangée 
de seize pédicelles s'étend sur toute la longueur de chaque radius latéro-ventral (fig. 3) ; 
chacun de ces pédicelles présente une base élargie conique, dont le diamétre atteint 12 
millimétres ; cette partie est plus ou moins plissée et elle est surmontée d'un petit 
mamelon cylindrique et rétractile de 5 millimétres de longueur et de 2 millimétres de 
diamétre. [.es deux rangées ambulacraires latéro-ventrales sont paralléles et ne sont 
reliées par aucune bordure postanale. 

Le radius médian ventral est marqué par deux bandes longitudinales, en dépression 
sur le reste de la sole, et sillonnées par de nombreux traits transversaux. A un premier 
examen externe nous ne trouvions aucun appendice sur ce radius, mais l'étude interne 
décéle dans le quart postérieur une huitaine de pédicelles disposés sur deux rangées plus 
ou moins alternantes. 

Les téguments sont épais; leur coloration est noiratre 4 lextérieur et violacée a 
lintérieur. Ils ne renferment aucune trace de corpuscule, mais cela est trés probable- 
ment dt a l’action du formol. 

Les organes génitaux sont constitués de deux houppes de trés nombreux tubes gréles 
de 20 4 35 millimétres de longueur et de couleur rouge violacé. L’unique vésicule de 
Poli mesure 30 millimétres de longueur ; elle est de couleur gris violacé. 

Rapports et Différences.—La Benthodytes Browni est nettement caractérisée par la 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVI, 416.) 


DE LEXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAISE. 8) 


forme de ses gros appendices latéro-ventraux et dorsaux et par la localisation des 
pédicelles médio-ventraux sur le quart postérieur du corps. 

Dans le groupe des Benthodytes pourvues de quatorze tentacules, la B. curiosa doit 
étre comparée dla B. Janthina Marenzeller trouvée dans |’ Atlantique nord ; mais celle-ci 
se distingue de notre espece par des différences de taille entre les diverses papilles 
dorsales et par le grand nombre de pédicelles de la région marginale et du radius médian 
ventral. La B. curiosa s'éloigne aussi de la B. mamillifera Théel, espece qui peut 
n’avoir aussi que quatorze tentacules, mais dont le pourtour est bordé par de nombreux 
pédicelles de petite taille et dont le radius dorsal offre cinquante petits processus 
coniques disposés suivant deux rangées plus ou moins alternantes. 


Benthodytes recta, nov. sp. (Pl. I. fig. 23; Pl. III. fig. 37 et 38.) 


Station 291, 7 Mars 1903; lat. S. 67° 33’, long. W. 30° 35’; profondeur 2500 brasses. 
Trois exemplaires. 


Parmi ces trois exemplaires un est complétement pelé, les deux autres, quoique en 
assez mauvais état, peuvent pourtant servir 4 caractériser cette nouvelle espéce. Les 
dimensions respectives de ces deux échantillons sont: pour lun, 150 millimetres de 
longueur et 30 millimétres de largeur, et, pour l'autre, 110 millimétres de longueur et 20 
millimetres de largeur. Leur corps est plus ou moins aplati, la face ventrale quoique 
légérement convexe est beaucoup moins bombée que la face dorsale. 

La coloration générale est rouge violacé, mais la face ventrale est de teinte plus foncée 
que la face dorsale. La bouche est franchement ventrale et plus ou moins saillante ; 
elle est entourée par seize tentacules grisatres, dont le disque terminal est convexe et A 
surface externe pustuleuse. L’anus est plutot ventral que terminal. 

On distingue une collerette péribuccale qui se continue de chaque cdté du corps par 
une bordure peu saillante formée d'une cinquantaine de papilles ou festons. En arriére, 
ces bordures latérales se réunissent l'une 4 l'autre par une collerette périanale formée de 
deux lobes se séparant au niveau de l’anus. 

Le radius médian ventral posstde un grand nombre de pédicelles disposés en deux 
rangées longitudinales, alternant irrégulitrement l'une avee l'autre et sétendant sur 
toute la longueur du radius. 

Chaque radius dorsal (fig. 23) peut posséder au plus quatre papilles ; les trois 
antérieures sont de plus petites dimensions que la postérieure ; elles atteignent, chez le 
petit exemplaire, 2 4 4 millimétres de longueur, tandis que la papille postérieure a 10 
millimetres. Le petit échantillon présente la premiére papille 4 14 millimetres du 
bord antérieur, la seconde papille 4 8 millimétres de la premiére, la troisieme a 23 
millimetres de la deuxiéme et la derniére 4 40 millimétres de la précédente. Chez le 
grand exemplaire ces distances respectives sont 30 millimetres, 20 millimétres, 25 (?) 
millimétres et 45 millimétres. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI. 417.) 


14 M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


Les téguments sont minces et renferment des corpuscules calcaires en forme de croix 
(fig. 37) & quatre branches inégales et incurvées, présentant sur leur longueur quelques 
piquants massifs. Dans les tentacules sont des batonnets arqués (fig. 38), quelquefois a 
extrémités bifides ; leur taille varie beaucoup. 

Rapports et Différences.—La Benthodytes recta est une espece de Benthodytes a seize 
tentacules, qui se sépare nettement des especes déja décrites. Parmi les espéces 
antarctiques, elle a quelques aftinités avec la B. sordida Théel, mais cette derniere a quinze 
tentacules, trois paires de grands processus dorsaux entre lesquels sont des papilles plus 
petites, et une bordure latérale bien différente de celle de notre espece. 


KuPHRONIDES, Théel. 


Euphronides Scotix, nov. sp. (Pl. L. fig. 8 et 9; Pl. ILI, fig. 39 et 40.) 


Station 313,18 Mars 1908; lat. S. 62° 10’, long. W. 41° 20’; profondeur 1775 
brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Cet exemplaire a une longueur de 140 millimétres et une largeur de 45 millimetres 
environ. La face dorsale est légerement bombée, sa coloration est blanc grisitre avec 
quelques reflets rosés. La face ventrale est aplatie ; sa coloration générale est brunatre, 
mais son pourtour et sa portion médiane sont verdatres. La bouche est ventrale et se 
trouve située 4 10 millimétres du bord antérieur; l’anus est aussi compris dans la sole 
ventrale et est aussi A 10 millimétres du bord postérieur. 

La sole ventrale (fig. 9) est entourée, sur tout son pourtour, par une bordure festonnée. 
La partie circumorale comprend une vingtaine de festons de faible épaisseur et trés peu 
échancrés ; les portions latérales sont composées, de chaque cété, par une quarantaine de 
festons faisant peu de saillie et infléchis du cdté ventral ; mais 4 30 millimetres environ, 
en avant de l’anus, la bordure s’étale & nouveau pour constituer la collerette périanale ; 
cette dernitre est formée par une trentaine de festons peu découpés. 

Le radius médian ventral fait légérement saillie sur une largeur de 10 millimetres 
environ et, suivant toute sa longueur, se trouvent répartis soixante-cinq pédicelles dis- 
posés en deux rangées plus ou moins irréguli¢rement alternantes. De chaque cété de 
ce radius, la sole ventrale présente toute une série de paires de stries transversales. 

Le cercle tentaculaire est entouré par un repli brunatre ; il comprend seize tentacules 
brunatres. Chaque tentacule se termine par un disque offrant 4 sa surface un grand 
nombre de petites verrucosités. . 

La face dorsale (fig. 8) est fortement plissée et présente 4 105 millimétres du bord 
antérieur un gros appendice impair de 20 millimétres de largeur & sa base et de 15 
millimétres de hauteur; son extrémité libre est arrondie. En avant de ce gros appendice 
se trouve, vers le milieu du corps, une paire de petites papilles de 2 millimétres de 
longueur, plus ou moins cachées par les replis des téguments. Ces petites papilles sont 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVI., 418.) 


DE L’EXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAISE. 15 


3 15 millimetres l'une de l'autre. L’ouverture génitale est 4 20 millimetres du bord 
antérieur. 

Les téguments sont minces et flexibles ; ceux de la face dorsale sont légerement 
rugueux, ils renferment des corpuscules tri- et tétraradiés (fig. 39 et 40) dont les 
branches, souvent un peu incurvées, offrent quelques piquants ; ils sont de différentes 
tailles et présentent tous un piquant central. 

L’organisation interne montre bien que le gros appendice dorsal provient de la soudure 
de deux papilles. Des fragments calcaires, en mauvais état de conservation placés 
autour de la bouche, semblent étre les restes d'un anneau calcaire. La vésicule de Poli 
unique est de couleur rose violacé et mesure 30 millimetres de longueur. 

Les ovaires sont constitués par deux petites grappes sétendant sur 20 millimetres 
de longueur. 

Rapports et Différences.—Notre Euphronides Scotix doit tre comparée dune part 
avec les H, Tanneri Ludwig et H. depressa Théel, espéces & un seul grand appendice 
dorsal, mais qui s’en distinguent par la présence de dix-huit tentacules, et dautre part, 
avec les EH. verrucosa Ludwig et E. bifurcata Koehler et Vaney, qui possedent comme 
elle seize tentacules, mais dont les téguments sont fortement verruqueux. 

L’Euphronides ‘Scotie est plus antarctique que |’. depressa proprement dite * 
recueillie par le Challenger sur les cétes de Patagonie. 


Psycuropotes, Théel. 
Psychropotes longicauda, Théel, var. antarctica, nov. var. 


Station 417, 18 Mars 1904; lat. 8. 71° 22’, long. W. 16° 34’; profondeur 1410 brasses. 
Un exemplaire. 


Cet exemplaire différe de l'espece type de THEEL par quelques caracteres secondaires, 
cependant nous n’avons pas cru devoir l’en s¢parer completement par suite du manque 
de corpuscules caleaires ; ceux-ci ont été probablement dissous par la formaldéhyde. 

Cet échantillon a 280 millimetres de longueur et seulement 50 millimétres de 
largeur ; il est done plus allongé que le type de Tuber, dont la largeur est environ le 
tiers de la longueur. Le corps est plutét cylindrique, sa largeur reste constante suivant 
toute la longueur; les extrémités antérieure et postérieure sont légérement arrondies. 
La face ventrale est aplatie, la face dorsale est convexe, mais elle n’offre pas en arriére la 
surélévation indiquée par THHEL dans son Ps. longicauda. La coloration est gris violacé, 
les bords marginaux sont brun foncé. 

La région caudale s'instre 4 4—5 millimétres en avant de l'extrémité postérieure; elle 
est conique et mesure 100 millimétres de longueur et 25 millimétres de largeur a sa 
base d'insertion. Son extrémité libre se termine par deux digitations presque égales : 

* Voir R. Perrier, Holothwries: Hap. Sc. du “ Travailleur” et du “ Talisman,” 1902, p. 434. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 419.) 


16 M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


lune de 8 millimétres de longueur, l'autre de 6 millimétres seulement. La bouche et 
l'anus sont tous deux dans la sole ventrale; la bouche est 4 15 millimétres du bord 
antérieur et lanus 4 5 millimétres du bord postérieur. Le radius médian ventral 
renferme une cinquantaine de pédicelles brunatres, rétractés et répartis en deux rangées 
alternantes. Sur le pourtour de la sole ventrale, on trouve, en avant, une collerette 
péribuccale de faible épaisseur, formée par quinze petits festons, qui se continue de 
chaque cété par une simple rangée d'une quarantaine de pédicelles assez distants les uns 
des autres. En arriére, ces deux rangées se réunissent l’une a l'autre par une sorte de 
collerette périanale & festons mal définis. 

La face dorsale présente, comme le type de Ps. longicauda, quatre paires de 
petites papilles situées successivement & 50, 60, 80 et 100 millimetres du bord antérieur. 

Les téguments sont minces mais malheureusement completement débarrassés de 
leurs corpuscules calcaires. 

Les glandes génitales sont composées de deux glandes en grappe de 60 millimetres 
de longueur, formée chacune d’une série de vésicules de couleur gris violacé. La vésicule 
de Poli unique est blanc grisitre et mesure 70 millimetres de longueur. 

Cet exemplaire appartient au Ps. longicauda Théel, car il possede, comme cette 
espece, dix-huit tentacules, quatre paires de papilles dorsales, mais ici la région caudale 
se termine par deux digitations presque égales, le corps est plus élancé et il ne présente 
ni bordure latérale ni surélévation postérieure. 

Les exemplaires rapportés par le Challenger avaient été recueillis en trois stations 
différentes: Tune située 4 62° 26’ lat. 8. et 95° 44’ long. KE. et & 1975 brasses de 


4 


profondeur, l'autre 4 53° 55’ lat. 8. et 108° 35’ long. E., 4 1950 brasses de profondeur, 
et enfin la troisieme a 34° 7’ lat. S. et 73° 56’ long. W., & 2225 brasses de profondeur. 

THEEL avait déja séparé, parmi les exemplaires de la deuxiéme station, deux variétés : 
la variété monstrosa et la variété fusco-purpurea. 

Quoique la taille de notre échantillon et la longueur de sa région caudale atteignent 
presque celles du type de la variété montrosa, il en differe par la forme générale du 
corps et l’absence de bordure latérale. Notre exemplaire est beaucoup plus antarctique 
que cette variété et par ses divers caracteéres il parait étre le type d'une nouvelle variété 
a laquelle nous donnons le nom dantarctica. 


Psychropotes laticauda, nov. sp. (Pl. IL. fig. 14 et 24.) 


Station 290, 6 Mars 1904; lat. S. 67° 39’, long. W. 36° 10’; profondeur 2500 
brasses. Un exemplaire. 

Station 468, 29 Avril 1904; lat. 8. 39° 48’, long. E. 2° 33’; profondeur 2645-2900 
brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Les deux exemplaires, quoique provenant de deux stations assez distantes l'une de 
’ ws x A AX , = 
autre, appartiennent sans aucun doute A la méme espéce. L’un des échantillons est 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 420.) 


DE L’EXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAISE. 17 


rempli de vase et semble avoir conservé sa forme primitive; c'est sur celui-ci que nous 
établirons les caractéres de la nouvelle espice. Comme le Ps. longicauda Théel, notre 
nouveau Psychropotes est surélevé en arriére, ot. sa hauteur atteint 45 millimétres, 
tandis qu'il offre en avant un aplatissement trés marqué. La largeur du corps est 
sensiblement la méme sur toute la longueur et est comprise entre 50 et 55 millimétres ; 
la longueur atteint de 185 4 190 millimétres. La coloration générale des téguments est 
violet rougeitre ; la teinte est foncée sur la face ventrale et grisitre sur la face dorsale 
les pédicelles ont leurs extrémités brunatres. 

La face ventrale (fig. 14) est aplatie et forme une sole aux extrémités de laquelle 
sont la bouche et l’anus; la bouche est & 30 millimétres du bord antérieur et l’anus 4 10 
millimétres du bord postérieur ; chacune de ces ouvertures est entourée dune collerette. 
La collerette péribuccale se compose d’une vingtaine de pédicelles trés élargis a la base 
et terminés par une digitation de 4 & 5 millimétres de long; elle sinfléchit assez 
fortement en arriére de la bouche. La collerette périanale comprend quatorze festons 
trés larges 4 contours presque arrondis; seules les papilles postérieures offrent un petit 
mamelon. Les extrémités correspondantes de ces collerettes sont réunies lune a 
Yautre par une rangée d'une dizaine de pédicelles latéro-ventraux de grosse taille et 
bien séparés. 

Le radius médian ventral présente une trentaine de pédicelles répartis irréguherement 
sur deux rangées alternantes. Dans la moitié postérieure les pédicelles sont trés 
rapprochés ; il en est de méme vers le voisinage immédiat de la bouche; mais dans le 
reste de ce radius médian, ils sont tres largement espacés. 

Sur la face dorsale se trouvent deux paires de petites papilles ; la premiere est a 80 
millimétres du bord antérieur, l'autre 4 100 millimétres de cette extrémité. L’appendice 
caudal est placé tout 4 fait 4 Varriére, il est aplati dorso-ventralement et est terminé 
par une pointe arrondie semblant provenir de la soudure intime de deux papilles 
égales. La queue a une longueur de 60 millimétres et une largeur a la base de 35 
millimetres. 

Le cercle tentaculaire est composé de dix-huit tentacules brundtres. Chacun de 
ceux-ci présente un pédoncule violet de 10 millimétres de long, terminé par un disque 
violet brunitre de 8 millimétres de diamétre dont la partie distale est convexe, a surface 
rugueuse et porte, sur son pourtour, une vingtaine de papilles plus ou moins rétractées. 

Les téguments sont plus minces sur la face dorsale que sur la face ventrale ; ils 
renferment des corpuscules étoilés (fig. 24) 4 quatre ou six branches plus ou moins 
incurvées, sur lesquelles sont disposées de distance en distance quelques piquants. Au 
centre du corpuscule s’éléve toujours un piquant plus développé que les autres et a 
pointe mousse. 

Les muscles longitudinaux sont marron brundtre, l'intestin est grisitre. La vésicule 
de Poli unique est grisitre et mesure 40 millimetres de longueur. 

Les organes génitaux sont constitués par deux grappes d'une vingtaine de vésicules 
blanc jaunatre, placées A l’extrémité d’un canal de 35 millimétres de longueur. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI, 421.) 


18 M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


Rapports et Différences.—Le Psychropotes laticauda se rapproche du Ps. longicauda 
Théel; il s’en distingue par le petit nombre et la taille des pédicelles latéro-ventraux, 
par la répartition hétérogéne des pédicelles médio-ventraux et par la forme et la 
terminaison de la région caudale. 

Cette nouvelle espéce rappelle aussi le Ps. raripes Ludwig, car tout deux ont des 
pédicelles latéro-ventraux bien séparés les uns des autres; mais dans le Ps. raripes, les 
corpuscules calcaires sont beaucoup plus épineux que dans notre Ps. laticauda, @ailleurs 
les pédicelles du radius impair sont répartis différemment dans ces deux espéeces, 
de plus notre Ps. laticauda a des appendices dorsaux alors que le Ps. raripes en 
est dépourvu. 

La répartition inégale des pédicelles médio-ventraux, le petit nombre d’appendices 
dorsaux et l’absence de toute bordure latérale reliant les pédicelles latéro-ventraux 
sépare le Ps. laticauda du Ps. buglossa Perrier ; les corpuscules caleaires sont d’ailleurs 
différents dans ces deux espéces. 


Psychropotes Brucei, nov. sp. (Pl. I. fig. 18; Pl. IL. fig. 21 et 22 ; Pl. IIL fig. 41 et 42.) 


Station 291, 7 Mars 1903; lat. S. 67° 33’, long. W. 36° 35’; profondeur 2500 
brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Le corps est allongé et de coloration gris jaundtre ; sa longueur est de 170 milli- 
metres et sa largeur de 50 millimétres environ. La face ventrale aplatie (fig. 21) est 
de couleur plus foncée que la face dorsale, celle-ci est légerement bombée. La bouche 
et lanus sont nettement ventraux. En avant, l’exemplaire présente une collerette 
péribuceale de 40 a 44 millimétres de diamétre formée de vinet-six papilles assez 
saillantes. Autour de l’anus, on trouve une série de huit paires de petites papilles 
jaunatres disposées sur un cercle de 30 millimétres de diamétre. Sur le cdté, le corps 
présente une bordure latérale qui déborde d’un centimétre environ vers la région 
antérieure et de quelques millimétres seulement vers la région postérieure. Sous cette 
bordure s’étend, de chaque cété du corps, de la collerette péribuccale a la collerette 
périanale, une rangée d'une huitaine de pédicelles bien séparés entre eux, dont les trois 
premiers sont assez distants les uns des autres. Le radius médian ventral est fortement 
rétracté et plissé; maleré nos recherches faites en étalant cette région ou en examinant 
la face interne, nous n’avons pu distinguer aucun appendice. 

La bouche est située 4 22 millimetres du bord antérieur; elle est entourée de dix- 
huit tentacules brun rougedtre disposés un peu irrégulitrement. Chaque tentacule se 
termine par un disque de 7 millimetres de diamétre, 4 surface externe convexe, 
papilleuse et bordée de festons périphériques plus ou moins rétractés ; leur pédoncule est 
court et blane jaunatre. 

Vu de cdté (fig. 22), le corps se termine, dans sa région postérieure, par une sorte de 
talon surmonté d’une région caudale trés saillante, aplatie latéralement, terminée en 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 422.) 


DE VEXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAISE. 19 


pointe, cintrée en avant et offrant une double inflexion telle que la pointe est reportcée 
presque au-dessus du talon. La hauteur de cette région caudale est de 60 millimetres 
et sa longueur & la base atteint 35 millimetres. Sur la face dorsale (fig. 13) se trouvent 
Pouverture génitale, située 4 40 millimétres du bord antérieur et, plus en arri¢re, deux 
paires de petites papilles. La premiére paire est 4 5 millimétres de l’ouverture génitale 
et présente un écartement de’ 10 millimétres ; la deuxitme paire est 4 15 millimetres plus 
en arricre et offre un écartement de 20 millimétres. 

Les téguments renferment des corpuscules cruciformes (fig. 41 et 42) dont les branches 
sont fortement épineuses. Au centre du corpuscule s’éléve toujours un piquant. 

Le tube digestif est marron clair, mais le rectum est noiritre. Les muscles longi- 
tudinaux des radius sont de couleur marron. 

Les organes génitaux sont composés de deux faisceaux dune dizaine d’ampoules, 
Chaque faisceau aboutit & un canal de 20 millimétres de loneueur. Les plus grosses 
ampoules sont ovales et ont 10 millimétres de plus grand diametre. 

Rapports et Différences.—Si réellement le radius médian ventral du Psychropotes 
Brucei est dépourvu de pédicelles, cette espéce se rapprocherait du Ps. Grimaldi 
Hérouard de |'Atlantique, qui posstde aussi dix-huit tentacules. Mais notre nouveau 
Psychropotes se sépare tres nettement de la forme décrite par Hirouarp par sa bordure 
périanale et par absence de bordure latérale festonnée. D’ailleurs le Ps. Grimaldi ne 
possede pas de papilles dorsales et a une queue tres développée. De plus les corpuscules 
caleaires sont différents dans les deux espéces. 

Si notre espéce posstde des pédicelles sur le radius médian, nous devrons la rapprocher 
des Psychropotes raripes Ludwig, Ps. buglossa R. Perrier, Ps. fucata R. Perrier 
et Ps. longicauda. 

Le Ps. raripes a une disposition des pédicelles latéro-ventraux et une structure des 
corpuscules calcaires assez semblables 4 celles de notre espece, mais il ne possede aucune 
papille dorsale et ses pédicelles latéro-ventraux sont bien plus développés que ceux du 
Ps. Brucei. 

Les Ps. buglossa et Ps. fucata se distinguent du Ps. Brucec par la forme et le 
nombre des pédicelles latéro-ventraux, lallure de la région caudale, le nombre des 
papilles dorsales et la forme des corpuscules calcaires. 

Le Ps. longicauda aun plus grand nombre de papilles dorsales, de quatre 4 cing 
paires, de nombreux pédicelles latéro-ventraux, et sa région caudale se termine par deux 
prolongements digitiformes. Cet ensemble de caractéres l’Cloigne done de notre nouvelle 
espece. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 423.) 


20 M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


DENDROCHIROTES. 
CUCUMARIIDES. 


Psoxus, Oken. 


Psolus antarcticus (Philippi). 
Pour Ja bibliographie voir : 


1905. R. Perrier, “ Holothuries antarctiques du Muséum histoire naturelle de Paris,” Ann. Se. 
nat.: Zoologie, 9° S., t.1., p. 55. 
1907. C. Vanny, Holothuries: Expédition antarctique francaise, p. 21. 


Port Stanley, [les Falkland; profondeur 4 brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Ce petit exemplaire est de forme elliptique ; son plus grand axe atteint 15 millimetres 
de longueur et le plus petit axe a 10 millimétres. La coloration est blanchatre. Les 
plaques péribuccales sont beaucoup plus développées que les périanales. Le pourtour 
de la sole a deux rangées d’ambulacres. On distingue de petites granulations sur les 
grandes écailles dorsales. 


Psotipium, Ludwig. 


Psolidium convergens (Hérouard). 


1905. R. Perrier, ‘ Holothuries antarctiques du Muséum histoire naturelle de Paris,” p. 38. 
1906. E. Hiéirovarn, Holothuries: Expédition antarctique belge de la ‘‘ Belgica,” p. 13. 


Janvier 1908, Port Stanley, Iles Falkland ; profondeur 4 brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Cet unique exemplaire est blanchitre; il mesure 22 millimetres de longueur et 7 
millimétres de plus grande largeur; son extrémité postérieure est conique et légerement 
relevée du cdté dorsal. La disposition des pédicelles et la forme des corpuscules 
calcaires correspondent exactement aux descriptions d’ Hérouarp et de R. PERRIER. 


Psolidium (Cucumaria) Coatsi, nov. sp. (PI. IV. fig. 47, 48, 49 et 50.) 


Station 325, Baie de la Scotia, Oreades du Sud; profondeur 9 4 10 brasses. Un 
exemplaire. 


Le corps est presque cylindrique, mais faiblement incurvé ; l’extrémité postérieure est 
conique et l’extrémité antérieure est tronconique. La bouche et l'anus sont terminaux. 
Cet exemplaire mesure 25 millimetres de lonoueur et 10 millimétres de diamétre; ses 
téguments sont blanc grisitre. Les pédicelles du trivium sont localisés sur une sole 
ventrale aplatie mais encore un peu convexe et qui n’est pas nettement circonscrite. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVI., 424.) 


DE L'EXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSATSE. 21 


Les rangées de pédicelles, bien visibles, ne semblent commencer qu’ 6 millimétres 
en arritre de louverture buccale et se terminer qu’a 4 millimetres de l’anus, mais en 
réalité elles se prolongent plus en avant et plus en arriére par des rangées de pédicelles 
de plus petite taille. Le radius médian ventral est saillant et présente une cinquan- 
taine de pédicelles répartis en deux rangées plus ou moins alternes; les radius latéro- 
ventraux offrent aussi une cinquantaine de pédicelles répartis en deux rangées: la 
rangée interne a parfois un plus grand nombre d’appendices que la rangée externe ; 
celle-ci _posstde des régions dépourvues d’appendices et d'autres présentant de petits 
pédicelles. 

La surface dorsale est pliss¢e et les appendices s’y trouvent répartis sans ordre sur 
presque toute son étendue. Ces pédicelles ont la méme importance que ceux du trivium. 
L’ouverture anale est bordée par cing pédicelles. 

Dans les téguments du corps sont de nombreuses plaques, plus ou moins imbriquées, 
ovales, 4 surface courbe et présentant de nombreuses perforations; l'une de leurs 
extrémités est pourvue d’un prolongement plus ou moins ¢pineux. Les plaques de la 
sole (fig. 47) sont de plus grande taille que celles de la paroi dorsale (fig. 49). 
On trouve aussi des bitonnets 4 ramification plus ou moins arborescente (fig. 48). Les 
corpuscules des pédicelles ventraux (fig. 50) sont des plaques allongées et méme 
ramifiées, & surface courbe et offrant de nombreuses perforations. 

L’anneau calcaire est composé de dix pidces triangulaires de 2 millimétres de hauteur 
et d'un millimetre de base ; le sommet des parties radiales est tronqué, tandis que celui 
des interradiales est pointu. Les muscles rétracteurs s'ins¢rent vers le milieu du corps. 
La vésicule de Poli unique est vésiculeuse et a 5 millimétres de longueur. L’unique 
tube madréporique est court et terminé par une grande plaque madréporique. Les 
organes génitaux sont constitués par deux faisceaux d’une vingtaine de tubes simples, 
blane jaunatre, de 15 4 20 millimetres de longueutr. 

Rapports et Différences—Ce Psolidium (Cucumaria) Coats pourrait ¢tre classé 
indifféremment dans les genres Psolidium ou Cucumaria. Pourtant il offre beaucoup 
danalogie avee le Psolidiwm convergens (Hérouard) et c'est pourquoi nous en faisons 
plutot un Psolidium qu'une Cucumaria. Comme le Ps. convergens, notre nouvelle 
espéce présente une sole ventrale peu différenciée et des corpuscules caleaires de la face 
ventrale non semblables 4 ceux de la face dorsale ; mais chez le Ps. Coatsi, les plaques 
sont toutes munies d’un prolongement 4 lune de leurs extrémités et cette espece ne 
posséde que des corpuscules superficiels arborescents et aucune des cupules treillissées 
décrites chez le Ps. convergens ; de plus les pédicelles de la région dorsale ont la méme 
importance que ceux de la sole. 

Parmi les Cucumaria, le Ps. Coatsi se rapproche de nos nouvelles C. psolidiformis 
et C. conspicua. Ses corpuscules caleaires présentent un prolongement épineux et 
ressemblent & ceux des C. Steineni Ludwig et C. laevigata Verrill, mais la disposition 
de ses pédicelles est bien différente de celle de ces deux especes. Notre nouvelle 
espéce de Psolidivm ottre aussi quelques aflfinités avec la C. pared. 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVI, 425.) 


22 M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


Tuyoner, Oken. 


Thyone articulata, nov. sp. (Pl. IV. fig. 43 et 44.) 


Mai 1904, Baie de Saldanha, Afrique du Sud; profondeur 9 4 10 brasses. Deux 
exemplaires. 


Ces exemplaires sont fusiformes ; leurs téguments sont marron brunatre et présentent 
des taches plus foneées réparties sur tout le corps, mais principalement sur la face dorsale. 
La bouche et l’anus sont terminaux et sont entourés d'une aire blanchitre. Les 
dimensions de ces deux échantillons sont les suivantes: 20 et 45 millimetres pour leur 
longueur, 10 et 15 millimetres pour leur plus grand diamétre. 

Les pédicelles sont répartis sur toute la surface du corps et ne présentent pas de 
rangées radiales distinctes. Les tentacules sont au nombre de dix. Les téguments sont 
peu épais et renferment de nombreux corpuscules calcaires. Ceux-ci (fig. 43) sont des 
batonnets aplatis, dont les extrémités élargies présentent généralement une grosse 
perforation accompagnée quelquefois d'une ou deux ouvertures de plus petite dimension. 
Les pédicelles ont une plaque terminale avec de nombreuses petites perforations centrales 
et de grandes ouvertures rayonnantes placées a la périphérie. 

L’anneau caleaire (fig. 44) est tres développé et atteimt jusqu’a 10 millimetres de 
longueur. I] est composé par un grand nombre de petits articles se poursuivant en 
arriere par dix prolongements gréles et contournés en spirale. Chacun de ces prolonge- 
ments postérieurs est formé par deux séries alternantes d’articles, juxtaposées l'une a 
l'autre sur les deux tiers de leur longueur, mais se séparant bien nettement vers le tiers 
postérieur. Dans sa partie antérieure, l’anneau caleaire offre cing prolongements coniques 
interradiaux et cing prolongements radiaires biarticulés. 

Les muscles rétracteurs s'inserent au quart antérieur du corps. L’unique vésicule 
de Poli a 5 millimétres de longueur; le canal madréporique est infléchi en avant. 
Les tubes génitaux sont simples, jaundtres et disposés en houppes vers le milieu 
du corps. 

Rapports et Différences.—La Thyone articulata se rapproche de la Thyone spectabilis 
Ludwig par suite de ses corpuscules binoculaires, mais elle s’en sépare nettement par la 
forme de son anneau calcaire muni de longs prolongements postérieurs. 

La structure de l'anneau caleaire rapproche notre espece de la Zhyone sacellus Selenka, 
mais les corpuscules caleaires sont bien différents dans ces deux formes. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVI, 426.) 


DE LEXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAISE. a3 


Cucumarta, Blainville. 


Cucumaria antaretica, Vaney. 
1907. C. Vanuy, Holothuries : Expédition antaretique francaise, p. 6. 


Station 325, Baie de la Scotia, Orcades du Sud ; profondeur 9 4 10 brasses. Plusieurs 
échantillons. 


Les différents exemplaires de cette espéce rapportés par la Scotia sont absolument 
identiques 4 ceux que j'ai déja décrits dans les Holothuries du Francais. Leur taille 
est tres variable: les grands échantillons atteignent de 90 4 130 millimétres de 
longueur et 30 millimétres de diamétre; les petits ont seulement une vinetaine de 
millimetres de longueur et une dizaine de millimétres de diamétre. La plupart sont 
marron brunitre et ont les pédicelles blanchitres. Leur couronne tentaculaire est 
composée de dix tentacules tous égaux, pourvus chacun din grand nombre de 
ramifications blanchatres. Un unique exemplaire posstde douze tentacules non 
ramifiés. 

Les téguments ont une coloration qui peut varier du brun au blanc; chez un 
échantillon jeune ils sont trés rugueux. 

Les corpuscules caleaires sont obovales avee une extrémité plus ou moins pointue, 
mais jamais ils ne présentent de véritable prolongement. Leurs contours sont 
profondément découpés ; leur surface est pereée d’un grand nombre de perforations et 
est hérissée de petits tubercules coniques ou arrondis. Chez un échantillon de petite 
taille les corpuscules calcaires sont tres allongés et présentent une surface hérissée dun 
grand nombre d’aspérités. 


Cucumaria crocea (Lesson). 


Voir pour la bibliographie : 


1898. H. Lupwic, Holothuries der Hamburger Magalhaensische Sammelreise, Hamburg, p. 15-24. 
1904. H. Lupwia, “ Brutpflege bei Echinodermen”; Festschrift Aug. Weismann, Zool. Jahrb. Suppl., 
Bd. vii, p. 683-699. 
17 Janvier 1905, Port Stanley, Iles Falkland; profondeur 31 brasses. Nombreux 
exemplaires. 
9 Avril 1904, lat. 51° 7’S., long. 9° 31’ W.; profondeur 2103 brasses. Nombreux 
exemplaires. 
8 Janvier 1903, Port Stanley, Iles Falkland; profondeur 4 brasses. Trois 
exemplaires. 


Les dimensions de ces divers exemplaires sont trds variables: certains sont de petite 
taille et atteilgnent seulement 5 4 6 millimétres de longueur ; tandis que d'autres ont 
60 & 70 millimetres de longueur. Sur les échantillons de petites dimensions, les 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 427.) 


24 M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


pédicelles des radius du trivium sont seuls développés; chez les grands les ambulacres 
dorsaux sont trés petits et tres nombreux, formant par leur ensemble une petite créte 
longitudinale. 

Les téguments sont minces, translucides, de couleur blanc jaunatre ou blane rosé. 
La Scotia a recueilli un exemplaire de 50 millimetres de longueur auquel étaient fixés 
des jeunes de 8 millimetres de longueur. 


Cucumaria discolor, Théel. 
Synonyme: C. australis, Ludwig. 


1886. TuieL, Reports of the “ Challenger” : Holothurioidea, u1., p. 64. 


19 Mai 1904, Baie de Saldanha, Afrique du Sud, rivage. Deux échantillons. 


L’aspect général de ces deux exemplaires les rapproche des Colochirus. Leur corps 
est fusiforme 4 contour vaguement pentagonal. Leurs longueurs respectives sont 40 et 
50 millimétres et leur plus grand diamétre 15 millimetres. La face ventrale est 
blanchitre mais tachetée de bandes longitudinales brundatres ; la face dorsale et les parties 
latérales sont marron brundtre et parsemées de petites punctuations. Tous les radius 
nont qu'une double rangée de pédicelles. Les corpuscules calcaires des téguments sont 
tres nombreux: ce sont de gros ovules treillissés, dix fois plus gros que les autres 
corpuscules ; ceux-ci sont de deux sortes: les uns sont des coupes a quatre perforations 
et présentant une douzaine de gros tubercules, les autres, plus superficiels, sont des 
plaques perforées, tres gréles avec de petites tubérosités. Dans les pédicelles sont des 
corpuscules allongés, quelquefois ineurvés, présentant de nombreuses perforations et 
quelques prolongements médians. ‘Tous ces corpuscules rappellent ceux décrits par THEEL 
dans sa Cucumaria discolor. 

L’anneau calcaire est composé de dix pieces coniques de 4 millimetres de hauteur ; 
les piéces radiales sont plus fortes que les interradiales. 

L’échantillon décrit par THEEL provenait de Simon’s Bay. 


Cucumaria grandis, Vaney. (PI. IV. fig. 45 et 46.) 
1907. C. Vaney, Holothuries: Expédition antarctique frangaise, p. 12. 


Station 325, Juin 1903; Baie de la Scotia, Oreades du Sud ; profondeur 9 a 10 brasses. 
Quatre exemplaires. 


La Scotiw a rapporté un assez grand nombre d’échantillons de cette espece que nous 
avions établie sur un unique exemplaire recueilli par le Frangais et malheureusement 
traité 4 la formaldéhyde. I] nous est maintenant possible de compléter notre premiére 
description. 

Tous les échantillons de la Scotia sont de grandes dimensions: leur longueur oscille 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 428.) 


DE L’EXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAISE, 25 


entre 70, 100 et 120 millimetres et leur plus grand diamétre est compris entre 50 et 70 
millimetres. 

La face dorsale est marron foneé, mais sur les parties latérales la coloration s'atténue 
et passe insensiblement au gris clair, qui est la couleur de la face ventrale. Les pédicelles 
sont blanchatres et localisés sur les radius ot ils sont disposés suivant deux rangées 
placées 4 une petite distance l'une de l'autre. Les dix tentacules sont tous semblables 
et offrent de courtes ramifications. Dans les régions rétractées la peau est épaisse, 
mais dans les parties étalées les téguments sont beaucoup plus minces et paraissent 
tachetés en certains points. 

Aucun échantillon ne présente @anneau calcaire. La vésicule de Poli unique est 
tres grande et atteint 45 millimétres de longueur. 

Les téguments renferment une seule espéce de corpuscules caleaires (fig. 45 et 46) : 
ce sont des plaques ovales, incurvées et perforées; leur contour est irrégulier ; elles sont 
munies, & l’une de leurs extrémités, d'un grand prolongement offrant quelques pointes 
vers son extrémité libre. 

Cette Cucumaria grandis, par suite de ses corpuscules calcaires, appartient au 
groupe des Cucumaria antarctiques renfermant dans leurs téguments seulement des 
plaques perforées munies d'un prolongement ¢pineux. A ce groupe appartiennent les 
C. levigata Verrill et C. Steinent Ludwig, mais la forme des corpuscules calcaires 


caractérise bien notre nouvelle espéce. 


Cucumaria lateralis, Vaney. 
> 
1907. C. Vanny, Holothuries: Expédition antarctique francaise, p. 15. 


Station 325, Avril 1903; Baie de la Scotia, Oreades du Sud; profondeur 9 a 10 


brasses. Deux exemplaires. 


Malgré quelques diiférences au point de vue des corpuscules calcaires, nous rapportons 
ces deux échantillons 4 notre Cucumaria lateralis, dont les exemplaires types avaient 
été recueillis par 'expédition antarctique frangaise. La coloration des téguments et la 
répartition des pédicelles sont semblables & celles des types; dans un échantillon nous 
retrouvons méme les deux poches incubatrices, l'une latéro-dorsale droite et l'autre latéro- 
ventrale droite; mais les corpuscules calcaires de ses téguments sont des plaques a 
nombreuses perforations mais dépourvues de tubercules. L'autre exemplaire possede de 
tres grandes plaques ayant chacune de nombreuses perforations entre lesquelles sont 
placés des tubercules en grand nombre qui se développent et se rejoignent en certains 
points pour former les ébauches d’un second réseau de travées. 

Ces deux échantillons ont respectivement 27 et 30 millimétres de longueur et 18 et 


20 millimétres de diamétre. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL XLVI., 429.) 


26 M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


Cucumaria levigata, Verrill. 
Voir pour la bibliographie : 
1905. R. Perrier, Holothuries antarctiques du Muséum @histotre naturelle de Paris, p. 22. 
1906. E. Hérovarp, Holothuries de 0 Expédition antarctique belge, p. 12. 


Bane de Burdwood, lat. 8. 54° 25’, long. W. 57° 32’; profondeur 56 brasses. Huit 
exemplaires. 


Ces divers échantillons ont une longueur comprise entre 11 et 24 millimetres; leur 
plus grand diametre varie entre 5 et 9 millimétres. Les tentacules, au nombre de dix, 
sont tous semblables et les pédicelles sont disposés, sur chaque radius, suivant deux 
rangées plus ou moins alternantes. Les téguments sont rugueux et blanchatres; ils ne 
renferment qu'une seule espece de corpuscules calcaires. Ces corpuscules sont des 
plaques ovales, allongées, munies 4 l'une des extrémités de leur grand axe d’un prolonge- 
ment épineux, quelquefois tres court et parfois bifide. La partie élargie du corpuscule 
présente un grand nombre de perforations entre lesquelles sont des tubercules ; les 
protubérances de la région moyenne de la plaque calcaire sont de plus grande dimension 
que ceux des extrémités. 


Cucumaria leonina, Semper. 
Voir pour la bibliographie : 


1905. R. Perrier, Holothuries antarctiques du Muséum histoire naturelle de Paris, p. 25. 
1906. E. Hirovarn, Holothuries de 7 Expédition antarctique belge, p. 11. 


Station 118, Port William, Iles Falkland; profondeur 6 brasses. Sept exemplaires. 
Station 118, Port Stanley, Iles Falkland ; profondeur 4 brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Les exemplaires provenant de Port William ont l’apparence de Thyone; ils sont 
blane rosé, fusiformes ; leur longueur varie de 40 4 60 millimétres et leur plus grand 
diaméetre est compris entre 12 et 18 millimétres. Les pédicelles semblent répartis 
uniformément dans toute la région médiane ; pourtant certains échantillons montrent 
encore de nombreuses rangées alignées suivant les radius, mais vers la région tentaculaire 
l'on observe, chez tous les exemplaires, que deux rangées de pédicelles par radius. 

Lexemplaire de Port Stanley est de couleur grisatre ; il a 22 millimétres de longueur 
et 7 millimetres de diamétre ; ses dix tentacules, tous semblables, sont brunatres ; les 
pédicelles du trivium sont disposés sur chaque radius suivant deux rangées plus ou moins 
alternantes ; sur la face dorsale ces appendices sont disséminés. 

Tous les échantillons renferment les corpuscules typiques de la Cucumaria leonina : 
des plaques ovales perforées, couvertes de forts tubercules et terminées A l'une des 


extremites par un processus épineux simplement perforé et des boucles réguliéres a 
(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVI, 430.) 


bo 
N 


DE VEXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAITSE. 


quatre orifices et pourvues d’une dizaine de gros tubercules. Les pédicelles ont des 
batonnets aplatis, perforés, recourbés en are, 4 contours irréguliers et offrant en leur 
milieu un prolongement plus ou moins épineux. 


Cucumaria insolens, Théel. 
1886. Tuizn, Reports of the ‘ Challenger” : Holothurioidea, ii., p. 70. 


Baie de Saldanha, Afrique du Sud; profondeur 4 brasses. Quatre exemplaires. 


Ces divers échantillons ont une longueur comprise entre 15 et 30 millimetres et leur 
diamétre varie entre 7 et 10 millimétres. Leur coloration est tantét d’un blane grisitre 
uniforme ou bien elle est blanchatre sur la face ventrale et d’un brun plus ou moins 
noiratre sur la face dorsale. Le corps est parfois cylindrique avec les extrémités arrondies, 
quelquefois il offre une région ventrale aplatie en une sorte de sole rampante et une 
région caudale lég¢rement relevée vers la face dorsale. 

La répartition des pédicelles est assez variable. Les trois radius du trivium possedent 
toujours chacun une double rangée de pédicelles ; ceux-ci sont quelquefois de plus petite 
taille aux extrémités du corps que vers la région médiane, Sur la face dorsale ces 
pédicelles sont ou localisés sur les radius ou plus ou moins diss¢minés sur toute la 
surface. 

Les gros corpuscules caleaires ovuliformes ne sont quelquefois surmontés que d'un tres 
court prolongement épineux; parfois celui-ci peut méme faire compleétement défaut. 
Nous constatons tous les termes de passage entre ces ovules et les coupes avec 
tubérosites. 

Un des échantillons, par suite de l’esquisse d'une sole ventrale, a absolument l’allure 
un Psolidium, les autres se rapprocheraient plutot des Colochirus. 


Cucumaria psolidiformis, noy. sp. (Pl. IL. fig. 17 et 18; PI. IV. fig 51, 52 et 53.) 


Station 325, Juin 1903, Baie de la Scotia, Orcades du Sud; profondeur 10 brasses. 


Un exemplaire. 


Cet unique exemplaire (fig. 17 et 18) mesure 35 millimétres de longueur ; il est 
presque cylindrique avec une face ventrale légérement aplatie constituant une sole mal 
délimitée ; son plus grand diamétre est de 10 & 12 millimetres. L’extrémité postérieure 
est conique et présente l’anus A son sommet, l’extrémité antérieure est infléchie de telle 
sorte que l’ouverture buceale est tournée vers la région postérieure. 

Le corps est couvert sur toute sa surface de petits pédicelles assez rapprochés les uns 
des autres. De gros pédicelles sont répartis le long de chaque radius ; leur disposition 
varie d'une région 4 l'autre. Sur le bivium, ces séries radiales s’¢tendent de la bouche a 
anus et renferment vingt-cinq pédicelles par radius disposés sur deux rangées alternantes. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 431.) 


28 M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


Sur le trivium s’est constituée une sole: les rangées de gros pédicelles ne commencent 
qu’ 3 millimétres de la bouche et se terminent a 5 millimetres de l’anus; suivant le 
radius médian, on compte vingt-quatre de ces appendices disposés sur deux rangées 
alternantes et sur chaque radius latéral on trouve une cinquantaine de pédicelles trés 
rapprochés les uns des autres et placés sur une seule rangée ; pourtant cing 4 six de ces 
appendices, échelonnés d'un cété de cette rangée, forment l’ébauche d'une rangée 
externe. 

L’anus est bordé de cing papilles. La couronne tentaculaire comprend dix tentacules 
jaunitres munis de nombreuses arborescences ; les deux tentacules ventraux sont plus 
petits que les autres. 

Les téguments sont minces, blanchitres et transparents. Ils renferment d’assez 
nombreuses plaques caleaires (fig. 51), & contours irrégulers, percées de plusieurs 
ouvertures ; des tubercules arrondis sont disséminés sur les travées. Les petits pédicelles 
ont des plaques terminales réticulées et de petits batonnets incurvés (fig. 53). Les gros 
pédicelles posstdent des bitonnets ramifiés (fig. 52) ou des plaques semblables a celles 
des parois du corps. 

L’anneau caleaire est peu développé. Il se compose de dix piéces dont la hauteur 
est d'un millimétre et la largeur un demi-millimétre. Les radiales offrent une pointe 
médiane antérieure bifide; les interradiales, légerement plus petites, ont une pointe 
médiane simple. Les muscles rétracteurs s‘insérent vers le quart antérieur du corps. 

L’unique vésicule de Poli est tubuleuse et mesure 3 a 4 millimétres de longueur. 
Les organes arborescents s'étendent jusqu’a la région antérieure du corps, ils se composent 
chacun d'un tube principal portant de distance en distance quelques ramifications de 
grande taille. 

Rapports et Différences.—La présence de petits pédicelles disséminés sur tout le 
corps et la localisation de gros pédicelles suivant des rangées radiales, nous ameéne a 
considérer la Cucumaria psolidiforiis comme se rattachant a l’ancien groupe des 
Semperia. 

Cette espece est intéressante, car, a priori, on pourrait la considérer comme un 
Psolidium par suite de la formation dune sole ventrale a bords marqués simplement 
par les rangées latérales de pédicelles. Elle semble étre un terme de transition entre les 
deux genres Psolidium et Cucumaria. Elle doit étre comparée au Psolidiwm 
convergens (Hérouard) et & la Cucumaria georgiana Lampert. 

La C. psolidifornis, ne possédant ni coupes treillissées, ni boucles 4 quatre mailles 
et son anus étant plutot terminal, se sépare par suite des vrais Psolidium. Sa sole est 
encore moins marquée que chez le Ps. convergens (Hérouard), espéce dont elle se 
distingue d’ailleurs par la disposition des pédicelles et par la forme des corpuscules 
calcaires. 

La forme des plaques calcaires des téguments peut permettre un rapprochement entre 
la C. psolidiformis, la C. georgiana Lampert et notre C. lateralis et C. attenuata, mais 
ces trois derniéres espéces n’ont aucune sole ventrale. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 432.) 


DE L’'EXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAISE. 29 


Cucumaria conspicua, nov. sp. (Pl. IL. fig. 15 et 16; Pl. V. fig. 67.) 


Station 325, Mai 1903; Baie de la Scotia, Oreades du Sud; profondeur 9 a 10 
brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Ce petit exemplaire a une coloration marron brunatre, la face ventrale étant beau- 
coup plus claire que la région dorsale. Le corps (fig. 15 et 16) est ovale, avec une face 
dorsale fortement convexe et une région ventrale aplatie ; sa longueur est de 10 milli- 
metres et sa plus grande largeur est de 6 millimétres. La bouche et l’anus sont 
terminaux, 

A un premier examen, un peu superficiel, les pédicelles semblent seulement localisés 
sur les radius, certains atteignent un tres grand développement et peuvent mesurer 
jusqu’a 5 millimetres de long. Ils présentent tous une plaque terminale de couleur 
foncée. Les pédicelles dorsaux sont moins nombreux et plus courts que les ventraux. 
Tandis que, sur chaque radius du bivium, nous comptons une dizaine d’appendices 
répartis sur deux rangées, alternant plus ou moins irrégulitrement l'une avec l’autre ; 
sur la face ventrale, le radius médian possede une vingtaine de pédicelles et chaque 
radius latéral en a une douzaine. 

Un examen plus complet montre de nombreux petits appendices répartis sur tout 
le corps entre les pédicelles de grande taille ; mais ces appendices sont bien plus visibles 
sur la face dorsale que sur la face ventrale. Vers les extrémités anale et buccale, les 
papilles sont nombreuses et constituent des écailles s'imbriquant plus ou moins les unes 
sur les autres et terminée chacune par une petite pointe foncée. 

Dans les parois du corps se trouvent des plaques caleaires (fig. 67) ovales, 
contours irréguliers, & nombreuses perforations et présentant un prolongement muni 
de piquants. Dans les pédicelles nous n’avons jamais pu obtenir qu'un fragment de 
corpuscule. 

Le pharynx est volumineux, ses muscles rétracteurs viennent s'insérer vers le 
tiers postérieur du corps. L’anneau caleaire est constitué par dix arceaux munis 
chacun dun prolongement médian antérieur, plus fort dans les radiales que dans les 
interradiales, 

L’unique tube madréporique est infléchi en avant. Les tubes génitaux simples 
brunatres sont disposés en faisceaux. 

Rapports et Différences.—La Cucumaria conspicua se rapproche de notre C. 
psolidiformis, car, comme celle-ci, elle est un terme de transition entre les Psolidium a 
sole ventrale peu différenci¢e et les Cucumaria du groupe des Semperia. 

Les corpuscules caleaires de cette Cucumaria avec le prolongement épineux a l'une 
de leurs extrémités la rapprochent des C. Steineni Ludwig et C. levigata Verrill, mais la 
présence de petites papilles entre les gros appendices l’en sépare complétement. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 433.) 


30 M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


Cucumaria aspera, nov. sp. (Pl. I. fig. 12; Pl. IV. fig. 54, 55 et 56.) 


Station 325, Avril 1903; Baie de la Scotia, Oreades du Sud ; profondeur 10 brasses. 


Un exemplaire. : 

Le corps (fig. 12) est légerement incurvé; il a une région centrale renflée et des 
extrémités légerement atténuées. I] mesure 11 millimétres de longueur et 4 & 5 milli- 
métres de plus grande largeur. Cet exemplaire est d'un marron jaunatre avec une face 
dorsale plus foncée que la face ventrale. Toute la surface du corps est hérissée de 
piquants ayant l'aspect de villosités. 

Les pédicelles sont localisés sur les radius en doubles rangées plus ou moins alternantes ; 
ils se détachent assez bien du fond par suite de leur coloration blanc jaunatre ; dans 
certaines régions ils offrent deux tailles assez différentes. Le radius médian ventral 
renferme de vingt-trois a vingt-quatre pédicelles ; chaque radius latéral en posstde nne 
vingtaine et chacun des radius dorsaux un nombre beaucoup plus faible, une douzaine 
seulement. Les tentacules sont au nombre de dix ; ils sont blanc jaundtre et présentent 
des ramifications tres gréles ; les deux ventraux sont de plus petite taille que les autres. 

Les téguments renferment de nombreux corpuscules calcaires s'imbriquant les uns 
sur les autres et disposés en deux couches. Ceux de la couche profonde sont des plaques 
ovales, 4 contours irréguliers (fig. 54) et a nombreuses perforations ; les corpuscules 
superficiels sont des tourelles (fig. 55). La base de ces tourelles est irrégulitrement 
ovalaire, percée d’un grand nombre d’ouvertures et supporte en son centre une tige massive 
présentant trois & quatre étages de perforations. Les pédicelles renferment des plaques 
(fig. 56) allongées, irréguliéres, pereées d’un grand nombre de perforations. 

L’anneau caleaire est gréle et formé de dix pitces: les radiales sont quadrangulaires 
et échancrées en avant; les interradiales sont triangulaires avec une pointe antérieure 
bien marquée, 

Les muscles rétracteurs s'inserent vers le milieu du corps; l’extrémité fixée sur le 
pharynx est épaissie, celle fixée 4 la paroi est au contraire trés gréle. La vésicule de 
Poh unique est tubulée et atteint 5 & 6 millimetres de longueur. II n’existe 
quun canal madréporique qui est infléchi en arriére. L’intestin a un aspect monili- 
forme. Les organes génitaux sont formés de deux faisceaux d'une dizaine de tubes 
simples placés dans la région moyenne du corps. 

Rapports et Différences.—La Cucumaria aspera se rapprovhe des C. chiloensis 
Ludwig et C. tabulifera R. Perrier par suite de ses corpuscules calcaires en forme de 
tourelles, mais la base irréguliére et la tige massive de ses corpuscules la distingue de 
ces deux especes. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 434.) 


DE L'EXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAISE. 31 


Cucumaria croceoida, nov. sp. (PI. V. fig. 64, 65 et 66.) 


Station 346, 1° Décembre 1903 ; Banc de Burdwood, lat. 8. 54° 25’, long. W. 57° 32’; 
profondeur 56 brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Cet exemplaire est en mauvais état, la majeure partie des téguments sont pelés. I] 
est ovoide et de couleur blanchatre. J] mesure 25 millimétres de longueur et 14 milli- 
métres de diamétre. D’aprés examen des quelques parties intactes la répartition des 
pédicelles rappelle celle de la Cucumaria crocea. Les radius dorsaux paraissent avoir 
trois a quatre rangées de nombreux pédicelles trés courts et peu saillants, tandis que les 
radius ventraux et peut-étre les interradius du trivium possedent des pédicelles de 
grande taille munis d’une plaque terminale. Les tentacules, au nombre de dix, sont 
tous semblables. 

Les téguments renferment de nombreux corpuscules caleaires ayant des formes assez 
varices mais se rattachant les unes aux autres. Certains de ces corpuscules (fig. 66) sont 
des batonnets a surface épineuse ou mamelonnée et dont les extrémités aplaties et 
élargies ont un certain nombre de perforations, entre lesquelles sont disséminés quelques 
tubercules. D’autres (fig. 65) ont la forme de plaques ovales 4 contours irréguliers et 
présentant de nombreuses perforations dont les plus grandes sont situées dans la région 
médiane. On trouve tous les termes de passage entre ces deux sortes de corpuscules. 
Les plaques terminales des pédicelles ventraux (fig. 64) sont convexes, 4’ nombreuses 
perforations, entre lesquelles sont disséminés un grand nombre de mamelons. 

Les muscles longitudinaux sont légérement jaunatres et ont un millimétre de largeur. 
La vésicule de Poli unique a 10 millimétres de longueur. Le canal du sable offre 
quelques circonvolutions et est dirigé en avant. L’anneau calcaire est composé de dix 
piéces d’un millimetre de largeur et ne possédant chacune qu'un prolongement médian 
antérieur ; le prolongement des piéces interradiales est plus gréle que celui des parties 
radiales. Les organes génitaux se composent de deux faisceaux de nombreux tubes 
jaunatres, simples et moniliformes. Les organes arborescents sont gréles et & parois 
minces. 

Rapports et Différences.—La Cucumaria croceoida rappelle beaucoup la C. crocea 
Lesson ; mais les pédicelles des radius dorsaux forment des rangées plus nombreuses que 
dans la C. crocea, les interradius paraissent posséder quelques pédicelles et de plus ses 
téguments renferment de nombreux corpuscules caleaires. 


Cucumaria armata, nov. sp. (PI. V. fig. 57 et 58.) 
Janvier 1903, Port William, [les Falkland ; profondeur 6 brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Le corps est ovale, un peu incurvé, avec une face dorsale bombée et une face 
ventrale légerement concave. La bouche et l’anus sont terminaux. Cet exemplaire 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI. 435.) 


32 M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


mesure 24 millimétres de longueur et 9 millimétres de plus grande largeur; sa colora- 
tion est blanchatre. 

Le radius médian ventral fait saillie et sur toute sa longueur se trouvent répartis 
une cinquantaine de pédicelles, disposés sur une seule rangée dans la région antérieure 
et en deux rangées irréguliérement alternantes sur la plus grande partie du radius. 
Les radius latéro-ventraux présentent une disposition des pédicelles a peu pres semblable 
4 celle du radius médian, mais peut-étre un peu moins nette. 

‘Toute la face dorsale est hérissée de papilles tres nombreuses ; en certains points on 
distingue par transparence les muscles longitudinaux. 

Les téguments sont minces et plus ou moins transparents; ils renferment de 
grandes plaques épaisses & contours irréguliers et & nombreuses perforations (fig. 57). 
Dans les espaces interradiaux du trivium ces plaques sont imbriquées les unes sur les 
autres. Les corpuscules caleaires des pédicelles (fig. 58) sont des batonnets & extrémités 
ramifiées, pouvant se réunir parfois pour constituer des plaques binoculaires & nombreux 
tubercules. 

Lianneau calcaire est gréle; il se compose de dix pieces en arceaux présentant 
chacune en avant une pointe médiane échancrée; les pieces radiales sont un peu plus 
fortes que les interradiales. Les muscles rétracteurs s’insérent au tiers antérieur du 
corps. La vésicule de Poli est unique. Les organes génitaux se composent de deux 
faisceaux de tubes simples, noiratres, placés dans le tiers antérieur du corps. 

Rapports et Différences.—La Cucumaria armata rappelle le genre Colochirus par la 
disposition des pédicelles du trivium en rangées radiales, tandis que ceux du bivium sont 
disséminés sur toute la surface dorsale, mais elle ne possede pas une région buccale 
pentaradiée et elle n’a qu'une seule sorte de corpuscules dans ses t¢guments. La présence 
de grandes plaques calcaires & contours irréguliers la s¢pare de la Cucumaria yeorgiana 
Lampert et de nos Cucumaria lateralis et attenuata. Elle présente aussi quelques 
atlinités avec les Psolidiwm. 


Cucumaria analis, nov. sp. (Pl. V. fig. 63.) 


Station 326, 5 au 26 Décembre 1904; Baie Jessie, Oreades du Sud; profondeur 10 
brasses. Six exemplaires. 


Les dimensions de ces divers échantillons varient entre 5 et 25 millimetres de 
longueur et 3 & 15 millimétres de diamétre. Leur corps est ovale, blanchatre. Les 
pédicelles sont localisés sur les radius, ott ils sont disposés suivant deux rangées par 
radius. Chaque rangée comprend une vingtaine de pédicelles et vers le milieu du corps, 
en certains points, elle présente un dédoublement. Chez un jeune échantillon, nous ne 
trouvons dans certaines régions qu'une unique rangée radiale. L’anus est bordé de cing 
ou dix petits pédicelles. Les tentacules, au nombre de dix, sont tous semblables et 
posstdent des ramifications latérales assez importantes. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI, 436.) 


DE L'EXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAISE, 33 


Les corpuscules calcaires (fig. 63) sont des plaques ovales, 4 contours irréguliers et 
présentant de nombreuses perforations. Dans les grands échantillons, ces plaques 
sont incurvées. Leur réseau présente parfois & la surface quelques tubercules peu 
saillants. 

L’anneau caleaire est composé de dix pieces en chevrons, & pointe médiane 
antérieure bifide; les parties radiales sont un peu plus fortes que les parties 
interradiales. 

Les muscles rétracteurs s’msérent vers le milieu du corps. L’unique vésicule de 
Polia 5 millimetres delongueur. Les glandes génitales sont composées de deux faisceaux 
de tubes simples. 

Rapports et Différences.—Cette Cucumaria analis est du groupe de la C. georgiana 
Lampert. La répartition des pédicelles le long des radius, la présence de cing A dix 
pédicelles périanaux et la forme des corpuscules calcaires la séparent nettement des 
autres especes de ce groupe. Par la disposition des pédicelles, la C. analis rappelle 
notre C. antarctica, mais elle s'en distingue par la forme des corpuscules caleaires. 


Cucumaria periproctu, nov. sp. (Pl. V. fig. 62.) 


Station 325, Avril 1903; Baie de la Scotia, Oreades du Sud; profondeur 9 a 10 
brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Le corps est obovale avec l’extrémité antérieure ¢largie et lextrémité postérieure 
tronquée. [] mesure 10 millimetres de longueur et 5 millimétres de plus grande largeur. 
Sa coloration générale est marron jaunatre; la face dorsale est de teinte un peu plus 
foncée que la face ventrale. 

Les pédicelles sont localisés sur les radius, ot ils sont disposés en deux rangées 
alternantes dans lesquelles on distingue de gros et de petits appendices, ces derniers 
étant quelquefois peu visibles. Des séries de cereles concentriques de petites papilles 
sont disposées de distance en distance autour de l’anus. 

Les téguments renferment des plaques calcaires & contours irréguliers et a 
nombreuses perforations ; sur les travées sont disséminés de distance en distance des 
tubercules ou des piquants. Dans les pédicelles nous trouvons des plaques terminales 
et de petites plaques latérales assez semblables 4 celles des parois du corps. 

L’anneau calcaire est composé de dix arceaux simples. Les muscles rétracteurs 
sinserent vers le tiers antérieur du corps. On trouve une seule vésicule de Poli, 

Rapports et Différences.—La Cucumaria periprocta appartient encore au groupe de 
la C. georgiana Lampert. Elle se distingue de cette espéce par le petit nombre de 
pédicelles de chaque radius et par ses plaques calcaires fortes et & grand nombre de 
perforations. La présence de cercles concentriques de petites papilles périanales et la 
disposition des pédicelles la caractérisent trés nettement et la séparent de nos C. lateralis, 
C. attenuata et C. analis. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI, 437.) 


34 : M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


Cucumaria perfida, noy. sp. (PI. V. fig. 59 et 60.) 


Station 325, Avril 1903; Baie de la Scotia, Orcades du Sud; profondeur 9 a 10 
brasses. Un exemplaire. 


Cet exemplaire est de petite taille: il mesure 6 millimétres de longueur et 
2°5 millimétres de largeur. Sa coloration est blanchatre. Son corps est ovale, presque 
eylindrique, il est légerement incurvé. 

La couronne tentaculaire est épanouie; elle se compose de dix tentacules allongés, 
dont les deux ventraux sont réduits 4 l'état de moignons. Les pédicelles sont localisés 
sur les radius. Chaque radius en renferme de huit 4 dix, disposés suivant deux rangées 
plus ou moins alternantes ne commencant qua une certaine distance de la région 
antérieure. Les appendices du bivium paraissent de plus petite taille que la plupart de 
ceux du trivium. 

Les téguments sont rigides; ils renferment de nombreuses plaques imbriquées les 
unes sur les autres et présentant chacune un grand nombre de perforations (fig. 59). 
Les pédicelles possedent des batonnets aplatis (fig. 60) n’ayant qu'une seule perforation. 

L’anneau caleaire se compose de dix arceaux. I] nous a été impossible de voir 
d’autres détails de lorganisation interne. 

Rapports et Différences.—La Cucumaria perfida appartient aussi au groupe de 
Cucumaria antarctiques dont le type est la C. georgiana Lampert. Elle se distingue 
de cette espece par le petit nombre de pédicelles de chaque radius et par ses plaques 
calcaires percées d'un grand nombre d’ouvertures et dépourvues de tubercules. 

Si on la compare a notre C. attenuata, on voit quelle s’en distingue par la disposition 


des pédicelles et par ses corpuscules calcaires pourvus d'un grand nombre de petites 
perforations. 


Cucumaria secunda, nov. sp. (Pl. V. fig. 61.) 


Station 325, Mai 1903; Baie de la Scotia, Orcades du Sud ; profondeur 9 & 10 brasses. 
Un exemplaire. 


Cet exemplaire est bien épanoui. Il mesure 50 millimétres de longueur et 20 milli- 
métres de plus grand diamétre. Le corps est cylindrique avec la région postérieure 
distendue et arrondie, tandis que la partie antérieure est plus ou moins plissée. La 
coloration générale est blanchatre. 

Les pédicelles sont localisés sur les radius en rangées qui ne débutent qu’A 10 milli- 
métres en arriére de la couronne tentaculaire et qui s’arrétent 4 5 millimétres de l’anus. 
Le radius médian ventral renferme une cinquantaine de pédicelles répartis pour la 
plupart en deux rangées plus ou moins alternes; quelques-uns de ces appendices sont 
placés en dehors de ces rangées. Dans les radius latéro-ventraux, les pédicelles sont 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 438.) 


DE L'EXPEDITION ANTA RCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAISE. 39D 


disposés, en avant et en arriére, suivant deux rangées; mais dans la région moyenne ils 
sont placés sur quatre rangées. 

Les radius dorsaux offrent quatre 4 six rangées de pédicelles sur la plus grande partie 
de leur longueur, sauf pourtant aux extrémités antérieure et postérieure. L’interradius 
dorsal est par suite couvert de pédicelles sur un centimetre de longueur dans sa région 
moyenne. L’anus est entouré par de petits pédicelles. 

La couronne tentaculaire se compose de dix tentacules, dont les deux ventraux sont 
plus petits que les autres et ne présentent & leur sommet que deux branches terminales 
munies chacune de quelques ramifications. La papille génitale fait saillie dans le cercle 
tentaculaire. 

Les téguments renferment des plaques (fig. 61) imbriquées les unes sur les autres, 
a contours irréguliers et présentant huit & dix perforations. Un petit mamelon se trouve 
au centre de certaines de ces plaques. Ces corpuscnles calcaires sont surtout abondants 
dans les pédicelles. 

L’anneau calcaire se compose de dix arceaux de 5 millimétres de largeur. Chaque 
arceau présente une pointe médiane, de 5 millimétres, dirigée en avant; cette pointe est 
simple dans les piéces interradiales et bifide pour les radiales. 

Les muscles rétracteurs sont gréles et s'insérent sur le milieu du corps. La vésicule 
de Poli, unique, a 5 4 6 millimétres de longueur. Les organes génitaux sont formés de 
deux faisceaux de tubes simples, de couleur blanc jaunatre, atteignant 20 4 30 millimétres 
de longueur. 

Rapports et Différences.—La Cucumaria secunda appartient au groupe des C. 
georgiana Lampert, C. lateralis Vaney et C. attenuata Vaney, dont les corpuscules 
caleaires sont des plaques perforées sans prolongement épineux. Dans cette nouvelle 
espéce les plaques sont nombreuses et imbriquées les unes sur les autres ; elles ressemblent 
un peu & celles décrites chez la C. pithacnion Lampert (= C. georgiana Lampert), mais 
elles n’oftrent qu'un seul tubercule central. D’ailleurs la disposition des pédicelles est 
différente de celle de la C. georgiana et l’anneau caleaire est bien plus fort que celui de 
cette espece. Cette C. secunda présente quelques caractéres communs avec notre C. 
analis, mais leurs corpuscules caleaires sont différents et la disposition des pédicelles 
nest pas la méme dans ces deux espéces; d’ailleurs la C. analis a ses tentacules tous 
semblables, tandis que dans la C! secunda la couronne tentaculaire présente deux tentacules 


ventraux plus petits que les autres. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 439.) 


36 


Fig. 1. Benthodytes spuma, nov. sp. 
Fig. 2. Benthodytes Browni, nov. sp. 
Fig oa ” 2”? 

Fig. 4. Peniagone Piriei, nov. sp. 
Fig. 5. - 3 

Fig. 6. Peniayone Wiitoni, nov. sp. 
lifes Tie 3 3 

Fig. 8. Huphronides Scotizx, nov. sp. 
Fig. 9. 55 55 

Fig. 10. Peniagone Mossmani, nov. sp. 
Fig. 11. % ¥ 

Fig. 12. Cucumaria aspera, nov. sp. 
Fig. 13. Psychropotes Brucet, nov. sp. 
Fig. 14. Psychropotes laticauda, nov. sp. 
Fig. 15. Cucumaria conspicua, nov. sp. 
Fig. 16. ” ” 

Fig. 17. Cucumaria psolidiformis, nov. sp- 
Fig. 18. bb} ” ~ 

Fig. 19. Peniagone Mossman, nov. sp. 
Fig. 20. Benthodytes spuma, nov. sp. 
Fig. 21. Psychropotes Brucet, nov. sp. 
Fig. 22. ‘5 PA 

Fig. 23. Benthodytes recta, nov. sp. 
Fig. 24. Psychropotes laticauda, nov. sp. 
Fig, 25. Scotoplanes globosa, Théel. 
Fig. 26. * 

Fig. 27. 

Fig. 28. i ee 

Fig. 29. Peniagone Wiltoni, nov. sp. 
Fig. 30. 5 33 

Fig. 31. ni 7 

Fig. 32. Peniagone Mossmani, nov. sp. 
Fig. 33. 3 = 

Fig, 34. Synallactes Robertsont, nov. sp. 
Fig. 35. 

Fig. 36. + 

Fig. 37. Benthodytes recta, nov. sp. 
Fig. 38. + 3 

Fig. 39. Euphronides Scotix, nov. sp. 
Fig. 40. 3 

Fig. 41. Psychropotes Brucei, nov. sp. 
Fig. 42. 


M. CLEMENT VANEY: LES HOLOTHURIES 


EXPLICATION DES PLANCHES. 


” ” 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. 


PLaNncHE I. 


Face ventrale. 


Face dorsale. Réduct. = }. 

Face ventrale. Réduct. =$. 
Face ventrale. Reduct.=4. 
Vue de profil. Reéduct. = 3. 


Face ventrale. Réduct.=4. 


Réduct. = 4 env. 


Région antérieure de la face dorsale. Gr.=1. 

Face dorsale. Réduct. =. 

Face ventrale. Réduct. =}. 

Face ventrale. Réduct.=3. 

Région antérieure vue de profil, Gr.=1. 

Vue de profil. Gr.=2 env. 

Région antérieure de la face dorsale. Réduct. =} 
Prancue II. 

Face ventrale. Réduct.=4. 

Face dorsale. Gr, =2 env. 

Face ventrale. Gr.=2 env. 

Vue de profil. Gr.=4. 

Face ventrale. Gr.= 4. 

Région antérieure de la face dorsale, Réduct. = #. 

Région antérieure de la face dorsale. Réduct. = $. 


Face ventrale. 
Région caudale vue de profil. 
Face dorsale. 


Réduct. = 3. 
Rédu 


Réduct. = $. 


ct. =4. 


Corpuscules cruciformes & quatre ou cing branches. 


= 300. 


Pruancue III. 


Batonnet épineux de grande taille. 


Batonnets épineux de petite taille. 


Corpuscule en C. Gr. = 130, 


Corpuscule mamelonné. 
Corpuscule tétraradié muni de mamelon. 
Corpuscule tétraradié, vu de face. 
Batonnet épineux. 


Gr. = 180. 


Gr. = 300. 


Corpuscules cruciformes, vus de face. 
Corpuscule eruciforme, vu de profil. 
Base du corpuscule caleaire, vue de face. Gr, = 300. 


Corpuscule vu de profil. 
Batonnets des pédicelles, 
Corpuscule cruciforme. 
Batonnets des tentacules. 
Corpuscules tri- et tétraradiés vus de face. 
Corpuscule vu de profil. 
Corpuscule vu de profil. 


Gr. = 300. 
Gr. = 180. 
Gr. = 300. 
Gr— bie 


Gr. = 180. 
Gr. = 180. 


Corpuscules tétraradiés vus de face. 


TRANS., VOL, XLVI., 440.) 


Gr. = 180. 


Gr. = 180. 


Gr. = 300. 


Gr. = 300. 


Gr. = 180. 
Gr. = 180. 


Gr. = 180. 


Gr. = 180. 


. 66. 


. Cucumaria conspicua, nov, sp. 


DE L'EXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAITSE. 


3. Thyone articulata, nov. sp. 


” ” 


. Cucumaria grandis, Vaney. 
. ’ 


” ” 


. Psolidium Coatsi, nov. sp. 


. Cucumaria psolidiformis, nov. sp. 


” ” 


a ” 


. Cucumaria aspera, nov. sp. 


. Cucumaria armata, nov. sp. 


bb] 29 


. Cucumaria perjida, nov. sp. 


” ” 


. Cucumaria secunda, nov. sp. 

. Cucumaria periprocta, nov. sp. 
. Cucumarta analis, nov. sp. 

. Cucumaria croceoida, nov. sp. 


” ” 


” ” 


Puancue LV, 


Corpuscules caleaires des téeguments. Gr. = 300. 
Anneau calcaire. Gr. =3. 

Corpuscules des téguments vus de face. 
Corpuscule des téguments vu de profil. 


Plaques calcaires de la paroi ventrale du corps. 


Gr. = 180. 
Gr. = 180. 


37 


Gr. = 180. 


Corpuscules aborescents de la paroi dorsale. Gr. = 180. 
Plaque de la paroi dorsale du corps. Gr.=180. 
Corpuscules des pédicelles ventraux. Gr.=180. 


Gr. = 180. 
Gr. = 180. 


Plaque des parois du corps. 
Corpuscules des gros pédicelles. 


Plaque terminale et batonnet des petits pédicelles. 
= 180. 

Corpuscules de la couche profonde des téguments. 
= 180. 

Corpuscules de la couche superficielle des téguments. 
= 180. 

Corpuscules des pédicelles. Gr. = 180, 

PuancuE V. 

Corpuscules des téguments. Gr, = 180. 

Corpuscules des pédicelles. Gr. = 180. 

Corpuscules des téguments. Gr, = 180. 

Corpuscule des pédicelles. Gr, = 300. 

Corpuscules des téguments. Gr. =180. 

Corpuscules des téguments, Gr.=180. 

Plaques des téguments. Gr. =180. 

Plaque terminale des pédicelles ventraux. Gr.=180. 

Plaque ovale et perforce des téguments. Gr. = 300. 

Batonnets aplatis des téguments. Gr. = 300. 


Plaques des téguments. Gr.=180. 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVI., 441.) 


Gr. 


Gy. 


Gy. 


Vol Vi. 


Vou. XLVI. 


Scot. Nat. Ant. Exp. 


from Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh. 


Vaney: Les Holothuries de Expédition Antarctique Nationale Ecossaise. 


PLANCHE I. 


le” 


Pairs 


~ 
+s 
»% 


oe 
25 y 


s 


ie rae Po she OPS RA EMS oY 
= eo OD 6a 9 a ORO BS” STD 
“66'S aoe BEC OELEE DS oS if 


C. Vaney: del. 


Seot.’ Nat. Ant. Exp. Vol Wa 


from Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh. Vou. XLVI. 


Vanzy: Les Holothuries de l’Expédition Antarctique Nationale Ecossaise.—Piancue II. 


4 


4 

4? 

Dk oll 
ee. ey eh ead 

2c rian pre ad gos 17 


REASON S te 
rca AN, Sy 


cod Jey | 
$9 2 
SRD \ f 
a oof 9 Signy OE 52 Lj 
q hey ee = SPC HEL es 7 f 4 
% yo OTep =e ee ; é 


NS li eng a 18 


@ @FFSe Oey 


ty @9 8 F595 ODL 


Ne “Ata | 
22 


C, Vaney: del. 


Scot. Nat. Ant. Exp. Volk Vale 


from Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh. Vou. XLVI. 


Vanny: Les Holothuries de Expédition Antarctique Nationale Heossaise—PLaNncue III. 


C. Vaney: del. 


Seot. Nat. Ant. Exp: Vol Wor 


from Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh. Vou. XLVI. 


Vanry: Les Holothuries de Expédition Antarctique Nationale Bcossaise.—Prancue IV. 


C. Vaney: del. 


Seot. Nat. Ant. Exp. Vol Wil: 


770M Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh. Vou. XLVI. 


Vaney: Les Holothuries de ?Expédition Antarctique Nationale Ecossaise.—PLaNcHuE V. 
I { 


C. Vaney: del, 


01) Meg ARG EN, 4 at 2 
alin = hey ' 
i 4 i 


~ t ; 
; Pe ee ee 
} : “7 
Oe ory s 
1 
if 
i 
f 
a. aA oe 
i 
© 
= A 
7 
: ; 
> 
i 
' 


PART IL. 
EMD OT Ds: 


(SUPPLEMENT.) 


ih HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH 
NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


By JAMES RITCHIE, M.A., B.Sc., 


Natural History Department, The Royal Scottish Museum, Edinburgh. 


(SUPPLEMENT.) 


PEE ee 2 OLY ee Oe 
iS ea ee Lge yh, 


: = - _ 
ya nt 
: ; Sprae 


ur ee 19 


( 43 ) 


Supplementary Report on the Hydroids of the Scottish National Antarctic 
Expedition. By James Ritchie, M.A., B.Sc., Natural History Department, The 
Royal Scottish Museum. Communicated by W. 8. Brucn, LL.D. 


(MS. received December 8, 1908. Read January 4, 1909. Issued separately May 27, 1909.) 


Since the report on the Hydroids collected by the Scotva was completed, almost 
three years ago, I have had an opportunity, thanks to the kindness of Dr W. 8. Bruce, 
of looking through the enormous mass of material brought together by him during his 
Antarctic voyages. The search, begun in the hope of finding a few minute species 
which, since many are epizoic on other forms of marine life, might readily be overlooked 
on cursory examination—has resulted in the addition of no less than 25 forms to the 
36 already recorded. Deducting from this total of 61 forms two varieties, it appears 
that the Scotia collection contains in all 59 distinct species. Few, indeed, of these have 
been obtained in truly Antarctic latitudes—subantarctie or temperate seas having 
furnished the greater number—but this result is in accordance with the findings of the 
majority of the recent Antarctic expeditions.* Dr BriLarp, in summarising the results 
of the Belgian, Swedish, and French expeditions, states that the known Hydroid fauna 
of Antarctic regions comprises only 32 species. But from his list he has, | think un- 
justly, excluded South Georgian records. His list, moreover, published before the 
valuable paper by Professor Hickson and Mr Gravety on the Discovery Hydroids was 
issued, necessarily makes no reference to the large number of forms recorded by them 
from Victoria Land. 

The following figures indicate the wealth in species of the Hydroid fauna of Antarctic 
seas, the Antarctic area being defined as the region lying in “‘ higher southern latitudes 
than the extreme limit of floating ice, according to the most recent research” (Bruce, 
1894, p. 208); that is, an area corresponding to the Antarctic Circumpolar Subregion 
of ORTMANN (1906). To this region belong the 14 species collected by the Belgian 
expedition (HarTLaus, 1904), 24 of the Swedish collection of 50 species (J ADERHOLM, 
1905), the 8 species of the French expedition (BitLarD, 1906, ), and 24 of the 25 
English records (Hickson and Gravety, 1907). From the same area the Scotia 
obtained only 9 species, although some of the most fruitful stations, Burdwood Bank, 
the Falkland Islands, and Gough Island, lay just beyond its boundary. Extracting 
the distinct species from those lists, we find that their number amounts to 68. 

The Hydroid Zoophytes, then, are represented in the Antarctic cireumpolar seas, 

* The report on the Hydroids of the German expedition has not yet been published. 


(REPRINTED FROM THE TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF EDINBURGH, VOL. XLVIL., Pr. 65-101.) 


44 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


according to our present knowledge, by 68 different species, 21 of which are Gymnoblasts, 
47 Calyptoblasts, while of the total, 36 must, so far, be regarded as peculiar to the 
Antaretic region. As regards the number of individuals as distinct from variety of 
species, recent results indicate that the area is a thinly populated one, for comparatively 
few Hydroids were brought up in any one haul of trawl or dredge, a strong contrast to 
the abundance of tangled masses which occur in such temperate areas as the North Sea. 
On the whole, the Antarctic Hydroid fauna may be looked upon as a rather meagre 
one, comprising comparatively few species belonging to well-established genera. 

From the point of view of geographical distribution the collection to be described 
is of a miscellaneous character, for Dr Bruce collected material on his outward 
and homeward voyages as well as at his southern stations. Thus specimens from 
tropical seas—from the Cape Verde Islands, from Brazil, and from St Helena—are 
recorded alongside specimens from subantarctic and Antarctic localities, but so little 
is known regarding the Hydroid fauna of those places that it seemed better to include 
them here, at the same time furnishing a record of all the Hydroids brought together 
by the Scotva. 

Two species, Thyroscyphus tridentatus and Plumularia lagenifera, hitherto recorded 
only from the South and North Pacific respectively, have been found in the South 
Atlantic, while the known ranges of several other species have been considerably 
extended. 

Of new forms there have been described the trophosome and gonangium of 
Sertularia heterodonta from off Brazil, the trophosomes of Antenella quadriaurita 
from Gough Island, and of a variety of Lafoéa gracillima from deep water to the 
south of the South Orkneys, while the gonangia of Sertularia rathbuni and Anten- 
nopsis scotie have been described for the first time. 

Some additions have been made to the existing descriptions of rare species, and 
noteworthy variations have been recorded in the hope that the realisation of the con- 
siderable limits within which variation is possible may tend to the better understanding 
of reliable specific characters. 

I gladly seize this opportunity of setting right several unfortunate errors which 
occurred in the earlier report on the Scotea Hydroids. There should be substituted 
Hincxs for Hinks, Lamarck for LAMark, JOHNSTON for JoHNSTONE, and Halecium for 
Haleciun on p. 523. Aglaophenia dichotoma of the former report I now identify 
with A. heterodonta, Jiderholm (infra, p. 74). 

In the following list, which takes the place of that in the original report, I have 
included all the species collected by the Scottish expedition, those discussed in the 
present paper being indicated by an asterisk :— 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIL., 66.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


GYMNOBLASTEA. 


Family PopocoryNnip&. 


Podocoryne carnea, Sars, 1846. 


Family MyriorHeLipa. 


* Myriothela austro-georgix, Jiiderh., 1904, p. 47. 


Family EuDENDRID&. 


* Hudendrium annulatum (?), Norman, 1864, p. 48. 


Family ATRACTYLIDA. 


* Perigonimus repens (%!), (Wright, 1858), p. 48. 


CALYPTOBLASTEA. 


Family Hatecip®. 


Halecium arboreum, Allman, 1888. Halecium halecinum (Linn., 1758). 
(= 4 robustum, Allman, 1888.) 3 interpolatum, Ritchie, 1907, (1). 
; beanti (Johnston, 1838). ys tenellum, Hincks, 1861. 


Family CaMPANULARID&®. 


* Clytia johnstoni (Alder, 1857), p. 49. * Kucopella crenata (?), Hartlaub, 1901, p. 51. 
Campanularia angulata, Hincks, 1861. Silicularia hemispherica (Allman, 1888). 
m 3 clytioides (Lamx., 1824), p. 49. Hebella striata, Allman, 1888. 
5; tincta, Hincks, 1861. 5 a“ var. plana, Ritchie, 1907, (1). 
5 sp., Ritchie, 1907, (1). Calycella syringa (Linn., 1758). 
* Obelia geniculata (Linn., 1758), p. 50. * Campanulina chilensis, Hartlaub, 1905, p. 52. 
* ,, hyalina, Clarke, 1879, p. 50. * Thyroscyphus tridentatus (Bale, 1893), p. 52. 


* ,,  longissima (Pallas, 1766), p. 50. 


Family Laroiipa. 


Lafoéa antarctica, Hartlaub, 1905. Grammaria magellanica, Allman, 1888. 
»  gracillima (Alder, 1857). Brucella armata, Ritchie, 1907, (1). 
ee 3 var. benthophila, n. var., p. 54. 
Family SERTULARID®. 
Sertularella arborea, Kirchenpauer, 1884. * Sertularia cornicina (M ‘Crady, 1859), p. 56. 
. contorta, Kirchenpauer, 1884. ut os heterodonta, n. sp., p. 57. 
ss jiliformis, var. reticulata, Ritchie, * rh mayert, Nutting, 1904, p. 59. 
1907, (1). * - operculata, Linn., 1758, p. 60. 
* = Sustiformis (2), Hineks, 1861, p. 55. "3 rathbuni, Nutting, 1904, p. 61. 
* 


PA gayt (Lamx., 1821), p. 56. Thuiaria articulata (Pallas, 1766), p. 62. 


3 rectitheca, Ritchie, 1907, (1). (= ,,  pectinata, Allman, 1888.) 
Fe tenella (Alder, 1857). Synthecium robustum, Nutting, 1904. 
i tricuspidata (Alder, 1856). Staurotheca reticulata, Ritchie, 1907, (1). 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 67.) 


45 


46 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


Family PLUMULARIDA. 


* Plumularia curvata, Jiiderholm, 1904, p. 64. * Monostxchas quadridens (M‘Crady, 1859), p. 69. 
(= » magellanica, Hartlaub, 1905.) * Antenella quadriaurita, n. sp., p. 70. 
1 echinulata, Lamarck, 1836, p. 65. * Aglaophenia allmani, Nutting, 1900, p. 71. 
4} lagenifera, var. septifera, Torrey, 1902, * BA dubia, Nutting, 1900, p. 73. 
p. 65. * ep heterodonta, Jiiderholm, 1904, p. 74. 
a pinnata (Linn., 1758). (= -# dichotoma, of first Scotia Report.) 
- setacea (Ellis, 1755), p. 67. = 55 minima, Nutting, 1900, p. 75. 
5 unilateralis, Ritchie, 1907, (1). * a5 latecarinata, Allman, 1877, p. 76. 
Antennularia harilaubi, Ritchie, 1907, (1). * Halicornaria longicauda, Nutting, 1900, p. 76. 


* Antennopsis scotix, Ritchie, 1907 (1), p. 68. 


The localities from which the species recorded in this paper have been obtained are so 
scattered that, for convenience of reference, | have brought them together in list form. 


Sration 313, 62° 10'S., 41° 20’ W. (8. of South Orkneys). 
Lafoéa gracillima, var. benthophila, n. var. 


Scotia Bay, SourH OrKNEYs. 
Myriothela austro-georgiz, Jaderholm. 
Burpwoop Bank, 54° 25’ S., 57° 32’ W. 
Campanulina chilensis, Hartlaub. 


Port Sraniey, FaLKianD IsLaNDs. 
Perigonimus repens (22) (Wright). 
Plumularia curvata, Jéiderholm. 
GoueH IsLaND. 
Obelia longissima (Pallas). 
Thyroscyphus tridentatus (Bale). 
Antenella quadriaurita, n. sp. 
CapE Cotony. 
Houtjes Bay (Saldanha Bay). 
Plumularia echinulata, Lamk. 
Saldanha Bay, entrance to. 
Eudendrium annulatum (2), Norman. 
Obelia geniculata (Linn.). 
Sertularia operculata, Linn. 
Thuiaria articulata (Pallas). 
Plumularia lagenifera, var. septifera, Torrey. 
Antennopsis scotiw, Ritchie. 
Aglaophenia heterodonta, Jiderholm. 
Sr HELENA. 
Sertularella gayi (Lamx.). 
Sratron 8], Abrohlos Bank, Brazil, 18° 24’ S8., 37° 58’ W. 
Sertularia cornicina (M‘Crady). 


mp heterodonta, n. sp. 
f rathbunt, Nutting. 


Monostechas quadridens (M‘Crady). 
Aglaophenia allmani, Nutting. 
dubia, Nutting. 

* minima, Nutting. 
Halicornaria longicauda, Nutting. 


” 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIL, 68.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 47 


Sr Vincent, Caps VerbE [sLanps. 
Eucopella crenata (2), Hartlaub. 
Sertularella fustformis (?), Hincks. 
Lat. 27° 54’ N., long. 33° 17’ W. 
Clytia johnstoni (Alder). 
Sertularta mayert, Nutting. 
Sration 5387, 29° 54’ N., 34° 10’ W. 
Campanularia elytioides (Lamx.). 
Obelia hyalina, Clarke. 
Srarion 538, 32° 11’ N., 34° 10’ W. 
Plumularia setacea (Ellis). 
Aglaophenia latecarinata, Allman. 


Myriothela austro-georgix, Jiderholm, 1904. 


Several specimens of this bizarre Hydroid have to be recorded. All came from a 
single neighbourhood, Scotia Bay in the South Orkneys, but the depths at which the 
specimens were obtained varied. Some of the examples have already been described by 
Professor J. ARTHUR THOMSON in a short paper in which he regards them, not without 
hesitation, as the separated gonostyles of some unknown giant Siphonopore (‘THoMson, 
1904). There can be no doubt, however, that these specimens are identical with those 
found by both the Swedish and the French Antarctic expeditions, and recorded by Drs 
JADERHOLM and BitLarp (1906, p. 4) as Myriothela austro-georgie. The length, the 
thickened basal portion on which the blastostyles (each bearing its male or 
female gonophores and a distal tentacle or two) are massed, and, most characteristic 
of all, the capitate tentacles scattered irregularly over the whole hydranth, even 
amongst the blastostyles—these features show that our examples belong to the same 
species as theirs. Nor can there be any doubt that JADERHOLM was correct in regarding 
his specimens as belonging to the genus Myriothela, for their resemblance to the 
northern forms is striking,—solitary hydranths, absence of hydrocaulus, capitate 
tentacles scattered over the body, blastostyles grouped at the base of the hydranth, the 
presence of longitudinal folds of endoderm lining the inner cavity. 

Professor THoMSON remarks that some of the colonies bore solitary gonophores, while 
one had as many as seven on its blastostyles, and suggests the possibility of the presence 
of two species. Since, however, the specimens examined by JADERHOLM had generally 
from one to three, but sometimes as many as six female gonophores, while the male 
gonophores occasionally numbered even ten on a single blastostyle, the variation is so 
great that little stress can be laid on this as a specific character. 

A water-colour sketch made on the capture of one of the specimens indicates that 
their colour was a stronger and brighter orange than is shown by JADERHOLM’s figure. 
(JADERHOLM, 1905, pl. i.). 

Locality.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys ; dredged in 10 fathoms, April 1903; dredged 
in 9 to 10 fathoms, May 1903; dredged among mud and pebbles, 18th December 1903. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 69.) 


48 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


One specimen was found “on the surface of the water, in a hole which had been cut in 
the ice. The depth of the water at that place was 20 to 30 fathoms; the temperature 
was 29° F.” 

M. austro-georgie has previously been recorded from Cumberland, South Georgia, 
(JADERHOLM), and from Flanders Bay and Booth-Wandel Island (Brnuarp). 


Eudendrium annulatum (?), Norman, 1864. 


Two small clumps of bushy colonies appear to belong to this species, but the 
weathering of our specimens, and the indefiniteness of the characters which differentiate 
the species of Hudendriwm, render certainty impossible. The colonies are 5 em. high, 
and agree with Canon NorMmay’s species in being bushy and beset with very numerous 
branchlets ; in possessing thick, rugged stems, on the surface of which, near the base, 
the fascicular tubes are more or less contorted ; in having branches closely covered with 
strongly marked rings; and in bearing hydranths with about from 16 to 18 tentacles. 
On the other hand the gonophores, all of which are female, are borne on tentacle- 
bearmg hydranths and not on atrophied individuals. So many, however, are the 
gonophores and so closely are they packed around the hydranth, that in not a few cases 
it was difficult to distinguish the presence of tentacles. Since, in some species at least, 
the loss of the tentacles is a degenerative change keeping pace with advancing maturity, 
their presence in this case may be of less significance than at first one tends to regard it. 

These measurements were made:—The diameter of the unfascicled branches and 
branchlets is almost constant, about 0°18 mm. The hydranths are about twice as long 
as broad, the breadth being measured at the level of the bases of the tentacles (0°57 mm. 
long, 0°28 mm. broad). 

Locality.—Entrance to Saldanha Bay, Cape Colony. Depth, 25 fathoms. 21st May 
1904. 

Eudendrium annulatum is a North Atlantic form which has been recorded from 
Shetland (Norman, 1864); Jan Mayen (MarkTANNER-TURNERETSCHER, 1890) ; Pas-de- 
Calais (BhrENcoURT, 1899); Norwegian Coast (BoNNEVIE, 1899). 


Perigonimus repens (2?) (Wright, 1858). 


Scanty material which I have, not without doubt, referred to the above species was 
collected on the shore at Port Stanley. The stems, with a diameter of from 0°04 to 
0°05 mm., arise from a stolon creeping upon an encrusting Polyzoon, and reach a height 
of 10mm. They bear a considerable number of branches which leave the stem at a 
sharp angle and carry secondary, and these sometimes twigs of tertiary degree, in such 
a way as to give the colonies the appearance of being dichotomously branched. The 
offshoots can always be distinguished, however, by the presence of a slight constriction 
at their bases. The stems bear distinct rings at their bases and here and there through- 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVII., 70.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 49 


out their course, while the intermediate portions are more or less corrugated. A 
delicate chitinous envelope surrounds the ccenosare and is adorned with minute sand 
particles, fragments of sponge spicules, ete., this coating being continued over the lower 
part of the hydranth. The hydranths, which are in poor condition, appear to be rather 
globular in shape and have from 12 to 15 tentacles. Short-stalked gonophores oceur 
scattered over the hydrocaulus, but they are far from mature and offer no characters of 
significance, 

I have no hesitation in identifying my specimens with those collected by PaEssLER 
at Port Stanley in 1895 and described by Harriaus (1905, p. 530), although our 
examples bear more numerous branches than his “gar nicht oder nur schwach 
verzweigten Hydrocauli.” And I follow Harrnavs, but with considerable hesitation, in 
referring the colonies to the Perigonimus repens of WRIGHT, an almost unbranched form 
with a maximum height of “4 inch” (H1ncks, 1868, p. 90), contenting myself merely 
with adding a second mark of interrogation to that which expresses Harriavus’s doubt. 

Locality.— Growing on an encrusting Polyzoon, from seaweed found on the shore at 
Port Stanley, Falkland Islands. January 1908. 


Clytia johnstoni (Alder, 1857). 


Of this common European species only a few stems occur on Saragassum weed. 
They resemble miniature British examples of C. johnstoni, structurally alike in every 
detail, but altogether on a much smaller scale. They are even less in some measure- 
ments than the small variety found by Dr Binttarp (1907, p. 168) on material from the 


Saragassum Sea. 


Measurements :— 
Stem, length . 2 : : : : 16 -2:1 mm. 
5, diameter : ; 5 ; 0°63-0°71 ,, 
Hydrotheca, length . ; F : 9 066-077 _,, 
7 diameter at margin : ; ; 0°41-0-48 ,, 


Locality.— Off Saragassum weed, from lat. 27° 54’ N., long. 33° 177 W. 28th June 
1904. 


Campanularia clytioides (Lamouroux, 1824). 


Several specimens of this minute species have been found creeping on Saragassum 
fronds. The stems are short, measuring from 0°74 mm. to 0°95 mm. in length and 0-1 
mm. in diameter, and are marked by about eight compact rings at the base of the 
hydrocaulus and about six less compact rings beneath the hydrotheca. The inter- 
mediate portion of the stem is smooth or only slightly corrugated. The hydrothecze are 
short (0°34 mm.), rather broad at the mouth (0°38 mm.), and taper rapidly to the base. 
Their walls are thick, but vary considerably in different individuals and even in the 
various parts of the same individual. At the margin of the shelf which divides the 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIL, 71.) 


50 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


cavity of the hydrotheca proper from the small globular cavity at its base is a ring of 
bright dots, indicating the points at which the base of the polyp was attached to the 
hydrothecal wall. 

The gonosome is not present. 

Locality.—On gulf weed from Station 537. Lat. 29° 54’ N., long. 34° 10’ W. 
29th June 1904. 


Obelia geniculata (Linneeus, 1758). 


In addition to the Gough Island locality given in the former report, this widely 
distributed species occurs from another station. Gonophores are present on the colonies 
from habitat (0). 

Locality.—(a) Entrance to Saldanha Bay, Cape Colony. Depth, 25 fathoms. 21st 
May 1904. (b) Growing plentifully, along with Plumularia lagenifera, var. septifera, 
on the segments and telson of a lobster, Palinostus lalandii, from the same locality. 


Obelia hyalina, Clarke, 1879. 


Many small, 6-mm. high colonies of this species occur creeping over the fronds 
of Saragassum weed in association with Campanularia clytioides. The characters 
are as described and figured by CriarKe, and the dimensions of our specimens 
appear to agree more closely with those of the type than do the corresponding 
measurements of the large-sized Talisman examples described by Dr A. Brttarp 
(1907, p. 170). 


Measurements :— 
Hydrotheca, depth : 5 : : 2 0-2 mm. 
Pr maximum diameter : : : Ossie. 
Peduncles, length : 4 ; : : 0°36-0°45 mm. 
Stem internodes, length : : : ; 0:54 mm. 


No gonangia were present. 
Locality.—Creeping on gulf weed from Station 537. Lat. 29° 54’ N., long. 34° 10’ W. 
29th June 1904. 


Obelia longissima (Pallas, 1766). 


In addition to the colonies already recorded from the South Orkney Islands, a small 
fragment whose characters agree with those of the above species has been found at Gough 
Island. 

Measurements :— 

Hydrotheca, depth . . : : F 0-38-0°45 mm. 


_ diameter at margin 5 ae ; 0°38-0°45 


” 


Locality.—Oft Gough Island. Depth, 25 fathoms. Bottom, rock. 28rd April 
1904. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIL., 72.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 51 


Eucopella crenata (2), Hartlaub, 1901. 


A very few examples, whose occurrence has already been mentioned (Rircuig, 1907, 
p- 488, footnote), were creeping on seaweed obtained on the shore of St Vincent, Cape 
Verde Islands. The absolute identification of these examples with Professor Harriaus’s 
E. crenata is, inthe absence of the gonosome, impossible, and, considering differences 
which occur in the shape of the hydrotheca and in the ringing of the peduncle, 
appears to me to be a matter of doubt. Our specimens, however, are identical 
with those described by Dr A. Bitiarp, 1907, and I follow him in assigning them 
(with a query) to the above species. ‘he hydrotheca are more conical than 
those of the type, and their proportions differ slightly from those of BitLarp’s 
specimens, where the depth exceeds the breadth, for here these dimensions are 
identical, or the latter may even exceed the former. The margin of the hydrotheca 
is cut into about thirteen rounded teeth, and above the projecting septum at the 
base there occurs a circle of from 28 to 31 bright dots (indicated in Harriavp’s fig. 27). 
The peduncles bear from 9 to 12 sharply defined rings at the base, and from 1 to 4 
annulations at the summit, while the median portion is generally more or less 
corrugated. 


Measurements :— 
Length of peduncle. : : c ; 1:01-1:98 mm. 
Breadth Re : ; é j : 0:07-0:09 _,, 
Depth of hydrotheca . 3 : : ; 0:32-0°45_,, 
Breadth % at margin : : : 0:34-0°40 ,, 


Locality.—Growing on seaweed from the shore to the N.E. of Porto Grande, 
St Vincent, Cape Verde Islands. 1st December 1902. 

Apparent evidences'of regeneration are given by some of the specimens. To mention 
one example. The hydrotheca is borne on a stem 1°68 mm. in length, but this stem is 
composed of two distinct portions, a basal section 1:04 mm. long with walls 9» in 
thickness, of a dark horn colour and deeply stained by eosin. ‘This portion is 
sharply truncated at the distal end. It is succeeded by a shorter section 0°64 mm. 
long, with walls only 6 in thickness, clear and transparent and faintly tinged 
with eosin. It is apparent that the peduncle has been truncated at a particular point, 
and that from this point the regenerating hydranth has built a new perisarcal 
protecting sheath which, as one would expect, differs in density from the older 
portion. It is interesting to note that the regenerated portion has, instead of 
continuing the smooth character of the old peduncle, assumed the character of a 
complete peduncle, for it bears four clean-cut rings above its point of origin, these 
being followed by a corrugated portion, and this by three rings below the hydrotheca. 
In all the cases examined the regeneration process has reproduced a complete but 
miniature peduncle. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIL., 73.) 


92 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


Campanulina chilensis, Hartlaub, 1905. 


Three minute colonies epizoic on Haleciwm bean belong to this species. The 
ringing and branching of the stems and the shape of the hydrothece agree with the 
descriptions and figures of Hartiaus and of JADERHOLM (1905), but although the former 


‘ 


says of the hydrothecee that they are “viel weniger conisch als die von C. repens, 
Wright” [! Ayman, 1864], I cannot distinguish between the hydrothece of the South 
American and British species. C. chalenszs is, however, more frequently branched than 
C. repens, but I doubt whether this and the other rather indefinite characters cited by 
Harravs are constant and of specific value. Scarcity of material of both the South 
American and British forms, however, prevents a comparison sultficiently extensive to 


warrant me in setting them down as belonging to the same species. 


Measurements :— 
C. chilensis. C. repens.* 
Stem, diameter : : ; 0:06 mm. 0:08 mm. 
Hydvotheca, length . : : 0-20—-0°21 mm. 0-18-0-28 mm. 
diameter at mouth . 0:09 mm. 0:10 mm. 


Locality. —Growing upon Halecium bean from Station 346, Burdwood Bank. 
Lat. 54° 25’ S., long. 57° 32’ W. Depth, 56 fathoms. 1st December 1903. 

JADERHOLM has already recorded C. chilensis from Burdwood Bank, where it was 
growing on the carapace of a crab at 137-150 metres. Bitiarp (1906, p. 12), found 
the species in collections from Flanders Bay and Booth-Wandel Island. Harriaus’s 
specimens were obtained at Calbuco on Tubularia and Eudendrium. 


Thyroscyphus tridentatus (Bale, 1893). 


A few colonies have been found at a single locality. Simple, unbranched stems, 
10 mm. in height, arise from a creeping hydrorhiza at intervals of some 2 or 3 mm. To 
the unaided eye the colonies have an erect, rigid appearance, and are seen to bear pro- 
minent hydrothez placed alternately on the stem. Under the microscope the stem 
resolves itself into a series of distinct internodes which vary considerably in size, a much 
shorter being occasionally wedged in between two longer individuals. That the nodes 
in our specimen are apparently more distinct than those in the examples recorded by 
Professor Harriavs (1901, p. 369) from French Pass, to the north of the South Island of 
New Zealand, is of little importance, as the boundary mark between internodes is lable 
to considerable variation. The locality of the node is, moreover, rendered more evident 
in the Scotia specimens, because the proximal end of each internode is generally 
marked by a rude annulation. The hydrothece are arranged alternately, and the 
whole series lies in one plane. 

A hydrotheea rests upon a short process at the distal end of each internode. The 
hydrotheca is separated by a distinct boundary line from the mternodal process, and 
occasionally one, two, or even three short joints intervene between them. The distal 

* Specimens from Plymouth in my collection. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIL, 74.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 53 


margin of such an interpolated joint is always abrupt, and the perisare of the existing 
calycle is not directly continuous with this margin, but is found to merge with that of 
the interpolated joint some distance within the joint (see fig. 16). From this it would 
appear that the joints are not all contemporaneous, but represent the remains of former 
cups which, broken off by accident, have been replaced once, twice, or oftener by the 
regenerative power of the ccenosare. In this case, therefore, they can be of no diagnostic 
value. Evident knobs of chitin are present on the inner surface of the adcauline wall 
at the base, and of the abcauline wall at the margin. The former do not seem to be 
reproduced in regenerated hydrothecee. 

The hydrothecz are much more deep than broad, and are characterised by an almost 
straight abcauline and a strongly convex adeauline contour. They are in most cases 
considerably longer than the stem internodes. The margin is divided into three pro- 


a b. 


Fic. 1.—Thyroscyphus tridentatus. 70. (a) Primary hydrotheca showing /, and iy, knobs of chitin; pp, points on 
hydrotheca to which the hydranth is moored by ccenosareal strands. (6) Internode process and regenerated hydrotheca ; 
k, knob of chitin marking base of primary hydrotheea; w,, wall of original hydrotheca ; w,, wall of first regenerated 
hydrotheca ; w,, wall of second regenerated hydrotheca. 


nounced teeth, separated by three deep and graceful bays, and is furnished with a three- 
flapped operculum. No trace of a gonosome could be found. 
The following measurements give some indication of the variable proportions of our 


specimens :— 
Stem, length . 3 : : : : Up to 13 mm. 
Internode, length ‘ : : ; , 0:49*—0'91 mm. 
45 breadth : : : : : 0:13-0:22 mm. 
Hydrotheca, length . : : : , 0:60-0'63_,, 
: breadth (maximum) : : : 0:22-0:28 ,, 


Locality.—Gouch Island. Depth, 25 fathoms. Bottom, rock. 23rd April 1904. 
Distribution.—The species was originally described by Baty from material obtained 
at Port Phillip, in the south of Australia, as Campanularia tridentata. Subsequently 
it has been recorded by Professor Harriaus (1901) from French Pass, north of South 
Island, New Zealand. These, so far as I am aware, constitute the only records of the 
species, so that the Scotia specimens from Gough Island, midway between Cape of Good 
Hope and Cape Horn, extend its known range from the South Pacific to the South Atlantic. 
* A regenerated internode which succeeded an old truncation of the stem. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 75.) 


04 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


Lafoéa gracillima (Alder, 1857), var. benthophila,* n. var. 


This species has to be recorded from an additional locality, to the south of the South 
Orkney Islands. The two specimens from this locality are, however, of a type quite 
distinct from the Burdwood Bank examples. They are both small and incomplete. 
The larger, 18 mm. high, bears two short branches; the smaller, 9 mm. high, is branch- 
less. Only a trace of fasciculation is exhibited by the latter, but the stem of the former 
is a typical rhizocaulom. The hydrothecee, while they closely resemble those of typical 
examples of L. gracillima, differ in being placed at more regular intervals on the stem, 
in preserving a near approach to alternation, in lying towards the stem at a much 
smaller angle, and in lacking a twist on the hydranthophore. 


Fig. 2,—Lafotu yracillima, var. benthophila. Portion of branch with hydrothece. x 80. 


I do not lay much stress on this last point, however, since untwisted hydranthophores 
are not unfrequently present in typical colonies of the species. ‘The most striking 
difference lies in the robustness of the hydrothec, the dimensions being much greater 
than in any other specimen [ have examined. Near the base of the hydrotheca proper 
is a rude row of minute, refringent prominences on the internal wall, to which the 
base of the polyp was presumably attached. Occasionally, but only where the margin is 
reduplicated, two rows of dots occur. 

The following table indicates in millimetres the differences, in respect of size, 
between the present and typical specimens :— 


Coat’s Land Burdwood Bank North Sea 
Specimen. | Specimen. Specimen. 
| _| | tebe 
| Hydrotheea, including hydranthophore : ; 0:87-1:01 | 0°63-0°64 0°57-0°76 
| .. diameter at mouth : : é 0'21-0:25 | 0:11-0:13 O11 
| Diameter of a simple tube. : é : 0-16 O11 0-10 
| | 


* BevOos, the deeps ; and ¢iaos, loving. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 76.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 55 


No gonangia were present. 

Locality—Station 313. Lat. 62° 10’S., long. 41° 20’ W. Depth, 1775 fathoms. 
Bottom deposit, blue mud and boulders. 18th March 1903. 

The distribution of the species is almost world-wide, but it has not hitherto been 
recorded from Antarctic Seas. 


Sertularella fusiformis (?) Hincks, 1861. 


a 


A few minute simple stems, 7 mm. high, rising from a stolon creeping upon a sea- 
weed. The slightly geniculate stems are divided into internodes which vary consider- 
ably in length, those nearer the base being longer than the more distal, the former 1°08 
mm. as against an average of 0°61 mm. for the latter. The internodes are narrow, only 


Fic. 3.—Sertularella fusiformis (2) Portion of stem. x 40. 


0°06 mm. in diameter at the base, but they widen upwards until a ledge is formed upon 
which the base of the hydrotheca rests. They are separated by slanting nodes, immedi- 
ately above which.occur one or two rings, while the remainder of the internode is more 
or less definitely wrinkled. 

The hydrothecz lie in the same plane, are alternate, and are placed one on the distal 
end of each internode. Rather more than half of each is free, the free portion leaning 
well away from the stem. In shape they are flask-like, bulging proximally, while towards 
the distal end there is formed by a sudden constriction a distinct ‘‘ neck,” which is sur- 
mounted by the four-toothed margin. The walls of the hydrothecze are smooth 
externally, but just within the margin the inner surface bears four distinct blunt teeth 
which le midway between the marginal teeth. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVII, 77.) 


56 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


Dimensions of hydrotheca :— 


Length ¢ ; F : : 0:45—-0°52 mm. 
Diameter where it becomes free from internode : 0:25-0:27 ,, 
Diameter of “neck” . : 5 : é 0:14-0°16 


No gonangia were present. 

It is with some doubt that these specimens, their gonangia lacking, have been referred 
to the S. fusiformis of Hincxs. The hydrothecze in our specimens appear to be more 
robust, to have a more decided “ neck,” and a more pronounced inclination away from 
the stem, while the presence of internal teeth is not mentioned in Hincks’s description. 
The present specimens closely approach the very doubtful S. fus:formis (2?) described by 
Professor Ct. Harriaus (1900, pl. 5, fig. 9) from Rovigno on the Adriatic Sea, but the 
ringing which is absent in his is markedly present in our examples. 

Locality.—Growing on seaweed found on the shore to the N.E. of Porto Grande, 
St Vincent, Cape Verde Islands. 1st December 1902. 


Sertularella gayi (Lamouroux, 1821). 


In addition to the colony found near Gough Island, another of almost equal dimen- 
sions, 12 em. high, has to be recorded from St Helena. Its minute structure is very . 
similar to that of the Gough Island example, the rugosities on the upper surface of the 
hydrothecze being in some cases almost obsolete. 

This species, although widely distributed in the Northern Atlantic and in the 
Mediterranean Seas, has hitherto been recorded south of the equator only from the Cape 
of Good Hope (Algoa Bay), (HarrLaus, 1905, p. 613). In conjunction with this oceur- 
rence the two Scotia records, from Gough Island and St Helena, may be taken to indicate 
a wide distribution for the species in the South as well as in the North Atlantic. 

Locality.—Intertwined with an Aleyonarian, Amphilaphis reqularis, from St Helena. 
30th May 1904. 


Sertularia cornicina (M‘Crady, 1859). 


Scanty material, a mere half-dozen colonies, represent this species. The stems arise 
from a stolon creeping upon the surface of the fragment of Codzwm also invested by 
S. rathbuni and S. heterodonta, from the former of which, indeed, they are almost 
indistinguishable to the unaided eye. The largest is only 6 mm. in height. The 
specific characters agree with those given by Nurrine (1904, p. 58), but the following 
variations were noted. The stem internodes are proportionally longer than in 
Nourtine’s specimens, for while in his examples the “height of the hydrothece is 
usually about equal to that portion of an internode which lies between the hydrothecal 
base and the node below,” in ours the latter distance considerably exceeds the former. 
Our hydrothecee, again, have a longer distal portion free from the stem, the result being 
that the proportion of the anterior adnate part to the whole length of the hydrotheca is 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 78.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 57 


reduced from “ about two-thirds” to about one-half. As seen from the anterior aspect 
the hydrotheca appears to be covered in by only two opercular flaps, the free margins 
of which run from the tip of one lateral tooth to that of the other; but when a 
lateral view of the colony is obtained, so that one can look directly on the operculum, 
another line is seen running from the mid point of the horizontal line connecting the 
lateral teeth to the median superior point of the aperture. This line presumably marks 
the margin of two contiguous flaps of the operculum, and it would therefore seem that 
three, and not two, are present. The determination, however, is one of considerable 
difficulty owing to the delicacy of the operculum. ‘The downward projecting processes 
from the base of the hydrotheca are long and evident. 


Measurements :— 
Internodes, length i ‘ j : : 0°63—0°78 mm. 
5 breadth —. : : : j 0:05-0:06 __,, 
Hydrotheea, length of contiguous portion : ; 0:22-0:25 ,, 
FF a free portion* . : : 0°21-0:22 ,, 
3 diameter near base F : 3 0:08-0:09 _,, 


» at aperture : : é 0:08-0:09, 


Locality.—Growing upon seaweed (Codiuwm, sp.) from Station 81, Abrohlos Bank, 
Brazil. Lat. 18° 24’S., long. 37° 58’ W. 36 fathoms. Bottom deposit, coral. 20th 
December 1902. 


Sertularia heterodonta,* n. sp. 


Growing upon the surface of a seaweed (Codium, sp.) in company with S. rathbuni 
and S. cornicina are numerous colonies of this more minute form. The simple 
unbranched stems arise from a creeping stolon and cover the weed as with a coat of 
delicate hairs. At first glance the colonies are hard to distinguish from those of 
S. rathbuni, but on close examination their minuteness and delicacy render them 
distinct even to the unaided eye. The largest are only 6 mm. in height, 3°5 to 4 mm. 
being much more common. The hydrorhizal tube has a diameter a little greater than 
that of the stem, and is strengthened in places by chitinous processes projecting down- 
wards from its roof or upwards from its floor. 

The stems are divided into fairly regular internodes separated by distinct nodes. 
At the base two oblique nodes occur in succession, cutting off between them a short 
lozenge-shaped athecate internode. The remainder of the internodes are long and 
slender, narrower at the proximal end and very gradually increasing in diameter 
upwards, until by a sudden dilation at the top they form a broad bracket upon which 
the hydrothec rest. The thecate internodes are separated by straight nodes, but 
occasionally an oblique node occurs in addition, a small athecate internode being in 


_ 
to) 
such a case intercalated between the longer thecate individuals. 


) 


* The “free portion” is measured from the line of the stem to the tip of the lateral teeth. 


+ repos, other ; and éyzos, a tooth, indicating the presence of other than the usual marginal teeth. 
P ) 9 ? D p to) 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIL, 79.) 


58 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


An opposite pair of hydrothecz rests on each internode, six to seven or even ten 
pairs being found on one colony. The hydrothecze are set slightly on front of the stem, 
are always contingent in front for rather more than one-third of their total length, but 
remain separate behind. The free portion diverges abruptly at a wide angle. Viewed 
from the anterior aspect the sides of the adherent portion of a hydrotheca are parallel 
to the long axis of the stem, while those of the free portion converge towards the 
aperture. ‘The contour lines, especially in the younger hydrothece, are remarkably 
straight and graceful. Beneath the innermost angle of the base there is a minute 
chitinous thickening, and another projects from the base into the interior of the 
hydrotheca. The latter appears to be roughly triangular in shape, the apex pointing 


Fic. 4.—Sertularia heterodonta, (a) Anterior aspect of stem. 60. (0) Lateral aspect of stem showing three-flapped 
operculum. x60. (c) Hydrothece with reduplicated margins, one regenerated margin bearing internal teeth. x 100. 
(d) Gonotheca. ~ 50. 


into the cup, the side towards the centre of the stem being thickened and concave, 
that remote from the centre sloping gradually till it merges with the hydrothecal floor. 
This process represents a small ridge bounding the posterior edge of the opening 
between hydrotheca and stem. The margin of the hydrotheca is divided into three 
distinct and sharp teeth, the lateral pair the more prominent, the median and superior 
individual tilted slightly upwards. There are three opercular flaps, difficult to 
distinguish except when one is looking directly into the aperture of the hydrotheca. 
Just within the margin and projecting from the inner wall are three prominent internal 
teeth, triangular in shape, with blunt apices tilted towards the aperture. These 
alternate with the marginal teeth. In hydrothecee towards the base of the stem the 
superior pair appears occasionally to be undeveloped. Frequently the free portion of 
the tube is much elongated by the reduplication of the margin, and in some cases a 
new series of internal teeth is produced on the added portion (fig. 4, c). 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 80.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 59 


The gonangium, of which I have been able to find only one example, is borne on 
the front of the stem immediately beneath a hydrotheca. It is oval in shape, tapering 
below to form a distinct stalk, and truncated above by a wide aperture. This is 
bounded by an insignificant thickened neck punctuated by small refringent chitinous 
swellings on the inner surface. The walls of the gonangium are smooth. 


Measurements :— 
Internodes, length ; : : é : 0°46—-0°62 mm. 
y diameter near base : ; : 0:03-0:04 ,, 
Hydrotheca, length of contiguous portion F . 0:10-0714 ,, 
A 5 free portion* . 2 , 0:14-0°15_,, 
i diameter at base . F : ; 0:06-0:07 __,, 
s - » aperture : F : 0:04 mm. 
Gonangium, length —. : : 3 : OTL 5 
maximum diameter é : ‘ Ora. 


One colony shows a pair of hydrothece at an early stage of development, ere yet 
the aperture, or the base, or the internal teeth had been formed. The stolon has so 
regulated itself to the papillated surface of the Codiuwm upon which it is growing that 
the outline of its under surface is made up of a series of crescentic bays. 

The three-toothed margin, the three-flapped operculum, the prominent internal 
teeth, the presence of a projection from the base into the interior of the hydrotheca, 
together with the straight contours of the hydrothecze and the length of the internodes, 
are points which distinguish this species. It has affinities with S, /inealis, Warren, 
1908. 

Locality.—Growing upon seaweed from Station 81, Abrohlos Bank, Brazil. Lat. 
18° 24’ S., long. 37° 58’ W. Depth, 36 fathoms. Bottom deposit, coral. 20th 
December 1902. 


Sertularia mayeri, Nutting, 1904. 


Small colonies, 5 mm. high—less than half the height of the type specimens—occur 
creeping on Saragassum weed, ‘Their characters agree with Nurrine’s description and 
figures, and are identical with those of specimens collected by Mr Crossianp at the 
Cape Verde Islands (Rircutr, 1907, p. 505), although, owing to their smaller size and 
the consequent restriction of the number of hydrotheca-pairs (in the largest specimen 
mounted for microscopical examination there are only six pairs), the variation between 
the proximal and distal pairs is not so marked as in the larger Cape Verde specimens. 
Even here, however, the distinction between the distal long, narrow, closely forked, 
oradually separating pairs, and the proximal short, dumpy, wide-spreading pairs is 
sufficiently distinct and characteristic. It is indicated by the measurements below. 
In the majority of the calycles two lateral teeth and a smaller median and superior 
tooth, which succeeds an indentation in the wall of the hydrotheca and curves slightly 
upwards, are very evident. 

* From the line of the stem to the tip of the lateral teeth. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVII., 81.) 


60 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


Measurements (@ and / are distinct colonies) :— 


Basal. Distal. | 

—— —- - | 
| a. b. a. b. | 
| Length of internode 0°42; 0°49 mm. | 0°56; 0°66 mm. | 
- hydrotheca : : 0:29) 10:30) Ois8c Ober a 

| Breadth of hydrotheca-pair from tip to tip O;48750;46' = ||) 01065 00i02s55 ne 
‘5 aa 5, at base 0:22; 0 | 


25, | 0-21; 0-20 ,, 


Locality.—Creeping on gulf weed, lat. 27° 54’ N., long. 33° 17’ W. 28th June 
1904. 


Sertularia operculata, Linneeus, 1758. 


Several smal] fragments of this species occur intertwined with other Hydroids from 
the same locality. The specimens are typical in branching and in minute structure, 
but a considerable amount of variation occurs not only in the length of the two 
hydrothecal teeth, but also in their prominence relative to each other (cf) HarrLavus, 
1905, pp. 665, 666). Of the specimens figured by Professor HarrLavB our examples 
most nearly approach those from West Patagonia collected by F. P. Moreno; but from 
those they differ in the proximity of the hydrothece, for the teeth of one may reach 
the level of the base of its successor. The present examples are also characterised by 
the exceedingly minute portion of the distal extremity of the hydrotheca, which is free, 
the proximal side of the aperture lying almost against the internode. 

The points above refer specially to the younger branches. On the older portions 
the hydrothecee are only sub-opposite, their length is less relatively to that of the 
internode, while a slightly longer distal portion is free. 

A few typical gonangia occur on the branches. They exhibit a tendency to 
asymmetry, the aperture lying towards the outer side of the axis of symmetry. 

The following measurements indicate the relations of the various parts :— 


Length of branch internode. ; : é 0:33-0°50 mm. 
5 stem internode . : 4 , 0°54-0°61 ,, 
Ns hydrotheca . : ; F F 0:20-0:25 ,, 
x teeth : : ; : : 0:06-0°12 ,, 

Distance from tip to tip of a hydrotheca-pair . : 0°43-0°58 ,, 


Locality.—Dredged at the entrance to Saldanha Bay, Cape Colony, in 25 fathoms. 
21st May 1904. 

The distribution of this species is world-wide. In addition to its European localities 
it has been recorded from the coasts of North and South America, of Southern Asia, of 
Australia and New Zealand, and of Africa, although the records from the last continent 
are few. The African localities other than the Scotia record are as follows :-— 

South Africa (Busk, 1850); Cape of Good Hope (Hugenie Expedition, JADERHOLM, 
1903); Port Natal (Professor J. A. WAHLBERG, J ADERHOLM, 1903); Mauritanian Coast 
(Brutarp, 1906); North-West of Cape Blane, Soudan (Brttarp, 1906). 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 82.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 61 


Sertularia vrathbuni, Nutting, 1904. 


The specimens occur plentifully on a seaweed (Codiuwm, sp.), standing erect and 
rigid on its surface, so that it appears as if covered with a sparse coating of delicate 
hairs. They are simple, altogether without branches, herein differing, but immaterially, 
from the specimens described by ALLMAN (1877), VeRsLUYS (1899), and Nurrine, some 
of which bore pinnules, and they attain a height of only 10 mm. The structures of the 
stem are as previously described. The hydrothecze are in opposite pairs, the individuals 
of which, in the distal part of the colony, are contingent for almost half their height, 
but the line of contact gradually decreases until in the proximal pair the individuals 


a. 


Fie. 5.—Sertularia rathbuni. (w) Anterior aspect of stem, 50, (b) Three-quarters view of hydrotheea showing 

three-flapped operculum. x60. (c)Gonangium. 70. 
may be quite apart. Behind the stem the hydrothecee are always separate. Beneath 
each hydrotheea, at the corner where base and inner wall meet, are two chitinous 
processes which project downwards and lie alongside the wall of the internode. These 
processes are more distinct in the older hydrothecee. The margin of a hydrotheea is 
cut into three teeth, the lateral pair longer than the single superior tooth. There are 
three opercular flaps. 

Gonosome.—The gonangia, which have not previously been deseribed, occur on 
many of the colonies. They are borne on the stem, from one to three in number, and 
arise immediately beneath hydrothecze towards the base of the colony. In the speci- 
mens which I have examined only one gonangium is apportioned to each hydrotheca- 
pair. ‘The gonangia are broadly ovate, marked with about six rather indefinite annula- 
tions. Proximally they taper into a short stalk, while distally they contract into a 
short wide neck, ornamented at its base by a cirelet of bright spots, thickenings of the 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIL., 83.) 


62 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


perisare. The contents of the gonangia were frequently missing, and in no case were 
they in a state fit for minute examination. 


Measurements :— 

Internodes, length é : : ; : 0°81-0°94 mm. 
= breadth . 3 ‘ : é 0:10-0:12 ,, 

Hydrotheca, portion free : : : : 0:18-0:20 ,, 
S s, fixed : : ’ : 0:27-0:28 _,, 
a diameter at mouth : : ; 0:74 mm. 

Gonangium, length . : } ‘ ‘ 0-60-0°63_,, 
5 maximum breadth ; : : 0-45-0°53, 


In general build, in possessing chitinous projections from the base of the hydrotheca, 
and in the structure of its gonangium, this species bears close resemblance to S. cornicina 
(M‘Crady) as described by Nurrine. The latter species, however, is to be distin- 
guished by the tubular shape of its hydrothecee, by the number of the marginal teeth 
and of the opercular flaps, by the narrowly oval outline of its gonangium, and by the 
fact that the gonangia are borne on hydrorhizal tubes at the base of the colony, and not 
on the stem. 

Locality.— Growing on a Plumularian, Halicornaria longicauda, and on seaweed 
(Codium, sp.), both from Station 81, Abrohlos Bank, Brazil. Lat. 18° 14’ 8., long. 37° 
58’ W. Depth, 40-50 fathoms. Bottom deposit, coral. 20th December 1902. 

Previously recorded only from the Gulf of Mexico: ALLMAN, 1877; VERSLUYS, 1899 
(Dry Tortugas); Nutrine, 1904, lat. 29° 28’ N., long. 87° 56’ W. 


Thuwaria articulata (Pallas, 1766), (= 7. pectinata, Allman, 1888). 


In the earlier report, a colony of this species was recorded under ALLMAN’s name of 
T. pectinata, The occurrence of an additional colony with gonangia reopened the ques- 
tion of nomenclature, and an examination of ALLMAN’s type was made (through the kind- 
ness of Mr R. KirKparrick, of the British Museum). The examination assures me of 
the identity of 7. pectinata, Allman, with 7. articulata, Pallas. 

The larger of our two colonies was some 6 em. high, the height of ALLMAN’s speci- 
mens being also ‘“‘ between two and three inches.” The colonies are simply pinnate, with 
a monosiphonic stem about 1 mm. in diameter at the base. The stem is partitioned into 
regular and well-marked internodes, each bearing three pairs of opposite hydrothece, 
and from between the proximal and median pairs arises a pair of opposite pinne. 
Proximal to the first pinna-bearing internode a few destitute of offshoots occur, and on 
these the number of hydrothecz is not constant. Apart from these only one internode 
has been observed in which three pairs of hydrothece have not occurred; and it is 
clearly abnormal, for it lacks pinnee, has but one pair of hydrothece, and is so short 
that the hydrothecze project beyond it, free for nearly half their height. The pinne 
stand out from the stem at a wide angle, and they too are divided into distinct but 
less regular internodes, each bearing from two to five pairs of sub-opposite hydrothece. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIL., 84.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 63 


(MaARKTANNER-TURNERETSCHER (1890) gives the variation as from three to ten pairs 
per internode. ) 

The hydrothece are almost wholly immersed, and the “ free membranaceous extension 
of the wall,” too prominently figured in ALLMAN’s account, has been destroyed (as indeed it 
was in the 7. pectinata specimen examined), leaving a jagged edge level with the general 
outline of the pinna. There is evident on the abcauline wall of the hydrothecz, just 
within the opening, a small knob of chitin, and immediately above or upon this rests the 


Fic. 6.—Thuiaria articulata. (a) Single internode of stem with proximal internodes of pinne. x20. (6) Gonangium. 
x12. (c) Internode from 7, pectinata with hydrothece slightly apart. x20. (d) Internode from 7. pectinata with 
congested hydrothece. x 20. 


base of the one-flapped operculum. On the stem internodes and on the younger pinnz 
the hydrothecz are slightly apart from each other, but in the older pinne they are 
compressed and lie closely packed, the distal end of one forced against the base of its 
successor (cf. fig. 6, ¢ and d). 

The gonangia are clustered on one face of the stem and on the corresponding 
faces of the pinne. They arise immediately beneath a hydrotheca, are elongate 
oval in shape, with a wide, circular, distal opening bordered by a distinct neck, 
and with a tapering proximal end. Their distal half bears more or less indefinite 
annular rugosities. 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVII., 85.) 


64 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


Measurements :— 
| Scotia | Allman’s | 
| Specimens. T. pectinata. | 
Stem internodes, length 2°25 mm. 2-75 mm. 
Hydrothece on stem, length O30) 052 ,, 
5 » breadth : : 10) 17 . (O20) 
a on pinna, length : : 0:45) 048 =, 
re = breadth OS O18 ,, 
Gonanela 0 ; 1) 
yonangia, length 3 Pie } not present, 
2% greatest diameter. [coy ee 


ALLMAN’S specimens are somewhat more robust than those collected by the Scotia. 

Locality.—Dredged at the entrance to Saldanha Bay, Cape Colony, at a depth of 
25 fathoms. 21st May 1904. 

The species has been recorded from Algoa Bay and Cape of Good Hope (KircHEN- 
PAUER, 1884); South Africa (Busk, 1850); Simon’s Bay, Cape of Good Hope (ALLMAN, 
1888). 


Plumularia curvata, Jiderholm, 1904 (=P. magellanica, Hartlaub, 1905). 


Dr JADERHOLM has kindly drawn my attention to the fact that the species recorded in 
my earlier report on the Scotia collections as P. magellanica, Hartlaub, had been pre- 
viously described by him as P. curvata, which name I therefore substitute for Harr- 
LAUB’S synonym. A variation which does not seem to have been present in the examples 
examined by JADERHOLM or HarrLaus was described and figured in the earlier report 
(pl. i, figs. 1, la); here I wish simply to add that that variation is more general in the 
hydroclades than I had at first supposed. My previous description reads :—‘“‘In the 
proximal hydroclades . . . . two processes arise below and at the opposite sides of the 
first hydrotheca, each of which bears a thecate internode, so that after the first hydro- 
theea the hydroclade possesses two diverging branches each similar to the simple 
distal hydroclades” (1907,% p. 541). But this duplication of the hydroclade occurs 
not only at the first hydrotheca but sometimes at successive hydrothecze as well. From 
beneath the first hydrotheca two diverging internodes spring, each capped by its 
hydrotheca ; from the bases of each of those second pairs arise, and from these again, 
and so on in a system comparable to the false dichotomy of the Mistletoe, until 
dichotomous pairs of even the fourth degree may be reached. Some of the hydroclades 
thus assume a complicated and much-branched appearance, quite distinct from the simple 
type figured by JADERHOLM (1905, pl. 14, fig. 10) and Harriaus (1905, p. 684, fig. N°). 


Measurements :— 
Stem internode, length ; . : ; 0:42-0:52 mm. 
Pr és breadth : 5 P ; O'11-0°13_,, 
Hydroclade internode, length . : < : 0:24-0:28 ,, 
Hydrotheeca, depth : : . ; ‘ 0-10 55 
Pe diameter at mouth : : f Owl b=0siee 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIL, 86.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 65 


Locality.—‘ Growing on a sponge, Port Stanley, Falkland Islands. 3rd February 
1904.” 

Previous records are from Port Louis and Port Albemarle, Falkland Islands (J ADER- 
HOLM, 1905); Southern Tierra del Fuego, and Island Picton in the neighbouring 
archipelago (HartLaus, 1905). 


Plumularia echinulata, Lamarck, 1836. 


In addition to a previously mentioned occurrence at Cape Town, a second locality, 
also in Cape Colony, has to be recorded, namely, Saldanha Bay. The specimens from 
this place, while rather smaller in size than the Cape ‘Town examples, are similar in 
minute structure, except that in the former the hydrotheca-bearing internodes are rather 
shorter, and the hydrothecee therefore more congested, than in the latter. 

The gonangia are elongate oval, considerably longer in proportion to their diameter 
than those figured by Hrncks (1868, pl. lxv., fig. 2b), and possessing shorter and 
more regularly arranged spines. They stand out from the median aspect of the stem 
in a densely packed row. 

Locality.—Shore, Houtjes Bay, Saldanha Bay, Cape Colony. 19th May 1904. 


Plumularia lagenifera, var. septifera, Torrey, 1902. 
« ” « ~ 


Whereas typical specimens of P. lagenifera are about three inches long, are some- 
times branched, and grow in flexuous clumps, the specimens which I have referred to 
TorReEY’s variety are short (only 7 mm. high), never branched, and are markedly rigid 
in habit. The detailed structure is that of a compressed P. lagenifera, where the inter- 
nodes have become shorter and comparatively stouter, while the internal septa have 
become more distinct. In conjunction with the general shortening it has come 
about that in the intermediate internodes there is generally but one septum, 
although our specimens differ from those described by Torrey—where “ no intermediate 
internode has more than one septal ridge”—in that, in several, there are traces of a 
second ridge on the distal side of the nematophore, while in at least one case the second 
ridge is quite pronounced. Torrey is equally emphatic that “there is never more than 
one internode between thecate internodes,” but I have observed a case in which two 
successive athecate internodes occurred, the distal being much the shorter and lacking 
anematophore. ‘There was no evidence that this duplication was due to abnormal 
growth, such as regeneration. ‘These variations, however, only show more clearly the 


relationship between this form and P. lagenifera type, and confirm Torrey’s placing of 
it as a variety of that species. 

In one point the Scotva specimens differ both from the type and from the variety, 
for they show no trace of a nematophore on any internode ‘on side opposite branch 
[v.e. hydroclade| and immediately distal to the proximal septum.” 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVIL., 87.) 


66 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


Between the hydroclade and the internode process on which it is set occur from one 
to three athecate internodes. The hydrorhizal tubes are close-set, are compressed from 
above downwards, and are supported by thickenings of the perisare which project into 
the interior of the tube. Somewhat similar thickenings I have already seen in the 
hydrorhiza of a species of Podocoryne (Rrrou1E, 1907, p. 499) which was growing on 
a minute shell. In both cases it is possible to imagine that the thickenings may be 
in some way correlated with the peculiar substratum upon which the specimens are 
growing, for either on a small, readily tossed shell, or on the ever-moving appendages of 
a Crustacean, hydrorhizal tubes would be submitted to a great amount of buffeting and 
rough usage. Reaction to such abnormal external factors might result in abnormal 


a. 


Fic. 7.—Plumularia lagenifera, var. septifera. (a) Portion of stem and hydroclade. 100. (b) Base of stem 
arising from complicated hydrorhizal growth with scattered nematothece. 


strengthening of the walls. Should such a supposition be well founded, the thickenings 
in the hydrorhizal tubes could have little systematic value. Frequent nematophores, 
similar in structure to those on the remainder of the colony, arise from the hydrorhizal 
tubes at irregular intervals, but always near their borders. 

The differences between this form and P. /agenifera in size, in habit, in the intensity 
of the internal septa, in the absence of a nematophore on each stem internode, and in 
possessing chitinous thickenings in the hydrorhiza, I do not consider sufficient to warrant 
the formation of a new species. 


Measurements :— 
Stem internode, length o : : F 0:26 mm. 
a breadth ‘ : : ; Ona 
Hydroclade thecate internodes, length : 3 O45 
p athecate aa “5 : : 0:05" 5; 
Hydrotheca, depth . : E 5 5 0:066—0:090 mm. 
“ diameter at margin E ‘A : 0:105-0°120 ,, 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIL., 88.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 67 


Locality.—A few colonies growing on the telson and under-parts of the body of 
Palinostus lalandii (Liamk.) from Saldanha Bay, Cape Colony. 21st May 1904. 

Distribution.—Plumularia lagenifera, Allman, has been recorded from various locali- 
ties off the coast of California by MarkTaNNER-TURNERETSCHER (1890, p. 255), Nu'rrine 
(1900, p. 65), Torrey (1902, p. 77); from the neighbourhood of Vancouver Island by 
ALLMAN (1885, p. 157), Nurrine (/.c.); and from the coast of Alaska by Torrey (/.c.). 
The variety septifera has been recorded by Torrey only from Cataline Island, California. 
The general distribution of the species and its variety is thus alone the shores of the 
Northern Pacific from California northwards to Alaska. That the present specimens 
should have oceurred on the eastern margin of the South Atlantic is indeed remarkable ; 
but, in so mobile a group as the Hydroids, wide distribution is of little significance, and 
the above record but adds another to the long list of species which spread beyond the 
bounds of any one ocean. 


Plumularia setacea (Ellis, 1755). 


Specimens of an exceedingly minute and delicate variety of this species occur 
creeping on gulf weed in company with Ag/aophenia latecarinata. They are only 7 or 8 
mm. high, and are unbranched, although in one case an appearance of bifurcation at the 
base (a phenomenon recorded by BiLLarD in this species (1907, p. 210)) was given by 
a second colony being fixed to the first by its hydrorhiza. The hydroclade internodes, 
both thecate and athecate, are long and slender and contain two distinct septa, a distal 
and a proximal. While the rule is that a single athecate internode separates two thecate 
internodes, very rarely two intermediate internodes occur, in which ease one or the other 
bears a single nematophore, the other lacking such an organ. Yet each of the internodes is 
complete as regards the internal septa, containing one at each end. They are distinct inter- 
nodes and seem to be due to spontaneous variation, for no hint could be observed that, as 
Brivarp found in his specimens, rupture and subsequent regeneration had taken place. 

Our specimens appear to be similar to the “ distinct variety” recorded by Professor 
Nurtrtine from gulf weed (1900, p. 57), although Nurrina’s specimens differ in being 
branched. 

Detailed measurements indicate that the Scotia specimens stand intermediate to the 
variety found by the Travailleur at Cape Spartel and to the south of Madeira, and the 
typical form whose dimensions BiLLarp records. 


Measurements :— 
Height of colony : é : . ; 7-8 mm. 
Length of stem internodes : : : c 0°33-0°39 mm. 
Breadth of ,, 5 i : : ; 0:075-0:09 _,, 
Length of intermediate internodes : : ; 0:14-0°21 ,, 
PA thecate internodes . : : ‘ 0°31-0°40 
Breadth of _,, x ; : 2 : 0-42-O0°48 


Locality.—Creeping on gulf weed found in spawn net at Station 538. Lat. 32° 11’ N., 
long. 34° 10’ W. 30th June 1904. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIL., 89.) 


68 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


Antennopsis scotix, Ritchie, 1907. 


An additional colony of this species from the locality from which it was originally 
recorded enables me to amplify the diagnosis already given and to add a description of 
the gonosome. The new colony is of the same height as the larger of our earlier speci- 
mens, 9 em., but it bears more branches and is altogether in better condition, although 
here also the hydroclades are in many places wanting. Branches are frequent, but are 
very irregular in position. They may hear secondary branches which are long, of uniform 
thickness, and are seldom branched. The stem and branches are composed of a thick 
bundle of tubes with transparent walls and without nodes. From short processes on the 
outermost of these the hydroclades spring, following one another on the same tube at a 


Fic. 8.—Antennopsis scotiw, (a) Portion of hydroclade showing thecate and athecate internodes, and arrangement of 
nematothece. x65. (b) Gonotheca. x 45. 


distance of some 0°73 mm., and thus forming a close-set coat round the branches. In 
consequence of the delicacy of the hydrothecal margins a perfect hydrotheca is rare, but 
where such oceurs it shows a slight widening at the mouth. 

An important addition has to be made to the previous description of the trophosome 
as regards the number of the nematophores accompanying the hydrotheca. Besides the 
median proximal nematophore and the lateral pair surmounting the processes which run 
alongside the hydrotheca, there is a supplementary lateral pair, the individuals of which, 
one on each side of the hydrotheca, rest on the upper surface of the lateral process 
almost in the corner formed between it and the internode (fig. 8). ‘These nematophores, 
although of similar structure to, are considerably smaller than, the others, and are so 
delicate that they are frequently absent, their former position being marked only by a 
small opening in the lateral process. They correspond exactly to the supplementary 
nematophores described in Antenella quadriaurita of the present paper. 

The athecate internodes show more variation than in the former specimens, 
their length in many cases preventing the margin of a hydrotheca from reaching 
the level of the proximal end of the succeeding thecate internode. Only two 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVII., 90.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 69 


deviations from the normal structure of the athecate internodes have been observed 
where, instead of one, two nematophores were present. 

Gonosome.—he gonangia arise laterally from the hydroclades. They are situated 
immediately beneath the hydrothecze on a short process from the hydroclade internode, 
between which and the body of the gonangium a short internode intervenes. In size 
a gonangium is three or four times as large as a hydrotheeca ; in shape it is broadly 
ovate, tapering proximally into a short stalk which rests upon the intervening internode 
mentioned above, and abruptly truncated distally, where the large terminal aperture is 
closed, prior to the maturity of the contents, by a one-flapped operculum attached by 
its abcauline edge to the wall of the gonangium. Two large nematophores are present, 
one on each side of the gonangium near its base. 


Measurements :— 
Athecate internodes, length* . : : : 0°28-0°32 mm. 
Thecate 35 eee ae : : : 0:36-0°38 ,, 
Hydrotheca, length . . : : : 0:20-0°24 ,, 
es breadth at mouth. : ; ; 0:21-0°24 ,, 
Gonangium, length : ; : : : 0:88-0°91 ,, 


greatest breadth . s : : 0°53-0°57 _,, 


Locality.—As previously recorded—entrance to Saldanha Bay, Cape Colony. 25 
fathoms. 21st May 1904. 

Growing on a sponge from the same locality were several simple colonies up to 
7 mm. high. Although there are no signs of fasciculation, nor even of true branching, 
the minute structure corresponds so exactly with that of A. scotie that I cannot but 
conclude that the small colonies represent an early stage of that species. ‘hey bear no 
gonangia. 


Monostechas quadridens (M‘Crady, 1859). 


Two minute colonies of this species were found growing on the leg of a masked 
crab. They differ from the typical form described by Nurrine (1900, p. 75) only in 
their minuteness—they are less than 1 cm. high—and in the length of the athecate 
intermediate internodes of their hydroclades. Although each bears two or three hydro- 
clades, neither of the colonies is branched ; yet circular holes at the bases of some of the 
hydrothecse, indicating the point where a gonangium had been attached, show that the 
colonies are mature. The unusual position in which the colonies were growing is 
probably responsible for their smallness, for an unstable foundation is frequently 
accompanied by a dwarfed fauna. 


Measurements :— 
Stem, diameter . F : ; ; 0°14 mm. 
Thecate internodes, length ‘ : : ; 0-42-0°46 mm. 
Intermediate internodes, length : : F 0:56-0°73 _,, 
Hydrotheea, depth ‘ : : : : 0715-017 _,, 
* diameter at opening : : 0:20-0:22 


* Length measured from straight node to furthest point of oblique node. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIL, 91.) 


70 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


Locality.—Growing amongst seaweed on the leg of a masked crab. Station 81, 
Abrohlos Bank, Brazil. Lat. 18° 24’ 8., long. 37° 58’ W. Depth, 36 fathoms. 
Bottom doposit, coral. 20th December 1902. 


Antenella quadriaurita,* sp. nov. 


A few sparse colonies which cannot be referred to any described species of Antenella 
were trawled off Gough Island. The stems, the largest of which is 14 mm. high, are 
hairlike and stand out rigidly from a creeping stolon like a group of stiff bristles. To 
the unaided eye the stem groups much resemble the figure of 4. gracilis given by 
ALLMAN (1877, pl. xxii, fig. 6), but in our specimens the stems are more delicate, and, 


Fic. 9.—Antenella quadriaurita, (a) Portion of stem. x25. (b) Anterior aspect of a hydrotheca, x 125. 
(c) Lateral aspect of a hydrotheca, x 125, 


owing perhaps to mere accident, they are more irregular in size and more straggling in 
arrangement. The stem is divided into a series of alternating thecate and athecate 
internodes, the boundary lines between these being oblique and very distinct on the 
proximal side of the theeate internode, and on the distal, transverse but faintly indicated. 
On the stems examined the maximum number of hydrothecee was nine, but that a 


‘ 


greater number may be borne is likely, as in both the “nine” colonies the stem was 
incomplete. The hydrothecz are borne on every other internode. As seen in profile 
they are cylindrical, having almost parallel edges, but viewed from in front they seem 
to be conical in shape, tapering rapidly to the base. A hydrotheca is rather deeper 
than broad, and for more than half its height is free from the internode. Its profile is 
straight, and its margin is very slightly everted. 

Each thecate internode bears five nematophores: one median, placed on a gently 

* Quattuor, four ; and awritus, eared, signifying the presence of two pairs of nematothece flanking the hydrotheca. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 92.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 71 


raised portion of the internode on the near side of the hydrotheca; a supracalycine pair, 
each individual of which reaches just to the margin of the hydrotheca and rests upon 
the end of an internodal projection stretching half-way across the hydrotheca ; and an 
additional pair—supplementary nematophores—placed on the upper and exterior surface 
of the supracalycine process, almost in the angle between that process and the inter- 
node. The latter are extremely fragile and readily detached, so that in many cases 
they are unrepresented but by a small pore in the wall of the supracalycine process, 
indicating where they had been attached. The intermediate internodes bear a number 
of nematophores varying from two to four, but three is the most frequent number. 
Thus, in twenty intermediate internodes examined, eight bore two nematophores, eleven 
bore three, while only one had four. On the athecate basal internodes, three of which 
generally follow one another in close succession prior to the first hydrotheca, the 
nematophores also vary. Of nine such, four had four nematophores, two had five, while 
series of two, three, and seven nematophores were represented on one internode each. 


Measurements :— 
Thecate internode, length* . : : . 0°46 mm. 
Intermediate internode, length * ; : ; 0:57-0'91 mm. 
3 breadth f . : 0:07-0:087 ,, 
Hydrotheca, depth : : : i : 0-21-0°22 ,, 
5 diameter at margin : 2 : 0-17=0°21 ,, 


This species is closely related to Plumularia secundaria (L., 1789, p. 3854), which, 
if the genus Antenella is to be preserved, and it seems a useful one from the point of 
view of practical convenience, must be transferred to that genus. The present species 
has been separated from A. secwidaria on the strength of observations made by 
MaRKTANNER-|'URNERETSCHER (1890, p. 252), Picrer and Brpor (1900, pp. 27, 28), and 
Binuarp (1907, p. 207), all of whom record the presence of a single nematotheca 
mmimediately above the hydrotheca, whereas in our specimens the hydrotheca is flanked 
by a par of nematothecee in addition to the usual supracalycine pair. The athecate 
internodes in the Scotia species are twice the leneth of those in A. secundaria, and the 
other parts differ in their relative proportions, but little stress can be laid on so indefinite 
and so variable a character. I am unable to distinguish A. natalensis, Warren, 1908, 
from A. secundaria, 

Locality.—Gough Island. Trawled at a depth of 100 fathoms. Bottom deposit, 
Bryozoa and rock. 28rd April 1904. 


Aglaophenia allman, Nutting, 1900. 


Two specimens are referred to this rare species. One is a comparatively small 
colony, 6°5 em. high, still retaining some fragments of the hydrorhizal tubes. The 
other is a strongly fascicled branch, with a diameter of 1°5 mm. at its junction with 


* Measured from straight node to furthest point of oblique node. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIL., 93.) 


72 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


what is probably part of the main stem, and with a height of 7°5 cm. It bears rather 
delicate alternate ramuli which leave it almost at right angles. 

While the general characters—branching, structure of hydoclades, shape and 
approximation of hydrothece, position of nematophores—agree with the descriptions of 
ALLMAN (1877, p. 39, pl. xxii, as A. ramos) and of Nurrine, variations worthy of note 
have been observed in the last-mentioned organs. These variations seem to be mainly 
age differences. In the hydrothecz on the proximal parts of the hydroclades the mesial 
uematophore reaches to the level of the marginal teeth, and is adnate, all but the very 
tip. The supracalycine nematophores are generally cylindrical, with two apertures— 
one terminal, the other a large oval opening on that side of the upper surface which is 


Fic. 10.—Aglaophenia allmani, showing variation in hydrothece and nematothece. (a) Hydrothece from the proximal 
end of a hydroclade. x65. (b) Hydrothece from the distal end of a hydroclade. x 65, 


towards the interior of the hydrotheca. Rarely this opening is much elongated, and 
extends through the band of perisare which separates it from the terminal opening. In 
such a case a single continuous opening is formed and the nematophores might be 
described as ‘almost cylindrical.” The tip of a supracalycine nematophore reaches just 
to the margin of a hydrotheca. Its axis, viewed from the side, lies at an angle of about 
45° with the stem. ‘lhe nematophores, in general, agree with the type so far described. 

In those hydrothecee which occur towards the tip of the hydroclades, and which are 
therefore younger, the aperture is less oblique, while the adnate part of the hydrotheca 
is of the same length as in the older examples. As a consequence the mesial 
nematophore, although shown by measurement to be constant in length throughout the 
colony, appears to be shorter in the newly formed hydrothece, since its tip falls con- 
siderably short of the margin. The supracalycine nematophores are of markedly greater 
length, overtopping the margin by about 0°056 mm., are quite cylindrical, and lie with 
their axis (viewed from the side) more nearly parallel to that of the internode. The 
lateral aperture is smaller and is never continuous with the terminal one, and the 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIL, 94.) 


= 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 73 


internodal septum which in the older hydrothecz: marks the base of the nematophore is 
indicated in the terminal individuals only by a minute indentation. 

I think, with Nurrine, that the general structure of the trophosome of the colonies 
resembles that of Lytocarpus rather than that of Aglaophenia. 


Measurements :— 
Stem internodes, length : : ; ; 0°39-0°45 mm. 
s A breadth : : : : 0:22-0°24 ,, 
Hydroclade internodes, length . : c : 0°38-0°42 ,, 
Hydrothecw, length *. : : : ; 0°35 mm 
5 diameter at margin , ; ; OPI cy 
Mesial nematophore, length . , , : 0-28 ,, 


Supracalycine nematophores, length of longest side, 0-11 mm. at base of hydroclade to 
0:14-0:17 mm. at distal end of hydroclade. 
Locality.—Station 81, Abrohlos Bank, Brazil. Lat. 18° 14’ 8., long. 37° 58’ W. 
Depth, 36 fathoms. Bottom deposit, coral. 20th December 1902. 
Distribution.—Only recorded from Florida Reef, in the Gulf of Mexico (by ALLMaN), 
and from a station in the Caribbean Sea (by Nurrine). 


Aglaophenia dubia, Nutting, 1900. 


Two specimens of this species, the A. gracilis of ALLMaN’s Gulf Stream Report 
(ALLMAN, 1877), were collected in the same locality—one simple, reaching a height of 
6 cm., the other sparsely branched and rather longer. The anterior profile of the 
hydrotheca is not so markedly concave as in ALLMAN's figure, nor is the mesial 
nematophore quite so long relatively to the height of the hydrotheca. he hydrothece 
have nine teeth (Nurrine says “about eight”), of which one on each side lies behind 
the supracalycine nematophores and is more acute than the others, while the anterior 
tooth is usually recurved. The number of the basal nematophores differs from that 
recorded by ALLMAN and Nurtine, for not only are two present on the front of each 
stem-internode (one close to the hydroclade and one on the proximal portion of the 
internode), while another small one lies at the base of the hydroclade, close to the former 
of those just mentioned— but, in addition, a large cup-shaped nematophore exists on the 
posterior aspect of internode, immediately behind the base of the hydroclade. Other- 
wise the specimens agree, point for point, with previous descriptions. 


Measurements :— 

Stem internodes, length : , : : : 0-52 mm. 

. - breadth =. : : , : OSG 

Hydroclade internodes, length : : ; : O36) 

5 3 breadth at middle. ; ; 0:05 ,, 

Hydrothece, height ‘ : 5 ‘ ; 0-32 ,, 

Be diameter at margin p ; ; : Orla. 

Mesial nematophore, length : : 5 : On; 


* Length of hydrotheca measured along the internode from the base of the cavity to the margin. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 95.) 


74 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


On the branched specimen two branches, which appear to belong to the colony, since 
they lie in the same plane and leave the stem at the same angle as the true branches, 
were found, on microscopic examination, to be specimens of Halicornaria longicauda, 
arising from hydrorhizal tubes climbing upon the stem of the Aglaophenia colony. 

Locality.—Station 81, Abrohlos Bank, Brazil. Lat. 18° 14’ S., long. 37° 58’ W. 
Depth, 36 fathoms. Bottom deposit, coral. 20th December 1902. 


Aglaophenia heterodonta, Jiderholm, 1903. 


Dr ELor JApERHoLM has described amongst the extra-EKuropean Hydroids in the 
Swedish Museum specimens of A. dichotoma (M. Sars), as distinct from a form with 
similar habit which he has named A. heterodonta. 1 now regard the specimens which 
were described in the earlier Scotia report under the name of A. dichotoma as examples 
of A. heterodonta. 

Additional material enables me to add to JADERHOLM’s description of the general 
habit of the colonies. His specimens were characterised by irrecularly ramified stems 
bearing short, upward curling twigs. Our specimens exhibit two types. The first, pre- 
viously described (Rrrcni, 1907,” pl. iii. fig. 2), is strictly dichotomous, although the 
branches may not develop equally in all parts of the colony. This type of branching 
is exactly similar to that of A. dichotoma. The dichotomously branched specimens 
were growing on a sponge, and are considerably taller (10 em.) than JADERHOLM’s 
examples (3°5 cm.). The habit of the second type is distinctly reminiscent of that of 
A. conferta, Kirchenpauer, 1872; that is to say, simple curved stems spring in pro- 
fusion from a hydrorhiza creeping upon an alea. There is no sign of branching. The 
largest of those colonies is only 18 mm. high, but that they are fully developed is 
shown by their sexual maturity, for several bear corbulee with male gonophores. The 
minute characters of the two types of colonies are identical, and agree with those of 
A. heterodonta. It may be, however, that this is but a synonym of A. conferta, 
the only characters which seem to separate the latter being the absence of an 
unpaired anterior reflexed tooth (which, however, appears to be present in KiRCHEN- 
PAUER’S figure); the outward, instead of the inward, direction assumed by the pair 
of teeth nearest the stem; and the angled nature attributed to the supracalycine 
nematophores. However, it is only by examination of KIRCHENPAUER’S type that 
such a question could be decided. 

That the branched and unbranched colonies are found on two different types of 
substratum probably indicates that they are environmental modifications; the fixed, 
settled colony (that on the sponge) becoming luxuriant, while the drifting, unsettled 
colony (that growing on the alga) tends, as do so many alga-borne Hydroids, to remain 
dwarfed and of simple habit. 

The development of the corbula differs slightly from that of A. plwma as described 
by ALLMAN (1871, p. 59) and Nurrine (1900, p. 40), for the leaves develop less simul- 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLYVIL., 96.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 75 


taneously. While in Nurrie’s specimens all thefleaves had made their appearance before 
even the primary pair had reached full development, here, when only five pairs are 
recognisable, the two first-formed pairs are already full grown; and when six pairs are 
visible the earliest three have reached full development, the later ones being in a state 
of decreasing perfection. 

While some of the corbulz are wholly closed some remain partially open, their 
leaves, at least towards the tip, bearing nematophores on each side, and remaining 
separate from each other. In the latter case the gonophores are always male, in 
the former no gonophores remained; but since maleness and openness go together, 
as they do in so many other cases, it seems probable that in this species we have 
an example of sexual dimorphism of the type described by Mr H. B. Torrey and 
Miss Martin (1906). 

The depth of a hydrotheca varies from 0°27 to 0°28 mm., its diameter at the mouth 
from 0°17 to 0°19 mm. ; measurements agreeing with those of J ADERHOLM. 

Locality.—On sponges and algze from the entrance to Saldanha Bay, Cape Colony. 
Depth, 25 fathoms. Bottom deposit, sand and kelp. 21st May 1904. 


Aglaophena minima, Nutting, 1900. 


Two colonies (the larger 1 em. high) are distinguished by their cylindrical, keelless 
hydrothecze with short projecting mesial nematophores as belonging to this species. In 
addition to the septal ridge, mentioned by Nurrine, which traverses the hydrotheca- 
bearing internode at the level of the intrathecal ridge, another is evident opposite the 
base of the supracalycine nematophores. The opening of the hydrotheca is bordered 
by nine, instead of by eight teeth; and in the mesial nematophore of some of the hydro- 
thecz a slight chitinous constriction, almost in line with the profile of the hydrotheca, 
is apparent. ‘The nematophores on the stem internodes are arranged as follows :—A 
solitary long nematophore on the,front and at the proximal end of the internode ; and in 
the angle between the hydroclade process and the stem, a double nematophore, with two 
diverging processes each bearing a terminal aperture. Only a single opening, however, 
connects the cavity of the double nematophore with that of the colony. The hydroclade 
process itself bears a large simple nematophore on its anterior surface, and to this appears 
to be due the bifurcated appearance mentioned by Nurrine. 

No gonangia were present. 


Measurements :— 
Stem internodes, length i : . - 0°45-0°56 mm. 
- diameter i 3 . : 0:08-0°10 ,, 
Hydroclade internodes, length . : 5 : 0°39 mm. 
Hydrotheca, depth : ; : ; : 0-34 
* diameter at mouth : F ‘ (0 Ga 


Locality.—Growing amongst seaweed on the leg of a masked crab. Station 81, 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 97.) 


76 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


Abrohlos Bank, Brazil. Lat. 18° 24’ §., long. 37° 58’ W. Depth, 36 fathoms. Bottom 
deposit, coral. 20th December 1902. 
Previously recorded from Little Cat Island, Bahamas (NuTTING). 


Aglaophenia latecarinata, Allman, 1877. 


This common tropical species, identical, as shown by the researches of Professor 
Nvurtrine (1900, p. 96), with the A. minuta of Frwxes (1881, p. 132), occurs 
among the Scotia collections in its usual habitat, creeping upon the fronds and 
bladders of Saragassum weed. The specimens, the largest of which are 13 mm. high, 
correspond with Nurrine’s description in all points but one. For while he mentions only 
two nematophores at the base of each hydroclade, I have observed in all cases four 
nematophore apertures, the two recorded by Nurrine, and, in addition, lying immedi- 
ately distal to the internodal process from which the hydroclade projects, in the axil 
between it and the stem, a double nematophore, possessing two apertures, one directed 
to the right, the other to the left of the hydroclade process. The ccenosare of this 
nematophore connects with the general ccenosare of the colony through a single median 
perforation in the internode wall. A similar arrangement of nematophores occurred in 
the specimens examined by Bintarp (1907) and Vurstuys (1899). As the following 
comparative table shows, our specimens are, in all respects, somewhat larger than those 
described by BinLarp :— 


| 
| Scie, | Bitiarp’s Talisman | 
| % Specimen. 
| 
| Length of hydrocaulus : 3 : 6-13 mm. 5-6 mm. 
| Breadth of Ff ; ; : 0-1-0713 mm. 0-08-0°12 mm. 
| Length of stem internodes. F : 0-34 mm. 0-25-0°30 ,, 
* hydrotheca : : nl O;3 ie | 0-27-0°30 ,, 
| Breadth of hydrotheca at mouth (excluding 
| keel) : : é : || OPIN), 5 0-135 mm. 
| Breadth of kee , 5 : 5 0:03 ,, 2 
| 

| 


Locality.—On floating Saragassum weed, caught in spawn net. Station 538. 
Lat. 32° 11’ N., long. 34° 10’ W. 30th June 1904. 


Halicornaria longicauda, Nutting, 1900. 


At first glance one of the specimens which | have referred to this species appears to 
be a fascicled colony with alternate branches; but closer scrutiny shows that there is 
present a central axis with the remains of hydroclades, and that around this are grouped 
tubes which in their distal portions are continued as the so-called branches, and in the 
proximal appear to form the hydrorhizal tubes of the compound colony. The specimen 
really consists of a central axis upon which several distinct Halicornarva colonies happen 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIL., 98.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 77 


to be creeping. The clustered hydrorhizal tubes of these create the resemblance to 
fascicling, but the structure is analogous rather to the rhizocaulom often exhibited by 
Lafoéa dumosa than to a truly fascicled stem. The rhizoid nature of this compound 
stem is confirmed by another specimen (Ag/aophenia dubia) from the same locality, 
where the two lower branches, at least so they appear to the eye, turn out to be distinct 
climbing colonies of 1. longicauda. 

The largest of the colonies found by the Scotia is 11 em. in height. The specific 
characters agree with those given by Professor Nurrinc, but in our specimens the 
hydrothecze appear to have undergone a greater degree of tilting forward than his 
figures indicate, while the lateral teeth are more strongly developed. The aperture is 
vertical and slightly constricted, with a sharp tooth projecting upwards and outwards 
on either side. The intrathecal ridge is well marked, arising near the middle of the 


Fie, 11.—Hualicornaria longicauda, Hydrothece showing variation in the length of 
the median nematophore. 110. 


adnate portion of the mesial nematophore and extending backwards at an angle of 45° 
with the axis of the hydroclade. Its free edge is slightly reduplicated. The supracaly- 
cine nematophores are short and stout, and when viewed from the front appear clearly 
above the hydrotheca, although they do not reach the margin of the aperture. The 
mesial nematophore varies greatly in length ; considerable differences may be seen even 
in two succeeding hydrothecee. Sometimes shorter than in the examples figured by 
Nourrine, it may, on the other hand, extend far beyond the margin of the hydrotheca, 
and, curving gracefully upwards, its tip may reach the level of the upper portion of the 
rim. ‘There are three cauline nematophores (not two, as Nurrine implies) clustered 
about the stem process on which the hydrotheca rests. Two lie on the anterior surface, 
one at the distal, the other at the proximal side of the stem process, while one lies on 
the posterior aspect of the process itself. They are triangular in shape and large, 
normally with two apertures, one at each of the free angles of the triangle, but 
occasionally showing, as a variation, a third aperture, situated medianly between the 
normal two. 
The gonosome is unknown. 


(ROY, 800. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 99.) 


78 MR JAMES RITCHIE: SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT ON 


Measurements :— 
Stem internodes, length : : 4 : 0°29-0°35 min. 
ps breadth : : ‘ : 013-0716 ,, 
Hydroclade internodes, length . : : ‘ 0:25-0°29 ,, 
Hydrotheea, depth : ; ; : ; 0-14 * 
5 vertical diameter at margin j : 0°13-0°14 ,, 
= horizontal ,, . : : 0718 Ps 


Locality.—Station 81, Abrohlos Bank, Brazil. Lat. 18° 14’ S., long. 37° 58’ W. 
Fathoms, 36. Bottom deposit, coral. 20th December 1902. 

Distribution.—The only record given by Nurrrine is from the Caribbean Sea near the 
Isthmus of Panama (lat. 9° 32’ N., long. 79° 55’ W. 36 fathoms). The present 
locality, alsoa shallow water one, is off the coast of Brazil near Porto Alegre—a consider- 
able southwards extension of the known range. 


LITERATURE. 


Mere mention is here made of the memoirs alluded to in this paper. For their titles reference must be 
made to such bibliographies as that in Harriaus’s “ Die Hydroiden der magalhaenischen Region und chilen- 
ischen Kiiste” (below 1905), or those in Nurrrne’s ‘‘ Monographs of the American Hydroids.” 


Awpegr, J., 1857. Trans. Tyneside Naturalists’ Field Club, vol. ii. pp. 93-160. 
Autman, J. G., 1864. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), vol. xiii. pp. 345-380. 


* 1871. A Monograph of the Gymnoblastic or Tubularian Hydroids, London, Ray Society. 
of 1877. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, vol. v., No. 2. 
6 1885. Jour. Linn. Soc. London, Zool., vol. xix., pp. 132-161. 


a 1888. Report Scientific Results, ‘ Challenger,” Zool., vol. xxii. 
Bats, W. M., 1894. Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria, vol. vi. 
Birencourt, A., 1899. ‘ Deuxiéme liste des Hydraires du Pas-de-Calais,” Miscell. Biolog., Trav. Soc. Zool., 
Wimereux, vol. vii. pp. 1-138. 
Bonnevis, K., 1899. Den Norske Nordhavs Expedition, 1876-1878, No. 26. Christiania. 
Bitrarp, A., 1906, (1). Actes Soc. Linn, de Bordeaux, vol. \xi. pp. 69-76. 


- 1906, (2). Hxpédition Antarctique Frangaise, 1903-1905, ‘“ Hydroides.” Paris, 1906. 
3 1907. Ewpéditions scientifiques du ‘ Travailleur” et du ‘‘ Talisman,” tome viii. 


Bruce, W.S8., 1894. ‘ Antarctic Birds” in Knowledge, Sept. 1, 1894, pp. 208-210. 

Busx, Geo., 1850. Rep. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sc., 20 Meet. (London, 1851), pp. 118-120. 

Cuarke, S. F., 1879. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, vol. v., No. 10, p. 239. 

Extis, J., 1755. An Essay toward a Natural History of the Corallines, ete. London, 1755. 

Fewxes, J. W., 1881. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, vol. viii., No. 7, p. 127. 

Harriaus, C., 1900. ‘‘ Revision der Sertularella-Arten,” Abh. naturw. Ver. Hamburg, vol. xvi. pp. 1-143. 


Be 1901. Zool. Jahr., vol. xiv., Syst., pp. 349-379, 
% 1904. Résultats du voyage du S.Y. “ Belgica,” Zool., “ Hydroiden.” Anvers, 1904. 
2 1905. ‘Fauna Chilensis ”—Supplement vi., Zool. Jahr., 1905. 


Hickson, S. J., and Gravety, F. H., 1907. ‘ Hydroid Zoophytes, National Antarctic Expedition,” Natural 
History, vol. ii. 
Hinoxs, T., 1861. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. iii. vol. viii. p. 251. 
“5 1868. <A History of the British Hydroid Zoophytes. London, 1868. 
JAperHoLM, E., 1903, Arkiv for zool., utg. af Kgl. Svenska Vetenskapsakad., Bd. i., pp. 259-312. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 100.) 


THE HYDROIDS OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 79 


JApERHOoLM, E., 1904. Archives de zool. expér. et générale, ser. iv. vol. iii. 
tS 1905. Wissenschuftliche Ergebnisse der schwedischen Siidpolar-Expedition, 1901-1903, 
Bd. v., Lief. 8. Stockholm. 
Lamarck, J. P. B, A. de, 1836. Histotre naturelle des animaux sans vertebres, 2nd edit., 1836. 
Lamouroux, J. V. F., 1821. Hxposition méthodique des Genres de Vordre des Polypiers, ete. Paris, 1821. 
55 1824. Zoologie du voyage autour du monde exécuté sur les corvettes VUranie et la 
Physictenne, etc., Paris, 1824, pp. 603-643. 
Linnxus, C., 1758. Systema Nature, 10th edit. 
3 1789. 3 12th edit. 
M‘Crapy, J., 1859. Proc. Elliott Nat. Hist. Soc., vol. i., No. 1, p. 103. 
MARKTANNER-TURNERETSCHER, G., 1890. Ann. des k. hk. naturh. Hofmuseums, Wien, vol. v. pp. 195-286. 
Norman, A. M., 1864. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 3, vol. xiii. pp. 82-90. 
Nortine, C. C., 1900. “American Hydroids,” Part I. The Plumularidie, Spec. Bull. Smithsonian Inst., 
Washington, 1900. 
oS 1904. Jbid., Part II. The Sertularide. Washington, 1904. 
Ortmann, A. E., 1896. Grundziige der marinen Tieryeographie, Jena, 1896. 
Pauuas, P.S., 1766. Hlenchus Zoophytorum, Haag. 
Proret, C., et Bepor, M., 1900. Résultats des Campagnes Sc., etc., Monaco, fascicule xviii. 
Riven, Jas., 1907 (1). ‘‘Hydroids of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition,” Trans. Roy. Soc. 
Edin., vol. xlv. pp. 519-545 ; also in Report on Sc. Res. of Voyage of S.Y. 
‘ Scolia,’ vol. v. pp. 61-88, Edinburgh, 1909. 
3 1907 (2). Proce, Zoo. Soc. London, 1907, pp. 488-514. 
Tuomson, J. A., 1904. ‘Note on the Gonostyles of Two Antarctic Siphonophora,” Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. 
Edin., vol. xvi. pp. 19-22. 
Torrey, H, B., 1902. “ University of California Publications,” Zool., vol. 1. pp. 1-104. 
Torrey, H. B., and Martin, A., 1906. b/d., vol. 11. pp. 47-52. 
Versturs, J. J.. 1899. Mém. Soe. Zool. France, 1899, vol. xin. pp. 29-58. 
Warren, F., 1908. ‘On a Collection of Hydroids, mostly from the Natal Coast,” Ann. Natal Government 
Mus., vol. 1. part iii., pp. 269-355, 
Wriaut, T.8., 1858. Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edin., vol. i. p. 450. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIL, 101.) 


oT a ea ae 000 eee an 


- ae See 
Wiis) eee a oF 
= = en au 
bia ony i) or ee 
Lt Re Nek 
; i ‘ hy ay ATO it 
2 LVh > Cie Eee 
. orm Pie Gm P @2Er 4 
: aie Rae eer wo* b Ale a 
7 ay anise eg ee on) ie . a 
i 7 . ' a i? , - iy Tes ‘vas ' : . , 
i ATHY SEs sith tiie eer i (8.4 0 


. : : ca eG 

50 Ui gesting WR ahs iat i wie ae 

: ; ie te <0 lem uv > he (ER ane | 

: P teat Abe ely Uk ee 450 
cm etaieal oa Bet ie A 

ie a nar Tha fel ri hy Uta ee eh OP CE Or Tost iol 


; ean A : ieee safe Wig aa 
(QA heel TOP let ee 1 pak ‘ : 
ivy jie hte ce ayy 8 FRAT 


wat LaF re (arty aly GO i 0 ee ae ee ee Wyle aT ae 

: a Onn) AW ete VT 
hol sOpOLatim ; iy ey Wea ei Ail papi ikee atl. oo all na 
ic bageuey Gay *~ evr bbll eaitibedl? 1] a 
f, ary? ‘yet ae edt itty ‘(OE iA) i ro) 


; iat 1 my 7 ‘| a # wf - , ms on Aina dt iL Miya ee ae fi Nee bid “a2 ne 


ane, Paar ne Leal A ya 


’ 5 7 (50h er 3 par a tt rates y 
. 7 
“ - 4 
lis). eee ip ae awit) 


PART TIL 
ACARIENS. 


III.—THE ACARIENS OF THE SCOTTISH 
NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


By Dr E. L. TROUESSART, 


Professor at the Museum of Natural History, Paris. 


— | ce as 
leiGe Wie iy (1 20 ee ; 
7 T(t. J aao 


Acariens de 1’ Expédition Antarctique Nationale Ecossaise. Parle Dr. E.-L. Trouessart, 
Professeur au Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle de Paris. 


(MS. received April 10, 1912. Issued separately July 1, 1912.)* 


La partie des Terres Antarctiques explorée par la Scottish National Antarctic 


Expedition—les Iles Orcades du Sud—appartient 4 la méme région que celles visitées 
précédemment par les expéditions Belges et Frangaises. I] n’y a donc pas lieu d’étre 
surpris si la faune Acarienne de ces iles, groupées autour de la Terre de Graham, 
présente une uniformité assez notable, et si nous retrouvons ici, 4 peu de chose pres, 
les types déja décrits dans les Résultats du Voyage de la “ Belgica.” 

Tous les Acariens dont la détermination nous a été confiée, appartiennent a la 


faune terrestre. ‘Trois familles y sont représentées : Oribatide, Gamaside, Eupodide. 


ORIBATID®. 


Une seule espece, tres voisine de Notaspis antarctica Michael, trouvée par les 
naturalistes de la Belgica sur les mousses et les lichens des rivages du détroit 
de Gerlache.t 

Notaspis scotix, nov. sp. 

Semblable & Notaspis antareticu Michael, mais en différant par sa forme générale 
en ovoide allongé, surtout chez le male (et non pyriforme). La couleur est un brun 
foncé et la texture est plus lisse, plus polie, et plus brillante sur le dos, que chez 
N. antarctica (autant qu’on en peut juger sur des spécimens conservés dans laleool). 

Male en ovale allongé, abdomen terminé par une pointe conique tres courte, 
mais tres nette, et beaucoup plus large que la trés petite pointe figurée par MicHar. 
chez N. antarctica entre les deux poils terminaux. Cephalothorax, rostre, organes 
pseudo-stigmatiques, semblables & ceux de N. antarctica. Abdomen sans aucun 
indice d’échancrures & son extrémité, Cadres génital et anal offrant la méme 
disposition que chez cette derniére espece. Pattes semblables. 

Femelle en ovale régulier, plus court que chez le male, mais ne présentant aucune 
trace de la double échancrure qui termine l’abdomen de la femelle de N. antarctica. 

Nymphe tres semblable a celle de N. antarctica, et présentant, comme celle-ci, une 
cuticule dorsale chagrinée, avec des enfoncements en forme de cuvette sur les bords. 
La plupart des spécimens male et femelle venaient deffectuer leur dernivre mue, ou 
étaient encore renfermés dans leur peau de nymphe (nombreux spécimens). 

Dimensions.—Longueur totale: 1 mm. 20 (la femelle plus large que le mile). 

Hasrrat.—Dans les mousses de I’Ile Saddle (Oreades du Sud), 4 Février 1903. 


* Scottish Oceanographical Laboratory Publications. 
+ Résultats du Voyage du S.Y. “ Belgica” ; Zoologie (1903): “ Acariens libres,” par E. TRovrssarr et A, D, 
MicHAEL ; Oribatide, p. 3, pl. ii., fig. 1 & 11. 


86 AGARIENS DE L’EXPEDITION ANTARCTIQUE NATIONALE ECOSSAISE. 


GAMASIDA. 
Gamasellus racovitzar neo-orcadensis, nov. subsp. 


Tres semblable au type (du détroit de Gerlache), mais en différant par la disposition 
des tubercules de la patte renflée (deuxieme paire), chez le male. Le grand tubercule 
falciforme inséré sur le 3° article n’est pas comprimé a son extrémité en forme de fer 
de hache, mais simplement pointu, en forme de corne. Les autres tubercules sont 
semblables et semblablement disposés. Les cornicules du rostre ont exactement la 
méme forme.* La taille est un peu plus forte: 1 mm. de longueur totale (au 
lieu de 0 mm. 90). 

Ce n’est pas sans hésitation que je sépare cette forme (un seul spécimen mile) 
de G. racovitzac, méme comme simple sous-espece ; on sait, en effet, que chez les 
Gamaside la forme des tubercules de la 2° paire du mile est tres variable d'un 
individu 4 l'autre. Par contre, absence du tubercule a la 4° paire de pattes (si elle 
est constante) aurait une valeur spécifique. 

Remarque.—Tragirdh (dans les Wiss. Ergebniss Swed. Sudpolar Exped., v., 
Zool., 1908, No. 11, p. 7) a eréé le genre Gamasellus, ayant pour type le Gamasus 
racovitzai Trt. de la Belgica. Ce genre differe tres peu de Gamasus, et parait 
renfermer tous les Gamasidx connus de la faune antarctique. 

Hasrrat.—Dans les mousses de IIe Laurie, sur une falaise (cliff) de 200 pieds 
daltitude (mélé & des Collembola). 18 Décembre 1903. Je rapporte a la méme 
espece deux nymphes, provenant de Scotia Bay, 21 Octobre 1903. 


Eupopip&. 


Penthalodes villosus (Trouessart). 
Penthaleus villosus Trouessart, Résultats du Voyage de la “ Belgica,” 1903, 


‘ Acariens terrestres,” p. 6, pl. i., 2a a 2d. 


Les spécimens des Oreades du Sud ne semblent différer de ceux du détroit de 
Gerlache que par une pubescence un peu moins prononcée, surtout sur la partie 
> 
postérieure du notogastre (nombreux spécimens). 


Remarque.—Le genre Penthalodes, ayant pour type Penthaleus  villosus 
Trouessart, 1908, a été eréé par Tragardh (loc. cit., 1908). Il differe en effet des 
Penthaleus typiques par son corps plus allongé, nettement divisé en région 
céphalothoracique et région abdominale, ete. 

Hasirat.—Dans les mousses, sur une falaise de 200 pieds de haut (mélés a des 


Collembola), Ile Laurie. 18 Décembre 1903. 


* Trourssart, Résultats dw Voyage de la “ Belgica,” loc. cit., “* Acariens libres,” p. 8, pl. i., fig. 8, 3a, 3b. 


PART LV: 
- CEPHALOPODA. 


Via tie CE PMALOPODA OF TEE SCOMSH 
NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


By WILLIAM EVANS HOYLE, M.A., D.Sc. 


Director of the National Museum of Wales, Cardiff. 


(WITH TEXT ILLUSTRATIONS.) 


The Cephalopoda of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. 
By William Evans Hoyle, M.A., D.Xe. 


(MS. received January 8, 1912. Read February 19,1912. Issued separately May 28, 1912.) 


The Cephalopoda collected by the Scotia may, with a few trifling exceptions, be 
separated geographically into three divisions, coming respectively from South Africa, 
South America, and the Antarctic. 


A. Sourtn AFRICA: 
Kuprymna. sp. 
Sepiolid (undetermined). 
Loligo reynaudi. 
Sepia australis, 
Hemaisepius typicus. 


B. Sours AMERICA: 
Polypus brucei, n. sp. 
Polypus tehuelchus. 
Desmoteuthis sp. 


C. AntTarcric REGIONS : 


Stauroteuthis sp. 
Moschites charcoti. 
Onychoteuthis ingens. 
Bathyteuthis abyssicola. 


Galiteuthis suhmi. 


In addition were collected :— 


BETWEEN THE CAPE AND TRISTAN DA CUNHA: 
Histioteuthis sp. 


EQUATORIAL ATLANTIC : 


n iE c 5 7 y 
Tremoctopus quoyanus. 


A considerable number of the horny mandibles of Cephalopods were obtained from 
the stomachs of various mammals and birds, but the small amount of authentically 


(REPRINTED FROM THE TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF EDINBURGH, VOL. XLVIII, PP. 273--283.) 


92 DR WILLIAM EVANS HOYLE ON THE 


named material available does not justify an attempt to identify them. The animals 
referred to and the localities were :— 


Ross’ Seal.—Station 165, 6th February 1903. 

Weddell’s Seal.—Station 326, Jessie Bay, South Orkneys, May 1903; Station 325, 
South Orkneys, 21st September 1903. 

Albatross.—Station 437, 3rd April 1904. 

Sooty Albatross.-—Station 376, lat. 64° 38’ S., long. 35° 13’ W. 23rd February 
1904. 

Emperor Penguin.—Station 248, lat. 69° 46’ S., long. 20° 58’ W. 21st February 
1908. 


SYSTEMATIC LIST. 


CIRROTEUTHID&. 
Stauroteuthis sp. 


Locality.—Station 295, Weddell Sea. Lat. 66° 40’S., long. 40° 85’ W. 10th March 
1903. 2425 fathoms. One specimen [H 956].* 

This is probably either S. meangensis or S. hippocrepium, but in the mutilated 
condition of the body and the absence of the internal cartilage it is impossible to 
speak with certainty. It is just possible that it might be one of the species of 
Cirroteuthis, but this is less likely. 

A number of fragments and a few fairly complete examples of Crustacea were 
found in the gizzard of this specimen, and an account of them has been published by 
Dr Tuomas Scorr.t The most remarkable appears to be Pontostratiotes abyssicola, 
G. 8. Brady, which seems never to have been met with since the unique type was 
obtained by the Challenger in mud from 2200 fathoms in lat. 37° 29’ 8, long. 
27° 31’ W. This is of interest as furnishing corroborative evidence of the deep-sea 
habits of the Cirroteuthidee. By a clerical error Dr Scorr gives the date of capture 
as 1908 instead of 1903. 

A water-colour drawing of this specimen, made on the Expedition, shows that the 
coloration very closely resembles that of Stauroteuthis hippocrepium, as depicted 
in the Albatross Report;{ the colour of the body is, however, more deeply purple. 
As compared with Cirroteuthis wmbellata, Fischer,§ the arms are dull red instead 
of deep purple (though this may be owing to the oral aspect of the arms being 
depicted in one case and the aboral in the other), and the body is purple instead 
of pale reddish. 

* The numbers in square brackets refer to my own register of specimens examined, 
+ Ann. and Mag. Nat, Hist. (8), vol. v. pp. 51-54, pls. ii., iii,, Jan. 1910, 


¢ Horie, Bull, Mus. Comp. Zool., vol. xliii., No. 1, pl. i. fig. 1, pl. ii. fig. 1, 1904. 
§ Jousrn, ‘‘Céphalopodes de la ‘ Princesse Alice,’” pl. i., 1900 (1901). 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 274.) 


CEPHALOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 93 


Natural size. 


R'3. 


R4. 


@@4 


Fs> ax 
ae — 
——— 


Jigs? 3 = 
rhe I 

an Ap . 

— x ins 4, 


Fic. 1.—Oral aspect of the arms of Polypus bruce?, to show the arrangement of the enlarged suckers. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 275.) 


94 DR WILLIAM EVANS HOYLE ON THE 


TREMOCTOPODIDA. 
Tremoctopus quoyanus, VOrbigny, 1835. 
Locality.—Tow-net, Station 59, Equatorial Atlantic. Lat. 2° 30’S., long. 32° 42’ W. 
12th December 1902. Surface. One specimen, ¢ [H 1366]. 
Previous Records.—Atlantic and Pacific Oceans. 


PoLyPpopip&. 
Polypus brucei, n. sp. 
Locality.—Station 846, Burdwood Bank, off Tierra del Fuego. 1st December 


1903. One specimen, f [H 924]. 
The Body is a flattened ovoid, with a very shallow groove along the middle 


Fic, 2.—The hectocotylised arm of Polypus brucei. a, oval aspect of 
the extremity. Natural size. 


line ventrally. The mantle opening extends fully half way round the cireumference 
of the body, terminating immediately below and behind the eyes. The siphon is 
short and broad, and extends less than half way from the margin of the mantle to 
the edge of the umbrella. 

The Head is somewhat narrower than the body, and the eyes are but slightly 
prominent. 

The Arms are somewhat unequal, and about four times as long as the body ; 
their order of length is 1, 2=3, 4. The umbrella is well marked and its arrange- 
ment very characteristic. On the dorsal aspect of each arm it is attached as far as 
a poimt about one-third up the arm, whilst on the ventral aspect its attachment 
can be followed to about within 1 cm. of the extreme tip of the arm. The suckers 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 276.) 


CEPHALOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 95 


(fig. 1) on all the eight arms are enlarged for the second quarter of the arm; after 
about the first twelve suckers they enlarge very rapidly for about six suckers, and 
then gradually diminish. The third arm on the right side is hectocotylised (fig. 2), 
and is considerably shorter than its fellow on the opposite side. The seminal groove 
is well marked, but is neither very broad nor very deep; the modified extremity 


is unusually long and narrow, and, instead of the usual transverse ridges, shows a 
double row of small papillee along its bottom. 

The Surface shows a considerable amount. of wrinkling, due apparently to the 
action of preservative fluids, but was most probably smooth when the animal was 
alive. There is no trace of any warts or tubercles. 

The Colour is dull purplish above, changing gradually into a pinkish stone 
colour below. 

The Radula is shown in fig. 3. 


Dimensions in Millimetres. 


End of body to mantle margin . ; : : < ; 58 
End of body to eye 5 : : : : (3) 
Breadth of body : . ; ; : : 60 
Breadth of head a ‘ ; : ; : 50 
Eye to edge of umbrella : ; : : 60 
Length of hectocotylus . ‘ ‘ : : : : 17 
Breadth of hectocotylus 3 
Diameter of largest sucker on arm : : : ; 15 
Right. Left 
Length of first arm : : : 270 275 
Length of second arm. : : 185* 250* 
Length of third arm ‘ : : : 200 260 
Length of fourth arm. ‘ : > 255 255 


* Mutilated. 


This species is evidently nearly related to P. megalocyathus (Gould) from the 
same geographical region. It differs, however, in the absence of the extremely 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 277.) 


96 DR WILLIAM EVANS HOYLE ON THE 


marked constriction between the head and umbrella, as well as of the membrane 
along the sides of the body, and in the fact that the enlarged suckers are found 
in all the arms. It is impossible to ascertain whether this last peculiarity occurs 
in GoULD’s species, but his comparison with P. fontanianus, in which only the 
lateral arms have enlarged suckers, would lead one to suppose that such was the 
case in his species also. 

I have much pleasure in dedicating this species to my friend Dr W. S. Bruce, 
the leader of the expedition. 


Polypus tehuelchus, VOrbigny, 1835 ? 


Locality.—Station 118, Falkland Islands. Lat. 51° 49’ S, long. 57° 51’ W. 
Shore collection. 6th February 1904. One specimen, ¢ [H 1696]. 


Fie. 4.—Hectocotylised arm of Polypus tehwelchus. 
a, oral aspect of the extremity. Natural size. 


Port Stanley, Falkland Islands. February 1904. One specimen, 2 [H 926]. 

Previous Records.—Kast coast of Patagonia, 40° 8.; Strait of Magellan; Punta 
Arenas; Nicaragua; St Thomas, Danish West Indies. 

The skin of the upper part of the body, and especially of the head, is very 
much wrinkled, but this is probably due to the action of reagents, as no traces of 
definite papillee can be found. The animal was most likely smooth in the natural 
state. The hectocotylised arm of the male (fig. 4) has a very well-developed 
seminal groove, especially at the proximal end, where the membrane forming it 
stands out very distinctly from the surface of the arm. The tip is comparatively 
short and broad, measuring 6x8 mm., and of quite normal form; the terminal 
groove is small and narrow ; its margins are deeply folded (perhaps owing to reagents), 
and there are no transverse ridges across its bottom. The radula is shown in fig. 5. 

I believe this specimen to be correctly identified, but there is some little doubt 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLYIII., 278.) 


CEPHALOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 97 


owing to its colour being neither so dark above nor so pale below as is indicated 
in D’OrBIGNY’s description and figure. 


Moschites charcoti (Joubin), 1905. 


Locality —Station 325, Scotia Bay, South Orkneys. 7th August 1903. 10 
fathoms. One specimen, ¢ [H 929]. Same locality. 30th May 1903. 9-10 
fathoms. Temperature about 28°. One specimen, ? [H 936]. 


Fic. 6.—Hectocotylised arms of Moschites charcoti, a, oral aspect of the 
extremity. Natural size. 


Previous Records.—Booth-Wandel Island. Lat. 65° 05’ 8. Among alge on the 
beach. 3rd September 1904. 

The hectocotylised arm (fig. 6) is short and stout; the ridge bounding the 
seminal groove is very well marked, and is continuous with the margin of the 
umbrella. The groove itself is broad and deep, the extremity measures 7 x 5 mm. ; 
the longitudinal groove is triangular in form, and has four transverse ridges in its 
bottom. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 279.) 


98 DR WILLIAM EVANS HOYLE ON THE 
The radula is shown in fig. 7. 
According to coloured drawings made on the Expedition, the male of this species 


is dull stone colour above, deepening to brown in the centre of the back; the 


j / 
z 


\ 


Fic. 7.—Radula of Moschites charcoti, 6 [H 924]. x50. 


female is much paler, with a pinkish tinge above, almost white below. The 
colours would, however, probably undergo change according to the varying state 


of contraction of the chromatophores. 


SEPIOLIDA. 
Euprymna Sp. 
Locality.—Station 482, Saldanha Bay, Cape Colony. 19th May 1904. 8-10 
fathoms. ‘Trawled. One specimen, too young to determine [H 934]. 


Sepiolid gen. et sp. ? 
Locality.—Entrance to Saldanha Bay, Cape of Good Hope. 21st May 1904. 


25 fathoms. 
A head and arms, much macerated | H 1367 |. 


LOLIGINIDA. 
Loligo reynaudi, VOrbigny, 1845. 

Locality.—Station 480, eight miles north of Dassen Island, Cape Colony. 35 fathoms. 
Between 2 and 2.30 p.m., 18th May 1904. One specimen, ? [H 927]. 

Twenty-six young specimens, thirteen @, twelve ?, one damaged |[H 930]. One 
somewhat damaged specimen, 2, probably of this species [H 1372]. 

Previous Records.—Cape of Good Hope; False Bay, Cape ‘own. 

It is quite possible that some of the young specimens recorded as females 
may be males in which the secondary sexual characters were as yet undeveloped. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 280.) 


CEPHALOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 99 


SEPIIDA. 
Sepia australis, Quoy and Gaimard, 1882. 


Locality.—Station 480, eight miles north of Dassen Island, Cape Colony. 35 
fathoms. 18th May 1904. One specimen, ? [H 932]. 

Previous Records.—Cape of Good Hope, Agulhas Bank; North Queensland ; 
New South Wales. 

This is not S. australis, VOrbigny : that author changed Quoy’s name to S. capensis, 
and gave the name S. australis to a quite different form. 

The tentacular club (fig. 8) shows three suckers much larger than the others, 
which diminish in size towards the tip, the third being about half the diameter of 
the first. 


Fic. 8.—Tentacular club of Sepia australis [H 932]. x7°5. 


Hemisepius typicus, Steenstrup, 1875. 


Locality.—Station 482, Saldanha Bay, Cape Colony. 19th May 1904. 8-10 
fathoms ; trawled. Two specimens, ? [H 933 and 1380]. 
Previous Record.—Table Bay, Cape Town. 


ONYCHOTEUTHID&. 


Onychoteuthis ingens, Smith, 1881. 


Locality.—Off the South Orkney Islands. Lat. 60° 10’ S., long. 42°°35’ W. 
6th February 1903. From the stomach of a Ross’ seal: a number of half-digested 
fragments [H 925]. 

Station 325, Scotia Bay, South Orkneys. 1st January 1904. One specimen [H 928]. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 281.) 


100 DR WILLIAM EVANS HOYLE ON THE 


A drawing of the radula is given in fig. 9, as its form differs in a few details from 
that shown by Smirx.* 


Fic. 9.—Radula of Onychoteuthis ingens [H 925], x 25. 


HISsTIOTEUTHID#. 
Histioteuthis sp. juv. 


Locality.—Station 468, South Atlantic. Lat. 39° 48’ &, long. 2° 33’ E. 29th 
April 1904. 2645 fathoms. One specimen [{H 940]. 

The specimen is somewhat damaged. The interbrachial membrane is slightly devel- 
oped. One arm shows the pigmented organ at the extremity, which, so far as | am aware, 
is characteristic (in this family) of the genus Histioteuthis, although it is not alluded 
to in the diagnosis either of PrerreR or Coun. In many respects it resembles the 
Challenger specimen called Histiopsis atlantica, which was also from the same region, 
but is pale and semi-transparent, whilst that was opaque and dull reddish in colour. 


BATHYTEUTHID &. 


Bathyteuthis abyssicola, Hoyle, 1885. 
Benthoteuthis megalops, Chun, “ Cephalopoden,” Wiss, Ergebn. deutsch. Tiefsee Exped., p. 185, pls, xxiv.—xxvii. 

Locality.— Station 416, off Coats Land. Lat. 71° 22’ S., long. 18° 15’ W. 
Surface to 2300 fathoms. 17th March 1904. One specimen [H 938]. 

Previous Records.— Southern Ocean, lat. 46° 16’ 8, long. 48° 27’ E.; off 
Martha’s Vineyard, U.S.A.; off Cape Mala, Gulf of Panama; off Cape Agulhas; 
Hquatorial Indian Ocean. 

Professor Coun has adopted VeRRILL’s name BLenthoteuthis megalops for this 
species, on the ground that “sheet 50 of the ZYrans. Connect. Acad., vol. vi., in 
which VERRILL’s description is contained, bears (p. 399) the note ‘April 1885.’” 
If my friend is content to accept this method of determining dates of publication, 
he may turn to sheet 34 of the Narrative of the Challenger Expedition, vol. i., 
first part, in which Hoytn’s description is contained, and he will find that it bears 

* Proc, Zool. Soc, 1881, pl. iii, fig. 1b. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 282.) 


CEPHALOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 101 


(p. 265) the date “1884.” I was fully aware of both these dates when | prepared 
the Report on the ‘“ Challenger” Cephalopoda, but as a matter of fact neither of 
them is a date of publication. Sheet 50 of Verriti’s Third Catalogue of Mollusca 
. of the New England Coast was not published by itself, but along with sheets 
51-56, in a wrapper which bears the words, ‘‘ Newhaven, April to June 1885.” 
Therefore, under the most favourable construction, it cannot possibly have appeared 
before June, and careful inquiries which I made at the time led me to the conclusion 
that it did not make its appearance till July. I may further add that in the 
twenty-five years which have elapsed since the statement was published its accuracy 
has never been impugned. 
CRANCHIIDA. 
Galiteuthis suhmi, Hoyle, 1886. 

? Procalistes suhmii, Lankester, Quart. Journ, Mier. Sct., vol. xxiv. p. 311, 1884. 

Taonius suhmi, Hoyle, Ceph. Challenger Exped., p. 192, pl. xxxii. figs. 5-11, 1886. 

Taonidium suhmi, Pfetter, Synopsis Oegopsid. Ceph., p. 192, 1900. 

Galiteuthis armata, Joubin, Ann. Sci. Nat, (Zool.), sér. 8, vol. vi. p. 279, 1898. 


Galiteuthis (Taonidium) suhmit, Chun, “ Cephalopoden,” Wiss. Ergebn. deutsch. Tiefsee Exped., 
p- 382, pl. lix., 1910. 


Locality.—Station 422, Weddell Sea. Lat. 68° 32’ S., long. 12° 49’ W. 28rd 
March 1904. Vertical net; surface to 600 fathoms. One specimen [H 935. 

Previous Records.— South of Australia, lat. 47° 25’ 8%, long. 130° 22’ E. ; 
Mediterranean ; Equatorial Atlantic in the Guinea Current. 

This specimen has a mantle length of 45 mm., and is, therefore, considerably 
larger than that described by Cuun (34 mm.); but nevertheless I could find no 
trace of the modification of the tentacular suckers into hooks as depicted by him 
(pl. lix. figs. 6, 7); still, the other characters agree so well that I have no doubt 
that it belongs to the same species as his. 

If it could be proved satisfactorily that the embryo described by LANKESTER 
really belonged to this species, his name would take precedence; but at present 
it seems advisable to keep the name Procalistes suhmw for it, and to call "the 
more mature specimens by the name adopted by Cuun. 


Desmoteuthis sp. 
Locality.—Station 98, off Rio Grande, South America. Lat. 34° 2’ S, long. 
49° 7 W. 28th December 1902. Mantle and fin, cast up by a petrel. Too 
fragmentary to determine. [H 1368. ] 


I have not thought it necessary to encumber this Report with full bibhographical 
references ; these will be found in my Catalogue of Recent Cephalopoda and its two 
Supplements.* The drawings have been made by Miss I. M. Davenport, B.Sc., under my 
supervision, 


* Proc, Roy. Phys. Soc. Edin., vol. ix., 1886; vol. xiii., 1897; vol. xvii., 1909, 


Natronat Musrum or Wates, Carpirr, 
6th January 1912. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 283.) 


“ie See 
Li _ . 

— 

if 7 conta 


iT DAA? " ad ee 
Van a) tree Va! i - “ a 
“f a . ij Dect 7 i ‘ + 
} ae = ne Peo ity 
3 9 fA ai ray F 7 taf 
i Pifeakaet 
al “A 7 - ait 


ae | PART VY, 
ese Hes MeO Ss CAs. 


V.-THE MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH 
NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


BY 
JAMES COSMO MELVILL, M.A., D.Sc, F.LS., 
AND 


ROBERT STANDEN, 


Assistant Keeper, Manchester Museum, 


(WITH ONE PLATE.) 


eee CON Ul kee ROBERTO Te, cea 
ULV VLES T DaS 

ie | a i a, . 

cahit ae ett ine OI WOVEN 


tp 


. * PL Ary NTE Ts 


Poe 
DICH Soe OT AAS ial ee 


PAR VERE 


The Marine Mollusca of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. By James 
Cosmo Melvill, M.A., D.Sc., F.L.S., and Robert Standen, Assistant Keeper, 
Manchester Museum. Communicated by Dr W. 8S. Bruce. (With One 
Plate.) 


(MS. received April 24,1912. Read June 3, 1912. Issued separately August 26, 1912.) 


PART It. 


Beina a SUPPLEMENTARY CATALOGUE. 


Since we had the pleasure of working out the Mollusca obtained by the Scottish 
National Antarctic Expedition, Dr W. 8. Bruce has kindly transmitted to our care 
some additional material, overlooked in the first instance, and taken (@) from deposits 
from jars in which Sponges were placed ; (b) from Aleve and other growths, principally 
coming from Scotia Bay ; and (c) from a new species of Cephalodiscus. 

Of these the last, when macerated out and closely examined, produced the most 
prolific and interesting results ; but, notwithstanding this fact, the condition of many 
of the specimens extracted leaves much to be desired, so fragmentary and useless for 
scientific purposes was a very large proportion found to be. A certain few, however, 
are happily in better condition and recognisable, and, of these, we find several to have 
been described by Dr Hermann Srreset of Hamburg in 1908, the year subsequent 
to our first paper upon the subject being published. 

Others remain, of which over twenty do not appear to be represented in the collec- 
tions to which we could obtain access, nor mentioned in any of the treatises yet published 
on the Antarctic fauna. We are therefore emboldened to consider them new to science 
in the accompanying supplementary catalogue. 

We include afresh in the list of species obtained by this expedition those already 
eatalogued in our first paper, thus rendering it as complete as possible, and signalise 
with an asterisk (*) those which are amongst the addenda now chronicled. 

We would thank Mr Epear Smirn, I.8.0., for having examined some of the material, 
and likewise would express our indebtedness to the Rev. Lnwis J. Suackierorp, Messrs 
B. R. Lucas and J. Witrrip Jackson, F.G.S., for having aided us in the difficult task 
of extracting such small and fragile objects from the mass in which they were too often 
almost hopelessly embedded. Mr ‘I. IrepaLE has also kindly drawn up the description 
of a new species of Chatopleura for this paper. 

We would only add that we have extended the Bibliographical Catalogue of the 
Antarctic Molluscan Fauna from 1907 to 1912 at the end of this enumeration. 


(REPRINTED FROM THE TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF EDINBURGH, VOL, XLVIIL, PP. 333-366.) 


108 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILIL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


REVISED LIST OF SPECIES CONTAINED IN THE 
“SCOTIA” COLLECTIONS. 


A. Recto ANTARCTICA—INCLUDING GoucH ISLAND. 


Class GASTEROPODA. 
Order AMPHINEURA. 
Sub-order PoLYPLACOPHORA. 
Callochiton illuminatus (Reeve). 
Tonicia atrata (Sowb.). 
* Plaxiphora setigera (King). 
* Chetopleura brucei, Iredale, sp. n. 
* Henuarthrum setulosum, Carpenter. 
Lepidopleurus pagenstecheri, Pfeffer. 


Order PROSOBRANCHIATA. 
Sub-order DIOTOCARDIA. 


(a) Docoglossa. 


Family Acmexidz. 


Acmea ceciliana, Orbigny. 


Family Patellide. 
Patella xnea, Martyn, var. deaurata, Gmelin. 
rf Juegiensis, Reeve. 
a polaris, Hombron and Jacquinot. 


(b) Rhipidoglossa, 
Section Zygobranchiata. 


Family Fissurellide. 
Fissurella oriens, Sowb. 
a picta, Gmel. 
Tugalia antarctica, M. and St. 
* Puncturella noachina (L.) 


Family Pleurotomariide. 
* Scissurella eucharista, sp. n. 


3 euglypta, Pelseneer. 
53 supraplicata, Smith 
* 


3 “umora, sp. 0. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI, 334.) 


MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 109 


Section Azygobranchiata. 


Family Cyclostrematide. 


* Cyclostrema calypso, sp. n. 
- os coatsianum, sp. 0. 
2 3 gaudens, sp. n. 
- meridionale, sp. n. 


Family Trochide. 
* Calliostoma modestulum, Strebel. 
Photinula expansa (Sowb.). 
as teniata, Wood. 
5 violacea, King. 
Valvatella antarctica (K. Lamy). 


Sub-order MONOTOCARDIA. 
Section («) Ptenoglossa. 


Family Lanthinde. 
Tanthina exigua, Lamarck. 


Family Scalide. 
* Scala magellanica, Phil. 


Section (b) Teenioglossa. 


Family Naticide. 
* Natica impervia, Phil. 
» (Lunatia), sp. juv. 


Family Trichotropide. 
* Trichotropis antarctica, sp. n. 


Family Capulide. 
* Calyptrea chinensis, L. 
os costellata, Phil. 
As dilatata, Lamk. 


Family Littorinide. 
Inttorina (Lxvilitorina) caliginosa (Gould). 


5 a corvacea, M. and St. 
os (Pellilitorina) pellita, v. Marts. 
35 55 setosa, Smith. 


* Lacuna abyssicola, sp. n. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 335.) 


110 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


Lacuna divaricata, Fabricius. 
notorcadensis, M. and St. 


99 


a wandelensis, K. Lamy. 


29 


Family Rissoide. 
Rissoa adarensis, Smith. 
,  (Cingula) cingillus (Mont. ). 

* | deserta, Smith. 

,  edgariana, M. and St. 

* |,  (Onoba) filostria, sp. n. 

,  fraudulenta, Smith. 

* — — (Onoba) fuegoensis, Strebel. 

parva (Da Costa). 

* |, (Onoba) paucilirata, sp. 0. 
om »  scotiana, M. and St. 
be ,,  sulcata, Strebel. 

»  (Ceratia) turquetr, K. Lamy. 
»  (Manzonia) zetlandica (Mont.). 

Eatoniella kerquelenensis, Smith. 

Family Litiopide. 

Litiopa melanostoma, Rang. 

Family Cerithude. 

Cerithium georgianum, Pfeffer. 

” pullum, Phil. 

* Bittium brucei, sp. nu. 
burdwoodianum, sp. n. 

Cerithiopsis macroura, sp. 0. 

i malvinarum (Strebel, MS.), M. and St. 

Family Turritellide. 

* Turritella algida, sp. n. 

* Mathilda rhigomaches, sp. n. 

Family Tritonide. 
Gyrineum vexillum (Sowb.). 


Section (c) Gymnoglossa. 
Family Lulimide. 
Eulima antarctica, Strebel. 
Family Pyramidellide. 
* Turbonilla smithi, Pfetler. 
e xenophyes, sp. 0. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 336.) 


MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. ial 


Section (d) Rachiglossa. 


Family Muricide. 
Trophon brucei, Strebel. 
»  emnguliferus, Pfeffer. 
,,  erispus (Couthouy). 
* » falklandicus, Strebel. 
»  geversianus (Pallas). 
x hoylei, Strebel. 
% liratus (Couthouy). 
es minutus (Strebel, MS.), M. and St. 
rf philippranus, Dunker. 
* Antistreptus magellanicus, Dall. 
Family Nassidz. 
Nassa (Ilyanassa) Valentini, M. and St. 


Family Buccinide. 
Chrysodomus (Sipho) archibenthalis, M. and St. 
re - crassicostatus, M. and St. 

Neobuccinum eatoni, Smith. 
Euthria fuscata (Brug.). 

,  magellanica (Phil.). 

be michaelsent, Strebel. 

fe rosea, Hombron and Jacquinot. 


Family Volutide. 
Voluta (Cymbiola) ancilla, Solander. 
Guivillea alabastrina, Watson. 
Mitra (Volutomitra) porcellana, sp. n. 


Section (e) Toxoglossa. 


Family Conide. 


Columbarium benthocallis, M. and St. 
Mangilia costata (Donovan). 
Bela anderssoni, Strebel. 
» fulvicans, Strebel. 
? Thesbia, sp. 


Savatieria concinna, sp. n. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 337.) 


112 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


Family Cancellarude. 
Admete magellanica, Strebel. 
* ,  Umnexformis, Smith. 
* Paradmete typica, Strebel. 
Order OpISTHOBRANCHIATA. 
Sub-order TECTIBRANCHIATA. 
Section Bulloidea. 
Family Tornatinide. 
* Retusa antarctica, sp. n. 
»  truncatula (Brug.). 
Section Siphonarioidea. 
Family Siphonarude. 
Suphonaria redimiculum, Reeve. 
Order PULMONATA. 
Sub-order BASOMMATOPHORa. 
Family Auriculide. 
Marinula nigra, Phil. 


Class SCAPHOPODA. 
Dentalium eupatrides, M. and St. 
- megathyris, Jousseaume. 


Class PELECYPODA. 
Order PROTOBRANCHIATA. 
Family Nuculide. 
Nucula minuscula, Pfeffer. 
- pisum, Sowb. 
Yoldia eights (Couth. ). 
»  profundorum, sp. n. 


* 


Order FILIBRANCHIATA. 
Sub-order ANOMIACEA. 
Family Anomiude. 
Anomia ephippium, Linn. 


Sub-order ARCACEA. 
Family Arcide. 
Arca (Bathyarca) strebeli, M. and St. 
Lissarca notorcadensis, M. and St. 
= rubrofusca, Smith. 
LIimopsis longipilosa, Pelseneer. 


(ROY. SOC. FDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 338.) 


MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 113 


Sub-order MYTILACEA. 
Family Mytilide. 
Mytilus edulis, Linn. 
2 magellanicus, Chemnitz. 
, ovals, Lamarck. 
Philobrya meridionalis (Smith). 
. quadrata (Pfeffer). 
i sublevis, Pelseneer. 
- wandelensis, K. Lamy. 
* Crenella decussata (Mont. ). 
Modiolarca mesembrina, M. and St. 


Order PSEUDOLAMELLIBRANCHIATA. 
Family Pectenide. 
Pecten colbecki, Smith. 
, multicolor, M. and St. 
» 2 patagonicus, King. 
»  pterrola, M. and St. 
Amussium 18-liratum, M. and St. 


Family Limide. 
Lima goughensis, M. and St. 
, (Limatula) pygmexa, Philippi. 


Order KULAMELLIBRANCHIATA. 


Sub-order SUBMY'TILACEA. 
Family Carditide. 


* Cardita congelascens, sp. Nn. 


* Pr pallida, Smith, var. 12—-costata nov. 
Family Astartide. 
* 


Astarte magellanica, Smith. 


Family Lucinide. 
Diplodonta lamellata, Smith. 
Cryptodon falklandicus, Smith. 
Cyamium antarcticum, Philippi. 
a denticulatum, Smith. 
_ falklandicum, M. and St. 


* 


Family Erycinde. 
Lasxa consanguinea (Smith). 
Kellyia cycladiformis, Desh. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 339.) 


114 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


Kellyva lamyz, M. and St. = australis, Lamy non Desh. 
»  magellanicus, Smith. 
* Davisia cobbi, Cooper and Preston. 
Scacchia plenilunium, M. and St. 


Sub-order TELLINACEA. 
Family Telliiide. 
Tellina (Mera) pusilla (Philippi). 


Sub-order VENERACEA. 
Family Veneride. 
Chione philomela (Smith). 
Tapes (Amygdala) exalbida (Chem. ). 


Sub-order MYAcgEa, 
Family Glycimeride. 
Saxicava arctica (L.), var. antaretica. Philippi. 


Sub-order ANATINACEA. 
Family Lyonside. 
Lyonsia cuneata (Gray). 


Family Anatinide. 
Anatina elliptica, King and Broderip. 


Order SEPTIBRANCHIATA. 
Family Cuspidaride. 
Juspidaria brucei, M. and St. 


At Dr Brucr’s request, we also include in the list of Mollusca obtained by the 
expedition certain species from St Vincent, Cape de Verde Islands, Pyramid Point, 
Ascension Island, and Funchal, Madeira. None of these call for special remark, 
beyond the fact that several, e.g. Arca bouviert, are endemic species, and that, so 
far as we can ascertain, Calliostoma montagui and Pisania maculosa have not been 
hitherto recorded from Cape de Verde. 


A. From St Vincent, Cape pE Verpe I[sLanps. 
Chetopleura fulva (Wood). 
Patella plumbea, Lamarck. 
Fissurella greca (Linné). 
Haliotis lamellosa, Lamarck. 
Monodonta articulata, Lamarck. 
= punctulata, Lamarck. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIIL, 340.) 


MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


Monodonta turbinata (Born.). 

st tamsi (Dunker). 
Calliostoma montagui (W. Wood). 

bs zvzyphinus (Linné). 
Phasianella pulla, Linné, var. 
Pachypoma (Bolma) rugosa (Linné). 
Natica intricata, Donovan. 
Calyptrea sinensis, Linné, 

Littorina punctata, Gmelin, 
+ striata, King. 
Cerithium musicum, Sowerby. 

a vulgatum, Brug. 


Planaais lineatus, Cost. 
Cyprea spurca, Linné, 


Trivia arctica, Solander, var. ewropea, Mont. 


Cassis testiculus, Linné. 
Obeliscus terebellum, Mill. 
Murex rosarium, Chem. 
Ocinebra corallina, Scacchi. 
Purpura hemastoma, Linné. 

a neritoidea, Linné. 
Collumbella rustica, Linné. 

i ms var. azorica, Drouet. 

Nassa cornicula, Olivier. 

, reticulata, Linné. 

»  cuviert, Payr. 

Pisania maculosa, Lamarck. 
Leucozonia triserialis, Lamarck. 
Conus genuanus, Linné. 

5 guinaicus, Brug. 

,  mediterraneus, Brug. 
Tethys punctata, Cuvier. 
Haminea navicula, Da Costa. 
Siphonaria venosa, Reeve. 
Arca bouviert, Fischer. 
Barbatia afra, Gmelin. 
Pectunculus formosus, Reeve. 

< concentricus, Dunker. 
Mytilus puniceus, Lamarck. 
Pinna rudis, Linné. 


(ROY. 800. EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL., 341.) 


(Infundibulum) radians, Lamarck. 


115 


116 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


Lithodomus aristatus, Dillwyn. 

Spondylus gederopus, Linné. 

Cardita senegalensis, Reeve. 

» agar, Brug. 

Lucina pecten, Lamarck. 

Chama senegalensis, Reeve. 

Venus gallina, Linné. 

Chione nodosa, Dunker. 
verrucosa, Linné. 

Cardium edule, Linné. 


B. From Ascension Istanp. Pyramid Point, 40 fathoms. 


Nerita ascensionis, Gmelin. 
Pecten miniaceus, Reeve. 
Chama, sp. 


C. From Funcuat, Maperra. Shore. 


Patella cxrulea, Linné. 


Class GASTEROPODA. 


Order AMPHINEURA. 


Sub-order POLYPLACOPHORA. 


Chiton (Plaxiphora) setiger, Kine. 


Chiton setiyer, King, Zool. Journ., v. p. 338 (1831). 
& ». Sowerby, Conch. Illustr., p. 17. 
- ,, Zool. Beechey’s Voyage, pl. xl. fig. 7. 
39 Reeve, Conch. Icon., t. ix. fig. 48a; t. xiv. fig. 48c. 
s ,, Gould, U.S. Explor. Exped.: Moll., p. 330, fig. 425. 
Plaxiphora Carmichaelis, Gray, P.Z.S. Lond. (1846), p. 68. 
; *, Haddon, Challenger Rep., p. 32. 
5 H. and A. Adams, Gen. Rec. Moll., i. p. 481, and iii., t. 55, fig. 3. 
Ghatonleura Savatiert, Rochebrune, Bull. Soc. Phil. Paris (1880-81), p. 119; Miss. Set. du 
Cap Horn. 
5 Srigida, Rochebrune, l.c., p. 137, t. 91, figs. 5a, 5d. 


Hab.—Gough Island, April 22, 1904. Station 461. 
Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, rarely. Station 325. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL, 342.) 


MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 117 


Chetopleura brucei, Iredale, sp. n. (Plate, figs. 24, 24a—d.) 


Shell of medium size, ovate, depressed, girdle fleshy, densely covered with hairs, the 
longer being very prominent on a bed of shorter ones, appearing to be grouped and 
longest near the sutures. Valves broad, with a well-marked keel, though not very high, 
the posterior valve having the muero about the anterior third. 

Shell smooth, the lateral areas being indicated by a very faintly raised ridge. 

Down the median keel of the five centre valves is a row of pustules which do not 
reach to the mucro, and two parallel rows can be seen on either side, these rows show- 
ing on the anterior portion of the posterior valve; but on the first median valve this 
arrangement is not so apparent. 

Scattered radiating rows of similar pustules are seen on the anterior valve, where 
faint ridges are indicated ; similar sculpture is seen on the posterior part of the end 
valve. On the pleural areas of the median valves scattered pustules are also present, 
whilst the lateral areas have them also few and scattered. Otherwise the only feature 
is the concentric growth-ridges, which are well marked on each ridge, indicating regular 
growth in still water. 

The internal features are, as noted by Pirssry for C. peruviana, Lamk. (Man. 
Conch., xiv. p. 29, 1892), the anterior valve with 9, central valves 1, and posterior 
valve 9 slits. 

Hab.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys. Station 325. One fine specimen only. 
Agrees closely with C. peruviana, Lamk., and seems to be the first record for the 
genus from east of South America. (T. IREDALE.) 


Lepidopleurus pagenstecherr, Petter. 
Leptuchiton pagenstecheri, Pfeffer, Jahrb. hamburg. wissenschaftlichen Anstalten, lil 
Jahrgang, p- 107, t. iii. fig. 3 (1886). 
Hab.—Scotia Bay, 9-10 fathoms. Station 326. 
THreLE considers this Chiton conspecific with L. kerguelensis, Haddon, from 


Kerguelen Island, but Irepate does not accept this conclusion, though admitting the 
close alliance of the two species. 


Hemiarthrum setulosum, Carpenter. 


Hemiarthrum setulosum, Carpenter, MS., p. 13.—Dall, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. ii., (1876), p. 44. 
—Haddon, “ Challenger” Polyplacophora, p. 14, t. i. fig. 4; t. ii. fig. 4a, 1.—Martens 
and Pfeffer, Jahrb. des hamburg. wissenschaftlichen Anstalten, iii. p. 108, t. iii. fig. 4 
(1886). 
Hab.—Station 325, Scotia Bay, 9-10 fathoms, on Fuci and other Algze. 
Very small and juvenile specimens, probably referable to the above. IREDALE also 
doubts the identity of the South Georgian Hemiarthrum with that described by Dat 
from Kerguelen Land, but more material is wanted for comparison. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL XLVIIL., 343.) 


118 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


Order PROoSOBRANCHIATA. 


Sub-order DIOTOCARDIA. 
Section Zygobranchiata. 


Family Fissurellide. 
§ Emarginulide. 
Puncturella noachina (L.). 
Patella noachina, Linneus, Mantissa, p. 551. 
Puncturella noachina, Lowe, Zool. Journ., iii. p. 78 (1827). 
Cemoria princeps, Mighels, Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. (1841), p. 49. 
Rimula galeata, Gould, U.S. Explor, Exped., p. 369, t. xxxi. figs. 476, 477. 

Hab.—Trawl, Burdwood Bank, Station 346, south of the Falkland Islands, lat. 
54° 25’ %., long. 57° 32’ W., December 1, 1903. 

Bleached but perfect specimens of a British and North European species, also 
known to extend to the Falkland Islands and Straits of Magellan. It is likewise 
recorded by Dr Hermann Srrepet,* from Berkeley Sound, lat. 51° 53’ S., long. 58° W. 

We include under the name noachina (L.) various forms, e.g. conica, D’Orb., 
falklandiana, A. Ad., cognata, Gould, and galeata, Gould. It is most probable that 
the gatherings from Burdwood Bank would come under the name mentioned second, 
falklandvana. 

family Pleurotomariude. 
Scissurella eucharista, sp. n. (Plate, figs. 1, 1a). 


S. testa perminuta, globulosa, delicatissima, alba, naticoide, paullum elevata, anfractibus 4, quorum 
apicalis feré immersus, penultimo inflato, tumescente, ultimo epidermide evanida pallidé straminea contecta, 
infra suturam leniter planato, deinde bicarinato, quarum inter fines scissura extensa, angusta, cetera super- 
ficie delicate sub lente spiraliter tenuissime striata usque ad basim supra carinam radiatim leniter plicata, 
umbilico feré clauso, apertura rotunda, labro rotundo, tenuissimo. 

Alt. 1, diam. -75 mm. 

Hab.—Burdwood Bank, 56 fathoms, trawled. Station 346. 

A perfect example of one of the smallest shells possible, and yet full of character. 
We have compared it with the majority of the genus, and find it stands out con- 
spicuously in general roundness of outline, the double carination, within which, towards 
the aperture, is situate the narrow extended slit, not causing, as is usual, an angular 
appearance. Indeed, in form it is almost naticoid. Below the carinz, the surface to 
the base is transversely very finely striate, the umbilicus appears partly covered, the 
outer lip is round and extremely thin. Somewhat of the same form as Sc. conica, D’Orb., 
also from Southern waters ; but in our species the slit is situate much nearer the suture, 
that of conica being almost median. (evxapirros, elegant, agreeable.) 


* Schwed. Sudpolar Exped. (1908), p. 79. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL., 344.) 


MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 119 


Scissurella euglypta, Pels. 


Scissurella euglypta, P. Pelseneer, Voy. du S.Y. “Belgica”: Zoologie, p. 17, pl. iv. 
figs. 43-45 (1903), 


Hab.—Trawl, Burdwood Bank, at 56 fathoms. Station 346. 
Only one imperfect specimen, but recognisable. 


Scissurella supraplicata, Sm. 


Scissurella supraplicata, E. A, Smith, Ann. and Mag. N.H., xvi. p. 72 (1875). 
a FA 3 Phil. Trans, Roy. Soc. London, vol. clxviii. p. 176, 
pl. ix. figs. 5, 5a (1879). 


Hab.—Trawl, Burdwood Bank, at 56 fathoms. Station 346. 
Several examples, mostly imperfect, of this pretty species, striking on account of 
its very marked plication above the double keel. 


Qe < = 
Scissurella tumora, sp. n. (Plate, figs. 2, 2a). 
Sc. testa minuta, tenuissima, alba, epidermide straminea omnino contecta, depresso-effusa, anfractibus 4, 
apicalibus parvis, ultimo lato, supra ad peripheriam planato, radiatim lineis obliquis tenuibus predito, 
scissura angusta, profunda, infra ad basim concentricé trilirato, apertura ovata, intus alba, labro pertenui, 


columella paullum incrassata, feré recta. 
Alt. 1, diam. 1°75 mm. 


Hab. Station 325, Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, 9-10 fathoms, on Macrocystis 
pyrifera and other large Fuci. 

A depressed, obliquely effuse little species, of which but few examples occurred, all 
in live condition, covered with straw-coloured epidermis. The upper part of the body 
whorl is not so conspicuously radiate as in many species ; the slit is narrow, deep, its 
edges being carinate, (tTuwpds, honoured.) 


Section Azygobranchiata. 
Family Cyclostrematide. 
Cyclostrema calypso, sp. n. (Plate, fig. 3). 


C. testa perminuta, angusté sed profundé umbilicata, conica, alba, delicatula, anfractibus ad 5, inclusis 
apicalibus duobus levibus, ceteris arcté longitudinaliter liratis, et spiraliter decussatim striatulis, numero 
lirarum ultimi anfractiis ad quadraginta, anfractibus omnibus ventricosis, ad suturas multum impressis, 
apertura rotunda, peristomate continuo. 

Alt. 1, diam. 1:15 mm. 


Hab.—Trawl, Burdwood Bank, lat. 54° 25’ S., long. 57° 32’ W., at 56 fathoms. 
Station 346. 

Exeeedingly minute, resembling C. decussatum, Pelseneer,* in many ways, but 
differing in (a) size, and (b) in fine and close longitudinal liration. To C. conicwm, 
Watson, collected during the Challenger Expedition (Station 24), it likewise is akin ; 
but in this species, more than double the dimensions to begin with, the lamellee are 
much stronger proportionately, and fewer in number than in either C. decussatum 
or C. calypso. 

* P, PELSENEER, Voy. du S.Y. “ Belgica,” p. 19, pl. v. fig. 48 (1903). 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 345.) 


120 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


Cyclostrema coatsianum, sp. n. (Plate, figs. 4, 4a). 

C. testa parva, alba, solidula, profundé umbilicata, elegantissimé sculpta, anfractibus 4, quorum duo 
apicales nitidi, albi, leves, duobus ceteris longitudinaliter equicostatis, costis levibus, incrassatis, subflexuosis, 
penultimo supra planato, ultimo spiraliter quadricarinato, carina obtusa infra suturas, binis ad peripheriam, 
preeditis, simul ac ad basim, interstitiis omnibus subquadratis et fenestratis, regione umbilicari profunda, 
verticali, apertura rotunda, peristomate crassiusculo, continuo. 

Alt. 1, diam. 2°25 mm. 


Hab.—Trawl, Burdwood Bank, lat. 54° 25’ 8, long. 57° 32’ W., 56 fathoms. 
Station 346. 

A very small, solid, white, boldly but elegantly sculptured Cyclostrema, the 
nearest ally being C. micans, A. Ad., from the eastern tropics, known in Indian seas 
as Liotia pulchella,* Dunker. This species is somewhat larger, and the pattern of 
sculpture is different. We name this species in honour of Mr James Coats, of Ferguslie 
House, Paisley, through whose generosity the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition 
was equipped with funds, and whose regretted death, by a strange coincidence, occurred 
just after this description had been drawn up, on March 22, 1912. 


ay 
Cyclostrema gaudens, sp. n. (Plate, figs. 5, 5a, 5b). 
C. testa minutissima, profundé umbilicata, depresso-discoidali, supra planiuscula, alba, anfractibus ad 
34, quorum apex ipse depressus, perlevis, ultimo ad peripheriam obtusé carinato, undique longitudinaliter arcte 
2) q i I ’ 5] } I 5] 1 5 
lirato, liris cired viginti-duabus, apud basim cired’ umbilicum obscuré spiraliter carinato, apertura rotunda, 
? fo} ’ I 3: 
peristomate tenui, feré continuo, operculo corneo, multispirali, nucleo centrali. 
Alt. °75, diam. 1 mm. 


Hab.—Station 346, trawl, 56 fathoms, Burdwood Bank. 

Slightly allied to the preceding, but much differing in sculpture, especially in the 
suppression of the prominent peripheral keeling of the body whorl. Judging from 
the figure, there is an affinity to C. alveolatum, Jouss.,t described from an unknown 
locality, the dimensions being only slightly less; the interstices, however, between the 
tlexuous costee do not appear, in our species, to be spirally striate, as is the case with 
JOUSSEAUME'S species. 


Cyclostrema meridionale, sp. n. (Plate, figs. 6, 6a, 22, 22a). 

C. testa minutissima, depresso-trochoide, delicata, tenui, pallidé albo-cinerea, epidermide fugitiva 
straminea omnino contecta, profundé umbilicata, anfractibus 4, quorum duo apicales tumescentes, albi, 
perlaves, ceteris duobus—penultimo uni-, ultimo anfractn spiraliter bicarinato, apertura rotunda, peristomate 
continuo, paullulum incrassato, apud basim cireé umbilicum crenello-carinato, operculo multispirali, corneo, 
nucleo feré centrali. 

Alt. *75, diam. 50 mm. 


Hab.—Gregariously, on various Algz (Fucus and Macrocystis), Station 325, Scotia 
Bay, South Orkneys, 9-10 fathoms. 

This well-defined but very minute species is evidently the same as that recorded 
from the same islands by Dr E. Lamy,{ and considered a non-adult form of an unknown 


* A, Apams, P.Z.S. (1850), p. 44; Dunxur, Mal. Blatt., vol. vi. p. 225 (1860). 

+ GuERin, Mag., p. 392, pl. xix. fig. 4 (1872). 

t Moll. Reg. Arct. Norv., p. 185, pl. xxi. fig. 1 (1908); Bull. Mus. Nat. d Hist. Naturelle (1906), Paris, p. 123, 
(1910) p. 323. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIIL., 346.) 


MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 121 


species of Margarita. To us, and several other malacologists who have examined it 
with care, it not only appears almost full-grown, but with some confidence is now pro- 
posed to be included in the genus Cyclostrema, at all events provisionally ; for this 
genus is somewhat multifarious already in its component parts, and much needs the 
services of a special monographer. 

The nuclear whorls are, it is true, slightly nepionic, and shapelessly turgid, but the 
penultimate and body whorls are very well sculptured and defined, being acutely spirally 
bicarinate. Around the umbilicus, likewise, a third keel, crenulate, and not so acute, 
revolves. A pale straw-coloured epidermis covers the whole surface uniformly. The 
operculum, for microscopic aid in the examination of which we are much indebted to 
Messrs E. A. SmitH and Rosson of the British Museum (Natural History), is dark red- 
brown, with nucleus not quite central, and multispiral. This we take the opportunity 
also to figure (fig. 22a). 

Calliostoma modestulum, Strebel. 
Calliostoma modestulum, H. Strebel, Sehwed. Sudpolar Exped., p. 70, Taf. i. fig. 13 a, 6 (1908). 


Hab.—Station 346, Burdwood Bank, 56 fathoms, from Sponge. 

Two very young specimens, trochoid in form, with the upper whorls elegantly 
spirally lirate, we assign to the above name with a little doubt. The original type 
came from the West Falklands, lat. 52° 29’ S., long. 60° 36’ W., dredged at 197 metres 
(STREBEL). : 

With this oceurred Photinula expansa, Sowb., and one broken example of a 
beautifully nacreous shell, which, judging from the figure,* may be Calliostoma 
mobiusi, Strebel. Our specimen is more trochoid than photinuloid, though it possesses 
some characters of the latter, and is lightly spirally grooved, these being most con- 
spicuous at the periphery of the body whorl. Dimensions: alt. 10, diam. 12mm. It 
likewise may be compared with Photinula Crawshayi,f Sm., from Christmas Island, but 
the whorls are not ventricose. It is unfortunately somewhat broken ; the operculum is 
present, being horny and multispiral. 


Sub-order MONOTOCARDIA. 
(a) Ptenoglossa. 
Family Scalide. 
Scala magellanica, Phil. 
Scalaria magellanica, Philippi, Archiv fiir Natury., vol. i. p. 65 (1845). 
Hab.—Station 346, Burdwood Bank, 56 fathoms, in Sponge. 


Only very imperfect specimens, either very young or broken fragments; enough, 
however, to identify the species. 


* SrreBeEt, Moll. der Magalhaen. Prov., ii. p. 133, Taf. v. fig. 22. 
+ Smirn, Proc. Malac. Soc. Lond., vi. p. 335, fig. 2. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 347.) 


122 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


(b) Tzenioglossa. 


Family Naticide. 
Natica impervia, Phil. 
Natica impervia, Philippi, Archiv fiir Naturg., vol. i. p. 65 (1845). 


Hab.—Station 346, from Sponge at 56 fathoms. 
Only very dead and featureless specimens. 


Family Trichotropide. 
Trichotropis antarctica, sp. n. (Plate, fig. 7). 


T. testa parva, imperforata, fragili, breviter fusiformi, sordidé alba, anfractibus 6, quorum apicales tres 
detriti, subleves, ceteris tenuiter et arcté decussatis, interstitiis quadratulis, ultimo cateros exsuperante, 
apertura ovata, labro multum expanso, inflato, margine columellari paullum excavato. 

Alt. 5°75, diam. (oris) 3-50 mm. 

Hab.—Trawl, Burdwood Bank, at 56 fathoms. Station 346. 

A very interesting form, and we deem it worthy of description, albeit the only 
specimen is imperfect, and the outer lip infested with growth of a Bryozoon. It seems 
adult, and is comparable with no other member of the genus known to us. It is much 
smaller in all its parts than 7. znornata, Hutton, from New Zealand. There is no sign 
of umbilication, and the epidermis is not present, being completely worn off. 


Calyptrea chinensis, L. 


Patella sinensis, Linneus, Syst. Nat., ed. xii., p. 1257 (1769). 
C. sinensis, F. and H., ii. p. 463, pl. lx. figs. 3-5, and (animal), pl. B.B. figs. 8-13. 


Hab.—Burdwood Bank, south of the Falkland Islands. Station 346. 
Indistinguishable from the shell of northern climes, including Great Britain. 


Family Lattorinide. 
Inttorina (Levilitorina) caliginosa (Gould). 


Hab.—An additional locality is Cape Pembroke, Falkland Islands, shore, 
February 2, 1904. Station 349. 


Lattorina (Pellilitorina) pellita, v. Mts. 


Hab.—Additional locality for this species is Station 346, 56 fathoms, December 1, 
1903. Lat. 54° 25’ S., long. 57° 32’ W. Obtained from new species of Cephalodiscus, 
occasionally, 

Two more examples of Lacuna notorcadensis, M. and St., also occurred from the 
same locality as the type. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 348.) 


MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 1238 


Lacuna abyssicola, sp. n. (Plate, figs. 8, 8a, 8b). 


L. testa parva, profundé umbilicata, albo-calcarea, epidermide brunnea contecta, fragili, vix solida, 
anfractibus 5, quorum apex ipse miré immersus, duobus his proximis cum penultimis tumidulis, ultimo 
paullum effuso, lavi, omnibus infra suturas canaliculatis et acute spiraliter carinatis, apud basim, cired 
umbilicum, crassi-carinato ecarinis binis, sulco interstitiali preedito, apertura rotunda, labro tenui, margine 
columellari laté reflexo. 

Alt. 2, lat. 2°15 mm. 


Hab.—Deposit No. 38, dredged March 18, 1904. Lat. 71° 22’S., long. 16° 34’ W., 
1410 fathoms. Station 417. 

One specimen only, but adult and fairly perfect, save for a slight fracture of the 
outer lip. It appears nearly akin to L. nautiliformis, Jeffreys, or L. cincta of the same 
author, from the Atlantic, collected on the Porcupine Expedition, especially as 
regards the sculpture round the umbilical region, the thickened double carination with 
interstitial sulcus. Another feature of interest is the curiously immersed nucleus, 
and the strong canaliculation round the upper portion of each whorl, followed by an 
acute spiral keel. The substance of the shell is chalky white, covered with a dark- 
brown epidermis. The specific name proposed is given in consideration of the extreme 
depth at which it was dredged. 


Lacuna wandelensis, HK. Lamy. 


Lacuna wandelensis, E, Lamy, Expéd. Antarct. Frangaise commandée par le Dr Jean Charcot : 
Moll., p. 5, pl. i. figs. 5, 6, 7 (Paris, 1906). 
Hab.—Station 325, Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, 9-10 fathoms, on Macrocystis and 
other large Fuci. 
A very few examples, and all in non-adult condition, belong almost certainly to 
this species. 


Family Rissorde. 


Rissoa deserta, Sm. 
Rissoa deserta, . A. Smith, Nat. Antarct. Exped.: Nat. Hist., vol, ii. p. 9, pl. 1. fig. 1 
(1907). 
Hab.—South Orkney Islands, Scotia Bay, 9-10 fathoms. Station 325. 
The specimens are dead, but seem to agree in form with the above species. 


Rissoa (Onvba) filostria, sp. n. (Plate, fig. 9). 


R. testa parva, paullum inflata, solidula, parum rimata, anfractibus 45, quorum apicales duo leves, 
tumiduli, ceteris ventricosis, apud suturas impressis, arctissimé spiraliter tenuiliratis, apertura ovata, alba, 
labro paullum etfuso, haud multum inerassato, feré continuo. 

Long. 2, lat. 1°50 mm. 


Hab.—South Orkney Islands, Scotia Bay, 9-10 fathoms. Station 325. 
Allied to several Onobex, mostly described of recent years from deep-sea explora- 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL, 349.) 


124 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


tions, such as R. transenna,* Wats., from Prince Edward Island, and &. aédonis*t of the 
same author, from Nightingale Island. &. gelida, E. A. Sm.,f{ is, perhaps, the nearest 
ally ; this is also an Antarctic species, and differs in the possession of an extra whorl, 
and being longer proportionately to its breadth, also in a lesser degree of ventricosity 
of whorl. Only two or three examples. 


Rissoa (Onoba) fuegoensis (Strebel). 


Rissoa (2 Cingula) fuegoensis, H, Strebel, Schwed. Sudpolar Eaped., p. 56, Taf. vi. fig. 90 
a, b (1908). 
Hab.—Burdwood Bank, Station 346, 56 fathoms. 
A. straw-coloured, closely spirally lirate Aissoa, which we should consider as 
appertaining to the section Onoba in preference to Cingula. 


Rissoa (Onoba) paucilirata, sp. n. (Plate, fig. 10). 


R. testa ovata, angusté rimata, alba, epidermide tenuiter evanida straminea, interdum iridescente, 
contecta, anfractibus ad 5, ventricosulis, apud suturas multum impressis, quorum duo apicales nitidi, albi, 
leves, ceteris duobus fortiter spiraliter pauciliratis, liris penultimi duabus, ultimi anfractis septem vel 
octo, preditis, apertura ovato-rotunda, peristomate tenui, margine columellari feré recto, 

Alt. 2:25, diam. 1°25 mm. 


Hab.—Burdwood Bank, Station 346, 56 fathoms. 

Conspicuous for its strong, spiral, carinated liree, which are fewer in number than 
those possessed by its allies; these spiral ridges seem much the same in the Aleutian 
species R. Auriwilli, Dall, § or R. brachia, Watson, || from Culebra Island, West Indies. 
This last, indeed, seems a very near ally, though quite distinct. 


Rissoa (Onoba) sulcata (Strebel). 
Rissoa (Cingula) suleata, H. Strebel, Schwed. Sudpolar Exped., p. 56, Taf. vi. fig. 86 a, b, c (1908). 
Hab.—With the last species named, at 56 fathoms. Station 346. One specimen. 


The spiral sulci are interesting. In form it resembles FR. paucilirata, but the 
essential characters are quite diverse. Colour inclined to reddish-fuscous. 


Rissoa (Ceratia) turqueti, K. Lamy. 
Rissoa (Ceratia) turqueti, E. Lamy, Expéd. Antarct. Francaise Charcot, p. 6, pl. i. fig. 8 (1906). 
Hab.—With the preceding. One fine specimen in live condition, sub-pellucid, with 
faint relics of thin stramineous epidermis. Station 346. 
* Rep. Challenger Exped., xv. p. 620, pl. xlvi. fig. 10. + Ibid., p. 600, pl. xlv, fig. 5. 


t Smiru, Nat. Ant. Exped.; N.H., vol. ii. p. 9, pl. ii. fig. 5. § Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., p. 309, pl. iv. fig. 8 (1886). 
|| Rep. Challenger Eaped., xv. p. 599, pl. xlv. fig. 8. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 350.) 


MARINE MOLLUSGA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 125 


Eatoniella kergquelenensis, Sm., forma major, Strebel. 
Eatoniella kerguelenensis, Smith, forma major, Hermann Strebel, Schwed. Sudpolar Exped., 
; p. 57, Taf. iv. fig. 56 a—c (1908). 

Hab.—Station 325, Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, 9-10 fathoms. 

This larger form of a molluse already reported by us, in our former paper, as occur- 
ring, in its typical condition, at Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, has likewise been discovered 
in some quantity in Bay A, of greater size and solidity, often encrusted with bryozoic 
and other growths. Colour very deep plumbeous. 


Family Cerithiude. 
Cerithium pullum, Phil. (= calatum, Couthouy ). 


Hab.—An additional locality is now given for this species, to that mentioned on 
p. 135 of our former paper, viz. Burdwood Bank, lat. 54° 25’S., long. 57° 32’ W., in sponge. 
Station 346. 


We do not repeat the synonymy, which will be found at the page just quoted. 


Bittium brucei, sp. n. (Plate, fig. 11). 

B. testa minuta, solidula, cylindrica, castaneo-brunnea, anfractibus ad 8, apicalibus . . . . (2), ceteris apud 
suturas impressis, supernis bino, ultimo trino odine granulato regulariter preedito, apud basim excavato, planato, 
apertura ovata, labro simplice, margine columellari crassiusculo, 

Long. 2°75, lat. 1 mm. 

Hab.—Dredge, Station 81, lat. 18° 24’S., long. 37° 58 W., 36 fathoms. 

A minute Cerithioid molluse, which seems as if it should belong to the sub-genus 
Joculator, Hedley,* proposed for Cerithiopsis ridicula, Watson, and certain allies. At 
the same time it is so like Bittiwm minimum, T. Woods, well figured from a Tasmanian 
specimen by C. Hepuey,t that it had better be included in that genus. 


Bittium burdwoodianum, sp. nu. (Plate, fig. 12). 

©. testa fusiformi, brunneo-rufescente, parva, anfractibus ad 10, quorum apicales tres rufescentes, 
parum nitidi, leves, vel simpliciter longitudinaliter costulati, ceteris ad suturas multum impressis, trino ordine 
gemmarum, ultimo quatuor ordinibus similibus, regulariter spiraliter preditis, apertura ovata, labro paullum 
effuso, columella flexuosa, 

Alt. 4, diam. 1 mm. 

Hab.—From interior of Liothyrina, Station 346, Burdwood Bank, at 56 
fathoms, December 1, 1903. 

A little species, of simple character, inclined to a reddish hue, particularly as 
regards the apex and central portion of the various whorls, which are thrice spirally 
eirt with regular rows of close grains, gemmulate and rounded. This might be 
considered a Cerithium by some authors. It is akin to B. bisculptwm,; Strebel, the 
apical whorls seemingly almost identical, and we consider these two species should 
stand in the same genus. 


* Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales (1909), p. 442. + Ibid, (1909), p. 722, fig. 20. 
t Schwed. Sudpolar Hxped., p. 49, Taf. vi. fig. 92 a—b (1908). 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL., 351.) 


126 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


Cerithiopsis macroura, sp. n. (Plate, fig. 13). 


C. testa elongato-fusiformi, parva, angusta, nitida, albo straminea, anfractibus ad 10, quorum apicales duo 
vel tres nitidi, vitrei, perleves, bulbosi, ceteris paullum ventricosis, apud suturas impressis, undique longi- 
tudinaliter arcte costulatis, costulis anfractuum superiorum pro maxima parte levissimis, quatuor ultimis 
anfractibus spiraliter rugoso-liratis, liris ad juncturas costularum granulosis, apertura ovata, labro tenui, 
columella paullum producta, flexuosa, brevirostri. 

Alt. 3°55, diam. 1 mm. 


Hab.—Station 346, Burdwood Bank, 56 fathoms. 

A small species, but distinguished, as the specific name chosen would show, by 
its very attenuate, fusiform whorls, the last three or four swollen, caudate, shining, 
smoothly costulate, not spirally crossed with granose lire, as are the lower whorls; the 
columella is only slightly rostrate, the outer lip thin, the colour whitish straw. But 
few examples occurred. (maxpos ovpa, long-tailed. ) 


Cerithiopsis malvinarum, M. and St. 


Cerithiopsis malvinarum (Strebel, MS.), Melvill and Standen, Trans. Roy. Soc, Edin., xlvi. 
pt. 1, p. 135, pl. figs. 6, 6a. (1907). 
5 + Strebel, Schwed, Sudpolar Exped., Band vi., 1, p. 49, Taf. i. fig. 10 
a-c (1908). 


Hab.— Shore, Hearnden Water, Falkland Islands. Station 349. 
As mentioned in our first paper, we issued a description of this species in 1907, 
using, at Dr H. Srrespev’s request, the name he had given it in manuscript. The 


“ 


following year it was redescribed by him as “ sp. nov.,” and we are of opinion that he 
had not at that time seen our paper. ‘The same remarks would apply also to Trophon 


minutus, M. and §. 


Family Turritelide. 
Turritella algida, sp. n. (Plate, fig. 14). 


T. testa parva, attenuato-fusiformi, alba vel pallidé straminea, solidula, anfractibus ad 9-10, ad suturas 
multum impressis, quorum apex ipse bulbosus, albus, levis, vitreus, huic proximus anfractus simili modo 
tumidus, levis, ceteris ad medium unicarinatis, carinis acutis, prominulis, antepenultimo et penultimo lira 
alia minore infra medium preditis, ultimo inter carinam majorem et basim trilirato, apertura ovata, labro 
tenui. 

Long. 6, lat. 2 mm. 


Hab.—Trawl, Burdwood Bank, south of the Falklands, at 56 fathoms. Station 346. 

Very small, but apparently quite adult. Conspicuous for a distinct and prominent 
median keel, the three last whorls also being provided with a minor spiral lira below, 
and the body whorl, between the strong median keel and the base, possessing three such 
spiral lirations. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 352.) 


MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 127 


Mathilda rhigomaches, sp. n. (Plate, fig. 15). 


M. testa minuta, imperforata, fusiformi, delicata, pallidé fuscescente, anfractibus 64, quorum apicales 
21 heterostrophi, albi, leeves, bulbosi, czeteris apud suturas impressis, pulchré spiraliter carinatis, carinulis 
tribus anfracttum superiorum, ultimo quatuor, arctissimé lirulis longitudinalibus decoratis, interstitiis 
quadratis, apertura rotunda, labro tenui, margine columellari paullum excavato, 


Long. 2, lat. 1 mm. 


Hab.—Trawl, Burdwood Bank, at 56 fathoms. Station 346. 

In sculpture this little species resembles a Lovenella, especially L. austrina, 
Hedley,* from the opposite shores of Antarctica. It is only about a quarter of the 
size, however, of this shell, while the apex is heterostrophe, the peristome continuous. 
Fiscuer (Man. de Conch., p. 172, 1887) gives a list of Magellanic Mollusca, and 
includes a “ Mathilda magellanica.” This is evidently a “nomen nudum.” No 
description can be found, and the name rests on no authority. The remarks of 
M. pe Boury f will probably, in connection with this, be found of interest.  (/ryouaxys, 
contending with cold.) 


(c) Gymnoglossa. 
Family Hulimide. 
Eulima antarctica, Strebel. 


Eulima antarctica, H. Strebel, Schwed. Sudpolar Exped., Band vi., 1, p. 65, Taf. vi. fig. 91 a—-e 
(1908). 
Hab.—Trawl, Burdwood Bank, south of the Falkland Islands, 56 fathoms. 
Station 346, 
One specimen, live, but hardly full-grown. 


Family Pyramidellide. 
Turbonilla smithir, Pfeffer. 
Turbonilla smithii, G. Pfeffer, MS. in H. Strebel, Mollusk. der Magalhaen. Prov., p. 659, Taf. 
xxill. fig. 42 a-d (1905). 
Hab.—Trawl, Burdwood Bank, at 56 fathoms. Station 346. 
One example, immature, but with sufficient characters to pronounce fairly certainly. 


Turbonilla xenophyes, sp. n. (Plate, figs. 16, 16a). 


T. testa aciculato-fusiformi, delicata, subpellucida, albo-lactea vel pallidé straminea, paullum nitente, 
anfractibus 9, quorum apicales bulbosi, tumidi, leniter heterostrophi, ceteris ventricosulis, ad suturas impressis, 
sub lente delicatissimé longitudinaliter liratis, in speciminibus quibusdam feré vel omnino levibus, apertura 
ovata, peristomate tenui, columella simplice. 

Long. 2°75, lat. °75 mm. 


* Report Brit. Antarct. Exped., 1907-9 (Shackleton), vol. ii., part i. p. 5 (pl. i. fig. 7) (1911). 
+ Journ, de Conch., vol. xxxi, p. 118 (1883). 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 353.) 


128 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


Hab.—Trawl, Burdwood Bank, south of the Falkland Islands, 56 fathoms. 
Station 346. 

A curious species, and one of which we are not quite sure of the proper position 
generically. It seems, however, to agree with Turbonilla in more than one feature. 
It is very delicate, resembling a terrestrial Opeas or others of the family Stenogyride, 
both in substance and form. Several examples occurred, the live specimens retaining 
a subpellucid appearance and dull straw-colour. (Eevovys, strange of form.) 


(7) Rachiglossa. 
Family Muricide. 
Trophon falklandicus, Strebel. 


Trophon falklandicus, H. Strebel, Schwed. Sudpolar Exped., Band vi., 1, p. 39, Taf. i. fig. 8 a—c (1908). 


Hab.—Burdwood Bank, at 56 fathoms. Station 346, 

Very young specimens are probably referable to this species. Another, judging 
alone from the plate (StrREBEL, Zool. Jahrbuch, Band xxi., Taf. vii. fig. 56, 1904), 
might belong to 7. Paessleri, Streb. We cannot, however, help feeling that too many 
species have been created in such a variable assemblage as this section of the genus 
Trophon presents. 


Trophon minutus, M. and St. 
Trophon minutus (Strebel, MS.), Melvill and Standen, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., xlvi., pt. 1., 
p. 137, pl. figs. 7, 7a (1907). 
” ss Strebel, Schwed. Sudpolar Eaped., Band vi., 1, p. 44, Taf. iv. fig. 47 
a, b (1908). 

Hab.—An additional locality to that mentioned in our former paper is Scotia Bay, 
South Orkneys, at 9-10 fathoms. Station 325. 

Three or four more examples occurred, but the species is evidently rare. For the 
nomenclature of this species, and its authorship, see remarks under Cerithiopsis 
malvinarum. 

Trophon philippranus, Dkr. 

Hab.—A\so from Burdwood Bank, at 56 fathoms, all the specimens being in very 

young condition, and found in Sponge. Station 346. 


Antistreptus magellanicus, Dall. 
Antistreptus magellanicus, W. H. Dall, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xxiv. p. 532 (1902). 
3 + Dall, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, vol. xliii, p. 315, pl. xv. 
fig. 14 (1905). 
Glypteuthria contraria, H. Strebel, Schwed. Sudpolar Exped., Band vi., 1, p. 29, pl. i. 
figs. 4 a—c (1908). 
Hab.—Burdwood Bank, Station 346, at 56 fathoms. 
Two examples of this small, but curious, sinistral species. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 354.) 


MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 129 


Family Buccinide. 
Chrysodomus (Sipho) crassicostatus, M. and St. 


Chrysodomus (Sipho) crassicostatus, Melvill and Standen, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., vol. xlvi. 
part i., p. 138, pl. figs. 10, 10a (1907). 

Stpho (? Mohnia) astrolabiensis, H. Strebel, Schwed. Sudpolar Eaxped., Band vi., 1, p. 31, 
Taf. iii. fig. 37 a—d (1908). 

One specimen of Sipho astrolabiensis occurred in lat. 63° 9’ S., long. 58° 17’ W., 
at Astrolabe Island. 

From the figure, there can be no doubt of its identity with our S. crassicostatus, 
described the year previously (1907). More examples came to hand from the locality 
already given by us, viz. Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, at 9-10 fathoms, Station 325 ; 
and we have now seen it likewise from Burdwood Bank, at 56 fathoms, Station 346. 


Euthria rosea, Homb. and Jacq. 


Euthria rosea, Hombron et Jacquinot, Voyage au Péle Sud, v. p. 107, tab, xxv. figs. 4, 5. 
50) 5. Strebel, Mollusk. der Magalhaen. Prov., p. 616, Taf. xxi. figs. 1-4 (1905). 


Hab.—Burdwood Bank, from Sponge, at 56 fathoms. Station 346. 


Family ALitride. 
Mitra (Volutonutra) porcellana, sp. n. (Plate, fig. 21). 


M. (V.) testa eleganter fusiformi, nitidissima, candida, porcellana, anfractibus ad 6 (2), apicalibus . . .? 
ceteris nequaquam suturaliter impressis, politissimis, ultimo prolongato, apertura angusté oblonga, labro 
tenui, columella obliquante, quadriplicata, plicis obliquis. 

Long. 14, lat. 6 mm. (sp. imperfecta). 

Hab.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, 9-10 fathoms, Station 325 ; also trawl, Burdwood 
Bank, 56 fathoms, Station 346. 

Only two examples of this beautiful, polished white porcellanous shell have as 
yet oceurred, one from each locality, widely differing from other Volutomutra known 
to us; its narrow aperture, obliquely quadriplicate columella, are distinguishing 
characteristics. | Very unfortunately, in neither specimen, owing to breakage, do the 
apical whorls appear, so several points remain for the present a matter of conjecture. 


(e) Toxoglossa. 
Family Conde. 
Bela anderssoni, Strebel. 
Bela anderssoni, H. Strebel, Schwed. Sudpolar Exped., p. 14, Taf. ii. fig. 24 a- (190d). 


Hab.—Station 346, at 56 fathoms, December 1, 1903. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 355.) 


130 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


Judging from figure and description quoted above, this interesting ela is identical 
with specimens found at Seymour Island, Grahamland, by the Swedish expedition. 


Bela fulvicans, Strebel. 
Bela fulvicans, H. Strebel, Schwed. Sudpolar Exped., p. 15, Taf. ii. fig. 25 a—d (1908). 


Hab.—Burdwood Bank, from Sponge, at 56 fathoms. Station 346. 
An imperfect, bleached specimen seems, from the sculpture, to be the above 
species, which occurred both in South Georgia Islands and in Grahamland. 


? Theshia sp. 


Hab.—Burdwood Bank, from Sponge, at 56 fathoms. Station 346. 

One example, more imperfect than the preceding, of a bleached shell, showing 
faint flexuous oblique longitudinal costellation, mouth narrow oblong, whorls fairly 
smooth, hardly impressed at the sutures. Dimensions: long. 13, lat. 5 mm. It 
is quite impossible to differentiate it further. 


Savatieria concinna, sp. n. (Plate, fig. 17). 


S. testa ovato-fusiformi, compacta, solidula, subpellucente, albida, anfractibus 6, quorum apicales 
duo bulbosi, vitrei, nitidi, perleeves, ceteris apud suturas impressis, subveniricosis, longitudinaliter arcté 
costulatis, costis crassiusculis, gemmatis, ultimo anfractu infra medium evanidis, deinde ad basim spiraliter 
suleuloso, numero costularum anfractus ultimi circa 22, apertura ovata, labro simplice, columella parum 
incrassata, canali vix prolongata. 

Long. 4°55, lat. 2 mm. 


Hab.—Trawl, Burdwood Bank, Station 346, 56 fathoms, December 1, 1903. 

Savatieria is a small genus, peculiar to these regions, diagnosed by RocHEBRUNE 
and Masitir. It is nearly allied to Bela, differing principally in the abbreviated 
canal, whorls peculiarly impressed suturally, and more distinct elaboration of 
sculpture. Several species have lately been published by Dr Hermann Srrepet, 
and to one of them, S. molinx, our species is akin, differmg mainly in sculpture, 
being supplied with nearly double the number of longitudinal ribs, while the 
gemmate beading is more pronounced in S. concinna. Only one example, happily 
in first-class condition at the time of description, was procured, though unfortunately 
it was accidentally broken at the mouth before it could be figured. We consider that 
Lachesis meridionalis, KE. A. Sin.,* is synonymie with Savatieria moline, Strebel, 1905, 
and bas priority of twenty-four years over it. 


* Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1881, p. 28, pl. iv. fig. 3. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 356.) 


MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 131 


Family Cancellaruide. 
Paradmete typica, Strebel. 
Paradmete typica, H. Strebel, Schwed. Sudpolar Exped., Band vi., 1, p. 22, Taf. iii. fig. 35 a—f (1908). 
Hab.—Burdwood Bank, Station 346, at 56 fathoms, December 1, 1903. 


Thus showing a considerable extension in range. Only one specimen, but in 
good condition. 


Admete limnexformis, Sm. 


1Admete limnexformis, KE. A. Smith, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. Lond., elxviii. p.- 172, pl. ix. 
fig. 4 (1879). 


Hab.—Trawl, Burdwood Bank, at 56 fathoms. Station 346. 

One example, in good condition, exactly agreeing with the type, from Kerguelen 
Land. We should hardly be prepared to suggest placing this in Dr Srrepet’s new 
genus Paradmete. Mr Cuartes Hepiry has lately hinted at its possible reception 
into the genus Odostomiopsis, Thiele, and this is well worthy of consideration. The 
shell is small, white, semi-transparent, and, as the trivial name, so well chosen, 
suggests, almost an exact reproduction of Limnwa peregra, Mill., in miniature. 


Order OPISTHOBRANCHIATA. 
Sub-order TECTIBRANCHIATA. 
(a) Bulloidea. 
Family Tornatinide. 
Retusa antarctica, sp. n. (Plate, fig. 20). 


R. testa delicata, parva, ovato-fusiformi, rimata, pallidissimé livido-virescente, perlevi, subpellucida, 
anfractibus 4, quorum apicales duo tumescentes, ceteris ad suturas rotundé eradatim impressis, ultimo 
magno, levi, apertura ovata, labro sinuato, vix erassiusculo, columella obliqua. 

Alt. 3°25, diam. 1:75 mm. 

Hab.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, 9-10 fathoms. Station 325. 

A small, plain, greenish-livid species, translucent, very smooth, with swollen nuclear 
whorls, and roundly shouldered at the sutures. 


Retusa truncatula (Brug. ). 


This widely distributed species, the full synonymy of which we gave in our last 
paper (loc. cit., p. 141), and which is hardly distinguishable from the British form, 
also occurred at the Burdwood Bank locality, Station 346, 56 fathoms. 

Fragments of others of this order, belonging to the genera Cylichna and Philine, were 


(ROY. 800, EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 357.) 


132 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


dredged either from the same or neighbouring localities, but none in a condition to 
examine seriously. 


Sub-order PTEROPODA. 
Section Thecosomata, de Blainville. 
Cavolinia tridentata (Forskal). 


1773. Anomia tridentata, Forskal, Descriptiones animalium que in itinere orientali observavit, 
p. 124. 

1791. Cavoliniu natans, Abildgaard, ‘‘Nyere Efterretning om det Skaldyr som Forskal har 
beskrevet under Navnet Anomia tridentata,” Shriv. naturhist. Selsk., Bd. i.. Heft 2, 
pl. x. 

1801. Hyalzea cornea, Lamarck, Syst?me des animaux sans vertebres, p. 140. 

1804. Hyalexa papilionacea, Bary de St Vincent, Voyage dans les quatre principales iles des 
mers @’ Afrique, t. i. p. 137, pl. v. fig. 1. 

1810. Hyale teniobranche, Péron et Lesueur, “Histoire de la famille des Mollusques 
Ptéropodes,” Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris, t. xv., pl. ii. fig. 13. 

1813. Hyaleza peroni, Lesueur, ‘Mémoire sur quelques animaux mollusques, etc.,” Now. 
Bull. Soc. Philom., t. iii. p. 284. 

1813. Hyalea chemnitziana, Lesueur, zbid., p. 284. 

1816. Hyalea australis, Péron, Voyage de découvertes aux terres australes, t. i, pl. xxxi. fig. 5 
(sine descriptione). 

1821. Hyalea forskahlii, Lesueur, MS., in de Blainville, “ Hyale,” Dict. d. Sct. Nat., t. xxii. 


pao: 

1836. Hyalea afinis, d’Orbigny, Voyage dans Amérique méridionale, t. v. p. 91, pl. v. 
figs. 6-10. 

1848. Hyalea truncata, Krauss, Stid-africanische Mollusken, p. 34, pl. ii. fig. 12 (non 
Lesueur). 


1859. Cavolinia telemus, A. Adams, “On the Synonyms and Habits of Cavolinia, Diacria, and 
Pleuropus,” Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 3, t. iii. p. 44. 
1877. Hyalxa cumingii, Sowerby, in Reeve, Conchologia iconica, t. xx., Pteropoda, fig. 5. 
Hab.—Lat. 39° 58’ S., long. 8° 36’ W., tow-net, surface, temp. 55°'2. 
Many living specimens, large and fine. Between Stations 470 and 471. 


Class SCAPHOPODA. 


Dentalium eupatrides, M. and St. 


Dentalium eupatrides, Melvill and Standen, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., vol. xlvi., part i., p. 142, 
pl. fig. 12 (1907). 


Hab.—The original locality of this fine smooth abyssal species was accidentally 
omitted in our first paper. It occurred, with the other species chronicled, 
D. megathyris, Dall, in lat. 71° 22’ 8, long. 16° 34’ W., at 1410 fathoms, 
Station 417. Many fragmentary portions of probably the same shells have been 
dredged up from Station 420, at 2620 fathoms. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVUL, 358.) 


MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 133 


Dentahium megathyris, Dall. 


Dentalium megathyris, Dall, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xii. p. 293, pl. ix. fig. 1 (1889). 
9 3 Stearns, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xvi. p. 424 (1893). 


Hab.—Lat. 71° 22’ 8., long. 16° 34’ W., 1410 fathoms. Station 417. 
In our first report we allocated a large Dentalium dredged from 1410 fathoms to 
D. Shoplandi, Jouss., as it agreed with specimens so named in the British Museum 


‘ 


from “near Aden.” We have since received from the same station a large fragment 
of the upper part of a living specimen, evidently snapped off by the dredge, and a 
number of smaller fragments. Critical examination of these has led us to conclude 
that our specimens are identical with LD. megathyris, Dall, which has occurred off 
Chiloe Island and south-east Chili in 1050 and 1342 fathoms, in the Gulf of Panama 
in 2282 fathoms, and other localities in the Panamic region. It is significant that in 
company with this Dentalium, both in the Gulf of Panama and in the 1410 fathoms 
locality, the Brachiopod, Macandrevia diamantina, Dall, should also occur. The 
descriptions and figures of D. megathyris and D. Shoplandi, as given by Tryon, are so 
widely different in every respect, both as to dimensions and sculpture, and other minor 
details, that although our specimens agree so well with the British Museum examples 
purporting to come from Aden, we now are inclined to refer them to D. megathyris, 
as, even if this species should ultimately be proved to be an extreme form of 
D. Shoplandi, that specific name would become a synonym—D. megathyris, Dall, 
having priority of five years. From a careful study of the material and literature at 
our command we cannot help thinking that D. megathyris, Dall, D. Shopland:, Jouss., 
D. ceras, Watson, and perhaps D. majorinum, Rocheb. and Mab., may eventually 
prove to be but forms of one variable gigantic longitudinally costate Dentalium in 
the southern hemisphere, radiating towards the Atlantic as well as the Pacifie Ocean, 
and inhabiting everywhere very deep water, where the great pressure, darkness, and 
equable temperature render it possible for it to range through many degrees of latitude. 


Class PELECYPODA. 
Order PRoTOBRANCHIATA. 


Family Nuculide. 
Yoldia profundorum, sp. n. (Plate, figs. 18, 18a, 18b). 


Y. testa parva, tumida, nitida, levi, inequilaterali, periostraco plumbeo-olivaceo contecta, anticé 
rotundata, posticé paullulum producto, umbonibus erosis, approximatis, haud prominulis, ligamento obscuro, 
lineari, cardinibus utriusque valve decem denticulis utrinque preditis, pagina interna nitida, albo-lactea, 
sinu palliali parvo. 

Alt. 3, lat. 4550 mm. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 359.) 


134 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


Hab.—Deposit No. 38, dredged March 18, 1904, lat. 71° 22’8., long. 16° 34’ W., 
1410 fathoms. Station 417. 

A small, tumid, smoothish, slightly inequilateral Yoldia, the anterior side 
rounded, the posterior somewhat produced, to which Y. (Sarepta) abyssicola, Smith,* 
from Station 246, Challenger Expedition, Mid North Pacific, at 2050 fathoms, and also 
Station 281, Mid South Pacific, at 2385 fathoms, seems somewhat allied. That species, 
however, appears more distinctly abbreviate posteriorly, and higher in proportion 
to its width. Y. ecaudata, Pelseneer,t may likewise be compared, a species which 
is closely akin to Y. abyssicola. This was obtained during the voyage of the 
Belgica in the Antarctic region, at a depth of 400-500 metres. Again, Y. Valettez, 
Lamy, from the South Orkneys, where an example was found in the stomach of a penguin, 
is much of the same outward form, but less than half the dimensions (2°2 x 1°65 x 1°5 mm.), 
and the teeth are only six in number on either side. The epidermis is likewise named 
as ‘‘flava” in contradistinction to “ plumbea ” or “ olivacea.” 


Nucula pisum, Sowb. 


Nucula pisum, Sowerby, Thes. Conch., iii. p. 153, pl. ecxxix. fig, 133. 


Hab.—Falkland Islands, local, but gregarious. Station 118. 


Order FILIBRANCHIATA. 
Sub-order ARCACEA. 
Family Avretde. 
Arca (Bathyarca) strebeli, M. and St. 
Arca (Bathyarca) strebeli, Melvill and Standen, Yrans. Roy. Soc. Edin., vol. xlvi., 
part 1., p. 144, pl. figs. 138, 13a (1907). 
Hab.—Two additional localities can be now given, as follows :— 
Station 420. Dredged at 2620 fathoms. One specimen. 
» 291. Lat. 67° 33’8., long. 36° 35’ W., 2500 fathoms, March 7, 1903. 
LInmopsis longipilosa, Pels. 
Limopsis longipilosa, P. Pelseneer, Voy. du S.Y. “ Belgica”: Zoologie, p. 25, figs. 89, 90 (1903). 
Hab.—Dredged in lat. 71° 22’ 8., long. 16° 34’ W., at 1410 fathoms, March 18, 
1904. Station 417. 
One fairly perfect specimen, probably referable to the above. 
[Very imperfect examples of another Limopsis, solid, small, equilateral, covered 
with thin, short-bristled epidermis, also occurred at Burdwood Bank, 50 fathoms. | 
* Rep. Challenger Expedition, “ Lamellibranchia,” pl. xx. figs. 6, 6a, 6b. 
+ Voy. du S.Y. “ Belgica” :; Zoologie, par PAUL PELSENERR, p. 22, figs. 77, 78 (1903). 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 360.) 


MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 135 


Sub-order MyTILAcKa. 
Family Mytilide. 
Philobrya sublevis, Pels. 
Philobrya sublevis, P. Pelseneer, Voy. du S.Y. “ Belgica” : Zoologie, p. 25, figs. 93, 94 (1903). 
Hab.—Station 346, lat. 54° 25’ 8., long. 57° 32’ W., at 56 fathoms, January 1, 
1903. 
Philobrya wandelensis, Lamy. 


Philobry« wandelensis, E. Lamy, Hapéd. Antaret. Francaise Charcot, 1903-5, p. 16, pl. i. 
figs. 15, 16 (1906). 


Hab.—Traw], Burdwood Bank, 56 fathoms. Station 346. 


Crenella decussata, Mont. 


Mytilus decussatus, Montagu, Test. Brit. Suppl., p. 69 (1309). 


5 A Forbes and Hanley, 1. p. 210, pl. xlv. fig. 2. 
Crenella 5 Jeffreys, Brit. Conch., i. p. 133, V., pl. xxviii, fig. 6. 
= Sowerby, Jl. Index Brit. Shells, pl. vii. fig. 17. 


Hab.—Burdwood Bank, south of the Falkland Islands, at 56 fathoms, December 1, 
1903. Station 346. 

Very minute specimens, not exceeding 2x2 mm., the interior beautifully pale- 
nacreous ; form precisely that of the Huropean and Canadian type, the divaricating 
sculpture seemingly also identical, as well as the fine marginal crenellations. 


Modiolarca mesembrina, M. and St. 


Modiolarca mesembrina, Melvill and Standen, Z'rans. Roy. Soc, Edin., vol. xlvi., part i., 
p. 146, pl. figs. 15, 15a (1907). 

Modiolarea picturata, Cooper and Preston, Ann. and Mag. N. Hist., ser. viii, vol. v., pl. iv. 
fig. 5 (1910). 

Hab.—Falkland Islands. Station 118. 

We received lately from Mr A. P. Copp examples of MW. pictwrata, Cooper and 
Preston, and consider it the same as our mesembrina, from the same locality, described 
three years previously. In marking and coloration it is a most variable species: in 
form it is fairly constant. 


Order KULAMELLIBRANCHIATA. 
Sub-order SUBMYTILACEA. 
Family Carditide. 
Carditella pallida, Sm. 
Carditella pallida, E. A. Smith, Proe. Zool. Soc. Lond., p. 43, pl. v. figs. 9, 96 (1881). 
var. duodecim-costata, nov. (Plate, figs. 19, 19a). 


Hab.—Station 346, Burdwood Bank, at 56 fathoms. Many full-grown specimens, 
but few perfect. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 361.) 


136 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


In all the specimens examined of our proposed variety, the ribs are but twelve in 
number; in typical C. pallida, Sm., they number fourteen to fifteen. The straight 
angular declivity on either side of the dorsal margin seems likewise more pronounced, 
the variety thereby assuming a more flabellate or quasi-triangular appearance. The 
general characters of the shells are identical. As Mr Smit aptly remarks, the 
superficial aspect of Cardita flabellum, Reeve,* proves it to be nearly allied. This is 
a native of Valparaiso, Chili. 


Cardita congelascens, sp. n. (Plate, fig. 23). 

C. testa parva, trapezoide, solidula, umbonibus prominulis, inequilaterali, equivalvi, posticé dorsaliter 
recta, anticé breviter arcuata, deinde ventralem usque ad marginem, leniter subrotundata, superficie 
radiatim costulata, costulis incrassatis, numero ad 21, pulchre et regulariter nodulosis, nodulis imbricatulis, 
albis, nitidis pagina intus alba, valva dextra, cardinalibus dentibus duobus crassis, sinistra dente crasso, 
elongato, preditis 

Alt. 3, diam. 4 mm. (sp. maj.). 

Hab.—Burdwood Bank, south of the Falkland Islands, at 56 fathoms. Station 346. 

Only disassociated valves occurred of a species of Cardita which seems distinct. 
We have compared it with C. modesta, velutina, antarctica, astartoides, and other 
species of the genus inhabiting these same southern waters, and find it fails exactly to 
correspond with any of them. At the same time, we doubt if any of our examples are 
adult. Still, the character of the ribs, and the ornamentation and the general contour 
of the shell, give us hope that it may be proved eventually to have been established 
on a sound basis. The specific name alludes to the icy clime where it is endemic. 


Family Astartide. 


Astarte magellanica, Sm. 


Astarte magellanica, E. A. Smith, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., p. 41, pl. v. fig. 7 (1881). 
» ” Journ. of Conch., iii. p. 227. 


Hab.—Burdwood Bank, south of the Falkland Islands, at 56 fathoms. Station 346. 

All disassociated valves, but some in good condition, and showing the olivaceous 
epidermis. The majority possess fewer concentric ribs than the type, but we consider 
them all referable to magellanica. The allied A. longirostra, Orb., also found in this 
region, is more pronouncedly beaked, and the ribbing is far finer. ‘The crenulation of 
the inner margin of the valves is, as pointed out by the author of the species, another 
distinctive factor in A. magellanica. 


* Reeve, Conch. Icon., i., Cardita, pl. ix. fig. 47 (1843). 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 362.) 


MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 1 


id) 
= 


Family Lucinide. 


Diplodonta lamellata, Sm. 


Diplodonta lamellata, E. A. Smith, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., p 38, pl. v. figs 1-1 ¢ (1881). 


Hab.—Burdwood Bank, south of the Falkland Islands, at 56 fathoms. Station 346. 

A right and left valve, hardly adult, but showing the characteristic generic 
dentition, as well as the concentric lamellar ornamentation, which led to the bestowal 
of the trivial name. These lamellz appear in our small specimens more numerous, but 
we can but believe them identical, as they agree in form, and every other detail. The 
type was discovered during the survey of H.M.S. Alert in the Straits of Magellan and 
Patagonian coast. 


Cyamium denticulatum, Sm. 
Cyamium denticulatum, EK. A. Smith, Nat. Antaret. Exped.: Nat. Hist., vol. ii. p. 3, pl. iil. 


figs. 4, 4b (1907). 


Hab.—Burdwood Bank, 56 fathoms. Station 346. 
A curious though minute species, conspicuous for its marginal denticulation and 
radiating impressed lines, which are seen more clearly with the aid of a lens. 


Cyamium falklandicum, M. and St. 


Cyamium falklandicum, Melvill and Standen, Journ. of Conch., ix. p. 104, pl. i. fi 
(1898). 

1 Cyamium iridescens, Cooper and Preston, Ann. and Mag. N.H., ser. viii., vol. v. p. 112, 
pl. iv. fig. 6 (1910). 


g. 12 


This is a variable species, and we consider C. iridescens, Coop. and Prest., probably 
one of its extreme forms. We have examined a large number of examples, in all stages 
of growth. The specimens collected at Hearnden Water, Station 349, are as iridescent 
as those so named by Messrs Cooper and Preston. 


Family Hrycinide. 


Kellyia cycladiformais (Desh.). 
Erycina cycladiformis, Deshayes, Trait. élém., pl. xi. figs. 6-9; Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 
p. 181 (1855). 

Hab.—Burdwood Bank, at 56 fathoms. Station 346. 

We have already recorded this (loc. cit., p. 149), but it is worthy of record that 
nearly all the subsequent specimens from aN same locality that have since come into 
our hands were found living inside the valves of defunct Brachiopoda, and are therefore 
in first-class condition. Saaicave occurred with them. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 363.) 


138 DR JAMES COSMO MELVILL AND MR ROBERT STANDEN ON THE 


Kellyra magellanica, Sm. 
Kellyia magellanica, E. A. Smith, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., p. 41, pl. v. figs. 6, 6 a, b (1881). 


Hab.—Burdwood Bank, with K. cycladiformis (Desh.). Station 346. 
Only one perfect valve, agreeing exactly with the figure 6a above quoted. 


Davisia cobbi, Coop. and Prest. 


Davisia cobbi, J. E. Cooper and H. B. Preston, Ann. and Mag. N. Hist., ser. viii., vol. v. 
pp. 113, 114, pl. iv. figs. 9, 10 (1910). 

Hab.—Burdwood Bank, Station 346, at 56 fathoms. 

A small species with peculiar hinge. It would be unfortunately impossible, from 
the very indistinct photogravure plates, to tell the generic characteristics, and we 
wish it had heen possible to figure both this and the Maluinasia, described at the same 
opportunity, in a more satisfactory fashion. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 
[Supplemental to the first list in Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., xlvi. pp. 154, 155.] 


1881. Sir, Evear Anpert, “ Account of the Zoological Collections made during the Survey of H.M.S. 
Alert in the Straits of Magellan, and the Coasts of Patagonia: Mollusca,’ P.Z.S. Lond., 
pp. 22-44, pl. iti—v. 

[Rossia patagonica, Loligo patagonica, Onychoteuthis ingens, Pleurotoma (Bela) Cunninghami, PI. 
(Mangilia) Coppingeri, Lachesis meridionalis, Euthria atrata, E. meridionalis, Nassa (Tritia) 
Coppingeri, Lamellaria patagonica, Collonia Cunninghamt, Trochus (Zizyphinus) consimilts, 
Tectura (Pilidium) Coppingeri, Chiton (Ischnochiton) imitator, Diplodonta lamellata, Mactra 
(Mulinia) levicardo, Loripes pertenuis, Kellia magellanica, Astarte magellanica, Cardita 
(Actinobolus) velutina, Carditella (n. g.) pallida, spp. nov. marine. | 

1907. Joupin, L., Expédition Antarctique Francaise (1903-5) commandée par Dr Jean Charcot: Sciences 
Naturelles, ‘Documents Scientifiques : Céphalopodes,” Paris, 1 pl. 

1907. Menyitt, James Cosmo, and SranpEen, Rospert, “The Marine Mollusca of the Scottish National 
Antaretic Expedition,” Trans. Roy. Soc, Edin., xlvi., part i., pp. 119-157, 1 pl. 

[Tugalia antarctica, Littorina (Levilitorina) coriacea, Lacuna notorcadensis, Rissou Edgariana, R. 
scotiana, Cerithiopsis malvinarum, Trophon minutus, Nassa (Ilyanassa) Vallentini, Chrysodomus 
(Sipho) archibenthalis, C. (Sipho) crassicostatus, Columbarium benthocallis, Dentalium eupatrides, 
Arca (Bathyarca) Strebeli, Lissarca notorcadensis, Modiolarca mesembrina, Pecten pteriola, 
Amussium 18-liratum, Lima goughensis, Kellia Lamyi (nom. nov.), Cuspidaria Brucet, Scacchia 
plenilunium, Pecten multicolor, spp. n.] 


1907, SrrepeL, Hermann, “ Beitrage zu Kenntnis der Mollusken-Faunen der Magalhaen, Provinz,” Part v., 
Zool. Jahrb, Syst. Jena, pp. 79-196, Taf. viii. 
[A continuation of the enumeration of the Molluscan fauna of the Falkland Islands, with new species 
of Megatebennus, Tugalia, Patinella, and several non-marine forms. | 
1907. Ex1or, Sir Cuarues N. E., K.C.M.G., ‘Nudibranchs from New Zealand and the Falkland Isles,” 
Proc. Malac. Soc., vii. pp. 327-361, pl. xxviii. (London). 
[Cratena Vallentini, Galvina falklandica, Coryphella falklandica, Staurodoris falklandica, 
Acanthodoris falklandica, spp. n.] 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS. VOL. XLVIII., 364.) 


MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 139 


1908. Srreper, Hermann, Wissenschafte Ergebnisse der Schiwedischen Stidpolar Expedition, 1901-3, unter 
Leitung von Dr Otto Nordenskjild, Band vi., Lieferung i., ‘Die Gastropoden,” mit 6 Tafeln 
(Stockholm). 

[New species of genera Actxonina, Retusa, Cylichnina, Anderssonia, Philine, Bela 6 spp., Surcula, 
Mangilia, Plewrotomella, Admete, Paradmete n. g. 3 spp., Ancillaria, Glypteuthria, ? Sipho 
2 spp., Neobuccinum, Pfefferia n. g. 4 spp., Trophon 4 spp., Bittium 3 spp., Cerithropsis, Rissoia 
5 spp., Hatoniella, Natica 3 spp., Scalaria, Volutaxiella n. g. 2 spp., Hulima, Odostomia, 
Calliostoma 5 spp., Photinula, Promargarita n. subgen., Submargarita n. subgen., Margarita 
2 spp., Cyclostrema, Scissurella, Thilea. | 

1908. Dani, Wm11am Heatey, Report on the Dredging Operations off the West Coast of Central America 
to the Galapagos, etc., carried on by the U.S. Fish Commission Steamer ‘ Albatross” during 
1891, in charge of Alexander Agassiz. 

Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Eastern Tropical Pacific by the U.S. Fish 
Commission Steamer “ Albatross,” 1904-1905, in charge of Alexander Agassiz. 

“Mollusca and Brachiopoda,” with 22 plates, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, vol. xlii., No. 6, 
pp. 205-487. 

[A few Magellanic species recorded, e.g. on p. 315, Antistreptus magellanicus, Dall= Glypteuthria 
contraria, Strebel. | 

1908. Puats, L., “Die Scaphopoden der Deutschen Sudpolar Expedition, 1901-3,” Deutsche Sudpolar 
Expedition, Band x. (Berlin, G. Reimer). 

[Cadulus Thiele’, Siphonodentalium minimum, Dentalium majorinum, var. n. gaussianum. | 

1908, Puars, L., Expédition Antarctique Belge. Résultats du Voyage du §.Y. “Belgica” en 1897-98-99 
sous le commandement de A. de Gerlache de Gomery. Rapports Scientifiques: Zoologie, 
“ Scaphopoden” (Anvers, Buschmann). 

1908. THiene, Joann, “Die antarktischen und subantarktischen Chitonen,” Deutsche Sudpolar Expedi- 
tion, 1901-3 (Berlin, G. Reimer). 1 Taf. 

[Callochiton (Icoplax) Giausset, sp. n.| 
1908. Lamy, Evovarp, “Description dun Lamellibranche nouveau des Iles Malouines,” Bull. Muséum, 
Paris, pp. 128-129. 
[Philobrya multistriata, sp. n.| 
1909. Tuune, Joann, “ Revision des Systems des Chitonen,” Tl. 1-2, Zoologica (Stuttgart), H. 56. 10 Taf. 
[Wotoplax magellanica, sp. n.| 

1909. Nrersrrasz, H. F., ‘“Solenogastres,” National Antarctic Bapedition, 1901-4 (London), pp. 1-13. 
2 plates. 

1910. Exior, Sir Cuarues N. E., K.C.M.G., “The Nudibranchiata of the Scottish National Antarctic 
Expedition,” Report on the Scientific Results of the Voyage of the S.Y. “ Scotia,” pp. 11-24. 

[Notxolidia, Tritonia, Tritoniopsis, spp. n.| 

1910, Coorsr, J. E., and Preston, Hucu Berton, “Diagnoses of New Species of Marine and Fresh-water 
Shells from the Falkland Islands, including Descriptions of two New Genera of Marine 
Pelecypoda,” Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist, (London), ser. viii., pp. 110-114. 1 plate. 

[Photinula solidula, Modiolarca gemma, M. picturata, Cyamium iridescens, Malvinasia (n. gen.) 
Arthuri, Davisia (n. gen.) Cobbi, Psephis foveolata, spp. 0. marine. | 

1910. Cuun, Cart, “ Die Cephalopoden : Oegopsida,” Wiss. Ergebn. d. D. Tiefsee Exped., Band xviii. (Jena, 

G. Fischer). 61 Tafeln. 
[Teuthowenia antarctica, sp- n. | 
1910. Lamy, Ep., “Mission dans l’Antarctique dirigée par M. le Dr Cuarcor: Collections recueillies par 
M. le Dr J. Liouville.” 
Gastropodes, ete., Bull. Muséwm, Paris, pp. 318-324. 
Pélécypodes, id., pp. 388-394. 
[Buceinum Charcott, Sipho Gaini, Cerithium Liouville’, Natica Godefroyt, Scissurella petermannensis, 
Axinus Bongraini, Arca (Bathyarca) Gourdoni, Silicula Roucht, spp. n.] 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 365.) 


140 MARINE MOLLUSCA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 
1910. Lamy, Ep., “ Mollusques recueillis par M. Rallier du Baty aux iles Kerguelen,” Bull. Muséum, Paris, 
p. 198. 
1911. Germary, Louis, in pu Bary, Ratrrer, “Quinze mois aux iles Kerguelen: Mollusques terrestres,” 
Ann. Inst. Océan., Monaco, iii. pp. 46-47. 
1911. Lamy, Ep., zd., ‘“Mollusques marines,” pp. 40—45. 
1911. Lamy, Ep., “Sur quelaues Mollusques de la Georgie du Sud, et des iles Sandwich du Sud,” 
Bull, Mus. Paris, pp. 22-27. 
[Natica nigromaculata, Joubint, spp. n. | 
1911. Hepiey, Cuarzes, “ British Antarctic Expedition, under command of Sir E. H Suackzeron, C.V.O.,” 
vol. ii, Biology, Part i., Mollusca:—[Kellia nimrodiana, Solecardia antarctica, Lacuna 
macmurdensis, Lovenella austrina, Vermicularia Murrayi, Odostomiopsis major, Trophon 
Shackletoni, spp. n.] 
1912. Preston, H. B., “Characters of Six new Pelecypods and Two new Gastropods from the Falkland 
Islands,” Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. viii., vol. ix. p. 636, 1 plate, June 1912. 
[Levilitorina Bennetti, latior, Nucula falklandica, Cyamium Bennetti, exasperatum, piscium, Davisia 
Bennetti, concentrica, spp. 0. | 
1912. Hoyix, W. E., ‘Cephalopoda of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition,” Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., 
vol. xlviii., Part ii., pp. 273-283. 
EXPLANATION OF PLATE. 
1. Seissurella eucharista. 13. Cerithiopsis macroura, 
2. _ timora. | 14. Turritella algida. 
3. Cyclostrema calypso. 15. Mathilda rhigomaches. 
4, zs coatsianum. | 16. Lurbonilla xenophyes. 
D. s6 gaudens. 17. Savatieria concinna. 
6. 55 meridionale. | 18. Yoldia profundorum. 
7. Tvrichotropis antarctica. | 19. Carditella pallida, Sm., var. 12-costata nov. 
8. Lacuna abyssicola. 20. Retusa antarctica. 
9. Rissoa (Onoba) jilostria. 21. Mitra (Volutomitra) porcellana. 
10,» » paucilirata. 22. Cyclostrema meridionale (cum operculo). 
ll. Bittium brucez, 23. Cardita congelascens. 
12, 5  burdwoodianum. 24. Chetopleura brucet, Iredale. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 366.) 


. 
Sweote Nana tat Has. Nol Wik 


MELVILL & STANDEN:* Scotia’ Marine Moiiusca. 


20. 


A.H.Searle del. et lith 


| PART VI. 
- BRACHIOPODA. 


nt a 


VI—THE BRACHIOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH 
NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


By J. WILFRID JACKSON, F.G.S8., 


Assistant Keeper, Manchester Museum, 


(WITH TWO PLATES.) 


= 


Le) Abe nig (OO XO TA at 


POPU UTA (OUP UATRA hea Seam 


———— 


Bo AUER TLE 
ey C Te Nige Arabia 


a 


U ace wittiete TON? Ae 


A 


ia 


The Brachiopoda of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition (1902 to 1904). 
By J. Wilfrid Jackson, F.G.8., Assistant Keeper, Manchester Museum. Com- 
municated by Dr W. S. Bruce. (With Two Plates.) 


(MS. received May 6, 1912. Read June 17, 1912. Issued separately August 28, 1912.) 


The Brachiopoda of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition of the S.Y. Scotia 
(1902-1904), though in some cases somewhat scanty in number of individuals, are of 
particular interest, mainly on account of increasing very materially our knowledge in 
regard to the geographical range of certain forms, as well as of adding other species to 
those already known from the Antarctic coast-line. 

Representatives of this class were dredged at three stations, viz.: Station 325 
(Scotia Bay, South Orkneys), 9-10 fathoms ; Station 346 (Burdwood Bank, south of the 
Falkland Islands), 56 fathoms; and Station 417 (off Coats Land, Antarctica), 1410 
fathoms. 

The Scotia Bay dredgings resulted only in the acquisition of one species, which, 
though possessing certain characteristics of Liothyrina wva, differs in many other 
respects from that widely distributed form, and may possibly be ultimately regarded 
as a distinct species. As sufficient material for a complete study is not available, the 
specimens are referred, in this report, to a new variety of L. wva, viz. notorcadensis. 

At Burdwood Bank were obtained some interesting forms of Terebratella dorsata 
and Liothyrina wa, both being well-known Magellanic species, as well as some young 
forms which may possibly represent a new species of Terebratella. 

At this station some interesting examples of a new Cephalodiscus were also 
dredged, which have provided welcome material in the form of very young stages 
of Liothyrina uva, as well as of others referable to Terebratella dorsata and 
Magellania venosa. 

The dredging at Station 417 yielded four forms, all of them being of extreme 
interest, coming as they do from so southerly a latitude, and from the neighbourhood 
of the newly discovered Coats Land. 

The species met with here comprise an interesting form of Macandrevia (M. 
diamantina), hitherto only recorded from the Gulf of Panama and Northern Peru ; 
Pelagodiscus atlanticus, a typical abyssal form and a species of almost cosmopolitan 
distribution; Liothyrina blochmanni, n. sp.; and some fragmentary remains of an 
undoubtedly new Rhynchonelloid, unfortunately too imperfect for accurate specific 
description. These, being deep-water forms, are all thin-shelled animals, and do not 
attain a very large size. 

It is particularly fortunate that amongst the specimens of Macandrevia dia- 


(REPRINTED FROM THE TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF EDINBURGH, VOL. XLVIITI., PP. 367-390.) 


146 J. WILFRID JACKSON ON 


mantina are examples which have afforded the much-desired opportunity for studying 
the developmental stages of the loop. 

With regard to Pelagodiscus atlanticus, although of almost world-wide distribution, 
its probable existence in Antarctic waters has only recently been demonstrated by 
KIcHLER (1911),* who, with some hesitation, refers to this species two larval forms of 
a Discinisca obtained in March 1903 by the “Gauss” Expedition, at a depth of 
about 1640 fathoms in the neighbourhood of their winter station, Kaiser 
Wilhelmland II. 

Although it is, to some extent, a matter for regret that this report is so late in 
its publication, owing to the material having only recently come into my hands for 
study, the long delay has not been without its compensations, as I have been able 
to derive some benefit from, and make comparisons with, collections made by other 
Antarctic expeditions whose reports are already published. 

Before proceeding with the detailed description of the species I must here express 
my great indebtedness to the numerous friends who have assisted in one way or 
another during the preparation of this report. 

To Dr F. Brocumann, of Tiibingen University, I am especially indebted for his 
very material help in the discrimination of critical forms, and for his kind interest and 
valuable assistance. To Dr W. H. Dati IJ am also grateful for his great kindness and 
confidence in submitting to me a type specimen of his Macandrevia diamantina for 
comparison with the Macandrevia obtained in 1410 fathoms off Coats Land. Amongst 
the various friends who have assisted in sorting out the smaller Brachiopoda from the 
Burdwood Bank material, I wish to particularly mention my colleague Mr R. SranDEN, 
the Rev. L. J. SHackLEForD, and Messrs B. R. Lucas, F.G.S., and F. G. Prarcry. 
And in conclusion I must tender my sincere thanks to Dr W. 8S. Bruce, F.R.S.E., for 
entrusting his Brachiopod collections to me, and for placing maps and much general 
information at my disposal. 

List of species contained in the Scotia collections :— 


Class BRACHIOPODA. 


Pelagodiscus atlanticus (King), off Coats Land, 1410 fathoms. 
Hemithyris, n. sp., off Coats Land, 1410 fathoms. 
Trothyrina uva (Brod.), Burdwood Bank, 56 fathoms. 
* var. notorcadensis, nov., Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, 9-10 fathoms. 

L. blochmanni, n. sp., off Coats Land, 1410 fathoms. 
Macandrevia diamantina, Dall., off Coats Land, 1410 fathoms. 
Terebratella dorsata (Gm.), Burdwood Bank, 56 fathoms. 

ba n. sp.?, Burdwood Bank, 56 fathoms. 
Magellania venosa (Sol.), Burdwood Bank, 56 fathoms. 

* See bibliography at end of report. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 368.) 


THE BRACHIOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 147 


DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES. 


The literature in the main is restricted to the more important papers. Further 
synonymy will be found in Davipson’s Recent Brachiopoda (1886-1888); FiscHER 
and OHLERT (1892); and BuocHMANN (1912). 


Pelagodiscus atlanticus (King). 


Discina atlantica, King, 1868, Proc. Nat. Hist. Soc. Dublin, vol. v. pp. 170-173. 


4 3 ., 1880, Davidson, ‘ Challenger ” Report, pp. 62 and 65, pl. iv. figs. 17-18. 
Discinisca atlantica (King), 1888, Davidson, Mon. Recent Brach., pt. iii. p. 200, pl. xxvi. figs. 18-22. 
HF Fr . 1891, Fischer and Oehlert, Exped. Scient. du “ Travailleur” et du 
“ Talisman,” Brachiopodes, p. 120. 
a; 5 3 Section Pelagodiscus, 1908, Dall, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., vol. xliii. p. 440. 
Discinisca , 1911, Eichler, Deutschen S.-P. Kxped., xii., Zool., iv. p. 87, pl. xliv. fig. 22. 


Hab.—Station 417 ; lat. 71° 22’ S., long. 16° 34’ W. (off Coats Land, Antarctica). 
Depth, 1410 fathoms. March 18, 1904. Sea bottom, blue mud and _ stones. 
Temperature 29°°9 F. 

Obs.—Four upper valves of this interesting species were trawled at this station. 
The largest specimen measures 6°75 by 6 mm.; the others, 5 by 5, 4°75 by 4, and 3°5 
by 3°5 mm. respectively. 

All are in a good state of preservation. The shell is thin, semi-transparent, 
yellowish-brown in colour, and marked by numerous close-set concentric growth 
lines. The protegulum in each example is well defined, and situated somewhat 
posteriorly. 

Pelagodiscus (formerly Discinisea) atlanticus is a typical cold-water species with 
a bathymetric range from 200 to 2425 fathoms. Its geographic range is almost world- 
wide, as it is known from the North and Mid-Atlantic Ocean, the Pacific, and off 
Australia. Some seven or eight different localities were established for it by the 
Challenger Expedition. 

Off Valparaiso it was obtained by this Expedition in 2160 fathoms, on a mud 
bottom ; temperature 34° F. 

Tt has also been taken south-west of the Galapagos Islands, in 2035 fathoms ; 
temperature 35°°3 F. (Albatross). 

As mentioned in the prefatory remarks, its probable existence in Antaretic waters 
has recently been alluded to by E1cHLER (1911), who describes two larval forms of a 
Discinoid from a depth of about 1640 fathoms, Kaiser Wilhelmland II. These appear 
to have strong affinities with P. atlanticus, and in all probability are referable to this 
widely dispersed form. 

The present discovery of the species well within the Antaretie Circle is highly 
interesting, as it increases the known range to a considerable extent geographically, 
though not bathymetrically. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 369.) 


148 J. WILFRID JACKSON ON 


The very wide range of this species is, in all probability, due to larval trans- 
portation, as the larvee are known to live in a free and floating condition for nearly 
a month, and have been taken in a drag-net not far from land (ScHUCHERT, 1911). 


Hemithyris sp. (PI. II. fig. 14.) 


Hab.—Station 417; lat. 71° 22’S., long. 16° 34’ W. (off Coats Land, Antarctica). 
Depth, 1410 fathoms. March 18, 1904. Sea bottom, blue mud and stones. Tem- 
perature 29°°9 F. 

Obs.—Some fragmentary remains of a probable new Rhynchonelloid were met with 
at the above station. These consist of hinge portions only of one ventral and two 
dorsal valves, but are, unfortunately, too small and imperfect for accurate specific 
description. 

The material at my disposal appears to belong to a small trigonal form possessing 
a thin, translucent test. The colour is a yellowish-brown, and the outer surface smooth 
with very faint growth lines. 

The ventral valve possesses dental plates, as in the type species Hemithyris 
psittacea, and from the evidence of the fragment the beak appears to be somewhat 
produced, and to possess a moderately large foramen. 

The dorsal valve exhibits a short, feeble, median septum separating well-marked 
muscular impressions. There is no cardinal process, Hinge plate divided and 
consisting of two short, flattened, curved lamelle, which are widely divergent. 

Shell-mosaic similar in character to but larger in size than that of R. cornea figured 
by Brocumann (1908; pl. xxxvii. fig. 16). 

Fig. 14 (Pl IL) in the present report is taken from a fairly well-preserved 
fragment. 

The above description, of course, applies only to the posterior portion; the anterior 
end of the shell is quite unknown, hence one cannot say if the species is plicated 
or not. 

Two new species of Rhynchonella (R. racovitze and R. gerlacher), and several 
indefinite forms too imperfect for identification, have been described from the Western 
Antarctic by Jousrn (1901), but these all come from a less depth than the Coats Land 
form. This latter may, however, be intimately related with one or other of these 
forms, but owing to the paucity of material in both cases a decision on this point is for 
the present out of the question. 

It is most unfortunate that the fragments of the Coats Land example are so small 
and indefinite, as this prevents a comparison being made, not only with the above- 
mentioned recent forms, but also with the fossil examples of Hemithyris recently 
described by Buckman (1910) from Antarctica (Swedish Expedition), especially 
H. antarctica, Buck., from the Pleistocene beds of Cockburn Island, off Graham Land, 
to which species the Coats Land form presents some points of resemblance. 

(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 370.) 


THE BRACHIOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 149 


There is also the possibility of relationship with two other fossil species, viz. 
Hemithyris plicigera (Shering) and IT. australis, Buckman, from the Miocene-Oligocene 


beds of the same island. 


Liothyrina uva (Broderip). (Pl. I. fig. 9.) 


Terebratula uva, Broderip, 1833, Proc. Zool. Soc, London, pt. i, p. 124. 
1835, Trans. Zool. Soc. London, vol. i. p- 142, pl. xxi. fig. 2. 
1880, Davidson, “ Challenger’ Report, p. 31, pl. u. figs. 44a (figs. 3-3 
are Liothyrina fulva, Bl.). 
Liothyris uva (Brod.), 1886, Davidson, Mon. Recent Brach., pl. il. figs. 5-7. 
Terebratula (Liothyrina) moseleyi, Dav., 1892, Fischer and Oehlert, Bull. Soc. d’hist. nat Autun, 
vol. v. p. 264, pl. viii. figs. 9-23. 
Liothyrina uva (Brod.), 1906, Blochmann, Zool. Anzeiger, vol. xxx. p. 698. 
1907, Oehlert, Bull. Mus. @hist. nat. Paris (1906), vol. xii. p. 555, text-figs. 
1908, Oehlert, Haypédition antarctique Frangaise, 1903-1905, Sctences nat. 
Brachiopodes, p). i. and text-figs. 
1908, Blochmann, Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., Bd. xc. p. 615. 
; 1908, Dall, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll., vol. xliii. p. 443. 
3 x 1909, Dall, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. xxxvii. p. 279. 
1911, Kichler, Deutsche S.-P. Expedition (Brachiopoden), Bd. xii. (Zoologie 
iv.), Berlin, p. 338. 
33 5 1912, Blochmann, Die Brach. der Schwed. S.-P. Expedition, Bd. vi. 
(Zoologie ii.), No. 7, Stockholm, p. 1, pl. i. figs. 1-13; pl. i. figs. 
16-18; pl. iii. figs. 20-28. 


” ” 


” ” 


Hab.—Station 346; lat. 54° 25’ S., long. 57° 32’ W. (Burdwood Bank), 56 fathoms. 
December 1, 1903. Sea bottom, Bryozoa. ‘Temperature 41°°8 F. 

Obs.—Several dead examples of a small species of Liothyrina were trawled at the 
above station at 56 fathoms. 

The largest example (PI. I fig. 9) measures: length, 15°5 mm.; breadth, 
13 mm., and agrees very closely with the specimen figured by FiscHer and OkHLERT 
(op. cit., pl. viii. fig. 23) under the name of Terebratula (Liothyrina) moseleyi, Dav. 
The two vascular sinuses show very clearly in the interior of the ventral valve, as in 
their figured example. The dorsal valve of this specimen is also interesting as showing 
a very distinct trace of a median septum, as well as a strongly developed hinge apo- 
physis, which occupies a considerable portion of the posterior end of the valve. 

Other noteworthy features are the remarkable thickness of both valves, and the 
abundance of coarse growth lines, which would lead one to infer that the shell had 
attained an adult, or even a gerontic, condition. 

Most of the other examples, though smaller in size, also show a considerable 
thickness in their shells, which renders the test quite opaque. 

All are similar in form, being somewhat pyriform, and attaining their maximum 
diameter a little anterior to the middle of the valves. 

The colour of the specimens is milk-white. 

The examples of Liothyrina obtained from the colony of a new Cephalodiscus, 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL, 371.) 


150 J. WILFRID JACKSON ON 


dredged at this station, range in size from 1 mm. to 7 mm., and furnish ample material 
for a study of the gradual development of the shell and brachial support. 

Though the development of the latter organ is well known in the genus Liothyrina, 
through the careful studies by DesLonccuamps (1884) of young forms of ZL. vitrea, it 
may be of interest to give here a detailed description of the various stages in the develop. 
ment of this appendage, based upon a study of the young examples in my possession. 

In the smallest example (L., | mm.) the brachial support has only just commenced 
to make its appearance, and is represented by two small sharp points* descending 
from the rudimentary crural bases, which consist of two short raised diverging bosses 
bordering the dental sockets. The apical portion of the ventral valve of this specimen 
shows a somewhat triangular peduncular opening, which is slightly notched on each 
side. No deltidial plates are apparent, but the teeth are fairly well-developed. The 
shell-mosaic of both valves is quite clear, but irregular in its development. The shell- 
perforations are large and well rounded, and show on an average 256 puncte per square 
millimetre. 

The shell at this stage is very linguloid in appearance, and recalls to mind the early 
stage of Terebratulina septentrionalis figured by Morsz (Mem. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., 
vol. v., 1902, pl. hi. fig. 16). 

At 1°5 mm. in length the shell has assumed a more pear-shaped outline; the 
descending branches of the loop have increased slightly in length and diverge strongly 
from each other. The peduncular opening is more normal in shape, and traces of 
deltidial plates are slightly visible. 

At 1°75 mm. the deltidial plates are still further developed and the descending 
branches of the loop exhibit slight traces, near their bases, of the crural points. 

At 2°5 mm. the branches of the loop are curved slightly backwards and inwards 
towards the bottom of the valve; they are here more ribbon-like in form than in 
previous stages. The deltidial plates show increased development ; the shell-mosaic is 
very irregular and wavy or flow-like in arrangement. 

At 3 and 3°5 mm. the crural points exhibit greater development and the loop 
branches show a stronger convergence towards each other. 

At 4 mm. the converging branches are almost in contact at their extremities, but 
no angle, as yet, is present on their surface. 

At 5 mm. the deltidial plates are larger and seen to be highly punctate, and the 
cardinal process of the dorsal valve has appeared. The loop is still unjoined, and there 
is no sign of angulation. In the umbonal cavity of both valves a thin dark line is 
apparent (visible through the shell) which probably represents the median septum. 
The mosaic of the muscular impressions in the dorsal valve is clear and seale-like, but in 
remainder of the shell is very irregular. The punctze in this specimen range from 224 
to 280 per square millimetre. 

At 6°5 mm. the characteristic angulation, at the junction of the descending branches 

* Visible only under a high-power microscopic objective. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 372.) 


THE BRACHIOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 151 


with the transverse band, has appeared, but the loop is still unconnected. The cardinal 
process is well developed and very rugose. The deltidial plates are joined at their 
posterior extremities, thus defining the peduncular opening, which is round. At this 
stage the shell has increased considerably in thickness, being quite opaque in the older 
portions. Its shape is essentially the same as in the adult examples. 

Some difference of opinion appears to exist amongst scientific observers as to the 
specific identification of this southern form. 

Frscuer and OkHLERT (1893), in their report on the brachiopods of Cape Horn, 
figure a number of specimens under the name of Liothyrina moseleyi, Dav., a species 
originally met with at Kerguelen by the Challenger Expedition. BLocHMaNn (1906), 
however, having received one of FiscHER and OEHLERT’S specimens from the Paris 
Museum, refers the Cape Horn shells to LZ. wa, an identification upon which Dati 
(1908) throws some doubt, basing his argument chiefly upon differences in temperature. 
He points out that the type specimen of L. uva, from the Gulf of Tehuantepec, came 
from water of a high temperature, probably about 65° F., whereas the examples from 
Cape Horn came from much colder water, viz. between 42°:8—44°'4 F. 

BLocHMANN, in his later paper (1912), satisfactorily dismisses this argument by 
calling attention to the range of temperature in other well-known species of brachiopods. 

In this excellent memoir BLocHMANN also clearly proves, from a careful examination 
of original examples from Kerguelen and from the Magellanic region, that FiscHer and 
OEHLERT’S specimens cannot be referred to ZL. .moseleyi on account of important 
differences in the brachial support and in the composition and arrangement of the 
spiculz. He considers their specimens to be undoubtedly referable to L. woa, to which 
species he also unhesitatingly refers the Burdwood Bank examples obtained by the 
Scotia and Swedish South-Polar Expeditions. 

The geographical distribution of L. wa has recently been worked out by the same 
authority (BLOcCHMANN, 1908 and 1912) with the greatest care. 

The original example, upon which Broperip founded the species, was obtained in the 
rulf of Tehuantepec attached to a dead valve of Meleagrina margaritifera, at a depth 
of 10-12 fathoms. 

The type specimen formerly in the Cuming collection is now in the British Museum. 
This specimen is somewhat abnormally developed, as will be seen by Davipson’s figure 
(Recent Brach., pl. ui. figs. 5-56). In the same work (pl. i. figs. 6—6b) Davipson 
also figures another more normal example from the same place. 

In his report on the Brachiopoda of the Challenger Expedition, Davipson refers 
to further discoveries of this species as follows :—One dead example (“ Chall.” Rept., 
pl. 1. figs. 3-3b) trawled in 120 fathoms off Twofold Bay, South-East Australia. A 
second example (“‘ Chall.” Rept., pl. ii. figs. 4-4a), obtained off Buenos Ayres, at a depth 
of 600 fathoms ; bottom temperature, 2°°7 C. A third specimen, or rather two fragments 
of a dead shell, dredged off Heard Island, near Kerguelen,* in 150 fathoms; bottom 

* Not Heard Island, east of Magellan Straits, as given by OFHLER® (1907, 1908). 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 373.) 


152 J. WILFRID JACKSON ON 


temperature 1°°8 C. Davipson further states that “in the British Museum there 
are likewise some white specimens stated to have been dredged near the Falkland 
Islands.” 

With regard to the Twofold Bay example, BLocuMann (1906, 1908), from a study 
of the original specimen, states that it is clearly distinct from LZ. wva, and on the 
grounds of differences in the brachial support and the number of pores in the shells 
of both forms, considers it an entirely new species, to which’ he has given the name 
of L. fulva. 

Regarding the Buenos Ayres example, I am of the opinion that this also is a different 
species from ZL. uva. According to Davinson’s figure (“ Chall.” Rept., pl. ii. fig. 4) 
it differs widely in outline from that of the type specimen and the additional example 
figured by him from the Gulf of Tehuantepec (A. B., pl. u. figs. 5-6). The beak is less 
produced and less compressed laterally, and the foramen is smaller. Moreover, the 
depth (600 fathoms) from which the specimen came is greater than that at which 
L. uva is known with certainty to live. 

In the above respects the Buenos Ayres example also differs from any of the 
specimens illustrated by Fischer and OrHtERt (1892) and BLocuMaNN (1912) from the 
Magellanic region, in which the outline of the shell is more pyriform. 

OEHLERT (1907 and 1908), in his report on the brachiopoda of the French 
Antarctic Expedition, figures and describes under the name of LZ. wva some extra- 
ordinarily large examples obtained presumably from the West Antarctic. For some 
unexplained reason, no particulars are given in either of these papers as to the exact 
place of discovery or the depth from which the specimens came. 

The largest example measures: length, 45 ; breadth, 30; thickness, 25 mm. 

The species is further recorded for the coast of Guatemala, South Peru, and 
Galapagos by Dax (1909), but no further particulars are given. 

Recently BLocHMANN (1912) has described and figured some interesting forms from 
a depth of 122 fathoms at South Georgia (Swedish Expedition), which up to the present 
appears to be the limit of its eastern range. 

It would appear, therefore, that the species is widely distributed from Tehuantepec 
to Cape Horn, Falkland Islands, South Georgia, West Antarctic, and has crept north 
along the eastern coast of South America as far as Buenos Ayres, if the identification of 
this example is correct. 

In addition to the Twofold Bay record referred to above, the species has been further 
recorded from Australian waters. 

Hepiey (Mem. Aust. Mus., iv., 1902, p. 289) cites it from Coogee (49-50 fathoms) 
and Botany Bay (79-80 fathoms), both in the neighbourhood of Sydney. 

BLocHMANN (1912), however, from a study of one of I[EpLEy’s specimens, has been 
able to satisfactorily demonstrate that the reference in question is due to an error in 
identification, the specimen being referable to Terebratulina cancellata, Koch. 

It is possible also that the later record by Hepiny (Records Aust. Mus., vi., 1905, 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI, 374.) 


THE BRACHIOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. ] 


on 
vo 


p. 43) * of specimens of L. wea from 111 fathoms, East Cape Byron, Australia, may be 
founded on a similar error in determination. 


Liothyrina wa (Brod.), var. notorcadensis, nov.t (Pl. L. figs. 1-3.) 


Hab.—Station 325; lat. 60° 43’ 42” S., long. 44° 38’ 33” W. (Scotia Bay, South 
Orkneys). 6 fathoms. February 1, 1904. Sea bottom, sand. Temperature 32°°5 F. 

Obs.—At this station some remarkably large oval forms of a Lvothyrina were 
obtained in very shallow water. These, for reasons given below. and in order to call 
greater attention to them, I have ventured to describe under the above heading. 

Four specimens in all were obtained here, two large, one of medium size, and one 
very young. 

The measurements of these examples are as follows :— 


Length. Breadth. Thickness. 
No. 1 (dead) . : : . 39 28°5 25 mm. 
pane (Linke) : ; 6 22 Sie 
» 9 (dead) 21°5 16 a 
» 4 (dead) 2°75 2°5 


Examples Nos. 1, 2, and 3 are all very thick-shelled ; No. 4, being a juvenile, is 
almost transparent. 

Example No. 2, which was attached by means of its peduncle to the larger specimen 
(No. 1), is almost covered on its exterior with small coiled Serpulze and Polyzoa. The 
marginal portion exhibits curious radiating descending grooves. 

The largest specimen is very similar in general appearance to those obtained by 
the French Antarctic Expedition, figured by OrnLerT (op. crt., pl. i.). The shell is 
remarkably robust, and, judging from the crowding together of the growth-lines at the 
margins, it is evidently a very old (gerontic) individual (PI. I. fig. 1). 

The interior of the dorsal valve exhibits a very distinct median septum extending 
a third the length of the valve, as well as strongly marked muscular impressions. 
The brachial support is, unfortunately, somewhat broken (see PI. I. fig. 3), but sufficient 
remains for comparisons to be made with other forms. 

Outwardly this example presents the appearance of having been bored by an agency 
similar to Cliona or one of the perforating Polyzoa, as the surface of the shell is covered 
with branching vermiform groovings, some of which penetrate to the interior. 

The living example (No. 2), which was attached to the above, has provided material 
for the study of the general characters of the spiculze, etc., and I am much indebted 
to Dr F. Brocumann, to whom I submitted this and other examples, for his kindness 
in comparing these with the specimens obtained by the Swedish Expedition at South 
Georgia. 

* Not referred to by BLocuMaNN (1912). 
+ From the locality. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 375.) 


154 J. WILFRID JACKSON ON 


I have also to thank him for very generously sending me several preparations made 
from this specimen. 

Dr Biocumann considers the specimens from South Georgia and from South 
Orkneys to be referable to Z. wva, but points out certain peculiarities whereby they 
differ from typical examples from Burdwood Bank and elsewhere. 

From the microscope preparations it is seen that the spiculee are somewhat weaker 
in their development than is usual; the spicules penetrating into the bases of the 
cirri, too, are in most places not ordinarily developed. 

In the visceral membrane (dorsal and ventral) and in the spiral arms the spiculee 
are completely absent. They are also somewhat less developed than usual in the side 
arms, being confined to the anterior portion of the ventral side. 

The Scotia Bay examples, therefore, present a considerable difference in the form of 
the spicule when compared with the characters exhibited by the examples of L. wva 
figured by BLocHMANN (1912, pl. ii. figs. 16-18). 

In these latter, which come from the Falkland Islands, Magellan Straits, and Cape 
Horn, the spicule are normally developed in the visceral membrane, but in other 
particulars they conduct themselves as in the above-mentioned examples. 

Unfortunately my specimens arrived too late for Dr BLocHmann to study them 
before the publication of his recent report on the examples from South Georgia 
(Swedish Expedition). He has since, however, made a careful comparison of the forms 
from both localities, and reports that, as in the Scotia Bay examples, the spicules are 
also absent from the visceral membrane in those from South Georgia. Consequently, 
his remark that ‘‘the spicule exhibit no differences” (1912, p. 3), now requires 
modification. 

It would appear from this fact that we are possibly dealing here with an interesting 
geographic variant, if not with an entirely new species. The study of a larger number 
of examples, however, would be necessary before one could arrive at a definite conclusion 
as to whether the absence of spicule from the visceral membrane is a constant character 
or not. Hence it remains purely a matter of opinion whether this eastern form is to 
be regarded as a variety or as a distinct species. 

The brachial support presents the characteristics of L. wva (see fig. 3, and BLocH- 
MANN, 1912, pl. i. fig. 12); the outer appearance, too, agrees fairly well with this 
species, with the exception that the specimens are larger than usual and the character- 
istic fine radiating strive of L. wva are scarcely perceptible. 

The ditference in size in the Scotia Bay examples might, of course, be due to the 
very shallow depth (6 fathoms) from which these specimens came. The same 
argument does not apply, however, to the South Georgia examples, which were 
obtained in about 122 fathoms. 

Owing to the unfortunate omission of particulars relating to depth, ete., in 
OEHLERT’S reports (1907 and 1908) on the specimens obtained by the French 
Antaretie Expedition, whose area of research was off the western Antarctic continent, 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 376.) 


THE BRACHIOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 155 


south-west of the South Shetlands, the possibility of the large size being influenced by 
shallowness in depth cannot be determined. 

The specimens obtained by this Expedition are very oval in shape, like the Scotia 
Bay examples, and, as in the latter, they also possess a curious labiate prolongation of 


the foramen over the dorsal umbo (see fig. 1, and OEHLERT, 1908, pl. i.), which does 


, 
not appear to be present in the South Georgia examples or in normal specimens of 
L. uva from Burdwood Bank and neighbouring stations. 

The shells, too, possess a greater vertical diameter owing to the rotundity of their 
valves, and the angular appearance of the lateral margins, present in L. wva, is absent 
(compare BLocHMANN, 1912, pl. i.). 

To the above-mentioned differences must also be added an important variation in 
the composition of the shell-mosaic and the perforations of the test, based upon a study 
of the Scotia Bay examples. 

Here the number of pores per square millimetre in specimens Nos. 2 and 3 is 96 
to 128. These examples are, unfortunately, too opaque for a detailed study of the 
mosaic. 

An examination of different portions of both valves of the young example No. 4, 
shows a range from 88 to 128 pores per square millimetre. The shell-mosaic is here 
clearly visible and consists almost throughout of a well-developed imbricating structure, 
with scarcely any trace of the irregular character exhibited in young examples of 
L. uwva (2°75 and 5 mm. in length) from the Burdwood Bank material. The number 
of pores in the latter specimens ranges from 200 to 256 per square millimetre. 

It may be of some interest here to call attention to a number of fossil forms of 
Terebratulidee which have recently been described from the immediate neighbourhood 
of Graham Land, to the south-west of the South Orkneys. 

In the report on the Antarctic fossil Brachiopoda collected by the Swedish South 
Polar Expedition, Buckman (1910) describes, under the generic name of Terebratula, 
several very interesting forms, which appear to me to have some bearing on the recent 
species now inhabiting the neighbouring seas. 

Amongst the coarsely punctate series three forms are described, two of which are 
referred to previously described fossil species; the other, owing to its fragmentary 
character, is not specifically determined. 

One of these forms is referred by Buckman to Yerebratula bulbosa, Tate (a species 
met with in Australian Tertiary strata), with certain slight modifications in the 
description to suit the Antarctic specimens. 

Without a comparative study of the Australian and Antarctic forms it is impossible 
to say if this identification is correct or not, but it appears to me possible that the two 
forms are in no way related to each other. 

Buckman’s figure* (pl. iii. fig. 7), which is a restoration, and his revised 
description present, in my opinion, striking resemblances, so far as external appear- 

* The labiation of the foramen has been overlooked by the artist. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. 1RANS, VOL. XLVIU., 377.) 


156 J. WILFRID JACKSON ON 


ances are concerned, with the recent examples described above from South Orkneys. 
The shell-punctz and internal characters (the latter unfortunately unknown so far in 
the fossil form), may, however, prove them to be quite distinct. 

The fossil examples were obtained at Cockburn Island, off Graham Land, in strata 
referred by BuckMaN to Miocene-Oligocene age. 


Liothyrina blochmanm, n. sp. (PI. I. figs. 4-8.) 


Shell somewhat pear-shaped, longer than wide, reaching its greatest diameter 
towards the anterior margin. Sides of beak elongate, subrectilinear ; lateral margins 
convex, merging insensibly into the frontal border, which is rounded. Line of joining 
of valves somewhat flexuous. Valves swollen, without plication or sinus; the ventral 
slightly deeper than the dorsal. 

Surface smooth, with numerous very fine growth lines and traces of extremely fine 
radiating striee which appear to arise from the radial arrangement of the punctee.* 

Test very thin, glassy, and almost transparent; visibly punctate. Colour whitish. 

Shell-mosaic very clear and distinct ; regularly developed. Pores per square milli- 
metre = 60 to 80. 

Ventral valve with a short beak, incurved, truncated by a moderately large, circular, 
collared foramen, bounded below by two joined deltidial plates. Sides of the beak 
well rounded. In the interior, teeth small and placed in immediate contact with the 
basal angles of the deltidial plates. No dental plates. Umbonal cavity very deep. 
Internal surface completely smooth. Muscular impressions very weak. 

Dorsal valve very convex, with a linguloid nucleus. Interior smooth. Shght 
median septum extending from adductor muscular impressions almost to the apex of 
umbonal cavity, its total length being about a quarter the length of the valve. 
Muscular impressions clear but not deeply marked. Cardinal process small but quite 
distinct; flattened and transverse. Cardinal apophysis weak, composed of two 
divergent and flattened triangular plates, the external borders of which limit the 
dental sockets; the inner borders form the base of the crura. The brachial apparatus 
commences with short crura, which bear wide, triangular crural processes with their 
points directed somewhat ventrally. The descending limbs are remarkably parallel.t 
The transverse band is short but fairly broad, and is slightly indented in the middle 
portion ; point of junction with descending branches well rounded. 

Diin.—Size of the largest example (type) : length, 23 mm. ; breadth, 19 mm. ; thick- 
ness, 12°5 mm. 

Hab.—Station 417 ; lat. 71° 22’8., long. 16° 34’ W. (off Coats Land). Depth, 1410 
fathoms. March 18, 1904. Sea bottom, blue mud and stones. Temperature 29°°9 F. 

Obs.—Two almost perfect examples, together with a single dorsal valve and the 
hinge portion of another, were brought up by the trawl at this station. 


* This radiating striation can only be seen in a good light and when the shell is held at a certain angle. 
+ Recalling Davipson’s figure of L. sphenoidea in Recent Brachiopoda, pl. ii. fig. 18. 


(ROY. 80C. EDIN., TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 378.) 


THE BRACHIOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 157 


The well-preserved examples fortunately possessed the dried-up remains of the 
brachive and other parts of the animal, by means of which a study of the spicule has 
been made possible. 

These latter bodies are entirely absent in the cirri as well as in the visceral 
membrane. In the arms the spicule are very feebly developed and restricted to the 
hinder portion of the dorsal side. 

This species has some resemblance externally to some forms of the Magellanic 
Liothyrine referred to ZL. uva, but differs entirely from these in the extreme 
thinness of the adult shell, the smaller number of pores per square millimetre, and 
the difference in the form of the brachial support and the spiculze of the arms. 

Owing to the many differences existing between this form and other known 
Liothyrinze, I venture to describe it as an entirely new species, to which | have very 
great pleasure in attaching the name of Professor F. BLocumann, of Tiibingen, to whom 


all students of recent Brachiopoda are so much indebted. 


Macandrevia diamantina, Dall. (PI. IL. figs. 15-19.) 


Dall, 1895, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. xvii. p. 728, pl. xxx. fig. 5; pl. xxxil. figs. 3 and 6. 
1908, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harv. Coll., vol, xlin. p. 443. 


» 

Hob. station 417; lat. 71° 22’ S. long. 16° 34’ W. (off Coats Land), 1410 
fathoms. March 18, 1904. Sea bottom, blue mud and stones. Temperature 29°°9 F. 

Obs.—A fair number of living adult examples of this interesting species were 
brought up in the trawl at the above station. Along with these were a few dead 
examples, badly broken, and a quantity of small fragments which would point to the 
fact that a large number of specimens had been broken up by the numerous pebbles 


in the trawl net. 

All the living examples were closely attached by their peduncles to pebbles of 
granitoid and other rocks, the pebbles varying in size from that of a hazel-nut to that 
of a walnut (see Pl. II. fig. 15). Some of the pebbles, especially the smaller ones, are 
worn almost round, while others are somewhat angular. However large the size of 
the pebbles, only one example of this species was observed on each. In several 
instances tubes of Serpule are present on both valves. 

The specimens are very uniform in size and show no appreciable variation in shape. 


Sizes of some of the specimens :-— 


Length. Breadth. Depth. 
18:5 16 9-5 mm. 
19 17 8-5 
19-5 16 9°5 
20 175 
20°5 155 10 


[ am quite unable to separate the Antarctic form from Dauu’s species, as it agrees 
word for word with his description (op. cit., p. 723). 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL., 379.) 


158 J. WILFRID JACKSON ON 


Dat however, gives no particulars of the shell-mosaic and the number of pores per 
square millimetre. Through his generosity in lending me the pedicle valve of his type 
specimen I have been enabled to study these points and make comparisons with the 
Antarctic form. 

Datu’s type shows 104 to 112 punctze per square millimetre. In the ‘‘ Coats Land” 
adult examples these range from 92 to 110, with an average of 99. 

Other known species: M. cranium, Miill.,=188 to 272 (adults 192 to 216); M. 
vanhdffent, Bloch., = 120-132. 

‘he shell-mosaic in both forms is practically identical, and consists of the usual 
overlapping scale-like structure. 

Several of the specimens exhibit very clearly the vascular sinuses in the pallium. 

In the dorsal valve there are two; these curve round the adductor muscular 
impressions and then diverge widely from each other, ceasing some little distance from 
the lateral margins of the valve. In the specimen examined these sinuses do not appear 
to bear any ramifications. 

In the ventral valve there are four sinuses; the two median ones almost straight, 
slightly diverging near their anterior extremities, somewhat broad posteriorly and 
narrowing gradually towards the anterior, where they end abruptly without ramifica- 
tions. These terminate some little distance from the anterior margin of the valve. 
The two lateral sinuses are slightly arched and send off four or five ramifications on 
their exterior sides, two or three of which again subdivide near the extreme lateral edge 
of the valve. These two sinuses are connected with the two median ones at a point about 
a quarter the length of the valve, whence they diverge. 

Compared with the pallial sinuses of Terebratella dorsata, those of the ventral 
valve of M. diamantina present a striking resemblance to the illustrations given by 
FiscHER and OxHLEeRT (1892), more especially fig. 28 of plate x. They are quite 
distinet from those of Magellania venosa depicted by these authors (loc. cit., pl. xii. 
figs. 5 and 15). 

(Note.—The dorsal and ventral valves referred to above are not of the same 
individual. ) 

As previously mentioned, the examples brought up by the trawl at this station 
were in an adult condition; they all exhibit the final development of the brachial 
support, which is figured for the first time in this report (Pl. I. fig. 16). 

In some samples, however, of deposit (No. 38) brought up later from the same 
depth and station, | was pleased to find two examples of this species which exhibit 
interesting stages in the development of this organ. 

The smallest specimen measures (dorsal valve): length, 4 mm.; breadth, 4 mm., 
and shows the loop in its platidiform stage (PI. Il. fig. 17). It here consists of two 
descending branches, which converge towards the centre of the valve, where they 
become attached to a laterally compressed tube-like septal pillar possessing a few spinous 
processes on its anterior edge. This stage agrees almost exactly with the figure of the 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIIL, 380.) 


THE BRACHIOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 159 


same stages depicted by Friete in the ontogeny of the type species, M. craniwm 
(FRrIELE, 1877, pl. i. figs. 2-25), the only point of difference being in the possession of 
a less number of spinules on the septal pillar. 

The number of pores per square millimetre in this specimen ranges from 120 to 124. 
The scale-like structure of the shell-mosaic is very clear. 

The second specimen from the same deposit, though slightly damaged, is interest- 
ing as showing a very advanced terebratelliform (or pre-adult) stage (PI. II. fig. 18). 
The dorsal valve of this example measures: length, 8°75 mm. ; breadth, 8°5 mm., and 
shows the final development of the loop almost achieved. The descending branches are 
broad, and possess two internal triangular apophyses indicating the position oecupied by 
the transverse (jugal) band attached to the septum in the terebratelliform stage ; also 
very prominent spinules at the recurvation. The stage of this specimen is almost 
equivalent to that of M. cranium figured by Frigte (1877, pl. ii. fig. 10) and 
BEECHER (1895, pl. ii. fig. 1: 1901, pl. xxiv. fig. 1). 

The descending lamellx are supported at their origin by vertical, slightly converging, 
crural plates ; no cardinal process is yet present. 

The median septum is only very slightly visible and takes its rise immediately below 
the apex of the valve, whence it runs a distance of half the length of the valve and 
then ceases midway between the transverse band and the point of recurvation of 
the loop. 

In none of the fully adult specimens of M. diamantina which I have examined is 
there any trace of the connecting bands on the descending branches, though the spinules 
at the recurvation are still apparent but much reduced. The median septum, which is 
only feebly developed, is also much reduced in length and confined to the umbonal 
region, where it supports the rather prominent cardinal process. On either side are two 
short parallel median septa supporting the convergent, but not united, crural plates. 

The ventral valve of the above specimen (length, 10 mm.) shows a large foramen 
with rudimentary deltidial plates, beneath the anterior angles of which are the two 
rather prominent teeth. 

On the exterior of both valves several conspicuous growth-halts are visible; the 
shell-punctee = 112 per square millimetre (middle of the ventral valve). 

Though the material at my disposal is so scanty, it does not seem improbable 
that, judging from the stages just described, the intermediate phases in the meta- 
morphosis of the loop will show considerable similarity to those described by FRIELE 
in M. cranium. 

The correct relationship of M. diamantina with the sub-family Dallininz, a group 
so characteristic of the northern hemisphere, is thus clearly established by the trans- 
formations undergone by the brachial support. 

This fact, which is, I believe, the first recorded instance of the ‘ Dallinoid ” type of 
development in austral waters, is of great importance, as it has hitherto been considered 
that the two phyla, of common origin, of the section Terebratella, 2.e. the sub-families 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 381.) 


160 J. WILFRID JACKSON ON 


Dallininse and Magellanine, were geographically separated into two provinces, one 
(Dallininee) being restricted to boreal, the other (Magellaninze) to austral seas 
(Scuucuert, in Zittel, 1900, p. 329). 

It can now be shown that the sub-family Dallinine is well represented in the 
austral region. 

This discovery is of still further interest as being highly confirmatory of Dat.’s 
observations when first describing this and two other species of Macandrevia from the 
Gulf of Panama (Da.1, 1895, p. 721). 

He remarks: ‘ As regards the partly austral species about to be described, since 
there is no means of deciding whether their development agrees with those forms refer- 
able to Magellaninze or not, and as the adult shells exhibit no characters which could 
not be regarded as diagnostic of a genus different from Hucdesia,* I feel obliged for the 
present to refer them to that group. It may be observed that there is nothing to 
prevent the free migration of northern forms into the South Pacific along the coast of the 
Americas. The writer has already the evidence to show that several species, in deep 
water, do extend from Bering Sea south to the vicinity of the Galapagos Islands and, 
in the case of one species, Solemya johnsoni, Dall, more than a thousand miles further 
south ; with the known great range of many brachiopods, there would be no apparent 
reason why species of the Panamic region, for instance, belonging to the northern type 
of development, should not extend their range southward, if opportunity arose. I 
regard it then as quite likely that the species I refer to may be Macandrevian in their 
development as well as in their adult state, though, for the mass of characteristically 
austral species, the reverse might be the case.” 

The prescience of this eminent American author has thus been amply justified. 

Macandrevia diamantina was originally described from two specimens obtained in 
deep water, 1175 fathoms, mud, Gulf of Panama; bottom temperature 36°°8 F., and 
was again met with later in 2222 fathoms, mud, off Sechura Point, Northern Peru ; 
temperature 35°'2 F. 

The discovery, therefore, of this species in deep and cold water off the coast of the 
Antaretic continent is highly interesting as showing a very considerable range 
southward. 

Furthermore, it forms a connecting link in the distribution of the genus Macan- 
drevia, which now ranges from the North Atlantic (. cranium), Davis Strait 
(M. tenera), via the Gulf of Panama (three species, viz. M. americana, M. craniella, 
and M. diamuntina), Peru (M. diamantina), West Patagonian coast (J/. americana), 
Coats Land (W/. diamantina), to Kaiser Wilhelmland II., Antarctica (M/Z. vanhoffent). 

Though the distance between the recorded stations for M. diamantina appears to be 
so great, it is not at all improbable that it will ultimately be met with in other 
stations off the long South American coast as further dredgings are carried out in that 
area. Macandrevia americana, one of the Panamic species, has already been found 

* Daw regarded Macandrevia as a sub-genus of Hudesia. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 382.) 


THE BRACHIOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 161 


on the West Patagonian coast; while Liothyrina uva also extends from the Gulf of 
Panama to the Antarctic. 

As a similar, and, in fact, parallel instance of wide distribution in another group of 
animals, I might mention the case of Dentaliwm megathyris, Dall (=D. shoplandi, 
M. and 8., non Jouss.). 

This interesting scaphopod was dredged along with another new species 
(D. eupatrides, M. and §.) at the same station and depth (Coats Land, 1410 fathoms). 
It has been met with in deep water at several stations on the western coast of Central 
and South America, viz. off Chiloe Island, and South-East Chili, in 1050 and 1342 
fathoms ; near Galapagos Island in 812 fathoms; off Ecuador in 1740 fathoms; Gulf of 
Panama, south-west of Tehuantepec, in 2282 fathoms; off Mazatlan in 995 fathoms. 


Terebratella dorsata (Gmelin). (Pl. IL. figs. 11-13.) 


Anomia dorsata, Gmelin, 1788, Syst. nat., ed. xiii., p. 3348. 
Terebratella dorsata (Gmelin), 1887, Davidson, Mon. Recent. Brach., p. 75, pl. xiv. figs. 9-11, 13-19 
(fig. 12 looks like a young Magellania venosa). 


5 5 1889, Dall, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. xii. p, 231. 

5 5 1892, Fischer and Oehlert, Bul. Soe. @hist. nat. Autun, vol. v. p. 272, 
pl. ix., x., xi., figs, 1-6. 

-, es 1908, Dall, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll, xliii. p. 444. 

9 3 1909, Dall, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. xxxvii. p. 279. 

A 95 1912, Blochmann, Die Brach. der Schwed. S.-P. Expedition, Bd. vi. 


(Zoologie ii.), No. 7, Stockholm, p. 11. 


Hab.—Station 346; lat. 54° 25’ §S., long. 57° 32’ W. (Burdwood Bank), 
56 fathoms. December 1, 1903. Sea bottom, Bryozoa. Temperature 41°°8 F. 

Obs.— Dead examples only of this well-known Magellanic species were obtained at 
the above station. These consist, in most cases, of fairly perfect specimens ; in others, 
of loose valves only. Allare quite white in colour. 

The examples, for the most part, are representative of adult individuals, and are 
interesting as exhibiting a considerable amount of variation, both in shape and size. 
The smallest fully-adult example measures: length, 22 mm; breadth, 23 mm.; the 
largest adult is: length, 38 mm. ; breadth, 36 mm. 

Several of the specimens differ from the typical transverse form in being almost 
round, and one example is curious in presenting quite an elongate appearance, calling 
to mind the well-known Australian species, Magellania flavescens (Pl. IL. fig. 13). 

The beak is largely produced, recurved, as is usual, and truncated by a relatively 
large foramen. One side of the specimen is somewhat distorted in growth, giving the 
shell an asymmetrical appearance. The size of this specimen is: length, 25 mm. ; 
breadth, 18°5 mm. ; thickness, 12°5 mm. 

In all the examples obtained the test is remarkably thick and, consequently, quite 
opaque. ‘The radiating ribs on the surface, which in most examples are also visible in 
a reversed order in the interior, differ very largely in the various individuals, some 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 383.) 


162 J. WILFRID JACKSON ON 


possessing fine, and others coarse, ribbing. In some cases the ribbing is almost 
entirely obsolete, even in adult examples, a feature already noted by Fiscuer and 
OEHLERT, and described and figured by them as var. submutica (1892, p. 279, pl. xi. 
figs. 5-6). 

Internally the specimens present many interesting features. In some examples 
indications of senile conditions are very apparent. The teeth of the ventral valve 
show considerable enlargement, the muscular impressions are remarkably deep, and the 
peduncular passage is considerably narrowed by thick deposits of calcareous matter on 
either side, forming a deep and narrow channel. ‘The foramen is reduced to a very 
small size (Pl. II. fig. 11). 

In no case, however, are the deltidial plates absorbed, as is often the case during 
senile decay. 

In the dorsal valve similar conditions are to be seen. Here the cardinal process is 
of notable size and the brachial support of extreme tenuity. (See FiscuER and OEHLERT, 
1892, pl. ix. fig. 6). 

Similar evidences of senility are present externally in the thickening of the lateral 
and frontal margins and the crowding together of the growth lines (PI. II. fig. 12). 
(See also FiscHER and OEHLERT, 1892, pl. ix. figs. 3-4.) 

The various young examples of this species, obtained mostly from the tests of 
Cephalodiscus, range in size from 1 to 6 mm. and show an interesting series of orowth- 
stages in the brachial support. This feature has already been very ably described by 
FiscHER and OErHLERt (1892), and as the above specimens exhibit no important points 
of difference, it will not be necessary to deal with them again here. 

Terebratella dorsata appears to be restricted to the immediate neighbourhood of 
South America. It is an abundant species in the Magellan Straits, the littoral of Tierra 
del Fuego, and Falkland Islands. On the east coast of Patagonia it does not appear 
to range further north than latitude 52° 8. (near Cape Virgins) and the Falkland 
Islands. On the West Patagonian coast it seems to possess a more considerable 
extension, having been recorded from Valparaiso and Coquimbo, Chili. 

A more distant locality has been recorded for this species by Davipson (‘‘ Chall.” 
Report, p. 44), viz. Royal Sound, Kerguelen, but BuocuMann (1906), from a study of 
the original examples, has shown this record to be erroneous, the specimens in question 
being an entirely new species, Terebratella enzenspergeri, Blochmann. 

The bathymetric range of 7. dorsata, according to recent authorities, is from about 
5 to 120 fathoms. 

In the report on the fossil Brachiopoda of the Swedish 8.-P. Expedition, Buckman 
(1910) has described a new species of Magasella (M. antarctica) which appears to 
me to present certain definite resemblances to Terebratella dorsata (Gmelin). 

The fossil species, which comes from the Glauconitic Bank formation (Pleistocene) 
at Cockburn Island, off Graham Land, West Antarctic, is described and figured by 
Buckman (1910, p. 18, pl. i. figs. 17-17d), with the remark that Terebratella 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 384.) 


THE BRACHIOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 1638 


rubicunda * is possibly its nearest ally, but, owing to the strongly developed septum, 
its place in the genus Zerebratella is precluded, and therefore it might possibly be 
described as the magaselliform ancestor of 7. rubicunda. 

In my opinion, judging from Buckan’s figure, the original of which would appear 
to be partly a cast, this form is more closely allied to one or other of the numerous 
variations of the polymorphic 7. dorsata. 

If comparisons be made with 7. dorsata, var. submutica, F. and O. (op. cit., 
p. 279, pl. xi. figs. 1-6), a very striking resemblance is noticeable. In this variety 
the radiating sculpture is almost absent, and the appearance of the shell is less 
transverse than in the typical form. 

It might be argued, however, that the deltidial plates in these specimens are fully 
developed, thus denoting an adult condition, but in examples of this form from 
Burdwood Bank there are specimens which show the deltidial plates only partially 
developed, and, as is usual in 7. dorsata, the radiating ribs of the exterior are visible 
also on the interior of the valves and would thus be impressed upon a fossil cast of 
this species. 

To my mind it would be much more reasonable to refer the Cockburn Island fossil 
to a magaselliform stage of Terebratella dorsata, and more especially to the var. 
submutica, F. and O., than to go so far away as New Zealand for a comparison. 

According to FiscHer and OEHLeRT (1892), 7. dorsata is not cited among the 
fossils of Patagonia by d’Orsiany, Darwin, and Sowersy, but on the contrary is given 
by Hurron (1873) and Hrcror (1886) for the New Zealand Tertiaries (Lower Miocene- 
Aburiri formation) from Cape Rodney, Auckland, N. Island, associated with the 
recent Fhynchonella nigricans, Sow. 

This reference, if authentic, is of considerable importance as indicating significant 
climatic changes during the deposition of these beds. 

One feels disposed, however, in the light of present knowledge, to question the 
correct identification of the New Zealand species, and to consider the possibilities of 
the form in question being referable to the well-known and variable 7. cruenta or a 
probable ancestor of that species. 


Terebratella sp. (Pl. IL. fig. 10.) 
Hab.—Station 346; lat. 54° 25’ S., long. 57° 32’ W. (Burdwood Bank), 56 
fathoms. December 1, 1903. Sea bottom, Bryozoa. Temperature 41°°8 F. 
Obs.—Amongst the smaller specimens of Brachiopoda from this station are one or 
two examples whose generic and specific positions are somewhat doubtful. 
The two largest and most perfect of these questionable forms measure :— 


Length. Breadth. Thickness. 
No. 1 . ” » W3:25 10°5 6°75 mm, 
9 16 14 8-5 


* A New Zealand recent species. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 385.) 


164 J. WILFRID JACKSON ON 


Both specimens (PI. II. fig. 10) exhibit a terebratelliform condition in the 
brachial support. The descending branches, which extend two-thirds the length of 
the valve, are very thin and are attached to the median septum by a slender jugal 
band nearly at right angles with the descending branches. 

The ascending branches follow much the same course as those below, and are united 
by means of a short transverse band which is slightly inflected in its median portion.* 

The crural points are very short and not turned inwards towards each other, as in 
Magellania venosa and Terebratella dorsata, but are directed upwards in the direction 
of the ventral valve. The jugal band is situated about the middle of the length of the 
loop, and is fixed to the terminal part of the septum ; it is quite as slender as the other 
portions of the apparatus. 

It would appear from certain indications on the descending branches that the 
metamorphosis of the loop is still uncompleted, as the inside edges of these, at their 
junction with the jugal band, exhibit traces of an oblique suture, a feature hitherto not 
observed in adult Terebratella dorsata. 

The umbonal cavity of this valve is oceupied by a well-developed cardinal plateau 
fixed to the bottom of the valve, and depressed longitudinally in its median part in the 
form of a trough, from the anterior end of which extends a thin-edged median septum. 
The posterior extremity of the plateau carries a well-developed transverse cardinal pro- 
cess ; the lateral parts form two somewhat triangular plates bordering the dental sockets. 

Externally the shell is of an oval form, longer than broad, attaining its maximum 
diameter about the middle of the valves (Pl. II. fig. 10). Line of joining slightly 
flexuous at the frontal and lateral margins. Valves swollen, the ventral being deeper 
than the dorsal. Surface roughened by numerous well-pronounced growth-lines, which 
are close set. Specimen No. 2 exhibits very numerous close-set growth-lines at the 
margins similar to those seen in specimens which have attained a senile condition. 

The test is very solid and opaque. Beak of ventral valve moderately produced, 
incurved, and truncated by a large foramen, with rudimentary deltidial plates. Sides 
of the beak carinated, forming a flattened area below the foramen. The test is covered 
with very numerous perforations, but owing to the difficulty in lighting I have been 
unable to count them satisfactorily under the microscope. 

Owing to the want of further material the exact identification of this interesting 
form is extremely difficult. It can scarcely be regarded as a terebratelliform stage 
of Magellania venosa, as at this stage in its ontogeny the latter species is much 
more transverse and the branches of the loop broader (see especially FiscHer and 
OEHLERT, 1892, pl. xi. fig. 8). 

Neither can it be looked upon as a small adult Terebratella dorsata, on account of 
the entire absence of the characteristic surface sculpture of that species, as well as the 
distinct difference in shape and the discordance in the composition of the brachial 
support. 

* These are broken off in photograph. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 386.) 


THE BRACHIOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 165 


BLocHMANN (1912) has referred to one of these specimens in dealing with a 
probably new species of Wagellania obtained by the Swedish South-Polar Expedition 
at the same locality (Burdwood Bank), and remarks on its correspondence with his 
described example, with the exception that whereas the Scotva specimen possesses 
a distinctly pronounced angulation of the beak, his Magellania specimen exhibits no 
such character, the sides of the beak being well-rounded, without any indication of 
an angle, 

From the thickness of the test he is inclined to regard the form as a possibly new 
Terebratella. 


Magellania venosa (Solander). 


Anomia venosa, Solander, 1788, Dixon's Voy., p. 355, pl. xi. 
Waldheimia venosa (Sol.), 1886, Davidson, Mon. Recent Brach., p. 49, pl. viii. figs. 1-4; 
pl. ix. fig. 1. 
Eudesia venosa (Sol.) 1889, Dall, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. vol. xii. p. 231. 
Magellania venosa (Sol.), 1892, Fischer and Oehlert, Bull. Soc. Whist, nat. Autun, vol. v. 
p. 312, pl. xi. figs. 7-16 ; pl. xu. figs. 1-17. 
5 rs 1909, Dall, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. xxxvii. p. 279. 
FA 7) 1912, Blochmann, Die Brach. der Schwed. S.-P. Exped., Bd. vi. 
(Zoologie ii.), No. 7, Stockholm, p. 9. 


Hab.—Station 346 ; lat. 54° 25’S., long. 57° 32’ W. (Burdwood Bank), 56 fathoms. 
December 1, 1903. Sea bottom, Bryozoa. Temperature 41°°8 F. 

Obs.—Amongst the young examples obtained from Cephalodiscus dredged at this 
station are several which appear to be referable to the above species. One or two of 
these examples are less than 3 mm. in length. 

One specimen, which measures 4 mm., shows 256 punctee per square millimetre ; 
another, 6 mm. long, shows a range from 240 to 256 puncte, both examinations being 
made about the middle of the ventral valve. 

In U. venosa, according to BLocHMANN (1912), the perforations per square millimetre 
range from 240 to 280. 

The various specimens are interesting as showing some of the very early stages in 
the development of the brachial support of this species, which were first made known 
through the admirable work of Fischer and OEHLERT (1892). 

The geographical range of M. venosa is very much the same as that of Terebratella 
dorsata, with which it is often accompanied. 

It has been met with abundantly by many expeditions in the neighbourhood 
of Tierra del Fuego (35 to 80 fathoms); Magellan Straits (7 to 20 fathoms), and 
Falkland Islands, where the largest specimens, so far known, were obtained by Rear- 
Admiral Sunivan in 1848, near Fort William, in 6 to 7 fathoms (see pl. vill. 
figs. 2 to 2c, Davipson, Rec. Brach.). 

The species is recorded also from the west coast of Patagonia (from 1 to 30 fathoms) 
and from Coquimbo, Chili. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 387.) 


166 J. WILFRID JACKSON ON 


Full particulars, up to 1892, of the various recorded stations, will be found in 
Fiscuer and Oraiert’s memoir on the Brachiopodes du Cap Horn (1892), where 
also is given the most complete description of the species. 

One citation, however, calls for special remark. 

Like Zerebratella dorsata, this species has also been recorded from Kerguelen. 

E. A. Smiru (1879) mentions Waldheimia dilatata, Lam. (a synonym of MM. venosa, 
Sol.), as having been obtained at Observatory Bay, Kerguelen, on rocks at 4 fathoms. 

Davipson (R. B., p. 52), however, remarks that the Challenger did not bring back a 
single specimen of SoLANDER’S species. 

Without an examination of the original specimens it is impossible to say whether 
these are rightly referred to M. venosa, but I am disposed to doubt the correct 
determination, in the light of recent research on the Brachiopoda of both regions. As 
BLocHMANN (1906) has shown, the specimens formerly recorded from Kerguelen as 
Terebratella dorsata have proved to belong to a new species, viz. 7. enzenspergerv, Bl. 
It does not seem unlikely, therefore, that the Magellanize in question may likewise 
have been erroneously referred to the characteristic Magellanic species. 

With regard to the fossil distribution of this species, little appears to be known. 

Pitspry (1898, p. 329), in a reference to a collection of Tertiary fossils from Cape 
Fairweather, Patagonia, remarks that J/. venosa (Sol.) is abundant. 

According to ORTMANN (1902), however, this identification is incorrect, the species 
in question being named by this author Terebratella gigantea. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 


Beecuer, C. E., 1895. Trans. Conn. Acad. Sct., vol. ix. pt. ii. 
4 1901. Studies in Evolution. New York and London, 
Brocumann, F., 1906. “Neue Brachiopoden der Valdivia- und Gaussexpedition,” Zool. Anz. Bd. xxx, 
pp. 690-702, figs. 1-3. 


A; 1908. “Zur Systematik und Geographischen Verbreitung der Brachiopoden,” Zeits. f. 
wiss. Zool., Bd. xe. p. 596-644, pl. xxxvi.—xl., text-figs. 
“5 1912. “Die Brachiopoden der Schwed. Siidpolarexped., 1901-1903,” Wiss. Ergebn. 


Schwed. S.-P, Eaped., Band vi. No. 7. Stockholm. 
Buckman, S. 8., 1910. ‘‘Antare, foss. Brachiopoda collected by the Swedish South Polar Expedition, 


1901-1903,” Wiss. Ergebn. Schwed. S.-P. Exped., Band iti. No. 7. Stockholm. 
Daun, W. H., 1889. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. xii. p. 231. 


3 1895. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. xvii. 
3 1908. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, vol. xliii. 
a 1909. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. xxxvil. 


Davinson, THos., 1880. Report on the Brachiopoda dredged by H.M.S. “ Challenger” during the years 
1573-1876; Zoology, vol. i. London. 
Fe 1886-1888. ‘A Monograph of Recent Brachiopoda,” Trans. Linnean Soc. London, 
Zoology (2), vol. iv. 
Destonecuames, E., 1884. “Etudes critiques sur les Brachiopodes nouveaux ou peu connus,” Bull. Soc. 
Linn. de Normandie (3rd ser.), vol. viii. (1883-4), pp. 190-195, pl. v. figs. 8-12. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 388.) 


THE BRACHIOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 167 


Ercuter, Paur, 1911. Die Brachiopoden der Deutsch. S.-P. Exped., 1901-1908, xii., Zool. iv. Berlin. 
Fiscuer, P., and Orutert, D. P., 1891, Expéd. Scient. du “ Travailleur » of du “ Talisman,” 1880-18588, 
Brachiopodes. Paris. 
2 e. 1892. “Mission Scient. du Cap Horn, 1882-1883,” Bull. Soc. Vhist. nat. 
@ Autun, vol. vy. Autun. 
Friexe, H., 1877. ‘The Development of the Skeleton in the Genus Waldheimia,” Archiv for Math. og 
Natur., Bd. xxiii. pp. 380-386, pl. i.—vi. 
Goutp, A. A., 1852. Mollusca and Shells of the U.S. Exploring Expedition, 1838-1842. 
Hecror, J., 1886. Indian and Colonial Exhibition, London, 1886: Detailed Catal. and Guide to the 
Geolog. Exhibition, p. 11. 
Hurron, F. W., 1873. Catalogue of the Tertiary Mollusca and Echinodermata of New Zealand in the 
Collection of the Colonial Museum, p. 36. 
Jounin, L., 1901. Résultats du Voyage du s.y. ‘ Belgica,” 1897-1899. Zool.: Brachiopodes. Anvers. 
Kine, W., 1868. Proc. Nat. Hist. Soe. Dublin, vol. v. p. 170. 
Mors, E. S., 1902.‘ Observations on living Brachiopoda,” Mem, Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. v. No. 8. 
Murray, Jonn, 1897. ‘On the deep- and shallow-water Marine Fauna of the Kerguelen Region, ete.,” 
Trans, Roy. Soc. Edin., vol. xxxviil. 
Oxnuert, D. P., 1887. ‘“ Brachiopoda” in P. Fischer, Munuel de Conchyliologie. Paris. 


a 1907. Bull. Mus. d’hist. nat. Paris (1906), vol. xii. 
; 1908. Haxpédition Antarctique Francaise, 1903-1905. Sciences naturelles: Brachiopodes, 
Paris. 


Ortmann, A. E., 1902. Rep. Princetown Univ. Exped. Patagonia. iv. Palwontology. 
Pispry, H. A., 1898. “* Patagonian Tertiary Fossils,” Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia for 1897, 


p. 329. 
Sonucuert, C., 1900. “ Brachiopoda” in Zittel, Teat-Book of Palxontology, vol. i., translated by Eastman. * 
5 1911. “ Paleogeographic and Geologic Significance of Recent Brachiopoda,” Bull. Geol. Soc. 


America, vol. xxii. pp. 258-275. 
Smitn, E. A., 1879. “Transit of Venus Expedition, 1874-1875. Zoology : Brachiopoda,” Phil. Trans. Roy. 
Soe. Lond., vol. elxviii. (extra vol.), p. 192. 


Be 1881. “Zoolog. Collection made during the Survey of H.M.S. Alert; iv., Mollusca and 
Molluscoida,” Proc. Zool. Soc. London. 

3 1907. National Antarctic Expedition (“ Discovery”) 1901-1904. Zoology. ii. Brachiopoda. 
London. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES 


Puate I. 


Figs. 1-3. Liothyrina uva (Brod.), var. notorcadensis nov.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys ; 9-10 fathoms. 

Fig. 1. Dorsal view showing labiate prolongation of foramen over dorsal umbo ; also vermiform groovings 
caused by Cliona or perforating Polyzoa. Slightly above natural size. 

Fig. 2. Side view of same example. 

Fig. 3. Interior views of both valves of same example as fig. 1, showing brachial support (broken) and 
position of teeth. 

Figs. 4-8. Liothyrina blochmanni, n, sp.—Station 417, off Coats Land ; 1410 fathoms. 

Fig. 4. Dorsal view of type-specimen. x 14. 

Fig. 5. Side view of same example. x 14. 


Fig. 6. Interior views of both valves of same example, showing the weak character of the brachial support, 
also position of teeth. x 1}. 


* According to BuckMAN (1910), 1896 is date of off-print, 1900 date of volume. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL, 389.) 


168 THE BRACHIOPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


Fig. 7. Front view of same example. x 1}. 

Fig, 8. Shell-mosaie, ete., of another example. x 175. 

Fig. 9, Liothyrina uva (Brod.).—Burdwood Bank, south of Falkland Islands; 56 fathoms, Interior 
views of both valves, showing brachial support and median septum in dorsal and pallial sinuses in ventral 


valve. x 14. 


Puate II. 


Fig. 10. Terebratella sp.—Burdwood Bank, south of Falkland Islands; 56 fathoms. Interior views 
showing terebratelliform stage of loop, ete. x12. (The ascending branches, unfortunately, broke away 
before photograph was taken.) 

Fig. 11. Verebratella dorsata (Gmelin).—Burdwood Bank, 56 fathoms. Interior view of fragment of 
ventral valve showing small size of the foramen, muscular impressions, etc. x 14. 

Fig. 12. Terebratella dorsata (Gmelin).—Burdwood Bank, 56 fathoms. Typical example showing shape 
and surface sculpture. Natural size. 

Fig. 13. Terebratella dorsata (Gmelin).—Burdwood Bank, 56 fathoms. Elongate variety showing 
produced beak, ete. x 14. 

Fig. 14. Hemithyris sp.—Station 417, off Coats Land, 1410 fathoms. Shell-mosaic, ventral valve. 
x 166 about, 

Figs. 15-19. Macandrevia diamantina, Dall.—Station 417, off Coats Land, 1410 fathoms. 

Fig. 15. Specimens attached to pebbles of granite rocks ; slightly larger than natural size. 

Fig. 16. Interior views of dorsal and ventral valves, showing adult loop, ete. x 12. 

Fig. 17. Platidiform stage of loop in example 4 mm. in length. x 12. 

Fig. 18. Pre-adult stage of loop in example 9 mm. in length. x 44. 

Fig. 19. She)l-mosaic, ete., from middle of ventral valve of an adult individual. x 175. 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 390.) 


Scor. Nat. Ant. Exp. Vol. VI. 


JACKSON: ‘‘ScoTiA” BrRACHIOPODA—PLATE I. 


Photo, J. W. Jackson 


Scor. Nat. Ant. Exp. Vol. VI. 


JACKSON: “Scotia” BrACHIOPODA—PLATE II. 


Photo, J. W. Jackson 


yew 


PART AOI. 
AMPHIPODA. 


ire tae POA OF THE SCOTTISH 
NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


By CHAS. CHILTON, M.A., D.Sc. (N.Z.), M.B., C.M. (Edin.), 
Hon. LL.D, (Aberd.), F.LS., 


Professor of Biology, Canterbury College, New Zealand, 


The Amphipoda of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. By Chas. 
Chilton, M.A., D.Sc. (N.Z.), M.B., C.M. (Edin.), Hon. LL.D. (Aberd.), F.L.S. ; 
Professor of Biology, Canterbury College, New Zealand. Communicated by 


Dr W. S. Brucr. (With Two Plates.) 


(MS. received March 30, 1912. Read June 17,1912. Issued separately September 21, 1912.) 


CONTENTS. 


: ae | PAGE 

I. Introduction . : 6 : ; : . 455 | LV. Tropical and North Atlantic Species . 514 
II. List of Species, with Distribution . 5 . 460 | V. Bibliography . ; > lly 
III. Antarctic and sub-Antarctic Species : . 462 | VI. Explanation of Plates . §20 


I. INTRODUCTION. 


Shortly after my arrival in Britain in December 1911 I was honoured by a request 
from Dr W. 8. Bruce, leader of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition, that I would 
prepare a report on the Amphipoda collected during the voyage of the Scotia. Dr 
E. J. ALLEN, Director of the Marine Laboratory, Plymouth, very kindly offered me 
accommodation in the laboratory for the work, and free access to the library of the 
laboratory, which, fortunately, is very well supplied with works on the Crustacea. I was 
assured also of assistance from Mr T. V. Honeson, the Curator of the Museum and 
Art Gallery, Plymouth, from Mrs E. W. Sexton, and from other friends ; and accord- 
ingly | undertook the work. I received the main portion of the collection, contained 
in sixty-three bottles, on the 8th January 1912, and a few days later I received from 
Dr W. M. Tarrersatt of the Manchester Museum eighteen tubes containing additional 
Amphipoda found among the Schizopoda of the Scottish National Expedition which 
had been submitted to him for determination; these additional specimens contained 
three or four species not represented in the collection first received. 

Twelve tubes of additional specimens from Dr Tarrersatt and many further 
specimens from the Scotia collection reached me in May. These consisted chiefly 
of duplicates of species previously sent, but contained also two species not previously 
seen. Some additions to the report, which had been sent in at the end of March, were 
therefore necessary. 

With very few exceptions, the Amphipoda proved to have been particularly well 
preserved, and the localities, depth, and other particulars had been in all cases carefully 
recorded, I have given full details of these, even at the risk of some slight repetition, 
as they may prove to be of use in helping to decide questions now unforeseen that may 
afterwards arise. In several cases, especially among the Lysianasside, large numbers 
of specimens of various sizes had been collected from each locality, and these complete 
sets have been of very great use in helping me to ascertain the changes that take place 
in some species during the growth of the animal, and in determining the differences 


(REPRINTED FROM THE TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF EDINBURGH, VOL, XLVIIL., pp. 455-520.) 


174 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


between the sexes. I regret that the time at my disposal has been too short to allow 
of the complete examination of these series of specimens. 

By far the greater part of the collection was made at the South Orkney Islands, 
mainly at Scotia Bay, Station 325, lat. 60° 43’S., long. 44° 38’ W., the winter quarters 
of the Scotia. This appears to be a good collecting-ground for Amphipoda, particu- 
larly, of course, for the Lysianassidee, and the forms obtained from this locality are 
extremely useful for comparison on the one hand with those obtained in 1882-83 by the 
German Transit of Venus Expedition from South Georgia, and on the other hand with 
the specimens collected by the French Antarctic Expedition from Port Charcot, Wandel 
Island, and other neighbouring localities. A few specimens were obtained from stations 
further south, at localities intermediate between Kerguelen Island and those already 
mentioned. Besides these, a small number of species was gathered at Gough Island, a 
locality from which very few Amphipoda had hitherto been described ; others at the 
Falkland Islands; and some were obtained at Cape Town and Saldanha Bay in South 
Africa, and help to show the relation of the Amphipoda of South Africa to those of the 
various sub-Antarctic lands. 

A few species were collected in the northern and tropical parts of the Atlantic on 
the voyage out and on the homeward voyage. As the greater part of the collection 
is from Antarctic and sub-Antarctic regions, I have kept these Atlantic species in a 
list by themselves, distinct from those gathered in the sub-Antarctic localities, under 
which I include Gough Island and South Africa. 

As I was able to consult the reports on the Amphipoda of some of the Antarctic 
Expeditions, and already had some acquaintance with several of the sub- Antarctic 
species, it seemed a favourable opportunity for endeavouring to compare the results 
as far as possible, and to determine cases where the same species had been described 
under different names by different authors. In this effort I have been greatly assisted 
by the kindness of many friends. Dr G. Prerrer and Dr O. Sremauaus of the 
Hamburg Museum very kindly placed at my disposal everything that I needed 
from the collections made at South Georgia by the German Expedition in 1882-83, and 
described by Dr Prerrer in 1888; Monsieur Epouarp CHEVREUX has sent me co-types 
of several of his species; from Mr A. O. Waker and from the British Museum I have 
had co-types of many of the species obtained by the Southern Cross and Discovery 
Expeditions, and described by Mr Waker; while the Rev. T. R. R. Sreppine and the 
authorities of the Vienna Museum have supplied still other specimens that have been 
extremely useful for comparison. Later on, when most of the work was completed, I 
was able, through the kindness of Dr W. T. Caiman, to check my results by comparison 
with types and other specimens in the British Museum. At the same time, I have been 
able to see the Amphipoda collected by Sir E. SHackLeton’s British Antarctic Expedi- 
tion in 1908-09, which had been placed in Mr Hopeson’s hands; and in several cases | 
have been able to compare the Scotia specimens with New Zealand specimens that I 
had brought with me to England. To all those who have assisted me in these various 
ways I desire here to record my most grateful thanks. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 456.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. ee) 


It is a pleasure also to mention here my indebtedness to those who have assisted in 
other ways. I wish particularly to thank Dr E. J. Aten of the Marine Laboratory, 
Plymouth, for allowing me to make such free use of the facilities offered by the institu- 
tion under his charge ; without his assistance it would have been impossible to do the 
work in the time. Dr W. T. Catman of the British Museum, besides sending me co- 
types of species I required, has assisted me in the examination of others at the Museum 
itself and by his advice on many difficult points. Professor WoLrerEck of Leipzig 
and Dr A. Brunine of the Zoological Station at Saratov have most obligingly communi- 
cated to me some of the results of their examination of the Amphipoda of the German 
South Polar and other Expeditions, which are as yet unpublished, though in the printer’s 
hands. To Mrs KE. W. Sexton I am indebted for the loan of many papers and books 
that I required, for the keen interest which she has shown in the work during its 
progress, and for the great care and skill with which she has prepared the drawings of 
most of the figures for this paper. 


In order to make clear the various references that will be given below, it may be 
well to state very briefly the growth of our knowledge of the Antarctic and sub-Antarctic 
Amphipoda. That knowledge dates back to the years 1839-40, when three expeditions— 
the British, French, and American—visited Antarctic seas. The British leader, Sir JAMEs 
CLaRKE Ross, penetrated very far south in his memorable voyage, and during the 
expedition several Crustacea were collected, including some Amphipoda. No special 
report on these Amphipoda was published, but they appear to have been deposited in 
the British Museum, and several of them were afterwards described by Spence Bare 
and other writers. The Crustacea collected by the American Expedition were described 
by J. D. Dana in his well-known work, which forms one of the fundamental treatises 
for the study of the Crustacea. In it many Amphipoda are included. For many years 
after 1840 no further advance was made, and there is nothing noteworthy to be recorded 
until 1874, when several expeditions were sent out to southern seas for the observation 
of the Transit of Venus, and during these expeditions various collections were made. 
The Amphipoda of the British Expedition from Kerguelen Island were described by 
K. J. Miers, and others collected by the American Expedition by 8. I. Smira. The 
French Expedition spent some time at the Campbell Island, and the Crustacea 
collected: were afterwards described by Henri Frinor in the Mission de I 1le Campbell, 
in which he also included a general list of the Crustacea of New Zealand. This 
report was not published till the year 1885, and in the meantime a beginning had 
been made with the study of the Crustacea of Australia and New Zealand by Professor 
W. A. Haswett and Mr G. M. Tomson respectively. During the years 1873 to 
1876 the Challenger Expedition had made numerous collections in sub-Antarctic 
and a few in Antarctic seas, and these were most fully described and figured by the 
Rev. T. R. R. Sreppine in his elaborate report published in 1888. In the same year, 
but at a slightly earlier date, there was published a report by Dr G. Prerrer on the 
Amphipoda collected at South Georgia by the German Transit of Venus Expedition of 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 457.) 


176 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


1882-83. Forsome time after this no further contribution of any importance was made 
specially dealing with Antarctic Amphipoda, though those of some of the sub-Antaretic 
regions were gradually becoming better known. The next contribution to our know- 
ledge of the Antarctic forms was made by the Southern Cross Expedition, which visited 
South Victoria Land in 1898-1900; the Amphipoda collected by this expedition were 
described by Mr A. O. Watxker in 1903. 

Meanwhile, the Antarctic Expeditions of Britain, Germany, Sweden, and France had 
been wintering in the Antarctic and making numerous collections. The Amphipoda of 
the French Antaretic Expedition were described by Monsieur Epovarp CHEVREUX in 1906, 
and those of the British by Mr A. O. Waker in 1907. The reports on the German 
and Swedish Expeditions have not yet been published. 

In 1907 a small scientific party from New Zealand visited the sub-Antarctic 
Islands lying to the south of that land, and the Crustacea collected were described by 
myself in 1909 in The Sub-Antarctic Islands of New Zealand, published by the 
Philosophical Institute of Canterbury. 

A preliminary report on the Amphipoda of the recent French Expedition in the 
Pourquoi Pas? was published by M. Carevreux in 1911.* 


From the lists given below it will be seen that the Scot¢a collection contained 
fifty-six species from Antarctic or sub-Antarctic seas and six Atlantic species. The great 
majority of these were already known, and I have made only nine new species and no 
new genus. ‘This appears to show that the Amphipoda of the southern seas are 
becoming fairly well known so far as the mere identification of species is concerned, 
though there is much to be done in tracing out more completely the distribution of the 
species and any local varieties that they may present. 

On the other hand, it may be noted from his preliminary report on the Amphipoda 
of the Pourquor Pas? Expedition that M. Cazvreux has established six new genera 
and numerous new species. 

Tt will be seen that 1 have reduced a number of species to the rank of synonyms. 
I have done this only where there appeared to be good grounds for so doing, and in all 
cases where there is likelihood of a difference of opinion I have endeavoured to give my 
reasons in full. In thus reducing the number of described species, I have only 
continued a necessary work that has been commenced in recent years by other writers. 
In the earlier days of the study of the Amphipoda, when workers were few and 
collections scanty, it frequently happened that a collection from a new locality contained 
many new species. In numerous instances these were described on very meagre 
material, often from a single specimen ; and even when there was an abundant supply 
of specimens time did not allow of the dissection of more than one or two, hence there 


* M. CHEvREUX’s second paper (Bull. Muséum Nat. Hist., 1912, No. 4), containing the diagnoses of the new species 
collected by this expedition, reached me when the final proofs of my paper had been corrected, and therefore too late 
for the results to be noticed here, though it is probable that one or two of the new species described below are 
identical with those established by M. CoEvREUX. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 458.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION, 177 


was little opportunity of distinguishing between characters subject to individual variation 
and those really common to the species. Consequently, when other specimens were 
obtained it was frequently found that they did not agree in all particulars with any of 
the species already described, and they were naturally considered to be new and were 
given a distinctive name. ‘his practice was perhaps the safest at the time, and it was 
the more desirable when the specimens came from a new locality ; but it unfortunately 
led to the idea that forms from fresh localities were almost necessarily new, and that 
the distribution of nearly all the species of Amphipoda was very limited. It also led 
to the introduction of long specific diagnoses, often containing characters of individual 
importance only. Naturally enough, specimens afterwards examined did not agree in all 
respects with these detailed descriptions, and thus a vicious circle was set up, leading to 
the continued establishment of new species, some of them being admittedly described in 
self-defence, and the fact that many species were widely distributed was long obscured. 

As knowledge gradually increased it was found that in many cases the same species 
had been described under various names, and the preparation of a general survey of 
the whole group, such as that for Das Tierreich, necessarily led to a considerable 
reduction of species. From the example of a few species which were readily recognised, 
and hence known to occur at places widely remote from one another, it was found that 
some species at any rate were more widely distributed than had been originally 
supposed. Much assistance in clearing up difticulties was obtained from the detailed 
study by various authors of individual species and the consequent elucidation of the 
various forms that occur in some species and especially of the differences between the 
sexes and of the changes that take place during growth; and it is to further work of this 
kind that we must look for assistance in defining the limits of the different species. 

Several of the species—or groups that I refer to under one specific name—are 
widely distributed in sub-Antaretic seas, and, as might be expected, the specimens from 
different localities now separate from one another are not always precisely the same, but 
show what may be considered local varieties. Some authors would doubtless prefer to 
call these local varieties species and give each a distinctive name; but this must 
necessarily lead to an indefinite multiplication of species, with ever-increasing difficulty 
of determining those already established, and as a matter of practical convenience it 
seems to me to be better at present to endeavour to recognise these widely distributed 
species and to leave the determination of their varieties until a larger number of forms 
from many localities have been studied. 


In the list below I have indicated briefly the distribution of each species. From this 
it will be seen that an increasing number are now known to extend around the globe in 
sub-Antarctic seas, and that there is a greater resemblance between the Amphipodan 
faunas of South America, New Zealand, Australia, Kerguelen Island, and even South 
Africa, than appeared to be the case a few years ago. ‘The importance of the facts 
on the question of the cause of this distribution cannot be discussed here. Another 
point made clear is that the number of species in northern seas represented by the same 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 459.) 


178 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


or by a closely allied form in the southern is also shown to be increased. Leaving out 
of account the species known to be cosmopolitan, it has been long known that there 
were some species identical in Arctic and Antarctic seas, though practically unknown in 
the tropics; nearly every writer on Antarctic Amphipoda has identified one or more 
with northern species. It appears from examples like Orchomenopsis chilensis 
(Heller), and others that might be quoted, that in these examples of ‘‘ bi-polar” species 
the species is not always entirely absent from the tropics, but exists there in deeper 
waters, while it can live near the surface in the colder regions; or that the tropical or 
temperate form is so much smaller than the polar one that it has usually been 
considered a separate species, and the existence of the species at intermediate localities 
has been overlooked. It appears that, for some reasons not altogether understood, many 
Amphipoda find their optimum environment near the Arctic and Antarctic regions, 
and exist there in greatest abundance, attaining a size far greater than that usual for 
similar forms in warmer seas. The dithculty of deciding whether these smaller 
forms are to be considered separate species or not is very great, and it must not be 
expected in the present state of our knowledge that logically uniform results can be 
arrived at. In some cases where the animal is abundant and specimens from many 
localities have been examined, we may be able to group them into one large species, 
while in other cases where only a few have been studied we are forced to leave them as 
separate small species. Unfortunately, this leaves the groups distinguished by specific 
names of very unequal value in the discussion of questions of distribution. 


I]. List or SpEctEgs. 


ANTARCTIC AND SUB-ANTARCTIC. 


Name OF SPECIES. DIsTRIBUTION AND REMARKS. 
. Acontiostoma marionis Stebbing. Gough Island, Marion Island, Straits of Magellan, New Zealand. 
2. Amaryllis macrophthalma Haswell. Australia, South Africa, South America, New Zealand, 
Indian Ocean. 
3. Cyphocuris anonyx Boeck Widely distributed in both northern and southern seas. 
4. Lysianassa cubensis (Stebbing). South Africa and Gulf of Mexico. 

5. Alicella scotizx, sp. nov. South Atlantic ; an allied species found in the North Atlantic. 
6. Cheirimedon femoratus (Pfetter). South Orkneys, South Georgia, and Graham Land (Port 
Charcot). 

7. Tryphosa murrayi Walker. Off Coats Land and South Victoria Land. 
8. Tryphosites stebbingi (Walker). Off Coats Land and South Victoria Land. 
9. Orchomenella pinguides Walker. South Orkneys and South Victoria Land. 
10. Orchomenella macronyx Chevreux. South Orkneys and Graham Land (Port Charcot). 
ll. Waldeckia zschauii (Pfeffer), Off Coats Land, Graham Land, and South Victoria Land. 
12. Orchomenops?s nodimanus Walker. South Orkneys and South Victoria Land. 
13. Orchomenopsis chilensis (Heller). In all seas, northern and southern. 
14. Orchomenopsis (2) coatsi, sp. nov. Off Coats Land. 
15. Harpinia oblusifrons Stebbing. Widely distributed in Antarctic and sub-Antarctie seas, 
16. Leucothoe spinicarpu (Abildgaard). In all seas. 


17. Amphilochus squamosus G. M. Thomson. South Orkneys, Marion Island, and New Zealand. Perhaps 
identical with A. neapolitanus of northern seas. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 460.) 


@ 


ow be wee 


bo bw bl 
oO 


bo po 
nt 


bo 
oO 


52. 
53. 
. Hyperia gaudichaudi Milne Edwards. 
. Vibilia antarctica Stebbing. 

. Euthemisto thomsont Stebbing. 


S © 


woh 


Se 


> 


. Leptamphopus 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


Name oF SPECIES. 
Metopordes sarsit (Pfeffer), 


Metopella ovata (Stebbing). 
Thaumatelson walkeri, sp. nov. 
Thaumatelson inermis, sp. nov. 
Thaumatelson herdmani Walker. 
Bircenna crassipes (Cheyreux). 


Colomastia brazierit Haswell. 


. Liljeborgia dubia (Haswell). 


Epimeria macrodonta Walker. 
Pariphimedia integricauda Chevreux. 


. Acanthonotozoma australis, sp. nov. 


nove-zealandix (G, M. 
Thomson). 


. Haliragoides australis, sp, nov. 
. Eusirus antarcticus G. M. Thomson. 


Eusirus splendidus, sp. nov. 


3. Eurymera monticulcsa Pfeffer. 
. Bovallia monoculoides (Haswell). 
. Pontogeneia danai (G. M. Thomson). 


. Pontogeneta antarctica Chevreux. 


. Atyloides magellanica (Stebbing). 


Atyloides serraticauda Stebbing. 


. Atyloides calceolata, sp. nov. 


Paramera austrina (Bate). 


. Djerboa furcipes Chevreux. 
2. Paraceradocus miersit (Pfeffer). 
. Mera mastersii (Haswell). 


Paradexamine pacifica (G. M. Thomson). 


. Polycheria antarctica (Stebbing). 
. Nototropis homochir (Haswell). 


. Talorchestia scutigerula (Dana). 
. Hyale grandicornis (Kroyer). 


. Hyale saldanha, sp. nov. 
. Haplocheira barbimana (G. M. Thomson). 
. (1) Eurystheus afer (Stebbing). 


Jassa falcata (Montagu). 
Caprella equilibra Say. 


WS) 


DISTRIBUTION AND REMARKS. 


South Orkneys, South Georgia, and Graham Land (Port 
Charcot). 

South Orkneys, Straits of Magellan. 

South Orkneys. 

South Orkneys. 

South Orkneys and South Victoria Land. 

South Orkneys and Graham Land (Port Charcot). 
allied species occurs in New Zealand. 

South Orkneys and Australia. 

Widely distributed in southern seas, 

Off Coats Land and South Victoria Land. 

South Orkneys and Graham Land (Wandel Island). 

Only one specimen known, from lat. 71° 22’ S., long. 16° 
34’ W.; a deep-sea species (1410 fathoms). 

Widely distributed in southern seas, 


An allied species at South Victoria Land. 


A closely 


South Orkneys. 

In all Antarctic seas. 
E. propinguus. 

South Orkneys. Perhaps only a form of the preceding species. 

South Orkneys, South Georgia, and Graham Land (Wandel 
Island). 

In all southern seas, 

Falkland Islands, Australia, New Zealand. 

South Orkneys, Graham Land, and the sub-Antarctic Islands 
of New Zealand. 

In all sub-Antarctic seas, 


A closely allied species in northern seas. 
Perhaps identical with the northern 


In all sub-Antarctic seas. 
South Orkneys. 
A very abundant and variable species in sub-Antarctic and 


Closely related to the preceding species. 


Antarctic seas. 
South Orkneys and Graham Land. 
South Orkneys, South Georgia, and Graham Land. 
Widely distributed in the warmer southern seas. 
South Orkneys, Graham Land, and New Zealand. 
In all southern seas, and extending far to the north in the 
Indian and Pacific Oceans. 
Australia and South Africa. 
species. 
Falkland Islands and Tierra del Fuego. 
Gough Island and Chili. 


Closely allied to northern 


A closely allied species in New 
Zealand. 

South Africa. 

In all southern seas. 

Gough Island, South Africa. 

Widely distributed in northern and southern seas, 

South Africa. Very widely distributed. 

Falkland Islands, South Victoria Land. 

In all southern seas. 

In all southern seas.* 


* The following additional species has been identified by the Rev. T. R. R. Sressrne from material sent to him :— 


Lanceola estiva Stebbing, 1888, p. 1309, pl. cliii.; from Station 421, 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 461.) 


180 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


NORTHERN AND TROPICAL ATLANTIC. 


Name or SpEctgs. DistRIBUTION AND REMARKS. 
1. Synopia schéeleana Bovallius. Pacific and Atlantic Oceans. 
2. Hyale grimaldii Chevreux. North Atlantic. ; 
3. Allorchestes plumicornis (Heller). Mediterranean and North Atlantic. 
4. Sunamphitoe pelagica (Milne Edwards). North Atlantic. 
5. Anchylomera blossevillii Milne Edwards, Tropical Atlantic. 
6. Oxycephalus clausi Boyallius. Tropical Atlantic and (?) Pacific. 


III. ANTARCTIC AND SUB-ANTARCTIC SPECIES. 


Genus Acontriostoma Stebbing, 1888. 


Acontiostoma marionis Stebbing. 


1. Acontiostoma marionis Stebbing, 1888, p. 709, pl. xxx.* 
” 93 2 1906, p. 15, fig. 4. 
magellanicum Stebbing, 1888, p. 714, pl. xxxi. 
1906, p. 15. 


cr] ” ” 


Station 461, Gough Island; 100 fathoms. 28rd April 1904. One specimen, 
7 mm. long, 5 mm. high. 


This specimen agrees well with the description and figures given by Sreppine. As 
| have only the single specimen, I have not dissected it, but the maxillipeds can be seen 
to agree with his description, while the shape of the third uropod and of the telson with 
its fringe of stout spines leaves no doubt as to the identity of the species. 

A, magellanicum Stebbing is, as Mr Sressrne has pointed out, almost certainly the 
young of this species, which is now therefore known from Marion Island, Gough Island, 
and Straits of Magellan. 

Among the Amphipoda that I brought with me from New Zealand for examination 
[ have a slide from Mr G. M. THomson’s collection that undoubtedly belongs to this 
genus, and is, I think, not specifically distinct from A. marionis. It has the upper 
antenne and the first gnathopod rather stouter than is shown in Mr Sresprne’s 
figure ; but the peculiar second gnathopod, with the finger sunk in a little cavity at the 
end of the propod, and the uropoda and telson, agree very closely with the Challenger 
specimen. In some points it approaches rather nearer to A. magellanicum, and tends 
to confirm the view that that species is only the young of A. marionis. 

This slide was mounted by Mr Tomson from one of a very small number of 
specimens collected in Lyttelton Harbour by myself about the year 1884, and handed to 
him in 1895 when I left New Zealand for a lengthy period. When living, the animals, 
which were all of very small size, were bright red in colour. I had dissected and 
mounted a slide of one of the other specimens about that date, and I have a drawing 


* The references are made by the year of publication to the works giyen in the Bibliography on pp. 235-237. 
1 have given only those references that appeared to be necessary for the purpose of the present paper. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 462.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 181 


made at the time of the second gnathopod which closely corresponds with that given by 
SrepBine of the Challenger specimen. 

Since this was written I have been able to compare Mr THomson’s slide with those 
of the Challenger specimens in the British Museum. The Challenger specimen of 
A. marionis is considerably larger than the New Zealand specimen, and, as stated above, 
has the first gnathopod more slender; but the differences are not, I think, of specific 
importance. The dissected parts of the small specimen of A. magellanicwm are now so 
transparent that they are difficult to examine, but so far as they can be made out they 
seem to agree generally with A. marionas. 

A. pepinii Stebbing, obtained by the Challenger at Kerguelen Island, was placed by 
Mr Srepsine in a new genus, Stomacontion, in 1899, and A. kergueleni Stebbing made 
a synonym of A. pepini. 

It seems, however, to be too near to A. marionis to be separated generically. Un- 
fortunately, the very minute mouth parts do not show very clearly in Mr THomson’s 
prepared slide, and I cannot make out whether the first maxilla in it has the palp one- or 
two-jointed ; but the palp of the maxillipeds certainly seems to have the fourth joint 
quite vestigial or absent, as described for Stomacontion ; in Acontiostoma it is “ very 
small.” There seems to me to be no essential difference between the two genera in the 
third uropods. 


Genus AMARYLLIS Haswell, 1880. 


Amaryllis macrophthalma Haswell. 


Amaryllis macrophthalmus and A. brevicornis Haswell, 1880a, p. 253, pl. viii. fig. 3, and p. 254. 


95 macrophthalma Stebbing, 1888, p. 707, pl. xxix. 
6 is 3 1906, p. 24. 

% i és 1908, p. 67. 

a 3) Pp 1910a, pp. 569 and 633. 
5 5 1910z, p. 448. 

a“ x Walker, 1909, p. 327. 


Station 483, South Africa, entrance to Saldanha Bay; trawl, 25 fathoms. 
21st May 1904. Five specimens, the largest 9 mm. long. 


These specimens agree well with the short description given in Das Tierreich, and 
illustrate several of the points in Srepprye’s further description given in the reference 
quoted above, 1908, p. 67. 

Another species, A. bathycephala Stebbing, has been described from Port Philip, 
Australia, and is evidently very closely allied, differing mainly in the side plate and 
basal jot of the third perzeopod. In my specimens the hind lobe of the side plate is 
more produced downwards than in Srepprne’s figure of A. macrophthalma, and thus is 
a little more like A. bathycephala, but on the other hand the basal joint of the limb is 
expanded above instead of being narrowed as in the latter species. 

The species is now known from Australia, South Africa, Straits of Magellan, and 
New Zealand, and Mr Wa ker has recorded it from Wasin, British East Africa. In 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL., 463.) 


182 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


1904 Mr Watker added another species, A. tenwipes, from Ceylon, for which 
he established a new genus, Vijaya; but Mr Sresprne (19104, p. 570) has pointed out 
that the difference in the male and female antennze on which the genus was founded 
oecurs also in Amaryllis, and that the new genus is therefore not required. 


Genus Cypnocaris Liitken and Boeck, 1870. 


Cyphocaris anonyx Boeck. (Pl. L. figs. 1-4.) 


Cyphocaris anonyx Boeck, Forh. Selsk. Christian., 1870, p. 104. 


fe As Stebbing, 1906, p. 29. 

5 = Walker, 1903., p. 39, and 19038, pp. 227 and 232. 
- micronyx Stebbing, 1888, p. 656, pl. xii. 

* A Chevreux, 1900, p. 164. 


Station 414, lat. 71° 50’S., long. 23° 30’ W.; 8 ft. vertical net, from the surface 
to 1000 fathoms. 15th March 1904. One specimen, total length 20 mm. 


This specimen in all probability belongs to this species, although it differs from the 
description given in Das Tierreich in several minor points. The first segment of the 
pereeon is more produced in front and much more acute than is shown in STEBBING’S 
figare of the Challenger specimen; the antennee have more numerous joints in the 
flagella ; there is no accessory flagellum to be seen in either of the upper antennae— 
possibly it has been broken off, though I can detect no trace of this. The first and 
second perseopods (fig. 3) are simple or almost so, the propod being only very slightly 
widened and the finger apparently not folding back upon it. The basal joints of the 
third to the fifth pereeopods have the margins less serrated. 

The gnathopods (figs. 1 and 2), the uropod, and the telson agree fairly well with 
C. anonyx, which has been already recorded from Tristan da Cunha in the South Atlantic, 
and I think the Scotia specimen is only a larger and more fully developed specimen 
of that species. The whole integument is soft, there is no sign of eyes, and the animal 
was probably taken at a considerable depth. It is teresting to note that in 1908 
Mr Watker stated that this species would probably be found to occur in Antarctic seas. 
It is also found in the seas of the northern hemisphere. 


Genus Lystanassa Milne Edwards, 1830. 


Lysianassa cubensis (Stebbing). (PI. I. fig. 5.) 
Lysianax cubensis Stebbing, 1897, p. 29, pl. vil.s. 
Lysianassa cubensis Stebbing, 1906, p. 38. 
Station 478, South Africa, Cape Town, Coaling Jetty No. ). 14th May 1904. 
Two specimens, the larger a female 13 mm. long. 
Station 483, South Africa, entrance to Saldanha Bay ; trawl, 25 fathoms. 21st 
May 1904. ‘l'wo specimens, one a male 8 mm. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVII., 464.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 183 


These agree well with the descriptions and figures given by Srrppine, except that 
the larger ones contain rather more joints in the flagella of the two antennx. In the 
second antenna of the male the flagellum is long, about two-thirds the length of the 
animal, and the last joint of the peduncle is longer than the preceding joint, which is 
rather short. In the second maxilla the inner lobe is specially broad and has the inner 
margin pretty strongly convex. The second gnathopod has the palm a little projecting 
so as to approach towards the chelate character. ‘The uropods agree well with the 
description ; the character of the peduncle of third uropod seems fairly characteristic, 
and is shown in fig. 5. Its outer margin is produced upwards into a vertical flange 
above the general body of the joint; it curves upwards at the end into a subacute 
point, and bears three short spinules on the distal half of the upper margin. ‘The two 
branches are similar in shape, both tapering to the extremity; the outer is slightly 
longer than the inner, and bears a few long hairs at a little distance from the end. 

The species was originally described from specimens in the Copenhagen Museum, 
coming from the Gulf of Mexico. 


Genus ALICELLA Chevreux, 1899. 
Alicella scotix, sp. nov. (PI. L. figs. 6 and 7.) 


Station 468, South Atlantic, lat. 39° 48’ S., long. 2° 33’ E.; 2645 fathoms. 
29th April 1904. One specimen, 20 mm. long. 

Integument soft, the body greatly swollen about the middle, tapering considerably 
posteriorly. The hinder half of the body somewhat compressed, with a slight dorsal 
ridge, but hardly carinate. Side plates 1-4 increasing in depth, the fourth with its 
posterior lobe extending about one-third along the fifth, which is shallower than the 
fourth and broader than deep. Lateral plate of the first pleon segment angular in 
front but rounded behind, its lower border fringed with long sete; that of the second 
segment with both angles rounded; the third with the anterior rounded, posterior 
angle quadrate, both bearing plumose sete on the lower margin. Sides of the third 
segment of the urus upraised alongside the telson. Eyes indistinct, apparently forming 
a narrow crescentic band along the lateral sides of the head. 

Antenne slender, first shorter than the second, about as long as the head and the 
first segment of the perzeon, the first joint short and thick, as long as the second and 
third together, the third very short ; flagellum of about twenty joints, the first as long 
as the next five and supplied on the inner side with dense tufts of long sete, similar 
setee being present also on a few of the succeeding joints. Accessory flagellum nearly 
half as long as primary ; of six joints the first as long as the next two. 

Second antenna with third joint well exposed; the fourth with long, rather stout 
setules on the lower margin; fifth slightly longer than the fourth, with long slender 
setee on lower margin; flagellum many-jointed, of about thirty-five joints, all except 
the more distal ones bearing a small tuft of long sete at the lower distal angle. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 465.) 


184 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


First gnathopod (fig. 6) moderately stout ; basal joint stout, of equal width through- 
out; a few tufts of long sete near the distal end of its posterior margin ; ischium, merus, 
and carpus all short, subequal, and all bearing long sete on the posterior margin ; 
carpus also with tuft at the antero-distal angle; propod at base as wide as the distal 
end of the carpus, narrowing slightly distally ; anterior margin straight or slightly 
curved, and with tufts of long sete; posterior margin slightly concave distally, and 
bearing numerous long setze in tufts; the palm transverse, straight, defined by two 
long spimules ; finger long, extending beyond the palm. 

Second gnathopod (fig. 7) slender; basal joint curved; ischium much longer than 
the merus ; carpus longer than the propod, which is narrowed at base, slightly curved ; 
palm rather short and slightly oblique; the posterior margin of the merus is furred 
and bears three tufts of long sets towards the distal end; carpus furred on both 
margins, with tufts of long sete on the lateral surface and anterior margin at distal 
end, and several tufts, or short transverse rows, on the distal half of the posterior 
margin; propod with both margins furred, and tufts of long sete on their distal 
portions, those on the anterior border towards the base of the finger forming a dense 
group of very long sete. The first and second perzopoda rather slender; the merus 
slightly broadened and produced at the antero-distal angle; propod somewhat curved ; 
finger about half as long as the propod, slender, curved, smooth. The third, fourth, 
and fifth perseopoda are of increasing lengths, all having the merus much broadened 
and produced, the propod curved, and the finger long, as in the first and second 
pereeopoda ; basal joint of all expanded, that of the third rounded posteriorly, those of 
the fourth and fifth somewhat angled below, and with the posterior margin convex 
in its upper part and straight or slightly concave below, the hind margins feebly 
crenulate. 

First uropods with the branches slender, subequal, longer than the peduncle, 
marginal spines on the peduncle and on the outer branch. Third uropod with peduncle 
large, shorter than the branches, which are subequal in length, lanceolate, margins 
fringed with short spinules and long plumose hairs, the inner branch with small second 
joint. Telson reaching nearly to the end of the third uropod, apparently without 
spines on its dorsal surface. 

This species differs from the typical species A. gigantea Chevreux in having both 
enathopoda subchelate and the first not slender but moderately stout. As there are 
only the two species known, it will be well to slightly widen the characters of the genus 
to include the species now being described. The typical species was of enormous size, 
one of the specin.ens being as much as 140 mm. long; probably when specimens of 
both species of an intermediate size are known, it will be found that the two are more 
nearly alike than appears from the detailed description above, which is based on the 
single specimen obtained by the Scotva. 


(ROY. 50C. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 466.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 185 


Genus CHEIRIMEDON Stebbing, 1888. 


Cheirimedon femoratus (Pfetfer). 
2 


Anonyx femoratus Pfeffer, 1888, p. 93, pl. 11. fig. 
Cheirimedon dentimanus Chevreux, 1905, p. 159, and 1906s, p. 2, figs. 1-4. 


South Orkneys, Brown’s Bay, Station 3264. November 1903. Many specimens 
of about 10 mm. in length. 

South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; dredge, 9-10 fathoms. May 1903. 
One small specimen. 

South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; dredge, 4 fathoms, gravel bottom, 
clumps of weeds ; temperature 29°'1. 3rd December 1903. Two specimens. 


These specimens agree minutely with the figures and description given by CHEVREUX, 
and I have been able to compare them with co-types of his species which he has been 
good enough to send me. I have also compared them with a specimen of dnonyw 
femoratus Pfeffer from South Georgia, kindly placed at my disposal by the authorities 
of the Hamburg Museum, and I find it is quite the same as the South Orkneys 
specimens and those from Port Charcot sent to me by Monsieur KE. CHrvreux. — Pfetter’s 
description agrees well with C. dentimanus, but his figure shows the telson too broadly 
rounded posteriorly and the cleft too shallow. The figure was, however, made without 
dissecting the specimen. His name has priority by many years. M. CHEvreux states 
that this species appears to closely resemble C. fougneri Walker from South Victoria 
Land. I have been able to examine co-types of this species from the British Museum, and 
also specimens obtained by the Nimrod Expedition, and find that, though there is consider- 
able resemblance in general structure, C. fouwgneri differs considerably from C. dentimanus 
in the greater length of the antennz, and also in having the body much less compact, 
and the first gnathopod more slender. 


Genus TrypHosa Boeck, 1871. 


Tryphosa murrayy Walker. 
Tryphosa murrayt Walker 1903a, p. 50, pl. ix. figs. 45-51. 
” » 7 1907, p. 16 (part). 
Station 411, Coats Land, lat. 74° 1’ 8, long. 22° W.; 161 fathoms. Many 
specimens, the largest 22 mm. long. 

After much consideration, I have decided to record these specimens under the name 
given above. I have been able to compare them with the type of Mr Watker’s species 
obtained by the Southern Cross Expedition, and the two agree so closely that they 
must be considered specifically identical. The eyes are obsolete, the lateral lobes of the 
head produced and acute or subacute, the hind margin of the third pleon segment straight, 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 467.) 


186 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


and the first segment of the urus bears a well-marked triangular carina. The appendages 
are in close agreement with those of the type, and in both the inner lobe of the first 
maxilla bears four setz: instead of two as given in the diagnosis of the genus in Das 
Tierreich Amphipoda, two of the sete being shorter than the others. 

While it is easy to identify the Scotia specimens with Mr Watker’s type, the 
position is not so clear if we try to go a little further. In the Southern Cross 
Amphipoda Mr Waxker described another species, Zryphosa adarei, differing from 
T. murrayi in certain minor characters which appeared at the time to be of specific 
importance. In 1907, however, on the receipt of numerous other specimens from the 
Discovery Expedition, he united the two species under the name 7. murrayi, as the 
examination of the specimens showed that the characters at first relied upon were 
subject to variation. In this he was perhaps right, but a comparison of his specimens 
of 7. adaret with my specimens shows that they differ from them as they do from 
T. murrayt in having the first gnathopod rather stouter towards the distal end, and 
particularly in having the carpus stouter and rather shorter than the propod, while in 7. 
murray? it is as long as or longer than the propod ; though the differences are not great, 
they appear to be constant in the specimens | have examined. Moreover, Mr WaLKER 
states that 7. adarei closely resembles 7. barbatipes Stebbing, but differs in the pro- 
portions of the joints of the upper antennz and of the gnathopoda. Before comparing 
the Scotia specimens with 7. murray: Walker I had also noted their great similarity 
to T. barbatipes, except in the shape of the first gnathopods, and comparison of the three 
shows that 7. adarez is largely intermediate in this character between 7. murrayi and 
T. barbatipes, so that, if the first two are united, it will be necessary to unite them both 
with 7. barbatipes. This species is, however, now placed by SreBBING in another genus, 
Tryphosella, and the shape of the first gnathopod in the type specimen of 7. barbatipes 
which | have also examined is considerably different from that of 7. murrayi, the 
carpus being shorter and the propod longer and stouter and slightly different in outline, 
as may be seen from an examination of the figure in the Challenger Report, and there 
are differences in some other characters. It is quite likely that an examination of 
specimens from other localities will show complete transitional forms, but at present I 
cannot go fully into this question, and in the meantime prefer to identify my specimens 
with 7. murray: and to leave that species distinct from 7. udarei and from 7. 
barbatipes. In all three species the side plates of the first and second gnathopoda 
have a small tooth at the posterior angle. It is to be hoped that a complete revision of 
this group will be made before long ; such a revision must, however, include the similar 
forms from northern seas, some of which appear to be very closely allied. 

Tryphosa murrayi is known from South Victoria Land and from near Coats Land, 
though not yet recorded from intermediate localities. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 468.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION, 187 


Genus TrypnHosites G. O. Sars, 1891. 


Tryphosites stebbingt (Walker). 
Hoplonyx stebbingi Walker, 1903a, p. 52, pl. ix. figs. 52 to 57. 
Tmetonyx stebbingi Stebbing, 1906, p. 720. 
rs “A Chilton, 1909a, p. 618. 
Station 411, Coats Land, lat. 74° 1’ S., long. 22° W.; 161 fathoms. Many 
specimens, about 17 mm. long. 


I have compared these specimens with those from the Southern Cross Expedition 
on which Mr Waxxer established the species, and find that they agree closely in all 
points, except that the lateral process of the head might almost be called acute instead 
of “ point rounded "—in some of the Southern Cross specimens it is almost or quite as 
acute as in the Scotia specimens. ‘The first segment of the urus is slightly compressed, 
but hardly sufficiently so to be called carimate. The eyes are very indistinct or absent 
completely. The first gnathopod has the propod slightly narrowed towards the distal 
end, with the palm short and not well defined ; in one specimen the palm was found to 
be rather oblique on one side of the body, while on the other it was almost transverse ; 
the dactyl has a prominent secondary nail. In this specimen the second uropod had 
the inner branch somewhat constricted towards the distal end, as shown by STEBBING 
for Tryphosa cicadoides (1888, pl. iv. fig. ur,) 3 the telson is long and narrow, without 
marginal spinules, but with two small spinules in the emargination at the end of 
each lobe. 

The species appears to be close to 7. cicadoides Stebbing, one of the chief differences 
being apparently in the shape of the telson; but it is to be noted that the drawings of 
the telson of the two specimens represented on plates iv. and v. of the Challenger Report 
differ to some extent. 

The species was described by Warker under the genus Hoplonya, and compared 
with H. kergueleni (Miers), which is now placed under Tryphosa, the genus to which 
T. cicadoides was first assigned. Tryphosa kerqueleni is certainly not unlike Tmetony 
stebbinyi, but differs in the points mentioned by WaLker, and particularly in having 
the propod of the first gnathopod stouter and with the palm regularly rather oblique. 
The first gnathopod of Tryphosa trigonica, as figured in the Challenger Report, is more 
like that of 7. stebbingi, and in describing that species Mr Sreppine suggested that it 
was perhaps the young of 7. kergueleni (Miers). 

In the Scotia specimens, and also in those collected by the Southern Cross, the 
epistome is produced anteriorly into an acute process as In Tryphosites longupes (Bate 
and Westwood), and the species must be placed in the same genus, though the 
differences between Tryphosa, Tmetonyx, and Tryphosites are very trifling. Tryphosites 
stebbingi appears to be very close to 7’ longipes of northern seas, differing chiefly in 
having the perseopoda shorter and stouter and the eyes indistinct. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII, 469.) 


188 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


Tmetonyx stebbingi is now known from South Victoria Land and from Coats Land, 
and I have recorded a form from the sub-Antaretic islands of New Zealand which 
appears to belong to this species, but is much smaller, has well-developed eyes, and is 
darkly pigmented (1909a, p. 618). 


Genus ORCHOMENELLA. 


Orchomenella pinguides Walker. 


Orchomenella pinguides Walker 1903a, p. 46, pl. viii. figs. 24-30. 
” ” ” 1907, p- 13. 


South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325. 2nd January 1904. Several specimens. 


These specimens undoubtedly belong to this species, as on comparison I find that 
they agree closely with co-types of WaALKER’s species kindly sent me by Dr Catan of 
the British Museum. They show also a pretty close resemblance to Chevrimedon 
dentimanus Chevreux, but differ in having the eyes not black (in spirit specimens), 
and in having the first gnathopod less strongly developed and the palm not concave ; 
the third segment of the pleon has the posterior angle rather more rounded, and the 
telson appears slightly more elongated than in CHEvREUxX’s species. I have also been 
able to examine specimens of O. pinguides from South Victoria Land collected by the 
Nimrod in 1908, and can detect no difference between them and the South Orkneys 
specimens. In most of the Nimrod specimens the eye is colourless in spirit and 
appears to have been red in the living animal; some of the specimens were labelled 
“Red Amphipods,” and the specimens preserved in formalin still show the red colour 
of the eyes and a slight pinkish tinge of the whole body. On the other hand, WaLkErR 
in describing his species says: ‘“‘ Eyes moderately large, dark, oval, expanded below.” 
There thus appears to be some variation in the eyes of Orchomenella pinguides, for in 
the co-types from the British Museum one specimen has an eye still fairly darkly 
coloured, but in the others it is pale, as in the South Orkneys specimens, and I have 
noticed also some variation in the Nimrod specimens. 


Orchomenella macronyx Chevreux. 


Orchomenella macronyx Chevreux 1905, p. 161, fig. 2. 
ss 3 - 19068, p. 8, figs. 5-7. 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325. May 1903. Two specimens, 4°5 mm. 
long. 

These two small specimens on the whole agree well with CHEvrEUx’s description, 
especially in the shape of the last segment of the pleon and the first of the urus. 
The eye is rather narrower and less oval, and the first gnathopod appears to have a 
slightly more transverse palm, against which the finger fits closely without projecting 
beyond it. The telson is concave above. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 470.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 189 


Genus WALDECKIA Chevreux, 1906 
(=Caarcotia Chevreux, 1905, name preoccupied). 


Waldeckia zschauii (Pfefter). 


Anonyx zschauii Pfeffer, 1888, p. 87, fig. 1. 
Orchomenopsis zschauit Stebbing, 1906, p. 85 (part), 
Charcotia obesa Chevreux, 1905, p. 163, fig. 3. 
Waldeckia obesa Chevreux, 1906, p. 15, figs. 8-10. 
% » Walker, 1907, p. 10, pl. ii. fig. 4. 
Station 411, Coats Land, lat. 74° 1’ S., long. 22° W.; 161 fathoms. 12th 


March 1904. Many specimens, the largest 16 mm. long. 


Although I have been unable to examine specimens of Anonyx zschawi Pfeffer, 
as those described by him did not belong to the official collection of the German Expedi- 
tion of 1882-83, and consequently were not deposited in the Hamburg Museum, I feel 
confident that my specimens must be referred to his species. His description of the 
great obesity of the body, and particularly of the dorsal process on the first segment of 
the urus, which is so distinet from that of other species with which it might otherwise 
be confused, leaves no doubt upon the subject. In this species, in place of the more or 
less rounded prominence on the first segment of the urus, the process rises abruptly 
behind the usual depression into a sharp tooth, from which it slopes downwards towards 
the next segment; this is shown clearly also in Prerrer’s figure, although the figure is 
rather small. Mr Srspsrnc in 1906 referred his species Orchomene cavimanus to 
PrerFer’s species, but an examination of the mounted slides of the Challenger collection 
in the British Museum shows that the first gnathopod of O. cavimanus has the propod 
broad and not narrowing distally as in W. zschauii, and, judging from the description, 
the process on the urus does not appear the same as in that species, and it appears to me 
that O. cavimanus Stebbing is more properly referred to the widespread and variable 
species O. chilensis (Heller) ; see p. 474, where the question is further discussed. 

I did not at first compare my specimens with the descriptions of Waldeckia obesa 
Chevreux, but the shape of the basal joint of the third pereeopod in one of the slides 
Thad mounted proved to be so similar to the figures given by both Cuevreux and WALKER 
that a full comparison was made, with the result that my specimens proved to be 
identical with that species also. The figures given by CHEvreuX and WaLKeEr show the 
great obesity of the body and the great prolongation backwards of the fourth side plates 
better than Prerrer’s; but, on the other hand, they hardly show so well the character of 
the process on the urus, though from their descriptions it seems evident that they were 
dealing with the same structure. 

I have compared the Scotia specimens with those collected by the Discovery and 
referred to this species by Mr WaLKER, and find no essential difference ; in the Discovery 
specimens the third segment of the pleon is slightly more compressed and elevated into 
a blunt dorsal tooth, while the tooth on the first segment of the urus is a little shorter 
than in the Scot¢a specimens. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 471.) 


190 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


WaLkeEr’s figure is taken from a male specimen, and shows the long second antennze 
found in that sex; these are longer than in the males of Orchomenopsis chalensis 
(Heller) and some other allied species. The occurrence of some specimens with long 
lower antennze was pointed out by Prerrer in his original description. 

Whether it was necessary to establish the new genus Waldeckia for this species 
appears to me to be doubtful, but as that has been done I am referring the species to it. 
As mentioned above, StepBine in his Tierreich Amphipoda placed the species under 
Orchomenopsis, and the affinities of the species seem to me to be distinctly with species 
of that genus such as O. chilensis (Heller) and O. nodimanus Walker. It is true that 
CHEVREUX has described the propod of the first gnathopod of W. obesa as being simple 
and not subchelate ; but in my specimens, although the propod narrows very considerably 
distally, there is a distinct though short palm, and this is shown also in the figures given 
by Prerrer and Watker. Moreover, there are considerable differences in the breadth of 
the propod in other species of Orchomenopsis, as will be seen from my discussion of 
O. chilensis (Heller) ; and in the South African specimens which I refer to that species 
the propod narrows distally in the same way, though not to the same extent, as in 
W. zschaui. 

The other important point in which Waldeckia differs from Orchomenopsis, as first 
pointed out by CHEVREUX, is in the possession of finger-like accessory branchie. 
CHEVREUX describes one of these as being present on all the legs, and two on the fourth. 
In the specimens | examined | found them on the fourth, fifth, and sixth legs only, and 
only one on the fourth. They appear to arise either from or near the base of the branchia. 
They are long and finger-like in shape, but seem to differ in internal structure from the 
branchia, being filled with granules or globules of some kind, and whether they are really 
branchial in function is perhaps doubtful. This, however, is neither the time nor the 
place for a discussion of their physiological importance; the question that concerns us 
now is their presence or absence, and their value when present as a generic character. 

Secondary or accessory branchize have been described in several genera of the 
Amphipoda belonging to quite different families, and it seems probable that they may 
be independently developed in cases where there is special need for them, and that their 
presence is not of great taxonomic importance. For example, they occur in some species 
of Hyalella and not in others, and the species in which they occur are nevertheless 
retained under the genus Hyalella. It was not till after I had written down the 
general considerations given above that I had an opportunity of specially looking for 
accessory branchiz in other allied species ; but afterwards, on examining large specimens 
of Orchomenopsis chilensis Heller (=O. rossii Walker), from Station 411, whence 
the Waldeckia zschauii had been obtained, I found them in that species also, though 
they appear to be present only on the fifth and sixth legs. Unfortunately, my atten- 
tion was not specially directed to this question till it was too late to make an examina- 
tion of other specimens, but the facts detailed above show, I think, that Waldeckia is 
nearer to Orchomenopsis than might appear at first sight. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 472.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. ipil 


The small amount of difference between some of these genera, and the difficulty of 
referring a species to its proper genus, is shown by the fact that while Cozvrevux estab- 
lished for the species in question the new genus Waldeckia, and compared it with 
Mengrates and Lepidepecreum, Mr Waker, who was independently working at the 
same species, had at first classified it under Socarnes, and Mr Sressrne has since stated 
that he would have been inclined to concur in this view. Mr Sresprne has, however, 
now accepted the genus Waldeckia, and has described a new species, W. chevreuai, from 
Australia (1910a, p. 572, pl. xlvii.s). This species, which, though undescribed, has 
been long known to me from New Zealand, differs from W. zschaui (Pfeffer) in having 
the first gnathopod quite simple, and thus offers an additional reason for retaining the 
genus Waldeckia, unless indeed W. chevreuxi could not have been as appropriately 
placed under one of the existing genera. 


Genus ORCHOMENOPSIS Sars, 1893. 


Orchomenopsis nodimanus Walker. 


Orchomenopsis nodimanus Walker, 1903a, p. 44, pl. vil. figs. 13-17. 
i. 55 Stebbing, 1906, p. 721. 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; trap. Many specimens, averaging 
about 15 mm. 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay; 10 fathoms. March 1903. Three specimens, the 
largest 13 mm. 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay ; 9-10 fathoms. April 1903. One specimen. 
Also taken at other times along with O. chalensis (Heller). 


These specimens agree well with the description given by Waker, and I have 
been able to compare them with co-types of his species from the British Museum, 
and find no essential difference between the specimens from the South Orkneys and 
those from South Victoria Land. The species in most respects is very similar to 
O. chilensis (Heller), but can be distinguished by the slight carination of the hinder 
part of the body and by the peculiar structure of the propod of the first gnathopod ; 
in most of my specimens this is a little stouter than is shown in WALKER’ figure, 
and it bears a tubercle on the posterior surface as described by him. 

This species occurred along with O. chalensis (Heller) in many captures. 


Orchomenopsis chilensis (Heller). 


Anonyx chilensis Heller, 1865, p. 129, pl. xi. fig. 5. 
Orchomenopsis obtusa Sars, 1891 and 1895, p. 74, pl. xxvi. fig. 2, and p. 684. 
Orchomene musculosus Stebbing, 1888, p. 673, pl. xx. 
(2) % abyssorum Stebbing, 1888, p. 676, pl. xxi. 
(?) 7 cavimanus Stebbing, 1888, p. 679, pl. xxii. 
Orchomenopsis musculosa and (?) abyssorum Stebbing, 1906, p. 84. 
(2) » zschauiz Stebbing (part), 1906, p. 85. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL, 473.) 


192 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


Orchoinenopsis proxima Chevreux, 1903, p. 93, fig. 6a—c, and 1906s, p. 13. 
5 rossit Walker, 1903a, p. 45, figs. 18-23, and 1907, p. 14. 
(2) 5 abyssorum Walker, 19038, pp. 224 and 227. 
(2) 35 5 Chevreux, 1903, p. 92. 

South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325 ; trap, 15 fathoms. May 1903. Several 
hundred specimens up to 15 mm. in length, all “taken from trap in one 
day ; bait—penguin.” Taken along with O. nodimanus. 

Station 411, Coats Land, lat. 74° 1’ 8. long. 22° W.; 161 fathoms. 12th 
March 1904. Many specimens, most of them of large size, about 20 mm. 

South Orkneys, Station 325; 21 fathoms. September 1903. ‘‘ Through hole in 
ice made for seal skeleton.” Many hundreds of specimens of varying size 
up to15 mm. ‘Taken along with O. nodimanus. 

South Orkneys, Station 325; 13-25 fathoms. August 1903. Many specimens . 
O. nodimanus being taken at the same time. 

South Orkneys, Scotia Bay ; 9-10 fathoms. May 1903. Many specimens; also 
taken along with O. nodimanus. 

South Orkneys, Station 325; 27 fathoms; temperature 29°. June 1903. Many 
specimens ; O. nodimanus being taken at the same time. 


In order to make clear the discussion of this species it will be well to give the 
following historic account. The genus Orchomenopsis was established by Sars in 18938 
for the species O. obtusa. In 1888 Mr Sreppine had described three species under the 
genus Orchomene, namely :—Orchomene musculosus, described from one specimen about 
12 mm. long, taken near the south of Japan; Orchomene abyssorum, from the Atlantic, 
east of Buenos Aires, 1100 fathoms, one specimen, male; and O. cavimanus, from 
Kerguelen Island, two or three specimens, the one described being 12 mm. long. Of 
these species Sars included the first two, and with some doubt also the third, in his 
genus Orchomenopsis. Many years before this, however, in 1865, Hetier had de- 
scribed the species Anonyx chilensis from Chili, and in his revision of the Amphipoda 
for Das Tierreich StEBBING puts the whole of his three species under Orchomenopsis, 
giving Anonyx chilensis Heller as a doubtful synonym of O. abyssorum, and identify- 
ing his species O. cavimanus with Anonyx zschaudi Pfeffer, which had been described 
from South Georgia in 1888. In 1903 CHEvREUX described Orchomenopsis proxima 
from specimens obtained from deep waters in the tropical Atlantic Ocean, at the same 
time identifying other specimens from the Northern Atlantic with O. abyssorum, and 
describing a new species, O. excavata, which he stated comes close to O. cavimanus 
(Stebbing). In 1906 he identified specimens obtained by the French Antarctic Ex- 
pedition from Graham Land with O. proxima, pointing out a few small differences 
between the specimens from the two localities, and stating that the species was very close 
to O. obtusa Sars. Meanwhile, in 1903, Watker had described O. rossi from Cape 
Adare, also referring to its close resemblance to O. obtusa; in 1907 he examined many 
specimens obtained from South Victoria Land by the Dzscovery Expedition, and 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 474.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 193 


modified his original description in one or two points in which he found that the 
additional specimens showed some slight variation from those at first described. In 
1903 he also had identified as O. abyssorum specimens obtained from the Atlantic 
by the Oceana. 

The Scotza collections contain an enormous number of specimens from the various 
localities given above, and a comparison of these with co-types of WaLKER’s species showed 
that they were the same as the forms described by him under the name O. rossi. A 
comparison of the different specimens from the South Orkneys and other Scotza localities 
with co-types of WaLKER’s species supplied by the British Museum, and with specimens 
collected by the Nemrod Expedition, showed that the species varied greatly not only 
in size but also in several points which had been relied upon by previous authors for 
the description of different species—for example, in the second gnathopod, some of the 
specimens having the palm strictly transverse, while in others it was slightly produced 
so as to give the gnathopod almost a chelate character; in the postero-lateral angle to 
the third pleon, which in some is quadrate and in others more or less broadly rounded ; 
and in the proportions of the two branches of the third uropods. There are, of course, 
also differences between the sexes, the males having the lower antenna considerably 
longer than the females, and having the branches of the third uropod supplied with more 
numerous long plumose setze, though some similar setee are present in the female. An 
examination of young forms appears to show that these sete are only developed to the 
full extent in older specimens, there being fewer in younger forms. 

I was able also to compare these specimens with a specimen of O. proxima 
Chevreux from Port Charcot, kindly sent to me by Monsieur CHEvREUxX, and I have 
come to the conclusion that this species is the same as O. rossi, the differences which 
M. Cuevrevux points out being accounted for by the variations mentioned above. In 
the character of the eyes and in other points it is quite the same as a specimen of 
O. rossw of moderate size; on the other hand, as M. CHEevreux points out, it is con- 
siderably larger than the forms from the North Atlantic on which he originally 
described the species O. proxima. From the Vienna Museum I obtained specimens of 
Anonyx chilensis Heller, taken by the Novara at Chili. This proved to be about half the 
size of O. proxiuma ; it differs a little in the shape of the eye and in the somewhat smaller 
size of the rounded prominence on the first seement of the urus, but in all other points 
I can find nothing to distinguish it from O. rossii Walker. In Anonyx chilensis the 
eye is almost oval, widening slightly below, and it is colourless in the spirit specimens 
and probably was red in the living animal, as described by Sars in O. obtusa. In large 
specimens of O. rossi from Antarctic regions, the eye usually differs somewhat in shape, 
being much narrower above and wider below, and in most of them it is dark in colour 
in spirit specimens, though in many, and especially in forms preserved originally in 
formalin, there is still a reddish tinge to be seen. Moreover, even in the Antarctic 
specimens there is some variation in the size, shape, and colour of the eyes, and conse- 
quently I do not think this slight difference sufticient to distinguish Anonyx chilensis 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII.,.475.) 


194 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


Heller from O. rossii Walker. Monsieur CHEvreux had also kindly sent me a specimen 
of O. obtusa Sars from Norway, and an examination of this showed that in size and 
in all essential characters it was identical with the specimens of Anonyx chilensis 
Heller, though the eye was less oval and more widened below, and hence more like the 
specimens of O. rossi. Consequently I am forced to the conclusion that O. obtusa 
Sars also belongs to this widely distributed species. O. musculosa Stebbing was 
described from a single specimen obtained from the south of Japan, and from the 
description given I think there can be no doubt that it is the same as the other 
forms already described. O. abyssorum Stebbing is supposed to be distinguished from 
the other species mainly by the more strictly chelate character of the second gnathopod, 
and the figure of the Challenger specimen shows the palm much more produced than it 
is in any of the forms I have already referred to, though, as I have pointed out, there is 
considerable difference among them in this character. In all other points there seems 
little to distinguish O. abyssorum from the others, and, as mentioned above, STEBBING 
has already given Anonyx chilensis Heller as a possible synonym of this species, 
although the second gnathopod in that form can hardly be described as truly chelate. 

For some considerable time I was inclined to think that perhaps it would be wise 
to keep O. abyssorum as a separate species; however, after having finished my exami- 
nation of the forms already mentioned, I found in the Scotza collection a number of 
specimens from Saldanha Bay in South Africa which in most points are quite similar 
to O. rossi, but in which the second gnathopod has the palm so much produced that 
it could quite strictly be called chelate, as in O. abyssorum Stebbing. 

If this form had agreed in other points with Srepsrne’s O. abyssorum it would 
confirm the opinion that this is a distinct species; but this is not the case, for the first 
gnathopod, instead of having the basos slender and the propod rather broad, as in the 
type specimen, is somewhat stouter than usual, and differs also in having the propod 
considerably narrowed distally, so that its palm is much shorter.* In it the eyes are 
black, usually oval, though slightly widening below, and they vary in size and in the 
amount of widening at the lower part. After careful consideration I think it best to 
include this form also in the same species as the others, although they might perhaps 
be looked upon as different variety, though not corresponding in all points with the 
form described as O. abyssorum by STEBBING. 

If all these forms are combined they must be known under the name of Orcho- 
menopsis chilensis Heller, as that name has priority by many years. With regard to 
O. cavimanus Stebbing, from the Kerguelen Islands, Sressine himself has identified 
it with O. zschaui (Pfeffer) ; but, as I have shown elsewhere, PFEFFER’S species is quite 
distinct in the shape of the dorsal process on the urus and in the greater stoutness 
of the body and the character of the first gnathopod, and has been since redescribed by 
CHEVREUX under the name Waldeckia obesa. 

* In the stout basos and in the character of the propod the first gnathopod in these specimens shows 
considerable approach to O, nodimanus Walker, but it lacks the tubercle present in that species. 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL, 476.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 195 


I have examined a mounted slide of O. cavimanus Stebbing in the British Museum. 
The palm of the second gnathopod is hardly so oblique as shown in the figure of the 
whole appendage in the Challenger Report, but is distinctly concave, the finger imping- 
ing against a rather narrow projection of the propod and being thus separated from 
the rest of the palm. This structure seems rather more marked in the one gnathopod 
than in the other of the same specimen, and the difference from typical specimens of 
O. chilensis is not greater than, or indeed so great as, that of the specimens from South 
Africa mentioned above, and the other parts of the specimen seem to agree well with 
that species. In the same way, O. excavata Chevreux, from the Atlantic, might perhaps 
also be looked upon as only a form of the widespread O. chilensis Heller, but I have 
not been able to examine specimens of O. excavata. 


ORCHOMENOPSIS (7) CoaTsI, sp. nov. (PI. I. figs. 8-9.) 


Station 411, Coats Land, lat. 71° 1’ S., long. 22° W.; 161 fathoms. 12th 
March 1904. Many specimens, about 13 mm. long. 


In general possessing the characters of an Orchomenopsis, but differing markedly 
in the first gnathopoda (fig, 8), which are long and very slender. The basos is long, 
slender, but expanding at the middle so as to be elongate fusiform; the ischium is fully 
half as long as the basos; merus shorter ; carpus about as long as the ischium, slender ; 
propod longer than the carpus but not broader, narrow, oblong, about four times as long 
as broad ; palm a little oblique ; small tufts of setae on the propod toward the distal end. 

The second gnathopod (fig. 9) is of the form normally found in the genus ; the carpus 
is expanded so that the posterior margin is strongly convex, both margins being furred ; 
the propod is much shorter than the carpus, narrowed at the base; palm short, trans- 
verse or a little projecting ; the margins of the propod are furred, and supplied with long 
setze in the usual manner. 

Remarks.—The first enathopoda of this species differ so much from those of other 
species of Orchomenopsis that it should perhaps be classed in some other genus, but 
I cannot find any genus that seems more appropriate, for in all the other characters 
it is closely similar to a typical species such as O. chilensis, and I therefore prefer to 
place it provisionally under Orchomenopsis rather than to add another genus to the 
Lysianasside. 


Genus Harprnta Boeck, 1871. 


Harpinia obtusifrons Stebbing. 
Harpinia obtusifrons Stebbing, 1888, p. 820, pl. Ivi., and 1906, p. 143. 
iS Walker, 1907, p. 17. 
A Ae Chilton, 1909a, p. 619. 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; dredge, 9-10 fathoms. May 1903. 
One female, 4 mm. long; another female (from Scotia Bay), 7 mm. 
(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 477.) 


196 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


These specimens resemble those examined by me from Campbell Island, and differ 
from the description of the genus as given by Srespine in Das Tierreich Amphipoda 
in having the eye present and formed of many facets, though it is pale in colour in the 
smaller specimen. 

The species is widely distributed in Antarctic and sub-Antarctic seas. 


Genus LeucorHor Leach, 1813-14. 


Leucothoe spinicarpa (Abildgaard). 


Gammarus spinicarpus Abildgaard, 1789, in O. F. Muller, Zool. Dan., 
3rd ed., vol. iii. p. 66, pl. cxix. figs. 1-4. 
Leucothoe antarctica Pfeffer, 1888, p. 13, pl. ii. fig. 4. 
5 spinicarpa Stebbing, 1906, p. 165. 
33 rr Walker, 1907, p. 18. 
RS commensalis Haswell, 1880, p. 261, pl. x. fig. 3. 
es a Stebbing, 1906, p. 166. 
is 5 i 1910a, p. 580 and p. 630. 


South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; 9-10 fathoms. April 1903. One 
specimen, 8 mm. long. 


I have been able to compare this specimen with some obtained at South Victoria 
Land by the Nimrod, and with specimens from Plymouth, England, and I agree with 
Mr Watxker that there is no appreciable difference between them and the European 
species. The South Orkneys specimen has the conical process on the propod at the base 
of the finger a little more obtuse than in the others, but in all other points they agree. 

With regard to L. commensalis Haswell, Mr Srepprne says: ‘It is perhaps only 
a matter of taste or convenience whether this should be taken as a distinct species or 
as a variety of L. spinicarpa Abildg.” In my South Orkneys specimen the propod 
of the second gnathopod contracts a little more towards the finger hinge than is shown 
in Sars’ figure of the European form, as it does in the Australian specimens examined 
by Mr Sreppine; on the other hand, the tuberculation of the palm is practically 
intermediate between that shown by Sars and by Haswe tt, and the resemblance 
throughout is so very close that 1 see no good object in retaining a different name for 
the Australian specimens. 

Three other species are at present included in the list of Australian Crustacea, viz. 
L. brevidigitata Miers, L. diemenensis Haswell, and L. gracilis Haswell; but, as 
STEBBING points out, it is probable that they should all be included in L. spinicarpa, 
though, as yet, I have not been able to examine specimens. I have, however, examined 
the type of L. antarctica Pfeffer from the Hamburg Museum, and find that it also 
belongs to this cosmopolitan species. 

I may take this opportunity of stating that I have recently (1912, p. 129) united 
L. tridens Stebbing, obtained in New Zealand waters by the Challenger, with the 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 478.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. WN 


earlier described ZL. traillii G. M. Thomson, as the small differences given in the 
descriptions were found not to hold for all specimens or to be based on misconceptions. 
It is not unlikely that this species will also prove to be only a form of L. spinicarpa 


Abildg. 
Genus AMPHILOCHUS Bate, 1862. 


Amphilochus squamosus G. M. Thomson. 


Amphilochus squamosus G. M. Thomson, 1880, p. 4, pl. 1. fig. 4. 


s marionis Stebbing, 1888, p. 743, pl. xxxviil. 
ah 5 3 1906, p. 151 and p. 723, 
* : Walker, 1901, p. 500. 


South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325. Several specimens, all of small size, 
about 3 mm. long. 


These specimens certainly agree with Srepprne’s species described from Marion 
Island, but they are also the same as the species previously described by ‘THomson 
under the name Amphilochus squamosus, from New Zealand. This latter species, which 
has been accidentally omitted from the list in Das Tierreich Amphipoda, is fairly 
common in New Zealand, and I have long noted that it is very closely allied to the 
Challenger species, and the present opportunity of examining specimens from another 
locality that undoubtedly belong to SreBBING’s species confirms this. The New Zealand 
specimens are usually covered with dark, reddish-black spots, and some of the South 
Orkneys specimens still show signs of similar coloration. Mr THomson described a small 
accessory flagellum on the first antenna, and, though this does not appear to have been 
noted by others in this genus, which is described in Das Tierreich as being “ without 
accessory flagellum,” it is undoubtedly present also in the South Orkneys specimens. 
Waker has pointed out that A. neapolitanus Della Valle, 1893, is perhaps the same 
as A. marionis; in describing his species STEBBING originally compared it to dA. 
tenuimanus Boeck. It will probably be found to be either the same as or very closely 
allied to one of the northern species. Mr THomson’s name has priority over all except 
A. manudens Bate and A. tenwimanus Boeck. 


Genus Meroporpes Della Valle, 18938. 


Metopoides sarsii (Pfetter). (PI. I. fig. 10.) 
Metopa sarsii Pfeffer, 1888, p. 84, pl. ii. figs. 3, 8, and pl. iil. fig. 2. 


Metopoides walkeri Chevreux, 1906a, p. 37, fig. 1; 19068, p. 28, figs. 15-17. 


South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; shore pools; temperature 30r—oure 
6th December 1903. Eight specimens, the largest measuring 7 mm. in 
length in the usual position with the pleon folded under the pereon. 


In the collection of Amphipoda in the Hamburg Museum there is a single specimen 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 479.) 


198 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


of Metopa sarsi Pfeffer. ‘his specimen I have been allowed to dissect and mount 
permanently as a micro-slide, and I find it agrees precisely with M. walkeri Chevreux, 
a name which must therefore be dropped in favour of the older M. sarsiz. 

My specimens agree minutely with Curvreux’s description; the accessory 
flagellum is, I think, present in all the specimens, but it is exceedingly small, so small 
that it would hardly be inaccurate to say that it is absent. CHEvrEUXx describes the 
palp of the mandible as two-jointed ; [ think there is a minute third joint present in 
the specimen from which I dissected the mouth parts, but if so it is almost as small as 
the accessory flagellum ; yet the presence or absence of these minute joints is one of 
the distinguishing marks for some of the genera into which the family Metopide is 
now divided. 

CHEVREUX was unable to identify his species with any of those described by 
STEBBING in the Challenger Report, but says it seems to be nearest to Metopa ovata ; but 
this species has the basal joints of pereeopods four and five narrow, and is now placed 
in the genus Metopella. I would rather be inclined to compare it to M. magellanica 
or M. compacta, species now placed in the genus Metopordes, while the small acute 
teeth which are present on the palm of the second gnathopod, as described by 
CHEVREUX, show an approach to the more irregular palm found in M/. crenatipalma, a 
species now known as Proboloides crenatipalma. 

From the Challenger collections Streppine described six species of MJetopa—one 
from Kerguelen Island, the other five from Cape Virgins, off Patagonia; each of which, 
with one exception, was represented by one specimen only, though of one species 
another specimen was found at Nightingale Island in the Tristan da Cunha group. Of 
these six species three are placed in Das Tierreich Amphipoda under Metopoides, two 
under Metopella, and the other under Proboloides. As these genera are separated 
from one another and from Metopa by small points such as those I have mentioned 
above, and as there are altogether twenty-one species of Metopa, six of Metopella, 
three of Metopoides, and seven of Proboloides, it is not to be wondered at that the 
classification of the family is admittedly in an unsatisfactory condition, and I think it 
wisest not to attempt to identify the species under consideration with any of the 
Challenger species, although it is probably the same as one of the species described 
from Cape Virgins. 

The sides of the last segment of the urus are raised into a vertical plate on each 
side of the telson, and this is continued by a similar vertical plate on the outer edge 
of the peduncle of the third uropod, so that a groove is formed, protected on each side 
by these vertical plates or flanges, in which the telson may rest when the animal swims 
by backward strokes of the hinder part of the body (see Piate L. fig. 10). 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 480.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 199 


Genus Mrropetia G. O. Sars, 1892. 
Metopella ovata (Stebbing). 


Metopa ovata Stebbing, 1888, p. 764, pl. xlii. 
1906, p. 183. 


South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 3254; dredge, 2-8 fathoms; temperature 
29°-30°. 6th December 1903. Several specimens, none exceeding 3 mm. 
in length. 

South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; 9-10 fathoms. April 1903. Three 


small specimens. 


Several of these are females bearing eggs, and none can be said to be certainly 
males. These specimens agree closely with the description given by Sreppine, and 
have the basal joints of the fourth and fifth perzeopods narrowed as given in the 
diagnosis of the genus. The gnathopods, uropods, and telson are all in close 
agreement with the figures given in the Challenger Report; the accessory flagellum 
on the upper antenna is present, though extremely small, being about the same size as 
in Metopordes sarsu Pfeffer. ‘The palp of the mandible is short, and consists of a very 
short first joint, an expanded second joint bearing three setwe along one margin, and a 
very short third joint tipped by a setum. 


Genus THAUMATELSON Walker, 1906. 


This genus was established by Watker in 1907 for his species 7. herdmani 
obtained by the Discovery Expedition. The Scotea obtained several specimens from 
the South Orkneys of what appear to be two additional species of the same genus. 
The genus is mainly characterised by the very peculiar telson, which was described by 
WALKER as “large, entire, oval, and set in a vertical plane on its longer edge.” ‘The 
telson in the two species I have now to describe agrees well with this description. 
The shape of the telson is probably associated with the extremely large side plates 
which cover all the appendages when these are withdrawn, and enclose the animal so 
that it looks like a small bivalve shell; when this is done the pleon is folded in under 
the side plates which appear to overlap the telson all except a small thicker ridge along 
its dorsal margin, which fills the small slit between the right and left side plates. 

In the mouth parts the genus agrees well with the characters of the family Meto- 
pide ; one species, however, is peculiar in having the second gnathopod chelate. 


Thaumatelson walker, sp. nov. (Pl. 1. figs. 11-15.) 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325. April and May 1903. Several 
specimens, the largest 3 mm. in length. 
Specific Description.—In general characters (see fig. 11) similar to 7. herdmani, but 
with the side plates even larger, the fourth segment being longer than any of the others 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVLII., 481.) 


200 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


and having an extremely large side plate. The second and third pleon segments not 
produced into a postero-dorsal tooth, but the third bearing a stout conical tooth pro- 
jecting at right angles to the dorsal surface of the segment. he first antenna has the 
first jot much larger than the second or third, and produced at the upper margin 
into a broad, hood-like process ; a minute accessory flagellum is present. 

Further Description,—Vhe antenne (fig. 12) are quite short, the upper one being 
slightly longer than the lower. It has its basal joint very stout, and is produced above 
at the distal end into a broad process overlapping the second and nearly as long. The 
second joint is slightly broader than the third, which is about the same length. The 
flagellum tapers gradually, and consists of about thirteen joints, all with very few 
setee. There is a small accessory appendage. 

In the second antenna the last joint of the peduncle is slightly longer and more 
slender than the preceding ; the flagellum is of about the same length as the peduncle, 
and contains about ten joints. 

The mandibles have the same general shape asin Metopa ; the palp, though small, is 
less vestigial than in some of the other genera of the family ; the first joint is short, the 
second moderately long and broad, and the third is about as long as the first. There 
is no molar process. ‘The first maxilla has the palp two-jointed. In the second maxilla 


the outer lobe is rather longer and broader than the inner. Both these maxille, and ~ 


also the maxillipeds, have the same general character as in the next species, 7. inermis. 

The first gnathopod (fig. 13) has the basos long, widening a little distally ; the merus 
is rather longer than the ischium, and ends in a rounded lobe bearing three long sete, 
the posterior margin being furred ; the carpus is about half as long as the propod, and is 
produced posteriorly into a short lobe fringed with setee ; the propod sub-oblong, about 
twice as long as broad, with anterior margin rather strongly convex; the palm oblique, 
straight, and defined by stout spinules. 

The second gnathopod (fig. 14) is similar in general structure, but is longer; the 
ischium is not produced into a lobe ; the carpus is shorter, but has the lobe longer ; and 
the propod is longer, being considerably more than twice as long as broad. 

The perzeopoda are slender, and bear only a few short sete. 

The segments of the urus (fig. 15) cannot be made out distinctly, and appear more 
or less completely fused; the uropoda are long and slender, and bear few setz ; the 
first uropod reaches beyond the others, and has the peduncle longer than the subequal 
branches; in the second uropod the peduncle is about the same length as the equal 
branches ; the third has the pedunele slightly longer than the basal joint of the single 
branch. The telson is flattened so as to form a vertical plate, and has a slight 
thickening along the dorsal margin. 

When the side plates are folded together the strong tooth on the third pleon 
segment projects backwards, and the whole animal looks very like an Ostracod, some 
of which were found along with it, having been at first sorted out along with specimens 
of this species. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 482.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 201 


Thaumatelson inermis, sp. nov. (PI. I. figs. 16 and 17.) * 


South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; 9-10 fathoms. April and May 1903. 
Several specimens, the largest 3 mm. long. 


Specific Description.—Very similar to 7. herdmani Walker, but differmg in having 
the second enathopod long and chelate, the propod being produced into a long acute 
process as long as half the whole propod, the fixed finger finely pectinate and fitting 
closely against the dactyl, which has its inner margin furnished with small, widely 
separated serrations. 

Further Description.— The form described above is the female, several of the speci- 
mens examined bearing eggs. ‘The lateral angle of the head is rather acute ; and in the 
shape of the body, the proportions of the seements and of the side plates, the species 
closely resembles 7. herdmani. The eye is fairly large, round, and colourless in spirit, 
having been probably red in the living animal. In the first antenna the first joint is 
large and produced at its upper distal angle, though to a slightly less extent than in 7. 
walker, and I can find no accessory flagellum. In other respects the antenna is similar 
to that of 7. herdmanz, and the joints of the flagellum bear long sensory sete. In the 
lower antenna the last joint of the peduncle is about as long as the preceding, and the 
flagellum is of the same length. ‘The mandible has the palp small, the first joint is 
short, the second moderately long, the third small and slender, the cutting edge and 
other parts having the character common to the family. The first maxilla has the 
palp two-jointed, its extremity furnished with four or five small spinules and one or 
two longer setze ; the inner lobe is rounded at the end, and bears three or four sete ; the 
outer lobe bears several stout spinules and one or two longer sete, and has its inner 
margin furred. The second maxilla is of the ordinary form. 

The maxillipeds have the inner lobes separate, rounded at the end, and bearing 
two rather large setae. The outer lobe is small, being merely a slight extension of the 
joint as in Metapoides sarsu. The palp is similar to that in 7. herdmane. 

The first gnathopod (fig. 16) has the side plate undeveloped; in general shape it 
is similar to that of 7. herdmani, but has both the merus and the carpus produced 
posteriorly into a lobe tipped with long sete, the process of the merus reaching to the 
end of that of the carpus. The propod is rather large, and is slightly distended at the 
palm, which is nearly transverse and is defined by three or four stout spinules. 

The second gnathopod (fig. 17) has the basal joints similar to those of 7. herdmani, 
but is chelate, as already described. The perseopoda are long, very slender, and bear 
few sete or spinules. The side plates of the fourth pair are particularly large, and 
cover up the fifth, sixth, and seventh pairs, the side plates of which are not developed 
and the basal joints slender. The first uropod extends considerably beyond the second ; 
the branches are subequal, shorter than the peduncle. The second uropod is short, but 
extends beyond the third and a little beyond the telson; its branches are subequal. 


* This species is perhaps the same as Thawmatelson nasutwm Chevreux (Bull. Muséum Hist. Nat., 1912, No. 4, 
p. 5), though the descriptions of the mandibular palp do not agree. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL, 483.) 


202 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


The third uropod reaches a little beyond the peduncle of the second ; its single branch 
is about as long as the peduncle, but rather more slender, and bears a minute second 
joint. The telson reaches slightly beyond the third uropod, is ereatly flattened 
vertically, and has the dorsal border somewhat thickened, as described in 7. walkerv. 
In many respects this species shows close approximation to 7. herdmanv, described 
by Mr Watker, from South Victoria Land, but is clearly distinguished by the large 
chelate second gnathopod. This may, however, ultimately prove to be a sexual 
character. 
Thaumatelson herdmani Walker. 
Thaumatelson herdmani Walker, 1906, p. 15, and 1907, p. 21, pl. vil. fig. 11. 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325. 1903. A few specimens. 


After 1 had drawn up the description of the preceding species, with the remarks 
thereon, I found in the “ residues ” of some collections made during 1903 both additional 
specimens of that species and also others with subchelate second gnathopoda agreeing 
in all respects with 7. herdmani Walker, so that that species also does occur at Scotia 
Bay. I can find very little difference between the two except in the second gnathopoda, 
and, as stated above, strongly suspect that both forms belong to the same species; but 
the additional specimens came into my hands too late to allow of the question being 
fully investigated. 

Genus Brrcenna Chilton, 1884. 
Bircenna crassipes (Chevreux). 


Wandelia crassipes Chevreux, 1906a, p. 87, figs. 1 and 2. 
iy 55 5 1906s, p. 45, figs. 24-26. 
Bircenna crassipes Chilton, 1909n, p. 62. 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; dredge, 9-10 fathoms. May 1903. 
One specimen, 2 mm. long. 


This small specimen agrees very closely with CHevREUX’s description and figures. 

The species is very close to B. fulva Chilton from New Zealand, and differs from it 
only in the longer and more slender gnathopods, and in having the branches of the 
first and second uropods equal and shorter in proportion to the peduncles. 

Kuria longimana Walker and Scott (1903, p. 228), from the Indian Ocean, appears 
to be nearest ally of the genus Bircenna. 


Genus Cotomastix EK. Grube, 1861. 


Colomastix braziert Haswell. 


Colomastia braziert Haswell, 1880, p. 341, pl. xxii. fig. 4. 
* 3 Stebbing, 1906, p. 206. 


South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325. 1903. Two small females, the larger 
3°5 mm. long. 
‘These specimens certainly belong to this genus, and probably to Haswe t's species ; 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLYIIL, 484.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 208 


but as they are both females of smal] size, and perhaps not fully mature, the identifica- 
tion is not free from doubt. They agree generally with the description of the species 
in Das Tierreich Amphipoda, but appear to differ in the following points :— 

The upper antenna is rather longer and stouter than the lower; the flagellum is 
very small, and consists of one short joint and two, or perhaps three, very minute ones. 

‘The lower antenna has the fifth joint of the peduncle a little longer than the fourth, 
and both considerably longer than the third ; the flagellum consists of one small joint, 
fellowed by one or more very minute ones. There are no serrations to be seen on the 
lower antenna, the animal in this point agreeing with the description. 

The mouth parts were not examined. 

The first gnathopod is long and slender, agreeing well with the description. 

The second gnathopod has the carpus as long, and at distal end as broad, as the 
propod. The inner branch of the third uropod scarcely reaches beyond the extremity 
of the preceding uropods ; its upper margin is minutely serrulate ; the outer branch is 
more slender, and is about two-thirds as long. Very minute serrulations are present on 
the inner branches of the first and second uropods also. 

The telson apparently agrees with the description, but could not be fully examined. 

It is perhaps doubtful if this species is really distinct from C. pusilla (Grube), from 
the North Atlantic and the Mediterranean, but the Scotva specimens appear to differ 
from it in the proportions of the joints of the lower antenna, and in the absence of 
serrations on the peduncle. On the other hand, the second gnathopods and the 
uropods agree quite as well, or perhaps better, with C. pusilla than with C. brazerv. 
Another species, C. hamifera Kossmann, has been recorded from the Red Sea, but is 
thought to be probably an immature male of C. pusilla. All the three species were 
combined under the name C. pusilla by DeLia VALLE in 1893. 

C. braziert was described from the east coast of Australia. I have taken a specimen 
in Otago Harbour, New Zealand, that probably belongs to the same species ; in the 


living animal the eye was red as in C. pusilla. 


Genus Litseporcia Bate, 1862. 


Liljeborgia dubia (Haswell). 


Hustrus dubius Haswell, 1880, p. 331, pl. xx. fig. 3. 
Liljeborgia dubia Stebbing, 1906, p. 233, 1910a, p. 638, and 19108, p. 454. 
7 ,, Walker, 1907, p. 35. 
s » Chilton, 1909a, p. 619. 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 825; dredge, 9-10 fathoms. June 1903. 
One imperfect specimen, anterior half of body only ; the length of the whole 
animal would be fully 15 mm. 
This fragment seems to belong, without doubt, to this species; it agrees in the 
peduncles of the antenne and in the narrower basal joints of the third to fifth 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 485.) 


204 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


perseopods. In these characters it differs from L. consanguinea, which has been taken 
off South Africa and at Kerguelen and Heard Islands. 

Another species, L. wquabilis, described by SrespBinc, 1910a, pp. 588 and 638, 
from Australian seas, seems to be closely allied, and all three species present many 
points of resemblance to LZ. fissicornis (Sars), found in the Arctie and North 
Atlantic Oceans. 

L. dubia is now known from Australia, New Zealand, South Victoria Land, the 
South Orkneys, and South Africa. 

From Mangareva Island, Gambier Archipelago, M. Curvreux has described a 
species, L. proxima, 3 mm. long, which is, he says, very near to L. pallida (Sp. Bate) 
and L. brevicornis (Bruzelius). It seems also to be very close to L. dubia or to L. 
equabilis, the latter of which is, according to Sreppinc, in close agreement with 
L. brevicornis. 


Genus EPIMERTA. 


Epimeria macrodonta Walker, 


Eimeria macrodonta Walker, 1906, p. 16, and 1907, p. 24, pl. viii. fig. 14. 


© 


Coats Land, Station 411; trap, 161 fathoms; lat. 74° 1’ S., long. 22° W. 
10th March 1904. One specimen, 25 mm. long. 


This specimen must, I think, undoubtedly belong to WaLker’s species, but it differs 
a little in the arrangement of some of the numerous teeth. The first segment of the 
pereon has a short dorsal tooth and a small lateral tooth; there are no teeth on the 
short second segment ; the other segments of the perzeon and those of the pleon bear 
dorsal and lateral teeth as described by Wa ker. The first segment of the urus bears 
a strong dorsal tooth as described, but on the second segment there is a tooth placed a 
little laterally on each side on the posterior margin, and there is a lateral carina ending 
in sharp teeth on the third segment. The first joint of the peduncle of the first antenna 
bears a long tooth on the under side at the extremity, in addition to the two lateral 
teeth ; the inner tooth on the second joint is much longer than the outer one. ‘The eye 
is large, round, and projects as a hemisphere from the side of the head; in the spirit 
specimen it is yellowish in colour. 

This species seems to come near to L. loricata Sars, which is widely distributed in 
northern seas, and appears to differ only in the arrangement of the teeth on the pleon 
and urus, and in the acuteness of the dorsal teeth—points which are probably subject 
to variation. 

Mr Watker’s specimens were from the Winter Quarters of the Discovery in 
M‘Murdo Strait, South Victoria Land. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 486.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 205 


Genus PaRIPHIMEDIA Chevreux, 1906. 
Pariphimedia integricauda Chevreux. 
Pariphimedia integricauda Chevreux, 1906a, p. 39, fig. 25, and 1906s, p. 39, figs. 21-23. 


South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; shore pools. 4th February 1904. 
Temperature 32°-35°. One specimen, 13 mm. long. 

South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; dredge, 4 fathoms, gravel bottom and 
clumps of weed. 8rd December 1903. Temperature 29°1. One specimen, 


11 mm. long. 


These specimens agree well with M. Cuevrevx’s description and figures so far as 
the external characters are concerned. [| have not examined the mouth parts in detail. 
His specimens were obtained at Wandel Island. 


Genus ACANTHONOTOZOMA Boeck, 1876. 
Acanthonotozoma australis, sp. nov. (Pl. IL. fig. 19.) 


Scotia, 18th March 1904. Lat. 71° 22’ S., long. 16° 34’ W.; 1410 fathoms. 
Station 417. One female specimen ; length of body (head to base of telson), 
35 mm. 


Head and anterior six segments of person dorsally rounded ; last segment of perzeon, 
the three segments of pleon, and first of urus dorsally carinate. On the first four of 
these the carina forms a large tooth produced acutely backwards ; on the first segment 
of the urus it is confined to the posterior half of the segment, and is preceded by a 
slight notch, the whole of the portion in front of which is folded under the preceding 
segment when the body is fully extended. The carina itself is convex anteriorly, and 
produced backwards into a very acute point (fig. 19). 

Head broad, dorsally convex, curving slightly downwards in front, and ending in a 
short acute rostrum reaching about half way to end of first segment of upper antenna ; 
lateral margin with a short subacute process below the upper antenna, and with the 
lower margin produced anteriorly into a rounded process and separated from the rest 
of the head by a slight furrow. 

First side plate produced anteriorly, with anterior angle rounded and posterior angle 
quadrate ; second, anterior angle rounded, posterior subacute ; third, much deeper than 
first and second, posterior angle produced, almost acute ; fourth, posterior angle pro- 
duced acutely inferiorly, the posterior process between the two emarginations subacute ; 
fifth, anterior lobe regularly round, posterior lobe a little deeper, acute, and with a 
groove below for basal joint of perseopod ; sixth, similar, but with anterior lobe smaller 
and concealed by the fifth side plate ; seventh, small and rounded. Lower border of 
first pleon segment rounded below, the second with lower margin straight and posterior 
angle produced acutely ; both with an oblique ridge running towards the posterior angle. 
Third segment similar to the second segment, but without ridge. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 487.) 


206 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


Eyes completely absent. Upper antennz reaching considerably beyond peduncle 
of lower. First joint of peduncle very stout, produced at inner upper angle into a 
long acute spine reaching beyond the end of second joint, and with a blunter and shorter 
spine on under outer side ; second joint produced into subacute spine on the outer side ; 
third joint with small spines on the outer and inner sides, the outer one tipped with 
sete, flagellum longer than peduncle, rather stout, especially towards base, and having 
some of the basal joints slightly produced below and bearing the sensory setze. 

Lower antennz as long as head and first five segments of pereeon ; last joint of 
peduncle somewhat compressed laterally, longer than preceding, which is slightly keeled 
above and produced at the extremity. 

First gnathopod simple, fairly stout ; carpus much broader and longer than propod ; 
the lower margin of merus, carpus, and propod spinose. Second gnathopod similar to 
first in size and form. 

First and second perzeopods longer than gnathopods and somewhat slender. Third 
pereeopod much longer than second, its basal joint narrow, with ridge running 
down the middle of outer side; propod much longer than carpus. Fourth 
pereeopod similar to third, but considerably longer; lower posterior angle of basal joint 
quadrate and not produced. Fifth pereeopod much longer than the fourth ; basal joint 
broader, produced posteriorly at upper part into a rounded lobe below which the margin 
is deeply concave ; postero-inferior angle produced into an acute point reaching almost 
as far as the end of the ischium. 

First uropod with base much longer than the subequal branches and grooved above ; 
branches narrow-lanceolate, ending acutely, the outer one folded in under the inner. 

Second uropod similar, but with peduncle as long as inner branch; the outer branch 
not much more than half the length of inner. ‘Third uropod with peduncle very short, 
produced above on outer margin into an acute spine which reaches as far as the end of 
the telson; the two branches subequal, narrow-lanceolate, flat, the outer one folded 
under the inner. ‘Telson flat, laminar, scarcely narrowed, emarginate posteriorly. 

On the whole, this species seems to come fairly well under Acanthonotozoma, though 
it would not be difficult to find points in which it does not quite fit the generic 
description. Both gnathopoda are simple, but the first is neither slender nor feeble. 
The mouth parts have not been examined in detail, but do not appear especially drawn 
out for piercing; the palp of the mandible is slender, that of the maxilliped is 
small and slender, and shorter than the very large outer plate, which is much larger 
than the inner plate. 


Genus LeprampnHopus G. O. Sars, 1893. 


Leptamphopus nove-zealandize (G. M. Thomson). 


Pherusa nove-zealandiz G. M. Thomson, 1879, p. 239, pl. x.o, figs. 2, 2a-c. 
Panoplea debilis G. M. Thomson, 1880, p. 3, pl. i. fig. 3. 
Oradarea longimana Walker, 19034, pp. 40 and 56, pl. x. figs. 77-89. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVII1., 488.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 207 


Oradarea longimana Walker, 1907, p. 32. 

- 3 Chevreux, 19068, p. 54. 
Leptamphopus nove-zealandix Stebbing, 1906, pp. 294 and 727. 
Chilton, 1909a, p. 621. 


” » 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325. 1903. A few specimens. 
This species is widely distributed in Antarctic and sub-Antarctic seas. It very 
closely resembles Djerboa furcipes, except in the telson, which is undivided. Fuller 
details concerning it will be found under the last reference given above. 


Genus HaLiraGoIpEs O. Sars, 1893. 


Haliragoides australis, sp. nov. 


South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; 9-10 fathoms. May 1903. A few 
small specimens, about 3 mm. long; all very delicate and fragile. 

‘The specimens are almost too delicate and fragile to allow of a full description, but 
there is no doubt that they belong to this genus, and that they come pretty close to 
HT. inermis (O. Sars) from the northern seas. They appear to differ in having the first 
and second segments of the pleon slightly produced backwards into a small dorsal 
tooth ; the postero-lateral angle of the third pleon segment is produced to a small acute 
tooth. The head has a more distinet rostrum curving considerably downwards ; the eye 
is large, well-developed, oval, but colourless in spirit specimens. The first gnathopod 
differs in having the propod somewhat narrowed at the base and the palm slightly 
shorter than the hind margin. In all other points that can be observed the specimens 
seem to be very close to H. inermis. 

The occurrence of this species at the South Orkneys adds another to the lst of 
cases where a northern species of a genus is represented in the south by the same species 
or by one closely allied. 


Genus Hustrus Kroyer, 1845. 


In order to make clear what is now known about the species of Husirus from 
sub-Antarctic seas it seems desirable to give the following historical account :— 

In 1880 G. M. THomson identified specimens from New Zealand with the northern 
species HL. cuspidatus Kroyer, but distinguished them as a new variety, antarctica. 

In 1888 Srepprna examined two specimens collected by the Challenger, one 
from Kerguelen and the other from Heard Island, and referred them to EF. longipes 
Boeck, another northern species, saying that they were distinguished from 
E. cuspidatus by the absence of the spine-teeth from the apex of the second joint 
of the maxilliped palp. 

In 1898 Sars in identifying specimens from the Lofoten Isles with F. longipes gave 
the points which he considered distinguish it from the other species, and said that the 
form recorded under this name from the Challenger Expedition is scarcely identical 
with Borck’s species. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI, 489.) 


208 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


In the same year Detta VALLE included all the forms mentioned above under 
E. cuspidatus. 

In 1903 Waker described a new species, #. levis, from the Southern Cross 
Expedition, and said: “It may be easily distinguished from the other known species by 
the absence of dorsal teeth on the segments and by the entire margins of the third 
metasome segment and the first joints of the pereeopoda. From E. cuspidatus, var. 
antarctica, Thomson, it is separated by the conspicuous dactylus of the maxillipeds.” 

In 1906 Sresstnc combined the Challenger specimens with those deseribed by 
THomson, and gave them under the name ZH. antarctica, thus raising THOMson’s variety 
to the rank of a species. In describing it he says it is “ exceedingly like L. propinquus” 
—another northern species. 

In 1907, from the National Antarctic Expedition, WALKER examined many specimens 
of Husirus, some of them of large size. These he referred to HL. propinquus G. O. 
Sars, giving a few points in which they differ, but stating that these are due to age. 
At the same time he described another new species, . microps, “recognisable by the 
relatively small eyes and slender hirsute legs. From its nearest ally, 2. holmi 
H. J. Hansen, it differs in the structure of the gnathopoda.” He makes no further 
comparison of these specimens with either #. antarctica or E. levis. 

In the same year CHEvReUX described two specimens obtained by the French 
Antarctic Expedition as the male and female of a new species, /. laticarpus. 

It will thus be seen that the question is already pretty complicated, and that the 
path of anyone endeavouring to identify species of Husvrus from Antarctic seas is by 


no means free from difficulty. 


Eusirus antarcticus G. M. Thomson. 


Kusirus cuspidatus, var, autarctica, G. M. Thomson, 1880, p. 4, and 1881, p. 26. 
longipes Stebbing, 1888, p. 965, pl. Ixxxvil. 

antarcticus Stebbing, 1906, p. 340. 

propinquus Walker, 1907, p. 30. 

laticarpus Chevreux, 1906p, p. 149, figs. 27-30. 

(2) ,, levis Walker, 1903a, p. 55, pl. x. figs. 70-76. 


South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; 9-10 fathoms. June 1903. One 
male, not well preserved. 

Station 201, lat. 59° 43’S., long. 30° 44’ W.; in clear water among floe, surface. 
13th February 1903. Temperature 301. One female. 

Off Coats Land, lat. 72° 31’ 8, long. 19° 00’ W.; vertical net, 1-1000 fathoms. 
5th March 1904. Temperature 30°. One female. 

Station 411, Coats Land, lat. 74° 1’S., long. 22° W.; 161 fathoms. One specimen. 


These specimens agree in nearly all respects with the description given by 
Curvrevux of £. laticarpus. The females agree with his, and differ from the male in 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 490.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 209 


the much longer and more slender antennz and in the greater depth of the cleft in the 
telson; the eye is rather small, oval, or very slight reniform. These specimens are 
therefore somewhat different from the specimens from Kerguelen Island described by 
Sreppine in the Challenger Reports. I think, however, that CHEvrEuUX is right in 
considering the two specimens examined by him as male and female of the same 
species, for, in addition to the female specimens of which | have spoken above, I have 
one specimen from Station 325 which by the character of the antenn is almost 
certainly a male, and it agrees very closely with the form described by CHEVREUX as 
the male. It has the teeth at the end of the antennal joints a little longer than is 
shown in his figures, but they are arranged in the same way, and the difference in 
degree is probably due to age. This specimen, like his, has the eyes large, oval, and, 
in the spirit specimen, of a reddish-brown colour. I have carefully compared it with 
the full description given by Srepprne of the Challenger specimens, and it agrees 
minutely in everything except that the telson is less deeply eut. My specimen is, 
however, about 12 mm. long, while his is only 7°5 and was probably immature. This 
seems to be confirmed by the fact that the antennz in it are not modified in the special 
way described by CHEvreux. In the young male we would naturally expect to find 
the telson more like that of the female. Waker also has stated that the cleft in the 
telson becomes shallower in older forms. 

From the resemblance of my specimens to those described by CHEvREUX, and of 
the male to Sresprne’s, I cannot help coming to the conclusion that /. laticarpus 
must be specifically identical with H. antarcticus. 

To this species must, I think, be added the forms referred by WatLKER to 
E. propinquus. 1 have been fortunately able to examine two specimens obtained by 
the Nimrod in the same locality as WALKER’S specimens, and I cannot find suthcient 
differences to separate them from the Scotia specimens. They are 7°5 mm. long, and 
appear to be males, having the antenne short and provided with calceoli; the eyes are 
nearly round, of moderate size, and the telson has the cleft deeper—nearly as deep as 
in the form figured by Curvrevx as the female. The other characters agree very closely, 
and the points of difference noted are probably due to age. ‘The back of the pleon and 
of the posterior portion of the pereeon is somewhat scabrous. 

Srepsine has given the apparent absence of calceoli as one of the characters of 
E. antarcticus, but 1 expect they will, as in so many other species, be found to be 
normally present in fully mature males. They are certainly present in my Nimrod 
specimens, though, as stated above, these specimens may be more or less immature ; the 
calceoli are, however, extremely delicate, and appear much more elongated than is 
usually the case, and a character that is much more easily observed is the downward 
projection of every second joint of the flagellum as described and figured by CHEVREUX. 
The male specimen from Station 325 is not in a sufliciently good state of preservation 
(having apparently been partially dried) to show the calceoli, but the antennze show the 
other modifications of the male. Watker makes no mention of calceoli in his speci- 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 491.) 


210 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


mens, nor of the sexual differences, but states generally that the length of the 
flagellum of the antennz and of the cleft in the telson varies with age. 

It will be seen that, as SrEBBING points out, this Antarctic species is very close to 
E. propinquus of northern seas, and probably WaLKER is correct in definitely 
identifying it with that species; the resemblance, however, to other northern species, 
e.g. EL. longipes, is also very close, and I think it will be better in the meantime to 
leave the southern form under a distinctive name. The differences between all the 
described species of the genus are very slight, and probably further research will lead 
to a reduction of the number. 

E. levis Walker was described from a single specimen, the size of which is not 
given; from the shortness of the flagella of the antennze and of the projections of the 
carpus, and from the absence of dorsal teeth, it seems likely that it was an immature 
specimen, perhaps belonging to this species. 

With regard to E. microps Walker I do not feel able to express any definite 
opinion ; some of the specimens were of large size, and the long antennze would indicate 
that they were females, but, on the other hand, the telson is only very slightly cleft. 

M. Curvrevx has recently (19118, p. 405, fig. 3), described another species, H. 
bouvieri, from the South Sandwich Islands, but in view of the variations in this species 
described above, it seems doubtful if the differences noted in the dorsal margin of the 
first segment of the urus, and in the smaller depth of the cleft of the telson, are of 
very much importance. His single specimen was an ovigerous female, but has the 
short antennze which appear to be the mark of the male as pointed out by CHEVREUX 


himself in /. latecarpus. 


Eusirus splendidus, sp. nov. (Pl. II. fig. 20.) * 


South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325. 15th August 1903. 54 fathoms. Two 
specimens, both males: No. 1, 30 mm., No. 2, 35 mm. in length of body. 


First four segments of person slightly compressed ; hinder portion of body much 
compressed, carinate, with pronounced dorsal teeth projecting backwards on the three 
last segments of perzeon and on the three segments of pleon ; first segment of urus with 
dorsal depression followed by slight carina on the posterior portion ; second and third 
rounded. Side plates 1-4 slightly deeper than their respective segments; first pro- 
duced anteriorly into a rounded lobe reaching nearly to anterior margin of head, its 
posterior angle with two or three teeth; second and third rounded below, with two or 
three small teeth at the posterior angle; fourth broader, its posterior margin produced 
into a subacute lobe below the fifth, lower margin rounded, posterior margin below 
production serrate ; fifth with the posterior lobe deeper than the anterior; sixth with 
the posterior lobe produced downwards, much deeper and broader than the anterior ; 
seventh, small, rounded below, not divided into lobes. Epimeral plate of the first pleon 
segment narrowly rounded below ; second, much broader, rounded anteriorly, posterior 

* Probably the same as Husirus perdentatus Chevreux (Bull. Muséwm Hist. Nat., 1912, No. 4, p. 10). 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 492.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 211 


angle quadrate and very slightly produced; third, rounded anteriorly, inferior margin 
slightly convex, posterior more strongly convex, posterior angle quadrate (fig. 20). 

Eyes large, prominent, oval, less darkly pigmented in the larger specimen. Upper 
antennee more than half the length of the body, first segment stout, with sharp tooth 
below and smaller lateral teeth at its extremity ; second as long as the first, but much 
more slender, ending in numerous sharp teeth which are almost as long as the third 
joint ; third joint very short, also ending in sharp teeth; flagellum much longer than 
the peduncle, many-jointed, each second joint produced below and bearing calceoli in 
addition to other sete, proximal joints very short ; accessory flagellum slender. 

Gnathopoda similar to those of . antarcticus, but with the propod broader ; second 
enathopod slightly larger than the first; first and second persopoda very slender, 
longer than the gnathopoda; third, fourth, and fifth pairs increasing in length, the 
fifth being about as long as the perzeon and pleon combined. First uropod with outer 
branch about two-thirds the length of the inner, which is as long as the peduncle ; 
second with outer branch half the length of the inner and as long as the peduncle ; 
third with peduncle short, branches subequal and slender; telson more than twice as 
long as the peduncle of third uropod, very narrow, with two slight lateral ridges on the 
upper surface and a shallow central groove between them; cleft not more than one- 
sixth the length, the two posterior lobes very acute and widely divergent. 

Leneth of body: up to 35 mm, 

It is only with great reluctance that I establish this new species, but the compres- 
sion of the hinder part of the body and its production into carinal teeth is carried to 
a much greater degree than in any of the species of Husivus known to me. In all the 
specimens of H. antarcticus only the pleon segments are produced into teeth, with 
oceasionally a small tooth on the last seement of the person ; and until transitional 
forms are known it will, I think, be safer to rank the present specimens as a separate 
species. There are also some differences in the uropoda, but whether these are merely 
associated with age or not I cannot say. 

The general resemblance to 7. antarcticus in the appendages is, however, so great 
that I should not be surprised if it proves ultimately to be a special form of that 
species. WALKER has, however, had larger specimens before him which apparently 
showed only the normal amount of carination. 


Genus EKuryMeErRA Pfeffer, 1888. 


Eurymera monticulosa Pfetter. 
Eurymera monticulosa Pfeffer, 1888, p. 103, pl. i. fig. 3. 
2  _Stebbing, 1906, p. 357. 
op 5 Chevreux, 1906p, p. 59, figs. 34-36. 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; dredge, 4 fathoms, gravel bottom, 
clumps of weed. 3rd December 1903. Temperature 29°°1. One specimen, 
imperfect, 15 mm. 


(ROY, SOC, BDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 493.) 


212 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


This agrees well with the descriptions given by Prerrer and CHEVREUX, except that 
the third uropod does not extend much beyond the others. In the upper antennze 
every second joint of the flagellum is slightly expanded below and bears sensory sete, 
thus having somewhat the appearance of the flagellum in Paramera austrina ; in this 
character the antenne agree exactly with the original description given by PFEFFER. 

I have been able to compare my specimen with those in the Hamburg Museum 
originally described from South Georgia by Dr Prerrer, and thus to confirm the 
identification. 

M. Cuevrevx records the species from Booth Wandel Island. 


Genus Bovauuia Pfeffer, 1888. 


Bovallia monoculoides (Haswell). 


Atylus monoculoides Haswell, 1880, p. 327, pl. xviii. fig. 4. 
Bovallia gigantea Pfeffer, 1888, p. 96, pl. 1. fig. 5. 
Chevreux, 19068, p. 54, figs. 31-33. 
5 3 Stebbing, 1906, p. 357. 
Eusiroides monoculoides Stebbing, 1906, p. 345, and 1910a, p. 595. 
'; % Chevreux, 1908, p. 475. 
crasst Stebbing, 1906, p. 346, and 1910a, p. 594. 
e cxsaris Stebbing, var. Walker, 1904, p. 264, pl. iv. fig. 22 
Bovallia monoculoides Chilton, 1909a, p. 622. 


” ” 


” 


Several specimens from shore pools and moderate depths at South Orkneys, 
Scotia Bay, Station 325. Largest specimen 37 mm. long. 


These specimens agree well with the descriptions of Bovallia gigantea given by 
Prerrer and Curevrevx. They have the last segment of the perseon and the first two 
segments of the pleon carinate and produced into an acute dorsal tooth; the third 
segment of the pleon bearing a blunt tooth. In smaller specimens these teeth are less 
marked. ‘They thus agree also with the description originally given by Sresprne for 
Eusiroides cxesaris, but they differ from it in having the posterior margin of the third 
segment of the pleon slightly convex and without serrations. The accessory flagellum 
of the first antenna is present, but is small, and appears to be united with the third 
joint of the peduncle much in the same way as I have described for the specimens of 
Atylus megalophthalmus Haswell, which are now considered to be a form of the widely 
spread Paramera austrina (Bate). 

Through the kindness of the authorities of the Hamburg Natural History Museum, 
I have been able to examine co-types of Bovallia gigantea Pfeffer from South Georgia. 
These are larger than the largest Scotia specimens, and the dorsal teeth are slightly less 
acute, but there is no difference of any importance. That the dorsal teeth are subject 
to considerable variation was already known from their varying development in the 
three species of Hustroides originally described by Sresprnc. Two of these, £. cwsaris 
and E. pompeti, were united by Srerprnc in the Das Tierreich Amphipoda, and 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL, 494.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 213 


identified with Atylus monoculoides Haswell. In 1909 I urged reasons for uniting 
with it the third species also, 7.e. EL. crassi, and pointed out the identity of the whole 
with Bovallia gigantea. 

About the same time Sreppine independently examined additional specimens from 
Australia, and, speaking of #. crassz, said: ‘‘ Whether this can be retained as a species 
distinet from E. monoculoides seems doubtful.” 

The amount of serration on the posterior margin of the third pleon segment may be 
considerable, as in the form described under the name F/. cwsaris, or may be altogether 
absent, as in the specimens now before me. ‘This variation has already been referred to 
by Srespinc, WaLKer, CHEvREUX, and myself, and need not be further discussed. 

Along with some of the specimens which he described under the name “ H. cxsaris 
Stebbing, var.” Water found an ovigerous female, 5 mm. long, which with some hesita- 
tion he described as a new species, H. orchomenopsis, the main difference being that in 
the third uropoda the outer branch is much the longer and has a terminal joint. Mr 
WALKER is disposed to think that, though sexually mature, this specimen has not 
attained the full mature characters. 


Genus PontoGENEIA Boeck, 1871. 


Pontogenera danai (G. M. Thomson). 


Atylus danai G. M. Thomson, 1879, p. 258, pl. x.c, fig. 1. 
,»  Uppus Haswell, 1880, p. 328, pl. xx. fig. 1. 
Eusiroides lippus Stebbing, 1906, p. 346. 
Pontogeneia danat Stebbing, 1906, p. 360. 
Fe », Chilton, 1912, p. 130. 
Falkland Islands, Cape Pembroke, Station 118 ; among calcareous algee. January 


1903. Several specimens, some poorly preserved, the largest 6 mm. long. 


Some specimens appear to have been partially dried, and it is not easy to make 
out the necessary points in the antenne with certainty, but others better preserved 
show that they differ from the next species in having every fourth or fifth jomt of the 
flagellum of the upper antennze produced below and crowned with a tuft of sensory 
setee; in P. antarctica every third joint is dilated to a less extent. In both species 
the dilatations are closer together on the six or seven basal joints of the flagellum. 
In the present species, too, the antennz are more nearly equal in length, the gnathopoda 
are more slender, and the telson is perhaps rather more deeply cleft. The differences 


particularly the one last mentioned—are all rather slight. 

I have been able, since the above paragraph was written, to compare the Falkland 
Island specimens with specimens of P. danai G. M. Thomson from New Zealand, and 
think they must be considered the same. In the Falkland Island specimens the 
peduncle of the upper antenna bears rather longer sete on the under surface, but it 
also bears on that surface a number of calceoli on slight projections, giving a scabrous 
appearance which is well marked in the New Zealand specimens. 


(ROY, SOG, EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 495.) 


214 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


Mr Sressrnc has put Atylus lippus Haswell down as a doubtful species of 
Eusiroides, but I have specimens from Sydney Harbour that I think certainly belong 
to Haswe v's species, and these I cannot distinguish from the species common on New 
Zealand coasts which was described as Atylus danai by Mr Tuomson. The species is 
therefore now known from Australia, New Zealand, and the Falkland Islands, and 
probably extends round the globe in sub-Antarctic seas. 


Pontogeneia antarctica Chevreux. 


Pontogeneia antarctica Chevreux, 1906a, p. 72, fig. 2, and 1906s, p. 69, figs. 40 and 41. 
5 34 Chilton, 1909a, p. 624. 


South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; in shore pools and at moderate depths. 
Several specimens, the largest 6 mm. long. 


These specimens agree well with CHEvREUX’s description, and can be distinguished 
from the preceding most easily by the character of the upper antennz, as described 
above. 

Though this species seems to be a true Pontogeneva, yet in the somewhat slender 
antennx it makes some approach towards the genus Paramera, and at the end of the 
third joint of the upper antenna there is a short process tipped with one or two long hairs 
that appears to represent a vestigial accessory flagellum, but it is fused with the third 
joint of the peduncle somewhat as appears to be the case in Atylus megalophthalmus 
Haswell, which is looked upon as a variety of Paramera austrina (Bate). Ponto- 
geneia antarctica is, however, clearly distinguished from Paramera by having every 
third joint of the primary flagellum expanded below, instead of every second, and 
also by the lobes of the telson being rounded posteriorly. 

The species is known from Auckland and Campbell Islands, from Flanders Bay and 
Booth Wandel Islands, as well as from the South Orkneys, and thus appears to represent 
P. danai in colder and more southerly seas. 


Genus AryLoIbEs Stebbing, 1888. 


Atyloides magellanica (Stebbing). (Plate I. fig. 18.) 
Atylopsis magellanica Stebbing, 1888, p. 925, pl. Ixxix. 
Pontogeneia magellanica Stebbing, 1906, p. 360. 
, 3 Walker, 1907, p. 33, pl. xii. fig. 20. 
55 Fh Chevreux, 1906, p. 64, figs. 37-39. 
Atyloides magellanica Chilton, 19094, p. 627. 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 825; shore pools. 2nd February 1904. 


Temperature 32°—35°. Numerous specimens, the largest about 10 mm. long. 

These agree well with the description of this species given by CuEvreux. It is 
evident that the telson varies to some extent. CHEVREUX figures it with a seta arising 
from a slight notch on each half. Watker says “the divisions of the telson are smooth 
and rounded at the tips,” and shows it with the sides converging and convex, without 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 496.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 215 


terminal setze or notch. In one specimen I[ find one half with a notch and the other 
without (Plate I. fig. 18); in others it closely resembles the figure given by CHEVREUX. 
The species is found in all sub-Antarctic seas. 


Atyloides serraticauda Stebbing. 

Atyloides serraticauda Stebbing, 1888, p. 920, pl. lxxviii., and 1906, p. 36. 
Walker, 1907, p. 33. 
Chevreux, 1906p, p. 87. 

4 5 Chilton, 1909a, p. 627. 
(?) Schraderia gracilis Pfeffer, 1888, p. 141, pl. ii. fig. 5 (no description, only one figure). 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; shore pools. 2nd February 1904. A 

few specimens, the largest 12 mm. long. 


” ” 


” ” 


In fully grown specimens this species may be recognised by the long antenne, 
gnathopoda, and perzeopoda, and particularly by the serrations on the side plates and on 
the hinder margin of the third pleon segment. These serrations may, however, be 
almost completely absent in smaller specimens, and the species is by no means so easy 
to recognise, and the identification then depends mainly on the telson. 

Schraderia gracilis was named in 1888 by Prerrer, but not described, only a 
general figure of the whole animal being given. This figure without drawings of the 
separate appendages is quite insufficient for identification in this group, which contains 
so many species very nearly alike in general appearance ; and as it is not now possible 
to ascertain from which individual specimen the drawing was made, PFEFFER’S species 
must remain doubtful, There are several specimens in the collection of the Hamburg 
Museum labelled “ Schraderia gracilis,” and these prove to belong to the species now 
under consideration, Atyloides serraticauda Stebbing. 

The species is widely distributed in Antarctic and sub-Antarctic seas. 


Atyloides calceolata, sp. nov. (Plate II. figs. 21-23.) 


South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; 10 fathoms. A few specimens, 
mostly imperfect, about 5 mm. long. 

Specific Description.—Similar to Atyloides serraticauda in general shape of body, 
in the serrations on the anterior side plates, the posterior margins of the basal joints of 
the perzeopoda, the posterior margin of the third seement of the pleon, and in the telson ; 
differing mainly in the antenne. The first antenna (fig. 21) with the first joint longer 
and considerably stouter than the second, its lower margin bearing distally an acute 
spine with another shorter spine placed laterally, a few long setee near the end joint; 
second joint bearing on its under surface two well-marked calceoli of characteristic shape, 
one on a little prominence at a short distance from the proximal end and the other near 
the distal end, some fine sete at the end of the joint; third joint short; the whole 
antenna about as long as the body. 

Second antenna (fig. 21) with the gland cone very acute; the third joint short, pro- 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 497.) 


216 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


duced inferiorly into one or two distal teeth, and with a spinule on the upper side ; fourth 
joint twice as long as the third, bearing on its upper surface two calceoli, each on a 
slight projection similar to those on the second joint of the upper antenna, a few fine setze 
scattered on both margins of the joint and at the distal end (rest of antenna missing). 

Gnathopods (figs. 22 and 28) similar in general shape to those of A. serraticauda, but 
not quite so slender, the second gnathopod having the propod much longer than the 
carpus, sub-oblong, but expanding somewhat towards the palm, which is slightly oblique 
and defined by one or two small spinules, the whole of the long hind margin bearing 
short tufts or transverse rows of spinules. 

The pereeopoda similar to those of A. serraticauda ; the third uropod rather short, 
branches not very much longer than the base, lanceolate, and bearing spinules and 
fine serrations on the margin; telson cleft for about two-thirds its length, each half 
oblong, posterior margin of each truncate and divided into about eight or nine fine teeth. 

I have only a few specimens of this species, and in most of them portions of the 
antennze and some of the other appendages are broken off; but the arrangement of the 


calceoli on the peduncles of the antennee seems characteristic, and differs from that in 
any of the allied species known to me. 


Genus Parama@ra Miers, 1875. 


Paramera austrina (Bate). 
Atylus austrinus Spence Bate, 1862, p. 187, pl. xxvi. fig. 4. 
Paramera australis Miers, 1875, p. 75. 
Atyloides australis and A. assimilis Stebbing, 1888, p. 914, pl. lxxv., and p. 918, pl. Ixxvii. 
Megamera fasciculata G. M. Thomson, 1880, p. 5, pl. i. fig. 5. 
Stebbingia gregaria Pfeffer, 1888, p. 110, pl. ii. fig, 7. 
i 5 Stebbing, 1906, p. 358. 
Paramera austrina Stebbing, 1906, p. 363, 1910a, p. 640, and 1910s, p. 450. 
a », Chilton, 1909a, p. 625. 
Specimens of this species were obtained from the following stations :— 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; 10 fathoms. 
i. ny Scotia Bay, Station 3254; dredge, 2-8 fathoms, gravel and 
clumps of weed; temperature 29°-30°. 6th December 1903. 
3 Z Scotia Bay, Station 825; dredge, 9-10 fathoms. April 1908. 
4, a Scotia Bay, Station 325; dredge, 4 fathoms, gravel bottom and 
clumps of weed ; temperature 29°'1’. 3rd December 1903. 
» » Scotia Bay, Station 325; 5-10 fathoms; temperature 31°75’, 
2nd January 1904. 
Falkland Islands, Station 118; shore. 7th January 1903. 


Fs Bs Cape Pembroke, Station 118; shore pools. January 19038. 
Gough Island, Station 461; trap, 75 fathoms. 21st April 1904. 
. » Station 461; off floating kelp. 21st April 1904. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 498.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 217 


A special variety of the species was obtained as follows :-— 

South Africa, entrance to Saldanha Bay ; 25 fathoms. 21st March 1904. 

This species is one that is very widely distributed in sub-Antarctic seas, and is usually 
found in shore pools or in shallow waters around the coast. It has been pointed out by 
several authors that specimens of it vary considerably ; probably when the different 
forms are carefully compared it may be possible to distinguish several local varieties, 
but I think, in the present state of our knowledge, that Mr Srrssrne is right in uniting 
the various forms under this one name. 

Through the kindness of the authorities of the Hamburg Museum I have been able 
to examine the type and other specimens of Stebbingia gregaria Pfeffer, and I find 
that they undoubtedly belong to this species. Several of them are of comparatively 
large size, but they show no distinction of importance from the ordinary form, and the 
small accessory flagellum of the upper antenna is present. Various authors have 
described this accessory flagellum as being absent in the specimens examined by them, 
and, though I have usually been able to find it, there are a few specimens that I have 
seen in which I have been unable to do so, although in all other points they seem to 
belong to the species; and there seems little doubt, as pointed out by Warker and 
others, that in this as in some other species the small accessory flagellum may some- 
times be actually absent ; probably this is more commonly the case in older forms. 

Of the local varieties I can at present indicate two :— 

(1) The form described under the name Atylus megalophthalmus Haswell. In this 
form the head has a rostrum nearly half as long as the first joint of the upper antenna ; 
the accessory flagellum, though apparently present, is small, short, and fused to the third 
joint of the peduncle ; and the telson has the posterior portion of each lobe somewhat 
rounded and without sete. 

(2) The forms mentioned above from South Africa, Saldanha Bay. In general 
appearance, and in the antenne and enathopods, etc., these agree closely with forms from 
other localities, but they differ somewhat markedly in the telson, the posterior portion 
of each lobe of which is cut into three or four acute teeth and is without sete. In 
some forms from other localities there may be two such teeth, but, so far as I know, not 
more, and the telson usually bears two or more long setze on each lobe. ‘The telson in 
the Saldanha Bay variety closely resembles that described by CHEvreux for Atyloides 
longicornis from Port Charcot, etc., a species which appears to me to be little more than 
a variety of Parame@ra austrina in which the accessory flagellum is absent and the 
enathopods are rather small. 

Even in the more typical forms there seems to be considerable variation in the size 
and shape of the gnathopods. In some the propod is oblong, with the palm almost 
transverse, as shown by Mr Sreperne in his drawings of Atyloides australis Miers ; in 
others the propod is more oval, with the palm somewhat oblique; the length of the 
carpus is also subject to variation, and the setee seem to be more abundant on the 
antenne and gnathopods in some specimens than in others. 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN, 'TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 499.) 


218 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


This species had been recorded from South Africa by Mr Sressrne under the name 
of Atyloides assimilis, from a specimen found on the screw of the Challenger off Cape 
Agulhas. Mr Sreperne’s figure of the telson shows some approach to that of the 
Saldanha Bay specimens, but each lobe bears only two acute teeth. 


Genus Dserspoa Chevreux, 1906. 


Dyerbou furcipes Chevreux. 
Djerboa furcipes Chevreux, 1906z, p. 74, figs. 42-44. 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; 10 fathoms. (No date.) A few 
specimens, the largest 15 mm. 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; 15 fathoms. April 1903. Six 
specimens, the largest 18 mm. long. 

These specimens agree well with the description and figures given by CHEVREUX. 
They bear a very close and striking resemblance to Leptamphopus nove-zealandiz, 
and it is very difticult to distinguish the two species without dissecting off the 
telson, which is deeply cleft in Djerboa furcipes but undivided in Leptamphopus 
nove-zealandiz ; in the first species, however, the integument is marked by a number 
of short marks arranged more or less in parallel lines, and in doubtful cases this helps as 


a guide to their identification. 


Genus Paracerapocus Stebbing, 1899. 


Paraceradocus miersii (Pfeffer). 


Megamera miersii Pfeffer, 1888, p. 121, pl., fig. 3. 
Paraceradocus miersti Stebbing, 1906, p. 429. 
Chevreux, 1906s, p. 93. 


South Orkneys, Station 325; from stomach of Weddell seal. 4th January 1904. 
One male, 45 mm. long. 

South Orkneys, Station 325; dredge, 9-10 fathoms. 17th August 1903. One 
female, 22 mm. long; June 1903, one female, 20 mm. 


In the large specimen all the segments of the pereeon and pleon are rounded 
dorsally ; the pleon is slightly compressed but not cariate ; teeth are present on the 
first and second segments of the urus as described; the third uropods are missing. 
The female specimens also show no carination on the pereon or pleon, and have the 
third uropods of moderate size only. The upper antenne are considerably longer than 
half the body ; the second joint of peduncle is as long as the first, and the flagellum is 
considerably longer than the peduncle. In the lower antennz the flagellum is longer 
than the last joint of the peduncle. Except for the absence of carination, the specimens 
agree closely with PFrEFFER’s description. 

This fine species is now known from South Georgia, South Orkneys, Port Charcot, 
Booth Wandel and Hovgaard Islands. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS,, VOL. XLVI, 500.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 219 


Genus Mara Leach, 1813. 


Mera mastersu (Haswell). 


Megamera mastersii Haswell, 1880a, p. 265, pl. xi. fig. 1 


i thomsont Miers, 1884, p. 318, pl. xxxiv. fig. B. 
Mera mastersit Stebbing, 1906, p. 439. 
4 5 Chilton, 1911, p. 594. 


South Africa, entrance to Saldanha Bay, Station 483; 25 fathoms. Five 
specimens, the largest 10 mm. long. 


Although they show some differences, | think these specimens may be referred to 
this species. On the whole they agree fairly well with Haswetv’s description ; and if 
the form described as Megamera thomsoni by Mrnrs really belongs here, the species is 
evidently a variable one. My specimens differ from the description given by SrEBBING 
in Das Tierreich in the following points —The third segment of the pleon has the 
posterior angle produced so as to be acute, but the hind margin is hardly denticu- 
late ; the eyes are small, almost round ; in the upper antenna the first joint has a stout 
spinule at its lower distal margin, the accessory flagellum contains seven joints; the 
flagellum of the second antenna is considerably longer than the last joint of the 
peduncle. In the first gnathopod the carpus and propod are hardly slender, each 
having the posterior margin convex and agreeing fairly well with Haswe v's description ; 
this appendage shows considerable resemblance to that of Elasmopoides chevreuxr 
Stebbing, but the carpus and propod have the hind margins less strongly convex than 
in that species. The second gnathopod agrees well with the description. The third, 
fourth, and fifth perseopoda are fairly stout, the basal joint has the hind margin only 
finely serrated. The uropoda and the telson agree well with HasweE v's description. 
The specimens are colourless (in spirit) and do not show the light yellowish- brown 
colour mentioned by Srespine, which was present in the Kermadec Island specimens | 
examined in 1911. In the rather stout pereeopoda and in some other points they 
have rather the appearance of an H/asmopus. 

This species is widely distributed in the warmer southern seas. 


Genus PAraDEXAMINE Stebbing, 1899. 


Paradexamine pacifica (G. M. Thomson). 


Dexamine pacifica G. M. Thomson, 1879, p. 238, pl. x.n, fig. 4. 
Paradexamina pacifica Stebbing, 1906, p. 518. 
3 5 Chilton, 1909a, p. 632. 


Paradexamina fissicawda Chevreux, 19068, p. 88, figs. 51-53. 


South Orkneys, Station 325; 9-10 fathoms. April and May 1903. Four 
specimens, the largest 17 mm. long. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 501.) 


220 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; 2-8 fathoms, gravel and clumps of 
weed. Temperature 29°-30°. 6th December 1903. Several specimens, 
the largest 14 mm. in length. 

These specimens are in most respects intermediate between P. pacifica and P. 
Jissicauda, They agree with the latter species, except that the last segments of the 
perzeon are without dorsal teeth, or, in the largest, with a small tooth on the last 
segment only. In this species, as in so many others, the dorsal teeth evidently vary, 
for STEBBING notes the same thing in his description of P. pacifica. The Scotia specimens 
have the lateral angle of the head rounded, as in P. fissicauda, and they resemble that 
species also in the greater stoutness and the proportions of the joints of the antennze 
and pereopoda; the telson, however, is not split right to the base, but only very 
deeply, as in P. pacifica. 

Through the kindness of Mr Sressrne I have been able to examine specimens of 
P. pacifica from New Zealand sent to him years ago by Mr Tomson. The comparison 
of these with the Scotia specimens shows that it is not possible to maintain the two as 
separate species. In the carination of the body, in the uropoda and telson, the New 
Zealand specimens resemble those from the South Orkneys. They differ, however, in 
having the appendages slightly more slender ; thus the upper antennze may have the 
second joint of the peduncle considerably longer than the first, and in the pereopoda 
the propod may be nearly as long as the carpus, instead of being shorter, as described 
by Cuevreux. In them, too, the lateral angle of the head is produced into a small, 
sharp, acute point. 

If we had to deal only with the New Zealand specimens and those from Wandel 
Island, it might be possible to look upon the latter as a separate but closely allied 
species ; but, if that were done, a new species would have to be made for the South 
Orkneys specimens, with characters almost precisely intermediate between those of the 
other two, while future examination of specimens from some fresh locality would probably 
necessitate the establishment of another intermediate species on very trivial points of 
difference. I therefore think it much the best course to consider all the specimens as 
belonging to one widely spread sub-Antarctic and Antarctic species which, through isola- 
tion, has become slightly modified into two or three local varieties. 


Genus PoLtycHERIA Haswell, 1879. 


Polycheria antarctica (Stebbing). 


Dexamine antarctica Stebbing, 1875, p. 184, pl. xv.a, fig. 1. 
Polycheria tenuipes Haswell, 1880s, p. 345, pl. xxii. fig. 8. 
ee »  Stebbing, 1906, p. 520. 
- brevicornis Haswell, 1880n, p. 346. 
is obtusa G. M. Thomson, 1882, p. 233, pl. xvii. fig. 3. 
Triteta kerqueleni Stebbing, 1888, p. 941, pl. Ixxxiii. 
»  antarctica Walker, 1904, p. 266, pl. iv. fig. 25. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 502.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 221 


Polycheria antarctica Stebbing, 1906, p. 520. 

af fa Walker, 1907, p. 34. 
Triteta osborni Calman, 1898, p. 268, pl. xxxii. fig. 2, and p. 288. 
Polycheria atolli Walker, 1905, p. 926, pl. Ixxxvuii. figs. 1-5. 


Entrance to Saldanha Bay, Station 483. One specimen, 6 mm. long. 
South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325. Many specimens, all of small size, 
averaging 2 mm. in length. 


The specimen from Saldanha Bay is, I think, specifically identical with the 
Challenger form described under the name Tritxta kergueleni. The eye is very large, 
occupying the greater part of the side of the head; the posterior angle of the third 
pleon segment is quadrate, with a very short tooth, and the pleon and urus have the 
carination described, though to a less degree ; the antennze agree with the description 
as regards the proportions of the joints, the lower being a little longer than the upper ; 
the branches of the third uropods are slightly unequal. 

In the large eye and in other essential points it also agrees with P. tenuwipes Has- 
well, and with P. obtusa G. M. Thomson, whose description of the terminal joints of 
the perzopoda applies exactly to the specimen under consideration. In describing 
his specimen Mr THomson pointed out that it was probably the same as P. tenuzpes 
Haswell. On the other hand, the Saldanha Bay specimen differs from the Kerguelen 
Island one in the side plates, which are not so acutely produced anteriorly. 

The specimens from South Orkneys are all small. The eye is of much smaller size, 
and the carination of the pleon is absent altogether or only slightly marked ; the joints 
in the flagella of the antenne are fewer in number, and the two antenné are about 
equal in length ; the outer branch of the third uropod is only about half the length of 
the inner; both the third and the fourth side plates are produced anteriorly into 
an acute lobe exactly like that figured by Srespine for P. antarctica (1906, p. 520, 
fig. 91). In this respect, therefore, they differ from his description of P. tenurpes, with 
which they agree in some of the other points mentioned, for that species is described 
in Das Tierreich Amphipoda as having the fourth side plate reduced to a short, blunt 
lobe, this character being apparently taken from CatMayn’s description of P. osborne, 
which STEBBING gives as a synonym of P. tenwipes. 

These South Orkneys specimens are apparently immature, although the characteristic 
form of the terminal joints of the pereopoda and of the third and fourth side plates is 
already present, and I think there can be no doubt they belong to the same species as 
the Saldanha Bay specimen. In the smaller eye they resemble P. brevicornis Haswell, 
which does not seem to be separated from P. tenwipes by any other character of 
importance. Mr WALKER (1907, p. 34) has pointed out that Haswetv’s description of 
the second gnathopod of P. tenwipes and of P. brevicornis, and his figure of that of the 
first species, are quite unlike those of P. antarctica. The figure is undoubtedly very 
rough and insufficient, but the descriptions, so far as they go, are not inconsistent with 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 503.) 


222 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


either the Saldanha Bay or the South Orkneys specimens before me, and these, as | 
have said, must, [ think, be referred to P. antarctica. 

STEBBING, in 1906, made P. osbornz Calman a synonym of P. tenwipes Haswell, to 
which he also assigned P. obtusa G. M. Thomson and, with a “?”, P. brevicornis 
Haswell. 

In describing P. osborni, CALMAN referred to the southern species described, and 
said they ‘“‘are probably all referable to one.” If this is done, however, it will then 
certainly be impossible to retain his species as distinct. This will be seen if we take 
the points of difference in order :— 

1. Dorsal processes of urus much less prominent. This applies also to the South 
Orkneys specimens, and, to a less degree, to the Saldanha Bay specimen. 

2. Maxillipeds with outer plates nearly equalling the palp in length and bearing 
only about eleven spines. In the South Orkneys specimens the plates bear only 
eleven spines, though they are rather shorter than the palp. In P. atolli, too, WALKER 
describes the spines on the outer plate as few in number and present on the distal 
portion of the margin only. 

3. Propod of first gnathopod with palmar edge short and not more than one-third 
the length of the dactyl. In the Saldanha Bay specimen the gnathopod agrees well 
with CaLMan’s description, except that the palm is perhaps a little longer. From the 
appearance of this specimen, however, | think the palm is really longer than is shown 
in CatMan’s figure, and that the lobe against which the dactyl is represented as 
impinging is overlapped by the dactyl folding in on one side of it. If this is so, there 
is no essential difference between the palm of P. osborni and that of P. antarctica 
as figured by Srepsine under the name P. kergueleni. 

Catman’s description of the second gnathopod agrees quite well with that of the 
Saldanha Bay specimen. 

4. Fourth side plate having the anterior process reduced to a short, blunt Jobe. 
This applies also to the Saldanha Bay specimen and to P. atoll: Walker. 

5. Propod of third perzeopod not widening distally. Both the Saldanha Bay and 
the South Orkneys specimens agree in this point with Catman’s figure rather than with 
STEBBING’S; the difference is one of degree only, and the widening is probably more 
marked in older specimens. 

In view of all the considerations mentioned above, I feel compelled to unite also 
P. atolli Walker, from the Male Atoll, Maldive Archipelago, with P. antarctica. 
His description of the gnathopoda and of the first and second pereopoda, and of the 
side plates corresponding to these appendages, applies very well indeed to the Saldanha 
Bay specimen and also fairly well to P. osborni; but in the fewer spines and teeth on 
the outer plate of the maxillipeds and on the uropoda, P. atolli agrees rather with the 
South Orkneys specimens. Its chief peculiarity seems to be the fact that the palp of 
the first maxilla has “the top squarely truncate and crowned with short teeth,” but in 
view of the other characters this is hardly sufficient to maintain it as a separate species. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 504.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 223 


The very large eye (red in colour, at least sometimes) found in some of the forms 
is certainly a very striking characteristic, and if it were constantly associated with other 
characters or with certain localities it would be entitled to great weight; but some 
specimens have the large eye associated with side plates which are not acutely produced 
anteriorly, while in the Kerguelen specimen the eye is large (black in this case) and the 
side plates are acutely produced; again, both the large-eyed and the small-eyed forms 
are found together in Port Jackson. It is just possible that the large eye is a sexual 
character, or it may be developed in older specimens which live at moderate depths, as 
appears to be the case in Husirus antarcticus. 

I have thus failed to find the characters relied upon for specific distinction in this 
genus constantly associated in any definite way, and am forced to conclude that all the 
forms belong to one species widely spread in southern seas and found also in the North 
Atlantic and in the Indian Ocean. 

In addition to the localities mentioned above, the species P. antarctica has more 
recently been recorded from Ceylon by Mr Watker, so that the conclusion that we are 
dealing with one species only, first arrived at on morphological grounds, is now con- 
firmed by the geographical distribution of the species. 

After the discussion as given above had been written, I was able to visit the British 
Museum and examine there the types of the different species; Mr WALKER also 
kindly sent me a specimen of P. atollz, and in doing so said that he now considered it 
probably not distinct from P. antarctica. I was able at the Museum to examine the 
type slides of Triteta kerqueleni Stebbing and of P. atolli Walker, and also to 
examine named specimens of P. osborni Calman, P. antarctica from the Discovery 
Expedition, and of P. antarctica recorded from Ceylon by Mr Watker. The slide of 
the dissected parts of the Challenger specimen of Triteta kerqueleni is not in very good 
condition, but it is evidently the one from which Mr Srepsine’s excellent figures were 
made, and these are sufticient for our present purpose. 

The type specimen of P. atoll: has the first maxilla with short spinules on the palp 
as described, and the maxillipeds also correspond closely to the figure given, but in all 
other essentials it agrees with my Saldanha Bay specimen, both gnathopods closely 
agreeing, except that in the first the flange on the propod has the margin minutely 
serrate ; the first and second perzeopoda, again, have side plates similar to those in the 
Saldanha Bay specimen. An examination of P. osborni showed that this species also 
was the same as the Saldanha Bay specimen, and therefore the same as P. atolli. The 
side plate of the first gnathopod is produced in front a little more acutely than in the 
type of P. atoll, and is tipped with two small sete; the side plate of the second 
gnathopod is also produced in front, but not so’ acutely as the first, and might be 
described as being narrowly rounded anteriorly ; that of the first pereeopod is acutely 
produced, while the second is rounded as described by Catman. ‘The eye is large. 

The Discovery specimens labelled P. antarctica undoubtedly agree specifically 
with SreBBING’s type of Tritxta kergueleni in having the side plates all more or less 


(ROY. 80C. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 505.) 


224 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


acute, those of both the first and second pereeopoda being acutely produced in front ; 
the eye is large, showing a little colour in the spirit specimens and probably having 
been red in the living animal, but it is not so large as in the Saldanha Bay specimen. 
The terminal joints of the perseopoda are rather wide distally, as shown in STEBBING's 
figure. 

It seemed possible, therefore, that after all we might perhaps be dealing with two 
species: one P. antarctica, with side plates more or less acutely produced in front, the 
other P. tenuipes (including P. osborni and P. atollc), in which some of the side plates 
were rounded in front, although, as already shown, the differences did not appear to be 
constant. Considerable interest was therefore attached to the examination of the 
specimens from Ceylon referred by WALKER to T’riteta antarctica, to see if they were 
really distinct from P. atolli. It was found that in some points they are a little 
nearer to P. antarctica than the type specimen of P. atoll: is; thus, for example, the 
side plates of the first gnathopod are acutely produced in front as in P. antarctica ; the 
side plates of the second gnathopod, however, are rounded below. ‘The side plates of 
the first and second pereopoda cannot be very clearly made out, but they appear to 
be fairly acute in front, though projecting rather more posteriorly than shown in 
Srepsine’s figure. In other points, however, these Ceylon specimens were clearly the 
same as P. atolli, and the eye is large and shows little colour in the spirit specimens. 
Consequently, after considerable hesitation, | was forced to remain at the conclusion at 
which [ had previously arrived, that it is impossible to separate the various forms into 
two species. The species has more recently been recorded from the east coast of Africa 
by Mr Waxker under the name of P. atollz, and it was some confirmation of the 
conclusion I arrived at to find that specimens in the Museum from this locality, 
though recorded under the name P. atolli, were in the separate tube labelled by him 
P. antarctica. 

It seems clear that here, as in other cases, we have one widely distributed species, 
most abundant in Antarctic and sub-Antarctic seas, but extending far to the north 
both in the Indian seas and in the Pacific, and that, although it is impossible to 
find constant characters for the separation of it into two distinct species, there are 
slight local differences, some showing one combination of characters, others another 
combination. 

A small specimen of this species was among some undetermined Amphipoda, 
collected at South Georgia in 1882-83, that were submitted to me by the authorities of 
the Hamburg Museum. 

[After the whole discussion of this species as given above had been written, I found 
further specimens from South Orknéys in a bottle of “residues” received in May 1912 
from various collections made at Scotia Bay in 1903. Some of these specimens were 
larger than those from the South Orkneys mentioned above, the largest bemg about 
5 mm. long. In the largest specimens the eye was very large, and red in colour, as in 
the Saldanha Bay and other specimens already referred to; in smaller specimens the 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 506.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 225 


eye showed intermediate sizes, though in none of those examined was it quite so small 
as in the small South Orkneys specimens first examined. ‘The side plates seem to be 
acutely produced as described for Triteta kergueleni; but in at least one specimen the 
anterior lobe of the second perzeopod was only subacute, and was shorter than that in 
the first pereeopod. In the third uropods the outer branch is about half as long as the 
inner ; in both branches the extremity is narrowed, almost free from setee, and curves 
upwards, 

In these respects, therefore, these additional specimens tend to confirm the con- 
clusion arrived at that all the forms of Polycheria are referable to one species. They 
present a peculiarity, however, in having the telson particularly long, reaching to the 
end of the third uropod ; in side view it appears thick, scarcely narrowing distally, and 
the margin is fringed with stout spinules. In the smaller South Orkneys specimens it 
is much shorter, reaching hardly half way along the branches of the uropod, and the 
spinules on it are few and much less prominent. In the specimen figured in the 
Challenger Report the telson is intermediate, reaching more than half way to the end 
of the third uropod, and bearing numerous spinules. In the smallest of the additional 
specimens now being described it is hardly so long as in the largest, but still longer 
than in some Discovery specimens from M‘Murdo Sound that are themselves larger 
in size. It seems probable that the especially long and strong telson is a character 
developed beyond the average, like the large eye, and that it attains its full size only 
in specimens of a definite age—possibly it lengthens rapidly at a particular moult. | 


Genus Notorropis A. Costa, 1853. 


Nototropis homochir (Haswell). 


Atylus homochir Haswell, 1885, p. 101, pl. xiii. figs. 5-7. 

Nototropis homochir Stebbing, 1906, p. 333, figs. 77 and 78. 
” » 56 1910a, p. 639. 

1910s, p. 455. 


” ” ” 


South Africa, entrance to Saldanha Bay, Station 483; 25 fathoms. 21st May 
1904. Several specimens, largest 10 mm. long. 


These agree with SreBBING’s description, except in a few small points: e.g. the third 
joint of the palp of the mandible is not longer than the second, but barely equal to it 
in length; the lower hind corner of the basal joint of the third perseopod (in the 
female) is slightly produced into a small subacute lobe; that of the fourth is not 
produced, but in the fifth perzeopod it is produced as a subacute lobe reaching about 
to the end of the ischium. 

The points which distinguish this species from some of those found in northern 
seas, e.g. from N. vedlomensis (Bate and Westwood), do not seem to be very great; 
it appears to differ from that species, however, in the amount of production of the 
basal joints of the perzeopoda three to five, and in the size and arrangement of the 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 507.) 


226 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


carinate teeth on the pleon and urus. Drtita VALLE in 1893 united both these two 
species and several others under the name Atylus swammerdamu (Milne Edwards). 
The southern species is known from Australia and South Africa. 
Another species which appears to belong to this genus was described in 1862 by 
Spence Bare under the name Atylus villosus, from specimens obtained at Hermit 
Island in the South Atlantic by the Antarctic Expedition under Sir James CLaRKE Ross. 


Genus TALORCHESTIA. 


Talorchestia scutigerula (Dana). 


Orchestia scutigerula Dana, 1853 and 1855, p. 863, pl. lviii. fig. 2. 
5 Spence Bate, 1862, p. 26, pl. iv. fig. 7. 
Talorchestia scutigerula Stebbing, 1906, p. 545. 
Falkland Islands, near Port Stanley, Station 118; from banks of a fresh-water 
We ? 
peaty stream. 7th January 1903. Two males and three females, the 
largest male 15 mm. in length. 


These specimens agree very well with the description as given in Das Tierreich 
Amphipoda. he large expansion on the second joint of the fifth pereeopod is very 
striking, and is very similar to the expansion on the fifth joint in Talorchestia telluris 
(Bate). 

The species is known from Tierra del Fuego as well as from the Falkland Islands, 
and it was taken at Hermit Island in the South Atlantic, during the Antarctic 
Expedition under Sir J. C. Ross in 1840. 


Genus Hyatz. 


Ayale grandicornas (Kroyer). 
Orchestia grandicornis Kroyer, 1845, p. 292, pl. i. fig. 2 a—n. 
Allorchestes verticillata and A. peruviana Dana, 1855, p. 886, pl. Ix. figs. 2 and 3. 
Hyale grandicornis Stebbing, 1906, p. 566. 
Gough Island, Station 461; shore. One male, 12 mm. long. 


I refer this specimen to KROyER’s species without much doubt. It agrees minutely 
with the description of all its characters given by Stespine in Das Tierreich, particu- 
larly im the pectination of the finger of the perzeopoda ; the setule on the finger is rather 
long and fairly distinct, but not strong. The hind margin of the basal joint of the fourth 
perzeopod is furnished with small spinules as described, but they are very small, and they 
are also present, though not in quite such numbers, in the third and fifth perzeopoda. 
Both the first and the second gnathopoda agree very closely with the description. 

This species was described originally from Valparaiso, and H. nove-zealandix 
(G. M. Thomson), which is found in New Zealand itself and in the sub-Antarctic islands 
lying to the south of it, appears to be almost the same. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 508.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 227 


Hyale saldanha, sp. nov. (PI. IL. figs. 24-29.) 


South Africa, entrance to Saldanha Bay, Station 483; 25 fathoms. 21st May 
1905. Several specimens, males and females, the largest about 9 mm. long. 


Specific Description.—Male.—Back rounded, not carinate, and without dorsal teeth. 
Pleon segment three, with postero-lateral corner quadrate with slightly produced point. 
Eyes of moderate size, round. The first antenna (fig. 24) reaches to the middle of the 
flagellum of the second ; peduncle with first jomt much longer and broader than the 
second, and produced below at its distal end into a rather broad expansion, which appears 
to have a vertical flange, and at the lower part of this a thicker conical portion tipped 
with two setze ; second joint with a smaller similar expansion ; flagellum of sixteen joints 
all bearing a fairly distinct tuft of long setze at the lower distal angle. Second antenna 
(fig. 24) about one-third the length of the body ; last two joints of the peduncle sub- 
equal; flagellum of about thirty-five joints. First enathopod (fig. 27) with the basos 
rather broad except at the base; the carpus short, triangular, its posterior margin pro- 
duced into a rounded fringed lobe ; propod oblong, widening slightly distally, front margin 
convex and smooth, hind margin straight or very slightly concave, with a group of 
spinules at the centre ; palm oblique, slightly convex, shorter than hind margin, defined 
by two stout spinules, the finger fitting closely up against the palm. 

Second gnathopod (fig. 28) with basos expanded distally into a flange on the outer 
margin, ending in a rounded lobe at the extremity ; ischium with a similar rounded pro- 
cess; merus short, its apex subacute ; carpus very short, fitting closely into the emargin- 
ation on the base of propod; propod large, oval, slightly narrowing distally, its anterior 
border regularly convex and smooth; palm oblique, longer than the hind margin, 
straight except for a rounded process near the base of the finger, fringed with a double 
row of short spinules and defined by two stout spines ; finger stout, fitting into a small 
pocket at the end of the palm. Pereeopoda one to five robust ; propod slightly curved, 
especially in the last three pairs, its concave margin bearing at regular intervals three 
stout spinules of about equal size, all minutely serrated towards the end, but without 
a specially large serrated spine ; posterior border of propod unarmed ; finger strong, 
about half the length of the propod, much curved, inner setule very small; in the third 
pereopod (fig. 29) the basos is rounded, projecting inferiorly as far as the end of the 
ischium, in the fourth and fifth similar, but in the fourth the basos is slightly narrower 
than in the third and fifth ; hind margins of basos in all either smooth or only faintly 
erenulate. Uropoda short, the first with peduncle about as long as the branches, and with 
two or three spinules along its lateral margins and a stout curved spine at the distal end ; 
branches subequal, with lateral and terminal spinules. Second uropod similar, but with 
peduncle shorter than the branches. Third uropods with the branch rather shorter than 
the base, both with stout terminal spinules. Telson with a stout spinule on each half. 

Female.—Similar to the male, except in the gnathopoda, which are shown in 
figs. 25 and 26. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 509.) 


228 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


I have been forced to make a new species for these specimens from South Africa, 
from which locality no species of Hyale appears to have been hitherto recorded. The 
species appears to come very close to H. camptonyx (Heller), from the Mediterranean 
and North Atlantic, but it differs in a few points mentioned in the description above, and 
particularly in the peculiar and apparently characteristic expansion of the first joint of 
the peduncle of the upper antenna. HH. schmadti (Heller), also from the North Atlantic, 
seems to be pretty closely allied also, but has the second antenna much longer. 

In many respects the present species is similar to H. media (Dana), which is known 
from several localities on the borders of the Atlantic Ocean, but it seems to be clearly 
distinguished from that species by the absence of the “very large submedian serrate 
spine” on the propod of pereopoda 8 to 5. 


Genus HapiocHerra Haswell, 1879. 
Haplocheira barbimana (G. M. Thomson). 


Gammarus barbimanus G. M. Thomson, 1879, p. 241, pl. x.p, fig. 1. 
Haplocheira barbimana Stebbing, 1906, p. 609. 
Walker, 1907, p. 35. 


” 


South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325; 9-10 fathoms. May 1903. Five 
specimens. 


The largest of these specimens is 7 mm. long. They agree closely with New 
Zealand specimens. 
The species is widely distributed in southern seas. 


Genus HURYSTHEUS. 
(?) Eurystheus afer (Stebbing). (Pl. II. figs. 30-34.) 


Gammaropsis afra Stebbing, 1888, p. 1097, pl. exili. 
Eurystheus afer Stebbing, 1906, p. 612. 
19108, p. 461. 


Gough Island, Station 461; trawl, 100 fathoms. 23rd April 1904. Two small 
specimens: the one a male, 4 mm., probably immature ; the other a female, 
5 mm. 


I refer these specimens to this species with considerable doubt; but if, as Mr 
STEBBING suggests, . atlanticus is only a variety of this species, it appears to be a 
variable one, and it may perhaps be extended sufficiently to include forms now being 
considered, The male specimen probably has not acquired the fully adult characters. 

The female specimen differs from Srepprine’s description in having the eyes oval 
and of normal shape; the first gnathopod (fig. 30) has the carpus longer than the 
propod, and the whole limb is more slender; the second gnathopod (fig. 31) is also 
longer, the carpus is not cup-shaped but sub-triangular, widening distally, and is about 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLYIII., 510.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 229 


two-thirds as long as the propod. The third uropods have the branches equal in length 
and rather longer than the peduncle. In other respects the specimen agrees fairly well 
with Srespine’s description, and the lateral lobe of the head is acutely pointed as in 
that species. 

The form that I consider the immature male differs from the female in the second 
enathopods (fig. 33), which are of the same general shape, with a moderately long carpus 
but with the propod larger and stouter, its palm more oblique and bearing three short 
conical acute teeth, one near the base of the finger, one beyond the point on which the 
end of the finger impinges, and one midway between these two. The third and fifth 
perzeopoda are peculiar in having the merus widely dilated so as to be fully half as 
broad as long (see fig. 34); in the fourth pereeopod the merus is of the usual shape. 
Whether this expansion of the merus is a sexual character, or an individual variation 
in the particular specimen examined, I cannot say. 


Genus JASSA. 


Jassa faleata (Montagu). 


Cancer (Gammarus) falcatus Montagu, 1808, Trans. Linn. Soc., vol, ix. p. 100, pl. v. fig. 2. 
Podocerus falcatus and P. validus Stebbing, 1888, p. 1132, pl. exix., and p. 1135, pl. exxxviii.s. 
56 ingens Pfeffer, 1888, p. 131. 
5 australis Haswell, 1880, p. 338, pl. xxi. fig. 8. 
Jassa pulchella Stebbing, 1906, p. 654, 
y i Chilton, 1909, p. 647. 
goniamera Walker, 19034, p. 61, pl. xi. figs. 98-106. 
wandelt Chevreux, 19068, p. 94, figs. 54-56. 
falcata E. W. Sexton, 1911, p. 212. 

[I have given only the chief references relating to the occurrence of this species in 
southern seas. The very numerous references to its occurrence in the northern 
hemisphere can be readily traced from those here given. | 

South Orkneys, Scotia Bay, Station 325, and Macdougal Bay, Station 326n. 
Several specimens of both sexes and of various ages. 

Station 414, lat. 71° 50’ S., long. 23° 30’ W.; vertical net, from surface to 
1000 fathoms. 15th March 1904. One specimen. 

Mrs Sexton, who has specially studied this species, believes that there are at least 
two different forms of the adult male. 

When I came to examine the South Orkneys specimens it became quite clear that 
some of them were almost, if not quite, the same as the northern species, and that the 
males belonged to what Mrs Sexron has described as the ‘ 
agree almost exactly in the characters given of the second antenna and of the 
gnathopods for this form; and females of this form were also present. As there are 


‘second form.” The males 


two forms known of this species in European seas, it was to be expected that, if the 
South Orkneys species was really the same species, the “first form” would also be 
found there. This actually proved to be the case, for two specimens from Macdougal 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 511.) 


230 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


Bay agree almost exactly with Plymouth males of the first form. I have been able to 
compare my specimens with specimens of both forms determined by Mrs Sexton, and 
she has been good enough to examine them along with me, and agrees that the South 
Orkneys specimens are not sufficiently distinct to be looked upon as a separate species. 

I have also been able to compare my specimens with numerous forms labelled 
Podocerus ingens Pfeffer, from South Georgia, kindly sent to me by the authorities of 
the Hamburg Museum. Most of these appear to belong to the “first form,” and agree 
closely with Plymouth specimens ; they differ a little in the shape of the side plate of 
the second gnathopod, but the difference is slight, and there is a gap between this and 
the preceding side plate as described by Mrs Sexron. The second gnathopod itself 
agrees almost precisely with Plymouth specimens, both in the fully mature form and 
in the immature stages. In the flagellum of the lower antenna the joints are usually 
a little more distinct than in typical Plymouth specimens, but in the South Georgia 
specimens there is some variation in this point; apparently the joints are more distinct 
in younger forms and become more fully coalesced in the older ones; they bear the 
characteristic plumose hairs as described by Mrs Sexton. Prerrer’s type of Podocerus 
mgens, which I have also been able to examine, is a very large specimen, 26 mm. in 
length. Though apparently belonging to the first form, it differs a little in the shape 
of the second gnathopod; the thumb is comparatively small, and at its base on the 
outer side there is a small secondary notch or tooth that does not seem to be repre- 
sented in the smaller specimens labelled Podocerus ingens. It is possible that this 
large form may be a separate species, but I am inclined to think that it is only a very 
large form of Jassa falcata, and that the differences are merely those that we might 
expect to meet in such a very large form. Jassa goniamera Walker seems certainly 
to belong to J. falcata; the specimen he described and figured under this name is an 
immature male of the first form. He states that the third uropod bears no secondary 
teeth on the outer branch. In all the specimens that I have been able to examine I 
have found teeth present, as in the Plymouth specimens, though small ; occasionally 
these may become lost in preserved specimens, and I presume that is what has 
happened in the specimens examined by Mr Watker. Jassa wandeli Chevreux, 
again, appears undoubtedly to be another specimen of the same species; his figure 54 
is taken from a male not quite fully mature, and shows the characteristic gap between 
the first and second side plates, while the lower antenna exactly corresponds, both in 
his figure and description, to that of the first form of the male. In the specimen 
he figures, the various joints of the flagellum appear to be slightly more completely 
coalesced than they are in some of the South Georgia and South Orkneys specimens, 
and thus more like Plymouth specimens of this form. 

I have long been familiar with this species under the name of Podocerus validus 
Dana in New Zealand, and it has been described from Australia by Professor Haswet 
under the name Podocerus australis. In his report on the Challenger Amphipoda 
Mr Sresprne recorded it from Kerguelen Island under the name Podocerus falcata, 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 512.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 231 


and suggested that it had possibly been carried out from northern seas by attaching 
itself to the hull of the vessel. Though marine crustacea doubtless are occasionally 
dispersed in this way by ships, we now know that Jassa falcata is a cosmopolitan 
species, and its occurrence in Kerguelen Island can therefore be otherwise accounted 
for. It has been pointed out by Mr G. M. THomson and myself that the animal often 
temporarily attaches itself to the carapace of large crustacea, such as Jasus edwardsii 
Hutton, and probably its dispersal is assisted in this way. 

The brief notice I have given above gives only a faint idea of the complex forms of 
this species and of the changes it passes through. These forms and its full life history 
are being worked out by Mrs Sexton and others at the Marine Laboratory, Plymouth, 
and I have been greatly assisted in the identification of my specimens by the com- 
munication of some of the results already obtained but not yet fully published. 


Genus CapreLLA Lamark, 1801. 
Caprella xquilibra Say. 


Caprella xquilibra Say, 1818, p. 391. 
m 33 Mayer, 1903, pp. 75, 89, pl. iii. figs. 29-34, pl. vii. figs. 66-69. 
y Stebbing, 19108, p. 466. 
South Africa, entrance to Saldanha Bay, Station 483; trawl, 25 fathoms. 
21st May 1904. One immature male. 


The specimen is not fully mature, but I think undoubtedly belongs to this widely 
distributed species. 

It is worthy of note that this is the only Caprellid taken during the expedition, 
and that the family seems to be quite absent from the Antarctic fauna, and only very 
poorly represented in the sub-Antarctic. 


Genus Hyprria Latreille and Desmarest, 1823. 


Hyperia gaudichaudii Milne Edwards. 
Hyperia gaudichaudii Milne Edwards, 1840, vol. i. p. 77. 
5 p Stebbing, 1888, p. 1394, p. 169. 

5 Walker, 1907, p. 7. 

Falkland Islands, Stanley Harbour, Station 118; ‘‘ectoparasitic on jelly-fish.” 
7th January 1903. Several males, females, and young; the largest female 
being 15 mm. long. 

Station 541; 37° 41’ N., 29° 25’ W., surface; hand-net. 3rd July 1904. 
“Associated with Aurelia caught at the same time.” Two males. 

Station 112; surface, lat. 46° 3’S., long. 56° 30’ W. 3rd January 1903. Many 
specimens, all of small size, the largest 6 mm. 

These specimens all seem undoubtedly to belong to this widely distributed species, 
which has already been recorded from Antarctic regions by Mr WALKER. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVI, 513.) 


232 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


Genus VIBILIA. 


Vibiha antarctica Stebbing. 


Vibilia antarctica Stebbing, 1888, pp. 1290, pl. cl. 
»  propinqua Walker, 1907, p. 6. 
Station 422, lat. 68° 32’S., long. 12° 49’ W.; 8 ft. vertical net, surface to 800 
fathoms. 23rd March 1904. Two specimens, 10 mm. long. 


These specimens appear to be the adults of this species, which was described from an 
immature form by Mr Stessrnc. Dr A. Beunine, who has worked out the Vibilide of 
the German South Polar and other Expeditions, informs me that this species appears 
to be the typical Antarctic species, though extending also some distance north, and that 
it is very close to V. propinqua, but is distinguished by the long carpal process and 
the poor development of the eyes. J presume this is the same species as that recorded 
by WaLkKER under the name of V. propinqua from the Discovery Expedition. 


Genus EUTHEMISTO. 


Euthemisto thomsoni Stebbing. 


Themisto antarctica G. M. Thomson, 1879, p. 243, pl. x.p, figs. 2 and 3. 
Huthemisto thomsoni Stebbing, 1888, p. 1414, pls. exxiv. and exxv. 
5 - =A 1910p, p. 655. 


Station 468, lat. 39° 48’ S., long. 2° 33’ E.; ‘trawl, 2645 fathoms.” 29th April 
1904. One specimen, doubtless obtained from the surface. 


This specimen agrees closely with the description given by STEBBinc in the 
Challenger Report, and I give it under the name that is used both there and in his 
recent report on the collections of the Thet’s from Australia, without entering into 
discussion of the validity of the actual name. 


IV. Tropica, and NortuH ATLANTIC SPECIES. 


Genus Synopra Dana, 1852. 


Synopia schéeleana Bovallius. 


Synopia schéeleana Bovallius, 1886, NV. Acta. Soc. Upsal., ser. 3, vol. xiil., 
No. 9, p. 16, pl. il. figs. 22-29. 


a * Stebbing, 1888, p. 799, pl. cii. 
” 9 9 1906, p. 272. 
s 8 Chevreux, 1900, p. 64. 


Station 62, Tropical Atlantic, lat. 4° 15’ 8., long 33° 38’ W. 13th December 
1901. Three or four small, delicate specimens, the largest 3 mm. long. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVUL, 514.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 233 


These specimens agree closely with the description and figures given by STEBBING in 
his Challenger Report. 

The species is known from the warm waters of the Pacific and the Atlantic Oceans. 
It is perhaps not distinct from Synopia ultramarina Dana, with which it is united by 
De.ia VALLE. 


Genus Hyate H. Rathke, 1837. 


Hyale grimaldi Chevreux. 


Hyale grimaldii Chevreux, 1891, p. 257, figs. 1-5, and 1900, p. 10, pl. 11. fig. 2. 
» » Stebbing, 1906, p. 567. 
St Vincent, Station 24; among seaweed on shore. Ist December 1902. One 
male and one female; the male 3 mm. long. 


Although these specimens are too small for certain identification, I think they must 
belong to this species. The gnathopoda of the male agree well with CHEvreux’s descrip- 
tion, having the flange on the side of the basal joint, as described, and the propod is of 
the same shape, though the rounded lobe on the palm near the base of the finger is not 
so well marked. ‘The lower antenneze are hardly so stout as shown in CHEVREUX’S figure. 

The species was previously known from the North Atlantic. 


Genus ALLORCHESTES Dana, 1849. 


Allorchestes plumicornis (Heller). 


Nicea plumicornis Heller, 1866, p. 5, pl. i. figs. 8 and 9. 
Allorchestes plumicornis Stebbing, 1906, p. 583. 


a - Walker, 1901, p. 299, pl. xxvii. figs. 20 and 21. 
* a Chevreux, 1911, p. 241, pl. xvii. figs. 1-3. 
St Vincent, Station 24; north-east beach. 1st December 1902. Four small 
specimens. 


There is no fully developed male among these specimens, but from the characters of 
the females I think they must belong to this species. The largest is probably immature, 
as the upper antennze have only eleven joints in the flagellum and the lower fourteen ; 
about half the joints in the latter bear tufts of long sensory set, the tufts decreasing in 
size distally ; there is also a tuft on the distal end of the last joint of the peduncle, but 
none on the other parts of the peduncle. The second gnathopod agrees well with 
WALKER’ figure ; the dacty] of all the perseopoda bears the prominent setule on the inner 
margin, and in the remaining characters the specimens agree well with the descriptions 
given by STEBBING and CHEVREUX. 

The species is well known from various parts of the Mediterranean, but does not 
appear to have been recorded from St Vincent. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 515.) 


234 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


Genus SUNAMPHITOE Bate, 1857. 


Sunamphitoe pelagica (Milne Edwards). 


Amphithoe pelagica Milne Edwards, 1830, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. xx. p. 378. 
Sunamplhitoe pelagica Chevreux, 1900, p. 102, pl. xi. fig. 4. 
5 5  Stebbing, 1906, p. 645. 


St Vincent, Station 24; north-east beach. 1st December 1802. One female, 5 
mm. long. 
Gulf Weed, Station 538, lat. 32° 11’ N., long. 34° 10’ W.; surface. 30th 
June 1904. Several of both sexes, largest about 6 mm. long. 
These specimens agree in ail essential respects with the descriptions given by 
STEBBING and CHEVREUX. 


The species is widely distributed in the North Atlantic, but I know of no previous 
record from St Vincent. 


Genus ANCHYLOMERA. 


Anchylomera blossevillii Milne Edwards. 


Anchylomera blossevillii Milne Edwards, 1830, Ann. Scz. Nat., vol. xx. p. 394. 
3 3 Stebbing, 1888, p. 1433, pl. xvii. 
5 3 Chevreux, 1900, p. 147. 
Station 62, Tropical Atlantic, lat. 4° 15’ S., long. 33° 38’ W.; tow-net. 13th 
December 1902. One specimen. 
Station 57, Tropical Atlantic, 2° 1’ 8., 32° 18’ W.; tow-net. 12th December 
1902. Four specimens, 4 mm. long. 


This is a common species in the warmer parts of the Atlantic Ocean. 


Genus OxycePHALus Milne Edwards, 1830. 


Oxycephalus clausi Bovallius. 


Oxycephalus clausi Bovallius, 1887, p. 35. 
3 »,  Stebbing, 1888, p. 1578, pl. eci. 
5 5, Chilton, 1911, p. 567. 
Station 40, Tropical Atlantic, lat. 5° 57’ N., long. 25° 56’ W. 7th December 
1902. One specimen. 


This specimen agrees very closely with those described and figured by Strespine from 
the Challenger Expedition, and it is also the same as specimens from the Kermadec 
Islands examined by me in 1911. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 516.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 235 


V. BIBLIOGRAPHY. 


Batr, C. Spence, 1862. Catalogue Amphipoda British Musewm. 

Bonnier, J., 1893. ‘Les Amphipodes du Boulonnais,” Bull. Sci. France et Belgique, vol. xxiv. pp. 161-207. 

Bovatuius, 1887. ‘‘ Amphip. Hyper.,” Bihang till k. Svensk. Vetensk-Akad. Handl., Bd. xi. No. 16. 

Catman, W. T., 1898. “On a Collection of Crustacea from Puget Sound,” Ann. New York Acad., vol. ii. 

pp. 259-292, pls. xxxi.—xxxiv. 

Cuevreux, E., 1891. ‘Quatriéme Campagne de / Hirondelle,” Bull. Soc. Zool. de France, vol. xvi. 

1900. Résultats des Cumpagnes scientifiques par Albert I°’, Prince de Monaco, fase, xvii. 

1903. ‘*Note préliminaire sur les Amphipodes de la famille des Lysianasside recueillis par 
la Princesse Alice dans les eaux profondes de l’Atlantique et de la Méditer- 
ranée,” Bull. Soc. Zool, de France, vol. xxviii. pp. 81-97 (with 7 text 
figures), 

1905. ‘Diagnoses d’Amphipodes nouveaux provenaut de lExpédition antarctique du 
Francais,” Bull. Soc. Zool. de France, vol. xxx. pp. 159-165 (with 3 text 
figures). 

1906a. ‘Diagnoses d’Amphipodes nouveaux provenant de l’Expédition antarctique du 
Frangais,” Bull. Soc. Zool. de France :— 

Vol. xxxi. pp. 37-40 (with 2 text figures). 
pp. 76-80 ,, 2 
pp. 82-86 ,, 3 ,, 5 
1s)oy tok) Gy) ‘; 

x 19068. Hxpéd. antarct. Francaise, 19038-1905 : Amphipodes. 

1908. ‘Amphipodes recueillis dans les possessions frangaises de lOcéanie par M. le Dr 
Seurat, 1902-1904,” Mém. Soc. Zool. de France, xx. pp. 470-527 (with 35 
text figures). 

1911s. “Campagnes de la Mélita: les Amphipodes d’Algérie et de Tunisie,” Mém. Soc. Zool. 
France, vol. xxiii, pp. 145-285, pls. vi.-xx. 

1911s. “Sur quelques Amphipodes des Iles Sandwich du Sud,” Anales Mus. MNacion. 
Buenos Ayres, vol. xxi. pp. 403-407 (with 3 text figures). 

Cuitton, C., 1884. “Additions to the Sessile-eyed Crustacea of New Zealand,” Trans. N.Z. Institute, 

vol, xvi. pp. 252-265, pls. xvii.—xx1. 


” 


” 


S 19094. ‘The Crustacea of the sub-Antarctic Islands of New Zealand,” Vhe sub-Ant. Islands of 
New Zealand, pp. 603-671 (with 19 figures in the text). Wellington, N.Z., 
1909. 

es 1909s. ‘Note on the Amphipodan Genera, Bircenna, Kuria, and Wandelia,” Trans. N.Z. 
Inst., vol. xli. pp. 59-63 (with text figure). 

rr 1911. ‘Crustacea of the Kermadec Islands,” Trans, N.Z. Inst., vol. xliil. pp. 544-573 (with 


text figures). 
1912. ‘Miscellaneous Notes on some New Zealand Crustacea,” Trans. N.Z. Inst., vol. xliv. 
pp- 128-135. 
Dana, J. D, 1853 and 1855. United States Exploring Expedition, vol. xiii., “ Crustacea.” 
Haswent, W. A., 1880a. “On Australian Ampbipoda,” Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales, vol. iv. 
pp- 245-279, pls. vil.—xil. 
1880s. “On some Additional New Genera and Species of Amphipodous Crustaceans,” 
Proc, Linn. Soc. New South Wales, vol. iv. pp. 319-350, pls. xviii.—xxiv. 
a 1885. ‘Notes on the Australian Amphipoda,” /.c., vol. x. 
Hewter, C., 21865. Reise Novara, vol. ii., III., ‘ Crustacea.” 
1866. ‘‘ Beitriige zur niheren Kenntniss der Amphipoden des Adriatischen Meeres,” Denk. i. 
Akad, d. Wissensch. Wien., vol. xxvi., Abth. ii., pp. 1-62. 
Kroyer, H., 1845. Karcinologiske Bidrag. Naturh. Tidssk., Forste Bind, pp. 283-345, pls. ii, and 
pp- 403, 453-638, pls. vi., vii. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 517.) 


” 


” 


” 


236 PROFESSOR CHARLES CHILTON ON THE 


Mayer, P., 1903. Caprellidx of the Siboga Expedition. 
Migrs, E. J., 1875. ‘Descriptions of New Species of Crustacea collected at Kerguelen Island by the 
Rey. A. E. Eaton,” Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. iv., vol. xvi. pp. 73-76. 
1884. “Crustacea” in Zoological Collections made in the Indo-Pacific Ocean during the 
Voyage of H.M.S. “ Alert,” 1881-82. London, 1884. 
3 1879. “An Account of the Petrological, Botanical, and Zoological Collections made in 
Kerguelen’s Land and Rodriguez during the Transit of Venus Expedition,” 
Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc.: ‘‘ Crustacea,” pp. 200-214, 485-496, pl. xi. 
Minne Epwarps, 1840. Histoire naturelle des Crustacés, t. iii. Paris, 1840. 
Prerrer, G., 1888. “Die krebse von Siid-Georgien nach der Ausbeute der Deutschen Station 1882-83,” 
2 Teil, Die Amphipoden,” Jahrb. der Wissensch. Anstalten zu Hamburg, 
vol. v. pp. 79-142, pls. i,-iii. 
Sars, G. O., 1891-1895. An Account of the Crustacea of Norway: I. Amphipoda. 
Say, T., 1818. ‘An Account of the Crustacea of the United States,” Jowrn. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 
vol. 1. 
Sexton, E. W., 1911. ‘The Amphipoda collected by the Hualey from the North Side of the Bay of Biscay 
in August 1906,” Journ. Marine Biol. Assoc., vol. ix. pp. 199-227, pl. iii. 
Sreppine, T. R. R., 1875. “ Onsome Exotic Sessile-eyed Crustaceans,” Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. iv., vol. xv. 
7 1888. Report on the Scientific Results of the Voyage of H.M.S. “ Challenger” during 
the years 1873-1876: Zoology, vol. xxix. ‘Report on the Amphipoda,” 
2 vols. text, 1 vol. plates. 
mp 1897. “II.: Amphipoda from the Copenhagen Museum and other Sources,” Trans. 
Zool, Soc., 2nd ser., vol. vii. pp. 25-45, pls. vi.—xiv. 
1906. ‘*Amphipoda: I. Gammaridea,” Das Tierreich, 21 Lieferung. _ Berlin, September 


1906. 

n 1998. “South African Crustacea,” pt. iv., Annals South African Museum, vol. vi. 

By 1910a. “Crustacea of Thetis Trawling Expedition,” Australian Mus. Memoir, iv. 
pp. 567-658, pls. xlvii.* to lx.* 

0 19108. “General Catalogue of South African Crustacea,” Ann. South African Mus., 


vol. vi. pp. 281-599, pls. xv.—xxii. (Crust., pls. xli.-xlviii.). 
Tuomson, G. M., 1879. “New Zealand Crustacea,” Trans. N.Z. Inst., vol. xi. pp. 235-248, pl. x. 
” 1880. ‘‘New Species of Crustacea from New Zealand,” Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. v., 
vol. vi. pp. 1-6. 
1881. ‘Recent Additions to and Notes on New Zealand Crustacea,” Trans. N.Z. Inst., 
vol. xiii, pp. 204-221, pls. vii. and viii. 
1882. ‘Additions to the Crustacean Fauna of New Zealand,” Trans. N.Z. Inst., vol. xiv. 
pp. 230-238, pls. xvii. and xviii. 
Waker, A. O., 1901. “Contributions to the Malacostracan Fauna of the Mediterranean,” Journ, Linn 
Soe., “ Zool.,” vol. xxviii. pp. 290-307, pl. xxvil. 


"5 1903a. “Amphipoda of the Southern Cross Antarctic Expedition,” Journ, Linn. Soe. 
vol. xxix. pp. 37-64, pls. vil.—xi. 
49 19038. ‘‘Report on the Isopoda and Amphipoda collected by Mr George Murray, F.R.S.. 


during the Cruise of the Oceana in Nov. 1898,” Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 
ser. Vii., vol. xii. pp. 223-233, pls. xvill., xix. 
99 1904, ‘“Amphipoda” in Report Ceylon Pearl Fisheries, pt. il., pp. 229-300, pls. i.-vili, 
Royal Society London, 1904. 
1905. ‘‘ Marine Crustaceans: XVI., Amphipoda,” in Gardiner’s Fauna and Geography of 
the Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes, vol. ii., supplement 1., pp. 923-932. 
pl. Ixxxviii. 
1906. “Preliminary Description of New Species of Amphipoda from the Dzscovery 
Antarctic Expedition, 1901-1904,” Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. vii., 


vol, xvii. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 518.) 


AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 237 


Waker, A. 0., 1907. Amphipoda in Nat. Antarct, Exped. 1901-1904, vol. iii. pp. 1-39, pls, 1.—xill. 
(separately paged). 
1909. ‘*Amphipoda Gammaridea from the Indian Ocean, British East Africa, and the Red 
Sea,” Trans. Linn. Soc., xii., pt. iv., pp. 323-344, pls. xlii. and xliii. 
Watker, A. O., and Scorr, A., 1903. “Crustacea” in H. O, Forbes, Nat. Hist. Sokotra, p. 228. 


(VI. ExpnaNnaTION oF PLATES, 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVI, 519.) 


238 AMPHIPODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION, 


VI. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 


Prare I. 

Fig. 1. Cyphocaris anonyex Boeck. First gnathopod. 

on epalias an be Ps a extremity more highly magnified. 
re ee s 3 Second gnathopod. 

ae ioe 7 ; 3 Second pereopod. 

ay ac 7 5 a Third perzopod. 

» 9. Lysianassa cubensis Stebbing. Third uropod. 

» 6. Alicella scotix, sp. nov. First gnathopod. 

sale “ 2 a Second gnathopod. 

» 8. Orchomenopsis (?) coatsi, sp. nov. First gnathopod. 

a tte 55 A A 33 extremity more highly magnified. 
es a Second gnathopod. 


,, LO. Metopoides sarsii (Pfeffer). Last segment of urus, with third uropod and telson. 
» Ll. Thawinatelson walkeri, sp. nov. Side view. 


> Wha: ‘y 5 A Antenne. 

a 16 ‘. “A * First gnathopod. 

pe 2s PS 5 PA Second gnathopod. 

allay. & F * Urus, with uropoda and telson. 
oY LG: 55 mmermis, sp. nov. First gnathopod. 

Set. 2 ; Second gnathopod. 


? ” 
» 18. Atyloides magellanica (Stebbing). Telson of specimen, showing unsymmetrical lobes. 


Puate II. 
Fig. 19. Acanthonotozoma australis, sp. nov. Side view of whole animal. 

» 20. Eusirus splendidus, sp. nov. Side view of whole animal. 

», 21, Atylotdes calceolata, sp. nov. Basal joints of antenne. 

a es - 55 5 First gnathopod. 

5) | BE : 3 Second gnathopod. 

» 24. Hyale saldanha, sp. uoy. Anterior portion of head of female, with antenne. 
oy oe 7. * First gnathopod of female. 

ey 205, “es 3 35 Second gnathopod of female. 

ae es * o First gnathopod of male. 

One bess 3 . Second gnathopod of male. 

eee ore ~ 5 Third perzeopod of male. 

, 30. (2) Hurystheus afer (Stebbing). First gnathopod of female. 

Ay ail : < +3 Second gnathopod of female. 

, 32 6 5 First gnathopod of male. 

sos ay re FA Second gnathopod of male. 

ee Oo Py 5 , Third pereopod of male, with widened merus. 


(ROY. 80C. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 520.) 


Scot. Nat. Ant. Exp. Vor. Vii 


Cuitton: ‘Scoria” Amputpopa.—Puate I. 


WY f 


Zee \\ 
ih 


YffRS rit 
JU May EN! | 


E. W. Sexton & Chas, Chilton, del. MS Farcane & ERswine. Lite. Eoin® 


| Scor, Nat. Ant. Exp, Vou. VI. 


Cuitton: “Scoria” Amparpopa.—PLate II. 


E. W, Sexton & Chas, Chilton, del. a MS Fartane & ERswine. Livn. Eoin® 


SE NEE lS 
Cis £0 Dx. 


VIII.—THE CESTODA OF THE SCOTTISH 
NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


BY 


JOHN RENNIE, D.Sc., and ALEXANDER REID, M.A., 


University of Aberdeen. 


(WITH TWO PLATES.) 


« 
- 


‘ 


TED 


ne stad . 


_ 


—— 


mail 4a? “Se 


mm 


The Cestoda of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. By John Rennie, 
D.Sc., and Alexander Reid, M.A., University of Aberdeen. (With ‘Two 
Plates.) 


(MS. received May 6, 1912. Read June 17, 1912. Issued separately September 6, 1912.) 


The Cestode material obtained by the Scotia Expedition consisted of eight adult 
and three larvee or immature forms. Of these, one (Anch istrocephalus microcephalus, 
Rud.) is not Antarctic, having been obtained from the Sunfish (Orthagoriscus mola), at 
Station 107, in 39° 12’ S., 53° 44’ W., on January 1, 1903. 

Of the others, only two appear to have been previously described, viz. Dibothriocephalus 
antarcticus, Baird, and Dibothriocephalus wilson, Shipley. The hosts from which the 
Cestoda of the Antarctic and sub-Antarctic regions were obtained are, with the exception 
of the Bonito,* from which a larval Tetrarhynchus was obtained, Sealsand Penguins. In 
view of this fact, the number of forms obtained may be regarded as relatively large. A 
study of the species on record from Arctic Pinnipedia suggests the interesting fact that 
the two Cestode faunas are quite distinct. Eight species of Dibothriocephalus are on 
record from Pinnipedia of the Arctic regions, none of which have so far been obtained 
in the Antarctic. The adult forms found, however, with one exception all belong to 
this genus. 

A noteworthy feature is the relatively large proportion of very small and delicate 
species of Cestoda occurring in the Pinnipedia of the Antarctic. Indeed, none of the 
forms obtained can be described as large; the maximum size is that of D. pygoscelis, 
viz, 29 em. 

Surpey has suggested with regard to the Cestoda of Ross’s Seal that, in view of the 
feebleness and variability of its dentition, it probably feeds on soft substances, and 
expresses the opinion that the plerocercoid stage probably occurs in the tissues of 
Cephalopods. Jellyfish are also mentioned, and these form part of the food of this Seal. 

With regard to Seal Cestodes in general, we note that although the parasites are 
small the infection is generally heavy, and from this it may be argued as probable that 
the intermediate hosts become infected without much difficulty. The embryos are 
extraordinarily minute, and if dissipated in the waters would probably infect drifting 
organisms, ¢.g. Jellyfish or Ctenophora, more readily than others, e.g. Fishes. On the 
other hand, Crustacea and similar organisms of scavenging habits, feeding on the feces 
of the Seals, have an even better chance of being infected, and these may provide the 
intermediate host. Beyond this it is scarcely profitable to speculate further. 


* This fish (Thynnus pelamys Linn.) it appears was found at Station 31—some distance south of the Cape Verde 
Islands—on 4th December 1902, and its parasite therefore cannot be described as Antarctic or sub-Antarctic. 


(REPRINTED FROM THE TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF EDINBURGH, VOL. XLVIII., pr. 441-453.) 


244 DR JOHN RENNIE AND MR ALEXANDER REID ON 


J)escRIPTION OF SPECIES. 
ArIoLa (1) divides the family Bothriocephalidee as under :— 
Sub-families : 
Diplogonine. Two sets of gonads to each segment. 
Mesogonine. <A single set of gonads; genital apertures on surface, All the 
Bothriocephalidee found, with one exception, belong to this group. 

Pleurogonine. Marginal genital apertures. 

One of the species found, Anchistrocephalus microcephalus, Rud., belongs to this 
group. 


Order PSEUDOPHYLLIDEA, Carus. 
Family DrporHrrocEPHALID®, Liihe. 
Sub-family MEsOGONIN (Ariola). 
Genus Dibothriocephalus (Liihe). 


Dibothriocephalus scoticus, n. sp. (PI. I. figs. 1 and 2.) 


This form occurred in the intestine of a Sea-leopard (Stenorhynchus leptonyz). 

The maximum dimensions are: strobila, length 18°3 cm., breadth 6°8 mm. ; scolex, 
2°5 mm. by 15 mm. The scolex when fully extended shows a pair of dorso-ventral 
suckers widely gaping posteriorly and tapering towards the tip, which is rather sharply 
conical. The sucker lips are rather thin, almost weak. 

No distinct neck is present. The proglottides are fairly broad, with well-marked 
backwardly directed flanged margins. Anteriorly they are roughly rectangular, much 
shorter than broad ; in the mature parts of the strobila they become relatively longer. 

The cuticle is rather thin, and beneath it an extremely fine circular layer of muscle 
can be made out with difticulty. Next this is a longitudinal layer, also slightly 
developed. This longitudinal layer lies between the narrowed ends of the cellular sub- 
cuticula, whose elements form a clearly defined band. Following on this is the layer of 
the yolk follicles, which, in the mature segments, except at the level of the uterus and 
cirrus sac, forms a practically continuous band. Within this occur two muscle layers, 
a well-defined longitudinal layer outermost ; while, within, a thin circular band separates 
the peripheral area from the central. 

The longitudinal nerve cords are placed about one-fourth of the transverse diameter 
from the margin. 

In the mature segments there are about nine testes follicles external and about six 
internal to the nerve cord on each side. 

Central longitudinal excretory canals were not observed, but there are numerous 
small peripheral canals in the subcuticula just external to the yolk follicles. 

The yolk cells are extremely variable in form and size, and may be described as 


(ROY. SOC. FDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII, 442.) 


THE CESTODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 245 


amoeboid in appearance. ‘The largest measure ‘017 mm. ; the smallest noted, ‘012 mm. 
There is a well-marked yolk reservoir of pear shape between the two lobes of the 
ovary. 

The ovary in transverse section appears as an elongated band, becoming shorter and 
thicker in its more anterior parts. The larger cells measure ‘014 mm. in diameter. 

The uterus consists of a winding tube of about four loops, the limbs of which in 
transverse section are seen to wind both dorsally and ventrally. There is a large dilated 
space just at the opening. On external view, the uterus in mature segments appears 
clustered in a rounded mass posteriorly, the winding portion being distinct only in its 
more anterior region. The shelled ova vary in size; the smallest measure 070 x ‘043 
mm., and the largest ‘(082 x ‘048 mm. They are operculate. 

The testis is very large, consisting of numerous follicles occupying the greater part 
of the medullary region. ‘The follicles are more or less spherical in form, and lie in close- 
set rows extending across the whole width of the proglottis, being separated from each 
other by the dorso-ventral muscles, which are correspondingly numerous. A common 
size of a follicle in a mature proglottis is 069 to (087 mm. in maximum diameter. 

The cirrus sac is thick-walled, and oval in transverse section, presenting no 
distinctive peculiarities. 

From the foregoing description, it appears that this species has not been previously 
observed. From the same host, von Linstow (8) has described D. quadratus, and with 
his account a careful comparison has been made. ‘The scolex in the two species is very 
similar in general form. In D. quadratus it measures 1°3 mm. by ‘71 mm., or about 
half the dimensions of the present species. The strobila is 22°5 em. long, and 3°5 mm, 
broad at its widest part; the proportions of the present species are, it will be observed, 
altogether different. The longitudinal dimension of the ova given by von Lrysrow is 
‘055 mm., which is considerably less than the smallest measurement observed in 
D. scoticus. The shelled ova are in D. quadratus described as non-operculate ; in 
the present species they are clearly operculate. Further, the appearance of the yolk 
follicles is quite different in the two species. 

A comparison has also been made with other Dibothriocephalus species recorded 
in Pinnipedia, with like negative results. 

In honour of the Scottish Expedition, we have named this new species Dibothrio- 
cephalus scoticus. 


Dibothriocephalus coatsi, n. sp. (Pl. I. figs. 5 and 6.) 


In Stenorhynchus leptonyx there occurred along with Bothriocephalus scoticus a 
number of specimens of a small, hitherto unrecorded Cestode. 

The total length of strobila of the examples found is from 42 to 80mm, Ina 
specimen of 42 mm. the width at the broadest part, which is 23 mm. from the 
anterior end,.is 1°8 mm. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 443.) 


246 DR JOHN RENNIE AND MR ALEXANDER REID ON 


The scolex is of distinctive appearance, being long, blunt, and of almost uniform 
width, measuring 2 mm. by °75 mm. in extent. There is a pair of shallow, widely 
gaping suckers, dorso-ventrally placed, extending the whole length, and open at both 
ends (fig. 5). 

The mature segments are rectangular in form, with slightly undulating margin. 
In the specimen 42 mm. long, the largest, which were terminal, measured ‘61 mm. long 
by 1°04 mm. broad. They are also relatively thick, measuring in section 61 mm. 
dorso-ventrally. 

The euticula and sub-cuticula are of typical appearance. Beneath the sub-cuticula 
are the yolk follicles. These are very numerous, and in many sections, e.g. those at 
the level of the ovary, they form a practically continuous band. The individual yolk 
cells, which vary in form, measure on an average about ‘014 mm. by ‘017 mm. 

The shape of the ovary presents no unusual features. In a section at the level of 
its junction with the yolk ducts it has the form of a transverse band. Posteriorly to 
this it appears as a pair of detached, more or less rounded, and thicker masses. The 
ovarian cells measure ‘017 mm. by ‘01 mm. 

The uterus consists of a few close coils which wind dorso-ventrally, so that in 
section it usually has the appearance of an almost complete circle. The shelled ova 
measnre ‘052 mm. by ‘041 mm. 

The testis follicles, which occupy the greater part of the central area of the 
proglottis, measure in their greatest dimensions ‘034 mm. by ‘052 mm. 

There is a well-developed inner layer of longitudinal muscles; the dorso-ventral 
muscles are also well marked. 

The longitudinal nerve cords are extremely ill-defined and weak, although 
relatively large. They are placed slightly less than one-fourth of the width of the 
proglottis from the margin, and are slightly nearer to the ventral than the dorsal 
surface. 

The central longitudinal excretory canals can be made out only in places. They 
are placed at the extreme lateral margin of the central layer, next to the longitudinal 
muscles, but, as they frequently cannot be traced in serial sections, they probably 
anastomose a good deal. Peripheral canals are present just exterior to the yolk 
follicles. These are most clearly visible at the lateral margins, where two or three 
frequently occur close together. 

This form differs in most particulars from all the hitherto described species of the 
group to which it belongs, and we have therefore classed it as new, naming it Dibothrio- 
cephalus coats:. It is an interesting fact that two new species should have been 
obtained from Stenorhynchus by the Scottish Expedition, and that D. quadratus, 
the only form hitherto described from this host, should not have been found. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 444.) 


THE CESTODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. . 247 


Dibothrocephalus antareticus. 
Bothriocephalus antarcticus, Baird, 1853. 


About a dozen or more examples of this species were obtained from the stomach of 
a Ross’s Seal, Ommatophoca rossi. These were all smaller than Bairp’s specimens, 
which were about 9 inches long. The Scotia examples range from 132 to 29 mm., 
but most measure about 100 mm. Barrp’s (2) description is rather brief and confined 
to externals, but from this, together with his excellent figure, there is no mistaking the 
identity of the Scotva specimens with his type. 

This species was also found by the Discovery Expedition, and the specimens are 
described by SuieLey, to whose account reference is made below. 

Dibothriocephalus antarcticus, Baird (2), is a slender-bodied worm, with a conical 
scolex and with fairly sharp tapering point. ‘The two suckers are long and compara- 
tively deep. According to Batrp, there are “two small rounded projecting lobes” at 
their posterior margins, but these in the Scotia examples are only occasionally present, 
and appear to be dependent upon the state of contraction of the animal. There is no 
neck ; the anterior part of the body for some distance behind the scolex is rounded, 
resembling an annelid in form; in the more posterior part the form is thick and 
flattened, being here elliptical in section. The colour is reddish yellow. The segments, 
even in the mature part of the animal, are very short; they are deeply constricted off 
from each other, and as the free margins are directed backward the segments appear to 
overlap more than they actually do. The only dimensions given by Bairp are: “length, 
about nine inches; greatest breadth of body, about three lines,” and although the 
Scotia examples are very much smaller, the proportions agree well. The /scovery 
specimens come much nearer in length to the Scotia examples, although there is a very 
distinct discrepancy as regards width. SuipLey reports that most of the /iscovery 
examples “ were just under 10 cm.,” and that “the greatest breadth is 7 mm. in the 
largest specimen.” The longest Scotia worm is 13°2 em., and its greatest breadth is 
4-5 mm.; most of the specimens are about 4 mm. in width. Again, as regards scolex 
dimensions, SHIPLEY gives “3 mm. in length and 3 mm. in breadth posteriorly.” In 
none of the Scotva specimens is the greatest breadth equal to the length of the head ; 
they measure from 3 to 3°5 mm. long by 2 mm. wide. The actual differences here, 
however, are slight. 

A general account of the anatomy is given by Suiptey (4). He mentions that, 
besides the two longitudinal canals of the excretory system, ‘there are also small 
canals which lie close under the surface at the edges of the proglottides, usually two at 
each side, but they also break up from time to time into twisting branchlets.” These 
canals appear to be very numerous; from 42 to 45 may be present in a section, while 
at each lateral margin a group of four can usually be made out. 

The testes which occupy the central layer lie mostly towards the dorsal surface. 
There are from 18 to 20 follicles in a transverse section. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 445.) 


248 DR JOHN RENNIE AND MR ALEXANDER REID ON 


Dibothriocephalus wilsoni, Shipley. (Pl. I. fig. 4.) 


This small tapeworm, which Surpiey (4) has already referred to as ‘‘ very attractive ” 
in appearance, was also found by the Scotia investigators, although not in the same 
host. These were obtained in the intestine of Weddell’s Seal along with numbers of 
Bothriocephalus mobilis, n. sp. The Discovery specimens occurred in Ross’s Seal 
(Ommatophoca rossi). 

It is a small, semi-translucent, delicate-looking Cestode, not undeserving of 
SHIPLEY’s epithet. The scolex is short and conical in the contracted state, as appears 
in Surptey’s figure. In more extended specimens, however, it is more rounded at the 
free end, as well as longer. An interesting point is the early appearance of mature 
segments ; the first of these may be but the fifth behind the head. SHIPLEY’S dimen- 
sions for this species are: length, 4 to 5°5 mm.; greatest breadth, 1 mm. ; 9 to 13 
proglottides ; scolex, °5 mm. Some of the Scotia specimens are quite 10 mm. in length, 
and have 18 segments; one which measured less than 4 mm. contained 8 segments, 
none of which were mature, but in 5 of which the outline of the developing uterus and 
other sex ducts could be traced in a surface view. 

The only other point made out with regard to which SuipLEy’s account may be 
supplemented refers to the dimensions of the ova. His figures are 042 by ‘035 mm., 
and these he gives as about the average. We find the ova do vary in size, and while 
we have not struck an average figure, we think that on the whole the dimensions we 
have to quote are fairly common and typical. These are 069 by °037 mm. 

The general appearance of this Cestode is given in fig. 4. 


Dibothriocephalus mobilis, n. sp. (Pl. U. figs. 7 to 10.) 


This is an extremely pretty little Cestode, highly translucent, which was found in 
the intestine of Weddell’s Seal, where it occurred in considerable numbers. It measures 
from 12 to 20 mm. in length, and is about 2 mm. at its widest part. The scolex is 
broad at its free end, narrowing towards its junction with the strobila. It measures 
‘5 mm. in diameter. The suckers are lateral in position, deep and widely gaping the 
whole length of the scolex, and having extremely mobile lips. They are capable of 
extension backward, showing in such a case large posteriorly directed flaps. Owing 
to the extreme mobility of the scolex, it is rather variable in form, although its general 
appearance remains characteristic (figs. 7 and 8). 

No neck is present. The segments are rectangular, at first narrow, being about 
twice as broad as long, lastly becoming practically square at the posterior end. The 
number varies from about 16 to 25; they are mature about the 7th or 8th segment. 
On a surface view the genital pores are seen to lie together close to the anterior border 
of the proglottis. 

The uterine pores are placed for the most part alternately right and left of the 
middle line in successive segments. The uterus in the immature segments shows three 


(ROY. SOG. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 446.) 


THE GCESTODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 249 


loops to each side ; in the mature parts it appears as a rounded mass filled with the 
shelled ova. ‘The yolk follicles are exceedingly numerous in the mature segments, 
lying closely over the whole of the inner part of the peripheral layer and visible 
externally. They form morula-like masses, more or less irregular in shape. In section 
they are mainly circular, and measure ‘052 mm. in diameter. The individual yolk cells 
are large, measuring when fully grown about ‘016 mm. 

The ovary consists of a pair of flattened circular masses, which in their maximum 
development measure ‘174 mm. in diameter, connected by a narrow band in the middle. 
The shelled ova measure ‘051 mm. x “034 mm. They are not operculate. 

The testes follicles, which occupy the central area, occur in the planes between those 
occupied by the yolk follicles. Where the yolk follicles occur the central area is 
narrowed, and only the extreme ends of the individual testes appear here. The 
individual cells of the testes are extremely small. The cirrus sac is highly muscular, 
cireular in form; the short protrusible penis is relatively thick. 

The cuticle is remarkably thick, measuring ‘014 mm.; the sub-cuticle consists of 
fairly large cells of irregular shape, amongst which the small excretory canals occur. 
These are fairly numerous, viz. between 30 and 40. The rest of the body consists 
largely of a thin and loosely packed parenchyma. 

This form is clearly differentiated from all the other small Bothriocephalids in the 
laterally placed suckers and distinctive form of the scolex, size and general shape of 
the proglottides, nature of the yolk follicles, and characteristics of the ova. 

We propose for it the name of Dibothriocephalus mobilis. 


Dibothriocephalus pygoscelis, n. sp. (PI. II. figs. 11 and 12.) 


A small quantity of Cestode material, undated, and labelled, “ Adult tapeworms from 
some species of Pygoscelis, probably P. antaretica or P. adelia; possibly, though not 
likely, P. papua,” was found to consist of a number of extremely brittle fragments of a 
Dibothriocephalus* Only one or two head pieces could be found, the larger of which 
measured 29 em. Fragments up to 21 cm. in length occur in the collection. 

The scolex measures 1°8 mm. in length, is of almost uniform breadth, shghtly 
broader at the posterior border, where it measures *7 mm. in diameter. The suckers 
are long and shallow, forming a pair of dorso-ventral grooves, extending nearly the 
whole length of the scolex. 

There is a short neck; the anterior proglottides are markedly flanged, and at least 
four times as broad as long. In the broadest part of the worm they reach 9 mm. in 
breadth and about 1°5 mm. in width. The common genital pore can be seen upon the 
ventral surface as a rather broad crescentic slit, a little way behind the anterior border, 
while the uterine pore is placed slightly behind in the middle line. 


* This was found by Dr Prete lying on the snow near the beach at Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, where a number of 
penguins had been congregated—chiefly P. antarctica and P. adelia,—January 11, 1904. See Zoological Log, 
p. 95, including footnote. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 447.) 


250 DR JOHN RENNIE AND MR ALEXANDER REID ON 


The following additional points have been made out. 

The cuticula and sub-cuticula are well developed. Peripheral excretory canals are 
numerous. The yolk follicles are very numerous and large. In longitudinal section 
they appear as closely arranged, long, narrow bands, sometimes spindle-shaped, extending 
from the sub-cuticula to the longitudinal muscle layer, which is well marked. 

The uterus has four or more turns, winding dorsally and ventrally in a spiral 
manner (fig. 12). The shelled ova vary in size. A common dimension is: length 
073 mm., breadth ‘051 mm. But there is a small proportion of long and narrow eggs 
measuring “100 mm. by ‘041 mm. The eggs are operculate. 

The species appears to be unrecorded previously. No Dzubothriocephalus species 
have hitherto been described from either Arctic or Antarctic birds. It resembles 
generally the scolex of D. quadratus in form and dimensions, but the proglottides are 
smaller and the ova dimensions are dissimilar; it resembles D. cordatus in the dimen- 
sions of the egos, but disagrees in other features. DD. lanceolatus is a much smaller 
form. In general features D. pygoscelis resembles D. romeri, but is on the whole 
larger, and again the egg dimensions are greater. In particular, the specially large 
size of the shelled ova and form of the scolex differentiate it from all other described 
Arctic or Antarctic species occurring in either birds or Pinnipedia. 

We propose to name it Dibothriocephalus pygoscelis. 


Sub-family PLEUROGONIN® (Ariola). 
Genus Anchistrocephalus, Monticelli, 1890. 


SYNONYMS. 


Tenia, Auctorum. 

Bothriocephalus, Rudolphi, 1808. 
Dibothrium, Diesing, 1850. 
Polyonchobothrium, Diesing, 1850. 
Anchistrocephalus, Monticelli, 1890. 


Anchistrocephalus microcephalus (Rud.), 1819. (Pl. I. fig. 3.) 


This tapeworm was found in very large numbers in the intestine of the Sunfish, 
Orthagoriscus mola, in a mass weighing several pounds, and almost completely 
blocking the intestine. O. mola was captured at Station 107. 

It was first described by Rupotput, in 1810, and its occurrence has since been 
noted and its anatomy described by other investigators. It is a readily recognisable 
species, and does not appear to have been recorded in any host other than the Sunfish. 
The scolex has a pair of rather deep, open, thick-margined, square-looking suckers 
topped by a hemispherical] rostellum, the base of which is encircled by several close- 
set rows of small hooks (fig. 3 (@)). 

The genital pores are marginal in position (fig. 3 (0)). 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 448.) 


THE CESTODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 251 


The appearance of the scolex varies with the state of contraction, and the rostellum 
may be retracted so as to be concealed below the anterior margins of the suckers, and 
thus appear to be absent. Similarly, the anterior proglottides, which in the extended 
condition are rather long, with thick, overlapping posterior margins (described by 
ARIOLA as “‘campanulate”), in the contracted condition become rectangular, short, and 
relatively very broad. The maximum size occurring in the Scotza specimens is 40 cm. 
by 5°5 mm., which is considerably less than that given by Arrona, viz. 66 cm. by 
775 mm. This, which appears surprising in view of the large number of examples 
in the collections, is probably due to breakages. The specimens occurred very closely 
matted together, and there are numerous fragments without scolices. Artona (1) has 
given a summary of the chief features of this species. 

The following additional points have been made out in transverse sections. 

The longitudinal nerve cords, which are large and well defined, are situated about 
one-fifth of the transverse diameter from the margin, external to the longitudinal 
excretory canals. 

The central excretory canals are six in number, three each, right and left of the 
middle line. 


Order CYCLOPHYLLIDEA, van Ben. 
Family Ta:ntipa&, Ludw. 


Hymenolepis, sp. (2). 


The Cestode here described was found in the intestine of the Ringed Penguin, 
Pygoscelhis antarctica-—locality, South Orkneys. It occurred in groups of from four 
to twelve, having their heads within a small swelling upon the intestine of about the 
size of a pea. The swelling, which had brownish granular contents, projected upon 
the outer side of the intestine. The heads appeared, as far as could be made out, to 
lie freely in the cavity formed by the swelling or cyst. This opened to the intestinal 
cavity by a very narrow aperture through which the closely grouped necks of the 
worms passed. 

The “ heads” are of very irregular and variable form. This anterior region is best 
described as a ‘‘ pseudo-scolex.” The “neck” is very long, and in most cases is at one 
part enlarged in a long oval form. The segmented portion is nearly cylindrical— 
not flattened—and, apart from colour, has quite an annelid appearance. The following 
measurements were made :— 


Length of “neck,” 6-12 mm. 
Width of “neck” at broadest part, ‘93 mm. to 1:13 mm. 
5] 
Length of segmented region, about 1 em. 
fo) fo) fe} , 
Number of segments, about 40. 
Diameter of broadest segment, 1°21 mm. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 449.) 


252 DR JOHN RENNIE AND MR ALEXANDER REID ON 


As already stated, the “heads” are very irregular in form. In the neck region 
calcareous corpuscles are very numerous. 

The oldest proglottides are sexually immature. Only the testes are developed ; they 
lie in the middle layer, occupying the area between the excretory vessels. There are 
from 16 to 19 follicles in a cross-section through their region of greatest develop- 
ment. The follicles are oval in section and measure from ‘019 mm. to ‘038 mm. along 
their longer axis. 

Calcareous corpuscles are extremely abundant, especially in the cortical area; they 
are oval or circular in form, and measure from ‘0063 mm. to (0095 mm. 

There is a pair of longitudinal excretory vessels on each side, placed dorsal and 
ventral, but quite near to each other; only the larger pair appears to be connected by 
transverse vessels. Both pairs have thick walls. 

The longitudinal nerve cords, which lie outside but near to the excretory canals, 
are very ill-defined. 

The question whether this type is normal is somewhat difficult to determine. 
The ill-defined nature of the scolex region is rather against such a view. MEGNIN 
(quoted by Braun) considers that the pseudo-scolex condition is characteristic of the 
very old stages of worms, but in the present case the worms are immature. Again, 
this condition may be a case of retarded development. This is not altogether 
impossible, in view of the marked pathological condition set up in the intestine at 
the point of attachment, and the occurrence of the parasites in groups within a single 
cyst, both of which conditions are unusual in other cases of Cestode fixation. On the 
other hand, their occurrence in this way in several different specimens suggests that 
the features described are usual with this species. 

What positive structural data are available are not suthicient to permit of exact 
classification, but the type may provisionally be placed near the genus Hymenolepis 
on account of the shape of the segments, the character of the neck, and the limited 


number of the testes. 


Order TETRAPHYLLIDEA, Carus. 
Family PHyLLopoTHRibD#&, Braun. 


Phyllobothrium, sp. (Pl. UU. figs. 3 and 4.) 


From the areolar tissue under the blubber of Weddell’s Seal there were found on 
two occasions examples of a bladder-worm whose features, especially those of the scolex. 
are characteristic of the genus Phyllobothrium. One of the specimens is incomplete. 

The complete specimen consists of a scolex having four much-plaited or folded 
bothria. Accessory suckers are absent. Behind the scolex is a neck piece slightly 
flattened, 17 mm. long and about 2 mm. broad. Behind the neck is a long oval 
bladder, creased or wrinkled upon the surface, thick-walled and hollow, with terminal pore 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLYVIII., 450.) 


THE CESTODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 253 


or slightly inverted posterior end. The bladder measures 32 mm. in length, and at its 
widest part is 10 mm. in diameter. 

The incomplete specimen is of interest in so far as it shows a portion of the neck 
invaginated within the bladder. Since this is the condition in which cysticerci usually 
occur in the tissues of their host, the existence of another specimen in the fully extended 
condition in such a situation is worthy of special note. 

The presence of these larval Cestodes in the subcutaneous tissue of an animal such 
as Weddell’s Seal is of particular interest. The hosts of adult Phyllobothria are, as 
far as known, mostly Selachians. 

With regard to the question as to the probable host of the adult worm, Dr Brucr 
has made the interesting suggestion that this may be the Grampus. He informs me 
that Stenorhynchus leptonyx and Lobodon carcinophaga are frequently seen with large 
gashes upon their sides, which he is of opinion may be due to the attacks of a Grampus 
(Orca, sp.?). He considers it likely that Weddell’s Seal is liable to similar attacks, 
and in fact that the whole seal may at times be eaten. The following birds are fond of 
blubber, and devour the carcases of seals, viz. the Giant Petrel (Ossifraga gigantea), 
Sheathbill (Chinois alba), and Skuas (Magalestris MacCormicki and M. antarctica). 
Such habits render them liable to infection with the bladder-worm in question, and it 
is possible that the normal host of the adult occurs amongst these. 


Order TETRARHY NCHA, v. Ben. 
Family TETRARHYNCHID&. 


Tetrarhynchus, sp. (PI. IL. figs. 15 to 18.) 


From the muscles of the Bonito (Thynius pelamys Linn.) caught at Station 31, a 
small number of cysticercoids of a Tetrarhynchus-like organism were found. These were 
not enclosed in a bladder, but lay quite free in the muscles, the proboscides being in a 
number of instances partially extruded. They were not in any instance fully extended. 

The specimens measure about 6 mm. in length and 1$ to 1{ mm. in width. There 
is a thick, firm, slightly wrinkled, glistening cuticle upon the exterior, A distinctive 
feature is the entire absence of suckers at the anterior end. There are four slender 
retractile proboscides bearing about sixteen longitudinal rows of closely set, recurved 
hooks. The proboscides are connected with four well-developed muscular bulbs, such 
as are characteristic of this group. 

At the posterior end there is a small spherical bulb which is retractile within a 
cavity. In most examples the bulb is within, but in one or two instances it occurred 
exserted, the body of the cysticercoid being constricted closely around its base 
(lies 15): 

Transverse sections of the bulb show it to contain a deeply staining connective 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 451.) 


254 DR JOHN RENNIE AND MR ALEXANDER REID ON 


tissue in which there is a transverse row of ten or twelve excretory canals (fig. 18). 
These merge in each other, converging to a terminal pore. Longitudinal sections show 
the branches of the canals to be very numerous. 

The body of the eysticercoid consists of a peripheral and a central portion. The 
former is limited by a well-defined, thick cuticle, contains numerous excretory vessels 
(about 60 in transverse section) and a loose parenchyma. ‘The central region contains 
the muscular bulbs of the proboscides, and around these a well-developed mass of longi- 
tudinal muscles (fig. 16). The central area at its posterior end merges into the 
protrusible bulb (fig. 17). 

The question of the more exact identification of the species to which the form belongs 


must be left undecided. 
G. R. Wacener (5) has described a similar form from Phycis mediterranea. 


LITERATURE. 


(1) Arona, V., “ Revisione della famiglia Bothriocephalide s. Str.,” Arch. Parasitol., iii, No. 3, 1900. 

(2) Barro, Proce, Zool. Soc. London, 1853. 

(3) von Lrystow, Jahrb. Hamb. Wissensch. Anst., ix. Jahrg., 1891. 

(4) Surptey, A. E., National Antarctic Expedition Reports, 1907, ‘ Cestoda,” vol. iii. 

(5) Wacrener, G. R., Verhdlgn. (Nov. Act.) d. K. Leop.-Carol, Acad. d. Naturf., Bd. xxiv. Suppl., 
Breslau, 1854. 

(6) ZscHoxKe, Fauna Arctica, ‘Die Arktischen Cestoden,” Bd. iii., Lieferung i., 1903. 


REFERENCES TO FIGURES. 


c. =cuticula, 7m. =retractor muscles of proboscides, 
¢.8, = C1rrus sac. s.c, = sub-cuticula. 
exe.c. = excretory canals. sh.ov.= shelled ova. 
exc.b. = excretory bulb. tf. = testes follicles. 
lm. = longitudinal musculature. ut, = uterus, 
n.c, =nerve cord. v. = vagina. 
0. = ovary. y.c. =yolk cells. 
per.a. = peripheral area. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 
Prate I. 


Fig. 1. Transverse section of Dibothriocephalus scoticus, n. sp., at the level of the ovary. 

Fig. 2. (a) Entire specimen of D. scoticus ; (b) scolex of D. scoticus. 

Fig. 3. (a) Anterior end of Anchistrocephalus micrceephalus; (b) immature proglottis of Anchistro- 
cephalus microcephalus. 

Fig. 4. Four specimens of Dibothriocephalus wilsoni, Shipley. 

Fig. 5. Scolex of Dibothriocephalus coatst, n. sp. 

Fig. 6. Transverse section of D. coatsi, 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL, 452.) 


THE CESTODA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 255 


GATE. 


Fig. 7. Entire specimen of Dihothriocephalus mobilis, n. sp. 


Fig. 8. Scolices of D. mobilis, n. sp. 
Fig. 9. Transverse section of proglottis of D. mobilis. 


Fig. 10. 
Fig. 11. 
Fig. 12. 


, es through uterus and cirrus sae of D. mollis, 


Proglottis of Dibothriocephalus pygoscelis, n. sp. 
Diagrammatic longitudinal section of proglottides of D. pygoscelis, showing position of sex 


openings and uterine coils. 


Fig. 13. 
Fig. 14, 
Fig. 15. 
Fig. 16. 
Fig. 17. 
Fig. 18. 


vessels. 


Metacestode of Phyllobothrium sp., from blubber of Weddell’s Seal. 

Scolex of Phyllobothrium sp. 

Larval Vetrarhynchus from the muscles of the Bonito. 

Transverse section of larval 7'etrarhynchus through retractor muscles of proboscides. 

Diagram of posterior end of larval Tetrarhynehus showing excretory bulb retracted. 

Transverse section of larval Tetrarhynchus through retracted bulb, showing row of excretory 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 453.) 


Scot. Nat. Ant. Exp. 


Del. A. Re 


Vol. VI. 


RENNIE AND REID: “Scotia” CEStTOoDA—PLATE J. 


MNT eA, 
net 


1.€. 


Scot. Nat. Ant. Exp. Vol. VI. 


RENNIE AND Rep: ‘“Scoria” CrstopaA—Puate II. 


0 ET aL AA 


Del. ALR 


_ 


| PART IX. 
MICROSCOPIC LIFE ON GOUGH ISLAND. 


—— = 
= 


a 
- 


¢ 


SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


IX._NOTE ON MICROSCOPIC LIFE ON GOUGH 
ISLAND, SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN. 


By JAMES MURRAY. 


JEL LOT “cS Oe aa 


ify “jas WS Avene aha 
ity) Meee Ree Wo) a 7 


bing 


* ia 
~~ ee 


a 


—_— 


Pa 


aos 
i 
_ 


** Scotia ” Collections.—Note on Microscopic Life on Gough Island, South Atlantic 
Ocean. By James Murray. Communicated by Wriitam Evans, F.R.S.E. 


(Read November 25, 1907.) 


By favour of Dr WittraM 8. Bruce and Mr R. N. RupmMosE Brown, I was allowed 
to examine a small tuft of moss from Gough Island, or Diego Alvarez. The material 
was collected by the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition when the Scotia visited 
the island in April 1904. 

Mr Brown (1) speaks of the luxuriant vegetation of the island, which is “ clothed in 
green from the water’s edge almost to the summit,” of the ‘“ moss-clothed cliffs and 
luxuriantly growing ferns and flowers ” (2), suggesting a paradise for the microscopist. 
It may be confidently affirmed that Gough Island will be found to have a rich micro- 
scopic fauna, as every land yet investigated, having a climate favourable to the growth 
of moss, maintains abundant microscopic life of many classes. 

It was therefore with disappointment that I found the one little tuft of moss avail- 
able to be an unfavourable specimen. It may have been already washed, in preparing 
it as a botanical specimen, but the sediment I obtained by washing was very small in 
quantity, and contained few recognisable organisms. 

As Dr Bruce assures me that everything found will be new for the island, I am 
induced to publish a note on the very meagre result obtained. 


ROTIFERA. 

Philodina flaviceps, Bryce (3).—A species only recently discovered in Scotland, 
and easily recognisable by the spurs, which are very short. 

Callidina angusticollis, Murray (4).—One of the most widely distributed of all 
Rotifers. The case only was found on Gough Island, and measured +} 5 inch (190 p) 
in length. 

Bdelloid egg.—Similar to that of Philodina citrina, which has a prominence at one 
pole of the egg. Several species, of different genera, have this type of egg, so that no 
certain identification can be made from it. 


RHIZOPODA. 
Heliopera petricola, Leidy, var. amethystea, Penard. 
Difflugia sp.—Of hemispherical form, like an Arcella. 
Euglypha ciliata (Khr.). 
Euglypha sp.—No spines, section circular. A Rhizopod, with the form of a 
Euglypha, and similar surface plates, but without spines, has been found in Scotland 
also. 


(REPRINTED FROM THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL PHYSICAL SOCIETY OY EDINBURGH, VOL. XVII, NO. 4.) 


262 MICROSCOPIC LIFE ON GOUGH ISLAND, SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN. 


In addition to the four species named, there were two worms, a Nematode and an 
Oligochxte, and a blue-green tabular Alga, with the cells grouped in multiples of four. 

In studying the micro-biology of lands previously unexplored, one does not antici- 
pate much peculiarity, even in the most remote islands. The reason for this is that 
the majority of microscopic fresh-water or land species are what JENNINGS calls 
‘potentially cosmopolitan ”—that is to say, they can be conveyed through the air to all 
parts of the world, in the form of eggs or spores, or even in some classes in the adult 
condition, and may settle down in any part offering favourable conditions. 

Some classes are not so easily conveyed as others, and there is always the anticipa- 
tion that there may be peculiar insular forms in any unexplored island to stimulate the 
interest of naturalists. 

On account of the high seas and the dangerous coast, it was only with great difficulty that we effected a 


landing, and it was only possible to remain ashore for a few hours. Hence the small collections! Gough 
Island undoubtedly holds out a splendid and interesting field for the investigation of its invertebrate 


fauna.—W. S. B. 


LITERATURE. 


) Brown, R. N. R., ‘Diego Alvarez or Gough Island,” Scot. Geog. Mag., August 1905. 
) “The Voyage of the Scotia,” Trans. Perth. Soc. Nat. Sci., 1905, p. 69. 

5) Bryce, D., “ Philodina flaviceps,” Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., xlv., 1906, p. 184. 

4) Murray, J., ‘A New Family and Twelve New Species, ete.,” Zvans. Roy. Soc. Edin., xli., 1905, p. 374. 
5) Pirin, J. H. H., and R. N. R. Brown, “Second Antarctic Voyage of the Scotia,” Scot. Geog. Mag., 1905. 
6) Brown, R. N. Rupmoss, ‘‘ The Botany of Gough Island,” Jour. Linn. Soc. Bot., xxxvii. p. 238 and p. 263. 


I 
2 


( 
( 
( 
( 
( 
( 


2.Uiy © 
MICROSCOPIC LIFE ON GOUGH ISLAND. 


SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


X.—FURTHER NOTE ON MICROSCOPIC LIFE ON 
GOUGH ISLAND, SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN. 


By Dr. EUGENE PENARD, 


Geneva. 


(WITH TEXT ILLUSTRATIONS.) 


7 - : yy ‘ ‘* = 
ei UT Le ee 


vats eine Te vie fit Oley Tiel ay 4 a 


AMO Ue VERS COP Se ee 
. } bey ' F 
‘ ‘ SLE 
i | 


‘Scotia ’ Collections.—Further Note on Microscopic Life on Gough Island, South 
Atlantic Ocean—Rhizopoda. By Dr Eugene Penard, Geneva. Communicated 
by Witutam Evans, F.R.S.E. 


(Read December 18, 1911. Received January 24, 1912. Issued separately March 23, 1912.) 


[Expranatory Nore sy W. Evans.—In the summer of 1907, shortly before his 
departure for the Antarctic, Mr James Murray examined, for micro-organisms, a 
small tuft of moss brought from Gough Island, in the South Atlantic Ocean, by 
the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition of 1902-4. Not having time to examine 
the material exhaustively, Mr Murray passed on the residue (contained in one 
small bottle) to Dr E. Prnarp for more thorough examination. Mr Morray’s 
report was communicated to this Society in November 1907, and published in the 
Proceedings early in the following year (vol. xvii. p. 127). In April 1908, Dr 
Penarp sent to Dr Bruce the following account of the species he had found in 
the material received from Mr Murray. | 


List or Raizopopa, ETC., FOUND IN Moss-RESIDUE FROM GouGH ISLAND. 


The following is a list of the Rhizopods I found in the material received from 
Mr Murray :— 

Arcella discoides, Ehrbg.—One specimen, very small. 

Parmulina brucei, spec. nova (see p. 245).—About ten specimens. 

Difilugia constiicta, Ehrbg.—One specimen. 

Buglypha ciliata, Ehrbg.—Rare. 


r compressa, Carter.— Rare. 

y levis, Perty.—I refer to this species, though doubtfully ; moderately 
numerous, very small and very broad specimens with fine and distinct 
alveoli. 

a stiigosa, Leidy.—Rare. 


Heliopera petricola, Leidy.—Large, clear, very light pink colour; very likely 
this is the species found by Murray, but it differs from var. 
amethystea, Penard, which is still larger. 

Nebela caudata, Leidy.—One specimen only. 

Rather abundant ;' in several forms (as a rule small). 


/ 


»  collaris, Leidy. 
Phryganella henispherica, Penard.—Rare. 
J 
Sphenoderia fissirostris, Penard.—Not very rare. 
1 When I say “abundant,” it is only “relatively” to other species, for in fact the specimens were few compared 
with the average “richesse ” of mosses or Sphagnum. 


(REPRINTED FROM THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ROYAL PHYSICAL SOCIETY OF EDINBURGH, VOL, XVIII, NO. 4.) 


268 MICROSCOPIC LIFE ON GOUGH ISLAND, SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN. 


Trinema enchelys (Khrbg.).—Not rare; always very small form, as generally 
found in mosses. 
lineare, Penard. 


Such are the Rhizopods I found in the Gough Island material. They are few 
in species, and each species is poorly represented in numbers, yet this note may be 
of some interest, and for several reasons :— 

1. All are species found in Europe (except one, Parmulina brucez), and did 

not differ in appearance, except that they were perhaps on the average 
a little smaller. 
. They represent, most of them, the typical fauna of mosses, but the scarcity 


bo 


(one specimen only) of Difflugia constricta, a species always so abundant 
in mosses, is remarkable. 


oo 


. With the exception of the above, no Diftlugias were observed. Murray found 
one, “ Difflugia spee.,” but it was very likely Phryganella hemispherica. 
In Europe, and indeed everywhere, Diftlugias (except constiicta) are rare 
in mosses. 

4. One species has never been found before, namely Parmulina brucez, nov. ; but 

it will probably be found somewhere else one day or other.’ I append a 
description of this species, or rather of its envelope, which was the only 
part of the organism available. I have taken the liberty of naming it 
brucei, after the leader of the Scotia expedition. 

For other organisms besides Rhizopods I did not look specially, but I found the 
following :—A small rotifer (Brachionus?), about twenty specimens of Calldina 
angusticollis, Murray, a small diatom which was abundant (Meridion sp.), and a 
good many samples of Merismopedia—very likely that “blue-green tabular Alga, 
with the cells grouped in multiples of four,” which Murray mentions. 


Parmulina brucei, spec. nova. 


Enveloppe chitineuse, jaundtre, en forme de pyramide ou de cone tronqué, a 
base deux fois environ aussi large que le sommet. De ce sommet, ou plateau dorsal, 
partent un certain nombre d’arétes (14 & 16 en moyenne), qui descendent vers la 
face ventrale, et divisent la surface de l’enveloppe en partitions ou facettes a peu 
pres égales.* 

La surface de cette enveloppe est couverte de ponctuations tres-nettes, serrées les 
unes contre les autres, disposées réouli¢rement. 


1 T have this year (1911) found this same species, though very likely a special variety of it, in mosses collected 
by Dr FuHRMANN at an altitude of 3000 metres, on the Andes of America (Colombia). 

2 Tl est possible cependant que ces arétes ou facettes n’existent pas toujours; elles manquaient dans les 
exemplaires trouvés plus tard dans les Andes. Dans cette derniére station (Parano, Cruz Verde; Colombie), 
Wailleurs, on pouvait constater d’autres différences, surtout dans les ponctuations caractéristiques du plateau dorsal, 
et peut-étre y a-t-il JA une variété spéciale. 


MICROSCOPIC LIFE ON GOUGH ISLAND, SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN. 269 


A partir de l’aréte dorsale, la membrane devient toujours plus claire et plus 
mince, et elle finit par ne plus étre qu'une pellicule trés-fine, qui se replie brusque- 
ment en dedans sur la face ventrale pour border le plasma. 

Cette enveloppe est peu déformable, mais peut cependant se refermer sur elle- 
méme, en rapprochant ses bords comme deux levres; mais le plateau dorsal, plus 
rigide, ne prend pas part a la déformation. 


Noyau ? 

Vesicule contractile ? 
Diamétre A la face ventrale 125-150 wz. 
Diamétre du plateau dorsal — . ; 65— 80h. 
Hauteur dorso-ventrale . . ; 70— 80h. 


PARMULINA BRUCEI. 


Enveloppe, vue de cdté. 

Enveloppe, vue de trois quarts, par le plateau dorsal, 
Enveloppe fermée sur elle-méme, vue par le plateau dorsal, 
La méme, vue par la face ventrale. 


fe pp 


Localité. 


Obs.—Le genre Parmulina est tres-proche voisin du genre Corycia, au quel 


Gough Island, Mer du Sud, dans les mousses. 


javais eru tout d’abord devoir rapporter Yorganisme de Gough Island; mais tandis 
que dans les Coryciw nous avons une sorte de sac, tres-souple, tres-déformable, ici la 
membrane est plus forte, presque rigide sur la face dorsale, susceptible de se fermer 
sur elle-méme a la maniere d’un chapeau dont on rapprocherait les deux bords, mais 
pas de se déformer complétement. Probablement aussi le plasma est-il différent, 
recouvert peut-étre dune pellicule membraneuse. Ce genre, du reste, est encore 
tres-mal connu; on a quelques renseignements sur la Parmulina cyathus,‘ mais 
la P. bruce, qui n’a pas été étudiée a l'état vivant, demande & étre revue de plus pres. 


1 Penarn, “Sur quelques Rhizopodes des mousses,” Arch. fiir Protistenk., vol. xvii. fasc. 2, 1909, p. 286. 


= rw 0 r 


, = a 
PAL. Path nat ° ar: 


Pept 
op » ad nd 
. oe > «= * 
ne oe ar meagginh pagit 
‘PTs eae Bre Ai eG i) 
bey it Lith. ie Sey | fi 
H -_ 


PART XI. 
ENTOMOSTRAOA. 


XI.—THE ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH 
NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


By THOMAS SCOTT, LL.D., F.LS., 


Scottish Fishery Board, Aberdeen. 


\ ae 


Pyro 


yy is 


st a i eer eA ty in ee PF = 


Oe 
: fy - ; J x 
(FO CUb ees iw) < e < 


: 7 oa 
>} a 


is 
— 


The Entomostraca of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition, 1902-1904. 
By Thomas Scott, LL.D., F.L.8. Communicated by Dr J. H. Asnworrn. 
(With Fourteen Plates.) 


(MS. received January 24, 1912. Read February 19,1912. Issued separately November 15, 1912.) 


ClOPNTIEE NLS: 


PAGE 
Introductory Statement. ; - 2 : ; 2 ; : : : . 275 
Systematic Part— 
Copepoda. i ; . : : ; : : : : : . 281 
Cladocera. z ‘ : : ; ; : : , . 334 
Ostracoda. : u ; : ‘ : : : : ; : : . 334 
Alphabetical Index. ‘ : : : 3 ; ‘ : ‘ : ; . 343 
Addenda . : : : g . : : : : : 5 : : . 353 


INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT. 


The Entomostraca recorded here were collected by the s.y. Scotza on its way to 
and from the Antarctic, and also while carrying on investigations there during the 
years 1902 to 1904. The Entomostraca in these collections belong chiefly to the 
Copepoda, but the Cladocera and Ostracoda are also represented, the last by a 
considerable number of species. These three groups are described below in the order 
mentioned. 


THe CoprEpopa. 


The Copepoda recorded in the following pages number considerably over one 
hundred species. A fairly large proportion of them belong to the Calanoida and to 
one or two other groups of pelagic forms; these were, for the most part, obtained in 
samples of plankton—chiefly surface gatherings collected by tow net at various stations 
on the outward voyage betweeen Cape Verde and the Falkland Islands. On the other 
hand, most of the Harpacticoida, of which there are a good number, are from the 
neighbourhood of the South Orkney Islands, but some of them were also obtained in 
siftings from material brought up in the dredge or trawl net, and amongst organisms 
washed from floating Gulf-weed., 

Most of the pelagic or free-swimming species from the tow-net collections are more 
or less widely distributed, and have been described in various published works, but some 
of them are tolerably rare. ‘The Harpacticoida and other demersal forms are, however, 
not so well known, and a considerable number of those recorded here appear to be 
undescribed ; a few of them are closely related to British or other northern species, and 
seem to lend some support to the idea of a bipolar distribution 

The occurrence at places so far distant as the Falklands and South Orkneys of 
demersal forms identical with, or closely allied to, those of Britain and Norway has a 
bearing on the question of distribution different from that concerning organisms living 


(REPRINTED FROM THE TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF EDINBURGH, VOL, XLYIII,, PP, 521-599.) 


276 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


freely in the open sea. Such free-swimming species are subject to dispersal over wide 
areas by tidal and other currents, and numerous examples of such dispersal are indicated 
or described by various authors; but the wide distribution of an Harpactid such, for 
example, as Orthopsyllus linearis, Claus, may not be so easily explained. This Copepod 
is one of a group which have an elongated and moderately slender body, provided with 
short appendages that are scarcely, if at all, fitted for swimming, but are rather adapted 
for living among branching zoophytes or on the roots and stems of seaweeds. The 
transporting action of currents can have much less effective influence on the distribution 
of such species than on species living a free life in the open sea. Nevertheless, 
Orthopsyllus linearis has been recorded from the British Islands, from Norway, the 
Mediterranean, the Suez Canal, the Gulf of Manaar, and the Gulf of Guinea. More 
recently it has been obtained in material collected in the Malay Archipelago during the 
Siboga Expedition of 1899-1902,* and now this non-swimming species is here recorded 
from gatherings collected by the Scotia among the South Orkney Islands. 

Another species—A sterocheres suberites, Giesbrecht—helonging to a different group 
of Copepods, is usually found living as a commensal in the water passages of certain 
sponges. f 

The wide dispersal of this Asterocheres cannot, from its peculiar habitat, be to any 
large extent attributed to oceanic currents, yet it has been recorded from the British 
Islands and the Mediterranean ; and one or two specimens from a gathering collected 
among the South Orkneys by the Scotia can scarcely be distinguished from those 
living on British sponges. Other species equally interesting and showing the near 
relationship of the non-pelagic Copepoda of the far South with those of our Northern 
Seas will be noticed in the sequel, but two may be briefly referred to here. One of them 
an Harpactid, obtained in a small gathering of minute Molluscan shells collected on 
the shore at Port Stanley, Falkland Islands—has a remarkable likeness to a species that 
was dredged in the Firth of Forth off St Monance in 1891,{ and which has been 
described more recently by G. O. Sars from Norwegian specimens.§ The female of this 
species is distinguished by having the last pair of thoracic legs large and leaf-hke,— 
hence the generic name Phyllopodopsyllus. The other form is also interesting because it 
may be regarded as supplying a “missing link” in the little group of nearly related 
species representing four genera, viz—Cervinia, Norman, Cervinopsis, G. O. Sars, 
Zosime, Boeck, and Pseudozosime, Scott. In the first genus the inner ramus of the first 
pair of thoracic legs is three-jointed and that of the next three pairs two-jointed ; in the 
second all the four pairs of thoracic legs have the inner ramus three-jointed. In the 
third the inner ramus of the first pair is two-jointed, and that of the next three pairs 
three-jointed ; while in Pseudozosime the inner ramus of all the four pairs is composed of 


* The Copepoda of the “ Siboga” Expedition, by ANDREW Scott, A.L.S., p. 225 (1909). 

+ Fauna u. Flora des Golfes von Neapel, 25. Monogr., “Asterocheriden,” by Dr W. GrEsBRECHT, p. 70. 
t Tenth Annual Report of the Fishery Board for Scotland, part iii. p. 253, pl. 1x. figs. 19-82. 

§ An Account of the Crustacea of Norway, vol. v. part xix. (1907), p. 231, pl. clv. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 522.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 277 


two joints. These differences become more apparent when arranged in tabular form, 
thus)— 


Inner Ramus of 
Name of the Genus. = 
Ist pair. 2nd _ pair. 3rd pair. 4th pair. 
Cervinia . : ; ‘ 3-jointed 2-jointed 2-jointed 2-jointed 
Cerviniopsis . : : o= 45 os Bie a 3) 
y | 
| 
Zosime . : , : Wee So a5 3-35 3-8 as 
Pseudozosime . : : 2 Pers Orns VE ee 


The small Harpactid, for which it has been necessary to institute the new generic 
name, Pseudozosime, was obtained by washing some material dredged in Scotia Bay, 
South Orkneys, in June 1903. Only one specimen—a female—was observed; it so 
closely resembled Zosime, Boeck, that only after careful dissection could the differences 
referred to be detected. 

In this account of the Copepoda from the Scotia collections, the general arrangement 
followed is that outlined by G. O. Sars in his Crustacea of Norway, vol. iv. p. 2. He 
divides the Copepoda into seven sub-orders or tribes, viz. the Calanoida, Harpacticoida, 
Cyclopoida, Notodelphyoida, Monstrilloida, Caligoida, and the Lerneoida. The first 
three contain all the Copepoda recorded here except Dysgamus atlanticus, which belongs 
to the Caligoida. Dr G. S. Brapy’s Report on the Challenger Ostracoda and other 
papers on these organisms have been of much assistance in dealing with this group. 

As several of the species recorded here, particularly among the Harpacticoida, appear 
to be undescribed, drawings of these have been prepared to show their distinguishing 
features, and to illustrate the descriptive notes relating to them. A few other more or 
less rare and interesting forms are also figured to show peculiarities of structure and 
some of the characteristics by which they may be determined from others closely allied 
to them. My son, ANpREw Scorv, A.L.S., has prepared a number of these drawings, 
and I desire to express my indebtedness to him for these, as well as for assistance 
in determining some of the more critical and troublesome species. 

I have also to express my thanks to the Executive Committee of the Carnegie ‘l'rust 
for the Universities of Scotland for defraying the expenses of the plates. 

I have not considered it necessary to give a list of the authors whose works have 
been consulted, but reference to the more important of them will be found throughout 
the systematic part of the Report. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIILI., 523.) 


278 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Sysrematic List oF Species RECORDED OR DESCRIBED IN THIS REPORT. 


COPEPODA. 
CALANOIDA. 


CALANID A). 


Calanus, Leach. 
minor (Claus). 
tenwicornis, Dana. 
acutus, Giesbrecht. 
propinquus, G. S. Brady. 
Calanoides, G. S. Brady. 
brevicornis (Lubbock). 
Megacalanus, Wolfenden. 
robustior (Giesbrecht). 
gracilis (Dana). 
Undinula, A. Scott. 
vulgaris (Dana). 
darwinii (Lubbock). 


EUCALANID. 


Eucalanus, Dana. 
attenuatus, Dana. 
crassus, Giesbrecht. 
subtenuis, Giesbrecht. 
Rhincalanus, Dana. 
gigas, G. S. Brady. 
cornutus, Dana. 
Mecynocera, 1. C. Thompson. 
clausi, I. C. Thompson. 


PARACALANID 4). 
Paracalanus, Boeck. 
aculeatus, Giesbrecht. 
Acrocalanus, Giesbrecht. 
longicornis, Giesbrecht. 
Calocalanus, Giesbrecht. 
pavo (Dana). 
plumulosus (Claus). 
Clausocalanus, Giesbrecht. 
arcuicornis (Dana). 
furcatus (G. 8. Brady). 


EUCH ATID. 
Euchexta, Philippi. 
marina (Prestandrea). 


SCOLECITHRICIDA. 
Scolecithrix, G. 8. Brady. 
dane (Lubbock). 
glacialis, Giesbrecht. 
Racovitzanus, Giesbrecht. 
antarcticus, Giesbrecht. 


CENTROPAGIDZ:. 
Centropages, Kroyer. 
furcatus (Dana). 
violaceus (Claus). 
brachiatus (Dana). 
calaninus (Dana). 
typicus, Kroyer. 


TEMORID. 


Temora, Baird. 
stylifera (Dana). 
turbinata (Dana). 


METRIDIIDA. 
Metridia, Boeck. 
lucens, Boeck. 
gerlachei, Giesbrecht. 
Pleuromamma, Giesbrecht. 
abdominalis (Lubbock). 
gracilis (Claus). 
gracilis var. esterly/, nov. 


LUCICUTIDA. 
Lucicutia, Giesbrecht. 
flavicornis (Claus). 


HETERORHABDID.. 
Heterorhabdus, Giesbrecht. 
papilliger (Claus). 
austrinus, Giesbrecht. 


HALOPTILID 4. 


Haloptilus, Giesbrecht. 
acutifrons, Giesbrecht. 


CANDACHUDA. 
Candacia, Dana. 
pachydactyla, Dana, 
curta, Dana. 
bipinnata, Giesbrecht. 
wthiopica, Dana. 
bispinosa, Claus. 
simplex, Giesbrecht. 
longimana, Claus. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 524.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


PONTELLIDZ. 


Calanopia, Dana. 

americana, Dahl. 
Labidocera, Lubbock. 

nerti (Kroyer). 

acutifrons (Dana). 
Pontella, Dana. 

atlantica (M.-Edw.). 

securifer, G. S. Brady. 

spinipes, Giesbrecht. 
Pontellina, Dana. 

plumata, Dana. 


HARPAC 


CERVINIIDA:, 


Pseuclozosime, ni. g. 
brownt, n. sp. 


ECTINOSOMID A. 

Ectinosoma, Boeck. 

antarcticum, Giesbrecht. 
Bradya, Boeck. 

proxima, Ui. sp. 
Microsetella, Brady & Robertson. 

norvegica (Boeck). 

rosea (Dana). 


MACROSETELLIDA. 
Macrosetella, A. Scott. 
gracilis (Dana). 
Miracia, Dana. 
efferata, Dana. 


EUTERPINID. 


Euterpina, Norman. 
acutifrons (Dana). 


CLYTEMNESTRIDA. 


Clytemnestra, Dana. 
seutellata, Dana. 


HARPACTICIDA. 
Harpacticus, M.-Edw. 
fucicolus, n. sp. 
piriel, n. sp. 


PELTIDUDA. 
Alteutha, Baird. 
austrina, n. Sp. 
dubia, n. sp. 
Paralteutha, n. g. 
typtica, Ni. sp. 


PONTELLID A:—continued. 
Pontellopsis, G. 5. Brady. 
regalis (Dana). 
perspicax (Dana). 
brevis (Giesbrecht). 
villosa, G. S. Brady. 


ACARTHUDA:. 


Acartia, Dana. 
negligens, Dana. 
danx, Giesbrecht. 


TICOIDA. 


PORCELLIDIUD). 


Porcellidium, Claus. 
affine, Quidor. 


TISBEID 45. 
Tisbe, Liljeborg. 
austrina, Ni. Sp. 
gracilipes, n. sp. 
Psamathe, Philippi. 
longicauda, Philippi. 
fucicola, n. sp. 
Machatropus, G. 8. Brady. 
australis, n. sp. 
major, 1. sp. 


THALESTRID Ai. 


Parathalestris, G. O. Sars. 
clausi (Norman). 
coats?, n. sp. 
affinis, n. sp. 

Idomene, Philippi. 
forficata, Philippi. 

Dactylopusia, Norman. 
frigida, u. sp. 
JSerrieri, 0. Sp. 
perplexa, 0. Sp. 

Pseudothalestris, G. 8. Brady. 
intermedia, i. Sp. 


2 


assimilis, G. O. Sars, var. 


antarctica. 


DIOSACCID 2. 
Diosaccus, Boeck. 
tenuicornis, Boeck. 
Amphiascus, G. O. Sars. 
JSucicolus, n. sp. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 525.) 


9 


280 


CANTHOCAMPTID. 


Ameira, Boeck. 
simulans, 0. sp. 
Parastenhelia, 1. C. Thompson & A, Scott. 
antarctica, n. sp. 
Phyllopodopsyllus, T. Scott. 
mossmant, 0. Sp- 


CYCLOPOIDA. 
OITHONIDE. 
Oithona, Baird. 
plumifera, Baird. 
minuta, T. Scott. 
similis, Claus. 


CYCLOPIDA. 
Cyclopina, Claus. 
belgica, Giesbrecht. 
Euryte, Philippi. 
similis, n. Sp. 


LICHOMOLGID 2. 
Lichomolgus, Thorell. 
fucicola, G. 8. Brady. 
Pseudanthessius, Claus, 
Sucicolus, n. sp. 


ASTEROCHERID 4. 


Asterocheres, Boeck. 
suberites, var. antarctica, n. var. 


ARTOTROGID 44. 
Artotrogus, Boeck. 
proximus, n. sp. 


SAPPHIRINIDA. 
Sapphirina, J. V. Thompson. 
ovatolanceolata, Dana. 
gemma, Dana. 
tris, Dana. 
angusta, Dana. 
lactens, Giesbrecht. 


CALIGOIDA. 
CALIGIDZ. 


CLADOCERA. 


Evadne, Loven. 


tergestina, Claus. 


DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


LAOPHONTID 2. 
Laophonte, Philippi. 
rottenburgi, n. sp. 
australis, n. sp. 
wiltont, 0. sp. 
exigua, 0. Sp. 
Laophontodes, T. Scott. 
whitsont, n. sp. 


CLETODIDA. 


Orthopsyllus, Brady & Robertson. 
linearis (Claus). 


SAPPHIRINIDA—continued, 
Sapphirina vorax, Giesbrecht. 
auronitens, Claus. 
nigromaculata, Claus. 
intestinata, Giesbrecht. 
opalina, Dana, 
gastrica, Giesbrecht. 
stellata, Giesbrecht. . 
darwini, Haeckel. ; 
Saphirella, T. Scott. 
abyssicola, T. Scott. 
Copilia, Dana. 
mirabilis, Dana. 
denticulata, Claus. 


ONCAIDAL. 
Oncxa, Philippi. 
venusta, Philippi. 
mediterranea, Claus. 
conifera, Giesbrecht. 


CORYCAIDA. 
Coryceus, Dana. 

venustus, Dana. 
ovalis, Claus. 
obtusus, Dana. 
flaccus, Giesbrecht. 
rostratus, Claus. 
speciosus, Dana. 
longistylis, Dana. 
carinatus, Giesbrecht. 
longicaudis, Dana. 
elongatus, Claus. 


Dysgamus atlanticus, Stp. & Ltkn, 


Ewadne spinifera, P. E. Miiller. 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 526.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


281 


OSTRACODA. 
PODOCOPA. 
CYPRID i. | CYTHERID 4—continued. 

Macrocypris, G. 5. Brady. Xestoleberis, G. O. Sars, 
maculata, G. 8. Brady. reniformis, G. S. Brady. 

Cytherura, G. O. Sars. 
CYTHERID 2. | ornata, N. sp. 

Cythere, O. F. Miiller. | porrecta, Ni. Sp. 
tnornata, 0. sp. sculptilis, n. sp. 
quadridens, n. sp. Paradoxostoma, Fischer. 
latibrosa, n. sp. retusum, G. S. Brady. 
foveolata, G. S. Brady. antarcticum, 0. sp. 
antarctica, n. sp. leve, 1. Sp. 
peregrina, Nn. sp. 

MYODOCOPA. 
CYPRIDINID. HALOCYPRID. 

Philomedes, Liljeborg. Halocypris, Dana. 
assimilis, G. S. Brady. globosa, Claus. 

Asterope, Philippi. Concheecia, Dana. 
australis, G. 8, Brady. spintrostris, Claus. 
oculata, G. 8. Brady. procera, G. W. Miiller. 

elegans, G. O. Sars. 
Euconchecia, G. W. Miiller. 
chierchix, G. W. Miiller. 
COPEPODA. 


Tribe CALA NOIDA, G. O. Sars.* 
Fam. CALANID. 
Genus Calanus, Leach, 1816. 


Calanus minor (Claus). 
1863, Cetochilus minor, Claus, Die freilebenden Copepoden, p. 172. 
1893, Calanus minor, Giesb., F. Fl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 90, pls. vi., vii., vill. 

This species was observed in samples of plankton from twenty-one stations, ranging 
from Stations 7, 8, and 10 in the North Atlantic, 26° 23’ N., 20° 20’ W., to Stations 
60, 62, and 64 in the South, 6° 30’ 8., 34° 25’ W. 

C. minor appears to be one of the more widely distributed species ; its distribution, 
according to G1iesBRECHT, extends from the Mediterranean to the Atlantic, Pacific, and 
Indian Oceans, between lat. 34° N. and 36° 8. 


Calanus tenuicornis, Dana. 
1849, Calanus tenuicornis, Dana, Proc. Amer. Acad., vol. ul. p. 15. 
The only sample in which this species occurred was from Station 19 in 20° 34’ N., 
O30 Oh We 
* The arrangement followed for the Calanoida is that of G. O. Sars’ Crustacea of Norway, vol. iv. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL., 527.) 


282 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Calanus acutus, Giesbrecht. 
1902, Calanus acutus, Giesb., Expéd. Antarct. Belge, “Copepoden,” p. 17, pl. i. 
This species oceurred in two of the Scotia gatherings, in one from 200 fathoms 
collected in 69° 22’ S., 26° 36’ W., Station 273, and in another from 500 fathoms 
collected in lat. 68° 40’ 8., long. 80° 18 W., Station 280. 


Calanus propinquus, G. 8. Brady. 
1883, Calanus propinquus, Brady, Report Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. vill. p. 34, pl. i. 
1892, Geisb., F. Fl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 91, pl. vii. figs. 31, 34 et seg. 

C. propinguus was met with very sparingly in a surface sample collected 28th 
November 1903 in 59° 43’ S., 48° 10’ W., Station 337). The distribution of this 
species extends to the Atlantic, Pacific, and Indian Oceans, between lat. 55° N. and 
65° S. (GIESBRECHT). 

Genus Calanoides, G. 8. Brady, 1883. 
Calanoides brevicornis (Lubbock). 


1856, Calanus brevicornis, Lubb., Trans. Entom. Soc. Lond. (N.S.), vol. iv. p. 11, pl. 3. 
1892, x 5 Giesb., /. Fl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 90, pl. vi. figs 7, 9, 18 et seq. 
1894, » frontalus, F. Dahl, Verh. d. zool. Gesellschaft, p. 76. 

1907, 5,  brevicornis, G. O. Sars, Bull. de UV Institut Océanographique, No. 101, p. 4. 


1909, Calanoides ,, A. Scott, “ Siboga” Exped., Monogr. xxixa, “‘ Copepoda,” p. 10. 
1910, Calanus Fe Stebbing, Annals of the S. African Museum, vol. iv. pt. iv. p. 520. 


A few specimens were obtained in a surface tow-net gathering collected 5th May 
1904 off Cape Peninsula, 34° 21’ S., 18° 29’ E., Station 477. This species is easily 
recognised by the slightly crested forehead ; it appears to be widely distributed in the 
South Atlantic and Indian Oceans. The fifth pair of thoracic legs of the male of the 
species recorded here and of Calanoides patagoniensis, Brady, differ distinctly from 
those of the typical Calanus. 


Genus Megacalanus, Wolfenden, 1904.* 
Megacalanus gracilis (Dana). 
1849, Calanus gracilis, Dana, Proc. Amer. Acad., vol. il. p. 18. 

This species occurred very sparingly at Stations 11, 15, 18, and 29, 23° 50’ N., 
21° 34’ W., to 12° 31’ N., 25° 09’ W., in the North Atlantic, and at Station 56 in the 
South Atlantic, 0° 42’ S., 31° 20’ W. 

Megacalanus robustior (Giesbrecht). 
1888, Calanus robustior, Giesb., Atti Acc. Lincei Rend., ser. iv., vol. iv., sem. 2, p. 332. 
1892, ns . idem, F. Fl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 91, pl. vil. figs. 15, 19 et seq. 

Only a few specimens were obtained ; they occurred in a gathering from Station 11, 
23°50’ N., 21° 34’ W., in the North Atlantic, and in two others, from Station 59, 2° 30’S., 
32° 42’ W., and Station 62, 4° 15’ S., 33° 38’ W., in the South Atlantic. 

* See note on this genus in the Copepoda of the “ Siboga” Expedition, by ANDREW Scorr (1909), p. 10 et seq. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 528.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 283 


Genus Undinula, A. Scott, 1909. 
Syn. Undina Dana (name preoccupied). 


Undinula vulgaris (Dana). 


1849, Undina vulgaris, Dana, op. cit., vol. ii. p. 18. 
1892, Calanus . ,, Giesb., /. Hl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 92, pl. vi. fig. 11; pl. vii. fig. 2 et seq. 


This species was observed in surface tow-net gatherings from a considerable number 
of stations, extending from Station 8, in 26° 12’ N., 20° 25’ W., to Station 82, in 
20° 40’ S., 38° 20’ W. Both males and females were obtained. The structure 
of the fifth pair of thoracic legs in the male of this and the following species is so 
remarkable and so entirely different from those of the typical Calanus, that, as indicated 
by G. O. Sars, the position of these two species in the genus Calanus can scarcely be 
maintained. Dana ascribed the species named above to the genus Undina, but 
unfortunately that name was already occupied by GouLp and also by Munster, and a 
modified form of the name was therefore adopted for the genus by my son in his Report 
on the Copepoda of the Stboga Expedition. 


Undinula darwinit (Lubbock). 


1860, Undina darwinti, Lubbock, Trans. Linn. Soc, Lond., vol. xxiii. p. 7, pl. xxix. 
1892, Calanus »  Giesb., F. Fl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 91, pl. vi. fig. 5 et seq. 
1909, Undinula ,, A, Scott, “ Siboga” Expeditie, ‘‘ Copepoda,” p. 17. 


Several specimens, chiefly females, were obtained in a surface tow-net gathering 
collected 4th May 1904 in 34° 43’8., 17° 15’ E., Station 476. This species is a true 
Undinula. 


Fam. KUCALANIDA. 
Genus Hucalanus, Dana, 1852. 
Eucalanus attenuatus, Dana. 
1849, Calanus attenuatus, Dana, op. cit., vol. 11. p. 18. 


This species occurred in samples from only five stations, all in the North Atlantic, 
Vizensuations tl, 12, 14, 20 and 26, 23° 50’ N., 21° 34’ W., to 14° 33’ N., 25° 9” W. 


Eucalanus crassus, Giesbrecht. 
1888, Hucalanus crassus, Giesb., Atti Acc. Lincet Rend., ser. 4, vol. iv. p. 333. 


1892, 5 ah idem, F. Fl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 132, pl. iv. fig. 9 e¢ seg. 


This Hucalanus was obtained sparingly in two surface gatherings—one collected at 
Station 19, in the North Atlantic, 19° 12’ N., 24° 08’ W., the other at Station 68, in the 
South Atlantic—Pernambuco Lighthouse, bearing 7° 42’ 8., 34° 32’ W, 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 529.) 


284 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Eucalanus subtenuis, Giesbrecht. 
1888, Hucalanus subtenuis, Giesb., op, cit., p. 33. 


1892, 5 7. idem, F’. Fl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 132, pls. xi. and xxxv. 


A few specimens were obtained in samples from Stations 26, 27, and 59, 14° 33’ N., 
25° 09’ W., to 2° 30’ S., 32° 42’ W. 


Genus Rhincalanus, Dana, 1852. 


Rhincalanus gigas, G. 8. Brady. 


1883, Rhincalanus gigas, Brady, Report Voy. “ Challenger,” vol. viii. p. 42, pl. vil. figs. 1-11. 


1888, ae nasutus, Giesb., op. cit., p. 334. 
1902, 3 grandis, Giesb., Lapéd. Antarct. Belge, ‘‘Copepoden,” p. 18, pl. i. 
1909, _ gigas, A. Scott, “ Siboga” Expeditie, Monogr. xxixa, “ Copepoda,” p. 24. 


This species was obtained in two gatherings—one from 200 fathoms, collected 
28th February 1903 in 69° 22’ &., 26° 36’ W., Station 273; the other from 500 
fathoms, collected 2nd March, also 1908, in 68° 40’ 8, 30° 18’ W., Station 280. 
Several specimens were obtained, large and small; the larger measured fully 8 mm. in 
length, while the smaller were similar to FR. nasutus. 

A careful examination of these Scotza specimens leaves scarcely any doubt in my 
mind that they all belong to the one species—Rhincalanus gigas of Brapy, the only 
apparent difference between the largest and the smallest specimens being the difference 
in their size. Brapy's specimens ranged from 8°5 to 10 mm., while the largest of the 
Scotia specimens measured fully 8 mm., and ranged from that to specimens no bigger 
than those found in the North Sea. J am therefore unable to regard Rhincalanus 
nasutus as anything more than a small variety of FR. gigas, while R. grandis is a finer 
and somewhat larger form of the same species. 


Rhincalanus cornutus, Dana. 


1849, Calanus cornutus, Dana, Proc. Amer. Aca:., vol. ii. p. 19. 
1852, Rhincalanus cornutus, Dana, U.S. Explor. Exped., vol. xii., I1., p. 1083, pl. Ixxvi. 


Tolerably frequent in two surface gatherings collected 5th May 1904, Station 477, 
off Cape Peninsula (34° 21’ 8., 18° 29’ E.), South Africa. 


Genus Mecynocera, I. C. Thompson, 1888. 


Mecynocera clausi, |. C. Thompson. 
1888, Mecynocera claust, I. C. Thompson, Journ. Linn. Soc., “ Zool.,” vol. xx. p. 150, pl. xi. 
Mecynocera was observed in gatherings from Stations 7, 10, 12, 13, 15, and 28, 
all in the North Atlantic, between 26° 23’ N., 20° 20’ W., and 18° 7’ N., 25° 9’ W. 
I. C. THompson collected his specimens at the Canary Islands, nearly in the same 
latitude as Station 7, 26° 23’ N., 20° 20’ W. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 530.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 285 


.Fam. PARACALANIDA. 
Genus Paracalanus, Boeck, 1864. 
Paracalanus aculeatus, Giesbrecht. 
1888, Paracalanus aculeatus, Giesb., op. cit., p. 333. 


This Paracalanus was met with at eight stations in the North, and four in the South 
Atlantic, ranging from Stations 26 to 66, 14° 33’ N., 25° 9’ W., to 7° 9’ S., 34° 30 W, 


Genus Acrocalanus, Giesbrecht, 1888. 
Acrocalanus longicornis, Giesbrecht. 
1888, Acrocalanus longicornis, Giesb., op. cit., p. 332. 

A. longicornis occurred sparingly in the twenty-one samples collected between 
Stations 17 in the North and 95 in the South Atlantic, 20° 18’ N., 23° 22’ W., to 
Soe be 7 30) WV. 

Genus Caloculanus, Giesbrecht, 1888. 
Calocalanus pavo (Dana). 
1849, Culanus pavo, Dana, Proc. Amer. Acad., vol. ii. p. 13. 

This Calanoid was observed in gatherings from twenty-two stations, ranging from 
7 to 94, 26° 23’ N., 20° 20’ W., to 30° 25’ S., 45° 45’ W., but was not very common in 
any of them. 

Calocalanus plumulosus (Claus). 
1863, Calanus plumulosus, Claus, Die freilebenden Copepoden, p. 174, pl. xxvi. figs. 15, 16. 


The only gathering in which C. plumulosus was observed was collected at Station 
OS) sinh LSS UY IN, BS CY Vie 


Genus Clausocalanus, Giesbrecht, 1888. 
Clausocalanus arcuicornis (Dana). 
1849, Calanus arcuicornis, Dana, op. cit., p. 52. 
This was one of the more common species in the Scotza collections. It was observed 


in gatherings of plankton from thirty-one stations, extending from Station 7 in the North, 
to Station 112 in the South Atlantic, 26° 23’ N., 20° 20’ W., to 46° 03’ S., 56° 30’ W. 


Clausocalanus furcatus (G. 8. Brady). 
1883, Drepanopus furcatus, Brady, Report “ Chall.,” “Copep.,” p. 77, pl. iv. figs. 1 and 2, pl. xxiv. 
figs, 12-15. 
In the Scotia collections this species appeared to be much rarer than the last. It 
was observed in gatherings from only four stations, viz., 12, 13, 59, and 90, 22° 19’ N., 
22-07 We, to 26° 50’ S., 42° 20’ W. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 531.) 


286 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Fam. Hucnarip@. 
Genus Hucheta, Philippi, 1843. 
Eucheta marina (Prestandrea). 
1833, Cyclops marina, Prestandrea, Efemeridi Set. lett. Sicilia, Palermo, vol. vi, p. 12. 
The only species of Huchexta observed in the Scotia collections is the one named 
above—a species which appears to be widely distributed. It occurred more or less 


sparingly in gatherings from twenty-one stations, extending from Station 7 to Station 
94) 26° 23’ IN. 207.207 W. stors0 2125 no neti eae 


Fam. ScOLECITHRICIDA. 
Genus Scolecithrix, G. 8. Brady, 1883. 
Scolecithrix dane (Lubbock). 
1856, Undina dane, Lubbock, Trans. Entom. Soc. Lond., vol. iv. p. 15, pl. ix. 
This, which is one of the only two representatives of the genus Scolecithrix observed, 
occurred in gatherings from eighteen stations, extending from Station 7 in the North 
Atlantic to Station 65 in the South, 26° 23’ N., 20° 20’ W., to 6° 52’ S., 34° 32’ W. 


Scolecithrix glacialis, Giesbrecht. 
1902, Scolecithrix glacialis, Giesb., Expéd. Antarct. Belge, ‘‘Copepoden,” p. 25, pl. iv. 
One or two specimens of this southern form occurred in two gatherings, one of which 
was collected at 200 fathoms on 28th February 1903 in lat. 69° 22°S., long. 26° 36’ W., 


Station 273; the other at 500 fathoms on 2nd March in 68° 40’ S., 30° 18’ W., 
Station 280. 


Genus Racovitzanus, Giesbrecht, 1902. 
Racovitzanus antarcticus, Giesbrecht. 
1902, Racovitzanus antarcticus, Giesb., Expéd. Antarct. Belge, ‘Copepoden,” p. 26, pl. iv. figs. 8-13, 
pl. v. figs. 1-5. 
A single specimen was obtained in a sample from 200 fathoms, collected on 28th 
February 1903 in lat. 69° 22’S., long. 26° 36’ W., Station 273. 
The Belgica obtained this species at a depth of 500 metres in 70° 9’8., 82° 35’ W. 
(Belgica Station 701). (Vide Dr Giesprucut’s Copepoden of the “ Belgica.”) 


Fam. CENTROPAGID2. 
Genus Centropages, Kroyer, 1848-1849. 
Centropages furcatus (Dana). 

1849, Catopia furcata, Dana, Proc. Amer. Acad., vol. il. p. 25. 

1883, Centropages furcatus, Brady, Report Voyage of the “ Challenger,” vol. viii. p. 83, pl. xxviii. 

1892, _ ar Hesb., 7. Fl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 304, pls. xvil., xvill., and xxxviil. 

The only gatherings in which this species was obtained were collected in the South 

Atlantic at Station 64, 6° 30’ S., 34° 25’ W., and Station 68a, 8° 00’ S., 34° 34’ W., 
Pernambuco, bearing 12 miles W. 


(ROY. SOC. RDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 532.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION, 287 


Centropages violaceus (Claus). 
1863, Ichthyophorba violacea, Claus, Die freilebenden Copepoden, p. 199, pl. xxxv. 
1892, Centropages violaceus, Giesb., F. F'l. Neapel, vol. xix. p- 304, pl. iv. fig. 5 et seq. 
This species occurred in gatherings from a number of stations both in the North and 
South Atlantic, from Station 7 in 26° 23’ N., 20° 20’ W., to Station 90 in 26° 50’S., 
42° 20’ W. 


Centropages brachiatus (Dana). 

1849, Pontella brachiata, Dana, Proc. Amer. Acad., vol. ii. 1s Alle 

1852, Calanopia bruchiata, Dana, U.S. Explor, Kxped., vol. xiii., I1., p. 1133, pl. Ixxix. 

1892, Centropages brachiatus, Giesb., F. Fl. Neupel, vol. xix. p- 304, pl. xvii. figs, 26, 37 et seq. 

1893, “ 9 T. Scott, Vrans. Linn. Soc. Lond., ser. ii., “ Zool.,” vol. vi. Dadide 

Several specimens were obtained in surface tow-net gatherings collected on the 4th 

and 5th of May 1904 off Cape Peninsula, South Africa; Station 476, 34° 43’ S., 17° 15’ iB 
and Station 477, 34° 21’ §., 18° 29’ KE. 


Centropages calaninus (Dana). 


1849, Cyclopsina calanina, Dana, op. cit., vol. ii, p. 25. 
1852, Hemicalanus calaninus, Dana, U.S. Explor. Exped., vol. xiii., IL, pp. 1105, 1106, pl. Ixxviii. 
1892, Centropages rf Giesb., #. Fl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 305, pl. xvii. fig. 27 et seq. 


The only sample in which this species was obtained was a surface gathering collected 
at Station 90 in 26° 50’ S., 42° 20’ W. Only one or two specimens were observed. 


Centropages typicus, Kroyer. 


1848, Centropages typicus, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskr. (N.S.), vol. ii. p. 588, pl. vi. 

1863, Ichthyophorba denticornis, Claus, Die freilebenden Copepoden, p. 199, pl. xxxv. 

1864, Centropages typicus, Boeck, Forhandl. Videnskabs-Selsk. Christiania, p. 19. 

1892, 3 ° Giesb., 7. Fl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 303, pls. ii., iv., xvii. fig. 48 ef seq. 


This species was observed in only one plankton sample—a gathering collected at 
Station 27 in 13° 38’ N., 25° 9’ W. The distribution of this species extends to the 
Mediterranean ; and in the North Atlantic between 36° N. and 62° N. (Gresprecu’). 


Fam. Temorip™&. 
Genus Temora, W. Baird, 1850. 
Temora stylifera (Dana). 

1849, Calanus stylifer, Dana, op. cit., vol. i. p. 12. 

1856, Diaptomus dubius, Lubbock, Trans. Entom. Soc. Lond. (N.S.), vol. iv. p. 21. 

1863, Temora armata, Claus, op. cit., p. 195, pl. xxxiv. 

1892, ,,__stylifera, Giesb., F. Fl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 328, pl. v. fig. 2 et seq. 

This species was of moderately frequent occurrence, and was observed in samples 

from Stations 18, 19, 26, 30, 36, 67, 68, 79, 83, 85, 86, 90, and 93, 19° 59’ N., 
23° 34’ W., to 30° 05’ S., 45° 28’ W. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 533.) 


288 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Temora turbinata (Dana). 
1849, Calanus turbinatus, Dana, op. cit., vol. i. p. 12. 
1892, Temora turbinata, Giesb., op. cit., p. 329, pl. xvii. fig. 14 et seg. 
The only two samples in which this species was observed were collected at Station 
12, 22° 19’ N., 22° 07’ W., and Station 14, 21° 28’ N., 22° 40’ W., both in the North 
Atlantic. 


Fam. Merripirp®. 
Genus Metridia, Boeck, 1864. 


Metridia lucens, Boeck. 
1865, Metridia lucens, Boeck, Vid. Selsk. Vorhandl., 1864, p. 14. 
1892, 5 hibernica, Giesb., op. cit., p. 340, pl. xxxii. fig. 11 et seg. 
1904, 5 lucens, Cleve, Invest. S. Africa, vol. iii. p. 192. 

A number of specimens were obtained in one or two samples collected on the 4th 
and 5th of May 1904 off Cape Peninsula, South Africa, Station 476, 34° 43’S., 17° 15’ E., 
and Station 477, 34° 21’S., 18° 29’ EK. The Rev. T. R. R. Sreppine records the species as 
“ abundant south and west of Cape Colony ” (Annals of the S. African Museum, vol. vi. 
pt. iv. p. 535, 1910). 

Metiidia gerlacher, Giesbrecht. 
1902, Metridia gerlachei, Giesb., Expéd. Antarct. Belge, ‘‘Copepoden,” p. 27, pl. v. 

This species was obtained in two gatherings, in one from 200 fathoms collected 
on 28th February 1903 in 69° 22’ &., 26° 36’ W., Station 273; and the other from 
500 fathoms collected on 2nd March in 68° 40’ §., 30° 18’ W., Station 280. 
The distribution of Metridia gerlachei is apparently limited more or less to deep 
water, for although it was obtained at a number of stations by the Belgian Antarctic 
Expedition of 1897-1899, none of the samples in which it occurred were surface 
gatherings, but were from depths ranging from 100 to 500 metres. 


Genus Pleuromamma, Giesbrecht, 1898. 
Pleuromamma abdominalis (Lubbock). 
1856, Diaptomus abdominalis, Lubbock, Trans. Entom. Soc. Lond. (N.S.), vol. iv. p. 22, pl. x. 


The only gatherings in which this species occurred were collected at Stations 26 and 
56, the one in 14° 33’ N., 25° 09’ W., Station 26, and the other in lat. 0° 42’ 8., long. 
31° 20’ W., Station 56; very few specimens were observed. 


Pleuromammea gracilis (Claus). (Pl. XIII. fig. 7.) 
1863, Pleuromma gracilis, Claus, Die freilebenden Copepoden, p. 197, Taf. 5. 


This species was only observed in gatherings collected at Stations 14, 18, 39; all 
in the North Atlantic, 21° 28’ N., 22° 40’ W., to 6° 43’ N., 25° 48’ W. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 534.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 289 


Pleuromamma gracilis, var. esterlyi, nov. (Pl. XIII. figs. 8-10.) 
1905, Pleurumamma gracilis, Esterly, “ Copep. of the San Diego Region,” Univ. of California Publica- 
tions, vol. ii. p. 175, text-fig. C. 

C. O. Esrerty, in the work referred to above, describes and partly figures a form of 
this species which differs from what Girsprecur appears to consider as the typical 
Pleuromamma gracilis—especially in the structure of the fifth pair of thoracic feet 
in the female. Dr Gresprecur * shows the female fifth pair to consist each of a single 
ramus provided with three short and tolerably stout teeth, the inner one being slightly 
the larger ; and this agrees fairly well with the specimens of P. gracilis in the Scotia 
collections, and with Dr Cravs’ original description, where, referring to the fifth pair, 


he says, “ Der letzte Fuss des Weibchens bildet einen schmalen, undeutlich gegliederten 
Stab und endit mit drei kurzen Zinken.”t In the form recorded by Esrerty from 
the San Diego region—a form which is also represented in the Scotia collections—the 
rami of the fifth pair of thoracic legs in the female are distinctly two-jointed and armed 
at the apex with three tolerably long and spiniform teeth, the middle one being the 
longest (see fig. 9, Pl. XIIL). As there does not appear to be otherwise any marked 
difference between this form and P, gracilis, and in the absence of a male, I am inclined 
to regard this form as no more than a fairly distinct variety of Pleuwromamma gracilis. 


Fam. LucicutTipa. 
Genus Lucicutia, Giesbrecht, 1898. 
Lucicutia flavicornis (Claus). 


1863, Leuckartia flavicornis, Claus, Die freilebenden Copepoden, p. 183, pl. xxxii. figs, 1-7. 


1892, 5 3 Giesb., ¥. Fl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 358, pls. v., xix., and xxxviii. 
1898, Lucicutia Fa Giesbrecht & Schmeil, Das Tierreich, vol. vi. p. 3. 
1904, of > Cleve, Mar. Invest. S. Africa, vol. iii. p. 192. 


The only samples in which this species was observed were collected at Stations 11, 
36, and 49, in the North Atlantic, 23° 50’ N., 21° 34’ W., to 1° 53’ ING ie 2G ae 


Fam. HereRORHABDID®. 
Genus Heterorhabdus, Giesbrecht, 1898. 
Heterorhabdus paupilliger (Claus). 


1863, Heterochxta papilligera, Claus, op. cit., p- 182, pl. xxxii, 

1892, 5 papilliger, Giesb., op. cit., p. 372, pls. xx. and xxxix. 

1898, Heterorhabdus  ,, Giesbrecht & Schmeil, Das Tierreich, vol. vi. p. 114. 

1901, Heterocheta papulligera, Cleve, “Plankton from the Indian Ocean and the Malay Archipelago,” 
Kongl. Sv. Vet.-Akad. Handl., Band 38. 8:Ary INK 1), 10% (ie 


This species, which appeared to be moderately rare, was only obtained in a single 
gathering collected at Station 15, 20° 34’ N., 23° 12’ W. 
* Cf. Fauna wu. Flora des Golfes von Neapel. + De freilebenden Copepoden, p. 197 (1863). 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL, 535.) 


290 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Heterorhabdus austrinus, Giesbrecht. 
1902, Heterorhabdus austrinus, Giesb., Expéd. Antarct. Belge, ‘“‘ Copepoden,” p. 28, pl. vi. 
H. austrinus occurred in gatherings from 200 and 500 fathoms. Only one or 


two specimens were obtained. These gatherings were collected on 2nd March 1903 ; 
Station 280, 68° 40’ 8., 30° 18’ W. 


Fam. Havopritip&. 
Genus Haloptilus, Giesbrecht, 1898. 
Haloptilus acutifrons, Giesbrecht. 
1892, Hemicalanus acutifrons, Giesb., F. Fl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 384, pl. ui. fig. 11, pl. xxvii. fig. 12, 
pl. xli. figs. 12 and 20. 

1898, Haloptilus acutifrons, Giesb. & Schmeil, Das Tierreich, vol. vi. p. 117. 

A single specimen of this Haloptilus was obtained in each of two gatherings, in 
one from 200 fathoms, the other from 500 fathoms, collected on 2nd March 1903 in 
68° 40’ S., 30° 18’ W., Station 280. These specimens are more than twice the size 
of those recorded by Dr GresprecuT, and on that account were considered at first 
as belonging to a different species. A careful examination of them, however, did not 
reveal any difference sufticiently important to separate them from H. acutifrons. 


Fam. CaNDACIIDA. 
Genus Candacia, Dana, 1846. 


Candacia pachydactyla, Dana. 


1849, Candace pachydactyla, Dana, Proc. Amer. Acad. Sci., vol. 1. p. 23. 


1883, a 75 Brady, Report Voyage of the ‘“ Challenger,” vol. vil. p. 68, pl. xxxi. 
figs, 2-9. 

1898, Candacia pachydactyla, Giesb. & Schmeil, op. cit., p. 128. 

1904, - 1 Cleve, Mar. Invest. South Africa, vol. iii. p. 187. 


This was a tolerably common form in the Scotia plankton collections, and appeared 
to be widely distributed. It was observed in samples collected at twenty-eight 
different stations, extending from Station 7 in 26° 23’ N., 20° 20’ W., to Station 
Qoamis2 ld 0:64 30 We 

Candacia curta, Dana. 

1849, Candace curta, Dana, op. cit., vol. ii. p. 33. 

1892, 55 »  Giesb., F. Fl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 424, pls. xxi., xxil., and xxxix. 

1893, ” intermedia, T. Scott, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., “ Zool.,” ser. 3, vol. vi. p. 61, pl. iv. 

figs. 30-37. 

1898, Candacia curta, Giesb. & Schmeil, Das Tierretch, vol. vi. p. 128. 

This Candacia was obtained sparingly in gatherings from the following five 
stations, viz. 31, 32, 35, and 49 in the North Atlantic, 11° 10’ N., 25° 20’ W., to 
1° 53’ N., 27° 26’ W., and Station 59 in 2° 30’ S., 32° 42’ W. This species is found in 
the Red Sea, and its distribution extends both to the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 536.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 291 


Candacia bipinnata, Giesbrecht. 


1889, Candace bipinnata, Giesb., Atti Acc. Lincet Rend., ser. 4, vol. v. p. 815. 

1892, 3 o idem, F. Fl. Neapel, vol. xix. p. 424, pl. xxii. fig. 20 et seq. 
1898, Candacia 5 Giesb. & Schmeil, Das Tierreich, vol. vi. p. 129. 

1904, ar aS Cleve, Mar. Invest. S. Africa, vol. iii. p. 186. 


A few specimens were obtained in a surface gathering collected 5th May 1904 off 
Cape Peninsula, South Africa, Station 477, 34° 21’ 8., 18° 29’ E. 


Candacia xthiopica, Dana. 
1849, Candace xthiopica, Dana, op, cit., vol. ii. p. 23. 
The only gathering in which this species occurred was collected at Station 12 in 
92° 19’ N., 22° 07’ W. 
Candacia bispinosa, Claus. 
1863, Candace bispinosa, Claus, Die freilebenden Copepoden, p. 191, Taf. 27, 28. 


This species occurred sparingly in gatherings from the following seven Stations : 
i2etAe 572,83, 85, and 86, 22° 19’ NL, 22° 07" W., to 24°26! S:, 40° 25/°W, 


Candacia simplex, Giesbrecht. 


1889, Candace simplex, Giesb., op. cit., ser. 5, vol. v. sem. 1, p. 815, and Fauna u. Flora des Golfes von 
Neapel, vol. xix (‘‘Copep.”), p. 424, pl. xxi. figs. 10, 30, 31 et seg. 


This species was tolerably rare in gatherings from Stations 11, 59, and 83, 23° 50’ N., 
Piles A Wie tOrae SQ nO. ca0 227 WV. 
Candacia longimana, Claus. 


18638, Candace longimana, Claus, op. cit., p. 190, Taf. 27 and 33. 


A single specimen of this Candacia was obtained in a gathering from Station 49, 
53 Ne 27 26° We 


Fam. PoNnTELLIDA. 
Genus Calanopia, Dana, 1852. 


Calanopia americana, Dahl. (PI. XIII. figs. 1-6.) 
1894, Calanopia americana, Dahl, Berichte naturf. Gesells, Freiburg (N.S.), vol. viii. p. 21, Taf. 1, 
figs. 23-26. 

In this species the inner ramus of the first four pairs of thoracic legs in the female 
are two-jointed. The female fifth pair are simple, and consist each of a single two- 
jointed ramus ; the proximal joint is moderately stout, but the end one is narrow and 
rather longer than the other, and terminates in a tolerably long spine, and there are 
also two short spines on the outer and one on the inner margin (fig. 4). 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI, 537.) 


292 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


The male differs from the female by the peculiar structure of the right antennule, 
the fifth and sixth joints of which are produced exteriorly into angular and gibbous 
expansions. The seventh joint is elongated and slender, while the base of the next one 
extends inwards into a horn-like projection nearly at right angles to the joint, but curved 
slightly forward and having its inner edge finely serrated. The remaining joints are 
slender and moderately elongated, except the last one, which is short; the articulations 
between the fifth and sixth and the eighth and ninth joints are hinged (fig. 1). 

The fifth pair of thoracic legs in the male are asymmetrical, that on the left side 
is long and slender and terminates in a claw-like spine, while the basal part of the 
proximal joint expands anteriorly into a short angular process. The other foot is also 
elongated, but the end joints are dilated and form a thumb-like arrangement, as shown 
in the drawing (fig. 5). 

Halitat.—This species was obtained in gatherings from Stations 64, 65, 67, and 
93, 6° 80 8273425 We to 30° 050s: 4on 25a We 

Calanopia americana was obtained by Dr Daut in a collection of plankton from 
the mouth of the river Tocantins, on the north-west coast of South America, where the 
water was doubtless more or less brackish. Its occurrence in the Scotia collections, 
besides extending the distribution of the species considerably, is interesting, from its 


having been found in the open sea. 


Genus Labidocera, Lubbock, 1853. 
Labidocera nerw (Kroyer). 
1848, Pontia nerii, Kroyer, Naturh. Tidsskr. (N.S.), vol. ii. p. 579, Taf. 6. 
This was a tolerably common species in the Scotia collections. It occurred in no 
fewer than twenty-eight gatherings, extending from Station 7, 26° 23° N.. 20-20" Wee 


in the North Atlantic, to 95, 32° 15’ S., 47° 30’ W., in the South Atlantic, occurring at 
nearly regular intervals. 


Labidocera acutifrons (Dana). 
1849, Pontella acutifrons, Dana, op. cit., vol. ii. p. 30. 


The only gatherings in which this species was obtained were collected at Station 
14, 21° 28’ N., 22° 40’ W., and Station 18, 19° 59’ N., 23° 34’ W. 


Genus Pontella, Dana, 1849. 
Pontella atlantica (M.-Edw._). 
1840, Pontia atlantica, M.-Edw., Hist. Nat. Crust., vol. viii. p. 420, Taf. 39. 


This species occurred in gatherings from Stations 7, 35, and 41, 26°32 3 Nee Or 
20’ W., to 5° 40’ N., 26° 4’ W., but only a few specimens were observed. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 538.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 293 
Pontella securifer, G. 8. Brady. 
1883, Pontella securifer, Brady, Report Voyage of the “ Challenger,” vol. viii. (“Copepoda”), p. 96, pl. xlv. 


Gatherings collected at Stations 41, 82, and 83 yielded a few specimens of this 
Pontella, 5° 40’ N., 26° 4’ W., to 22° 32’ 8, 39° 22’ W. 


Pontella spinipes, Giesbrecht. 


1889, Pontella spinipes, Giesb., Alti. Acc. Lincei Rend., ser. 4, vol. v. sem. 2, p. 28. 


This species was obtained in gatherings collected at Stations 14, 44, and 82, 
Die 8 INes22°°4 0% W., to 20° 40/ Sy,08 20° W. 


Genus Pontellina, Dana, 1852. 


Pontellina plumata, Dana. 
1849, Pontella plumata, Dana, op. cit., vol. ii. p. 27. 
1852, Pontellina plumata, Dana, U.S. Explor. Exped., vol. viii. (ii.), p. 1135, pl. Ixxix. 


This moderately common species occurred in gatherings from eighteen stations, 


extending from Station 14 to 93, 21° 28’ N., 22° 40’ W., to 30° 05’ S., 45° 28’ W. 


Genus Pontellopsis, G. 8. Brady, 1883. 
Pontellopsis regalis (Dana). 
1849, Pontella regalis, Dana, op. cit., vol. ii. p. 31. 


This species occurred sparingly in gatherings from Stations 11, 35, 49, 54, 


68, 23° 50’ N., 21° 34’ W., to Station 68a, 8° 0’S., 34° 34’ W., Pernambuco bearing 
12 miles W. 


59, and 


Pontellopsis perspicax (Dana). 
1849, Pontella perspicax, Dana, op. cit., vol. ii. p. 32. 
pers, > » OF I 


The gatherings in which this species was observed were collected at Stations 


Wks BAO! 
35, 44, and 49, all in the North Atlantic, 13° 38’ N., 25° 9/ W5, to: 1° 537 NE 


, 27° 26’ W. 
Pontellopsis brevis (Giesbrecht). 


1889, Monops brevis, Giesb., op. cit., ser. 4, vol. v. sem. 2, p. 28. 


The only gathering in which this species occurred was collected at Station 67. in 
7° 20’ S., 34° 38’ W. 


Pontellopsis villosa, G. S. Brady. 
1883, Pontellopsis villosa, Brady, Report Voyage of the “ Challenger,” vol. viii. (“Copepoda”), p. 86, 
pls. xxxiv and xxxv, 
This, which was a tolerably rare species in the Scotia collections, was only observed 
in a gathering from Station 8 in 26° 12’ N.3'20° 25! W. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 539.) 


294 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Fam. ACARTIID. 
Genus Acartia, Dana, 1846. 


Acartia negligens, Dana. 


1849, Acartia negligens, Dana, op. cit., vol. 11. p. 26. 


This species was observed in gatherings collected at Stations 7, 11, 19, and 95, 
262.20 IN 20. 20) Wie, to327 15 Ss Ae oO We 


Acartia danx, Giesbrecht. 


1889, Acartia dane, Giesb., op. cit., ser. 4, vol. v. sem. 2, p. 26. 


This occurred in gatherings from eleven stations, extending from Station 11 to 
Station 102, 23° 50’ N., 21° 34’ W., to 36° 31’ S., 51° 56’ W. 


Tribe HARPACTICOILDA, G. O. Sars.* 
Fam. CERVINIID. . 


Genus Pseudozosime, new genus. 


Generic characters: Female. 


In the female the body is tolerably robust, and has 
a general resemblance to Zosime, Boeck, except that the abdomen is not so clearly 
defined from the cephalothorax; genital segment moderately large, with a distinct 
transverse suture. Anterior antennz (antennules) short, stout, and composed of about 
five joints. Second antennee and mouth organs nearly as in Zosime. The inner ramus 
of all the four pairs of swimming legs is composed of two joints, and the outer of three 
joints. The fifth pair are of moderate size; the inner portion of the basal joint is 
somewhat expanded, while the second joint is comparatively small. 

Remarks.—Pseudozosime differs from the other genera nearly related to it by 
having the inner ramus of all the four pairs of thoracie legs biarticulated, and by the 
fifth pair being comparatively larger and more compact. 


Pseudozosime browna, new species. (PI. VIII. figs. 9-19.) 


Female.—The body of the female tolerably stout, narrow, and elongated, bluntly 
rounded anteriorly, and tapering slightly towards the posterior end ; rostrum prominent. 
Length of the specimen represented by the drawing 0°95 mm. 

Antennules short, stout, composed of about five joints, and densely setiferous. 
Antenne with the outer ramus triarticulated, and otherwise nearly as in Zosime typica, 
Boeck. Mouth organs also somewhat similar to those in that species. 

The first four pairs of thoracic legs are moderately stout, and the inner ramus is 
composed of two and the outer of three joints. In the first pair the inner ramus reaches 
to the end of the three-jointed outer one, and the joints are nearly of equal length ; the 

* The arrangement followed for the Harpacticoida is that of G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. v. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 540.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 295 


outer margins of both rami are fringed with minute bristles, but in the outer ramus, 
the spinules at the outer distal angles of the first and second joints, and also those on 
the third joint, are tolerably stout and elongated. In the second and third pairs the 
inner ramus is rather shorter than the outer, and the end joint is about twice as long as 
the proximal one. In the fourth pair the inner ramus is considerably shorter than the 
outer one, and scarcely reaches to the end of its middle joint. The fifth pair are of 
moderate size; the inner portion of the basal joint is somewhat expanded, and pro- 
vided with four setze—two on the inner margin and two at the apex; the second joint 
is smaller, and furnished with three sete at the distal end; all the sete are elongated. 
Caudal rami short, and about equal in length to the last abdominal segment. 

Habitat.—South Orkney Islands; collected in June 1903, 60° 43’ 42” S., 
44° 38’ 33” W., Station 325. Only one specimen—a female 
siftings from dredged material. Named in compliment to Dr R. N. RupmMose Brown, 
the Scotia naturalist, who was in charge of tow-netting, and who in consequence was 
the collector of the whole material dealt with in this monograph. 


was observed in some 


Fam. Ecrrnosomipé. 
Genus Hetinosoma, Boeck, 1864. 
Eetinosoma antarcticum Giesbrecht. (PI. II. figs. 10-13.) 
1902, Hetinosoma antarcticum, Giesb., Expéd. Antarct, Belye, “ Copepoden,” p. 31, Taf. 12. 

One or two specimens (females) of an Hctinosoma apparently belonging to this 
species were obtained in one of the small gatherings of dredged material collected by the 
Scotia among the South Orkney Islands, Station 325, 60° 43’ 42" S., 44° 38’ 33” W., and 
in these specimens the structure of the various appendages agrees very well with the 
description of the species given by Dr Gizszrecut. In the genus Hetinosoma, the form 
and armature of the fifth pair of thoracic legs are usually regarded as furnishing 
important specific characters, and in these Scotva specimens, the fifth pair of legs are 
identical with those of Hetinosoma antarcticum, as shown by Dr GresBRECHT’s figures, 


and also by our drawings on Pl. II. fig. 14. 


Genus Bradya, Boeck, 1872. 
Bradya proxima, new species. (PI. LL. figs. 1-9.) 


Female. 


Body moderately robust. Antennules short and stout. Antenne with 
the outer ramus well developed, and reaching to the end of the inner ramus. Mandibles, 
maxillze, and maxillipeds similar to those in Bradya typica, Boeck. 

In the first four pairs of thoracic legs both rami are of moderate length, and the 
joints are somewhat broad and flattened, and the marginal spines of the outer ramus 
are also elongated and slender. In the fifth pair there is a considerable space between 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 541.) 


296 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


the one and the other, as in Bradya typica; the inner lobe of the basal joint is 
furnished with two long, slender sete—the inner being rather the longer one; the 
second joint is small, and carries three sete at its apex; the two inner sete are 
elongated and subequal, but the other is short. The appendicular bristle is slender, and 
scarcely reaches to the end of the short apical seta. Caudal rami very short. 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected in June 1903: Station 3825, 
60° 43’ 42” §., 44° 38’ 33" W. Apparently rare. 

Remarks.—The form described above is nearly allied to Bradya typica, Boeck, 
but differs in the armature of the last pair of thoracic legs, and in one or two other 
structural details. 


Genus Microsetella, Brady & Robertson, 1873. 
Microsetella norvegica (Boeck). 
1864, Setella norvegica, Boeck, Selskab. Forhandl, Christiania (1864), p. 281. 


This small Harpactid was observed in gatherings from only a few stations, viz. 
37, 62,93, 94, and 06,7. 50 IN 25° $l Wo tos9 a Ols5o e420 ae 


Microsetella rosea (Dana). 
1847, Harpacticus roseus, Dana, Proc. Amer. Acad., Boston, vol. i. p. 153. 

This species appeared to be rather more common than the last, being present in 
gatherings from about fifteen stations, and with a distribution extending from Stations 
7, 10#and 12 m the North Atlantic, 26° 23’ N., 20° 20’ W., to 22° 197 N.. 22271077 Wwe 
to Station 88 in 26° 25’ S., 42° 00’ W. 


Fam. MacrosereLiip a. 
Macrosetella, A. Scott, 1909. 
Syn. Sefel/a, Dana (but this name is preoccupied), 
Macrosetella gracilis (Dana). 
1846, Sefella gracilis, Dana, Amer. Journ. Sci. (2), vol. 1. p. 227. 
This species occurred in gatherings from twenty-five stations, and appeared to be 
distributed over nearly the whole area traversed by the Scotia. The northerly Stations 


comprised 7, 10, 12, 14 in the North Atlantic, while Stations 93, 94, and 95 were the 
most southerly ; 26° 23’ N., 20° 20’ W., to 32° 15’ S., 47° 30’ W. 


Genus Miracia, Dana. 
Miracia efferata, Dana, 1846. 
1846, Miracia efferata, Dana, Amer. Journ. Set. (2), vol. 1. p. 230. 


This was also observed in gatherings from twenty-five stations, and its distribution 
was somewhat similar to that of Setella. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIU., 542.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 297 


Fam. KuTerPINnip&. 
Genus Huterpina, Norman, 1908. 
Syn. Huterpe, Claus, 1863 (name preoccupied). 
Euterpina acutifrons (Dana). 
1847, Harpacticus acutifrons, Dana, Proc. Amer. Acad., Boston, vol. i. p. 153. 


The only gathering in which this species occurred was from Station 65 in 
Oreo 2eiwa4e oe Wh. 


Fam. CLYTEMNESTRID&. 
genus Clytemnestra, Dana, 1847. 
Clytemnestra seutellata, Dana, (Pl. XIII. figs. 11 and 12.) 
1847, Clytemnestra scutellata, Dana, Proc. Amer. Acad., Boston, vol. i, p. 154. 


This specics was observed rather sparingly at Stations 14, 32, 33, and 39, 21° 28’ N., 
22° 40’ W., to 6° 43’ N., 25° 48’ W., all in the North Atlantic. This species may 
be distinguished from Clytemnestra rostrata (Brady) by the different structure of the 
antennules and caudal rami. Fig. 11, Pl. XIII, shows the end-joints of one of the 
antennules, and the caudal rami are represented by fig. 12. 


Fam. Harpacricipé&. 
Genus Harpacticus, M.-Edw., 1838. 
Harpacticus fucicolus, new species. (PI. VIII. figs. 20-24.) 


Female.—In its general appearance the female of this species is somewhat similar 
to Harpacticus gracilis (Claus). 

The antennules are moderately slender and composed of nine joints; the first four 
are of moderate size and subequal, but the third is rather longer than any of the other 
three ; the remaining five joints are small, and together are scarcely equal to one-fourth 
of the total length—the penultimate joint is the smallest. Antennz small, the outer 
ramus short and composed of two joints. Mandibles and other mouth organs nearly as 
in Harpacticus gracilis. 

First pair of thoracic legs slender; the outer ramus is considerably elongated, but 
the inner one reaches only to about the end of the first joint of the outer ramus; the 
armature of both rami is rather feeble. The next three pairs are somewhat similar to 
those in Harpacticus gracilis. 

In the fifth pair, the inner portion of the basal joint is not much produced ; it is 
provided with four setse ; one springs from the inner margin and three from the broadly 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL, 543.) 


298 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


rounded apex; the outer margin of the second joint is nearly parallel with the inner, 
and near the extremity of the joint both margins converge to the angular apex ; four 
setee spring from the lower end of the outer margin and apex of this joint, and one from 
the lower end of the inner margin ; all the setee are moderately slender. Caudal rami 
very short. 

Habitat.—Obtained on floating seaweed collected in the North Atlantic on 29th June 
1904, between Cape Verde Islands and the Azores, Station 537, 29° 54’ N., 34° 10’ W. 

Remarks.—The form described above has a close resemblance to Harpacticus gracilis, 
Claus, and it may ultimately have to be ascribed to that species. Meanwhile, as no 
male specimens have been observed, and as there are one or two slight differences 
between the two forms, as, for example, in the structure of the antennules and of the 
fifth pair of thoracic legs, it is perhaps better that the specimens from the Scotza’s 
collections should be recorded under a distinct name. 


Harpacticus piriei, new species. (Pl. V. fig. 15; Pl. XI. figs. 18-25.) 

Female.—Body moderately stout, somewhat resembling Harpacticus chelifer, 
O. F. Miller, in its general form. Length about 0°85 mm. 

Antennules composed of nine joints; the first four tolerably stout and elongated, 
the others small, so that, together, they are scarcely equal to a fourth of the entire 
length of the antennule (fig. 18, Pl. XI.). Antennze and mouth appendages nearly as 
in Harpacticus chelifer. 

The first pair of thoracic legs are tolerably slender, and somewhat similar to the 
species mentioned ; the other three pairs are also somewhat similar to those in the 
same species, except that in the second pair the inner ramus is nearly as long as the 
outer one. 

The fifth pair has the basal joint broad and its inner portion only slightly produced, 
and provided with four sete of unequal lengths on its distal margin, the second seta 
from the outside being much longer than the others. The second joint is subtriangular 
in outline, the greatest width, which is near the proximal end, being about equal to 
half the length; the inner margin is nearly straight, but the outer is rounded and 
curves obliquely to the distal extremity: this jomt is provided with six sete of un- 
equal lengths—two, having a considerable space between them, on the lower half of 
the outer margin, two close together at the apex, and two at the distal end of inner 
margin—the second seta from the inside being very small (fig. 15, Pl. V.). 

The caudal rami in this species are very short. 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, in siftings from some dredged material 
collected in 9 to 10 fathoms, in April 19038, Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” 8., 44° 38’ 33” W. 

Remarks.—This species, though it resembles Harpacticus chelifer in some respects, 
differs distinctly in the form and armature of the fifth pair of thoracic legs, and also 
in the structure of the antennules. Named in compliment to Dr J. H. Harvey Prrtr, 
one of the Scotia naturalists. 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 544.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 299 


Fam. Prevrrpipa. 
Genus Alteutha, Baird, 1845. 
Alteutha austrina, new species. (Pl. X. figs. 9-15.) 


Female.—Body depressed, expanded laterally, and having a general resemblance 
to Alteutha depressa, Baird. Length of the specimen represented by the drawing 
(fig. 9), 0°92 mm. 

Antennules composed of nine joints; the second joint, which is the longest, is 
about equal to the third and fourth joints combined; the seventh and eighth, 
which are about equal in size, are smaller than any of the others (fig. 10). Second 
maxillipeds small, with the end joint short, and armed with a moderately stout 
terminal claw. 

The outer ramus of the first pair of thoracic legs is considerably longer and stouter 
than the inner, and both rami are three-jointed—the joints of the outer ramus are 
subequal in length. The next three pairs are slender and similar to those in Alteutha 
depressa. 

The fifth pair also resemble those of the same species: they consist of thin and 
moderately narrow and elongated plates with a subcentral and longitudinal hyaline 
band, as indicated in the drawing (fig. 14); each foot is two-jointed, but the articula- 
tion between the joints is sometimes not very clearly defined. ‘lhe basal joint is short 
and carries a moderately stout spine on its outer distal angle; there is also a stout 
spine and a few small spinules at the extremity of the second joint, and the inner 
margin of this joint is obscurely crenulated, as shown in the figure (fig. 14). 

Caudal rami short, moderately broad, and furnished each with one long and three 
(or four) short terminal bristles (fig. 15). 

Halitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, obtained in siftings from some dredged 
material collected in June 1903; Station 825, 60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 

Though this species resembles in some respects Dr Batrp’s Alteutha depressa, it 
differs from it in some important details, as indicated in the description given above. 


Alteutha dubia, new species. (PI. X. figs. 1-8.) 


Female.—Body depressed, expanded laterally, as in Alteutha depressa, Baird ; 
rostrum prominent. Length, 1*4 mm. 

Antennules composed of nine joints; the second is considerably longer than any 
of the others; the seventh and eighth are small and subequal, and the end joint is 
about as long as the two preceding ones combined (fig. 2). Antenne slender; outer 
ramus small and biarticulate. 

Second maxillipeds elongated, end joint ovate, and armed with a moderately short 
and stout terminal claw (fig. 4). 

The swimming legs are moderately slender, and both rami are three-jointed ; the 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI, 545.) 


300 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


inner ramus of the first pair is considerably shorter than the outer one, and the end 
joint is rather narrower than the first or second (fig. 5). 

Fifth pair lamelliform, tolerably broad, and composed of two joints ; the first jomt 
is produced anteriorly into a narrow appendage bearing two apical and marginal sete ; 
the second joint is provided with five or six slender bristles on the distal half of the 
outer margin and apex (fig. 7). 

Caudal rami short, ovate; a tolerably stout spine springs from a notch near the 
middle of the outer margin, and there are also one elongate and three short sete round 
the distal end of each ramus (fig. 8). 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, obtained in siftings from some dredged 
material collected in June 1903; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 

Remarks.—The species described above may be distinguished by the peculiar 
structure of the fifth pair of thoracic legs, as well as by the form and armature of the 
caudal rami. 


Genus Paralteutha, new genus. 


Definition.—Similar to Alteutha, Baird, in its general form and in its cephalo- 
thoracic appendages, except that the inner ramus of the first pair of swimming feet 
consists of two instead of three joints; and the lateral margins of the second joint of 
the fifth pair are parallel, or nearly so, while the distal extremity of the joint is obliquely 
truncated. 


Paralteutha typica, new species. (PI. X. figs. 16-25.) 


Female.—Body depressed, expanded laterally, as in Alteutha depressa, Baird. 
Length of the specimen represented by the drawing (fig. 16), 1°6 mm. 

Antennules nine-jointed, as in Alteutha depressa. Outer ramus of the antennze 
small and biarticulate, but the end joint is very minute. 

Mandibles with the masticatory end narrow and truncated, biting edge obscurely 
dentate. Second maxillipeds elongated, each provided with a tolerably large and 
powerfully clawed hand (fig. 20). 

First pair of thoracic legs elongated and moderately stout, inner ramus not much 
shorter than the outer, and composed of two subequal joints (fig. 21). The next three 
pairs long and slender, and furnished with long slender marginal spines (fig. 22). 

Fifth pair stout, two-jointed; the first joint is short, but the second is tolerably 
elongated, and about four times as long as broad; its margins are nearly parallel, and 
its distal extremity truncated and. armed with three stout spines, the inner one being 
the largest. There are also two short spines on the inner margin, one near the middle 
of the joint, the other near its distal end. he first joint is also provided with a few 
long sete, as shown in the drawing (fig. 24). 

Caudal rami short and subquadrangular in outline. A short, stout spine springs 
from a notch on the outer margin of each ramus, and there are also a few small 
apical spines. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL., 546.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 301 


The male does not differ much from the female, except in the structure of the 
antennules and of the fifth pair of thoracic legs. The antennules are so modified that 
they form effective grasping organs. In the fifth pair of legs, the joints are nearly 
of equal length and their armature is also slightly different (fig. 25). 

Halitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, obtained in siftings from dredged material 
collected in June 1903; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 

Remarks.—This species appears to hold an intermediate place between Alteutha 
and Peltidium, It resembles the first in its general appearance, and also to some 
extent in the structure of several of its appendages. On the other hand, the structure 
of the first pair of thoracic legs is somewhat similar to that of the same pair of legs in 
Peltidium. 

Fam. PorceLLipips®. 
Genus Porcellidium, Claus, 1860. 
Porcellidium affine, Quidor. (PI. IV. figs. 5-13.) 
1906, Porcellidium afinis, Quidor, Expéd. Antarct. Francaise, 1903-1905, “ Copepodes,” p. 4, pl. i. figs. 1-19. 

Female. — The female of this species has a general resemblance to that of 
Porcellidium ravane, Thompson & Scott, described in Supplementary Report VII. 
of the Report on the Ceylon Pearl-Oyster Fisheries, by Professor HerpMan. It 
differs, however, in the form of the first abdominal segment, as well as in the 
structure of the antennules; it is also somewhat larger than that species, being about 
1 mm. in length. 

The antennules are composed of seven unequal joints ; the first three are large, 
their combined lengths being equal to about two-thirds of the entire length of the 
antennule. The remaining joints are small, but the fourth and sixth are rather longer 
than the others (fig. 7). The antenna (fig. 8) has the outer ramus articulated to the 
end of the first joint of the inner one, and is composed of a single moderately long 
joint. The mouth appendages and swimming feet are similar to those in Porcellidium 
ravane. The first pair of swimming feet are short, and the first joint of the inner 
ramus is a broad angular plate widest near the proximal end, but becoming narrower 
distally ; the end joint, which is very small, is provided with two stout claw-like 
spines of tolerable length, which usually extend outwardly at about a right angle to 
the leg ; in the outer ramus the first joint is moderately expanded, but the second and 
third are smaller. The spiniform setze on the outer margin are all dilated at the base 
and plumose, but the two at the end are tolerably long and slender. A stout seta 
also springs from the inner distal angle of the second joint. The claw-like spines on 
the end joint of the inner ramus are each furnished on the lower edge with a fringe of 
close-set delicate filaments (fig. 9). 

The next three pairs have both rami three-jointed, and moderately elongated and 
slender. 


(ROY. 80C, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL., 547.) 


302 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


The fifth pair are somewhat similar to those in Porcellidium ravanex, both in their 
general outline and in having their extremity bluntly rounded (fig. 10). 

The abdomen and caudal rami also resemble the same parts in P. ravane, but 
in that species the caudal rami do not reach to the end of the fifth pair of feet, 
whereas in the present form the caudal rami reach somewhat beyond these appendages. 
They are also more bluntly rounded at the end, and the terminal and marginal spines 
are somewhat differently arranged, as shown in the drawing (fig. 12). 

Male.—The male, as is usual, is smaller than the female; the antennules are 
modified for grasping; the fifth pair of feet are different in form and armature, and 
the abdomen and caudal rami are shorter (see figs. 12 and 13). 

The fifth pair of feet are small, and narrow at the proximal end, but they become 
wider distally ; the extremity is obliquely truncated and fringed with about six short 
setiferous spines (fig. 11). Caudal rami are very short, and have the squarely 
truncated ends furnished with a few marginal sete (fig. 13). 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected in June 1903; Station 325, 
6043" AZ S,, 44.38 733 We 

Remarks.—This species, as already stated, has some resemblance to Porcelliduun 
ravane, Thompson & A. Scott, but differs in several anatomical details, as, for example, 
in the structure of the female antennules, as well as in the form and armature of the 
caudal segments. It also resembles in some respects the Porcellidvum wolfendena 
described by G. 8. Brapy.* 


Genus 7isbe, Lilljeborg,t 1853. 


Tisbe austrina, new species. (PI. III. figs. 26-30.) 


Female. 


(T. Scott), but is rather more slender. Length about 0°6 mm. 


This species, in its general appearance, is somewhat like Zisbe minor 


Antennules composed of eight joints; the second and third joints are subequal and 
of moderate size; the fourth is fully half as long as the third; the fifth and sixth, 
which are subequal, are together about as long as the fourth, but the seventh is very 
small; the end joint was incomplete, but appeared to be about as long as the fourth 
joint. The antennz are small, and the outer ramus reaches only to the end of the 
second joint of the inner ramus. Mouth organs somewhat similar to those in T%sbe 
minor, but the second maxillipedes are moderately stout. All the four pairs of 
swimming legs are also somewhat similar to those in the species mentioned. 

In the fifth pair, the inner portion of the basal joint ends in a blunt poimted apex, 
which bears two sete, one being moderately stout and elongated, and the other small ; 

* Deutsche Stidpolar Exped., 1901-1903 : “ Uber die Copepoden der Stiimme Harpacticoida,” ef seq., p. 556 (1910). 
Separate reprint. 

+ “The name Jdya having been previously given by BLatNvILLE to a genus of Acalephie,” was changed by G. O. 
Sars to Idyxa: see Rept. of Second Norwegian Arctic Haped. in the “ Fram,” 1898-1902, No. 18; Crustacea, by G. O. 


Sars, p. 21 (1909). Rev. T. R. R. Sreppine, in Annals of the South African Museum, vol. vi. p. 544 (1910), restores 
Lilljeborg’s name, Tisbe. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 548.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 303 


the second joint is of a broadly ovate form, its greatest width being equal to about 
half the length, and it carries four (or five) short setee round the lower part of the 
outer margin and apex, as shown in the drawing (fig. 30). 

Caudal rami short. 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected in June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. No males observed. 

Remarks.—As already stated, this species has a somewhat close resemblance to 
Tisbe minor (T. Scott), first described in the Annals of Scottish Natural HMistory in 
October 1896, from specimens obtained in the Firth of Clyde. The same species has 
also been recorded from Norway by Professor G. O. Sars, and it was one of the 
Harpactids discovered by Dr Bruck in Franz Josef Land. But the Antarctic form, 
though closely resembling the northern species referred to, may be readily distinguished 
from it by the broadly ovate form of the second joint of the last pair of thoracic legs. 

The genus 7isbe, as Professor G. O. Sars remarks, ‘seems to be represented in all 


‘ 


parts of the oceans,” and he has “even found one or two species of this genus in the 
Caspian Sea.” * Dr Gigsprecut obtained two species belonging to the /dywxa in the 
collections brought home from the Antaretic by the Belgica in 1899;+ both these 
species, however, differ in several respects from those observed in the material collected 
by the Scotea ; and they differ especially in the structure of the first and fifth pairs of 
thoracic legs. I am also unable to identify the Scotia species with either of those 
recorded by Dr Brapy in his account of the Copepoda-Harpacticoida of the Deutsche 


Siidpolar Hupedition, pp. 560, 561.t 


Tisbe gracilipes, new species. (PI. I. figs. 23-29.) 


Female.—The female of this species is somewhat like that of Tishe gracilis (T. 
Scott) in its general form, being elongated and rather slender. 

The antennules are tolerably elongated; the second joint is rather longer than the 
third, which, in its turn, is about one and a half times the length of the fourth joint. 
The three following joints are small, while the end one is equal to the two preceding 
joints combined (fig. 23). 

Antenne moderately slender, the outer ramus four-jointed and rather longer than 
the penultimate joint of the inner ramus (fig. 24). The mandibles and other mouth 
organs are somewhat similar to those in Tisbe gracilis. 

The thoracic legs are also somewhat similar to those in the species mentioned, but 
in the first pair, the second joint of the inner ramus is proportionally more elongated, 
being fully one and a half times the length of the first joint. The outer ramus scarcely 


reaches to the end of the first joint of the inner one (fig. 26). In the fourth pair, the 
* Crustacea of Norway, vol. v. p. 88 (1905). 
+ Resultats du Voyage du s.y. “ Belgica,” “ Copepoda,” von Dr W. Giesbrecht, p. 88 (1902). 
t Deutsche Siidpolar Exped., 1901-1903: “Uber die Copepoden der Staémme Harpacticoida, Cyclopoida,” ete. 
(1910). 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI, 549.) 


304 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


end joint of the outer ramus is about twice as long as the preceding joint. It is also 
moderately narrow, and furnished with two rather stout marginal spines and two at 
the apex, the inner apical spine being nearly as long as the joint to which it is 
articulated (fig. 27). 

The fifth pair are somewhat like the same pair in Tisbe gracilis; the second joint, 
however, differs in being rather wider in proportion to its length. The seta on its 
inner margin is also articulated nearer the middle of the joint, and the whole of the 
inner aspect of the joint is covered with minute hairs (fig. 28). 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected in June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42” §., 44° 38’ 33” W. Rare. 

Remarks—This form resembles Jdyxa gracilis, and might be considered as only 
a variety of that species, but the inner ramus of the first pair of swimming legs is 
proportionally and distinctly more elongated, and the second joint of the fifth pair is 
also more broadly ovate. Because of these differences and one or two others alluded 
to in the description, the species ought, I think, to be considered distinet. 


Genus Psamathe, Philippi, 1840. 
Psamathe longicauda, Philippi. (Pl. V. figs. 16-22.) 


1840, Psamathe longicauda, Philippi, Archiv f. Naturgesch, (1840), p. 89, pl. iv. fig. 1. 

1866, Scutellidium tisboides, Claus, Die Copepoden fauna von Nizza, p. 21, pl. iv. figs. 8-15. 
1880, 3 5 Brady, Monogr. Brit. Copep., vol. ii. p. 175, pl. Ixviii. figs. 1-10. 
1905, Psamathe longicauda, G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Norway, vol. v. p. 83, pl. xlix. 

A single specimen of this Harpactid was obtained in a plankton gathering collected 
at Station 27 in 13° 38’ N., 25° 09’ W. 

The body in this species is considerably flattened, and there is a distinct break 
between the anterior and the posterior portions, best seen when viewed from above, 
the former being expanded, while the latter is narrow (see fig. 16). 

The antennules are composed of nine joints; the first three are elongated and moder- 
ately stout, and are together about twice the entire length of the remaining six joints: 
the end joint is slender and rather longer than the three preceding joints combined 
(fig. 17). 

Antenne with the outer ramus four-jointed and not more than half the length of 
the inner one ; it is also articulated to the outer distal angle of the second basal joint 
(fig. 18). 

Maxillipeds moderately stout ; first pair smaller than the second and armed with 
two claw-like terminal spines (fig. 19). Second maxillipeds robust; the basal joint is 
provided with a stout plumose seta on its inner distal angle, and the end joint with 
three stout terminal claws and a small plumose bristle (fig. 20). 

The first pair of thoracic legs are moderately stout, and both rami are composed of 
three joints, but the end joints are extremely small and bear peculiar recurved terminal 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVII., 550.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 305 


spines, as shown in the drawing (fig. 21); the outer ramus is considerably shorter than 
the inner, and the spiniform seta at the outer angle of the second basal joint is remark- 
ably stout. The next three pairs have both rami also three-jointed, and are of 
normal form. 

In the fifth pair, which were somewhat imperfect, the basal joint was bilobed and 
moderately expanded ; the end joint, which is of a narrow ovate outline, is about three 
times longer than broad, but, beimg imperfect, its dimensions could not be accurately 
made out (see fig. 22). 

The specimen—a female-—represented by the drawing (fig. 16) measured 0°88 mm. 
in length. It agrees so closely in size and form and in the structure of its various 
appendages with the description and drawing of Psamathe longicauda given by 
G. O. Sars in the work referred to above, that I have no hesitation in ascribing it to 
the same species. 

The distribution of Psamathe longicauda is apparently extensive, for in addition 
to the Mediterranean records by Puitiprr and Craus, it also belongs to the Copepod 
fauna of Britain and Norway. It has also been reported from Franz Josef Land as 
well as from the Black Sea. Its occurrence at the Scotva Station 27 extends its 
distribution to the south of the Cape Verde Islands. 


Psamathe fucicola, new species. (Pl. VI. figs. 12-19.) 


Female.—The female of this species has a general resemblance to Psamathe 
longicauda, Philippi, but is rather smaller. The length of the specimen represented by 
the drawings is 0°75 mm. 

Antennules moderately stout and composed of nine joints; second joint tolerably 
large, and fully one and a half times longer than the next; the fifth, sixth, and seventh 
very small; the last two joints are slender, but rather longer than those immediately 
preceding (fig. 12). 

The antenne, mouth organs, and swimming feet are nearly as in Psamathe 
longicauda. 

In the fifth pair the second joint is about three times longer than broad; both the 
lateral margins are fringed with minute bristles; a small spiniform seta also springs 
from near the distal end of the inner margin, and another from the apex of the joint 
(fig. 18). The caudal rami are short and broad (fig. 19.) 

Habitat.— Found on floating seaweed—* Gulf-weed ”—collected between the Cape 
Verde Islands and the Azores in June 1904; Station 538, 32° 11’ N., 34° 10’ W. 

Remarks.—The Harpactid recorded above has a close resemblance to Psamathe 
longicauda, Philippi, and may be mistaken for that species. It is, however, rather 
smaller; the proportional lengths of the joints of the antennules are somewhat different ; 
the thoracic legs are rather more slender, and the armature of the fifth pair, especially, 
ditfers distinctly from the species referred to. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL, 551.) 


306 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Genus Machairopus, G. 8. Brady, 1883. 
Machairopus australis, new species. (Pl. VI. figs. 20-28.) 


Female.—Body depressed, anterior portion considerably expanded. Length about 
1-1 mm. 

Antennules elongated and slender and composed of nine articulations; the second 
and third joints, which are nearly of equal length, are longer than any of the others ; 
the fifth and sixth are also subequal, but very small, while the end joint is narrow and 
rather longer than the one immediately preceding. Antenne and mouth organs some- 
what similar to those in Machairopus idyoides, Brady. 

First pair of thoracic legs stout; outer ramus much shorter than the inner one; 
while the first joint of the inner ramus is considerably longer than the second, as shown 
by the drawing (fig. 25). The next three pairs are slender. 

Fifth pair lamelliform; proximal joint small; end joint elongate ovate, widest 
anteriorly, the greatest width equal to rather more than one-third of the length ; both 
lateral margins fringed with minute bristles; this joint is also furnished with three 
apical setee, the innermost being very short, while the other two are moderately 
elongated. 

Caudal rami short, about as long as the last abdominal segment. 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; obtained in siftings from some dredged 
material collected in April 1903 ; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 


Machairopus major, new species. (PI. LV. figs. 14-24.) 


Female.—Resembling the species last described, but larger. Length, 1°5 mm. 

Antennules composed of nine joints; second and third joints moderately stout, 
subequal in length and longer than any of the others, the two combined being equal to 
the entire length of the following six joints; end joint longer than the preceding one 
(fig. 15). 

Mandibles elongated and narrow, the masticatory end obliquely truncate ; mandible 
pulp small and two-branched. First maxillipeds somewhat slender, but the second 
pair are moderately stout. 

All the four pairs of swimming legs are tolerably stout; in the first pair, the outer 
ramus scarcely reaches to the end of the first joint of the inner ramus; the first and 
second joints of the inner ramus are nearly of equal length. In the next three pairs, 
the inner ramus is rather longer than the outer, and the marginal spines of the outer 
ramus are short and stout. In the fifth pair, the second joint is broadly foliaceous, 
somewhat ovate in outline and widest near the proximal end, the greatest width being 
equal to about half the length; a slender seta springs from a notch near the middle 
of the outer margin, and there are also about four slender and moderately elongated 
setee on the bluntly rounded apex of the joint (fig. 23). 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIII,, 552.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 307 


Caudal rami short. 

Halitat.—South Orkney Islands ; collected in April 1903 ; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42"S., 
AAS 3833" We 

Remarks.—Yhis species differs from the last in the proportional lengths of some 
of the joints of the antennules, and in the form and armature of the last pair of thoracic 
legs. The other thoracic legs are also stouter. 

One obvious character by which Machavropus may be distinguished from Psamathe 
is found in the armature of the outer branches of the first pair of thoracic legs. In 
Psamathe the terminal spines of both rami are somewhat similar, while in Machairopus, 
only the terminal spines of the outer ramus have their upper margins setiferous, as 


shown in the drawings. 
Fam. THALESTRIDA. 
Genus Parathalestris, G. O. Sars, 1905. 


Parathalestris clausi (Norman). (PI. Il. figs. 15-18.) 
1869, Thalestris elaust, Norman, Brit. Assoc. Report (1868), p. 297. 
1880, 5 Brady, Monogr. Brit. Copep., vol. 11. p. 128, pl. Ixu. figs. 1-12. 
1905, Parathalestris clausi, G. O. Sars, Crust. of Norw., vol. v. p. 111, pls. Ixv., Ixvi. 


A single specimen—a male—which undoubtedly belongs to this species, was obtained 
in a tow-net gathering collected by the Scotva at Station 62 on 13th December 1902 ; 
Station 61, 4° 15’ 8., 33° 38’ W.; earlier on this date, the vessel passed Rocas Light, 
bearing WSW. about 30 miles, off the north-east coast of South America. 

From what is known concerning the distribution of this species, its occurrence so 
far south appears to be somewhat unusual; its presence in this gathering may have 
therefore been accidental. It is moderately common round the British and Norwegian 
coasts, and Dr Canu records it from the French coast. 


Parathalestris coatsi, new species. (PI. III. figs. 7-16.) 


Female. 


defined ; forehead broadly rounded, rostrum small, caudal rami short. Length of 


Body depressed and somewhat expanded ; thorax and abdomen not clearly 


specimen represented by the drawing about | mm. 

Antennules composed of nine joints; the first four are tolerably large, but the 
remaining five are small, their entire length being shorter than the second and 
third combined. Antenne moderately stout, the outer ramus two- (or indistinctly 
three-) jointed. 

The mandibles are moderately stout and provided with a small two-branched palp 
(fig. 10). Second maxillipeds stout; end joint short and armed with a strong and 
curved terminal claw which is furnished with a few minute spines on its inner edge ; 
the end joint, to which the claw is articulated, has also a few minute spines on the 
margin on which the claw impinges (fig. 11). 

The first pair of thoracic legs are stout and of moderate length; their outer ramus 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLYIIL, 553.) 


308 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


is armed with elongated and tolerably stout terminal claws, and the sete on its outer 
margin and apex are also elongated ; the first jomt of the inner ramus reaches to near 
the end of the second joint of the outer one; the end joints are small and the apical 
claws elongated ; there is also a fringe of minute spines along the outer margin in both 
rami (fig. 12). The second, third, and fourth pairs are nearly as in Parathalestris 
clausi (Norman). 

The fifth pair are broadly foliaceous, and both segments are furnished with several 
spines, all of which are tolerably stout, except the one at the outer distal angle of the 
inner segment, and the apical one on the outer segment, as shown in the figure (fig. 15). 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected in June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42” 8., 44° 38’ 33” W. Only a few specimens were observed; they were in 
some material washed from zoophytes brought in the trawl-net or dredge. 

This species is named in honour of the late Mr James Coats, junior, and of Major 
Andrew Coats, D.S.O., who were the two chief subscribers to the Expedition. Major 
Coats is also a member of the Scotia Committee. 


Parathalestris affinis, new species. (Pl. II. figs. 17-25.) 

Female.—In its general appearance, and also in the structure of some of its 
appendages, the female of this species is not unlike that of Parathalestris jacksona 
(T. Scott), recorded from Franz Josef Land, except that the caudal rami are short. 
The body is elongated, tolerably stout, and tapers slightly towards the posterior end, 
and the integument is strongly chitinous. Head rounded and furnished with a small 
rostrum. Caudal rami short, their length about equal to that of the last segment of the 
abdomen (fig. 17). Length of the specimen represented by the figure about 1°5 mm. 

Antennules short, and composed of nine articulations; the first four joints are 
moderately large, and the upper distal portion of the fourth joint extends forward to 
near the middle of the next one and carries a tolerably long and stout sensory filament ; 
the sixth joint is rather longer than the preceding one, while the seventh and eighth, 
which are subequal, are shorter than any of the others; the end joint is about one and 
a half times the length of that which precedes it; all the joints except the first are 
moderately setiferous (fig. 18). Antenne with the outer ramus small and biarticulate. 

Mandibles slender and becoming attenuated towards the distal end. Maxille 
strongly developed, the truncated masticatory part armed with several spiniform sete 
and extending rather beyond the supplementary lobes (fig. 21). 

Maxillipeds small; the second pair short, but with the end joint dilated and armed 
with a short and rather stout and curved terminal claw (fig. 23). 

The first pair of thoracic legs have the inner ramus rather shorter than the outer, 
and provided with long, terminal, claw-like spines; the end joint of the outer ramus 
is also armed with several claw-like spines somewhat similar to those of the inner 
ramus, and an elongated seta springs from its inner distal angle; the second joint of 
the same ramus has also its outer margin fringed with minute teeth as far forward as 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI, 554.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION, 309 


the spine, which spring from near its distal end, while the inner margin of the same 
joint and the outer margin of the inner ramus are both fringed with delicate hairs, as 
shown in the drawing (fig. 24). Another feature here is the presence of three small 
teeth on the transverse end of the first joint of the outer ramus (see fig. 24). 

The next three pairs are somewhat similar in structure to the same appendages in 
Parathalestris jacksoni (V. Scott). 

The fifth pair are tolerably large and foliaceous; the outer segment, which is broadly 
ovate in form, is provided with six sets; five of them spring from the distal half of the 
outer margin and apex, and one from the lower part of the inner margin; the upper- 
most three on the outer margin are moderately stout and widely apart, while the two 
at the apex are slender and close together. The inner portion of the basal joint is 
shorter than the outer, and is somewhat triangular in outline, being broad at the 
proximal end, and tapering from thence to the rounded extremity ; five sete spring from 
the distal end of this inner segment ; the three on the inner aspect are moderately stout 
and placed widely apart ; the other two spring from the lower half of the outer margin 
and are close together; they are smaller than the others (fig. 25). 

Halbitat.—Seotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected’in June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42" S., 44° 38’ 33” W. Only one or two specimens were observed. 

Remarks.—The species now described is in its several appendages not unlike the 
northern form mentioned above, the fifth pair of thoracic legs being remarkably 
similar; there are, however, a few differences of more or less importance between them 
—the species referred to being, for example, distinctly larger, and the caudal rami 
entirely different. 


Genus Idomene, Philippi, 1843. 
Idomene forficata, Philippi. (PI. III. figs 1-65 Bl LV. fig. 1; Pl. 1X. fig. 29.) 


1843, Idomene forficata, Philippi, A rchiv f. Naturgeschichte, p. 65, pl. iti. fig. 4. 
1880, Dactylopus flavus, Brady, Monogr. Brit. Copep., vol. ii. p. 116, pl. lvi. figs. 1-11. 
1906, Idomene forficata, G. O. Sars, Crust. of Norway, vol. v. p. 134, pl. Ixxxii. 

Female.—Body somewhat depressed, expanded in front, but becoming narrower 
towards the distal end. Length, ‘57 mm. 

Antennules short and composed of seven joints; the first four joints are tolerably 
large, but the others are smaller, the penultimate joint being rather shorter than the 
preceding one, and about half as long as the next. Antenne with the outer ramus 
small and biarticulate. 

The second maxillipeds are of moderate size; a stout seta springs from the end of 
the first joint, while the second is armed with a long slender claw, and a small bristle 
also springs from near the distal end of its inner margin. 

The four pairs of swimming feet have both rami three-jointed. The first pair are 
stout, and the second basal joint is furnished with a stout seta on both the outer and 
inner margins ; the first and second joints of the outer ramus are tolerably large, but 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 555.) 


310 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


the end one is only about half the length of the preceding joint; inner ramus con- 
siderably longer than the cuter, and the first jomt, which is as long as the entire outer 
ramus, is widest near the proximal end, but becomes narrower distally ; the greatest 
width is equal to about two-fifths of the length; second and third joints are small; the 
last is provided with one or two apical setze, and a moderately stout appendage which 
terminates in a small hook-like process (fig. 4). The fourth pair are small, and the 
inner ramus is shorter than the outer one; both rami are furnished with moderately 
long and slender marginal sete, and the terminal set are also considerably elongated. 

Fifth pair small; basal joimt not greatly produced interiorly, the interior part 
broadly rounded and provided with five elongated setze ; the space between the outermost 
seta and the next one is rather greater than that between the others; second joint 
subtriangular, and furnished with one seta on the inner margin, two setze on the outer, 
and two at the apex (see fig. 29, Pl. [X.). 

The male does not differ greatly from the female, but the basal joint of the fifth pair 
of thoracic legs is only slightly produced interiorly, and bears two instead of five setze, 
while the second joint has three instead of two setze on its outer margin (fig. 6, Pl. IIL). 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected in June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42” §., 44° 38’ 33” W. 

Remarks.—This Antaretic Idomene so closely resembles the form described by 
Puteri from the Mediterranean that I have scarcely any hesitation in referring it to 
the same species. The only difference of any importance is the small hook-like process 
at the end of the inner ramus of the first pair of thoracic legs. The occurrence of this 
species in the Antarctic collections made by the s.y. Scotva is of considerable import- 
ance. The distribution of Jdomene extends to the British and Norwegian coasts. 


Genus Dactylopusia, Norman, 1903. 
Dactylopusia frigida, new species. (PI. II. figs. 19-25.) 


Female.—Body moderately stout, and somewhat similar to Dactylopusia neglecta, 
G. O. Sars, in its general appearance. Length, 0°85 mm. 

Antennules moderately short and composed of nine joints; the first four are stout 
and subequal; the sixth is about equal to the fourth, and rather longer than the pre- 
ceding joint; the seventh and eighth joints are very short, but the terminal joint is 
about equal in length to the fifth. Antenne small; outer ramus moderately elongated 
and composed of three joints, but the middle joint is very small. 

Second maxillipeds with the end joint oblong and furnished with a tolerably long 
slender claw. 

In the first pair of thoracic legs the inner ramus is moderately elongated and 
narrow, but the outer is short and only reaches to a little beyond the middle one; the 
second joint is nearly twice as long as the first, and the end one is very small. The 
next three pairs are tolerably stout; in the fourth pair the short inner ramus is some- 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 556.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 311 


what triangular in its general outline, and both the inner and outer margins taper to 
the narrow distal extremity. 

In the fifth pair, the inner portion of the basal joint, which is moderately produced, 
is transversely truncated, and furnished with about five apical sete ; the second joint is 
broadly ovate and is provided with six sete; the three sets on the inner margin, and 
one near the end of the outer margin, are tolerably stout, but the other two are 
somewhat slender. Caudal rami very short. 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected in June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42" S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 


Dactylopusia ferriert, new species. (Pl. XII. figs. 14-22.) 

Female.—Body tolerably stout and elongated ; rostrum short ; abdomen somewhat 
reflexed ; caudal rami short (fig. 14). Length about 1 mm. 

Antennules short, scarcely reaching to the end of the first cephalothoracic segment, 
and apparently composed of seven joints, but the articulation between the fifth and 
sixth joints is not very clearly defined; the first and second joints are moderately 
robust ; the third is narrower than the second, and equal to about one and a half times 
its length ; the other joints are small and subequal, except the sixth, which is scarcely 
half the length of the one that precedes it; the antennules are tolerably setiferous, and 
the third joint bears an extremely long sensory filament (fig. 15). 

Antenne, as in Dactylopusia frigida. 

Maxillipeds small; the first pair are each armed with a stout terminal claw, and are 
also provided with two small marginal setiferous lobes, as shown in the figure (fig. 17) ; 
second pair narrow and elongated, and furnished with slender terminal claws that 
reach beyond the middle of the joints to which they are articulated (fig. 18). 

The first pair of thoracic legs have both rami tolerably stout; the first joint of 
the inner ramus, which is elongated and reaches nearly to the extremity of the outer 
ramus, bears a moderately stout seta near the middle of the inner margin; the end 
joints are very small, and bear stout, terminal, claw-like spines, as shown in the figure 
(fig. 19); a stout setiferous spine springs from the outer margin of the first and second 
joints of the outer ramus, and the second joint has also a seta on the inner margin ; 
the end joint of the outer ramus is very short and carries a tolerably stout setiferous 
spine on the outer margin; it is also furnished with two terminal claw-like spines 
the inner one being considerably longer than 


and two slender and elongated setie 
the other; both rami are fringed on their outer margins with small bristles, and 
stout setiferous spines spring from the distal end of both the outer and inner margins 
of the second basal joint (fig. 19). 

The second, third, and fourth pairs are somewhat similar in structure to the same 
appendages in Dactylopusia brevicornis (Claus), except that the second joint of the 
inner ramus of the second pair is provided with two sete on the inner margin, while 
the same joint in the third and fourth pairs bears only one seta. In the third pair, 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 557.) 


312 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


the end joint of the inner ramus carries three setae on the inner margin, two at the 
apex and a tolerable stout spine at the outer distal angle; but in the fourth pair, the 
same end joint is furnished with only two sete on the inner margin (see figs. 20 and 21). 

In the fifth pair, which are comparatively small, the basal joint is moderately 
expanded interiorly and provided with five elongated and rather slender plumose sete 
on the broadly rounded distal end; the second joint is small, oblong in form, and 
about twice as long as wide; the inner margin is nearly straight, but the outer is 
slightly rounded and fringed with minute sete ; it is also provided with six plumose 
sete round the distal end, as shown in the drawing (tig. 22). 

Halitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected in June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42” §., 44° 38’ 33” W. 

Remarks.—This species has a slight resemblance to the Dactylopusia antarctica of 
Giesbrecht, from the Belgian Antarctic Expedition, but it differs distinctly from it in 
the structure of the antennules and of the fifth pair of thoracic legs. Named in 
compliment to Mr James G. Ferrier, a member of Committee and Secretary to the 
Expedition. 


Dactylopusia perplexa, new species. (Pl. II. figs. 26-80; Pl. VI. figs. 1 and 2.) 


Female.—Body moderately stout. Length, 0°8 mm. 

Antennules short, robust, and composed of nine joints, the first four of which are 
moderately large, and the second, third, and fourth are each rather shorter than the 
preceding one; the next two joints and the last joint are nearly equal in size, and are 
each fully half as long as the fourth; the seventh and eighth are also nearly equal, but 
they are shorter than any of the others. 

Antennze stout ; outer ramus three-jointed and of moderate length ; mandibles with 
the distal end somewhat attenuated ; mandible-palp small and two-branched. 

The second maxillipeds are short and rather robust, and they are provided with short 
but moderately stout terminal claws. 

The first pair of thoracic legs are short and stout, and the rami are nearly of equal 
length; the outer ramus, which is slightly shorter than the other, is armed with short, 
stout terminal claws ; in the outer ramus, the middle joint is about twice as long as the 
preceding one, but the end joint is small and is provided with tolerably stout terminal 
claws. The next three pairs are all moderately stout, with short margin spines on the 
outer rami. 

The fifth pair are short, and both segments are somewhat expanded; the inner 
portion of the basal segment, which reaches to about the middle of the second, bears 
five setze on its broadly rounded end; the two inner setz are short and tolerably stout ; 
the two outer are more slender and are close together, but the middle one, which is 
also stout, is moderately elongated. The second segment is broadly ovate, the greatest 
width being equal to about three-fourths of the length; this segment is furnished with 
three short sete on the lower half of the outer margin, one on the inner margin, and 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 558,) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 313 


two at the apex; the apical sete are slender, but the others are tolerably stout. Caudal 


rami short. 
Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected in June 1903; Station 325, 
G0. 43/ 42" 8S. 44° 38’ 33” W. 


Genus Pseudothalestris, G. 8. Brady, 1883. 
Pseudothalestris intermedia, new species. (Pl. IX. figs. 1-4; Pl. XII. figs. 27-29.) 


Female.—The female of this species is small, measuring only about 04 mm. 
(about 5 of an inch), and has a general likeness to Pseudothalestris pygmea, Scott. 

The antennules are composed of seven joints; the second joint is tolerably large, 
but the next three are each shorter than the one that precedes it; the two end joints 
are small, and together are only about equal to the third, as shown in the formula, 
which gives approximately the proportional lengths of the various joints : 


Numbers of the jomts 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 
Proportional lengths 7 8 7 3 2 3 4 


In the first pair of thoracic legs, the two-jointed outer ramus is tolerably short, and 
the seta on the inner margin of the first joint of the inner ramus springs from slightly 
below the middle of the joint, instead of from near the proximal end. 

The fifth pair of thoracic legs are small; the basal joint is moderately broad, and 
the produced inner portion is of a triangular form, and furnished with three seta on the 
lower half of the inner margin, and with two on the outer margin near the apex: a 
distinet space also separates these two from the others; the second joint is small, and 
bears three sete on the outer margin, one on the inner margin, and one at the apex— 
these setee are all tolerably elongated, as shown in the drawing (fig. 5, Pl. XIT.). 

Male.—In the second pair of thoracic legs of the male, the second joint of the 
inner ramus is provided with five setae—two on the inner margin, one near the proximal 
end of the outer margin, and two at the apex; and the innermost of the two apical 
setze forms a stout and claw-like appendage, but the other four setze mentioned are 
tolerably slender (see figs. 3 and 3a, Pl. IX.). 

Fifth pair small; the inner portion of the basal joint moderately produced, and 
furnished with a short, stout seta on the inner margin, and with two at the apex, the 
outer being considerably smaller than the other (see fig. 4, Pl. IX.). 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected in June 1903; Station 320, 
60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 

Remarks.—The species described above differs from Pseudothalestris pygmea, 
Scott, and Westwoodia minuta, Claus (both of which it resembles to some extent), in 
the structure of the female antennules, in the armature of the inner ramus of the second 
pair of thoracic legs in the male, and in the form of the male and female fifth pair. 
There are also one or two other points of difference, but those referred to appear to be 
the most important. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 559.) 


314 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Pseudothalestris assimilis, G. O. Sars, var. antaretica, nov. var. (PI. IX. figs. 5-9.) 


A single specimen—a male—closely resembling, if it be not identical with, the 
male of the species referred to, described by G. O. Sars in his Crustacea of Norway, 
vol. v. p. 141, was obtained in the same gathering with P. intermedia, collected in 
Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. But though 
agreeing with some of the more important characters of that species, it differed in one 
or two minor points. In the first pair of thoracic legs the seta on the inner margin of 
the first of the inner ramus was situated nearer the proximal end of the joint. 

The inner produced portion of the basal joint of the fifth pair is narrower, and the 
second joint is broader, and further, this joint is only provided with five instead of 
six setze (see fic. 8). On account of these differences, | am inclined to regard this as a 
variety of the species it otherwise so closely resembles. 


Fam. Diosaccipé. 

Genus Diosaccus, Boeck, 1872. 

Diosaccus tenuicornis (Claus). 
1863, Dactylopus tenuicornis, Claus, Die freileb, Copep., p. 127, pl. xvi. figs. 17-23. 
1880, Diosaccus tenwicornis, Brady, Monogr. Brit. Copep., vol. ii. p. 68, pl. lix. figs. 12-16, pl. Ix. 

figs. 14-18. 
1906, Diosaccus tenuicornis, G. O. Sars, Crust. of Norway, vol. v. p. 146, pl. Ixxxix. and xe. 
A single specimen—a male—was obtained in a tow-net gathering from Station 85, 
collected on 22nd December 1902, 23° 8’ 8., 39° 40’ W. 


Genus Amphiascus, G. O. Sars, 1905. 
Amphiascus fucicolus, new species. (PI. LX. figs. 23-28.) 


Female.—Somewhat like Amphiascus similis (Claus) in general appearance ; 
rostrum prominent ; abdomen strongly flexed. Length about 0°8 mm. 

Antennules eight-jointed ; first and second joints robust and subequal; the next 
two shorter and not so much dilated ; the fifth and seventh joints are smaller than any 
of the others; the sixth is nearly as long as the fourth, while the last, which is narrow, 
is about equal in length to the third (fig. 23). 

In the first pair of thoracic legs, the outer ramus is considerably shorter than the 
inner one, and the middle joint is about twice the length of the first (fig. 26). In the 
fourth pair, the outer ramus is rather longer than the inner one (fig. 27). 

The fifth pair of legs are of moderate size and broadly foliaceous; the interior 
of the basal joint, which is only slightly produced, is provided with two short and 
three tolerably long slender hairs on the distal margin; the second joint has a sub- 
quadriform outline, the length being only a little greater than the width ; its distal end 
is obliquely truncated and furnished with five setae of unequal lengths—one near the 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 560.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 315 


middle of the outer margin; two, close together, at the apex; and two, also close 
together, situated nearly intermediate between the apical seta and the outer one ; there 
is also a seta on the lower half of the inner margin, as shown in the drawing 
(fig. 28). Tail seements very short. 

Habitat.—In siftings from Gulf-weed collected by the Scotia off the Canary Islands 
on 29th June 1904; Station 537, 29° 54’ N., 34°10’ W. 


Fam. CaNTHOCAMPTID®. 
Genus Amewra, Boeck, 1865. 
Ameira simulans, new species. (Pl. VII. figs. 23-28.) 

Female.—Body resembling Ameira tau (Giesbrecht) in its general appearance. 
Length, 0°6 mm. 

Antennules composed of eight joints ; the second joint is large and nearly one and 
a-half times longer than the next, and about twice as long as the fourth joint, but the 
two end joints are very short. The approximate proportional lengths of the various 
joints are shown by the formula : 

Number of thejoints 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 
Proportional lengths 6 11 8 6 4 5 2 2 


The first pair of thoracic legs, and also the following three pairs, are all somewhat 
similar to those in Amevra tau already referred to. 

The fifth pair are very small; the inner portion of the basal joint, which is trans- 
versally truncated at the end, is furnished with five sete 
cated apex and one on the lower half of the inner margin; the second joint (or 
seoment) is tolerably expanded at the base, and tapers towards the bluntly rounded 
extremity ; this joint is also provided with five sete, one of which springs from the 


four of them on the trun- 


outer margin, and the other four from the rounded apex. 

Caudal rami very short. 

Hahitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected in June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38” 33” W. 

Remarks.—The species recorded above has a tolerably close resemblance to A meira 
tau, described by Dr GigsprecuT in his work Die freilebenden Copepoden der WNieler 
Fohrde, p. 117 (1882), but it differs in one or two important particulars, and especially 
in the form of the last pair of thoracic legs. 


Genus Parastenhelia, 1. C. Thompson & A. Scott, 19038. 
Parastenhelia antarctica, new species. (PI. IV. figs. 25-33.) 


Female.—Somewhat similar to Parastenhelia anglica, Norman & Scott, in its 


general appearance. Length, 0°85 mm. 
Antennules composed of nine joints, the first two or three moderately stout, the 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 561.) 


316 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


others becoming attenuated towards the distal extremity ; the second joint is rather 
longer than the first or third; the fourth, fifth, and sixth are subequal in length, and 
are each rather shorter than the third ; the three end joints are small, but the penulti- 
mate one is rather shorter than that on either side (fig. 25). The antennz are similar 
to those in Parastenhelia anglica. 

Mandibles small, tolerably slender, and narrower towards the apex, which is armed 
with three or four small teeth (fig. 26); mandible-palp very small and two-branched. 

First maxillipeds simple; terminal claw moderately stout (fig. 27); second 
maxillipeds furnished with a stout spiniform bristle near the middle of the inner margin 
of the penultimate joint, and the terminal claw scarcely reaches beyond the proximal 
end of the same joint (fig. 28). 

All the four pairs of swimming legs are slender. The inner ramus of the first pair 
is considerably longer than the outer and composed of two joints; the end joint is short, 
but the first is greatly elongated and furnished with a plumose bristle near the middle 
of the inner margin, and a few scattered spinules on the distal half of the outer margin ; 
the terminal claws are slender; one is moderately elongated, the other shorter. The 
middle joint of the outer ramus is also tolerably elongated, and the first and second 
joints are each furnished with a slender spine near the distal end of the outer margin, 
and there are also several marginal spinules; the short end joint is armed with two 
slender terminal claws and two elongated setze ; the second basal joint of this pair has 
the lower margin fringed with small spinules, and a stout seta springs from both its 
inner and outer distal angles (fig. 28). 

The second, third, and fourth pairs are similar to those in Parastenhelia anglica 
(fig. 29). 

Fifth pair small; the inner portion of the basal joint, which is subtriangular in 
outline, reaches to about the middle of the outer second joint, and bears five setee of 
unequal lengths round its distal end; the second joint is broadly ovate, and the outer 
and inner margins of the proximal portion of the joint are nearly parallel; but the 
distal end is somewhat rounded and furnished with six setee arranged as shown in the 
drawing (fig. 32). 

Halitat.—Seotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected in June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 

Remarks.—The genus Parastenhelia was established by I. C. THompson & 
A. Scorr in 1903 for two Harpactids from the pearl-oyster beds in the vicinity of 
Ceylon.* In the species belonging to this genus, the inner ramus of the first pair of 
thoracic legs is usually elongated and composed of two joints. Besides the two species 
from Ceylon, and the one now recorded, another is described in the Crustacea of 
Devon and Cornwall, by Canon A. M. Norman & T. Scort, p. 148, pl. x. 
figs. 10 and 11 et seq. 

* Report to the Government of Ceylon on the Pearl-Oyster Fisheries of the Gulf of Manaar, by W. A. Hrrpman, 
D.Sc., F.R.S. ; Supplementary Report on the Copepoda, by I. C. THompson & A, Scorr (1903), p. 263. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 562.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 317 


Genus Phyllopodopsyllus, Scott, 1896. 
Phyllopodopsyllus mossmani, new species. (Pl. V. figs. 1-14.) 


Female.—In its general appearance, the female of this species resembles that of 
Phyllopodopsyllus bradyi; there are, however, a few small but obvious differences 
which, though they may not be of so much importance as to separate this form 
generically, are yet sufficient to exclude it from any species hitherto described. The 
length of the specimen represented by the drawing on Pl. V. is 0°71 mm. 

Antennules nine-jointed, like those of the type species; the first joint is large and 
about equal to the combined lengths of the next three joints: these three joints do not 
differ much in size, but the third and fourth are each rather smaller than the preceding 
Joint ; the seventh and eighth are smaller than any of the others, and are together only 
equal to about half the length of the end joint; the second joint wants the spur-like 
process with which that joint is armed in both the type species: Phyllopodopsyllus 
brady: and the Phyllopodopsyllus furcifer described by G. O. Sars (fig. 2). The 
antennee are similar to those of the type species, as are also the maxille, but the 
mandibles are rather stouter, and the two branches of the mandible-palp do not differ 
so much in length, the lower branch being in the type species distinetly smaller than 
the other. The two pairs of maxillipeds are similar to those in the type species (fig. 4). 

The swimming legs have the inner rami all two-jointed and the outer rami three- 
jointed; in the first pair the inner ramus is fully one and a half times longer than 
the outer one, the first joint being considerably longer than the entire outer ramus ; 
the end joint, which is much smaller than the first, is armed witb a stout apical claw 
and an elongated seta. In the second and third pairs, the inner ramus, which scarcely 
reaches the end of the second joint of the outer, has the joints subequal. In the fourth 
pair, the inner ramus is very small, being shorter than the first joint of the outer one 
(see figs. 7-10). 

The fifth pair form each a large foliaceous plate, somewhat oval in outline ; its length 
is equal to about twice the width, its distal end is rounded but the inner portion 
slightly produced, and it is furnished with several small sete round the inner margin 
and apex (fig. 11). 

The caudal rami are about equal in length to the last segment of the abdomen, and 
the principal tail seta, which is somewhat dilated at the base, is long and slender. 

Male. 


length. ‘The structure of the antennules is modified so that they form effective grasp- 


The male is smaller than the female, and measures only about 0°55 mm. in 


ing organs. In the second pair of swimming feet the inner rami are proportionally 
rather longer than in the female. 

The fifth pair are small and normal in structure (fig. 12). The caudal rami are 
more slender than in the female, and the principal tail seta is not only elongated but 
is also somewhat stout and spiniform. 

With these exceptions, the structure of the male and female is somewhat similar. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 563.) 


318 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Habitat.—Amongst small shells and other things collected on the shores of the 
Falkland Islands in Port Stanley by the s.y. Scotia; Station 118, 51° 41’8., 57° 51’ W. 

Remarks.—Perhaps the most noticeable difference between the present species and 
the two already described is the absence of the tooth-like process on the second joint 
of the antennules. But there is also a slight difference in the form of the fifth pair 
of thoracic legs of the female, as well as of the caudal rami. Named in compliment to 
Mr Mossman, meteorologist to the Expedition. 


Fam. LaopHontip&. 
Genus Laophonte, Philippi, 1840. 
Laophonte rottenburgi, new species. (PI. VII. figs. 1-6.) 

Female.—Body narrow, elongated. Length, 1 mm. (1; of an inch). 

Antennules seven-jointed; first three moderately stout and of nearly equal length ; the 
fourth and fifth joints are short, while the next two are each about twice as long as the 
fifth. The second joint is produced behind into a stout, blunt-pointed tooth (fig. 1). 

Antenne and mouth-organs somewhat similar to those of the next species. 

The first pair of thoracic legs are moderately stout; the outer ramus is composed 
of three subequal joints, and reaches to about the middle of the first joint of the inner 
ramus. The inner ramus is tolerably elongated ; the first joint is long and narrow, and 
bears seven or eight widely scattered hairs on the inner margin; the terminal claw is 
long and tolerably stout (fig. 3). In the next three pairs, the first joint of the inner 
ramus is very short, but the second is moderately elongated. 

In the fifth pair, which are comparatively small, the proximal joint is of moderate 
size and broadly subtriangular, and the distal end, which reaches beyond the middle 
of the second joint, is obliquely truncated and furnished with about five setz ; the three 
on the inner margin are set widely apart, while the two at the outer distal angle of the 
joint are moderately close together, with a considerable space between them and the 
nearest of the other three; the second joint is broadly ovate, transversely truncated 
at the end, and furnished with four setee on the truncated margin and two on the 
outer margin, as shown in the drawing (fig. 5). 

Caudal rami short. 

Halbitat.—South Orkney Islands, in siftings from some dredged material collected 
in June 1903; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 

Remarks.—This species is easily distinguished from the other species of Laophonte 
described here by the structure of the antennules and of the last pair of thoracic legs. 
Named in compliment to Dr Paun Rorrensure, a subscriber and one of the members 
of Committee. 


Laophonte australis, new species. (Pl. XI. figs. 10-17.) 
Female. 


Body slender and elongated; similar to Laophonte minuta, Boeck, in 
general appearance. Length, 0°77 mm. (fig. 10). 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 564.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 319 


Antennules moderately stout and composed of seven articulations. Antenne with 
the outer ramus very rudimentary or wanting (see figs. 11 and 12). 

Second maxillipeds rather slender; end joint moderately elongated and narrow, 
widest near the middle; inner margin nearly straight, the outer slightly gibbous ; 
terminal claw long and slender (fig. 13). 

Inner ramus of the first pair of thoracic legs elongated ; outer ramus three-jointed, 
and scarcely half the length of the inner, and with the second joint rather longer 
than the first or third (fig. 14). In the second pair, the inner ramus is moderately 
stout and composed of two joints, the end one of which scarcely reaches beyond 
the second joint of the three-jcinted outer ramus; the end joint of the outer ramus 
is tolerably elongated and slender, and about one and a half times longer than the 
preceding joint (fig. 15). 

In the fifth pair, the basal joint is broadly expanded and its inner lobe is obliquely 
truncated and carries about six setze along the truncated margin, but the third one 
from the inside is very small; end joint small, ovate, and furnished with five setee on 
the subtruncated end, as in the drawing (fig. 16), width being equal to about two- 
thirds of the length; the end of this segment is obliquely truncated and provided with 
six sete, arranged as shown in the drawing (fig. 14). 

Caudal rami about as long as the last abdominal segment. 

Habitat, —Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, in siftings from dredged material, collected in 
June 1903; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 

This species may be distinguished from the others by the structure and armature 
of the antennules and of the first and fifth pairs of thoracic legs. 


Laophonte exigua, new species. (Pl. VII. figs. 16-22.) 


Female.—Body small, narrow, elongated. Length, 0°62 mm. 

Antennules composed of seven joints; second and third joints subequal and moder- 
ately long, fourth and fifth small; but the sixth and seventh, which are nearly equal, 
are each about twice as long as the fifth joint. Antenne and mouth organs nearly as 
in Laophonte wiltone. 

The inner ramus of the first pair of thoracic legs is long and slender, but the outer 
is very short and composed of only two joints. In the next three pairs, the inner 
ramus is short, moderately stout, and composed of two nearly equal joints, the first 
joint being slightly larger than the other. 

The fifth pair are small, and the inner portion of the basal joint scarcely reaches 
the middle of the second joint, and is furnished with four sete. The second joint 
has the apex broadly but irregularly rounded, and furnished «with six sete, three 
on the inner aspect and three on the outer, with a distinct space between each group 
of three. 

Caudal rami as long as the last abdominal segment: each ramus ends in a tolerably 
stiff and moderately long bristle, and one or two smaller setz (fig. 17). 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI, 565.) 


320 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected in June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38' 33" W. 

Remarks.—The present form has at first sight a superficial resemblance to Lao- 
phonte minuta, Boeck, but a closer examination reveals certain differences in the 
structure and armature of the first and fifth pairs of thoracic legs, as well as one or two 
other anatomical details sufficient to exclude it from that species. 


Laophonte wiltoni, new species. (Pl. VIL. figs. 7-15.) 


Female.—Body slender and elongated and somewhat similar to the species described 
above in its general appearance. Length of the specimen represented by the drawing 
is about 0°9 mm. 

The antennules are composed of seven joints, and the first three are tolerably large 
and subequal; the fourth and fifth are very short, while the next two, which are nearly 
of equal size, are each about one and a half times as long as the fifth. Antenne and 
mouth organs nearly as in the species previously described. 

The first pair of thoracic legs are tolerably slender, the outer ramus, which reaches 
to the middle of the first joint of the inner ramus, is three-jointed, and the middle joint 
is rather longer than the first or third. The next three pairs are somewhat similar to 
those in Laophonte australis. 

In the fifth pair, the basal joint is somewhat narrow and subtriangular m outline, 
and reaches to beyond the middle of the second joint; it is provided with six sete, 
three of which spring from the inner margin and two from the outer margin, and one 
is articulated close to the apex. The second joint is moderately expanded, the greatest 
width more than half the length; distal end produced. triangular in form and provided 
with one seta on the inner margin, one at the apex, and five on the outer margin. 

Caudal rami as long as the last seement of the abdomen. 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, in some siftings from dredged material 
collected in June 1903; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 

Remarks. —This species is rather smaller than any of the other Laophontes described 
here, and it may be distinguished from them not only by its size but also by the 
structure of the first pair of thoracic legs, and by other, though perhaps less obvious, 
differences. The species is named in compliment to Mr D. W. Witton, one of the 
naturalists who took part in the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition. 


Genus Laophontodes, T. Scott, 1894. 
Laophontodes whitsont, uew species. (PI. VIII. figs. 1-8.) 


Female.—Body narrow, elongated, and tapering slightly towards the distal extremity ; 
the animal has a general resemblance to the female of Laophontodes typicus, 'T. Scott, 
but is rather more slender, and the caudal rami are short, whereas in the species men- 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVI, 566.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 321 


tioned they are elongated. The length of the specimen represented by the drawing 
(fig. 1) is 0°62 mm. (,)) of an inch). 

Antennules tolerably slender, and composed of five joints, the penultimate being 
very small, Antenne small ; outer ramus wanting. 

Mandibles and other mouth-organs nearly as in Laophontodes typicus ; the second 
maxillipeds are slender, and are each provided with a long and slender terminal claw. 

The first pair of thoracic legs resemble those of the species mentioned, and the 
next three pairs are also similar to those in the same species. In the second, third, and 
fourth pairs, the inner ramus is short, two-jointed, and very slender, the first joint being 
very small; the inner ramus of the pair is, however, proportionally rather more 
elongated than the others. 

In the fifth pair, the basal joint is rather longer than the second one, and both are 
provided with a few sete. 

Caudal rami short, scarcely longer than the last seement of the abdomen. 

Habitat. —Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, in some siftings from dredged material 
collected in June 1903; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 88’ 33” W. 

Remarks.—The form described above may be at once recognised from any previously 
deseribed species by its short candal rami; it is also rather more slender and elongated 
than any of those previously described. 

Its occurrence in the Scotia collections is a further indication of, in some respects, 
the close similarity between the Copepod fauna of the Antarctic and that of our 
northern seas. G. O. Sars has recorded three species of Laophontodes from the coasts 
of Norway, and two of them also occur in British waters. Moreover, one of these 
northern forms (Laophontodes typicus) was also collected by Dr Bruck as far north as 
Franz Josef Land. All the three northern species are provided with long caudal 
rami, and are thus readily distinguished from the one now described. This species is 
named in compliment to Mr THomas Bb. Wuirson, a member of Committee and 


Honorary Accountant to the Expedition. 


Fam. CLETODID. 
Genus Orthopsyllus, Brady & Robertson, 1873. 
Orthopsyllus linearis (Claus). (Pl. IX. figs. 10-22.) 
1866, Liljeborgia linearis, Claus, Die Copepoden-fauna von Nizza, p. 22, t. ii. figs. 1-8. 
1873, Orthopsyllus linearis, Brady & Robertson, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., vol. xii. p. 138. 
1880, Cletodes linearis, Brady, Monogr. Brit. Copep., vol. ii. p. 95, pl. xxx. figs. 1-14. 
1909, Orthopsyllus linearis, G. O. Sars, Crust. of Norway, vol. vy. p. 289, pl. excix. 

Female.—The body, viewed from above, is narrow and elongated; the posterior 
margins of the segments are dentated; rostrum blunt and slightly produced. Caudal 
rami short ; each ramus is provided witha stout and tolerably elongated terminal bristle. 
The specimen represented by the drawing (fig. 10) measures about 1°7 mm. in length. 

The antennules are short and composed of four joints; the second joint is armed 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN. TRANS,, VOL, XLYII., 567.) 


322 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


with a tolerably stout, short, but prominent tooth on the lower aspect, while the third 
joint carries a moderately long sensory filament. Antennze small; outer ramus uni- 
articulate. _Mandibles small and provided with a small one-branched palp. 

Thoracic legs small. In the first pair, the inner ramus is rather longer than the 
outer, and the proximal joint is nearly twice as long as the end one. In the next three 
pairs, the inner ramus is very short, and the proximal joint extremely small (see 
figs. 16-19). 

The fifth pair has the basal joimt tolerably broad and lamelliform, and produced 
interiorly to near the end of the second joint; the distal half of the inner margin of the 
basal joint is obliquely and somewhat unevenly rounded, and furnished with five sete, 
three on the inner margin and two at the apex; the second joint is moderately 
narrow, its width at the widest part being scarcely equal to half the length: this 
joint bears six sete; the apical seta is tolerably stout and elongated, but the one on 
either side of it is small; the other three setee, which are of moderate length, spring 
from the outer margin, as shown in the drawing (fig. 20). 

Male.—In the male, the antennules are modified to form grasping organs. The 
inner ramus of the second pair of thoracic legs is three-jointed, and the second joint is 
produced into a long and tolerably stout spiniform appendage (fig. 21). In the fifth pair, 
which are very small, the basal joint is scarcely produced interiorly, and is provided 
with two short sete; the outer joint is short and narrow, and furnished with three 
small sete on the outer margin and two at the apex (fig. 22). 

Halitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, in siftings from some dredged material 
collected in June 1903; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 88’ 33” W. 

Remarks.—Vhis species, though not very common, has apparently an extensive 
distribution. Professor G. O. Sars records it from Skjerstad Fjord in Norway—yjust 
within the Arctic Circle, and Dr G. 8. Brapy from a few British localities. Dr CLaus 
obtained the species in the Mediterranean, and it also occurred in collections from the 
Gulf of Guinea brought home by the telegraph steamer Buccaneer. After a careful 
examination of the South Orkney specimens, I am unable to discover any essential 
difference between them and those described by the authors mentioned above. 


Tribe CYCLOPOIDA. 


Fam. OIrHONID». 
Genus Oithona, Baird, 1848. 
Oithona plumifera, Baird. 
1843, Oithona plumifera, Baird, “ Notes on British Entomostraca,” Zoologist, vol. i. pp. 193-197. 
This species was observed in gatherings from various stations, extending from 
Station 11, 23° 50’ N., 21° 34’ W., in the North, to Station 68 in the South Atlantic, 
Pernambuco, 7° 42’ S., 34° 32’ W. Its distribution, which is widely extended, reaches 
to at least as far north as the British Islands. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLYIII., 568.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 323 


Oithona minuta, T. Scott. 


1894, Oithona minuta, T. Scott, Trans. Linn. Soe., Ser. 2,  Zool.,” vol. vi. p- 90, pl. ix. figs. 14-25. 


This somewhat rare form was observed in only a single plankton sample collected 
at Station 66 in 7° 09’ S., 34° 30’ W.—that is, between two of the stations where 
Calanopia americana, Dahl, was obtained. ‘he specimens from which the species was 
described were obtained in Bananah Creek, at the mouth of the river Congo, and in 
Loanda Harbour. 

Oithona similis, Claus. 
1866, Octhona similis, Claus, Die Copepoden fauna von Nizza, p. 14. 
L90250 »  Giesb., Hapéd. Antarct. Belge (1897-1899), ‘ Copepoda,” p. 28. 

The only stations where this species was met with were 102 and 116, in 36° 31’ S., 
51° 56’ W., and 49° 35’ S., 57° 40’ W. respectively ; Station 116 was the last station 
but one before reaching the Falkland Islands. Oithona similis was obtained in 
many of the plankton samples collected by the s.y. Belgica during its visit to the 
Antarctic in 1897-1899. These samples were collected between lat. 69° 48’ S. and 
lat. 71° 24’ S., and long. 81° 19’ W. and long. 89° 12’ W. The distribution of this 
species is very extensive, and it is usually of more or less frequent occurrence all over 
the North Sea, as well as in the North Atlantic. 


Fam. CycLoprp&. 
xenus Cyclopina, Claus, 1863. 
Cyclopina belyice, Giesbrecht. (Pl. I. figs. 2-13.) 
1902, Cyclopina belgicw, Giesb., Expéd. Antaret. Belge, “ Copep.,” p. 3, pl. vii. figs. 1-15, 


A few specimens of a Cyclopina that agrees generally with Cyclopina belgice, 
Giesbrecht, were obtained in one of the gatherings collected by the Scotia in Scotia 
Bay, South Orkneys, in June 1903; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 

In the female of this species, the antennules are composed of eighteen articulations ; 
the first three joints are tolerably large, and do not differ greatly in size, but the 
second is rather smaller than the one on either side; the next three are very short, 
more so than any of the others; the seventh and eighth are larger; the remaining 
ten joints are small, but the last two are rather longer than those immediately 
preceding (fig. 3). 

The end joint of the posterior antennx is provided with several geniculated setze 
at its apex, and there are also one or two sete near the middle of the upper margin ; the 
end joint is about twice as long as the third, while the third is rather longer than the 
second (fig. 4). 

The mandibles have their masticatory edge truncated and armed with several 
tolerably large teeth (fig. 5). 

The other mouth organs and the swimming feet do not differ very much from those 


(ROY, SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 569.) 


324 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


in Cyclopina littoralis, G. S. Brady. The fifth pair in the female has the end joint 
elongated and narrow; it is about three times longer than broad, and its armature 
comprises four sete, three terminal and one near the middle of the outer margin 
(fig. 12). 

As stated above, these Scotia specimens agree fairly well with GiEsBRECHT’s descrip- 
tion and figures of his Cyclopina belgicx, and are therefore ascribed to that species. 


Genus Huryte, Philippi, 1843. 
Euryte similis, new species. (PI. I. figs. 14-22.) 


Description of the Female.—The female of this species somewhat resembles that of 
Euryte robusta, Giesbrecht, in its size and general appearance (fig. 14). 

The antennules are tolerably stout, and composed of twenty-one joints; the first 
joint is robust and about twice the length of the second, while the second is about one 
and a half times as long as the third; the next six joints are very short, and the others, 
though somewhat longer than those immediately preceding, are also tolerably short and 
are all more or less of similar size, except the end joint, which is rather longer than the 
penultimate one (fig. 15). The posterior antennze closely resemble those of Huryte 
robusta, Giesbrecht. 

Both pairs of maxillipeds, which are moderately stout, also resemble those of the 
species mentioned. The first pair have the basal joint furnished near the distal end 
with a spine which is gibbous at the base and with a furcated process; the end joints, 
which terminate abruptly, bear several tolerably stout, elongated, and slightly curved 
apical spines (fig. 17). The second maxillipeds are four-jointed ; the third joint is short, 
but the others are of moderate length ; the last one is narrow, and armed with two apical 
claws of unequal length (fig. 18). 

The first four pairs of swimming feet are nearly all similar to those of Huryte 
robusta ; both branches are moderately stout and three-jointed, and the imner is rather 
longer than the outer branch ; in all the four pairs, the end joint of the inner branch is 
provided with dagger-shaped spines, but with no setze; in the first, third, and fourth 
pairs, the number of spines on the end joint of the inner branch is seven, while the end 
joint of the second pair bears only five, arranged as shown in the drawings. In the fourth 
pair, the end joint of the outer branch is armed with nine dagger-shaped spines, three 
on both the inner and outer margins and three at the apex ; the end joint of the outer 
branch in the third pair is also similarly armed (figs. 19-21). 

The fifth pair are similar to those of Huryte longicauda, Philippi (fig. 21). The 
third and fifth segments of the abdomen are nearly of equal length and rather longer 
than the fourth segment ; furcal segments about one and a half times the length of the 
last abdominal segment (fig. 22). 

Remarks.—Euryte longicauda, Philippi, has been recorded from the Mediterranean, 
the Black Sea, and the coasts of France, Britain, Norway, and Kast Greenland. It has 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 570.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 325 


been obtained with other interesting Crustacea in collections made by Dr Bruce in 
Franz Josef Land, and G. M. THomson records a variety (EZ. longicauda var. antaretica, 
G. M. Thom.) from New Zealand; and another species—H. robusta, Giesbrecht—is 
recorded from the Mediterranean. The form described above resembles the species last 
referred to, but appears to differ in one or two minor points, such as in the armature 
of the first and fourth pairs of thoracic legs and in the proportional lengths of the 
abdominal segments. 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, June 1903; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” S., 
HAcos Orson NV. 

Fam. LicHoMoierp&. 
Genus Lichomolgus, Thorell, 1859. 
Lichomolgus fucicola, G. 8. Brady. (PI. XII. figs. 23-26.) 
1872, Macrocheiron fucicolum, Brady, Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb. and Durham, vol. iv. p. 434, 
pl. xvii. figs. 9-18. 

1880, Lichomolgus fucicola, Brady, Mon. of the Free and Semi-parasitic Copepoda of the British Islands, 

vol. iii. p. 41, pl. Ixxxv. figs. 1a 

A few specimens of this species were obtained from some floating seaweed 
collected by the s.y. Scotia in July 1904; Station 539, 33° DBag Nese oon einai 
The roughly serrated margin of the strongly curved claws—terminal claws—with 
which the female antenne are armed, seems to be characteristic of this Lichomolgus 
(see fig. 24). 

The antennules are composed of seven joints, the third joint being the smallest (fig. 
23). The inner branch of the fourth pair of thoracic legs is short and biarticulate, the 
two joints being subequal, and the end one furnished with two terminal setze. 

The fifth pair are uniarticulate, tolerably elongated, and narrow (fig. 25). Caudal 
rami about as long as the last abdominal segment. 

The distribution of Lichomolgus fucicola appears to be extensive. It has been 
recorded from several British localities, usually from the laminarian zone, where it lives 
apparently about the roots and among the fronds of the seaweeds, such as Lanunaria. 
This is one of the more easily identified members of the genus. 


Genus Pseudanthessius, Claus, 1889. 
Pseudanthessius fucicolus, new species. (Pl. XII. figs. 1-13.) 


Description of the Female.—In its general appearance, the female of this species 
resembles Lichomolgus hirsutipes from the Firth of Forth, and, but for the difference 
in the structure of the fourth pair of swimming feet, it might be referred to that 
genus. 

The antennules, which are composed of seven joints, have the second one rather 
longer than the others, while the third is the smallest; the next four joints gradually 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIIL., 571.) 


326 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


decrease in length, as indicated by the formula, which shows approximately the pro- 
portional lengths of all the joints: 


Proportional lengths of the jomts 11 21 7 15 11 10 9 


Numbers of the joints 1 Goes ea ld rile 8 


The second joint bears three small teeth on its upper edge, as shown in the drawing 
(fig. 2). 

Antenne moderately stout, and armed with an elongated and slightly curved 
terminal spine and a few moderately long sete. 

Mandibles and maxillze somewhat resembling those of the Lichomolgus mentioned 
above. 

The first maxillipeds are also somewhat similar to those of the same species. 

The second maxillipeds are each composed of two joints of nearly equal length; the 
second joint is narrow at the proximal end, but increases in width towards the distal 
extremity, which is obliquely truncated ; the external part of the truncated end appears 
to be slightly hollow, and armed with four short spines, while the inner angle is 
produced into a stout spiniform tooth (fig. 6). 

The first and second pairs of swimming feet are somewhat similar to those of other 
species of the Lichomolgide. In the third pair, the end joint of the outer ramus 
carries five dagger-shaped spines round the outer margin and apex, and five setze on the 
inner margin. A dagger-shaped spine also springs from the outer distal angles of the 
first and second joints, while the second has also a seta on its inner edge. The inner 
ramus has the end joint furnished with three dagger-shaped spines and two seta, while 
the second joint bears two sete and the first one seta on the inner margin, as shown in 
the drawing (fig. 9). 

In the fourth pair, the inner ramus is uniarticulate, rather longer than the first joint 
of the outer ramus, and carries two set at the apex; there is alsoa small but distinct 
tooth near the middle of the imner margin (fig. 10). 

The fifth pair consist each of a single, elongated, narrow joint which bears two sete 
at its distal end. 

Abdomen narrow, elongated, the penultimate segment rather shorter than that on 
either side. Caudal rami short. about equal in length to the last abdominal segment 
(fig. 12). 

The male differs from the female in being provided with larger second maxillipeds, 
which are each armed with a moderately long and slender terminal claw; the end joint 
is also fringed with minute bristles, as shown in the drawing (fig. 7). The genital 
segment of the abdomen is also considerably enlarged (fig. 13). The length of the 
female is fully one millimetre, but the male is rather smaller. 

Habitat.—Obtained from Gulf-weed collected by the Scotia in June and July 
1904, between Stations 499 and 553, St Helena, 15° 57’ S., 5° 40’ W., to Tuskar Rock, 
5IP WSN. as 20 ae 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 572.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 327 


Fam. ASTEROCHERID&. 
Genus Asterocheres, Boeck, 1859. 

Asterocheres suberites, Giesbrecht, var. antarctica, nov. var. (PI. VI. figs. 3-11.) 
Like Asterocheres suberites, Giesbrecht, in general appearance. Length, ‘94 mm. 
Antennules composed of twenty-one joints, moderately elongated and slender ; first 

joint stouter and longer than any of the others, the second to the eleventh very short, 
especially the last two; each joint is also somewhat narrower than the one that precedes 
it; the twelfth to the eighteenth are of moderate length and subequal, the three end 
joints rather small, but the penultimate one is somewhat longer than either of the other 
two. The formula shows approximately the proportional lengths of the various joints : 
Number of the joints lL B® 8 2 & GB ey ts © soy abil ay als WE ales KS ayy aliss ae) 


Proportional lengths of joints 21 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 By oe i BB a ay et 


Antenne moderately slender and armed with a long claw-like spine; the first and 
fourth joints short, the second and third elongated ; outer ramus small, uniarticulated, 
and bearing two or three short terminal bristles (fig. 3). 

Siphon short, somewhat triangular; mandibles styliform; maxille and maxilli- 
peds nearly as in A. swberites, Giesbrecht. 

The four pairs of swimming legs also resemble those of the species named. The 
fifth pair are very small and uniarticulate. ‘The caudal furea are rather longer than 
the last segment of the abdomen, and about equal to the length of the penultimate 
seoment (fig. 11). 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, June 1903; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42”%., 
44° 38’ 33” W. : 

Remarks.—The species recorded above so closely resembles Asterocheres suberites, 
Giesbrecht, as to be scarcely separable from it. There is a slight difference in the form of 
the siphon; the outer marginal spines of the exopods of some of the swimming feet are 
stouter, and the fifth pair of feet are distinctly smaller. One or two other slight differ- 
ences may be observed, as, for example, in the proportional lengths of the joints of the 
antennules, and of the abdominal segments, but this Antarctic form can scarcely be 
regarded as more than a variety of A. suberites. 


Fam. ARTOTROGIDA. 
Genus Artotrogus, Boeck, 1859. 
Artotrogus proximus, new species. (PI. XI. figs. 1-9.) 

Description of the Female.—The outline of the female, seen from above, is sub- 
orbicular ; the cephalothoracic segment is greatly expanded, and forms the largest 
portion of the animal; the remaining thoracic segments are comparatively small; the 
abdomen is also small, but the genital sezment of the abdomen is larger than the other 
segments, and is produced backwards on each side so as partly to enclose them, as 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 573.) 


328 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


shown in the drawing (fig. 1); the length of the specimen represented by this drawing 
is2mm. The siphon is short and subtriangular, and the mandibles are elongated and 
slightly dentated on the inner edge near the apex (fig. 4). 

The antennules are composed of nine joints; the second joint is small, but the first 
and third are elongated; these three joints are together about half the entire length of 
the antennule ; the next four joints are small, while the end one is about as long as the 
preceding two joints combined ; a moderately long sensory filament springs from near the 
extremity of the end joint (fig. 2). The antennze are composed of three joints ; the first 
is elongated, and bears a small secondary branch ; the other two are shorter, and the end 
one is furnished with a long, slender appendage, slightly hooked at the apex (fig. 3). 

The mandibles and maxillee are somewhat similar to the same organs in Artotrogus 
orbicularis, Boeck. 

The first and second maxillipeds and the first three pairs of swimming feet are also 
similar to those of the species mentioned. In the fourth pair of thoracic legs, the inner 
ramus is more slender and rather shorter than the outer, and the end joint is provided 
with a single plumose seta on the inner margin ; the same joint is furnished with two apical 
setee, which are also plumose, and there is a minute bristle on the outer margin (fig. 8). 

The fifth pair are small, uniarticulate, and furnished with two terminal sete of 
unequal length (fig. 9). 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected in June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. Two specimens occurred in a small sample of siftings from 
trawled material. ‘he species approaches so near to Artotrogus orbicularis, Boeck, both 
in its general form and in the structure of its appendages, that there was at first some 
doubt as to whether it should be regarded as a distinct species. A careful examination, 
however, reveals certain ditferences, which it may be as well meanwhile to recognise, as, 
for example, the difference in the armature, and to some extent also in the structure of the 
antenne ; the difference in the form of the siphon ; the rather more slender maxillipeds ; 
the difference in the form of the fifth pair of thoracic legs and in the structure of the 
abdomen. These differences, while in themselves inconsiderable, are, I think, when 
taken together, suthciently important to warrant the separation of this Antarctic 
Artotrogus under a distinct name. 


Fam. SAPPHIRINIDA. 
Genus Sapphirina, J. V. Thompson, 1829. 


Sapphirina ovatolanceolata, Dana. 
1849, Sapphirina ovatolanceolata, Dana, Proc. Amer. Acad., Boston, vol. ii. pp. 8-16. 

The only gatherings in which this Sapphirina was observed were collected at 
Stations 14,32; 36, and 49) 21° 28’ N., 22° 407 W., tol 1-353) N27 26a We vandeat 
Station 60, 3° 25’ S., 33° 13’ W., and Station 105, 38° 45’ S., 538° 30’ W. Only a few 
specimens were noticed. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL, 574.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 329 


Sapphirina gemma, Dana. 
1849, Sapphirina gemma, Dana, op. cit., vol. ii. pp. 8-61. 
This species occurred in gatherings from two stations widely separated from each 
other, viz., Station 15, 20° 34’ N., 23° 12’ W., and Station 104, 37° 05’ S., 52° 22’ W. 


Sapphirina iris, Dana. 
1849, Sapphirina tris, Dana, op. cit., vol. ii. pp. 8-61. 
1863, rr salpx, Claus, Die freilebenden Copepoden, p. 152. 


The gatherings in which this species was met with were collected at Stations 26, 
49, 72, 98, 102, 104, and 105, 14° 33’ N., 25° 09’ W., to 38° 45’ S., 53° 30’ W.: it 
occurred only sparingly. 

Sapphirina angusta, Dana. 
1849, Sapphirina angusta, Dana, op. cit., vol. ii. pp. 8-61, 

This rather distinct Sapphirinu was obtained in gatherings from Stations 35, 36, 
98, 102, 104, and 105, 9° 5’ N., 25° 28’ W., to 38° 45’ 8., 53° 30’ W. 


Sapphirina lactens, Giesbrecht. 


1893, Sapphirina lactens, Giesb., Fauna u. Flora des Golfes von Neapel, Monogr. xix., “ Pelag. Copep.,” 
p. 619, pl. lil. figs. 15, 16, 30 e¢ seq. 


The only gathering in which this species was met with was from Station 104 in 
37° 05’ 8., 52° 22/ W. 


Sapphirina vorax, Giesbrecht. 


1891, Sapphirina vorax, Giesb., Atti Acead. Lincei, Roma (4), Rend., vol. vii. See also 
Fauna u. Flora des Golfes von Neapel (1893), p. 619, pl. lii. figs. 23, 28 et seq. 


SS. 4 


This species occurred very sparingly in three gatherings collected at Stations 12, 13, 
and 104, 22° 19’ N., 22° 07’ W., to 37° 05’ Saas 22, We 


Sapphirina auronitens, Claus. 
1863, Sapphirina auwronitens, Claus, op. cit., p. 153. 
This also occurred very sparingly in gatherings from three stations, viz., from 
Stations 12, 13, and’ 44, 22° 19’ N., 22° 07’ W., to 3° 42’ N., 26° 26’ W. 


Sapphirina nigromaculata, Claus. 
1863, Sapphirina nigromaculata, Claus, op. cit., p. 152, pl. viii. 


The gatherings in which this species was observed were collected at Stations 12, 29, 
and 85, 22° 19/ IN 22° 07" Wa, to 23° 8° S., 39° 40’ W. 


Sapphirina intestinata, Giesbrecht. 
1891, Sapphirina intestinata, Giesb., op. cit. (4), Rend., vol. vii. p. 478, 
This species was collected at Stations 26, 44, and 90, 14° 33’ N., 25° 09’ W., to 
26° 50’ S., 42° 20’ W., and was apparently not very common. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS,, VOL. XLVI, 575.) 


330 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Sapphirina opalina, Dana. 
1849, Sapphirina opalina, Dana, Proc. Amer. Acad., Boston, vol. ii. pp. 8-61. 
The only gathering in which this species was obtained was from Station 59, 2° 30’ S., 
Bee Ag We 
Sapphirina gastrica, Giesbrecht. 
1891, Sapphirina gastrica, Gieshb., op. cit. (4), Rend., vol. vii. p. 478. 


This species was collected at Stations 7, 8, and 12, 26° 23’ N., 20° 20’ W., to 
22° 19’ N., 22’ 07° W., but only a few specimens were observed. 


Sapphirina stellata, Giesbrecht. 
1891, Sapphirina stellata, Giesb., op. cit. (4), Rend., vol. vii. p. 478. 
This Sapphirina was obtained in a gathering collected at Station 28, 13° 07’ N., 
25° 09’ W. 
Sapphirina darwin, Haeckel. 
1864, Sapphirina darwinti, Haeckel, Zettschr. med. Naturw. (Jena), 1 Bd. p. 105, pls. ii. and iii. 


The only gathering in which this species was observed was that from Station 684 in 
the South Atlantic—Pernambuco bearing 12 miles W., 8° 00’ 8., 34° 34’ W. 


Genus Saphirella, T. Scott, 1894. 
Saphirella abyssicola, T. Scott. (Pl. IV. figs. 2-4.) 


1894, Saphirella abyssicola, Scott, Trans. Linn. Soc. (2, “ Zool.”), vol. vi. p. 126, pl. xiii. figs. 57, 58, 
pl. xiv. figs. 5-10. 


This species, which appeared to be of rare occurrence in the Scotza collections, was 
obtained in a gathering from Station 684—Pernambuco bearing 12 miles W., 8° 00’ 8., 
42 34) We 

Genus Copilia, Dana, 1849. * 
Copilia mirabilis, Dana. 
1852, Copilia mirabilis, Dana, U.S. Explor. Kxped., 1838-1842 (‘“ Crust.”), vol, xiii. p. 1232, pl. Ixxxvi. 

This species was observed in gatherings from the following twelve stations: 12, 
14, 18,22) 95, 26, 27. 29,33, 35, 36° and.85, 22° 197 Ni 22 Ora eto omeooe 
39 AOe We 

Copilia denticulata, Claus. 
1863, Copilia denticulata, Claus, Die freilebenden Copepoden, p. 161, Taf. 25, figs. 14-20. 


This species was only met with in a gathering from Station 36, 8° 42’ N., 25° 28’ W. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL., 576.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 331 


Fam. OncaIp&. 
Genus Oncea, Philippi, 1853. 


Onexa venusta, Philippi. 
1843, Oncxa venusta, Phil., Wiegman’s Archiv fiir Naturgesch. (1843), p. 62, pl. iii. fig. 3. 
This species was observed in gatherings from Stations 18, 25, 36, 49, 56, and 62, 
ROeDSeNE Gon 84" We to.4: 15° S.. 38° 38’ W. 
Oncxa mediterranea, Claus, var. 
1863, Antaria mediterranea, Claus, Die freilebenden Copepoden, p. 159, Taf. 30. 


The only gatherings in which this form occurred were from three stations in the 
South Atlantic, viz., 55, 64, and 93, 0° 22’ S., 31° 00’ W., to 30° 5’S., 45° 28’ W. 


Oncexa conifera, Giesbrecht. 
1891, Onexa conifera, Giesb., Atti Accad. Lincet, Roma (4), vol. vii. p. 8. 

This species, which appeared to be of more frequent occurrence than the two just 
referred to, was observed in gatherings from Stations 14, 18, 19, 26, 29, 32, and 33, 
21° 28’ N., 22° 40’ W., to 9° 40’ N., 25° 28’ W., in the North Atlantic, and at Stations 
56, 59, 62, and 90 in the South Atlantic, 0° 42’ S., 31° 20’ W., to 26° 50’ S., 42° 20’ W. 


Fam. Corycaip&. 
Genus Coryceus, Dana, 1845. 


Coryceus venustus, Dana. 
1849, Coryceus venustus, Dana, Proc. Amer. Acad., Boston, vol. ii. p. 8. 


This Coryceus occurred sparingly in gatherings from three stations in the South 
Atlantic, viz., 90, 93, and 95, 26° 50’S., 42° 20’ W., to 32° 15’ S., 47° 30’ W. 


Coryceus ovalis, Claus. 
1863, Coryceus ovalis, Claus, Die freilebenden Copepoden, p. 158. 

The only gathering in which this species was obtained was from Station 44. 
3° 42! N., 26° 26’ W. 

Coryceus obtusus, Dana. 
1852, Coryceus obtusus, Vana, Crust. U.S. Eapl. Haped., p. 1214, pl. lxxxv. fig. 6. 

With the exception of Corycwus speciosus this appeared to be the most commonly 
distributed member of the genus in the Scotia collection. It was observed in gather- 
ings from about twenty-seven stations, ranging from Stations 13, 15, and 19, North 
Atlantic, 21° 58’ N., 22° 26’ W., to 19° 12’ N., 24° 08’ W., to 85, 90, and 95, South 
Atlantic, 23° 8’8., 39° 40’ W., to 32°15’ S., 47° 30’ W., but it was nowhere very plentiful. 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVI, 577.) 


332 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Coryceus flaccus, Giesbrecht. 
1891, Coryexus flaccus, Giesb., Atti Accad. Lincet, Roma (4), vol. vii. p. 480. 

This tolerably distinct species was met with, though somewhat sparingly, in 
gatherings collected at Stations 7, 12, 15, 22, 85, and 86, 26° 23’ N., 20° 20’ W., to 
24° 26’ S., 40° 25’ W. 

Coryceus rostratus, Claus. 
1863, Coryceus rostratus, Claus, op. cit., p. 480. 

The only gatherings in which this Corycewus was obtained were collected at Station 
26, 14° 33’ N., 25° 9’ W., and Station 95, 32° 15’ S., 47° 30’ W., the one in the North, 
and the other in the South Atlantic. 


Coryceus speciosus, Dana. 
1849, Coryceus speciosus, Dana, Proc. Amer. Acad., Boston, vol. 11. pp. 8-61. 

This fine species was of frequent occurrence in the Scotva’s tow-net collections ; the 
remarkably divergent caudal rami made it easily recognised. It was observed in 
gatherings from thirty-six different stations, ranging from Stations 7 and 12 in the 
North Atlantic to Stations 93 and 95 in the South, 26° 23’ N., 20° 20’ W., to 82° 15'S, 
47° 30’ W. 

Coryceus longistylis, Dana. 
1849, Corycexus longistylis, Dana, op. cit., vol. 1. pp. 8-61. 

This species occurred sparingly in gatherings from Stations 7, 11, 12, 13, and 14, 
26° 23° IN, 20> 20) We, toile 28aINe 22 eA OV 

Coryceus carimatus, Giesbrecht. 
1891, Corycxus carinatus, Giesb., op. cit. (4), vol. vii. p. 481. 

This Corycwus was observed in gatherings from twenty-five different stations, 
extending from Stations 11, 12, and 15 to 88, 90, and 94, 23° 50’ N., 21° 34’ W., to 


30° 25'8., 45° 45" W. ‘The species was apparently more or less uniformly distributed 
throughout the area traversed by the Scotia between the limits stated. 


Coryceus longicaudis, Dana. 
1849, Coryceus longicaudis, Dana, op. cit., vol. ii. pp. 8-61. 
The distribution of this species appeared to be somewhat limited ; the only gatherings 


in which it was met with were those collected at Stations 25, 27, 29, 30, and 31, 
15° 15’ N., 25° 09’ W., to 11° 10’ N., 25° 20’ W. 


Coryceus elongatus, Claus. 
1863, Corycexus elongatus, Claus, Die freilebenden Copepoden, p. 157, pl. xxiv. figs. 3 and 4, 


This species occurred very sparingly at Station 11, 23° 50’ N., 21° 34’ W., and 
Station 85, 23° 8’ S., 39° 40’ W. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVII., 578.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 333 


Tribe CALIGOIDA. 
Genus Dysgamus, Steenstrup & Liitken, 1861. 
Dysgamus atlanticus, Steenstrup & Liitken. (PL. XIII. fig. ils) 


1861, Dysgamus atlanticus, Steenstrup & Liitken, Bidrag til Kundskab om det aabne Havs Snyltelcreb 
og Lernzxer, p. 368, Tab. iv. fig. 8. 
Only the males of Dysgamus have apparently been observed hitherto, and it is 
doubtful if the genus can be considered a valid one till females are obtained. 
The specimens on which the genus was founded were taken, probably while 


Fic. 1.—Foot of first pair. Fic. 2.—Foot of second pair. 


Fic. 3.—Foot of fourth pair. Fic. 4.—Abdomen and fifth pair of feet. 
Dysgamus atlanticus, Steenstrup & Liitken. 


swimming freely at the surface, at several places in the North Atlantic, between lat. 8° 
and 28° N., and long. 21° and 36° W. 

‘This species has a close resemblance to Caligus in its general form and colour; the 
frontal plates are, however, without lunules or sucker-disks. The carapace is broadly 
ovate and depressed, but the last two thoracic as well as the abdominal segments are 
short and comparatively narrow. The first four pairs of thoracic legs are all two- 
branched, and the branches two-jointed ; the first pair has the inner branch very small, 
but in the other three pairs the branches are subequal ; there is, as in Caligus, a fifth pair, 
very minute but quite distinct (see text-figures annexed). ‘The eyes, though visible, are 
not very conspicuous. The Scotia specimens were collected in the Atlantic at the 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL., 579.) 


334 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


following stations: 25, 31, 44, 79, 82, 83, and 98. The first two stations are north of 
the equator, viz., 15° 15’ N., 25° 09’ W., and 11° 10’ N., 25° 20’ W. ‘The other stations 
are south of the equator, Station 98 being in 34° 02’ 8., 49°07’ W. The Scotva specimens 
differ somewhat from the drawings given by Sreensrrup & LUTKEN in the work referred 
to, in having the abdominal portion rather stouter and shorter, but they agree so well 
otherwise that I have little hesitation in ascribing them to their species. CHARLES BRANCH 
Witson, in his work on ‘‘ American Copepoda parasitic on Fishes,” * describes a Dysgamus, 
of which he obtained a single specimen, and his drawings show it to be not unlike the 
specimens collected by the Scotia; this Dysgamus he ascribes to a new species, 
Dysgamus ariommus, and speaks of the fifth legs as being entirely lacking, whereas in 
the Scotia specimens the fifth pair, as already stated, are, though small, quite distinct. 

Only one, or at most two, specimens were obtained in any single gathering, and 
males only were observed, and, like the Caligus ropax frequently found in tow-net 
collections in British waters, they were captured apparently as free-swimming 
organisms. 

The only other writer who records Dysgamus is Dr Basserr-SmirH in his work “ A 
Systematic Description of Parasitic Copepoda found on Fishes,” published in Proc. Zool. 
Soc. London, 18th April 1889. 


CLADOCERA AND OSTRACODA. 


Cladocera were very scarce in the Scotia collections. The few specimens observed 
belong to the genus EHvadne, two species of which are represented in the collection, 
v1Zz. -— 

Genus Hvadne, Lovén, 1836. 
Evadne tergestina, Claus. (PI. XIII. fig. 14.) 


This species occurred in a tow-net gathering collected at Station 85, 23° 8’ S., 
39° 40’ W. Only one or two specimens were noticed. 


Evadne spinifera, P. EK. Miller. (PI. XIII. fig. 15.) 


E. spinifera was also obtained in the gathering from Station 85, 23° 8’ S., 
39° 40’ W, and was equally scarce with the species previously mentioned. 


OSTRACODA. 


The Ostracoda observed in the Scotia collections belong chiefly to the two groups 
Podocopa and Myodocopa, and include representatives of the families Cypride, 
Cytheridee, Cypridinide, and Concheeciade. 

* “North American Parasitic Copepods belonging to the Family Caligide: Part II. The Trebine and 
Euryphorine,” Proc. U.S.A. National Museum, vol. xxxi. p. 713, pl. xx. figs. 62-70. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 580.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 335 


PODOCOPA. 
Fam. Cypripa. 
Genus Macrocypris, G. S. Brady, 1868. 
Macrocypris maculata, G. 8. Brady. (Pl. XIV. figs. 1 and 2.) 
1865, Cytherideis maculata, Brady, Trans. Zool. Soc., vol. v. p. 367, pl. lvii. fig. 12, a—b. 
1880, Macrocypris maculata, Brady, Ostracoda of the “ Challenger” Haped., p. 44, pl. i. fig. 2, a-d. 
Halitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected April 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43 42” S., 44° 38’ 33’ W. Several specimens were obtained ; they varied somewhat 
in size. One of the larger specimens measures 1°5 mm. in length; height rather less 
than half the length, highest in the middle; dorsal margin arcuate, sloping about 
equally towards both ends, but the posterior is rather narrower than the other; lower 
margin slightly concave and sinuate, especially towards the front. Seen from above, 
the shell is elliptical in outline, widest in the middle, width equal to about one-third 
of the length, tapering equally to each end; both ends narrow; colour brownish. 
This species appears to be widely distributed. 


Fam, CYTHERID&. 
Genus Cythere, O. F. Miiller, 1785. 
Cythere inornata, new species. (PI. XIV. figs. 9 and 10.) 


Shell, seen from the side, oblong ; height equal to about half the length; dorsal 
margin nearly straight, ventral margin slightly incurved. The posterior extremity 
slopes at first abruptly downwards, then becomes boldly rounded; the anterior end is 
somewhat similar, but is rather more produced, especially below. Seen from above, the 
shell is moderately tumid, widest in the middle, greatest width equal to rather more 
than half the length, sides evenly rounded, but tapering rather more towards the 
anterior end, which is wedge-shaped. Shell surface rough, with numerous small 
circular pits and setiferous papille between. Length of shell about 1°2 mm. 

Halbitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, June 1903; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” S., 
44° 38’ 33” W. 

Cythere quadridens, new species. (Pl. XIV. figs. 15 and 16.) 

Shell, seen from the side, oblong, highest in front, the height equal to rather more 
than half the length; anterior end boldly rounded; posterior extremity truncated 
above, slightly produced below the middle, and provided with about four more or less 
distinct tooth-like projections. The dorsal margin shows a slight elevation immediately 
over the anterior hinge, thence it slopes backwards to the posterior extremity in a 
nearly straight line, where it is abruptly angulated; lower margin slightly excavated 
behind the anterior extremity, and thence converges gently backwards. Seen from 
above, the shell is widest behind the middle, greatest width scarcely equal to half the 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS,, VOL. XLVIII., 581.) 


336 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


length; the margins taper gently towards the bluntly rounded anterior end, but 
behind they converge somewhat abruptly, the posterior extremity being slightly 
produced and expanded ; the dorsal margin also shows a slight foliation. The general 
surface of the shell is sculptured with numerous small rounded pits. Length of the 
shell about *85 mm. 

Halitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 

Cythere latibrosa, new species. (Pl. XIV. figs. 8 and 4.) 


This form, seen from the side, is somewhat similar in its general outline to that 
described above, but differs in the following particulars: it is higher in front in pro- 
portion to the length, the dorsal slope is rather greater, and the shell sculpture is 
rather different. Seen from above, the shell is somewhat tumid, the outline very 
irregularly hastate, greatest width equal to about half the length; lateral margins 
incurved in the middle, converging gently in front, and abruptly behind; both ex- 
tremities somewhat truncated, the posterior end rather more so than the other, and with 
two or three tooth-like projections. Surface of the shell sculptured with numerous 
irregular and angular excavations. Length, ‘74 mm. 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected June 1903; Station 3825, 
60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 

This species has a somewhat close resemblance to Cythere wyville-thompsont, 
G. 8S. Brady, but the anterior serrations observed in that species are wanting in this, 
and the armature of the posterior end also differs. 


Cythere foveolata, G. 8. Brady. (Pl. XIV. figs. 7 and 8 (¢), and figs. 13 and 14 ({).) 
1880, Cythere foveolata, Brady, Ostracoda of the “ Challenger” Exped., p. 75, pl. xiii. 5, e-h. 


Shell of the female tumid; seen from the side, subrhomboidal, highest in the 
middle, greatest height rather more than half the length ; both ends obliquely rounded ; 
dorsal margin gently rounded in the middle part, then sloping somewhat steeply 
towards each end, but more distinctly so in front; ventral margin slightly smuate in 
front, and curving upwards behind. Seen from above, the shell is broadly ovate, 
widest in the middle, greatest width equal to about half the length; sides slightly 
arcuate in the middle, converging rapidly to the pointed anterior extremity, but 
abruptly rounded behind. Shell surface marked all over with closely set and con- 
spicuous excavations, and with the hinge line somewhat prominent. The outline of 
the male is more compressed and angular. Length, female ‘77 mm. ; male ‘74 mm. 

Halitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 

The Scotva specimens differ slightly from those recorded by Dr Brapy in being 
somewhat larger and in the general contour being also slightly different, but notwith- 
standing these differences, [ am inclined to consider them as belonging to Brapy’s species. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 582.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 337 


Cythere antarctica, new species. (PI. XIV. figs. 5 and 6.) 


Shell, seen from the side, elongated, highest over the posterior hinge, greatest height 
equal to rather more than half the length ; the dorsal margin slopes steeply backwards 
from the highest point, and more gently towards the front, and with a shallow notch 
near the anterior extremity ; posterior end boldly rounded and somewhat produced 
below ; anterior end truncated above, rounded below, with a small subcentral projection 
separating the upper from the lower portion ; ventral margin incurved and sinuous. 
The shell, seen from above, widest in front, the greatest width equal to rather less than 
half the length; sides not very boldly rounded, converging gently backwards to the 
sharp-pointed posterior end; anterior extremity blunt and slightly produced. Shell 
surface thickly covered with minute circular pits. Length, ‘7 mm. 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkney Islands; collected June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42” &,, 44° 38’ 33” W. 


Cythere peregrina, new species. (Pl. XIV. figs. 11 and 12.) 


Shell, seen from the side, oblong, highest behind the middle, greatest height scarcely 
equal to half the length; dorsal margin sloping gently from behind the middle in a 
nearly straight line towards the front, but the hinder slope is shorter and steeper ; 
both ends evenly and not very boldly rounded ; ventral margin slightly and evenly 
convex. Shell tumid when seen from above, widest in the middle, width equal to 
half the length; sides rather boldly arcuate and converging towards both ends; both 
extremities acuminate. Shell covered with numerous and extremely fine lines extend- 
ing longitudinally over its surface. Length about ‘75 mm., but varies to some extent ; 
one or two rather larger specimens reach to about | mm. in length. 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected June 1903; Station 325, 
GUA o Ag S244 S833" Wi. 


Genus Xestoleberis, G. O. Sars, 1865. 
Xestoleberis reniformis, G. 8. Brady. (Pl. XIV. figs. 17 and 18.) 


1907, Xestoleberis reniformis, Brady, Nutional Antarctic Kaped.: Natural History, vols. ii.-v., 
“Ostracoda,” p. 6, pl. 1. figs. 4, 5. 

A few specimens—adult and (?) young—of a Xestoleberis occurred among other Ostra- 
coda collected in Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 387 33” W, 
They so closely resemble the form described by Dr Brapy in his paper on the ‘ Ostra- 
coda of the English National Antarctic Expedition” that I ascribe them to the same 
species. They differ a little from the description and figures given by Brapy, but the 
peculiar outline of the shell, both when seen from the side and from above, seems to be 
characteristic of the species. Length of specimen represented by the drawings, ‘62 mm. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN, TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 583.) 


338 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Genus Cytherura, G. O. Sars, 1865. 
Cytherura ornata, new species. (PI. XIV. figs. 19-21.) 


Carapace moderately tumid; seen from the side, subrhomboidal, highest in front of 
the middle, greatest height equal to rather more than half the length; dorsal margin 
well rounded, sloping more steeply in front than behind; ventral margin flexuous ; 
anterior margin broadly rounded, obscurely crenulate ; posterior extremity somewhat 
produced in the middle to a blunt angular point. Seen from above, the sides are evenly 
and not very strongly convex, widest in the middle, greatest width equal to half the 
length ; anterior extremity somewhat acuminate, posterior end forming a short angular 
projection. Surface of the shell ornamented with minute excavations and lines, as 
shown in the drawing (fig. 19). Length, 54 mm. 

Halitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected June 1903; Station 325, 
6057437 427 1S AS 38) 33 We 


Cytherura porrecta, new species. (PI. XIV. figs. 22 and 23.) 


Carapace elongated ; seen from the side, oblong, about equal in height at both ends, 
greatest height less than half the length ; dorsal and ventral margins sinuous ; anterior 
end boldly and evenly rounded; posterior extremity produced in the middle line into 
a prominent subtriangular and blunt-pointed beak; a sinuous and moderately con- 
spicuous longitudinal fold extends backwards along the middle line, then curves round 
to meet the ventral margin. Seen from above, shell outline sagittate, widest in front 
of the middle, width rather less than half the length; sides sinuate, abruptly rounded 
behind, converging in front; anterior end acuminate ; posterior extremity produced into 
a prominent beak. Shell surface covered with numerous small and rounded excavations. 
Length, °45 mm. 

Habitat.—This small form was obtained in the same gatherings from Scotia 
with those described above; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 


Cytherura sculptilis, new species. (Pl. XIV. figs. 24 and 25.) 


Shell somewhat like Cytherura similis, Brady & Norman; seen from the side, 
broadly ovate, highest just in front of the middle, height equal to more than half the 
length; dorsal margin strongly arched, sloping towards the anterior end; anterior 
slope flattened ; posterior slope evenly rounded and terminating in the posterior angula- 
tion; ventral margin arcuate behind, flexuous in front; anterior extremity bluntly 
rounded, the margin obscurely crenulated ; posterior extremity produced and somewhat 
acuminate below the middle, lower edge sloping backwards in a curved line continuous 
with the ventral margin. Shell, seen from above, broadly elliptical, widest in the 
middle, width rather less than half the length; sides evenly rounded, converging more 
gradually behind than in front; both extremities somewhat acuminate. Shell surface 


(ROY. SOC, FDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL., 584.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 339 


ornamented with fine but irregular reticulations, and with the interspaces minutely 
punctate ; there are also small whitish papillae where the lines intersect. Length of 
the specimen represented by the drawing, 5 mm., but another specimen measured 
only 53 mm. 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 


Genus Paradoxostoma, Fischer, 1855. 


Paradoxostoma retusum, G. 8. Brady. (PI. XIV. fig. 26.) 
1890, Paradoxostoma retusum, Brady, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., vol. xxxv. p. 518, pl. iv: fig. 20. 


Shell, seen from the side, oblong, narrower in front than behind, highest behind the 
middle ; height rather less than half the length; dorsal margin moderately convex, 
evenly rounded except near the posterior extremity, where it becomes slightly 
flexuous ; anterior end narrow, evenly rounded ; posterior extremity produced above 
the middle into a bluntly rounded beak, thence, sloping downwards and forwards in a 
nearly straight line, it merges into and becomes continuous with the sinuated ventral 
margin. Seen from above, compressed, widest in the middle, about four times longer 
than wide ; sides evenly rounded, the front end somewhat obtuse, the posterior extremity 
acuminate. Shell smooth, semitransparent, with a few faint impressed lines at the 
posterior end (fig. 26). Length, °78 mm. 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42” G., 44° 38’ 338” W. 

The Scotia specimens differ slightly from the form described by Dr Brapy in 
their larger size, as well as to a small extent in their general outline ; the peculiar con- 
formation of the posterior extremity is, however, quite characteristic of the species 
referred to. 


Paradoxostoma antarcticum, new species. (Pl. XIV. figs. 27 and 28.) 


Carapace ovate ; seen from the side, highest behind the middle, height scarcely 
equal to half the length; dorsal margin boldly arched, forming a continuous even 
curve backwards to the blunt angulation of the posterior extremity, but with a longer 
slope to the front than to the rear; anterior end narrow and rounded ; posterior 
obliquely truncated, slightly produced above, thence sloping downwards and forwards 
to meet the ventral margin, which is slightly convex. Shell, seen from above, com- 
pressed, fusiform, widest behind the middle, fully three times longer than broad ; 
extremities equal and acuminate. Surface of shell smooth, with small, round, indistinct 
markings scattered over it. Length, ‘8 mm. 

Habitat.—Scotia Bay, South Orkneys; collected in June 1903; Station 325, 
60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 585.) 


340 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Paradoxostoma leve, new species. (PI. XIV. figs. 29 and 30.) 


Shell, seen from the side, elongate, subovate, higher behind than in front, greatest 
height just behind the middie, and equal to fully two-fifths of the length ; anterior 
extremity subangular, narrowly rounded; greatest projection below the middle ; 
posterior end obtusely rounded, dorsal margin evenly but not very boldly arcuate, 
sloping gradually towards the front and more convex behind; ventral margin slightly 
sinuate in front of the middle. Seen from above, the outline is narrowly ovate, the 
greatest width, which is near the centre, is equal to about one-third of the length; the 
sides are flatly arcuate, and both extremities subacuminate; valves smooth, polished, 
with a few scattered opaque white points. Length about ‘65 mm. 

Habitat.—Obtained in the same gatherings with those described above, collected in 
Scotia Bay, South Orkney Islands, in June 1903; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” &, 
44° 38’ 33” W. 


MYODOCOPA. 


Fam. CypRIDINID&. 
Genus Philomedes, Liljeborg, 1853. 


Philomedes assimilis, G. 8. Brady. (Pl. XIII. figs. 16 and 17.) 
1907, Philomedes assimilis, Brady, National Antarctic Haped.: “ Ostracoda,” p. 5, pl. i. figs. 16-21, 
pl. u. figs. 1-6. 

One or two specimens of a Philomedes, which I ascribe to the species mentioned, 
occurred in a small sample of dredged material from Scotia Bay, collected in April 1908 ; 
Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” 8, 44° 38’ 33” W. The length of the specimen represented 
by the drawing (fig. 16) is 1°8 mm. 


Genus Asterope, Philippi, 1840. 
Asterope australis, G. 8. Brady. (PI. XIII. figs. 18 and 19.) 

1890, Asterope australis, Brady, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., vol. xxxv. (pt. 11.), p. 515, pl. ii. figs. 1, 2. 

1898, A 8 » Trans, Zool. Soc., vol. xiv. (pt. viii.), p. 431, pl. xliii. figs. 1-8. 

1906, Cylindroleberis australis, G. W. Miiller, Die Ostracoden der “‘ Siboga” Kxped., p. 14. 

This species was obtained in a small gathering of dredged material collected in 
Scotia Bay, South Orkneys, on 3rd June 1903; Station 325, 60° 43’ 42” S., 44° 38’ 33” W. 
The length of the specimen—a female—represented by drawing (fig. 18) is 2°75 mm. 


Asterope oculata, G. 8. Brady. (PI. XIII. figs. 20 and 21.) 
1902, Asterope oculata, Brady, Trans. Zool. Soc., vol. xvi. p. 179, pl. xxi. figs. 6-13. 

This species occurred in a small gathering collected off Gough Island on 22nd April 
1904; Station 461, 40° 20’S., 9° 56’ 30” W. The size of the specimen represented by 
the drawing (fig. 20) is 1°8 mm. Dr Brapy records A. oculata from Trincomalee, 
Ceylon. 


(ROY. S0C. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 586.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION, 341 


Fam. HaLocyprip&. 


The Halocypridee being for the most part pelagic in their habits, are widely 
dispersed throughout the Atlantic, Pacific, and Indian Oceans, but appear to be more 
frequent in tropical regions. The species recorded here are chiefly from these regions, 
and were collected by the s.y. Scotia on the outward voyage to the Antarctic; no 
Halocypridz were observed in the collections from the South Orkneys. 


Genus Halocypris, Dana, 1852. 


ITalocypris inflata, Dana. (PI. XIII. figs. 29-31.) 

1852, Halocypris inflata, Dana, U.S. Explor. Exped., 1857-1842, vol. xiii. p. 1301, pl. xei. fig. 8. 

1852, - brevirostris, Dana, op. cit., p. 1503, pl. xei. fig. 9. 

1906, * inflata, G. W. Miiller, “ Ostracoda,” “ Siboga” Exped., p. 2. 

This species was obtained in gatherings from Stations 21, 26, and 59, the first 
in 18° 28’ N., 24° 28’ W., the last in 2° 30’ S., 32° 42’ W. The specimen 
represented by the drawing measures 1°65 mm. The species is widely distributed 
in the Atlantic, the Pacific, and Indian Oceans, and appears to be subject to some 
amount of variation, and has been described under several names (cf. G. W. MULuer, 
op. cit.). 


Halocypris globosa, Claus. (Pl. XIII. fig. 32.) 
1874, Halocypris globosa, Claus, “ Die Fam. Halocypriden,” Schriften Zool. Inhalt, Heft i. (Wien, 
1874), p. 7, Taf. 3, figs. 36 and 39. 

1906, Halocypris globosa, G. W. Miiller, op. cit., p. 2. 

H. globosa was obtained in a gathering from Station 16, 20° 29’ N., 
23° 16’ W., collected 29th November 1902. In this species the shell has a short 
rotund form; seen from the side, the dorsal margin is flattened, but the lower is 
boldly arched in the form of a semicircle, the depth across the middle being equal to 
about four-fifths of the length. The specimen represented by the drawing (fig. 32) 
measured *85 mm. 


Genus Conchecia, Dana, 1852. 


Conchecia spinirostris, Claus. (Pl. XIII. fig. 26.) 

1874, Concheciu spinirostris, Claus, ‘‘ Die Fam, Halocypriden,” p. 6, Taf. 1, figs. 1, 6a, 8; Taf. 2, figs. 
11; 14, 15. 

1890, Concheecia porrecta, Claus, Arbeit. Zool. Institut Wien, vol. ix., Heft i., p. 12; Heft iii. (1891), 
p. 61, Taf, 7. 

1896, Conchacia spinirostris, Brady & Norman, Vrans. Roy. Dublin Soc. (N.S.), vol. v. p. 689, 
pl. Ix. fig. 22. 

1906, Conchacia spinirostris, G. W. Miiller, ‘‘ Ostracoda,” ‘‘ Siboga” Exped., p. 7. 


This widely distributed species occurred in surface gatherings from Stations 14, 16, 
and 59; the first in 21° 28’ N., 22° 40’ W., the last in 2° 30’ S., 32° 42’ W., collected 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVII., 587.) 


342 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


November and December 1902. According to Dr G. W. Mttuzr, C. spinirostris, 
Claus, and C. porrecta, Claus, are forms of the same species. 


Conchecia procera, G. W. Miiller. (Pl. XIII. figs. 27 and 28.) 

1891, Conchecia variabilis (pr. prt.), G. W. Miiller, Zool. Jahrb., Abtheil Syst., vol. v. p. 2738, Taf. 28, 
figs. 27, 38. 

1894, Paraconchecia oblonga, Claus, Denkschriften d. Akad. Wien, vol. 1xi. p. 3, Taf. 3, figs. 21-23 
(non C. oblonga, Cl., 1890, 91). 

1894, Conchecia procera, G. W. Miller, F. #1. Neapel, vol. xxi. p. 


228, pl. iii. figs. 47, 48, 50, 58. 
1906, yh - idem, ‘‘ Ostracoda,” “ Stboga” Exped., p. 4. 


Specimens which I have ascribed to this species were obtained in a surface tow- 
netting collected at Station 14, 21° 28’ N., 22° 40’ W., on 28th November 1902. The 
specimen represented by the drawing measured about 1°5 mm. 


Conchecia elegans, G. O. Sars. 


1865, Conchecia elegans, G. O. Sars, Forhandl. Vidensk.-Selsk. Chr., p. 117. 

1891, Paraconchecia gracilis, Claus, Die Halocypriden des atlantischen Oceans und Mittelmeeres, p. 66, 
pl. xii. 

1896, Toe elegans, Brady & Norman, Trans. Roy. Dublin Soc. (N.S.), vol. v. p. 684, pl. lx. 
fig. 23, pl. Ixv. figs. 11-22. 

1906, Concheecia elegans, G. W. Miiller, ‘‘ Ostracoda,” “ Siboga” Hxped., p. 4. 

A single specimen of this species occurred in a surface gathering collected at 
Station 14, 21° 28’ N., 22° 40’ W., 28th November 1902. This species has been 
found fairly common in Loch Etive, Scotland, and is said to be very abundant 
among the Lofoten Islands down to 300 fathoms (G. O. Sars), while Dr Ciaus reports 
it as having been taken at a depth of 1500 metres in lat. 37° 45’ N., long. 18° 38’ W. 
C. elegans is also a Mediterranean species. Dr G. W. MULLER gives its distribution 
as extending to lat. 35° in the South Atlantic.* Paraconchecia gracilis, Claus, is 
considered by Dr G. W. Mttusr to be identical with C. elegans, G. O. Sars. 


Genus EKuconchecia, G. W. Miiller, 1890. 


Euconchecia chierchix, G. W. Miiller. (Pl. XIII. figs. 22-25.) 
1890, Euconchecia chierchiz, G. W. Miiller, ‘‘Ueber Halocypriden,” Zool. Jahrb., Bd. v. p. 227, 
pl. xxviii. figs. 1-10 (1890). 
1894, Halocypris aculeata, T. Scott, Trans. Linn. Soc.: Zool., ser. 2, vol. vi. p. 142, pl. xv. figs. 5, 6, 
33, 34, 38. 
1902, Huconchwcia chierchizx, G. S. Brady, Trans, Zool. Soc., vol. xvi. p. 190, pl. xxiv. figs. 9-15. 
A few specimens of this species occurred in a surface gathering collected at Station 49, 
1° 53’ N., 27° 26’ W., and at Station 68, 7° 42’ 8. 34° 32’ W., off Pernambuco, in 
December 1902. 


* ‘Sie findet sich weiter im noérdlichen und siidlichen Atlantischen Ocean bis zu 35° siidlicher Breite,” 
Nordisches Plankton, vii., ‘‘ Ostracoda,” p. 4 (1901). 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIIL., 588.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 343 


ALPHABETICAL INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES. 


PAGE PAGE 
abdominalis (Diaptomus) 3 : : . 288 | australis (Dactylopusia) . : : é . 3ii 
3 (Pleuromamma) . : : . 288 5 (Laophonte) . ; 7 : ~ ols 
abyssicola (Saphirella)  . A 6 < . 330 x (Machairopus) . 3 ; 3 . 306 
Acartia . ‘ : : f 5 : . 294 | austrina (Alteutha) 9 C , : 209 
Acartiide . 2 3 : . : . 294 » (Tisbe) . : : : : . 302 
Acrocalanus . ¢ : F ; : . 285 | austrinus (Heterorhabdus) . : : . 290 
aculeata (Halocypris) . : : : . 342 
aculeatus (Paracalanus) . : ° 5 . 285 | belgicee (Cyclopina) 323 
acutifrons (Euterpina) . : 3 : . 297 | bipinnata (Candace) : : : 5 AR 
(Haloptilis) . : : : . 290 55 (Candacia) 2 ; ‘ : 5 2B 
% (Harpacticus) 5 : : . 297 | bispinosa (Candace) 291 
5 (Hemicalanus) ; : ; . 290 a (Candacia) 291 
% (Labidocera) . : : é . 292 | brachiata (Calanopia) 287 
r6 (Pontella) . F : : . 292 5 (Pontella) 287 
acutus (Calanus) . : ; : : . 281 | brachiatus (Centropages) ; : : 287 
ethiopica (Candace). : : . . 291} Bradya . : ‘ : ; ‘ : . 295 
x (Candacia) . : : 5 . 291 | brevicornis (Calanus) 282 
affine (Porcellidium) . : : : . 301 3 (Calanoides) . P : : 282 
affinis (Parathalestris) . : 5 : . 308 | brevirostris (Halocypris) , ‘ : . 341 
Alteutha : : : : . ; . 299 | brevis (Monops) . ‘ : : , . 293 
Ameira . ; : : : : ‘ . 315 », (Pontellopsis) . : : . 293 
americani (Calanopia) . : : > . 291 | browni (Pseudozosime) . : : : . 294 
Amphiascus . ‘ : 3 : : . 314 
angusta (Sapphirina) —. : : : . 329 | Calanide 281 
antaretica (Asterocheres tuberites, var.) . . 327 | calanina (Cyclopina) 287 
5 (Cythere) : ; : : . 337 | calaninus (Centropages) . 287 
ny (Parastenhelia) ; : ‘ BeOLe . (Hemicalanus) 287 
antarcticum (Ectinosoma) : : : . 295 | Calanoida 281 
. (Paradoxostoma) : : . 339 | Calanoides 282 
antarcticus (Racovitzanus) . . ‘ . 286 | Calanopia 291 
Antaria 2 : 4 é : ‘ . 331 | Calanus 281 
areuicornis (Calanus) . : : 3 . 285 | Calocalanus 285 
a (Clausocalanus) . ; : . 285 | Candace 290 
armata (Temora) . : ; : : . 287 | Candacia 290 
Artotrogide . ; : ‘ é ‘ . 327 | Candaciidee ‘ ; : ; . 290 
Artotrogus . : : . . ; . 327 | Canthocamptide . : : i ‘ . 31d 
assimilis (Philomedes)  . : é : . 340 | carinatus (Coryceus) . : : : . 332 
(Pseudothalestris) var. . , . 314 | Catopia. : : 5 ‘ : : . 286 
Asterocheres . : : : : : . 327 | Centropages . : : ‘ : ‘ . 286 
Asterocheridze 5 : : : é 327 | Centropagide : : ; : ; . 286 
Asterope : : : : : : . 340 | Cerviniide . : ; F é ; . 294 
atlantica (Pontella) ; : ; ‘ . 292 | Cetochilus ‘ 281 
7 (Pontia) . : : : . 292 | cheirchiz (Euconcheecia) 342 
atlanticus (Dysgamus) . : ; : - 333 | Cladocera . 334 
attenuatus (Calanus) . : : : . 283 | clausi (Mecynocera) 284 
* (Eucalanus) . ; : ; » 9283 », (Parathalestris) 307 
auronitens (Sapphirina) . : : : 329 », (Thalestris) . 307 
australis (Asterope) : : : é . 340 | Clausocalanus 285 
»,  (Cylindroleberis) . : : . 340! Cletodes 281 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIIL, 589.) 


344 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Cletodidee 
Clytemnestra 
Clytemnestrid 
coatsi (Parathelestris) 
Concheecia 
conifera (Onczea) 
Copilia . : 3 
cornutus (Calanus) 

3 (Rhincalanus) . 
Coryceus 
Coryceidee 
crassus (Eucalanus) 
curta (Candace) 

5, (Candacia) 
Cyclopide 
Cyclopina 
Cyclopoida 
Cyclops. 
Cylindroleberis 
Cypride 
Cypridinide . 
Cythere 
Cytheride 
Cytherideus . 
Cytherura 


Dactylopus 
Dactylopusia . 
danz (Acartia) 
5, (Scolecithrix) 
,, (Undina) 
darwinii (Calanus). 

oF (Sapphirina) 

<3 (Undina) . 

; (Undinula) 
denticornis (Iehthyphorba) 
denticulata (Copilia) 
Diaptomus ‘ 
Diosaccidee 
Diosaccus 
Drepanopus . 
dubia (Alteutha) 
dubius (Diaptomus) 
Dysgamus 


Ectinosoma 

Ectinosomide 

efferata (Miracia) . 

elegans (Concheecia) 

elongatus (Coryczus) : : 
esterleyi (Pleuromamma gracilis, var.) 
Eucalanidze 


PAGE 
321 
297 
297 
307 
341 
331 
330 
284 
284 
331 
331 
283 
290 
290 
323 
323 
322 
286 
340 
335 
340 
335 
335 
335 
338 


309 
310 
294 
286 
286 


ac 


330 
287 
314 
314 


285 | 


299 | 


287 
333 


295 
295 
296 
342 
332 
289 
283 


Eucalanus 
Eucheta 
Euchetide 
Euconcheecia . 
Euryte . 

Euterpe 

Euterpina 
Euterpinide . 
Evadne 5 
exigua (Laophonte) 


ferrieri (Dactylopusia) 
flaccus (Coryczus) . 
flavicornis (Leucartia) 

5 (Lucicutia) 
flavus (Dactylopus) 
forficata (Idomene) 
foveolata (Cythere) 
frigida (Dactylopusia) 
frontalis (Calanus) 
fucicola (Lichomolgus) 

5,  (Psamathe) 
fucicolum (Macrocheiron) 
fucicolus (Amphiascus) . 

a (Harpacticus) . 

“A (Pseudanthessius) 
furcata (Catopia) 
fureatus (Centropages) . 

5  (Clausocalanus) 

»,  (Drepanopus) . 


gastrica (Sapphirina) 
gemma (Sapphirina) 
gerlachei (Metridia) 
gigas (Rhincalanus) 
clacialis (Scolecithrix) 
globosa (Halocypris) 
gracilipes (Tisbe) 
gracilis (Calanus) . 

», (Macrosetella) 

(Megacalanus) 

»,  (Paraconchecia) 

» (Pleuromamma) . 

»  (Pleuromma) 

»  (Setella) 
grandis (Rhincalanus) 


Halocypride . 
Halocypris 
Haloptilide . 
Haloptilis 
Harpacticidee 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 590.) 


PAGE 


283 
286 
286 
342 
324 
297 
297 
297 
334 
319 


311 
312 
289 
289 
309 
309 
336 
310 
282 
325 
325 
325 
316 
297 
325 
286 
286 
285 
285 


330 
329 
288 
284 
286 
341 
303 
282 
296 
282 
342 
288 
288 
296 
284 


341 
341 
290 
290 
297 


4 
| 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


Harpacticoida 
Harpacticus . 
Hemicalanus . 
Heterocheta . 
Heterorhabdide 
Heterorhabdus 


Ichthyophorba 
Idomene 
inflata ialnespes) 
inornata (Cythere) 
intermedia (Candace) 

> (Parathalestris) 
intestinata (Sapphirina) . 
iris (Sapphirina) 


Labidocera 

lactens (Sapphirina) 
leve (Paradoxostoma) 
Laophonte 
Laophontide . 
Laophontodes 
latibrosa (Cythere). 
Leuckartia 
Lichomolgidz 
Lichomolgus . 
Liljeborgia 

linearis (Cletodes) . 

5  (Liljeborgia) 

;,  (Orthopsyllus) 
longicauda (Psamathe) . 
longicaudis (Coryczus) . 
longicornis (Acrocalanus) 
longimaua (Candace) 

3 (Candacia) 
longistylis (Coryczus) 
lucens (Metridia) 
Lucicutia 
Lucicutide 


Machairopus .« 
Macrocheiron 
Macrocypris . 
Macrosetella . 
Macrosetellide - 
maculata (Cytherideus) . 
af (Macroeypris) . 
major (Machairopus) 
marina (Cyclops) . 
marina (Eucheta) . 
Mecynocera . : 
mediterranea (Antaria) . 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., 


mediterranea (Oncza) 
Megacalanus . 
Metridia 

Metridiide 
Microsetella . 

minor (Calanus) 

5, (Cetochelus) 
minuta (Oithona) . 
mirabilis (Copilia) . 
Miracia 
Monops 
mossmani (Phyllopotopsylus 
Myodocopa 


nasutus (Rhincalanus) 
negligens (Acartia) 
nerii (Labidocera) . 

», (Pontia) 
nigromaculata (Garpiiia) 
norvegica (Microsetella) . 

¥ (Setella) . 


oblonga (Conchecia) 
obtusus (Corycus) 
oculata (Asterope) . 
Oithona 

Oithonidze 

Oncea . 

Onceeidze 

opalina (Ganphirin) 
ornata (Cytherura) . 
Orthopsyllus . 
Ostracoda 

ovalis (Coryczus) . 
ovatolanceolata (Sapphirina) 


pachydactyla (Candace) . 
(Candacia) 
papilliger (Heterochzta) 
(Heterorhabdus) 

Paracalanide . : 
Paracalanus . 
Paraconchecia 
Paradoxostoma 


” 


' Paralteutha 


Parastenhelia 
Parathalestris 
pavo (Calanus) 

», (Calocalauus) . 
Peltidiidze 
peregrina (Cythere) 


| perplexa (Dactylopusia) . 


VOL, XLYmIL, 591.) 


i 


Wo bo bb bo bd bo 
om © © © 


© 
amr © & bo 


w Ww bh bo bo 
mm 09 CO OD 
© 


346 


perspicax (Pontella) 

(Pontellopsis) . 
Philomedes 
Phyllopodopsyllus . 
piriei (Harpacticus) 
Pleuromamma 
Pleuromma 
plumata (Pontella) 

4) (Pontellina) 
plumifera (Oithona) 
plumulosus (Calanus) 

F (Calocalanus) 
Podocopa 
Pontella 
Pontellidz 
Pontellina 
Pontellopsis . 
Pontia . : 
Porcellidiidee . 
Porcellidium . 
porrecta (Concheecia) 

,,  (Cytherura) 
procera (Conchecia) 
propinquus (Calanus) 
proxima (Bradya) . 
proximus (Artotrogus) 
Psamathe 
Pseudanthessius 
Pseudothalestris 
Pseudozosime 


quadridens (Cythere) 


Racovitzanus 
regalis (Pontella) . 

,,  (Pontellopsis) 
reniformis (Xestoleberus) 
retusum (Paradoxostoma) 
Rhincalanus . 
robustior (Calanus) 

oe (Megacalanus) 
rosea (Microsetella) 
roseus (Harpacticus) 
rostratus (Coryczus) 
rottenburgi (Laophonte) 


salpze (Sapphirina) . 
Saphirella 
Sapphirina 
Sapphirinide 
Scolecithricidee 
Scolecithrix . 


DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


PAGE 
293 
293 
340 
317 
298 
288 
288 
293 
293 
322 
285 
285 
335 
292 
291 
293 
293 
292 
301 
301 
341 
341 
342 
282 
294 
327 
304 
325 


313 | 


294 


335 


286 
293 
293 
337 
339 
284 
282 
282 
296 


296 | 


332 
318 


329 
330 


328 | 


328 


286 | 


286 


sculptilis (Cytherura) 
scutellata (Clytemnestra) 
Seutellidium . 
securifer (Pontella) 
Setella . 
similis (Euryte) 

»  (Oithona) . 
simplex (Candace) . 

5»  (Candacia) 
simulans (Ameira) . 
speciosus (Coryczeus) 
spinifera (Evadne) 
spinipes (Pontella). 
spinirostris (Concheecia). 
stellata (Sapphirina) 
stylifer (Calanus) . 
stylifera (Temora) . 


suberites (Asterocheres) var. . 


subtenuis (Eucalanus) 


Temora. 
Temoride 
tenuicornis (Calanus) 
3 (Dactylopus). 
es (Diosaceus) . 
tergestina (Evadne) 
Thalestride . 
Thalestris : : 
Tisbe . é : : 
tisboides (Scutellidium) . 
turbinata (Temora) 
turbinatus (Calanus) 
typica (Paralteutha) 
typicus (Centropages) 


Undina. 
Undinula 


variabilis (Concheecia) 
venusta (Oncza) 
venustus (Corycus) 
villosa (Pontellopsis) 
violacea (Iehthyophorba) 
violaceus (Centropages) . 
vorax (Sapphirina) 
vulgaris (Calanus) . 

"5 (Undina) . 

»  (Undinula) 


| wiltoni (Laophonte) 


whitsoni (Laophontodes) 


Xestoleberis . 


(ROY. SOC, EDIN. TRANS,,-VOL, XLVIII., 592.) 


OHIA MUR wp 


a 
TE oO 


& 


—_—_ 
oo 


= 
—s 


Amr ow hd 


Parathalestris afjinis, sp. n. 


. Foot of fourth pair. 


Cyclopina belgica, Giesbrecht. 


. Female, dorsal view. 
. Antennule. 
. Antenna. 


. Maxilla. 

. Mandible and palp. 
. First maxilliped. 

. Second maxilliped. 
. Foot of first pair. 


5, second pair. 
», fourth pair. 
fifth pair. 


” 


. Abdomen and caudal rami. 


Euryte similis, sp. n. 


. Female, dorsal view. 


Bradya proxima, sp. n. 


. Female, side view. 
Antennule, female. 
Antenna. 
Mandible. 


. Second maxilliped. 


Foot of third pair. 

5 fourth pair. 

» fifth pair, female. 
. Abdomen and caudal rami. 


Ectinosoma antarctica, Giesbrecht, 


. Antennule, female. 
. Antenna. 


. First maxilliped (a); second maxilliped (0). Fig. 


. Foot of fifth pair, female. 


Parathalestris clausi (Norman). 


. Second maxilliped. 


Idomene forficata, Philippi. 


. Female, seen dorsally. 
Outer ramus of antenna. 
. Second maxilliped. 

. Foot of first pair. 

5 fourth pair. 

5, fifth pair, male. 


(ROY. Soc. 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 


Prats I. 
Fig. 15, Antennule. 
», 16. Antenna. 
5, 17. First maxilliped. 
,, 18. Second maxilliped. 
,, 19. Foot of first pair. 
ay PAD), A second pair. 
eels - fourth pair. 
ees) Afth pair: 
Tisbe gracilipes, sp. 1. 
Fig. 23. Antennule, female. 
,» 24. Antenna. 
», 25. Second maxilliped, 
» 26. Foot of first pair. 
yy as 5 fourth pair. 
28: » fifth pair. 
,, 29. Abdomen and caudal rami. 
Puate IT, 
Fig. 15. Foot of first pair. 
los second pair. 
so wots » fifth pair, male. 
Dactylopusia frigida, sp. n. 
Fig. 18. Antennule, female. 
, 19. Antenna. 
, 20. Second maxilliped. 
,» 21. Foot of first pair. 
» 22. ss fourth pair. 
3) CRE » fifth pair, female. 
24, Abdomen and caudal rami. 


“Tm O1 


bo po bw bw bo 
io2) 


Puate IIL. 


Fig. 


EDIN, TRANS., VOL, 


s© 


Dactylopusia perplexa, sp. D. 


. Antennule, female. 


. Antenna. 


. Mandible and palp. 
. Foot of first pair. 
fifth pair, female. 


” 


Parathalestris coatst, sp. n. 
. Female, seen dorsally. 
. Antennule, female. 
. Antenna. 
. Mandible and palp. 
. Second maxilliped. 


2. Foot of first pair. 


XLVI, 593.) 


347 


348 


Fig. 


bo 


14. 


oF wh Re 


Whee EP 


DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Parathalestris coatsi—contd. 


Foot of second pair. 
.. fourth pair. 
,» fifth pair, female. 


Abdomen and caudal rami. 


Parathalestris affinis, sp. 0. 


. Female, seen dorsally. 
. Antennule, female. 

. Antenna. 

. Mandible. 

. Maxilla. 


Idomene forficata, Philippi. 


. Antennule, female. 


Saphirella abyssicola, 'T. Scott. 


. Female, seen dorsally. 


Antennule, female. 


. Mandible (a), maxilla (0). 


Poreellidium affine, Quidor. 
Female, seen dorsally. 
Male, seen dorsally. 
Antennule, female. 
Antenna. 
Foot of first pair. 

,, fifth pair, female. 

, fifth pair, male. 


. Abdomen and caudal rami, female. 


male. 


” ” 


Machairopus major, sp. 0. 


Female, dorsal view. 


Phyllopodopsyllus mossmant, sp. 1. 


. Female (@ ), and male (4 ), side view. 
. Antennule, female. 
. Antennule, male. 

. Antenna. 

. Mandible and palp. 


Second maxilliped. 


. Foot of first pair. 


second pair, female. 
second pair, male. 
fourth pair. 

fifth pair, female. 
fifth pair, male. 


. Abdomen and caudal rami, female. 


Fig. 


Puate IV. 
Fig. 


PuatEe V. 


Fig. 


‘ig. 16. 
Wee 
18. 
i), 
20. 
21. 


lo b> bo bo 
ee OO bo 


ei 


2 bt bw 
DAD 


2. First maxilliped. 
. Second maxilliped. 
. Foot of first pair. 


fifth pair. 


” 


Tisbe austrina, sp. 0. 


. Antennule, female. 


Antenna. 


28. Second maxilliped. 


22. 


or 


oo op 09 oo DS bt bh bp 
ONHFODAND 


14. 


ig. 15. 


. Foot of first pair. 
30. 


fifth pair, female. 


tb} 


. Antennule, female. 
. Mandible and palp. 
. Manilla. 

18. 
. Foot of first pair. 


Second maxilliped. 


second pair. 
third pair. 
fourth pair. 


,, fifth pair, female. 


. Abdomen and caudal rami. 


Parastenhelia antarctica, sp. 0. 


. Antennule, female. 
. Mandible. 

. First maxilliped. 

. Second maxilliped. 
. Foot of first pair. 


second pair. 
fourth pair. 
fifth pair, female. 


” 


” 


” 


. Abdomen and caudal rami. 


Abdomen and caudal rami, male. 


Harpacticus piriet, sp. 0. 


Foot of fifth pair, female. 


Psamathe longicauda, Philippi. 


Female, seen dorsally. 
Antennule, female. 
Antenna. 

First maxilliped. 

Second maxilliped. 

Foot of first pair. 

fifth pair, female. 


” 


(ROY, SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIIL., 594.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


1 


Dactylopusia perplexa, sp. n. 
. Second maxilliped. 


2. Foot of fourth pair. 


g> Ge 


OR 


eg Ree 


PARA we 


Asterocheres suberites, Giesbrecht, var. 
Antennule, female. 
Antenna. 
First maxilliped. 
Second maxilliped. 
Siphon. 
Foot of first pair. 
»» second pair. 
5, fourth pair. 


. Abdomen and caudal rami, 


Psamathe fucicola, sp. n. 


. Antennule, female. 
. Antenna. 


Laophonte rottenburgi, sp. 1. 
. Antennule, female. 
Second maxilliped. 
Foot of first pair. 
third pair. 
» fifth pair, female. 
Abdomen and caudal rami. 


” 


Laophonte wiltoni, sp. n. 


. Female, dorsal view. 
Antennule, female. 
. Antenna. 
Second maxilliped. 
Foot of first pair. 

5, second pair. 
» fourth pair. 
fifth pair. 


” 


. Abdomen and caudal rami. 


Puate VI. 


Fig. 


Puate VII, 


Fig. 


or oo be 


bo pw wd vw bb b&b 
os 


bo 
oN 


bo b> bw bo bo 
= 


io) 


Piate VIII. 


Laophontodes whitsoni, sp. 0. 


. Female, dorsal view. 
Antennule, female. 

. Antenna. 

Second maxilliped. 

. Foot of first pair. 

second pair. 
fourth pair. 

fifth pair, female. 


Fig. 


” 


oF 
10. 
wits 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
Nf 
18. 
19% 


> 


cS Oo 


ey 


. Mandible and palp. 


Maxilla. 


. Foot of first pair. 


5, fourth pair. 
fifth pair. 


” 


. Abdomen and caudal rami. 


Machairopus australis, sp. n. 


. Antennule, female. 
. Antenna. 

. Mandible and palp. 
. First maxilliped. 

. Second maxilliped. 

. Foot of first pair. 


5, second pair. 
», fourth pair. 
, fifth pair. 


Laophonte exigua, sp. n. 


. Antennule, female. 
. Antenna. 
- Foot of first pair. 


5» second pair. 
5, fourth pair. 
, fifth pair, female. 


. Abdomen and caudal rami. 


Ametra simulans, sp. 0. 


. Antennule, female. 
. Second maxilliped. 
. Foot of first pair. 


5, fourth pair. 


» fifth pair, female. 


. Abdomen and caudal rami. 


Pseudozosime brownt, sp. n. 
Female, dorsal view. 

5 side view. 
Antennule, female. 
Antenna, 

Maxilla. 

First maxilliped. 

Second maxilliped. 

Foot of first pair. 

second pair. 
fourth pair. 

fifth pair, female. 


” 


” 


” 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 595.) 


349 


350 


DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Harpacticus fucicolus, sp. n. 


. Second maxilliped. 


Fig. 20. Antennule, female. », 23, Foot of first pair. 
5» 21. Antenna. sya 5, fifth pair, female. 
Puare IX. 
Pseudothalestris intermedia, sp. n. Fig. 15. Second maxilliped. 
Fig. 1. Antennule, female. », 16. Foot of first pair. 
» 2. Second maxilliped. Slits », second pair, inner ramus. 
, 3 Foot of second pair, male; thirdinnerramus — » 18. », third pair, inner ramus. 
of left foot. xy eh ., fourth pair. 
» 4 Fifth pair, female. » 20. ,, fifth pair, female. 
eels ; third pair, male, inner ramus. 
Pseudothalestris assimilis, var. antarctica. a , fifth pair, male. 
Fig. 5. Second maxilliped. 
» 6. Foot of first pair. Amphiascus fucicolus, sp. n. 
te hie 5, second pair, male. Fig. 23. Antennule, female. 
, 8. Foot of fifth pair, male. » 24. Antenna. 
,, 9. Abdomen and caudal rami. ,, 25. Second maxilliped. 
., 26. Foot of first pair. 
Orthopsyllus linearis, Claus. Bor ,, fourth pair, 
Fig. 10. Female, dorsal view. - OS , fifth pair, female. 
5, ll. Antennule, female. 
» 12. Antenna. Idomene forficata, Philippi. 
», 18. Mandible and palp. Fig. 29. Foot of fifth pair, female. 
», 14. First maxilliped. 
Puate X. 
Alteutha dubia, sp. n. Fig. 13. Foot of fourth pair. 
Fig. 1. Female, seen dorsally. » 14. » fifth pair, female. 
,, 2, Antennule, female. ,, 15. Abdomen and caudal rami. 
» oo Antenna. y 
,, 4. Second maxilliped. Paralteutha typica, gen. et sp. n. 
, 5. Foot of first pair. Fig. 16. Female, dorsal view. 
Pr nnG: ,, fourth pair. , 17. Antennule, male. 
ase als », fifth pair, female. ,, 18. Antenna. 
», 8. Abdomen and caudal rami. ,, 19. Mandible and palp, male. 
» 20. Second maxilliped. 
Alteutha austrina, sp. n. » 21. Foot of first pair. 
Fig. 9. Female, dorsal view. od 5, fourth pair. 
,, 10. Antennule, female. eee ay ,, fifth pair, female. 
4, 11. Second maxilliped. », 24. » fifth pair, male. 
», 12. Foot of first pair. ,, 25. Abdomen and caudal ramus. 
Puate XI. 
Artotrogus proximus, sp. 0. Laophonte australis, sp. n. 
Fig. 1. Female, dorsal view. Fig. 10. Female, side view. 
» 2 Antennule, female. , 11. Antennule, female. 
» 9 Antenna. » 12. Antenna. 
» 4. Mandible. ,, 138. Second maxilliped. 
Os) Waxallas ,, 14. Foot of first pair. 
» 6. First maxilliped. pemolias 5, second pair. 
», 7. Second maxilliped. elG: 5, fifth pair, female. 
» 8. Foot of fourth pair. ,, 17. Abdomen and caudal rami. 
9, a fifth pair, female. 


(ROY. soc, 


EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 596.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH 


Harpacticus ptriet, sp. n. 


NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 


Fig. 22. Foot of second pair. 
5 ,, third pair. 
5, fourth pair. 
. Abdomen and caudal rami. 


Prats XII. 


. Maxilla. 

. First maxilliped. 

. Second maxilliped. 
19. Foot of first pair. 


Fig. 


0: », second pair. 
cil », fourth pair. 
9» 22 ,, fifth pair. 


Lichomolgus fucicola, Brady. 


(St) 


. Antennule, female. 

. Antenna, 

. Foot of fourth pair. 

. Abdomen and caudal rami. 


or 


bo bw bw bo 
ree 


cer) 


Pseudothalestris intermedius, sp. 0. 


Fig. 18. Antennule, female. 
. 19, Antenna. 
,, 20. Second maxilliped. 
,, 21. Foot of first pair. 
Pseudanthessius fucicolus, sp. 1. 
Fig. 1. Female, dorsal view. 
, 2. Antennule, female. 
» o Antenna. 
,» 4. Mandible. 
», 0. Maxilla. 
, 6. First maxilliped. 
» 7. Second maxilliped. 
,, 8. Foot of first pair. 
+ (DE , third pair. 
LO: 5, fourth pair. 
eh ll », fifth pair. 
,, 12. Abdomen and caudal rami, female. 
,, 13. Abdomen and caudal rami, male, a= fifth 
foot. 
Dactylopusia ferriert, sp. n. 
Fig. 14. Female, side view. 


15. Antennule, female. 


Fig. 27. Foot of first pair. 
» 28.  ,, second pair. 
» 29 4, fifth pair. 


Prate XIII. 


Fig. 1. Calanopia americana, Dahl. 
” 2. ” ” ” 
” 3. ” ” ? 
” 4. ” ” ” 
” 5. ” ” ” 
” 6. ” ” ” 
» 7. Pleuromamma gracile (Claus). 
tk - 
” 9. ” ” ” 
” 10. ” ” ” 


5, Ll. Clytemnestra scutellata, Dana, 2. 


” 12. ” ” ” 
5, 13. Dysgamus atlanticus, Stp. and Ltk., ¢. 


var. Hsterleyi, nov. 


Antennule, ¢. 
Foot of first pair. 


», fourth pair. 
» fifth pair, 9. 
7A fifth pair, ¢. 


Abdomen and caudal rami, ¢. 


Fifth pair of feet, ?. 
Foot of second pair, ?, basal part. 
z Fifth pair of feet, 2. 
a Abdomen, ?, side view. 

Terminal joints of antennule. 

Last abdominal segment and caudal rami. 
Dorsal view. 


Side view. 
Side view. 
Post abdomen. 
Side view. 
Post abdomen. 
Side view. 
Post abdomen. 


Antennule, 


, 14. Hvadne tergestina, Claus. Side view. 
“be . spinifera, P. KK. Miiller. 

, 16. Philomedes assimilis, Brady, @ . 

ay Slit 0 53 3 

» 18. Asterope australis, Brady, ?. 

” 19, ” ” ” 

20: 5 oculata, ss 

my alle i > ‘ 

5, 22. Euconchecia chierchix, G. W. Miiller, 2. Side view. 
ee Pe 5 3 . 

» 24. 35 a 


Post abdomen. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS., VOL. XLVIII., 597.) 


352 DR THOMAS SCOTT ON THE 


Fig. 25. Conchecia spinirostris, Claus, g. Side view. 


fo} 

= ABs 3 ‘ - Post abdomen. 

oabals , procera, G. W. Miiller, g. Side view. 

ish 5 5) 5 Post abdomen. = 
,, 29. Halocypris inflata, Dana, 9. Side view. 

i alt a - 5 Antennule. 

mols 5 .s s Post abdomen. 

ious $5 globosa, Claus, 9. Side view. 


PrateE XIV. 


Fig. 1. Macrocypris maculata, G. S. Brady. Side view. 

: 3 5 is Seen from above. 
. Cythere latibrosa, sp. n. Side view. 
45 Pe sn Dorsal view. 
PRCUULOT:CLUCO ens Side view. 

a is Dorsal view. 
foveolata, Brady, g. Side view. 
5 yy i Dorsal view. 
5  tnornata, sp.n. Side view. 


SCH MAA MPR ww 


sk 7 4 i Dorsal view. 
Freulle » peregrina ,, Side view. 

oy WA A . 6 Dorsal view. 
eeullios ,,  foveolata, Brady, —. Side view. 

ay as Fr 3 Fr Dorsal view. 
lbs »  quadridens, sp.n. Side view. 
UG. 0 3 é Dorsal view. 

,, 17. Xestoleberis reniformis, Brady. Side view. 
fo USS . A $ Dorsal view. 
», 19. Cytherura ornata, sp. n. Side view. 

a PALE 35 es ss Dorsal view. 

a lle 5 a A Ventral view, 
ee} *s porrecta ,, Side view. 

3 28: " es is Dorsal view. 

» 24. £ sculptilis, sp. n. Side view. 

py 2 7 5 59 Dorsal view. 

,, 26. Paradoxostoma retusum, Brady. Side view. 
HW 2 55 antarcticum, sp. n. Side view. 
mp eek 3 a 3 Dorsal view. 
a 55 leve, sp.n. Side view. 

Fy Cul < "5 - Dorsal view. 


Note.—I am indebted to my son, Andrew Scott, A.L.S., for the drawings mentioned below—viz., all 
the figures on Plate V. except figure 15 ; figures 1-19 on Plate VIII. ; and figures 1-9 on Plate XI. Also 
for the undernoted figures on Plate XIV., viz., figures 3-8, 13-16, and 19-23. 


(ROY. SOC. EDIN. TRANS,, VOL. XLVIII., 598.) 


ENTOMOSTRACA OF THE SCOTTISH NATIONAL ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION. 353 


ADDENDA. 


Oithona frigida, Giesh., Exped, Antarct. Belge, “Copep.,” p. 29, pl. vi. In a Scotia gathering, 0-200 
fathoms, lat. 69° 22’ S., 26° 36’ W., 28th February 1903, Station 273. 

Lepeophthetrus nordmanni, M.-Edw. 

Cecrops latreillti, Leach. 

These two parasitic Copepods were obtained on a short Sunfish, Orthagoriscus mola (Lin.), captured in 
lat. 39° 1’ S., long. 53° 40’ W., the first on the skin, the other on the gills, lst January 1903, Station 107. 

Alebion carcharix, Kroyer. This species was obtained on a shark, Carcharias, sp., captured in 
lat. 9° 23’ N., long. 25° 31’ W., on 5th December 1902, Station 34. 

One or two specimens of Labidocera lubbocki, Giesb., were obtained in a gathering from the South 
Atlantic, but the exact locality is somewhat uncertain. 


(ROY. 800, EDIN. TRANS., VOL, XLVIII., 599.) 


on) by Sopa 


ate er ie \ 


Lave 
ceo De 


Bay eik oy ay 


Lae AY. } it 


piryee | - - en) ae 
AD A lacy ir 5 
A Sales lf 


ely’ 


Scot. Nat. Ant. Exp. Vole Vir 
Scorr: ‘“Scoria” EnromMosTrRAcA.—PLatTE I. 


T. Scott, del. 


B 
, 


Scot. Nat. Ant. Exp. 


Scorr 


Vol. VI. 


Scot. Nat. Ant. Exp. 


“Scotia” ENToMosTRACA.—PLATE III. 


Scott : 


T. Scott, del 


mi 


Scot. Nat. Ant. Exp. 


Scorr: ‘Scotia ” ENToMosTRACA.—PLATE IV. 


T. Scott, del. 


Vol. VI. 


Scot. Nat. Ant. Exp. 


“Scorra ” ENTOMOSTRACA.—PLATE V. 


Scott : 


MS Farcane & ERsmine. Lith. Eoin® 


Fig.{5, T.Scott, del. 
others, A.Scott, del 


Vol. VI. 


Scot. Nat. Ant. Exp. 


“Scotia” ENTOMOSTRACA—PLATE VI. 


Scott: 


— ys 


M*Farcane & Ersnine. Lite. Eorn® 


T. Scott, del. 


ee 
aC 


iP 


“ Scotia” ENTOMOSTRACA—PLATE VII. 


Scort : 


T. Scott, del 


Vol. VI. 


Scot. Nat. Ant. Exp. 


“Scotia” ENTOMOSTRACA.—PLATE VIII. 


Scott: 


SE 
BE 
COS 


te ea 
PRT qge ics [i 
EM Rica Ate 


<< | 
, ss cee, 


M'FARtANe & ERsnine. Lith. Eoin? 


Figs. 1-19, A. Scorr, del. 


Figs. 20-24, T. Scott, del. 


“ Scotia” ENTOMOSTRACA—PLATE IX. 


ScorT 


T. Scott, del 


Erskine, Litw. Epix 


E 


Mt FaRLane & 


T. Scott, del 
M*Farcane & Ensmine. Lith. Eoin™ 


_ x 
a 


Scot. Nat. Ant. Exp. Vol. VL 
Scott: ‘‘ScorrA” ENToMosTRACA.—PLaTE XI. 


Figs 1-9, A. Scott, del 
others T. Scott, del. MS FARCANE & ERsnine, Lith. Eorn™ 


Scot. Nat. Ant. Exp. Volo Vir 


Scorr: ‘“Scorra” ENTOMOSTRACA.—PLATE XII. 


Scot. Nat. Ant. Exp. Vol. VI. 


Scorr: “Scoria” ENTromosrRAca.—PLaTeE XIII. 


MS Farcane & Exsnine. Lita, Epin® 


5 , Figs 3-8, 13-16, 19-23. A. Scorr, del 
7 others T Scorr, det 


MS Farcane & Ersnine, Lite. Eorn™ 


i